Segtahinae coke a 





- " oS: “ 
iri at foe rede 
= " Ere OR eter 





oe 
Bl | 
= 
< 
“= 
Na 
f=) | 
< 








ay 
ves 
Ne 

















Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2007 with funding from 
Microsoft Corporation 


httos://archive.org/details/beginnersgreekboOOfrisrich 





A MAP TO THE Al 





28 26 a = = 






















us rol oe 
ae 
Mt: ror Wl Hai neh Bie 


ny’ ci 
ann anynaniryasye osyp Sl 


< 





Ri ysis 
crac ba 


aa 
anil ist 


ne ms 
pity hit arts oy 









in 









ie, Pam 2 
aie 
2 

Cc AP 


Adib myttin S 1A 


pote 
Siege 














. tick oS ga Tatia L 
I Sy ocala ae Gaystri CamPXY 


wae \ Tyla pup 7 
ate Merioeurre 






Celene 





gy) hn! z 
ayy, rk. 





Md 


A, %, i a HIN OW Nanay 
GG 





Crete 





34 





Pi ee. ati - 


The Route of the Anabasis, 
The Route of the Katabasis. 


—_—_— 
































26 28 7 ee TE ae 





IS OF XENOPHON. 




















ae 
38 4.0 4-2 46 
oo a 
Phasis FI. 
ee age se aio 
or e aera sd 2: Sd 
: ‘\) 
iy 
ot a tyo , Dy " 
“ ” '~ Wow 
Eg i = poe 
En oe) pvges. F “ +0) 
a) : = . H | 
Pate L = “4, 4 oa us ? = | 
DOC 1 eo aaah : arat | 
ne — Win nape PAR “an | ‘5 
1 CL get 
er | 
Y Ss 
v3 Luphr ak 7 


gin 


res, Mist 


7 


Bway, hare A's 
| 





Iss / & & 
By = bk n° S Mespi 
y 3 Lariss 
Z Berea 
% ° & O 
z apsacu > Coen 
| 3 s 
2 Pa x % ¥ 7 
Zz 
: 9 * N dy 
#3 ; 
a ° ios a ¢ 
wie & C 15° 
Rae 3 
ty 
: Charmande 
1 °Damascus o 
4 
® 


36 GREENWICH. _38 


























par 
Se ee 
tLuUK FNG CO BOSTON 








iva 


eet 





THE 


EGINNER’S GREEK BOOK. 





BY 


IVORY FRANKLIN FRISBEE, Pu.D. 


(UNIVERSITY OF THE CITY or New Yor), 
_ PRINCIPAL OF THE LATIN ScHogt, Bares CoLiece. 


In all instruction, clearness, association, system, 
and method must rule. — HERBART. 


EDW. E. BABB AND CO., 
Boston, U.S. A. 


1898. 


Copyright, 1898, 


By Ivory FRANKLIN FRISBEE, 





All rights reserved. — 


he? - 
+\- Sr 


‘er 


Gniversity Brees : 


Joun Wiison anv Son, CAMBRIDGE, U.S. A. 


PREFACE. 


HE Begcinner’s GREEK Book is an attempt to apply 
the principles of pedagogy to the preparation for 
reading Xenophon’s Anabasis. It is complete in itself, 
and is intended to furnish the first year’s work. The book 
is fully illustrated, printed in large type, and in every way 
made legible and attractive. The leading principles of 
the language, the inflectional forms, fundamental rules of 
syntax, exercises and vocabularies, are given in a manner 
at once clear and most convenient for the learner’s use. 
The full scientific treatment of these forms and rules, is 
accompanied by brief critical observations especially suited 
to the needs of the secondary pupil. Although by this 
manner of treatment and style of typography, the number 
of pages is necessarily increased, the pupil’s facility in the 
study of Greek, is thereby greatly augmented. 

The subject matter of the book, taken mainly from the 
first chapters of the Anabasis, contains only that which is 
of prime importance in the subsequent acquisition of Greek. 
While avoiding on the one hand, the meagreness of the 
epitomes, and on the other, the unassimilated material of 
many text books for the secondary school, its aim is com- 
pleteness. It gives a full treatment of transliteration, a 
brief scientific exposition of the fundamental uses of the 
prepositions, a practical treatment of word formation, of 
Grimm’s Law, and of word grouping. While making 
provision in each lesson for constant reviews, it assures 


360202 


vill PREFACE. 


The future of the vowel, mute, and liquid verbs is intro- 
duced in order as one schema. The first and second aorists 
are given together, and. the first and second perfects. The 
inflection of etué has been placed with the -o verbs, and the 
regular -w: verbs have been brought forward and developed 
with the subjunctive and optative moods. The verbs are 
fully classified and repeatedly reviewed. 

Special care has been directed toward the development 
of the pupil’s understanding together with his memory. 
All of the material is presented according to its logical 
sequence, and, by the critical observations, the pupil is 
led to classify and assimilate it by its necessary relations. 
Thus in all of his work, he is led to observe, to think, and 
to form his own conclusions. Further, not only do the dif- 
erent subjects follow a logical sequence, but each subject 
is developed in the same manner. Accordingly many of 
the leading principles of the language, as the euphony 
of vowels and of eonsonants, and the syntactical rules, 
have been reduced to their simplest analysis and expressed 
in the most concise language consistent with clearness. 
Attention is called to the natural treatment of the future and 
aorist of liquid verbs, of the second aorists and perfects, 
of the infinitive and participle, and how the exposition of 
one subject by proper*review references, prepares the mind 
of the student for the rapid assimilation of kindred matter, 
as it is shown in the correlation of the pronominal forms 
of the vowel declensions. 

The teacher will be interested to note the simplified 
treatment of the -w verbs and of the great terrors to the 
average pupil, the subjunctive and optative moods, condi- 
tional, final, and temporal clauses, and indirect discourse. 
Not only are the hypothetical notions of the subjunctive 


PREFACE. 1X 


and optative deferred until the direct expressions of the 
language have been mastered, but the simple uses of these 
moods are made to prepare for the understanding of the 
more complex, and these in turn, through the conditions 
and other dependent clauses, are made a preparation for 
the most complex, indirect discourse. 

Again, as with the paradigms so with the principles of 

syntax, only the best types have been selected. Whenever 
they offer any difficulty, they have been presented in a series 
of special examples. While they have been taken intact 
from the Anabasis, they are expressed in familiar language 
and should be thoroughly committed to memory. The 
more obvious constructions have been presented with the 
general exercises, and afford an additional incentive to 
the scholar for careful and thorough study. 
_ The exercises of the book, which have been selected 
especially for their freshness and their ease in assimila- 
tion, are taken, as a whole, intact from the Anabasis, and 
are written therefore in the form that will commonly 
appear in the pupil’s later reading. While they include 
regularly sentences for review, they are graded for both 
oral and written work, and it is recommended that at the 
beginning, at least, they be taken in this manner. The 
English exercises have been subordinated to the Greek. 
These consist, as a rule, of one half of the latter, and are 
chiefly intended to apply the:rules of construction. 

As a supplement to these exercises, selections from the 
Anabasis for sight reading and retroversion have been 
introduced early, and continued at frequent intervals 
throughout the book. Selections from other works and 
authors have been excluded, since, through their rare words 
and miscellaneous authorship, they too often distract the 


octe : 
| i - 





- 
’ bee 
lets 
» aes 
3 ° 





XIV. 


XV. 


XVI. 


CONTENTS. 


GRAMMATICAL INTRODUCTION . . .» + «© © « « 
Ture ALPHABET. « . 


SYLLABLES, PRONUNCIATION. . . . +. 
Quantity, ACCENT. . . Siempre tie 
Person, NumBer, GENDER, Caan Rae GS ow 


Toe ARTICLE ... . > 

Present Inpicative Active, Meshigans AND cnc 
OF Av@— Accent of Verbs — Syntax is aii 
Verb, and Object. ». « «+ . “V3 

Feminines or First aR ST SY of Mouse 

Mascutines or First Deciension — Syntax of the 
Vocative. » « + Se ymenk oud Z 

Tur Suconp DeciEnsion so fille Neuter Plural as 
Subject — Indirect Object. 

ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DxucLENSION apical of 
— Agreement of — Predicate Nouns .« 

TRANSLITERATION — Appositive — Accusative of Retnd 
of Time or Space. 3 

EssENTIALS FOR Leaicniin > Bieebilice s>-Tnaliticn + 
Dative of Possessor — Reapvine Lesson: The Pal- 
aces of Cyrus and Artaxerzes 

IMPERFECT OF hia — Augment — Pewee Infinitioe 
Active, Middle, and Passive — Uses not in Indirect 
Diseaered POOL oe ane? AALS 


Review: Alphabet — Accentuation — sdlltcatices of 
the Vowel Declension — Ferbs — <heae — eal 
Translations. . ° 

FonpaMentaL UszEs oF Penrenteokin: P; sbestiowd 
with Oblique Cases — Dative, with Compound Words, 
with Special Verbs ; 

Contract VerBs — Contraction of Visits — Dative 
of Time . 


39-44 


44-49 


49-53 


53-59 


59-63 


X1V 


XVII. 


XVIII. 
XIX. 
XX. 
XXI. 


XXII. 


XXIII. 


XXIV. 
XXV. 


XXVI. 


XXVII. 


XXVIII. 
XXIX. 


XXX. 


XXXII. 


CONTENTS. 


Contract Nouns AND ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL 
Deciension —- Uses of adrés — Dative with 


Adjectives . . + ae 
DEMONSTRATIVE AND pes ces Patan — 
Syntax of 


Evurnony or ConsONANTS — aris AND eee 
Inpic: anD Inrin., AcTIVE AND MIDDLE . 

Consonant DeciEension — Dative of Advantage . 

Consonant Decienston, Variations: Liguid 
and Lingual Stems— Gender of Consonant 
Stems — Dative of Union, etc. 

ParticiPLes, Present, Future, Aorist, hound 
AND MippLE — ATTRIBUTIVE AND CrRcuUM- 
STANTIAL PARTICIPLES ete 

PARTICIPLES OF ConTRACT VERBS — SUPPLEMEN- 
TARY PARTICIPLE . 

Future anp Aorist or Liquip atic ders 
AND MippLe — Genitive of Agent — Cognate 
Accusative . . . * PEs 

ADJECTIVES OF THE Ceasers Deciansiers: 
Two Accusatives with Verbs of Naming, Choos- 
ing, etc., and of Asking, Demanding, etc. . 

Review: Prepositions — Contraction — Demon- 
strative Pronouns — Future and Aorist Active 
and Middle — Consonant Declension — Syntax 
— Sight Translations. . . Ae : 

Contract Nouns or tHE THIRD Didiaaned 
Stems in t-, v-, and ev-— Present Indicative 
Of eid «sR ae : 

ADJECTIVE STEMS IN v OF THE THIRD Devinn 
— Irregular Adjectives — Imperfect of eipi . 

Tenses Denotinc Completed Action — Mute 
Themes — Reduplication — Future of eipi 

Contract Nouns-aAnp ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD 
DeciEension — Stems in o-— Accusative of 
Specification — Dative of Respect — Genitive 
with words of Fullness ‘ Nee 

Aorist anD Future Passive Sericaawin Taciis: 
TIVE, AND ParticI1pLE—TZease Systems—Prin- 
cipal Parts of a Verb — Adverbial Accusative 


PAGE. 


64-68 
68-72 
72-78 
79-83 


83-87 





88-93 


94-97 
98-102 


102-106 


106-115 


116-120 
121-124 
125-131 


131-137 


137-142 


XXXII. 


- XXXII. 


SXXXIV. 


> XX. 
XXXVI. 


_XXXVIL. 


XXXVIUII. 


XXXIX. 


XL. 


XLI. 





CONTENTS. 


Deronent Verss—IrrecutarR Nouns — Syx- 
copated Nouns inep- ». +. + « ‘ 
ATTRIBUTIVE AND PREDICATE GENITIVES. 
ComPaRISON OF ADJECTIVES—IRREGULAR AD- 
JECTIVES — DECLENSION OF mAcio@v — Geni- 
tive of Comparison— Dative of Manner — 
Reapine Lesson: The Arrival of Cyrus's 
Fleet . ; 
PersonaL Pronouns — penetrate WITH Wises 
REFLEXIVE, RECIPROCAL, AND PossesstvE Pro- 
nouns — Genitives of Source, —o and 
Cause. * ; ‘ 
THE IMPERATIVE leat. ahcssiia! AND Pas- 
sive — Negatives — Commands and Prohibi- 
tions — Genitive of Price, Time — Genitive 
with Adjectives. Fat 
IMPERATIVE ACTIVE AND Siedler OF Ciarted: 
Verss — Story of the Anabasis — READING 
Lesson : Accession of Artaxerxes . ; 
THE INTERROGATIVE tis, INDEFINITE Tis AND 
éotis — Assimilation of the Relative 
Noumerats: Carprats, Orprnats — Declension 
of «is, 8v0, tpeis, and rérrapes — READING 
Lesson: 4A Halt and Numbering at Celae- 
WaT.) Wrokied ye agree BN res 
Review: Contract Nouns and Adjectives of the 
Consonant Declension — Tenses of Completed 
Action, Passive Voice, etc..— Comparison of 
Adjectives — Pronouns — — — Sight 
Translations i , 
FoRMATION AND Gbide isivsan OF fe 
Syntax of Adverbs — Two Accusatives with 
Verbs of Doing, etc. mie ner 
Formation or Worps — Sight Translations .« 
DrNoMINATIVE VERBS—CompounD Worps 
Sight Translations. . «. » 


Grimuw’s Law— Worp Grovurine—R. dy 
Sight Translations . aa 

Present System or VerBs — VERBS OF THE 
First Crass — R. dpy-- . . : 


XV 


PAGE. 


142-147 
147-150 


151-157 


157-162 


162-166 


166-170 


170-174 


175-178 


179-183 


183-189 


190-194 
194-200 
201-204 
204-209 


209-213 


Xvl 


XLVII. 


XLVIII. 


XLIX. 


LI. 


LII. 


LITI. 


LIV. 


LV. 


LVI. 


LVIl. 


LVIII. 


CONTENTS. 


VERBS OF THE Seconp Ciass—SxEconp AoRIst 
SYSQEM .cisces. cs Gis = he ‘ 
First anp Srconp Pevinen SystEMs — Attic 

Reduplication — R. Bod- ee 
SuBsJuNcTIVE AND Optative ACTIVE OF @ a 
— Supsunctive or Hxuortation, or Pro- 
HIBITION, OF DELIBERATION —QOprTaTIVE OF 
Wisnine — PorentiaL Optative — Tenses of 
the ‘Subjunctive and Optative ; re 
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE OF Solid > igen nc: 
TIVE AND Optative, MIDDLE aNp Passive 
OF @ VEeRBS—PuRPOsE CLAUSES — OBsEcT 
Cause aFrtER VERBS OF FEARING . : 
Fourure anp First Aorist Systems or Mute 
Verss — Onsect CLAUSES WITH Om@s AFTER 
Verps oF Striving — VERBS OF THE THIRD 
Cirass—R. mO-. . . . itt tensa 
Future anp First Aorist Scotus or LiquiIp 
VerBs (continued) — Liquip VEerBs oF THE 
Fouvrta Crass — Accusative after: ree 
MENG be fink Wade 


. Furure ann First ti SystEMs oF Mews Tanne 


(continued) — Mure Vers or tHE FourtH 
Crass — Denominative Verbs of the Fourth 
Class — Summary of Buplonic Changes of Con- 
sonants before1— R.dw- ». « « « , 
Reevtar VERBS IN pt: ftornus — GROUP fddos 
Verss oF THE Firta CLass—Prrrect MIDDLE 
System or VowEL Verps— R. ixc-— Reapine 
Lesson: Cyrus plans to become King ste 
ReevuLaR VERBS IN pu: Sido — R. d50-— ReapDine 
Lesson: Siege of Miletus . 
VERBS OF THE SixtH CLass— THE Desai. AND 
Szconp Aorist Passive Systems —¢ asAug- 
- ment or Reduplication—e changed to a— R. 
yvo- - e . . >) . ety * ° me cite ° 
ConpitionaL Sentences: Simpte Parricuar; 
Contrary To Fact; Wisurs UnatraInep — 
R. «aA-— Reapine Lesson: Zhe Army of 
Clearchus . CP ie a: Se 


PAGE, 


213-217 


217-221 


221-227 
228-234 
235-238 


238-241 


241-245 
246-251 


252-257 


257-262 
262-268 


268-273 


LIX. 


LX. - 


LXI. 


LXII. 


LXIII. 
LXIV. 


LXV. 


LXVI. 


LXVII. 


LXVIIL 


CONTENTS. 


SUBJUNCTIVE AND OptaTIVE oF Contract VERBS 
— Genera Conpitions — Grour dua 

Furure Conpitrions, More anp Less cel 
PAR RD tes ye 8 aii L ot el Te 

Verss or THE EigntnH Criass— REeLativeE anp 
TemporaL Ciauses— R. pax- — Reapine 
Lesson: Forces of Aristippus 4 

IRREGULAR VERBS IN pu: éipi, Gypi — Gamerite- 
TIONS FoR ConpDiTions — RxLativeE CLavsEs 
or Purross —Cavsk anp Resutt — InpIRECT 
Discourse— Tue Inrrinitive in Inpirect Dis- 
coursE—R. ga- — Reavine Lesson : Forces 
assemble at Sardis . . . 

ReeutakR VERBS IN pe: TiOnus— - VERBS OF THE 
SeventH Crass — R. mdra-— Reapine Les- 
son: Character and Number of the Greek Forces 

VERBS IN pu: Seixvipu, ejus— VERBS OF THE Firra 
Crass (continued) — Reapine Lesson: Cyrus 
begins his Marchinland. . . .. . ° 

Review: Formation of Adverbs ; of Sletintives ; 
of Verbs — Grimm’s Law — Subjunctive and 
Optative — Conditional Sentences — Result 

Clauses, ete. — Verbs in yu — Infinitive in In- 
direct Discourse, ete. — Sight Translations — 
Reaping Lesson: Review of the Greek 
Porte? . ee 

Perrect MIppLE Svea OF 5 Cloieietea sy THEMES 
(continued) —Purtpurastic Forms—R. dp- 
—Reapvine Lesson: The Payment of the 
Troops . ; 

IRREGULAR VERBS IN pm: ye a ee Sieve. 
ces IN Inpirect Discourse arrerR ért AND 
@s —InpirEct Questions — ConstRUCTIONS 
WITH nui, eirov AND éyw — R. orpa- — 
Reapine Lesson: Review of all the Troops 

Particieies In InprrEct Discourse — Agreement 
of Predicate Adjectives after Infinitives with 
omitted Subjects — VerBat Apsuctives — R. 
mt- — Reaping Lesson : Mock Charge f the 

Greeks amar erat. Fes ‘ 


XV 


PAGE. 
273-277 


277-282 


282-290 


291-299 


299-303 


304-308 


308-318 


318-322 


323-329 


330-337 


°, 
w 


XVlil 


LXIX. 


LXX. 


CONTENTS. 


InpIREcT QuoTa7™=>v or Complex SENTENCES — 
Evuipesis— Reavine Lesson: Lhe Passage of 
ithe Moadioine, 310). tories ace 

IRREGULAR VERBS IN pe: inpe, Fpar, Keipat — 
Group ditos — Reapine Lesson: Zhe Meet- 
ing of Cyrus and Syennesis . 


LXXI. Revinw: Perfect Middle System of Lodsondit 


Themes — Indirect Discourse (Summary) — 

Ellipsis — Sight Translations — Ravine Lus- 
sons: Speech of Clearchus ; Second Address 
of Clearchus ; Clearchus refuses to Lead; Con- 
‘Yerence with Oyrus: («eds ~~ < sa oe es 


LXXII. Revirw or toe AnaBasis . . . euttey «ee 
APPENDIX: ParapicgmMs or DECLENSIONS AND Chasveléeiis 
ABBREVIATIONS PETER Wt) oh ee 
GREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY . . « 2. es) ss « » 
EneiisH-GREEK VOCABULARY ... 

Pimetae Lapis: ES OAR op ea ae. Seas 
Cree IN ORE: . Se he kk eo Pe a 8 


PAGE. 


338-343 


343-346 


347-361 
361-363 
365-401 

4.04 
405-437 
438—450 
451-456 
457-460 






_ Forms. 
Large. Small 
Av a 
BB 
7 
AY 8 
i” « 
Z ‘ .’ 
£ 
sa-- = 
K « 
eo 
MM be 
Be: 
ee 
es 
F: p 
i os 
aa 
my ov 
ee 4 
Xx 
ay 
2 o 


a 

? 
f 
‘ 


_ 1 Begin the study with Lesson I., page 7. 
2 Has the same sound as the long vowel, only shorter, — near the sound heard 


as 


in met. 


_ 8 Always s at the end of a word, elsewhere o: coods, wise. 


D 2 


¢ 


INTRODUCYORY. 


THE ALPHABET. 
I. The Greek alphabet has twenty-four letters : — 


Sound. 


4 in father 
b in bib 


g¢ in go 


d in did 
e in prey? (short) 

Az in adze 
“e in prey -(long) 
th in thin 
i in machine 
kin book 
1 in bell 


m in aim 


n in nun 
x in box 
6 in obey 
p in tip 
r in ran 
s in so 

t in sit 


French u or German ii ® 
ph in Philip 

German ch ® 

ps in hops 


0 in na 


a Rhymes with now. 
4 5 Pronounce like eeyu. | 


6 Pronounce like German ch in Buch, nearly like the Scotch ch in loch. 


Name. 


"Aga 
Bira 
Toppa 
AéAra 
*E yiddv 
Znra. 
*Hra 
@7ra 
"lara 
Kara 
Adp Pda 
Md 
Nd 

= 

*O pixpov 
Ic 

“Po 
Slypa 
Tad 

°Y Widdv 
Di 

Xt 
We 

*O péya 


Latin. 
Alpha a 
Beta b 
Gamma g 
Delta d 
Epsilon €—~ 
Zeta | a 
Eta é 
Theta th 
lota i 
Kappa ¢ 
Lambda 1 
Mu m 
Nu n 
Xi x 
Omicron (u) 5 
Pi Rp. 
Rho r 
Sigma ~ 
Tan * t 
Upsilon (u)y © 
Phi’ ph | 
Chi ch, kh 
Psi ps 
Omega 6 


4 


Pooh 22 6. 3 hte op BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. : 


Il. Breathings. The letter A is wanting in the alpha- | 
bet, but its sound before an initial vowel or diphthong 
is indicated by the rough breathing (‘); its absence 
by the smooth breathing (’). Every vowel or diph- 
thong at the beginning of a word must have one of 
these breathings over such vowel or second vowel of 
the diphthong. Thus, 6, ¢he, is pronounced ‘ho’; é, 
Jrom, ‘ek ;’ oikos, house, ‘oikos.’ Initial p also has 
the rough breathing: “Pddvos, Rhodian. Double p is 
often written pp, Eng. rri: Tvppos, Pyrrhus. : 

III. Vowels. Of the vowels,e and o are always short 
in quantity; » and ware always Jong ;! a, u, and v are 
short in some words and long in others. In the para- 
digms and vocabularies of this book, a, 1, and v, when 
long, are marked 4, t, and v, except in cases where the 
quantity may be inferred from the accent. The short. 
vowels have the same quality of sound as the long, 
but shortened or more abrupt. Thus, @ is pronounced 
like first @ in papa’; ¢ like French é in réal, near the 
sound heard in me¢ or get; ¢ like ¢ in verify; o like o 
in obey, monastic. 


Remark. a, €, 9, 0, w, from their open sounds in 
pronunciation, are called oven vowels; «t and v, close 
vowels. 


IV. Diphthongs. The proper diphthongs, except vi, 
are formed by the union of an open vowel with a close 
one, aS at, av, el, ev, ot, ov, nv. ‘The dmproper diph- 


1 T.e., they have more time given them in pronunciation than the short 
vowels. 


PRONUNCIATION. 3 


thongs are formed by the union of a long vowel (a, y, w) 
with v, and are written thus, a, y, @. In these, the 
iota is called zofa subscript. With capitals it is written 
on the line, as "Quero, gero, he thought. 


_ Remark. Observe that the improper diphthongs have 
both the breathing and accent on the first vowel. 


V. Pronunciation of Diphthongs. 
~ 1. ae like az in ae av like ow in our, 


Lo‘e 


El ao at, ev “ en “ feud, = 
ob 3 OR “ou, ov “ ou “ youth, 
vw“ mw “ gut, nv “ a-oo rapidly pronounced. 


2. The i improper diphthongs, q, y, @, are pronounced 
like a, nN, w 


PRONUNCIATION. 


VI. The pronunciation of Greek is phonetic. Every 
consonant is sounded. T is the only letter that has 
more than one sound, which before x, y, x, or € equals 
nin ink: ayyeXos (ang-gelus), messenger. 

VII. 1. Syllables. In Greek, as in Latin, every word 
has as many syllables as it. has separate vowels and 
diphthongs. The last syllable is called the wltima, the 
‘next to the last, the enult, the one before the penult, 
the antepenult. 

- 2. In dividing words into syllables, a single conso- 
“nant is joined with the following vowel: e&yw, have, 
Korpn, village, oxn-v7, tent. | 


1 Many prefer to pronounce et as ¢ in eight. 


A THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


3. Consonants between two vowels are joined with 
the following vowel when they can be pronounced at 
the beginning of a word or syllable, otherwise they are 
divided: €&oyov, L had, pa-Kpos, long, Ovi-cxw, die, 
im-mros, horse. 

4. Compound words that retain their component 
parts entire are divided into their component parts, other- 
wise they may be divided as simple words: mpoo-éyo 
(from. wpds and éyw), hold to, but wa-peAavyw or wap- 
ehavvw (from mapa and édavvw), ride past. 


QUANTITY. 
VIII. 1. Quantity? <A syllable is long by nature if 


it contains a diphthong or one of the long vowels 7 or 
w: daivw, show; short if it contains one of the short 
vowels € or 0: wodds, wise. 

2. A syllable is long by position if its vowel is 
followed by a double consonant or by two single conso- 
nants except a mute and a liquid: dyyéAho, announce, 
Tofov, bow. 


Norse. The double consonants are f, €, andy. €3 
arises from a coalescence of 5 with o; € is composed 
of x and o; J, of wand a. 


1 Such consonants can regularly be pronounced by one impulse of the 

voice; as sp/ in splendor. See the Lexicon. | 

_ 3 Quantity in Greek, as in Latin, refers to the time given in pronun- 
ciation. 

8 Some pronounce ¢ as dz, heard in adze. 


ACCENT. 5 


ACCENT. 


- IX. 1. There are three characters used in Greek 
to mark the accent. These are: the acute accent (’), 
motap.os, river ; the circumflex accent ("), r@ Tworapo, to 
the river ; the grave accent (*), Tov torapor, the river. 

2. These accents are written over the vowel of the 
accented syllable or second vowel of the diphthong, un- 
less the second vowel is « subscript (1V.). If the vowel 
has a breathing also, the acute and the grave follow it, 
but the circumflex is placed above the breathing : codds, 
wise ; ayw, lead ; ot, who; @, to whom. If the accented 
vowel is a capital, the accent, as well as the breathing, 
stands just before it : “Quero (IV.). 

3. ‘The acute can stand only on one of the last three 
syllables of a word; the circumflex only on one of the 
last two; and the grave only on the last. 

a. A word having the acute on the ultima is called 
oxytone: twotauos; on the penult, parorytone: ro€ov; — 
on the antepenult, proparoxytone : ayyeXos. 

6. A word having the circumflex on the ultima is 
called perispomenon: tips, of honor; on the penult, 
properispomenon : Sapov, gift, oikos, house. 

c. A word having no accent on the ultima is called 
barytone: ré€ov, dyyeXos, Sdpov. : 

X. The antepenult can be accented only when the 
last syllable is short: dyyeXos. 

XI. If the penult is accented, it takes the circum- 
flex when it is long by nature and at the same time 
the ultima is short by nature: Sdpov. Otherwise, if 


6 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


accented, it takes the acute: Sdépov, td€ov, tmzos, 
Eo Xov. | 


Nore. Final a and ov are regularly considered short 
in determining the accent: xopa, villages, dyyedou, 
messengers ; except in the optative, and in the adverb 
oxo, at home. 


XII. The circumflex can stand on the ultima only 
when it is long by nature,’ but it does not necessarily 
stand on such a syllable: kwpav, of villages ; Tipy, 
honor, Tips. 

XIII. The place of the accent on many words must 
be learned by observation. But in most words it 
recedes as far as possible from the end (IX. 3; X.). 
This is called recessive accent. ‘Thus, the accent on 
ayyehos is placed on the penult whenever by inflec- 
tion the ultima becomes long: dyyédov; but. recedes 
again when the ultima becomes short: ayyedov. Verbs 
_ regularly take the recessive accent. 

XIV. An oxytone regularly changes its acute to 
the grave before other words in the same sentence in 
close connection: ets Thy Xepav ehavvovat sed els THY 
X@pav €Xavvovot). | 


Norr. The acute is the regular accent. ‘he cir- 
cumflex and grave are modifications of this. The 
grave indicates that the syllable upon which it is 
placed is to be pronounced with a lighter stress. 


1 Observe that the circumflex can stand only on a syllable long by 
nature. 


THE ALPHABET. - 7 


-. XV. Punctuation. The comma (,) and period (.) 
are like those in English. ‘The colon (- ), a point above 
the line, corresponds to the English colon and semi- 
colon. ‘The mark of interrogation (;) is like the 
English semicolon. 


LESSON I? 
THE ALPHABET. 


I. Learn the alphabet and sound of the letters (I.), 
-breathings (II.), classification of vowels and diph- 
‘thongs (III. Rem.; IV. Rem. weve by 2). 


_ Remark. Note the letters of the Greek alphabet 
‘having forms like the corresponding English: letters, 
‘and then learn those differing from the English noting 
‘the sound of each letter. Give the sound of each 
‘letter and then the character representing it, and vice 
‘versa, until the characters can be written instantly upon 
‘hearing the different sounds. Observe that the Greek 
mame of each letter begins with the sound of that 
letter. 


2. EXERCISES. 
_ I. 1. What characters represent 6,’ 4, e in prey, i? 
2. Give both the long and the short sound of the 


1 The notation of sounds used in this book is as found in Webster’s 
Dictionary. 


8 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


vowels. 3. Give the letters representing b, g, th, ks, 
ph, ps, r, etc. 4. Give the sound of a, B, 4, , k, hy 


o, €, w, etc. 5. Give English words containing letters 


P m7 
representing the sound of @ &€ w, 4, x, 7m, p, ete. 
6. In the same way give English words representing 
the sound of 7, «€, @, 0, u, v, ov, av, etc. 7. Give the 
sounds of ov and av, of a and e, of w and o, etc. 

II. 1. Pronounce by the phonic method 76:' 7-0, 
76; 0: h-o, 6; Tév: T-o-v, Tov. 2. THY, THS, TOV, TO, 
Ol, ai, TOL, Taiv, Tots, TA. 3: Ti-wH, Si-KH, vi-Ky, ol 

s- ee , - , ~ 4 £ / 
Ki-a, OKY-VY, N-Ee-pa, xa-pa. 4. Aé-yw, hv-w, TEu-TH, 

, ? > , ra > 5 5 > 
Ba-ot-hev-w, Bai-veo, é-av-vo, tei-Ow. 5. é, €€, év, eis, 
€x” TOV Kw-pOv, ev" TH apé-pa, ai-ré-w, mpds, Ta-pa, 

, , , w2 y , ©2 
ovv, T6-E0v, hai-va, Ovy-oKe, im-mos, 7-he-pos. 6. 6 
> Ab Sean Bare , - > , £ 
a~ya-Gos. 7. eis” THY yo-pap €-hav-vov-o1. 8. dv-ov-ct 

\ , - > aA A 3 ae e 
Thv ye-pu-pav. 9. €x Tov Ka-pov €-av-vae. 10. 0 
a-ya-0ds av-Opw-mros év TH Karp Hv. 


1 The student should aim to connect the Greek sounds witl the letters 
representing them. These sounds should be held in the mind like the 
quality of a note in musicas a distinct object of thought. In beginning 
to pronounce, give first the sound of each letter, then combine the sounds 
as the pronunciation of the word, and vice versa. To vary the exercise, 
let the teacher give either the sound of the letters or the letters, and the 
pupil either the characters or pronunciation. The teacher also should 
both give the reading of the sentences to the pupil, and require independ- 
ent reading from him. 

2 A few monosyllables attach themselves so closely to the following 
word as not to have a separate accent, but are pronounced with the follow- 
ing word. Pronounce é« r@v as one word. These are called proclitics 
(101). 





SYLLABLES: 9 


LESSON IL. 


SYLLABLES. PRONUNCIATION. 


-- Review Lesson I. Learn VI.; VII., 1, 2, 3, 4; 
BX,.15.-2. 


3. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. Apply- the principles of syllabication to the 
_ words in Exercise II. of the preceding lesson. aie 

II. 1. Divide into syllables and pronounce: ayyedos, 
 ayyédho, eyyvs, TUYKXaVa, avayKn, morapés. 2. aya, 
Kedevoa, iw, Soxéw, TéuTw, LapBaveo, wdxopa, péva. 
3. avyp, avOpwros, oiKos, Bagudeis, Onros, Tiwar, 
diros, codov, Pa POS, oTparid, Xapa, yépupa, dpaga, 
apatns. A. Revias, catparns, 6 émhirys, TENTATTHS, 
0 oTpatiarns, €€-ehavva, €x-heitrw, Tpoo-€pXopal, KaTa- 
—AapBave. 5. eis tHv xdpav édavvovor. 6. dia 
Dpvyias e€-ehavva. 7. ets giiiay yopav édavvovor. 
8. evradéa péver Kipos kal 7 orpatia Népas etkoot. 


LESSON IIL. 
QUANTITY. ACCENT. 


Review Lessons I., IJ. Learn VIII., 1, 2, n.; IX. 
eee fees MIN, : AIT; XII; XIV. N.; 
XV. 


10 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK; 


4. EXERCISES! 


I. 1. Apply the rules of accentuation to the words 


in Exercise I]., Lesson II., especially to proparoxytones — 
and properispomenons. 2. In the same exercise, note — 


the oxytones, paroxytones, and perispomenons. 

II. 1. Upon what kind of syllables may the circum- 
flex accent stand? 2. Why can the acute stand on 
the antepenult of avOpwire, rodeuor, verov, vETAL, 


hvopev? 3. Why can not the circumflex stand on- 


the penult of otk, dyw, avayKn, Kaun, Uros, Omor, 
pécos, doBov? 4. Why can not the acute stand on 
the antepenult of av@pdmov, avOpdére, Ttohéu, Tore 
prow, 7ohkguous? 5. Place the accent on the penult or 
antepenult of the following words as the last syllable 
will permit, and pronounce: dvOpwrov, avOpwrev, 7o- 
Aepovs, KLVOUVOS, TOAITNS, aypLos, BedTLOTOS, KpaTLCToS, 
Avopev, vere, AvVOvOL, EhvEeTHY, vETAL, MVOVTAL, EwevE- 
Tv, Gverov. 6. Place the proper accent on the penult 
of the following words, and pronouries Suxn, xOpas, 
NGyou, dt)Xos, dé&por, Sdpa, TOka, Kamat, Kans, trou, 


/ ay = 
SuoKw, AVE, AvELS, evernv, Nu~ov. . 


1 The pupil should be drilled until the letters at once suggest the 
sounds, and the sight of the word the proper pronunciation, without any 
substitution of Roman letters. Let the pupil also be constantly drilled in 
writing Greek words from their sound or pronunciation. In all of the 
exercises of this book the blackboard should be constantly used. 





ACCIDENTS. ll 


LESSON IV. 
PERSON, NUMBER, GENDER, CASE. 


. 
5. In Greek, as in Latin, nouns, pronouns, adjectives, 


and verbs are inflected. ‘There are three declensions of 
_substantives and adjectives, corresponding in general to 
the first three declensions in Latin, First, Second, and 
Third, or respectively the A, O, and Consonant declen- 
‘sions. ‘The first two, as opposed to the third, are some- 
times called the vowel declension. 

6. There are three nxuméers ; the singular, dual, and 
‘plural. The singular denotes one object, the plural 
‘more than one; the dual refers definitely to two 
objects. 

7. There are three genders: the masculine, the fem- 
‘inine, and the neuter. The first two distinguish nouns, 
: as in English, according to their reference to sex. This 
As ealled zafural gender. But the Greek, like the Latin, 
further distinguishes nouns by the so-called grammatical 


gender. 


a. The grammatical gender of nouns is determined partly by 
their signification, but mostly by their endings. 

6. The general rules for the grammatical gender of nouns, 
independent of their endings, are the same as in Latin: (1) Most 
names of rivers, winds, and months are masculine. (2) Most 
names of countries, cities, islands, and trees are feminine. 
(3) Gender determined by the endings of nouns —as, those end- 
ing in a or 7 are feminine —will be given under the several 
declensions. 


1g THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. : 


8. There are five cases: the nominative, genitive, 
dative, accusative, and vocative. The Latin ablative is_ 
supplied partly by the genitive, but mostly by the 
dative; otherwise the cases have the same ae 
as the corresponding cases in Latin: as, nom.’ a kings 
(subject); gen. of a king ; dat. to or for a king; acc. 
a king (object) ; voc. O king / 


Norse. All the cases except the nominative ae 
vocative are called odlique. 


LESSON V. 
THE ARTICLE. #. 


Review Lessons III., IV. Note especially IX. 3, 
XII. 


9. The Greek article 6, 7, 7é [ro] generally corre- 
sponds to the English definite article ¢he. But it often 
has the force of a possessive pronoun. It is declined in 
three genders and numbers, and in all the cases but the 
vocative. Its endings, united with the stem [vo], are, 
in the main, like the corresponding endings of the vowel 
declension. 


1 For abbreviations see page 404. 


|THE ARTICLE, 13 
10. Peaipicn: 


Singular. - Dual. Plural. 
Mase. Pem. Neut. Mase. Fem. Neut. Mase. Fem. Neut. 






. * 4 
IN. 6  =70° 1H (ra)' Ta ob at Ta 


ToU-THS TOU Tol (Talv) To\Y =TaY Tov Tor 

™ TH TO tow (Tatv) Toty Tots Tats Tots 

, eat t a , Z , , z , 

A. tov Hv TO- TH (Ta) TH. TOvS Tas TA 


‘Nore. The pupil himself should make the observa- 
tions before formulating them. 


a. Observe that 0, 7, of, ai are proclitics (101). 
6. Observe that the gen. and dat. masc. and neut. of all 
' numbers are alike; that the nom. and acc.-of the neuters are 
alike, and their plural ends in a. 

c. Observe that every dat. has an ¢, but in the singular it 
takes the form of ¢ subscript. : 
_ d. Observe that the gen. and dat. of all numbers are circum- 
flexed ; other accented forms follow the nom. neut. sing. 





11. Decline y rip, the honor, with the same end- 
ings and accents as those of the fem. art.; 4 ripy, THs 
Tyuns,” of the honor, etc. : = 

12. Decline 6 morapéds, the river, in the oblique 
cases with the same endings and accents as those of the 
‘Mase. art.; 6 morapos, Tov Totapod, of the river, etc., 
nom. plural, oi rorapoi.® 

13. 1. What accent do the gen. and dat. in all 





\ 
} vs 








> 
1 rw, roiv may be used for all genders. 
2 Vocatives are like nominatives, cf. paradigm 41. 
8 Cf. paradigm 61. 


14 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 


numbers of oxytones and monosyllables of the vowel 
declension take ? 

2. What accent do all the other cases of these syl- 
lables take ? 

3. Of what gender is tiu7, torapds, ayyedos, av- 
Opwrros, man ? 


a. Observe that the article agrees with the noun that it 
limits in gender, number, and case. 


14. VOCABULARY. 
ayyehos, messenger. Kaun, village. oKnvy, tent. 
d@por, gift. oikos, house. To€ov, bow. 
imtos, horse.  wToTapos, river.  TiH, honor. 

15. EXERCISES! 


I. 1. run, 1. TYeH, TyHs, TysNv, OKNVH, O ToTApmds, 
THS TYULHS, THY TYysnv (as Object), TH TYLA, Tats TYpmats, 
TOV TYL@V, TAS TYLaS. 2 NH TKHVY, al oKyVal, TOV 
TKNVOV, TALS OKNVals, TH TKYVA, TH TKNHVA, TOW 
oKyvaw. 3. TOV TOTAMLOV, TOV TOTAMaY, TO TOTALa, 
TOV ToTaoV, TOYS ToTapovs, 6 Aoyayds, the captain, 
T@ hoyay@, TOV oyayov., 4. at K@paL, ol imToL, TO 
d@pov, TOD Sdpov, Ta SMpa, 6 Oikos, TO TOkoY, TOV 


KOMODV. 


Il. 1. Of the tent, for the tent, of the tents, of the 
village, a village, villages. 2. Of the villages, of the 


1 Read or pronounce and translate into English. 





VERBS, — INTRODUCTORY. 15 


honors, of the gift, of the captain, for the captain. 
3. The honors, of the honor, the messengers, for the 
honors.’ 


LESSON VI. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE ACTIVE, MIDDLE, 
AND PASSIVE OF do. 


Review IX, 3; X, XI, XIII, XIV; Lessons III, 
IV, V. 


16. The Greek verb has three voces, the active, 
middle, and passive. 


\s 


a. There are four moods: the indicative, subjunctive, opta- 
tive, and imperative. ‘To these are added, in the conjugation of 
the verb, the infinitives and participles. 

b. There are seven tenses: the present, imperfect, aorist, fu- 
ture, perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect. | 


17. There are three persons, first, second, and 
third. 
18. There are three numbers (6). | 
19. Verbs have recessive accent: that. is, they accent 
the antepenult if the last syllable is short, otherwise the 
penult. 
1 The average amount of work is given in the exercises of this book as 


a guide to the pupil. The teacher should vary this, if need be, in his 
instruction to the class. 


16 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
20 Present Indicative. 
Active. /) Middle. Passive. 
S. 1. vo, I loose hvo-pwau hvopat. 
2. vets, you loose ~ — -hbet, Ad | 
3. dveu, he looses | hve-Tau The passive 
uses the same 
D. 2. dverov,' you (two) loose dve-cA0V fon as the 
3. dwve-Tov, they (two) loose hve-cOov middle. 
P. 1. ddo-pev, we loose hvd-pefa 
2. ve-TeE, you loose hve-oGe 
3. vou, they loose hvvo-vTau 


21. Most Greek verbs are conjugated like Avo, and 
are called from their first form -w verbs. 

22. Verb Theme. The theme of a verb is its funda- 
mental part, the common base to which certain prefixes 
and suffixes are added in its conjugation. ‘The theme 
of Avw is v- or Av-. 

23. Tense Stem. From the theme the different tense 
stems by certain tense suffixes are formed. The final 
vowel of these is either o or e, and is called the variable 
(or thematic) vowel. Its sign is °/., as Av’/.., the present 
stem of dv. 

24. Personal Endings. The different forms of the 
verb are made by adding to the tense stems certain 
endings. ‘These in the finite moods denote the person ? 
and number, and are called Personal Endings. 

25. Variable (or thematic) vowel. ‘The. variable 
vowel is o before w and »v, and e elsewhere. 


1 First person is like first person plural Avopev. 
2 Personal pronouns are not used except for emphasis. 


7 
= * 


VERBS, —- CONJUGATION. 17 


26. In the present indicative active originally -o-j, 
' -e-ot, and -e-7u were respectively the endings of the 1st, 
_ 2d, and 3d person singular, and -o-vor of the 3d plural. 
In the former, -u. was dropped and o changed to o; 
_ tin -ovand -7e passed over to the preceding vowel and 
- united with it by contraction, and 7 was dropped. In 
' the latter, v in -vov before sigma was dropped and o 
lengthened to ov (194, 4, end). 
| 27. In the second person singular of the middle, o 
in dropped after a variable vowel. Here -eas by a 
regular rule of contraction becomes -eu or -7. 


Observe that the active and middle voices are distinguished 
_ only by different endings ; that in the dual and second person 
} Gingulat f the middle -9- occurs instead of -r- of the active. 


MAAS 


28. The Saal endings of the primary’ tenses in 
the indicative, active and middle, are as follows: 


ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
Sing. Dual. Plur. Sing. Dual. Plur. 
-, (-pu) - LEV “Ot -weOa 
2. -s,(-ov) -Tov -Te -cat -ofov -obe 


3. .-, (-T1,-01) -Tov -at,(-vor) -Tar -cOov -vTa 


29. ‘The present tense represents the action as taking 
place at the present time. 


a. Customary actions and general truths are also expressed 
__ by the present. 


30.' The active voice represents the subject as acting : 
dv, T loose. 





1 Cf. primary tenses (110). 


18 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


31. The middle voice commonly represents the sub- 
ject as acting upon étse/f or for itself:* dopa, IT am 
loosing myself, wopedopar, (topedw, make go), I proceed, 
peraréuropar avrov, I send for him, (summon). 

32. ‘The passive voice represents the subject as acted 
upon: \vopat, [ am loosed. . 

33- Write the present indicative active and middle 
of A\éyw, topedw, TeiOw, TEuTw, and Bovredo. 


34. . VOCABULARY 


Give the meaning of av@pwros, -ov; Sa@pov, 7d; do- 
XAOS, -00 ; TOTAMOS, -OD ; TILA, -HS; TKYNVY, -Ns: 


Kvpos, -ov, Cyrus. héyw, evs, say, speak. 
Bovredo, -es, plan; mid. méutra, -es, send. 
deliberate. | mreiOw, -evs, persuade ; mid. 
éehavve, march [ elastic’ |. believe, obey. 
hvvw,-exs, loose,destroy, break. mopedw,-es, make go ; mid. 
peve, -€Ls, TeMaiN. proceed | pore. 
35- EXERCISES. 


1. Aver, Avera, AVovort, AVovTat, AVEeTov, hvecHov, 
, 
Mvopev, Avdpefa, Aver, AUN, Were. 2. peEves, [EVETE, 
héyer, Aeyerar, €yovTat, TopEevomat, TOpEvOVTAL, TOPEV- 
\ “A , , 4 , 
erat. 3. TOO@pov Téume. 4. TEiOw, TwEiDeL, TEiDerat, 
1 It may represent the action on something belonging to oneself: 
Avopat, I ransom. 
2 First learn the meaning of the words from their use in the sentences, 


and then commit to memory. 
8 Borrowed from the Greek (504). 


—r: - 


SYNTAX OF VERB. 19 


meOoue0a, Bovdrevers, Bovever Oe, Bovhevar. 5. Kdpos 
ékavve. 6. 6 avOpwros Bovdevera. 7. Kipos rov 
hoyayov wéume. 8. ot oxayot THY oKHvHY hvovar 
(destroy). 


Examine the nominatives in 5, 6, 7, 8, and note their relation 
to the verb. 
Ruue.* 


36. The subject.of the finite verb is in the nomina- 
tive case. 


Examine the verbs in 5, 6, 7, 8, and note the relation of their 
form to their subjects. 


RULE. 


37. A verb agrees in person and number with its 
subject. 7 


Examine the accusatives in 3, 7, 8, and note their relation to 
the verbs upon which they depend. 


RUwLgE. 


38. The direct object of a transitive verb is in the 
accusative. 


39. EXERCISES. 


1. Of honor, for the honor, of the river, for the 


river, the gift, the bow, of the tent, of the tents. 


2. .Cyrus believes. 3. The man proceeds. 4. He is 
marching, they are sending men. 5. Cyrus remains. 
6. They two are remaining. 7. The captains delib- 


erate, 
1 Give the corresponding English and Latin rules of syntax whenever 
applicable. 


20 BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


LESSON VII. 
FIRST, OR A DECLENSION. 


Review IX., 3; X.,. XI., n.; XII., XIII. Lessons 
ayv.. V., Vi: 


40. Zhe Stem. The stem of a noun is its funda- 
mental part, that part to which the case-endings? are 
added in declension. It corresponds to the theme of 
the verb (22). The stem of nouns of the first declen- 
sion ends in @, which in feminine nouns remains long 
or is changed to 7 or a. 3 


4I. PARADIGMS. _ 
OTpaTid x apa yepupa 
army land bridge 
Singular. 
N.V. orpara xopa yedupa 
G. oTpatias Xopas yepupas 
D. orparia x opa yepupa 
A. otpariav Xopav yepupav 
Dual. 
N.A.V. orparia Kapa yedhupa 
G.D. orpariaty \opav yedv pay 
Plural. 
N.V. orpatvat xXOpau yepupar . 
G. oTpatiav Yopov yedupov 
D. otparvats x apars yedupais 
A. otpatias KoOpas yedupas 


1 Certain letters, as in Latin, to express the relation of the word to other 
words. 


FEMININES OF FIRST DECLENSION. 21 


Tiby apaka 
honor wagon 
Singular. 

N.V.  ripy apata 
G. rips apwaéns 
D.  ripn apaén 
A.  ripyv apacav 

Dual. 
N.A.V.  ripa apaéa 

G.D.  ripaty apaéav 

Plural. 

N.V.  ripai apatar 
G. Tiper apatov 
D. — ripats apatars 
A. Tipas apaeas 


a. Observe! that the case endings? unite with the final 
vowel of the stem, forming one syllable. 

6. Observe that the terminations of the dual and plural of 
each noun are like the endings of the dual and plural of the 
fem. article (10). 

e. Observe that: 1. In the singular a preceded by e, ¢, or p, 
is retained : yopa, -as, etc. 2. When the final vowel is pre- 
ceded by o, tr, AA, or a double consonant (VIII. 2, n.), it is 
changed to @ in the nom., acc., and voc., and to 7 in the gen. 
aud dat., @ddXaTra, Oaratrns. 3. After other letters the 
final vowel is regularly changed to 7 throughout, and is de- 
clined like the fem. article (10, 11): oxnvn, coun. 

d. Observe that the nom. and voce. are alike in all numbers. 


1 These observations must be actually made by the pupil (10. x.). 
2 These will be noticed later (49). 


pe BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


Quantity of the Terminations. 


a, Observe that @ in the endings of the gen. sing., nom. 
dual, and acc. plural is long. 

6. Observe that: 1. In the singular @ preceded by ¢, ¢, or p, 
is long, except in nouns ending in pa preceded by a diphthong 
or v: yédupa, metpa (cf. p. 631). 2. That the stem vowel a of 
the acc. and voc. sing. agrees in quantity with the nom.: yé 
dupa, yépupav, amatav, Oadarrar, 

43. Accent of Nouns. 

1. The accent of the nom. sing. of most nouns must 
be learned by observation. All the forms of a noun are 
accented on the same syllable as the nom. sing., and 
have the same kind of an accent as far as the general 
rules of accent (X., XI., n., XIL., XIII.) will allow. 

2. In the A Declension the last syllable of the gen- 
plur. is always circumflexed: dyaga, apagar. * 

8. The accent of the ultima is regularly retained, but 
in the gen. and dat. of all numbers, a long ultima, if 
accented, takes the circumflex (XII.,13, 1): OT Paras, 
TLULNS, TIL, TLWALS, TAs, LV, PNVOLY, NVOD. 

44. Decline 7 oxyry, 7 Kkdun, 7 dvdraky, 7 Sixn. 

45. Decline  wetpa, 7 nuépa, 7 Ovpa, 7» Oadarra. 

a. Of what gender are nouns of the first declension ending 
in a and »? 

6. Account for the circumflex accent on the gen. and dat. 
of all numbers of 0, tiuH, pudraxn. 

e. Give the quantity of the penult and ultima of the following 
words: K@pat, koma, Sixat, Ovpat, yépvpa, nuépav, teipav 


(IIL). 


1 This is only an apparent exception, since the stem vowel -a and the | 
gen. ending -wv are contracted, so that d-wv becomes dy (153). 


FEMININES OF FIRST DECLENSION. 23 


46. VOCABULARY. 


Give the Greek words for honor, village, captain, tent, 


believe, river, proceed. 


apata, -ns, wagon. 

yébupa, -as, bridge. 

dikn, -ys, justice [syn-dic ]. 

Ovpa, -as, door [pooR]." 

Oddarra, -ns, sed. 

npepa, -as, day |eph-eme- 
ral |. 

Teipa, -as, trial, experience 
[em-piric, ex-perience ]. 

OTparTid, -As, army. 

dudaky, -Hs, garrison. 


xapa, -as, land, country. 
ayaly, good, brave, fertile. 
Kay, beautiful. 
aya, lead, carry [axiom }. 
exo, have. 
els, prep. with acc., fo, enfo. 
é€x,” prep. with gen., from, 
out of ; é& before vowels. 
ev, prep. with dat., ez, on, 
during. | 





47. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. rhs tiyuns, THs Sikyns, TH Teipa, TOY TELpar, 


THY yapar. 
KON, ydpa Kahn. 


| Oddarrapv, éx THs Oaddrrys. 

). els THY yOpav €davvovar. 
7. €v TH Hpépa Kvpos €édavver. 
9. é« THs Daddrrnys édavver cis THY yopar. 


OTparTias. 


II. 1. He sends a garrison. 
3. They destroy the tents. 
5. On the day Cyrus sends the 


into the villages. 
captain has justice. 
army. 


1 Cognate word (504). 


2. ydpa ayaby,® 7 ayaly yodpa, 4 Kadr) 
3. Oardrrns, THY Oadarray, els THY 


4. €x TOV Kopor éedavve. 
6. Avovar THY yéepupar. 
8. metipav eyes TNS 


2. He leads an army 
4. The 


2 See 101. 


8 Adjectives agree with their nouns as does the article (13, 3, a). 


24 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK, 


LESSON VIII. 


A DECLENSION. MASCULINES. 


Review Lessons V., VII., Note 40. 


48. 


| Eevias, 61 
Xenias 


a= 
Elevias 
Eleviov 
Eevia 


i= 
Eeviav 


<P op2 


S=- 
EVLA 


N. A. V. (815) 
G. D. 


N. 


Poo < 


4g. Case endings of the A Declension united with 


PARADIGMS. 


TATpaTns, 
satrap 
Singular. 
caTparns 
CaTpatov 
caTpaty 
caTpamnv 
caTpaTn 
Dual. 
oaTpara 
OaTpatraw 
Plural. 
CaTparrar 
CaTpaTov 
TAT PATaLs 
TAT paras 


€ 
oO 


¢€ Z e 
om\tTns, O 


hoplite 


e , 
omirys 
e 4 
OTALTOV 
€ 4 
omhiTy 

e , 
omhiTnv 

¢ al iv) 
OTALTaA 


omATa 
e , P 
OTALTALW 


OmALTaL 

e nw 
OMTALT@V 

e 4 
OTALTALS 

e 4 - d 
om\tTas 


the final vowel of the stem, are as follows: 


1 The article prefixed or affixed to a substantive in the paradigms or 


vocabularies indicates the gender: 6, masc., 4, fem., 7d, neut. 


MASCULINES OF FIRST DECLENSION. 25 


SINGULAR. » DUAL. PLURAL. 
Feminine. Masculine. Masc. & Fem. Masc. & Fem. 
N. -@ or-&@ -n -as -ys N. -au 
G. -asor-ns -ys -ov -ov N.A.V. -&~ G. -dv (-dwv) 
D. -@ or-p -n.-¢ -7 G.D. -aw D. -ats 
A. -av or-av -ynv --av -nv A. -as 
V. -@ or-@ 1 -a -nor-a V. ae 
Observe that the mascu- | 
lines of the A Declension are 


like the feminines except in 
the following particulars : 

1. Final a of the stem is 
retained in the nom. after e,e \, 
or p, as in the feminines, but 
otherwise it is changed to 7. 

2. They have the case 
ending -¢ in the nom. sing. 
and -ov in the gen. sing. 

3. Nouns in -rns have vo- 
cative in @: moNXirda, omAiTa. 


50. Decline o Mapov- 
as, 6 Tofdrns, 6 medTa- 
oTySs, O& oTpaTLaTys, 6 
‘Opdrras,' 6 ’ApraképEns. 

51. Conjugate the pres. 
ind. act. and mid. of 
ayw, vw, exo, Lap Bava. 





1 A few nouns, especially proper names, retain the Doric genitive 4, 
having @ or ov in the gen. sing.; in other respects they are like nouns 


in -ds. 


96 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


52. 


VOCABULARY. 


Give the Greek words for eaperience, good, brave, 
beautiful, in, into, from, plan, say, send. 


*ABpoxkopas, -a, Abrocomas. 

"AprakepEns, -ov, Artaxer- 
wes. 

Mapovas, -ov, Marsyas, a 
satyr. 

Elevias, -ov, Xenias. 

ém\irns, -ov, a heavy-armed 
foot soldier, hoplite. 
(No. 1) 

"Opovrtas, -a, -ov, Orontas. 

Twed\TaaTys, -ov, | peltast|, 
fargeteer. (No. 2) 

wérn, ns, small and light 
shield, target. 

carpazns, -ov [satrap], a 
Persian viceroy. 


oTpatiarns, -ov, soldier. — 

To€ov, TO, bow. 

roférns, -ov, bowman. 
(No. 3) 

Bactrevo, -evs, be king. 

Lap Bava, -evs, receive, cap- 
dure | di-lemma |. 

nv, (he, she, it) was, 3d 
sing. impf. of etpi, fo 
be. : 

noav, (they) were, 3d pl. 
inipf. of eipi, to be. 

evrav0a, adv., there, there- 
upon. 

@, inter}. O, with voc. usual- 
ly best left untranslated. 


Notice the common element of wéArn and weATaoTy¥s, 
oTpatiua and otpariarys, To€ov and ro€drns. 


33: 


l. 6 wedraoTHs TéATHY eye. 2. 


Tofov exe. 3. 


A > 
TALS KOMALS Hoa. 


evtav0a omdirns jv. 4. 
\. Yoav €v TH OTpaTia To&drat. 


EXERCISES. 


6 to€dtys TO! 


e A 3 
OmALTaL EV 


1 Force of a possessive pronoun (9). 





MASCULINES OF FIRST DECLENSION. 27 


6. ’Apragépfns Baoweve. 7. HZevias aye tovs omdi- 
Tas eis THY xdpav. 8. w ’Opdrta, 
Tovs oTpatiatas. apBaves; Aap- 
 Bavo. 9 &v TH xopa Kamar Karat 
c \ , 3 ~ 
joav. 10. 0 mweATacTHs pever ev TH 
, > , aA? pe 
Koun. Ll. es kopnv tov ABpoKkopa 
> Fd ~ \ / 
ehavve. 12. orpatriorar, Tas TéATAS 
¥ \ , ¥ e 
 €xere ; «Tas wéAtas eyouev. 13. 0 
gaTpamns aye. Tovs To€dTas eK TOV : 
oKYVOP. No. 2. [eAraorys. 





GS 


— 


54. 1. Explain the agreement of the article in these 
sentences (13, 3, a). ; 

2. Apply the rules for the case of the subject, object, 
and agreement of the verb (36, 37, 38). 


55- Arrangement of the principal parts of a sentence. 


a. Observe that the subject regularly stands first in the sen- 
tence, and the copula last (3, 4), and the cbject before the verb. 
b. Observe that when this order is changed, it is for em- 
phasis, or to express better the relation of the following ideas to 
the preceding! (53, 5). A favorite position of the verb in 
Greek is in the middle of the sentence (53, 7, 10, 13). 
Examine the vocatives in 53, 8, 12. 


RULE. 


56. The name of the person or thing addressed is 
put in the vocative with or without @. 


1 Let the pupil always seek clearness. The Greek allows a greater 
variety in the collocation of the parts of a sentence than the Latin, which the 
~ pupil can best note in connected discourse (107). 


28 


Note (40, 43, 3); VIII. 


THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


37: 


EXERCISES. 


1. Orontas speaks. 2. The satrap  deliberates. 








No. 3. Togdrns. 


3. Xenias has __hoplites. 
4. There the army re- 
mains. 5. The soldiers 
destroy the wagons. 
6. There was a_ beautiful 
village. 7. [|There]* were 
brave soldiers in the army. 
8. He marches from 
the villages into the 
country. 


LESSON IX. 


SECOND, OR O DECLENSION. 


Review Lessons IV.; V. Note (9, 10; 13, 1,2); VII. 


58. The stem of the second declension ends in o, 


corresponding to the second declension in Latin. Its 
nom. sing. masc. ends in s and its neut. in v, and the 
voc. masc. sing. ends in e. 


The nom., acc., and voc, of 


the neut. follow the rule for the article (10, 4). 
59. Decline 6 rorapds, 6 Aoxayds, 6 oTpards with 
the article (12), observing that the stem-vowel of the 


1 Omit. There is no word in Greek for the expletive there. 


NOUNS OF SECOND DECLENSION. 29 


“second declension is like that of the article (76) united 


(58). 
60. Decline 76 ré€ov with the same endings as those 
| of the neuter article (10), except that the nom., acc., 
_and voc. sing. have case-ending -v (58). 


Pa ec e 4 


ae se a 


: 
; 
: 
$ 
; 
; 
4 
j 





‘3 
¥ 


ae eee ae 6 


61. 





> e 
owvos, O 


wine 


olwos 
¥ 
OLvOoU 
¥ 
oWw@ 
5S 
olvov 
> 
Ove 


¥ 
OLVY@ 

¥ 
OLVOLVY 


= 
OwO0L 

¥ 
OLVY@V 

¥ 
OLVOLS 

¥ 
OLVOUS 


' with the same case endings, except as indicated above 


PaRaDIGMs.* 


avOpwiros, 6 606s, Sdpov, Td 


man road gt 
Singular. 
avO pwros 600s d@pov 
> 4 e Aw , 
avO pdirov 6000 dapou 
b] , e “~ , 
avo par@ 660 ddpw 
dl ¢€ , as 
avO pwirov 6d06v d@pov 
¥ 4 , lal 
avb pwrre 60€ d@pov 
Dual. 
avb padre 600 dadpw 
5 4 e ~ 4 
av parroww odotv ddpow 
Plural. 
av pwiro O00t dapa 
> , e “A , 
avO parrav OO0@V dSdpav 
: tiie , e Los ad 4 
avOparrois Od0tsS da@pous 
5 7 4 , ~ 
avOpamous dd0vs dapa 


a. Observe that nouns of the O Declension with the case- 


ending -s in the nom. sing. are masculine, rarely feminine. 


6. Observe that all nouns of the O Declension with the 


case-ending -v in the nom. sing. are neuter. 


1 Let the pupil first decline these words as above, and then, if necessary, 
correct them by the paradigms and commit. to memory. 


30 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


(1) How do the gen. and dat. of masc. and neut, 
nouns of all numbers compare P | 

(2) How do the nom. and voc. of the masc. dual and. 
plur. compare P 

(3) Give the rule for the fotin of the nom., acc., and 
voc. of the neut. sing. and plur. 

(4) What TEES | has a of the nom. plur. of the 
neut. P 

62. Decline 6 7édepos, 6 Adyos, 6 KUpos, 6 orparn- 
vos, TO Omdov, TO TEdioV. 

63. Conjugate the pres. ind. act. and mid.: Ava, 
daiva, pépw. 


64. EXERCISES. 

1. Mapovas diknv eye. 2. 6 dvOpwros ev TQ" oikw 
nv. 3. “ABpokdpas, ® Kupe, mopeverar; 4. Hv 7 
sOc 4 ‘ > > ¥ ‘ 4, > 
600s orevy. 5. Tv oivoy ovK exoner. 6. Ta TdEa EV 

la a > é A re : a ae “A » e 
TH oKnry Hv. T. Ta Ora emt apatov ayera. 8. ob 
“a ope Ed , e \ \ 
oTpaTioTa, Ta OTha P€povor. 9. ol OTpaTnyol Kat 
e \. 9 2 \ A , e 
ol Aoxayol Hoav emi tais Ovpas. 10. 6 avOpwios 
Kupo déye. 11. Kipos rots orpatiéraus Ta Sopa 

, 29 A a , N N 

méumrer. 12. kal 6” Kopos amoméume tovs Sacpovs 


"ApraképEn. 13. daivovrar kab immo. kal avOpwrror. 


Examine 6, 7, and observe that the neuter plural subjects 
have singular verbs. 


1 What force has this article ? 
2 The article is used with proper names in the sense of “ well known” 
or as ‘‘ previously mentioned,” “the said,” etc. 


Ne ae a a 


NOUNS OF SECOND DECLENSION. 81 


RULE. 


65. A neuter plural subject regularly takes a singu- 
lar verb. 


Examine the datives in 10, 11, 12, and observe that they 
express the object (person or thing) indirectly affected by the 
action of the verb. 


RULE. 
66. The indirect object of a verb is put in the dative. 


Observe that the indirect or remote object regularly comes 
before the verb and its object (11); but when the verb comes 
in the middle of the sentence, it follows the verb, either before 
or after its object (12; cf. 55, a, 0). 


67. _ EXERCISES. 


1. Boats were on the river. 2. The captain receives 
a company. 3. The way was long and narrow. 4. The 
general leads the army into the plain. 5. The hoplite 
speaks to Cyrus. 6. Clearchus sends a messenger to 


Cyrus. 7. The army appears in the plain. 


68. — VOCABULARY. 
Sacpos, 6, faz. olvos, 6, wine (Lat. vinum) 
Kvéapxos, 6, Clearchus, [wine]. 
Aoxos, 0, company, om ov, tmplement ; omda, 
hoxayds, 0, captain [hd- arms [pan-oply]. 

xos + aya]. mediov, plain. 


000s, 4, way, road [ex- motor, boat. 
- odus, peri-od |. 


s 


32 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


oTpatos, 6, encamped army, Kat, and (Lat.et); Kat... 


Jorce, army. Kai, both . . . and. 
oTparnyds, 6, generallotpa- mi, prep.,W. gen. on, upon ; 
Tos-+dayw; stratagem |. w. dat., on, by, at; w. 
pakpos, -a,' -dv, long. acc., upon, to, against 
OTEVOS, -H, -OV, NATTOW. [ epi-gram |. 
amo-reuma, send off, back, ov, ovK, ovx, neg. adv., 
remit. not (Lat. non); od be- 
daivw, show, mid. appear comes ov« before a 
[phenomenon]. smooth vowel, ovy be- 


hepa, bear, bring, carry(Lat. _—_ fore a rough. 
Jero) [BEAR]. 


69. What words in the preceding vocabularies have 
a common element with orparés and ozparnyos? 
What common element in Adyos and Aoyayos ? 


LESSON X. 


ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DECLENSION. 


Review 9, 10, 13, 3, a; 41, a, b,c; 43, 1, 2, 3; 
Lesson IX. 


70. ‘I'he stem of these adjectives ends in o and a 
(40, 58), like the nouns of the Second and First Declen- 
sions, and are therefore declined with the same endings. 


The masc. and neut. follow the O Declension, and the 


1 The feminine of the adjective follows the A declension. 
2 The lesson of the preceding day should always be reviewed, and the 
preceding ones as often as possible. 


| 


: 


7 


- ADJECTIVES, VOWEL DECLENSION. 33 


fem. the A. Long @ in the feminine is retained after 
e, t,0r p; otherwise it is changed to y. ‘Thus the nom. 
sing. ends in os, 7 or 4, ov (Latin -us, -a, -um): ddos, 
dnd, Snrov ; a&ios, a€ia, a€vov. 

71. Some adjectives in os, especially compounds, are 
declined with two sets of endings, having the masc. and 
fem. alike: daopos,-ov ; apakitds, -dv ; BapBapos, -ov. 

72. Adjectives follow the rule for the accent of nouns, 
except in the nom. and gen. plur. of the vowel declen- 
sion, the fem. follows the accent of the masc.: aévou, 
afiar; a€iwv, agiov. — 

73. Hereafter the paradigms requiring special notice 
only will be given in the lessons. All others may be 
found in the appendix. But the pupil whenever possi- 
ble should first inflect the words as in 61, and then 
compare his work with the paradigms. Decline: 1. 57- 
hos, OyAn, SHAov; 2. akvos, a€ia, a€iov (817). 

74. Decline: 1. didos, -y, -ov-; idvos, -a, -ov; 
2. pakpos, -a,.dv; apagurds, -dv. 

- 75. Decline: 6 dyafds émdirns; 7 paxpa odds; TO 
Kahov d@por. 


76. EXERCISES. 


l. 9 tTyuyn a&ia é€ori. 2. Ev Tais didiats yopats 
‘eiot. 3. Kyéapxos wéure: Tov To€dtyv Tois oTpario- 
tas. 4. To€dryns ayabds év TH TYLH HV. 5. 0 ayalds 
avOpwros ev TH oikw cori. 6. SHdrAN Hv 7H Em-Bovdn. 
7. 7 wapodos Hv 680s apatites. 8. exer y Kihiooa 
“7 copy Kal kay dudakds. 9. ot dyaboti Kupov pitrou 
joav. 10. orpariatar Aoav ot Kipov dito. 11. dua 
3 


34 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


dirias THS xdpas aye 6 carpadmns Tods oTpaTidras. 
12. of orpari@rar ot odv Kredpyw ev Seba Hoar. 


POSITION OF ADJECTIVES. 


77. The attributive adjective qualifies the noun di- 
rectly without the intervention of a verb (2, 4, 5). 

78. When a noun without the article is modified by 
an attributive adjective, the adjective regularly follows 
the noun (4, 7). It is changed for emphasis. 

79. When a noun with the article is modified by the 
attributive adjective, the adjective always has an article 
before it, and is said to be in the Aftridutive Position 
(2, 5, 8). 


a. Regularly the order is, as in English, article, adjective, 
noun; but when the article with adjective follows the noun, the 
noun may have another article before it: 0 aya0ds advOpwrros, 
avOpwrros 6 ayabes, 6 dvOpwros 0 ayabds (8). 

6. All attributive phrases regularly take the attributive po- 
sition (10, 12). 


80. The predicate adjective forms part of the pred- 
icate, and is connected with its noun by a copula or an 
equivalent verb (1, 6). 

81. When a noun with the article is modified by a 
predicate adjective, the adjective never has the article 
before it, and is said to be in the Predicate Position, 
that is, the adjective stands as it might with the copula’ 
expressed or understood: 6 dvO pcos dyads (€ore) 5 
ayabds 6 avOpwros (éori) (1, 6, 11). 


, 





— ee | 


a 
, 


ADJECTIVES, VOWEL DECLENSION,. 3) 


82. An adjective, as in English, generally with the 
article, may be used as a noun (9). Any phrase with an 
article may have the same force: ot atv Kdedpyw év 
defia Hoav (12). 

83. Agreement of Adjectives. 

Aun adjective agrees with its noun in gender, number, 
and case. ‘I'he article, adjective pronouns, and _partici- 
ples conform to this rule. 


84. Predicate Noun and Adjective. 
With verbs signifying to be, to appear, to be named, 


_etc., a noun or adjective in the predicate is in the same 


case as the subject (1, 6, 9, 10). 
85. 


1. ‘The general leads the brave hoplites into a friendly 
country. 2. He marches into a beautiful plain. 3. The 


EXERCISES. 


tn 


noble were the friends of Cyrus. 4. The Greek army 
_was on the right. 5. The men in the country were 


friendly. 

—s«86.. VOCABULARY. 

_ €mi-Bovhy, plot, design. aé.os, -a, -ov, worthy, valua- 
| Kittooa, Cilician queen. ble. 


_oiKos, 6, house, home [eco- Se€vds, -a, -ov, right; év de. 


nomy |. Eva, on the right. 


_ Wdp-000s, 7, way, passage, SHdos, ~n, -ov, clear, mant- 


pass, Jest, evident. 
ayalds, -n, -Ov, good, brave. “EXdnvikds, ~4, -dv, Grech, 
dpaturos, -ov, passable for [Hellenic]. 

wagons (daka). Kahos, -4, -ov, beautiful, noble 


36 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


codds, -4, -ov, wise |philo- ici, (they) are, 3d_plur. 


sophy |. pres. of eipé. 
didtos, -a, -ov, friendly, es- dua, prep., w. gen., through ; 
pecially of countries. w. acc., on account of 


diros, -y, -ov, friendly ; 0 [dia-meter]. 
didros, a friend [Phil-ip, ovv, prep. w. dat., with, in 
philtre, philo-sophy |. — company with, by the aid 
eat, (he, she, it) is, 3d sing. of [syn-opsis |. 
pres. of etyi, de. 


LESSON XI. 


TRANSLITERATION. 


Review I., II., IIL., IV., V., VI., VIL, VIII. 1, 2, .n. ; 
Al, a, b,c; 48, 58, 61. | 

87. Greek proper names and Greek words are bor- 
rowed or written in English with Latin letters expressed 
in Latin form. ‘They are then accented as in Latin, 
according to the quantity of the penult, and pronounced 
with the Hughsh pronunciation: Kopos, Cyrus ; “ABpo- 
Kouas, Abrocomas. ) 

88. Examine the following : 


1. IléArar, Peltae 7. Tos, Glus 

2. “Apuatos, Ariaeus 8. Midnros, Milétus 
3. Aapetos, Darius 9. OvpBprov, Thymbrium 
4. Bowwrwos, Boedtian’ 10. Xadprn, Sparta 

5. Yoro, Soli ll. dadayé, phalanx 
6. Tapoot, Tarsus 12. KvKdos, cycle’ 


1 When the name has a well-known English form, this should be used, — 
Such only are regularly printed in full-faced type. 


TRANSLITERATION. 37 


a. Observe that in transliterating,! the consonants and vowels 
are regularly represented by the Latin letters as given in the 
alphabet (I.); that the diphthongs are represented as follows: 

l. ae by ae; e& by @ or é; o« by oe; ov by u. 

2. «subscript is omitted in transliteration. 

6. Observe that a, o, av, ev are regularly unchanged, but the 
terminations of the nouns, at, os, ov, and ou, etc., are altered to 
suit the Latin declensions: 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10. 

l. vy before y, «, x, or &, becomes x (VI.). 


89. Write in Latin letters: 

"ApraképEns, Aas, Eipparys, lwvia, loool, Ke 
Nawai, Kidtxia, KAeavap, Opdvras, Lodaiveros, Yupia, 
Elevodav, Tupiatov, Powikyn, Xepicodos, Pavdirns. 

go. Write in Greek letters: Arabia, Babylon,? Boe- 
Otia, Castolus,? Colossae,? Lydia, Marsyas, Proxenus, 


Phrygia, Roma. 


gl. EXERCISES. 


1. Kat rots orpatidras ddeiderar probs. 2. Yo- 
, e 4 e rs A , , 
patveros 6 Xtupdddios omditas ever ytAlovs. 3. pe 
vovatv ® év Xodows Kal "locos. 4. &€ Edécou ayerau 
\ ld , ©.24 ‘\ ¢e , ¥ 
Tov otpatov. 5. XwKparns 0 Ayatos omditas eve 
dg ‘\ v4 b] “ b] 4 
mevtakocious Kal yihious. 6. éevred0ev eEchavve oral- 
‘ 5 4 , 5 , we N \ , / 
_povs dvo tapacayyas Séka emt Tov Vapov torapov. 
7. evrevfev eEchavver crabpovs TévTe Tapacdyyas €lKo- 
8 > 7 + > A , Ree 2 A 
ow” eis Ikovov. éevtavla péver dv0 nuepas. 8. evTed- 


1 Some prefer to transliterate proper names directly into English, and 
accent and pronounce them as any other Greek words. 
2 Oxytone. 
® y movable is added to words ending in ox before a word beginning 
with a vowel (100). 


38 THE BEGINNER’S GREEK BOOK. 


Bev Ktpos thy Kilttooay eis thy Kidixiay aroméure. 
9. evredlev eEchavva otabmovs dv0 Tapacayyas éxTa 
> , > ‘a! ? ile 5 , c , 
ets Il€Aras. evravla péver nuepas emra, 
Examine the relation of the first and second substantives in 
2, 5, and observe that the second, denoting the same person (or 


thing) as the first, is annexed to it to describe it. This is called 
apposition, and the words so annexed, appositives. 


RULE. 


g2. An appositive agrees in case with the substan- 
tive which it qualifies. | 


_ a. Names of rivers and countries regularly have the attribu- 
tive position: 6. 

Examine ota@povs and trapacdyyas in 6, 7, and #mépas- in 
7, 9, and observe their relation to the verb. 


RULE. 
93. The extent of time or space is expressed by the 
accusative. 
94. _ EXERCISES. 


1. The river appears impassable. 2. Clearchus was 
a Lacedaemonian. 3. The allies were in Miletus. 
4. Proxenus has five hundred hoplites. 5. And Cle- 
archus the Lacedaemonian has come. 6. Thence he 
marches two stages, five parasangs, into Thymbrium. 


95- VOCABULARY. 
"Edecos, 7, Hphesus.' Aakedatpovios, 6, Lacedae- 
*Ixoviov, Iconium. monian. 


1 Proper names hereafter will be omitted from the special vocabularies. 


ESSENTIALS FOR READING. 39 


 puoOds, 0, wages, pay. 
TApacayyns, -Ov, Parasang, 


three and one third miles. 


léAra, -ov, Peltae. 
, e ° 
orabuos, 6, station, stage, 
a day's march. 


Lrupdhadios, 6, Stymphalian. 


ovp-paxos, 6, ally [ovr 
+ pan]. 

LwKparns, Socrates. 

Wapos, 0, Psarus. 

azropos, -ov, without means, 
impassable |& + mdpos, 
means |. 


déxa, indecl., ten [decade]. 


dvo, two. 

etxoot, indecl., fwenty. 

énra, indecl., seven [hepta- 
gon |. 

éxTo, indecl., eight [octa- 
gon |. 

TEVTA-KOTLOL, -al, -a, five 
hundred. 

aévte, indecl., five | penta- 
gon |. 

xtAv01, -at, -a, one thousand. 

€€-eMavvw, march on. 

nKo, come, be or have come. 

ddeiiw, owe; pass. due. 

evrevbev, adv., thence. 


LESSON XIL 


ESSENTIALS FOR READING. 


96. In reading rapidly any Greek author three 
things are necessary, —a thorough knowledge of the 
words, of the cxflections, and of the syntaz. 

1. In acquiring the vocabularies, the allied words 
_ should be grouped about the root or stem-word, (510, 
f. f.) and the borrowed and corresponding Latin words 


noted. 


Every word should be reviewed, either sepa- 


rately or by its use in sentences, until the Greek word 
instantly suggests its meaning, and its meaning the 


word. 


1 See 194, 4. 


AO THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


2. The forms of the inflections should be classified 
‘ as much as possible, that the old may explain the new, 
and the new review the old (9, 11, 12). 

3. The rules of syntax should be thoroughly learned 
as modes of thought, and the pupil should be able to 
give the forms of construction, either from reading or 
from the dictation of the teacher, as s rapidly as he would 
give those of his own language. — 

97. Rules for Reading. 

1. Read the sentences aloud in the original. Strive 
to recall the meaning of the words, observing their 
inflectional endings and grammatical relations. 

2. Endeavor to classify new forms and words with 
those already known, ascertaining their meaning either 
by word analysis or from the context. ; 

3. Repeat the process again and again, if need be, 
before referring to the vocabularies. 

4. Arrive at the thought in the order of the Greek 
words, and translate according to the sense of the author 
into idiomatic English. 

5. Exercises in rapid oral and written translations — 
must be repeated until the pupil thoroughly grasps the 
form of the Greek sentence, and at once comprehends 
the thought. 

98. 1. In translating English into Greek, seek first 
the thought to be put into Greek. 

2. Compose the entire thought or sentence aloud in 
the form of a Greek model, and then commit to memory. 

99. Hlision. A final short vowel may be dropped — 


ESSENTIALS FOR READING. 4 


when the next word begins with a vowel. ‘This is 
called elision. An apostrophe (”) marks the elision: 
6 8 jv for 6 d€ Hp. . 


a. Elision is most common in prepositions, conjunctions, ad- 
verbs, pronouns, and other short common words. 

6. Oxytone prepositions and conjunctions lose their accent 
with the elided vowel; other oxytone words throw it back on 
the penult : err’ joav (érra). 


100. v movable. v may be added to- most words 
ending in -ov (including -& and -y), to all verbs in the 
third person singular in -e, and to éori, when the next 
word begins with a vowel. ‘This is called v movable. 
It may also be added at the end of a sentence: e.g. 
pevovow év Xodows; emt Tats O¥pais pévovow. 

toi. Proclitics. 'The proclitics are words of. one 
syllable that attach themselves so closely to the follow- 


ing word as not to have a separate accent, and are 


pronounced as if a part of the following word: 0, év, 
Ek, €iS, El, WS, Ov. | 

102. Luclitics. The enclitics are words of one or 
more syllables, that attach themselves so closely to the 
preceding word as to lose their own accent, and are pro- 
nounced as a part of the preceding word: dyads éort 


| (ayalds — €or). 


103. 1. The enclitic loses its accent, except a dis- 


syllabic enclitic after a paroxytone: a€ta éori. 


2. A word before an enclitic always preserves its 


_ own accent, and never changes an acute to the grave: 


S , > 
aryallos €OTL. 


>, 
7 . 


42 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


3. If it is pro-paroxytone or -perispomenon, it adds 
an acute to the ultima: avOpwrds éoti; SHAdv eorru. 

4. If proclitic, it takes an acute: &« pov; ovre 
(ov + 7é). 

104. Enclitics retain their accents : 

1. Whenever special emphasis falls upon them: ov 
ool. 

2. When the preceding syllable is elided: kadds 3 
éoti; dap éotiv. 

3. eori has the recessive accent, éors, at the begin- 
ning of a sentence, when it signifies exstence or possi- 
bility, and after certain words, as, odK, my, el, ws, Kal, 
aX\a ;? €or. odds avOpwros ; ovK eat avOpwros. 

I05. EXERCISES. 

1. Kdpos ever dudakds. 2. Kipw® éoti dvdaxy. 
3. eve. Ki€apyos orparov. 4. Av KiXeapyw orparos.. 
5. Kvpo Bacideva Hv. 6. ’Apiorummos dé 6 Oerradds 
Eévos Hv Kipw. 7. é€v péow Tov Tapadeioov eiot ai 
TOU ToTapov myyai. 8. at d€ myyal ai Tod moTapou 
elow €K TOV Bactreiwy.. 9. Av Kipw modenos mpds 
(against) "ApragépEnv. 10. meiBerai re kat ovdAdap-— 
Bava Kovpov. 11. €or dé Kat “ApraéépEov Bacideva 
év Kehawvats. 12. ov pév eiow Kreapyo ovppaxor, 
TOV O€ TOhELioVY TUppayot Eior pupioL. 

Examine the datives in 2, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12, and observe that 
they are used with a copulative verb and denote the possessor.* 


1 This will be explained later (392). - 

2 After these words eiai retains its accent. 

8 In the order of words, “To Cyrus is a garrison;” in English, 
“Cyrus has a garrison.” 

* gy does not necessarily denote possession. 


ESSENTIALS FOR READING, 43 


RULE. 


106. The dative with the verb ¢o de (ciwi, yiyvoua) 
and similar verbs may denote the possessor. 
107. ‘l'ranslate at sight : 


The Palaces of Cyrus and Artaxerxes. 


"Evrevbev e€ehavva dia Ppvyias orabpov tapa- 

4, > \ > , > ‘a 4 e / 
odyyas 6xT® els Kodooods. “Evtavla péever quépas 
e 4 \ @ 4 € \ e , ¥ 
émta* Kal nKe Mévwy 0 @errados OmXitas eywr (hav- 
. / eo \ , 2 / 
ing) xwdiovs Kat me\TacTas TevTaKkoaiovs, ‘OdvvGiovs. 
> A > 7 \ , 4 ¥y 
Evrevdev é€edavveae otafuods Tévte Tapacdyyas el- 
Koou Kal mévTe eis Kedauvas. “Evtav0a Kvpw Baci- 

> \ la \ , A nw , 

Leva HY Kal Tapadearcos. Ara pécov d€ Tov Tapadeicoou 
_ pet (flows) 6 Maiavdpos torapds* at 5€ mynyai avrod 
(tt) etow €x TOV Bacidreiwv’ pet Sé Kal dua KedXavar. 
"Eott d€ Kat “Apragéepfov Bacihaa é€v Kedawats ént 
Tats myyats ToU Mapovouv torapod. 


Note the position of 7Kxe, éywv, Kup, trapadeicov, mota- 
Hos, mya, and compare with 55, a, 6. See foot-note, p. 27. 


108. ‘Translate into Greek : 

In Celaenae Cyrus had a palace and a park. But 
through the middle of the park flows the Maeander 
river; and it flows also through Celaenae. And Arta- 
xerxes also ‘had a palace in Celaenae. 


109. VOCABULARY. 
BactXe.os, -ov, royal ; pécos, -y, -ov, middle ; 
Bacidevov, 76, or Baoi- pécov, 7d, the middle 
hea, Ta, palace. [Meso-potamia]. 


4A, ' ‘THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


pvpios, -a, -ov, countless modhepos, 0, war. 
[myriad ]. mo\€uos, -a, -ov, hostile 

pupror, -at,-a, fen thousand. [polemic]. 

Eévos, 0, guest-friend, guest. ot moh€muor, the enemy. 

Tmapadecos, 6, park [par- ovd-AapBavo,' seize, arrest 
adise |. [syllable]. 

TNYY, -Ns, fountain, source. 

d€, post-posit. conj., du¢ ; sometimes rendered and; kat 

. o€ or 6€... Kat, and also; wai here has the 

“ahs of also. 

pev, post-posit. adv., on the one hand, Bait truly, but ; 
usually not translated ; regularly with correlative dé: 
pev ... O€, on the one hand .. . on the other, but 
usually rendered only by emphasis, 

ré, post-posit. encl. conj., avd; Lat., -que; Te... Kat 
or te kai, both . . . and. 


LESSON XII. 


IMPERFECT OF \vo. PRESENT INFINITIVE 
ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. | 


Review Lesson VI. Note especially 19, 20, 22, 28, 
25, 27, Obs.; 30, 31, 32. 


110. In Greek, as in Latin, the tenses (146, 4) are 
divided into primary and secondary. The secondary — 
tenses refer. to past time; all others are primary. 


1 For ovr- (194, 4). 


IMPERFECT TENSE. AD 


III. PARADIGMS. 
Imperfect. Infinitive. 
Active. Middle. Passive. Active. 
S. 1. Gdvov — édvounv ehvounv vew 
2. édves éhvou 
83. édve é\vETO The passive uses 44-aa1e and 
D. 2. édjderov! eddbcofov ‘he same form Passive. 
3. édvérny ehvéaOnv BY SHE THe kbeoOas 
P. 1. édvoper édvopucba 
2. édvere éhier be 
3. €Avov éhvovTo 


a. Observe that the secondary tenses have special personal 
endings; that they use the same thematic vowel (25) as the 
primary. | 
_ b. Observe that in the second person singular of the middle’ 

o is dropped and oe contracted to ov (27). 


112. Augment. In the secondary tenses of the in- 
dicative the verb receives an augment (increase) as the 
sign of past time. 

113. The augment is of two forms: syllabic, which 
prefixes e€ to verbs beginning with a consonant ; fempo- 
ral, which lengthens the initial short vowel of verbs 
beginning with a vowel or diphthong. The initial 
vowel is lengthened to the corresponding long vowel, 
but a or a always becomes y: Avw, edvov; eéha, 
Ocrov; aya, Hyov; aipéw, jpeov; nKw, HKov. 

_ 114. The imperfect is formed upon the present stem, 
and the augment prefixed to this stem transfers the 


1 The dual fornis may be omitted in all of the subsequent inflections. 


AG THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


force of the present to the past. Hence the imperfect 
regularly expresses continued past time: €Avov, I was 
loosing. It has alsoa derived meaning, like the present, 
. of attempted and customary action. 

115. ‘The ending of the present infinitive active is 
-ev, contracted with the thematic vowel e to -ew; that 
of the middle and passive is -o@au preceded by the 
regular thematic vowel. 


a. The four proper moods, in distinction from the infinitive, 
are called finzte moods. 


116. Secondary endings of the Indicative. 


Active. Middle. 
Sing. ‘Dual. Plural. Sing. Dual. _—Plural 
l. -v or — ~pev -pNv -peOa 
2. “S -TOV “TE -co -oblov -obe 
3.00 -TyHvy -vor-oav' -to -cOnv -vto 


117. The infinitive has the force of a neuter verbal 
noun, and may take the article in all its cases. It may 
at the same time, like a verb, have a subject or object 
or adverbial modifiers. It is regularly translated by ¢o 
as in English, but it may frequently. best be translated 
by a verbal noun. 

Examine the following : 

1. yp7? édavvew, it 1s necessary to march. 

2. mopeverOar ovn Hv, tt was not possible to proceed. 

3. Kal 6 oaTpamns Tovs oTpatidras puddrrew KE 
Never, and the satrap commands the soldiers to guard. 


1 Ending of the pluperfect and aorist passive ind. 
2 What is the subject of ypn, 4v; object of xeAever, etc. ? See 10, n. 


IMPERFECT TENSE. ; 47 


4. Kipos e0éde Baoihevdey, Cyrus desires to be king. 

5. (1) npyero heya, he began to speak. 

(2) npxero Tov SiaBaivew, he began the crossing. 

6. ixavot Hoav tHv yédvpay gvdarrew, they were 
able to guard the bridge. 

7. Kdpos jv apxew afvos, Cyrus was worthy to 
reign. 

8. ody wpa éoti héyeww,' it is not a time to speak. 

a. Observe that in 1, 2, the infinitive is the subject. 

6. Observe that in 3, 4, 5, (1), (2), the infinitives are the 
objects of verbs expressing wish, command, ability, beginning, 
etc.; that the subject of the infinitive is in the accusative; that 
the subject is not expressed if it is the same as the subject or 
object of the leading verb. 

ce. Observe that in 6, 7,8, the infinitives depend upon adjec- 
tives and substantives denoting ability, fitness, etc. 


RULE. 

118. As subject nominative, the infinitive is used 
chiefly with impersonal verbs like ypy, 2 2s necessary, 
etc., or with é€ovi. 

RvLgz. : 


119. As object, the infinitive is used chiefly with 
_ verbs whose action implies another action as its object, 
especially those expressing wish, command, beginning, 
power, ability, fitness, etc. 


RULE. 
120. The infinitive may depend upon adjectives or 


1 \éyew may be regarded also as subject. 


48 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


substantives similar in meaning to verbs which take an 
object infinitive, especially those denoting adzlity, fitness, 
and willingness. 

RuLE. 

121. ‘The subject of the infinitive is in the accusative. 
‘But the subject of the infinitive is regularly omitted if 
it is the same as the subject or object (direct, indirect, 
or genitive) of the leading verb. 


I22. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. €dXavvev ovK Hv. 2 ypH mopederOa. 
3. davaykn é€ott éyerOa. 4. Oehe eiferOa. 
5. tkavol yoav tas yedtpas diaBaive. 6. ovy dpa 
éott mopeverOar. 7. ai apaka. éepépovro dia Tov 
modeuiov. 8. Kedever TOUS OTpaTHyoUs héyew ToS 
oTpati@ras. 9. THv “EXAnviKhy orpatiav nOporler. 
10. €orw avOpamos ayabds. 11. ov« eore AVew THY 
yedupav. 12. ot BapBapor ta axpa édvdarrov. 
13. 7a Onpia Kupos €Oypever amd immov. 14. emi ry 
Tadpw ovK éexddve’ *“Apra&épEns tv Kvpov orpariav 
dvaBaiverv. 

I]. 1. He began to cross. 2. It is possible to 
guard the wagons. 38. It is necessary to destroy the 
bridge. 4. The bowmen pursued the wild beasts. 
5. He commanded Clearchus to come. 6. The generals 
are worthy to rule. 7. They were leading the generals 
into the tent. 8. You do not desire to obey. 9. The — 
hoplites were mustering in the plain of Castolus.— 
10. The satrap commanded the soldiers to guard their 


tents. 
1 Attempted action. 


REVIEW. 49 


‘123; 

f “ om . x 

_ QKpos, -a, -ov, topmost; Ta 
axpa, the heights {Epex, 
acme |. 

3 ld . 

avayKn, -ns, force, necessity ; 
avaykn €oTl, tt 18 neces- 
sary, one must. 

BapBapos, -ov, barbarian ; 

, e . 

BapBapos, 0,a barbarian. 

Onpiov, wild animal. 

e é l4 4 ¥ 

UKaVOS, ~H, -OV, sufficient, 
able. 

radpos, 7, ditch, trench. 

wpa, -as, time, season, prop- 
er time (hour. 

abpoile, collect, assemble ; 
mid., muster. 


VOCABULARY. 


apxa, begin, command, rule 
[arch-angel, archi-tect |. 

dia-Baivw, cross; acc. 

Ovokw, pursue. 

€Oéhw, desire, wish. 

Onpevo, hunt, chase, catch 
(Onpa, a hunt). 

Kerevor, command, bid, urge. 

Kkohvw, hinder, oppose, pre- 
vent. 

durdrra, guard [ phylac- 
tery]. 

xpy, impers., z¢ 1s needful, 
at 8 necessary. 

amd, prep. w. gen., from, 
away from |apo-logy |. 


LESSON XIV. 


REVIEW. 


Review each of the preceding lessons in order, with 


their vocabularies. 


124. The Alphabet. 


1. Give the long and short vowels. 
2. Give the proper and improper diphthongs. 


1 The following questions are intended to aid the — to classify and 
correlate the matter of the preceding lessons. 


~ 


50 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK, 


8. Give the sounds of the consonants, te 
4. Give the double consonants. 


125. Syllabication and Accentuation. 


1. How are simple and compound words divided 
into syllables?» 

2. When are syllables long by nature ? 

3. Classify the syllables according to their accent. 

4. Give the general rules for accent. 

5. Give the rule for the accent of nouns. 

6. Give the rule for the accent of oxytone words of 
the vowel declensions. 


126. I. Substantives of the Vowel Declensions. 


1. Define natural and grammatical gender. 

2. Of what genders are nouns of the first and second 
declensions ? 

3. Decline the article. Give its different uses. 

4. Decline and divide into syllables:* oxnv7%, metpa, 
Oddrarra, TeATACTYS. 

5. How do the feminine nouns of the first declension 
compare with the feminine article ? 

6. How do the masculines of the first declension — 
differ from the feminines ? 

7. Decline ayyedos, orparés, rediov, tmmos. 

8. How do the masculine and neuter forms of the 
second declension compare with the corresponding forms 
of the article. 

9. What three cases are alike in the neuter ? 


_ 1 These words are given as examples; others also should be added. 


REVIEW. D1 


Il. Adjectives of the Vowel Declension. 

1. How do the adjectives of the vowel declension 
compare with the nouns of the vowel declension ? 

2. What peculiarity of accent in the feminine plural 
of the adjectives in -osP 

3. Decline didios, arevds, amopos, axpos. 

127. Transliteration. 

1. In transliteration how are the consonants rep- 
resented ?P 

2. Give the changes of the vowels and diphthongs. 

128. Essentials for Translating. | 

1. What are the three requisites for rapid trans- 
lation ? tai 

2. How is the thought of an author best understood ? 

3. Why does not the subject always come first and 
the verb last ? 

129. Verbs. 

1. Define the theme and tense stem. 

2. Give the rule for the thematic vowel, for the 
accent of verbs. 

3. Define primary and secondary tenses. 

4. Define the active, middle, and passive voices. 

9. Give the primary and secondary endings, active 
and middle. 

6. Conjugate xededw in the present indicative active 


and middle. 


a. Hixplain the forms xerever and KeXevovor. —-- 


7. Conjugate mopevw and daivw in the imperfect 
active and middle, and translate. 


52 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


a. How is the imperfect formed from the present stem ? 
6. How do the middle forms differ from the active ? 


130. Proclitics and Enclities. 

1. Name several proclitics and enclitics. 

2. When is the accent of enclitics retained ? 

3. When does éori become eon ? 

4. When is -v movable attached to the end of a word ? 

131. Syntaz. 

1. Give the rules for the case of the subject, object, 
indirect object, and the agreement of the verb. 

2. What are the positions of the direct and indirect 
objects P 

3 Define the attributive and predicate positions. 

4. Give the rule for the agreement of adjectives. 

5. Distinguish between the appositive and predicate 
nouns. Give examples in Greek and in English. | 

6. What verbs take the dative of possessor? Give 
an example in Greek. 

7. Give the rule for the subject of the infinitive. 

8. Give the uses of the infinitive in the ighoeeias, 
lessons. 


132. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. Name from the preceding vocabularies words 
allied to orpards. 2. Give the English forms for: 
Bowwria, “Aptatos, Aapetos, "Edecos, Maoxas, Ilépons, 
IIlvAa, Lupia, dadray€, Tupratov. 

Tl. 1. kwdveu, RURVET a, epvatrov, éuddrrovro, 
apXel, apyeran, nPXOV; 1 PXOVTO. 2. 6 hoyayot emt 
tails Opors pevovow. 3. évtav0a péver Kopos kab 


FUNDAMENTAL USES OF PREPOSITIONS. 53 


“H oTparia yuepas eikoow. 4. of orpartyyot éheyov 
‘Tov Adyov Tols oTpatidras. 5. O GaTpamys eTEmreE 
‘Tovs oOTpati@tas EK THS KouNS. 6. Ta OE OTa TA TOY 
“Omhitav yyero emi Tov apakfov. 7. ot BapBapor av- 
Operon ev dc&id Hoav. 8. Ilpdgevov S€ tov Bovdriov 
éxédeve topeverOar. 9. ovK Hv eioBdddew (invade) 
eis THY Kidixiav, et (if) 6 catpamns éexddrver. 10. 
Tipdgevos 5€ 6 Boudtios E€vos Hv Kipo. 11. éevrevfev 
e€chavver oTabpovs Sv0 Tapacdyyas Tevrekaideka Els 
“locovs* évravla eweve ypépas TevTe. | 

III. 1. The satrap was deliberating. 2. The army 
appears in the plain. 38. The generals were proceeding 
through a friendly country. 4. He was leading his 
‘army to the Euphrates river. 5. But Proxenus was a 
‘guest friend of Cyrus. 6. The captains were remain- 
‘ing at the doors. 7. Cyrus commanded the generals 
to lead hoplites about * his tent. 


LESSON XV. 
| FUNDAMENTAL USES OF PREPOSITIONS. 


Review 99 a, 111, 112, 113. 


~ 133. A simple word is formed from a single stem : 
‘otparés; a compound word is formed by combining 
‘two or more stems: orparnyds [otpards + ayo. | 

~ 134. Elision generally occurs in the formation of 
‘compound words, but here without the apostrophe: 


1 wept with ace. 


54 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


map-od0s (for mapa + 680s); amayw (amd + aya), lead 
back. 

135. The augment of a compound verb is prefixed 
to the verb-theme after the preposition. Here the final 
vowel of the preposition is elided before the augment ; 
but wept and po retain the final vowel; apo may be 
contracted with the augment e€ to ov: KaréBawwov 
(xata-Baivw), descend; mpovdddaxerav (mpo-didwpt), 
give over. 

136. In composition, prepositions beimg regarded 
as prefixes lose their accent, hence compounds are 
generally accented like simple words ; but in compound 
verbs the accent never goes farther back than the aug- 
ment: danyov (amd + yyov). 

137. Prepositions, according to their original use, 
are adverbs of place; they are prefixed to the different 
cases to define more definitely the sense in which they 
are used. 

138. Hundamental Uses of the Oblique Cases. 

1. The genitive embraces both the use of the gen- 
itive proper, —that to which anything belongs, — and 
the ablative use, — that from which anything proceeds. 

2. The dative embraces both the idea of the dative 
proper, — that which is indirectly affected by the action 
of the verb (66),— and the ablative use of location, 
time, and instrument. 

3. The accusative embraces the relations of motion 
toward or extension over, and that of the object, — 
that on which the action expressed by the verb is 
exerted (38). . 





ny a NAR Ve A Bk RR sa sig mghaaetoriie 





FUNDAMENTAL USES OF PREPOSITIONS. 55 


139. Prepositions with Oblique Cases. 

1. With the genitive the promt pons in general de-. 
fine its ablative use, from a place; tov ockov, may mean 
of, from, on, than, some of the house, but with ék be- 
fore it, é« tov oikov must mean out of the house. 

2. With the dative the prepositions denote certain 
ablative uses, rest at, time, in company with: €&v TH 
oxnvy, in the tent ; adv ta adeddha@, wilh his brother. 

3. With the accusative the prepositions denote its 


generic use of motion toward, extension over: €is Tas 


Kopas éhavver, he marches into the villages. 
140. Examine the following :— 
1. amo THs apy7ns Baive, he goes from his province. 
2. ek THS Kons edadvea, he marches out of the 
village. 
3. €v TH oKHVH mévet, he remains in his tent. 
4. Kara TOU axpov erpexor, they were running down 


Jrom the summit, 


). Kata Tov hédov erpeyxor, they were running down 
the hill. 

6. 6 a@yyedos apa Kipou Frev, the messenger came 
from the presence of Cyrus. 

7. 6 adyyedos mapa Kipw péva, the messenger re- 
mains in the presence aA Cyrus. 

8. 6 adyyedos mapa Ipd€evov Arev, the messenger 
came to Proxenus. 

9. Hoav Koya. Tapa Tov Evdpdrny morapov, there 
were villages along the Euphrates river. 

10. €f' * immo diaKovor, they pursue on horseback. 


1 For emi. r becomes ¢ before a rough breathing (194, 1, @). 


56 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


ll. éort Bacihea év Kedawais émi rats myyats tod 
aorapov, there 1s a palace in Celaenae at the sources of : 
the river. 

12. émi rov mworapov e€eXavve, he marches forth to 
the banks of the river. 


a. Observe that in 1, 2, 3, the case takes a preposition 
whose root meaning is kindred to its own; eés cannot be used 
with the gen., or é« with the acc. 

6. Observe that xara, down, 4, 5, is used with the gen. and 
ace. Its meaning preelndes its use with the dative. 

c. Observe that mapa, beside, and és, upon, are used with 
gen., dat., and acc. 

. RULE. 

141. Prepositions denoting motion from are used 
only with the genitive; 7 company with, rest at, only 
with the dative; motion toward, only with the accusative. 
A preposition whose root idea does not contradict the 
fundamental idea of any of the cases may be used with 
any of them. 

142. Metaphoric Use of Prepositions. 

The prepositions have certain metaphoric or derived 
meanings, as time, cause, means, etc., which can best — 
be learned from observation, but they all depend upon 
the fundamental meaning of the prepositions. The 
following derived meanings may be examined. 

l. ézi, upon, hence also, in, at, in addition to, on ac- 
count of. 

2. apd, before, hence also, in preference to, in be- 
half of. 

3. Sua, through, hence also, by means of, by reason of. 


*? 


FUNDAMENTAL USES OF PREPOSITIONS. 57 


4. mapa, beside, hence also, in comparison with, con- 
trary to, beyond, along, during. 

5. ampds, in front of, hence also, by, at, to, off, in ad- 
dition to, in consequence of, with reference to. 


143. Compound Verbs. 

Prepositions’ in composition with verbs are used to 
define more definitely the action of the verb. ‘Thus, 
Baive, I go, with ava (up) prefixed, means, J go up; 
with kara, I go down; with éx, I go out; with ets, J 
go into, etc. . 

144. Sometimes the preposition retains its force in 
defining the relation of the case to the verb, and is 
followed by its own construction: damoomdw Tov Tora- 


pov, LT withdraw from the river. In this form the prepo- 


sition, or one of similar meaning, may be repeated : 
adtoomdw amo Tov motamnov. In this way the relation 
of the prepositions to their cases probably arose. 


145; EXERCISES. 


l. wmrép yap THS Kauns Ogos Hr. 2. of S€ oTpa- 
Tata. Kup émeiJovto. 3. Kal otpatynyol émiorevov 
Kvpo. 4. ot orpati@tas €xah€raivov Tos oTpaTnyots. 
5. 6 Opdvras éereBovdeve Kipo. 6. Kat emi TO axpov 
avaBaiver Xepicopos. 7. 65 Ktpos Apiotinme oup- 


_ Bovreverar. 8. cupBovreta cdlerPar Kredpyw. 9. 


4 “~ la \ # ¥ 
ovveTeute TH KiAtoon Tovs orpatiwras. 10. emeuze 


~ XN ¥ ‘\ ‘\ , Y > 
Tov ayyedkov mapa Tous otpatnyovs. ll. ewevov ev 
Tals Kamas Tals vmep Tov mediov. 12. THY Tappov 


1 Originally written as separate words. 


58 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


ovk éxodve Tov Kipov orpardy dtaBaiver. 13. tods 


pera Kipouv BapBdpovs ediwkov ov Tots oTpati@rats. 


; 
4 


Examine the datives in 2, 3, 4, and observe that they are the 
indirect objects (66) of intransitive verbs, which, in English, are — 


generally translated with a direct object. 


146, Dative with Special Verbs? 
‘he dative of indirect object is used with verbs sig- 


nifying to denefit, please, serve, trust, obey, befit, aid, 


satisfy, advise, exhort, or their opposites; and with 
those denoting friendliness, hostility, envy, favor, anger, 


threats, etc.; also with those of yielding, belonging, and 


seeming. 


Examine the datives in 5, 7, 8,9, and observe that they 


depend upon compound verbs. 


RULE. 


147. The dative is used with many verbs com- 


pounded with év, ovv, éwi; and some compounded — 


with pds, mapa, wept, and wd. 


148. EXERCISES. 


1. And Cyrus kept remitting the tributes to Arta- 
xerxes. 2. he soldiers obeyed, for they trusted — 


Cyrus. 3. Clearchus is consulting with Cyrus. 4. He 
advised Clearchus to lead. 5. The soldiers were angry 


with Clearchus. 6. And he marches forth through | 
Lydia to the river Maeander. 7. He was plotting — 
against the army with Clearchus. 8. I advise the 


hoplites to cross the river. 


1 Give corresponding rule in Latin, ef. p. 19}. 


CONTRACT VERBS. 


149. 
Addos, 6, hill, height. 


ava-Baiva, go up, go mand. 


émi-Bovreva, to plan or plot 
against, | 

muorevo, trust, believe, dat. 

oup-Bovredo,' advise, plan 
with ; maid. confer with, 
deliberate. 

ovup-réutra, send with. 

oolw, save, rescue; mid. 
save one’s self| sozo-dont|. 


Xareratva, be angry ; pass. 


be offended. 
Kata, prep. W. gen., acc., 
down | cata-strophe]. 


59 


VOCABULARY. 


pera, prep. w. gen., with, in 
company with; W. acc., 
after, next. 

mapa, prep. deside|w. gen., 
Jrom the side of, from; 
w. dat., dy the sede of, at, 
on, with; w.acc., to the 
side of, to, contrary to, 
along, | par-ody |. 

vmép, prep. W. gen., over, 
above, in behalf of; w. 
acc., over, beyond [hyper- 
bole]. 

yap, post-posit. conj., for. 


LESSON XVI. 


CONTRACT VERBS IN THE INDICATIVE 
AND INFINITIVE. 


Review 28, 110, 111, a,4; 112,113, 114, 115, 116. 


150. Contraction of Vowels. When an open vowel 
is followed by a vowel or a diphthong in the same 
word, the successive vowels are regularly contracted 
into a single long vowel or diphthong: tipdwr, tipav; 
prada, pvat; odet, ode. 


1 For ovv-, 194, 4. 


60 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


151. Zwo Vowels. 

1. An open and a close vowel form a diphthong 
(IV.): Baowdréi, Baorrel, wodet, moder, dtopar, otopar. 

2. ‘T'wo vowels of a like sound unite to form the com- 
mon long. But ee gives a, and oo gives ov. ‘Thus, 
pvda, pra; dynrow, Snr; Tovenrov, mornrov; but, 
Snddopat, Snrovpar; movéerov, Tovetrov. — 

3. An o sound (o or w) unites with a, ¢, or n, to 
form w. But eo and oe give ov. Thus, tipado, Tina; 
Tovéw, Tow; SnAdnrov, Snr@tov ; but, wov€omev, rot- 
ovpev ; puoOderov, poBovrov. 

4. When a or € (€ or 7) sounds come together, the 
first in order prevails and gives a ory. ‘Thus, tiaeror, 
TIMATOV 3 TiLaNTOV, TiLaTOV ; Kpvoéa, ypvTn ; yea, V7). 

152. Vowel and Diphthong. 

A simple vowel before a diphthong is generally 
contracted with the first vowel of the diphthong, and 
the second disappears, unless it can be retained as t 
subscript, a, n, @ ‘Thus, ripades, tiuas; ripdovor, 
TUILOOL; TLAN, Tia; TiAdoLuL, TIL@pL; ToLeovc, 
movovot. Buta simple vowel disappears by absorption 
before a diphthong beginning with the same vowel,’ 
and ¢€ is absorbed before ov: arovéers, qrovets 3 SnAdovCL, 
Snrovor; pvdal, pvat; vool, vot; Moréoupe, ToLorpe 


(see further 165). 


a. In the second person singular of the middle and passive. 
eat (for evar) gives et, as well as the regular contract form in . 
6. In verbs, oes and on give ov: SndAdeus, Snrois; Syron, 


1 Often only an application of the former. 


aa =P I 1 ee 3! re le 
hhh ee oor ie 


A et ie ts St) eee oe” a a 


Te ee ee ee eS a ee ee Pe ee 


CONTRACT VERBS. 61 


5yXof ; and the spurious diphthong ! ec is contracted like simple 
€: Tipdev, tiwav; Snrdev, Snrovv. 


153. Accent of Contracted Syllables. 

If either of the contracted syllables had an accent, 
the contracted syllable is accented. If the contracted 
syllable is penult or antepenult, the kind of accent is 
determined by the general rules (X., XI., XII.). If 
the contracted syllable is an ultima, it is circumflexed ; 
but if the original word was oxytone, the acute is 
retained. 

154. Write the present and imperfect indicative, 
and the present infinitive, active and middle, of the 
following verbs in the uncontracted forms, and then 
contract and accent? (843, 844, 845): | 


PRESENT ACTIVE. PRESENT MIDDLE. 
. = 4 ~ a ~ , - lal 
1. Ind., Sing. tipae, tivo Tipaomat, TiL@par 
- 4 - ~ - , - aw ¥ 
TILGELS, TIMAS  TLLAaN, TLYLG 
K. T.d.° K.T. d. 
Inf. ripdev, ripav ripder Oa, Tiwacba 
2. Ind., Sing. movéw, tow TOLEO[LAL, TOLOV[LAL 
aA , ~ 
MTOLEELS, TOLELS  ——- TOLEN, TOL 
K. To iN Ket e 
, A , ~ 
Inf. qovéev, roveiv = rover Dar, Troveto Oa 


8. Ind., Sing. dydde, dnrO dnAdopat, Snovpat 
* Onddeus, Snrots SyAdH, SyAOe 


K. 7. A. ot 


1 Generally arising from contraction, veer, Ave (115). 
4 See 73. | 8 Kat Ta Aourd, and the rest. 


62 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


155. 1. As in 154 inflect: Bodo, vikdw, dsoxéw, 
pobow. 


156. EXERCISES. 


I. Give the uncontracted forms of the following 
verbs, and the rules applicable to their contraction and 
accentuation : 

1. viKa, dpas, Bod. 2. doxeire, dpayev. 3. évikwr, 
€xddouv, €kaheiTo, evik@vTo. 4. ware, Soxel, éTipa, 
éroia, Sydor. 5. Tiamat, worodpat, Syrodpa. 6. 
TYyLay, Tovey, OnAovv, vikav. 7. TipacOa, SoxeioOa, 
puabova ba. 

II. Give the contracted forms or the following : 
1. You are honoring. He is honoring. They are hon- 
oring. 2. I was making. He was making. We 
were making. 38. We were showing. ‘They were 
showing. 4. He is conquering. They are shouting. 
You are calling. 5. They desire to see. He desired 
to see. 6. He honors the Persian. 7. ‘The hoplites 
conquer the barbarians. 


157. EXERCISES. 

1. ot orparirac TO Kdedpyw éreiovro. 2. TH 
e t Stee | A ) , n \ \ , 
voTepaia’ Kvpos €mopevero. 3. Kupos yap Tov llepony 
dv evvoray éerima. 4. 6 morapos Kadettar Mapovas.” 
5. €dnjhov d€ Tov PdBov TH TperTyn. 6. Todepety 
ikavol noav. 7. Ktpos éemeparo vuxav. 8. émel 0 
éddxen Kipw aopeverOar, Kdéapyov éxdde. 9. Kat 

a 4 > / | eS / \ “a 
Tos oTpaTi@Tats €Bda oT. ApraképEns ody orpariga 

, > “A > “~ > , > 3 ‘\ 

mopeverar. 10. évredter érerpovrTo eta BadXeuv Eis” THY 
Kiduxiav’ 7 dé eiaBodx) Hv 6005 apagitos oTEVy. 

2 So. Ase. 2 See 84. 8 See 132, II, 9; 144. 


+, a 


CONTRACT 


VERBS. 63 


RULE. 
158. The dative without a preposition is used to de- 
“note the definite time when an action takes place. 


159. 


EXERCISES. 


1. For on the following day-he was making the 


battle. 
ated. 
“into the villages. 
before. Artaxerxes. 


2.. But Clearchus called Proxenus and deliber- 
3. It seemed best to the generals to proceed 
4. Cyrus conquers the barbarians 
5. And he shouted to Clearchus to 


lead his army against (upon) the enemy. 


, 
: 


160. 


ec PoON, -ns, entrance, pass. 


. evvota,| -as, fidelity. 

| perépatos, -a, -ov, following. 
0Bos, 6, fear, dread | hy- 

|  dro-phobia]. 

Bode, shout, cry out. 
Onrdow, make clear, show 
_ (dnAos). 

OoKxéw, seem, seem best or 
good, think [dogma], 
cio-Baddw, enter, invade ; 

__ of rivers, empty. 
Kader, call, summon [ec- 
: clesiastic |. 


victory). 


i ATs Sin hae gil 


= , 
“vikdw,conquer, surpass (vikn, 


1 Observe that the final & is short. 
adjectives i in -y¢ and -oos, have final a short, cf. 42, d. 


VOCABULARY. 


opaw, see, perceive [pan- 
orama. |. 

mepaw, try, test (qetpa), 
[ pirate |. 

troéw, do, make, effect [ poet, 
poem |. 

TOAELEw, war, make or carry 
on war (modepos). Cf. 
109. 

Tinaw, value, honor (Tun). 

mp0, prep., w. gen. only, de- 
fore, in behalf of [pro- 


phet]. 
émret, CON]., when, since. 
omt, conj., that, decause 
(Lat. guod). | 


Abstracts in -eca and -o.a, from 


64. THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


LESSON XVII. 


avTos. CONTRACT NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES 
OF THE VOWEL DECLENSION. 


Review 9, 10, 41, 48, 58, 59, 61, 83; Lesson XVL., 
noting 150; 151, 1, 2, 3, 4; 152; 158. 


161. Decline the article 6 [ro]. 
162. Decline airds* [avro], self, with the endings 
of the article (9) : 
GUTOS, GUTH, avTo, 
GUTOV, GUTHS, AUTOV, 
ae 
163. Decline addos? [addo], other, another, with 
the endings of the article (9): 
Adaya Oke 


K. T. A. 


164. 1. avros, not in attributive position, in all of 
its cases may be an intensive adjective pronoun, himself, 
herself, itself. (Wat., tpse.) 

2. In the attributive position it has the meaning the 
same. (Lat., idem.) 

3. In oblate cases standing alone it has the force of 
a personal pronoun of the third person, Aim, her, it. 
(Lat., zs.) | | 

165. In contracts of the first and second dae 
a short vowel before a or before a long vowel or diph- 


1 See 820. 2 See ards (820). 


CONTRACT NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 65 


thong is absorbed, except in the singular of the first 

"declension, where ea is regularly contracted to y, but 
after a vowel or p to a. 

_ 166. The accent of the contracted forms of the first 

and second declensions is regular, except the dual of the 

second declension, which contracts é and dw into o. 

_ 167. Compounds in -oos retain the accent on the 

‘same syllable as the uncontracted nom. sing.: evoos, 

_ €UVOUS. 

- 168. Contract adjectives in -eos circumflex the last 
syllable in all forms, except the nom. dual of the second 
declensibn, which is oxytone (166). 

169. Crasis is the contraction of a vowel or diph- 
‘thong at the end of a word with one at the beginning 
of the following word. A coronis (’) is placed over the 
contracted syllable.. The first of the two words is 
generally an article or a relative (o or. a), kal OF 70: 
ol adeddoi, adehpoi; Td avTd, TavTO; 6 EK, OUK; Kat 
dyaboi, Kayabol. 


a, A final vowel of the diphthong of the first word is gener- 
ally dropped before crasis takes place, and the final vowel and 
diphthong of the article is absorbed before a. 

8. The diphthong of xaé is absorbed before all vowels and 

‘diphthongs except € and ev. 

__¢. The accent of the first word is lost, and that of the second 
retained, but the rough breathing of the article or relative takes 
the place of the coronis. 


. 
: 


170. Write the uncontracted forms of the following 


‘words, and then contract and accent (818). 
5 


66 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


l. pra, mina —— yn, earth vous, mind | 
pvad, pva yea, yh v60S, VOUS : 
is i Mae , fs 
pvaas, “vas yeas, yns vOov, VOU 
K. 7. X. K. T. dX. In sing. K. 7. ds 
2. xpuaous, golden (819) 
Xpuaeos, Xpucous xpucea, xpvon Xpuceor, xX pvaouv 
feo TA; K. T. Xd. K.T. AX, 
3. evvous,' well-disposed [ev + vovs]| (819) 
EVVOOS, EVVOUS EVVOOV, EVVOUV 
K. T. Ne } K. 7. A. 
171. EXERCISES. 


\ lA XN , 

1. Kai ovverohguer Kip@ tpds adrov. 2. Ipd€evos 
> ~ , oe ‘ > -~ € 4 > ‘\ > 
ait@ dios jv. 3. avT@ ot Kadot Te Kayalot evvor 
joav. 4. ravra doKe Tots 
A € , 
otparyyows. 5. ot BapBapor 
, la) ¥ > # 
mohk€uto. Tous adAdos elow. 
6. xavros KXéapyos npyxero dia- 
Baivev. 7. ot omdtTaL TPO avTov 
"AptaképEov joav. 8. avrot 
> es ee XN ¥ > Pai 
ETELPWYTO ETL TO AKPOV avaBal- 
vev. 9. €v Mudyrm Ta avra 





Bovdevovra. 10. etyov” 7d de. 


No. 4. Srpemrrds. 


4, ¢ + , 
péoov ot addou oTpaTHyot. 
ll. *“Aptatos mpooeiye tots oTpatidirais TOY vour. 
12. Kdpos éwodudpke Midnrov kal Kara yhv Kat Kare. 
, lal ~m _'¢ 4 rs ‘\ 7 
Oddatrav. 13. Kidpos t@ émdirn wéume proOov wevte 
1 Compounds of vois do not contract the nom. and ace.-plu. neu., as 


evvoa. 
2 Imperfect of ¢yo. Stem cey-, etyov for freyov, eeyov. 


CONTRACT NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 67 


pvas apyuvpiov. 14. ai d€ ray woheuiwy wédtar yah- 
Kat joav. 15. 6 8€ Kipos To avOparw dapa réuret, 
irmov) Kal oTpemtov xpuaovr Kal peda. 


Examine the datives in 2, 3, 5, and observe that they depend 
upon adjectives denoting friendliness, hostility, etc. 


172. The dative is used with adjectives kindred in 
meaning to verbs that take the dative (146). __ 


-a. This includes adjectives, adverbs, and some verbal sub- 
stantives. 


173. EXERCISES. 


1. He called together the rest. 2. After him an- 
other spoke. 3. Cyrus was friendly to him. 4. Oron- 
tas was sending the same pay. 5. And 
he himself desired to go upon the heights. 
6. ‘They conquered them both by land 
and by sea. 7. The barbarian has a 
plot in mind. 8. Cyrus sends the bow- 
men pay, five talents of gold. 9. Cyrus 
the brother of Artaxerxes sends the bowmen pay, five 
minae of silver. 





174. VOCABULARY. 
adehdés, 6, brother [Adel- airds, -7, -0, self (Lat. zpse) 

phia, Adelphian |. [auto-graph, tauto-logy, 
a)os, -n, -o, other, another; TO auto]. 

ot addou, the rest. yn, ns, earth, land | Ge-orge, 
apyup.ov, silver. | ge-ography]. 


1 See 92. 


68 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. ~ 


evvous, -ouv, well disposed ypuciov, a piece of gold, 


(ev + vods). money, gold. 
PVG, -AS, MINA. Wéduov, bracelet (No. 5). 
vous, 0, mind. TohvopKew, besiege. 
atpemtos, 0,necklace(No.4). mpoo-éxw, to hold to, di- 
tadavtov, talent. rect, 
xadkous, -7, -odv, of bronze, ovy'-xadéa, call together. 
bronze (xadxeos). oup'-Tokenew, make war 
Xpuaous, -H, -ovv, of gold, together with, aid in war. 
golden. | | 


LESSON XVIII. 


THE DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE 
PRONOUNS. } 


Review 9, 10, 41, 48, 59, 61, 83. | 
175. Decline obdros (6+ -vros), this, with the end- 
ings of the article (820) : 
- OUTOS avTy TOUTO 
TovTOV = TavTNS  TOUTOU 
K.T. A. 


Observe that odros takes ov in the penult wherever the last — 
syllable has an o sound (151, 3); otherwise it takes av, 


176. Decline od¢ (6 + -de), this, the following, as an 
article, and then append the enclitic demonstrative suffix 
-de (820): 

60€ Noe TOOE 
TOVOE  THOOE TOVOE 
K.T. A. 


1 For ovv-, 194, 4. 


] 
| 


DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 69 


Observe that o, being compounded with the enclitic -de in 66¢, 
takes the accent in the nom. sing. and plur. (103, 4), and retains - 
its own throughout the other forms. 


177. Decline éxetvos, that, with the endings of the 
article (820): 


nw > ] “A 
EKELVOS exeivy EKELVO 
7 > 4 
€KeivoU exelvns €KELvOU 
we +. 


178. Decline és, who, which, with the endings of the 
article, or like adrds (820): 


9 
os 


K.T. A. 


Observe that ds differs from the article in appending ¢ to 
form the nom. masc. sing., and in taking an accent in its masc. 
and fem. nom. forms as a word standing alone; that in other 
forms the relative is made from the article by writing the rough 
breathing (‘) in place of the initial 7. Hence, to inflect the 
relative, write the article with the rough breathing in place of 7, 
appending -s to form the nom. sing. masc., and accent all its 
forms. — 


179. When the demonstrative pronoun agrees with 
a noun (83), it regularly takes the article and stands in 
the predicate position (81): otros 6 avOpwios ; Tavrns 
THs Tapddov. | 

180. ovros and ode, this, generally refer to what is 
near or present ; éxetvos, that, to what is remote. 

181. In referring to an object already mentioned, 
ovros is used; but in referring to what follows, dde. 


70 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


182. The article in certain expressions, and eepesstiy a | 
before pév and 8¢, retains its demonstrative force: 6 wev — 

. 6 0é, this... that, the one... . the other, he... the 
rest, etc. 6 Sé without preceding 6 pé& frequently — 
means dut he, and he; in the nominative this always 
introduces a new subject. 

183. Examine the following : — 

l. cupréure aitn Tovs oTpati@ras ovs Meévar clye, 
he sent with her the soldiers which Menon had. 

2. NapBaver, of elow avT@, Tovs To&dras, he takes 
the bowmen that he has. | 

8. els Ta TAota EuBaivovor a Kopos emeume, they 
embark on the boats that Cyrus sent, | 


Observe that the relatives in 1, 2, 8, have the same number 
and gender as their antecedents; that in 1 and 3, ovs and @ are 
respectively the objects of eZye and méwrret, but in 2, of is the 
subject of efoiv and takes the verb in the same person as its 
antecedent. 


Ruiz. 


184. A relative agrees with its antecedent in num- 
ber and gender and represents its person, but the case — 
of the relative depends upon the construction of the 
clause in which it stands. 

185. Examine the following : — 

1. dydot ods tryna, he shows whom he honors. 

2. exe ods Eheyov, he had whom I mentioned. 


Observe that in 1, 2, the antecedents are omitted and the 
relative’clause becomes a substantive, the object of the verb. 


DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 71 


RULE. 





_ 186. The antecedent of a relative may be omitted 
_ when it is implied in the context or is indefinite. 


187. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. ebro. éroiovy ovrws. 2. Kadris edeye rade. 
3. d héyovow Exetvos dyyédNea. 4. of ev pévovot, ol 
dé mopevovrar. 5. Kal 6 pév tadra déye. 6. Tov 
avOpwrov exe os emeBovdeve TH & Lr  T. Toe 
VOp x H oTparia. 7. To av- 

‘ a 

Oparw moTevonev Ov Kipos émeure. 8. Kal Kedever 
avTous héyew TavTa Tots OTpaTL@TaLs. 9. Ol OTPATLO- 

Re > ~ > 4 \ ey ‘ X ld 
TAL Ol TE GUTOV EKEivoU, Kal oi aAAOL TOV ToTapoy S1E- 
Bawov. 10. ot d€ airdv re EBaddov Kai Ta Uroliyia 
Ta exeivov. 11. pet S€ Kat odTos dua Kedawor, Kal 
éuBadrre eis Tov Maiavdpov morapdv. 12. ot 8 
¥ > A {2 ‘ ‘ , \ A 
ahdou éret HKov, ToUs Tapaovs. Siaprdlovar Kal TadTa 

BS / ¢ \ ¢ a Sa t 
TO gab biaeea 13. o8 Bey omAiTaL avrov €mevov, ob 
dé tof Sra, ot jerar avUT@ €v TY a auia nravvov émt 


TOUS OTpaTioras EKELVOU. 


II. 1. And he himself said these things. 2. After 
these Proxenus speaks as follows. 3. We destroyed 
the wagons which we had. 4. He seizes the boat of 
that one. 5. But he commanded and the rest obeyed. 
6. The generals report these things to Cyrus. 7. Cy- 
rus desires to be king instead of that one. 8. Aris- 
tippus sends back the soldiers whom he has. 9. But 
on account of this the river is called Marsyas. 


72 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


188. 

éxeitvos, that (Lat., de) ; 
often best translated fe, 
she, at, as emphatic per- 
sonal pronoun. 

ode, this, the following. 

os, who, which, what (Lat., 
git). 

ovtos, this (Lat., hic); he, 
she, it, as emphatic per- 
sonal pronoun. 

vrolvyiov, beast of bur- 
den (bmo-Ciyrov, under 
the yoke). 

-ayyedho, announce, report 
(ayyeNos). 7 

at-ayyehhw, bring back 
word, report. 


VOCABULARY. 


apmalw, seize, plunder 
[harpy]. 

Si-apmalo, tear in pieces, — 
lay waste, plunder, rav- 
age (Lat., diripio). 

Barrow, throw, throw at, 
hit, hit with stones. 

éu-Badrw,' throw in, inflict, 
invade ; of rivers, empty. 

€ui-Baive, go into, embark. 
péw, flow [rheum]. 

avTi, prep. w. gen., zustead 
of (anti-dote]. 

avrov, adv., here, in this 
place (abrés), 

ovtws, before a consonant 
ovTw, adv., thus, so. 


LESSON XIX. 


EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS.? 


Review 16, 19, 20, 22, 28, 24, 25, 27, 28, 30, 31, 
110, 111, a, 6; 112, 113, 114, 115, 116. 

189. 1. The consonants are divided first according 
to the organs of speech by which they are formed. 


1 For év- (194, 4). 


2 If it should seem desirable to review here from Lesson XV., review 
questions may be found in Lesson XXVI., page 106. 





EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS. 73 


ORDERS. 


SmootH, Mipp1Le, Rove, 
or Surd. or Sonant. or Aspirate. 


Labials, 7 B Deicisiiph 
CLASSES. Linguals, 7 3) Bris, Si\Ny P50P 
Palatals, « y x 


2. The consonants are divided further according to 
the greater or less influence of the organs in their for- 
mation into: (a) Semi-vowels, A, pw, Vv, p, which are 
called liquids, and o, a sibilant ; , v, and y-nasal (VI.) 
are called nasals ; (6) Mutes, the nine remaining conso- 
nants as given above. 

3. These nine mutes are divided, according to the 
quality of voice in articulation, into smooth, middle, and 
rough. Mutes of the same class are called cognate, 
since they are formed by the same organs, — lips, 
tongue, or palate. Mutes of the same order are called 
co-ordinate. 


Observe that in the diagram the classes of mutes stand in 
parallel lines, and those of the same order in the same column. 


190. The double consonants are formed by the 
coalescence of the mutes with the sibilant o; wW from 
aa, € from xo, C from do (VIIL., 2, N.). 

1g1. A rough consonant is never doubled, but 74, 
Kx, TO, are always written instead. 

192. The only consonants that can end a Greek 
word are vy, p, and s._ The only exceptions are é« and 
ove, or ovx, which have other forms, é€ and ov, — ée€ 


74 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


before vowels (46), ovx before smooth, and ovy before 
rough vowels (68). 

193. Initial p is regularly doubled when by inflec- 
tion or composition a simple vowel is brought before it : 
pet, epper, karappet, flowing down | catarrh |. 

194. In the formation and inflection of words :*— 

1. Before a lingual mute, 7, 6, 0, a labial or palatal 
mute becomes co-ordinate, and another lingual be- 
comes o: 


Br and dr become ar yz and y7 become xr 
To &< pd : “c BS KO “é x5 “ ys 
ee Reo a he KE Soy ein ip 


yeypamrau for yey pab-Tae 


ereuhOnv “ émeut-Onv 
TéTAaAKTAaL ==“ TETaY-TAL 
EXexOnv “* €dhey-Onv 
mémevotar ‘ memeO-rat 
éreioOnv “ émeO-Onv 


a. A smooth mute 7, x, 7, brought before a rough breathing 
either by elision or in forming a compound word becomes the 
cognate rough: é’ im7ov, apaprralw (a7r0 + apace). 


2. Before o; labial and palatal mutes become smooth, 
and wo is written w, and «xo, € A lingual mute is 
dropped : 

ypdibo for ypad-ow mépabo for wewt-ow 


heEw “ ey-ow meiow “ qrel-cw 


1 The following rules are given here partly for future reference. Note 
__ in this lesson especially 2, 4. 


FUTURE AND AORIST INDICATIVE. 75 


8. Before p (labial) a labial becomes p, a palatal, +, 
and a lingual, o: 


yeypappa. for yeypad-par 
Hpy-par =“ px-pas 


TETELO [Lat meémrevO-wau 


“ec 


4. v before a labial becomes p; before a palatal, y 
(nasal); before a liquid it is changed to that liquid ; 
before o it is generally dropped and the preceding 


vowel is lengthened, a to a, « to a, o to ov: 


éuBarrw for €v-Badho 


se 


ovyKahéw Ouv-Kahew 


ovihapBave “ ovv-LapBavw 


66 


AVovar Avovaot 


- 


195. Future and Aorist Indicative : 


Future (826). Aorist (827). 
Active. Middle. Active. Middle. 
Sing. 1. AXtow Dicouar edAvoa edvoa~NY 
2. voers ioe, yn eAtvoas €dvow (aco, a0) 
sia ee ce, ae Oe €l\voe  €AvVOaTO 
te ON ee ag 


Infin. Adoeww dAtvoecMar AVoa dicacba 


a. Observe that: 1. The future differs from the present in 
adding o to the theme. 2. The aorist differs from the imperfect 
in adding o to the theme and a instead of °/.. in all forms except 

_ in the third person sing.; that it omits v of the first person sing. 

3. The aorist active inf. takes the ending -as, and accents the 


penult. 


76 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


d. Observe that the future and the aorist both have o, but 
the aorist as a secondary tense has an augment in the indicative ; 
that the second person sing. middle of the future and aorist 
drop o and contract (27; 151, 3; 152, a). 

196. The future stem is formed by annexing the 
tense suffix -o°/,. to the theme. ‘The personal endings 
are primary. 

197. ‘he first aorist stem is formed by appending 
the tense suffix -oa to the theme. In the first person 
singular pv is dropped, and in the third a is changed to e. 
As a secondary tense the aorist has augment and sec- 
ondary endings in the indicative. 

198. Most verbs ending in a short vowel lengthen 
this vowel before the tense suffix in all tenses except the 
present and imperfect." a and e become », o becomes 
w, but a after ¢€, 1, or p becomes a: mrovéw, Tornoe, 
Tes ViKdw, viKHTw; Sndrdw, Synrocw; TEpde, 
TELPATO. 

199. A labial mute at the end of a theme unites 
with o of the tense-suffix of the future or first aorist 
and forms w, a palatal with this o forms €, a preceding 
lingual is dropped (194, 2). 

200. The theme of some verbs with presents in €, 
as apmdlw, calw, end in 8: dpad-,cwd-. In forming 
the future and first aorist of these verbs 6 is dropped 
before o: dprdoew, erwaa, (194, 2). 

201. ‘I'he Future Indicative represents an action that 
will take place at a future time: Avow, [ shall loose, or 


IT shall be loosing. 
1 Except second aorist system (203). 


FUTURE AND AORIST INDICATIVE. 717 


202. The Aorist Indicative represents the simple oc- 
currence of an action in past time, corresponding to the 
Historical Perfect in Latin: €Avoa, L loosed. 


a. The aorist infinitive not in indirect discourse has the same 
time as the present, but differs from it in denoting a single act. 


203. Some verbs have a Second Aorist active and 
middle formed from the theme of the verb with °/,. af- 
fixed. These tenses in the indicative are inflected like 
the imperfect (111): €yw, e€#, second aorist active, 
exxov, mid. éoyounv, I had (531). It regularly has 
the force of the first aorist (530). 

204. Give the future and aorist ind. and inf. act. 
and mid. of the following verbs : 

1. Kwdriw, kehedvo, Topevw, ToLeéw, Bovrevw. 

2. méura, éyw, Tew, apralo. 


Trépabo Trepapopat eepaba erepabapnv 
K.T.X. K.T.X. K. TA; K.T. A. 


205. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. ot weAtaorai wédtas eoyov. 2. 6 Tlépons 
‘ A ¥ e “~ A > A 
OTpentov xpvcouv exye. 3. 6 Kipos tov adehpov 
a Ss a ee + SP a AS PES ¥, 
opa. 4. Kavrn éptd\noev avtov. 95. avTy avTor eTeice. 
6. Kdpos éf’ aydéns emopevero, 7. aipetrar’ mrode- 
pey mpos Iluocidas. 8. orpatiay ovvéde€ev amd Tov- 
~ , e + »¥ , 
Tov Tov ypuciov. 9. of ardor apEovro topeverOau. 
2 a) A > ‘ a) ‘ A b] , 
10. é€vrad0a Ktpos apiOuov tov orpatiwrav eroinoev 
év T@ Tapadeiow. 11. ov tHv Tov BapBdpwr diriay 
aipjoopa. 12. mapa tHv yédupay Tov ToTamov TéEU- 
1 Historical present. The present in narration is frequently used 
vividly for the aorist. 


78 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


at KeXevovor’ dvraxyv. 13. Kal Tovrovs Tos oTpa- 
Tiworas exédXevore oY aiT@ oTpareverIar. 14. Kali Tovs 
ovv Kipw BapBdpovs édiwka ody toiade” Tois oTpa- 
Tuotas. 15. évreddey e€ehavver dia THs AvKaovias 
oTaQwovs wevTE Tapacdyyas TpLaKoVTA. TavTHY THY 
xopav Suppracer. | 

II. 1. The soldiers will lead this man to Clearchus. 
2. He will send with her a guard. 3. But I will 
come at once. 4. And Cyrus summoned him from his 
province. 5. The barbarians upon the heights hin- 
dered him. 6. He himself took part in an expedition 
against these countries. 7. They will command. the 
Persians to destroy the bridge. 


200. VOCABULARY. 
apiOuds, 6, numbering, enu- tion, make war; wid., 
meration | arithmetic |. take part in an expedition 
apxy, -Ns, rule, province. (orparés). 


Tpvaxovra, indecl., thirty. oavd-déyw, collect (déyo, 
prria, -as, friendship, affec- gather). 

tion (piduos). diiéw, dirjow, ete., love 
aipew, aipyow, etc., take, (diros). | 

seize; mid. choose [her- pds, prep. w. gen., in 


esy |. Jront of, from; w. dat., 
pera-TréuTra, send for or af- near, at; w.acc., towards, 
ter ; mid. summon. to, against | pros-ody |. 


orpateva, make an eapedi- evOvs, adv., at once. 


* Explain the use of this tense. 
2 Near at hand; more emphatic than edros. 


CONSONANT DECLENSION. 79 


LESSON XX. 
CONSONANT DECLENSION. 


Race S08 OFOR.g XI. Wy XID XLS; 
6; 7, a, 6, (1), (2), (3); 8; 40; 43, 1, 2, 3; 192; 
194, 2, 4. 


207. The third declension includes all nouns whose 
stem ends in a consonant or a close vowel (c or v), and 
is called the consonant declension. The stem of the 
nouns of this declension is regularly found by dropping 
the case ending of the gen. sing., -os. 

208. Stems Ending in a Consonant. 


PARADIGMS. 
6 pvdag 6 Opaé 6 duyas 
(dvAax-) (@pqx-) (puyac-) 
watchman Thracian - fugtive 
Singular. 
N. ovda€ Opaé gpuyas 
G. dvdakos @pakds dpuyddos 
D. dvdaxe Opaxi puydou 
A. dvhaka Opaka dvyada 
V. dvhaé @pak puyas 
Dual. 
N.A.V. dvdake Opake duydde 
G.D. dvdrdKow @paxow uy adoouw 





THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


80 
Plural. 

N.V. dvrakes Opaes puydodes 
G. dvddkov _ Opakav puyddev 
D. dvdr\akéu* paki? guydaou 
A. dvdakas Opakas  buyddas 

n paray& TO OvoLa 
(padrayy-) (6vopar-) 
phalanez name 
Singular. 
N. ¢dddrayé ovopa 
G. ddadayyos OVvOfaTOS 
D. ¢dadrayye Ovomate 
A. darayya ovopa 
V. dadray& ovopa 
Dual. 
A.V. dadrayye OVOMATE 
G.D. dadrayyor dvoydrow 
' Plural. 
No. 6. @épaé. N.V. ddhayyes ovopata 
G.. dardyyewv 6vOMaTwY 
D. dddrayé* ovopact 
A. dddayyas évopara 


a. Observe that the nom. sing. of masc. and fem. nouns is — 


formed by annexing -s to the stem and making the 


euphonic changes (194, 2). 


necessary 


6. Observe that the nom. sing. of neuters is the same as the 
stem with the necessary euphonic changes (192). 

e. Observe that the nom. and voc. of the masc. and fem. 
- nouns are alike, that the nom., acc., and voc. of the neuters are. 
alike, and the plurals end in a (61, 4, (3)). 


1 The ending in the dat. plur. is -ou. 


CONSONANT DECLENSION. 8] 


d. Observe that the rules for accenting nouns (48) regularly 
-apply to the nouns of this declension, except monosyllables of 
the third declension, like @pa&, which accent the gen. and dat. 
_of all numbers on the ultima, -ovv and -wv having the circumflex 
(43, 3). 
_e. Observe that the masc. and fem. nouns have the same 
case endings; that the gender of nouns of this declension must 
be frequently learned by observation. 


209. Monosyllables of the third declension accent 
the genitive and dative of all numbers on the ultima, 
-ow and -wy have here the circumflex. 

210. Write a table of the endings of the consonant 
declension, marking their quantity. 
_ a. Decline as above: 6 Odépa€, -axos; 7d ypypya, 


“-aTos; TO OTPaTEVpA, -aTOS; TO appa, -aTOS. 
2iI. EXERCISES. 


~ \ ‘\ “A 3 , ‘ 
l. mpo@tov mpos Tovs Opakas emoheunoa. 2. TO 
9 nw e “A , 

ovopa 8 attyn €or Kedawai. 3. of dmdirar Odpaxas 
¥ @ > -Qre- 9A 
€xyovor. 4. ovTou els Avdiav aire 

- e ~ , an an Y 
Hkov. 9. hoBov movovar Tots tn- 
mos. 6. Kdéapyos Aakedaipo- 
d \ 7 ‘2 \ 
wos guvyas nv. 7. Hye 70 
“OTpaTevpa KaTa péoov TO TOU 
pdarayyos. 8. Kal rods duyddas 


> la ! 5) ~ 4 
exekevoe GUY avT® oTpatever Oa. 





; A ol 
9. addo dé orpdrevpa aita ocuvehé- 
2 3 - 4 eS , 
«ro ev Xeppovnow. 10. mapayyéddXe To “Aptotinr@ 
2 4 A 4 a , ~ 
“amomeupar o eixe oTparevpa. ll. evrava Hevia ro 
ied a A nA 
“Apkads os ait@ ovvédeye TovTO TO oTparevpa NKELY 
: 6 


82 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
: 
mapayyerre. 12, 6 d€ orparevua ovvéheSev ard Tov- | 
la , b ee | id aA ay la ' 
Tov TOV ypnmaTwv Kal émohgue Tots Opagi.' 13. Ko- 
, 2792 Y Vip , Soe 
pos tapniavvev ep “ appatos kal n Kihiooa €f ap- 
? e 4 > ‘\ A lA 
papaéns. 14. at dudpvyes amd tov Tiypnros mora- 
fe See p \ A A382 > a > , | 
feov péovot’ Kal mota mer” ev avtais: eta Baddovor 
dé eis Tov Evdparnvy. 


Examine the datives in 4, 5, 9, 11 (ad7@), and observe that 
they denote the person or thing for whose advantage, benefit, 
etc., or disadvantage, harm, etc., something is or is done; that 
they are not closely connected with the verb like the indirect 
object (66), which must always be expressed or implied, but are’ 
merely added to sentences which would be complete without 
them. Observe that this dative is generally translated by for. 


RULE. 


212. The person or thing for whose advantage or 
disadvantage anything is or is done is put in the 
dative. : 


213. . EXERCISES. 


_ 1. He was leading the army for him. 2. I will 
do these things. 3. He was pursuing the phalanx. 
A. But they were wearing breastplates. 5. And he 
collects both a barbarian and a Greek army. 6. But 
he, himself, held the Thracians whom he had in his 
army. 7. And he commanded the phalanx to proceed. 


1 Depends upon émodguer; verbs of contending with, etc., take the 
dative (225, a). 

2 194, 1, a. 

8 Dissyllabic verbs in -ew contract only -ee and -eee. 


LIQUID AND LINGUAL STEMS. 


214. 

“dppa, -atos, 76, chariot 
(No. 7). 

dppadpata, 7, covered car- 
riage (appa + apaka). 

BapBapuiKds,-, -dv, foreign, 
barbarian; to BapBap- 
ukov (SC. oTparevpa.), 
the barbarian or Persian 
army. 

di-@pv&, -vxos, 7H, ditch, 
canal. 

Opa, -Kos, 0, Thracian. 

Oapa€, -axos, 6, breastplate 
(No. 6) [thorax]. 

OvOpL.a,-aTOS, TO, name [syn- 
onym |. 3 

OTPATEVvLA, -aTOS, TO, ar- 
my, host (Lat., evercitus) 

_ (orpards). 

haray€, -yyos, n, a line of 
battle | phalanx]. 


83 


VOCABULARY. 


duyds, -ddos, 0, fugitive, 
evtle. 

pvra€, -akos, 6, a guard ; 
pl., a bodyguard. 

XpHpa, -aros, To, a thing 
used ; pl. goods, property, 
money. 

Tap-ayyédhw, send word 
along, send orders, order. 

Tmap-ehavva, march or ride 
by. 

méw, sail [ FLOW, FLEET]. 

mpatov, adv., first (adj., 
Tpatos, first ). 


OTparos, army encamped. 

oTparevpa, divisions of an 
army, army, host. 

otpatid, the effective force 
nm the field or on the 
march, 


LESSON XXI. 


: LIQUID AND LINGUAL STEMS — VARIA- 
TIONS IN THE SINGULAR. 


Review preceding lesson ; 


192; 194, 2, 4. 


215. Luphony of Consonants. 
vt, vd, vO are dropped before -o in inflections, and the 


84 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


preceding vowel lengthened, as in 194, 4: adpyovor 
(apxovr-o1), commander. | 

216. v alone is dropped before -ou of the dative 
plural without lengthening the final vowel: myepoor 
(1ryenov-or). 

217. The Nominative. Stems in vy, p, o, ovr, reject 
ao in the nominative and lengthen ¢€ toy, and o to a. 
Final r is dropped (192): qyeuar, -dvos, apywr, -ovros ; 
matyp,' matépos, father, 

218. The Accusative. Barytone? stems in 7, 8, 8, 
after a close vowel (1, v) regularly drop the lingual and 
annex v: xapis, xapuv. 

219. The Vocative. ‘The vocative, which is regu- 
larly like the nominative, is like the stem: (a) in bary- 
tone stems ending in a liquid: yeirwy, yetrov;* (4) in 
stems ending in vd- and o-: éAzis, édmi (192). 

220. Decline: 6 yyeuor,’ -dvos; 6 pv, pnvos; 6 
Saipwyr, -ovos; 9 xapts, Tos; H EAmris, -idos ; 6 apxwr, 
-ovtos (part. as subst. voc. dpywv); 7 xelp, xepds.” 

Observe that some nouns from their signification may be 


either masculine or feminine, or common gender ; that stems end- 
ing in a labial or palatal mute are either masculine or feminine. 


221. Gender of the Consonant Stems. 
‘The gender of these nouns must be often learned by. 


1 Special examples in p and o will be noticed later. 

2 See IX.; 3, ¢. 

8 Baryione stems in -yr, except participles, have voc. like the stem, but 
these are rare. 

4 No variations in the plural. See 821. 

5 xeip has xepow in the gen. and dat. dual, and yepoi in the dat. plur., 
in the form of the original stem (821). Most stems in p- are masculine. 


ee 


LIQUID AND LINGUAL STEMS. 85 


observation, but the following general rules may be 
given : : 
1. Stems ending in a labial or palatal mute are either 
masculine or feminine. | 
- 2. Masculine stems end in », p, and vr. Exc. 4 
xeip. 

3. Feminine stems end in 6, and feminines are most 


-nominatives in ts. 
4. Neuter stems end in az. 
222. Give examples of nouns illustrating the above 


rules for gender. 


223. The Case Endings of the Third Declension. 


Masc. AND Fem. NEvt. 
Singular. 
N. -s or none none 
G. -os (-ws) -os (-ws) 
i 9 Rees: “t 
A. -a (-v) : like nom. 
V. like nom. or like stem like nom. 
Dual. 
NA? V:. --e -€ 
G.D.  -ouw -OLV 
Plural. 
N. -es 3 “a. 
G. -wv -wV 
D. -ot -ol 
A. -as ax: 
224. EXERCISES. 


wy 38 4 > / / b] \ i 

a l. ot yyepdves Efatvovtro mAnaiov. 2. Ev pev TH 
a pq 5 

dpirrepa yeupt Td Tofov cixe. 3. ot dé ciyov Wedia 


86 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


\ a / , > ld ¢ 
mept Tats yepoiv. 4. Onpiows éemdnoialoy ot trou. 
~ Q A fae / ] 7 ee 
0. TOMpayua €oT. TapamAno.oy exelvw. 6. Ta omhra 
TolS OTpaTimrats emi apakav yyeTo. 7. aya TH 
NEPA HkKov ayyehor Tapa Tov oTpatyyov. 8. 6 dé © 
€d\midas Kaas déye. 9. yeitwy oiK@ TH “EANad:. 
10. 6 Ktpos tokenpyoa T@ TaTparyn dv Tots duyact. 
ll. ot orpati@ta. Tov Kata pHnva pucfdv édepor. 
12. of orpati@tar Tots yyewoor EOédovor weiferOa. 

¥ c , € , eter Ba a A ~ 
13. eve o Kdéapyos vanpéras, ot avt@ ovK TOV picOod — 
Y A 
eveka LOvoY VINpEeTHTOVTaAL GAAA Kal’ THS YapLToOS. 


Examine the datives in 4, 5,7, 9, 10 (catpdzy), and observe | 
that the words upon which they depend signify approach, near- — 
ness, likeness, agreement, association, or their opposites, as 
in 10. 

RULE. 

225. The dative is used with all words implying © 

nearness, likeness, association, or opposition. | 


a. This class includes verbs of following, discoursing with, 
mixing, contending with, ete. 


226. EXERCISES. 


1. The army has fair hopes of safety. 2. On the © 
following day they proceeded with a guide. 3. He - 
was warring with the Persians. 4. But the soldiers 
were angry with their leaders. 5. And Cyrus sum-— 
moned the generals of the Greeks. 6. Of the Greeks — 
there were ten thousand shield (used as a collective noun) — 
and twenty chariots. | 


1 Kai not at the beginning of a sentence or clause, has force of a/so, 
even, etc. See 109. 





LIQUID AND LINGUAL STEMS. 


227. 

apioTepos, -a, -dv, left ; év 

apioTepa (Sc. yeLpt), on 
the left (Lat. sinister). 

_ apxwv, -ovros, 6, leader, 
commander, chief; higher 
title than orparnyéds, 
commander of a division 

of an army (apyw). 





No. 8. ’Aoris. 


aomis, -idos, 4, a shield 
(Nos. 1, 8). 

yeiTwv, -ovos, 6, neighbor. 

daiuwy, -ovos, 6, divinity, 
spirit | demon |. 

e€Amis, -idos, 7, hope. 

nyEeeev, -ovos, 0, leader, + 
guide, commander (ayw). 

pnp, unvos, 6, month | MOON, 
MONTH |. 


87 


VOCABULARY. 


TApa-TAYCLOS, -a, -ov, NCAT 
by, similar, like(adyotos). 

Tyo ios, -4, -ov, near, nergh- 
boring ; mnoiov, adv. 

Tpaywa, -aTos, 70, deed, 
act ; pl., affairs, trouble 
(1parrw,do)| pragmatic |. 

cwTnpia, -as, safety, deliv- 
erance (walw). 

vmnpeTys, -ov, servant, at- 
tendant. : 

Xapts, -tros, 9, favor, grat- 
itude. 

xeip, xerpos, 7, hand, wrist 
| chiro-graphy |. 

oixéw, dwell, live (oikos). 

mAnoidlw (mrAynovad-), ap- 
proach (adyaios). 


vanpetew, serve, supply 
(varnperns). 
add, adversative conj., 


stronger than dé. 

apa, adv., at the same time, 
together with, dat.; apa 
™ npéepa, at daybreak 
[SAME, SOME, hom-ily |. 

povov, adv., only, alone, 
(udvos, alone) {monk, 
monad, mono-theism |. 


a. Give the allied words in this vocabulary. 


88 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


LESSON XXII. 


PRESENT, FUTURE, AORIST PARTICIPLES, 
ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. 


Review 23, 196, 197; 208, a, 6; 217, 219, a; 
Deo. 


228. ‘The Participle is a verbal adjective which has 
certain tenses and governs the same case as the verb to 
which it belongs. 

229. Examine the following: 


PARTICIPLES. . 
hvwv (Avovt-), loosing (822). 


Active. — Middle. 
l. Pres. \éwv, -ovoa, -ov vdpEVOS, -y, -ov 
hvovTos, -ovons, -ovTos (pass. uses the same 
K.T.X. form as the mid.) 
2. Fut. dgwtowv, -ovoa -ov vadpevos, -n, -ov 
VaovTos, -ovaNS, -OVTOS 
K.T.X. 
8. dor. iods, -cadoa -cav vodpevos, -y, -ov 


£ £ 
AVTAVTOS, -TATNS, -TAVTOS 
iT. 


a. Observe that the active participles form their stems by 


annexing -vT to the tense stem of the verb (23) (perf. act. adds_ 


-oT); that the middle adds -pevo. 
6. Observe that the participles in -os belong to the vowel 
declension, and are declined like 6X0s (70, 817); that the 





™ ee 


PRESENT, FUTURE, AORIST PARTICIPLES. 89 


mase. and neut. active participles belong to the consonant declen- 
sion, as dpyov, dpxovtos (220); and that the nom. sing. of the 
latter is formed according to 208, 4, and that of the former ac- 
cording to 217; that the feminine with ending -ca' is of the 
first declension, and is inflected like dua£a (41, c¢, 2). 


230. The participles in their inflection are accented 
with the regular accentuation of nouns. 

231. Decline apywr, devywv, pépav. 

232. Decline wv, being, like Wov: wv, ovoa, ov (av, 
pres. part. of verb etyi, de), (823). 

233. Decline Avdpevos, Auodpevos, SuwEdpevos. 

234. <Attributive Participle. 

Examine the following : 

1. 6 Bacidevov ’Apragépéns, the reigning Artaxerees, 
or Artaxerxes who is reigning. 

2. audi dyopay mryOovaav, about the time of full 
market. : 

3. apxav, a commander. 

4. 6 apywr, the commander. 

5. 6 dépwr Sapa, he who bears gifts. 

6. of d€ dudEavres Tayd éravovro, those who were 


pursuing quickly stopped. 


a. Observe that in 1, 2, the participle is used like an adjec- 
tive, and that it may be translated like a relative clause. 

6. Observe that in 3, 4, 5, 6, the participle being used alone 
or with the article, as an adjective in like situation, has the force 
of a substantive, and is often best translated by he who or those 
who. 


1 -ga is for -ta (-vt-1a, -voa), t passing into o before «, and » then was 
dropped and the preceding vowel lengthened (194, 4). 


90 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


RULE. 


235. The attributive participle may be used like an 


adjective, both in qualifying a noun and as a substan- 
tive. 

236. Circumstantial Participle. 

Examine the following : 

l. a. Tadra héEas, éropevero, having said these things 
he advanced, or after he had said these things he advanced. 

b. tavTa héywv €mopevero, saying these things he 
advanced. 

c. €mopevero Tadta heEdpevos, he advanced about 
to say these things, or to say these things. 

2. H&iov ddehdods av adrod, he asked because he was 
his brother. 

3. 70 “EXAnvixdy nOpoiler ws pddiota émuKpuTTope- 
vos, he was collecting his Greek force as secretly as 
possible. 

4. avtayopalovtes atrov elav, they subsisted by pur- 
chasing provisions in return. 

5. Ke otparevodpevos, he came for the purpose of 
taking part in the expedition. 

6. rovs opKous hvwv, THY Sikny exe, if he broke his 
oaths, he has his deserts: 

7. pécov TO éavTov eywv, TOU Kvpov evwrdpou e€w 
nv, although he occuyned the centre of his own forces, he 
was outside of the left wing of Cyrus. 

8. HKe Omhitas Exwv xihiouvs, he came with one thou- 
sand hoplites. 





ee Ee ee 





PRESENT, FUTURE, AORIST PARTICIPLES. 9] 


9. ovddéEas orpdrevpa éerohiopKes Midnror, he col- 
lected an army and laid siege to Miletus. 

10. perameuropévov airod, ok eOéd\w édOetv, al- 
though he continues to send for me, I do not wish to go. 


a. Observe that the tenses of the participle denote time pres- 
ent, past, or future relatively to the time of the principal verb. 
Thus, in 236, 1, a, he spoke before he advanced; 4, he ad- 
vanced while speaking; c, he advanced before he spoke, or for 
the purpose of speaking. 

6. Observe that these participles add a circumstance con- 
nected with the action of the leading verb: that they express 
respectively time, cause, manner, means, purpose, condition 
“(translated by 7/), concession, and any attendant circumstance. 

c. Observe that in 1, c; 5, the future participle is regularly 
used with verbs of motion, like the Latin supine in -wm, to express 
purpose. 

« d. Observe that these participles are regularly translated by 
a Clause of time, cause, etc.; that in 9, the participle is best 
translated by a co-ordinate verb. 

e. Observe that in 10, the participle agrees with a genitive 
not connected with any word in the sentence, and forms a distinct 
dependent clause with a change in the subject without introduc- 
ing a finite verb and conjunction. This is called the genitive 
absolute, corresponding to the ablative absolute in Latin. It 
can denote any relations of the circumstantial participle, but it 
may frequently be translated by a preposition and verbal noun. 


RULE. 


237. The tenses of the participle are regularly pres- 


1 These indicate only the most common relations of the circumstantial 
participles. They are classified by the predominant element, and the same 
participle may belong to more than one class, as time, cause, concession. 


92 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
ent, past, or future relatively to the time of the principal 
verb. 

Ruue. 


238. ‘The circumstantial participle may define the 


circumstances of an action. 


RULE. 


239. The circumstantial participle and a noun not 
the same as the subject or object of the main verb, may 
be put in the genitive absolute. 


240. EXERCISES, 


* 


I Yy » Se 7, A =| , er 
. |. exer apxovta o€ avrav Heviay. 2. ot apyor- 


Tes emt tats Pipa cioi. 3. Kvpos apBavea Tods 


gdevyovtas. 4. TavTa akovoavTes ol oTpaTnyol Kal 
id la 
hoxayol eroiovy ovrw. 5. €mopevovTo év deEia exovTes *% 
Tov nov. 6. émoinoe TavTa, Exeivwy ovK éTL paynV 
> , \ a ro ai Ov 
avaBawovrwy. 7. peta TavTa HON HALov OvVOVTOS 
, ‘\ ‘\ \ \ id , 
ovyKkaéaas Tos oTparTyyouvs Kal hoxaryovs Edebe TAde. 
8. Tlaptcaris e€airnoapévyn avtov amoméurer madi 
emi thy apynv. . 9. Mévwva d€ ov« élyjre. tap’ ’ Aptaiov 
av tov Mévwvos E€vov. 10. ot & addou ezret HKov, 
‘\ ‘\ ‘g \ \ » al 
Tovs Tapoovs Sunpracav, dua Tov OAcOpov TaY oTpaTi- 
wrav opyilopevor. 11. Kat dep THs “ENAddos Opakas 
eTL@povpnv, ek THS Xeppovyicov avrovs e€ehavveav. 
12. Kdpos 8 otv avéBawe emi Ta axpa carpasov 


1 The present and aorist sometimes have no distinction of time, the 
former denoting continuance, the latter.a single act. This more frequently 
occurs with the circumstantial participle. 

2 Translate with. 








yee a 


PRESENT, FUTURE, AORIST PARTICIPLES. 93 


> 4 4, A + e f 
ov KwAdvovtos. 13. mapayyéddAer Tots apxovot EKa- 
- otois AapBaveww Tovs Iehotovyncious, ws émBovdev- 


OVTOS TOU DaTpaTov Tals KHLaLS. 


II. 1. After they heard these things they crossed 
the river. 2. But when they had made an assembly, 
they announced these things. 3. And he orders Xenias 
to come with his army. 4. For he who will lead (us) 


has boats. 5. He goes up with three hundred hoplites 
of the Greeks. 6. Parysatis did not love the reigning 
Artaxerxes. 7. He commanded Socrates, who was a 


guest friend, to come as he intended to make war with 


the satrap. 
241. 

€KaOTOS, -y, -ov, each of 
more than two, every 

» one, Lat. guisque ; plur. 
several, each, severally ; 
with a substantive us- 
ually in the predicate 
position. 

exkhynoia, -as, assembly, 
meeting [kahéw ]. 

nduos, sun [peri-helion, 
helio-trope]}. | 

oO pos, destruction. 

pevywv, -ovtos, 6, fugitive, 
exile [detyw, flee]. 

av, ovca, ov, being, pres. 
part. [etui |. 


VOCABULARY. 


axovw, hear [acoustic]. 
agéiow, to demand; ask as 
fit, worthy [dévos]. 
*dtw, enter ; of the sun, set. 
e€-aitéw, demand, beg off 
[airéw, ask]. 
{ntéw, seek, ask for. 
opyile, fo make angry, mid. 
to be enraged. 
Tiwwpéew, avenge, mid. take 
vengeance on [Tin]. 
non, adv. already, now. 
ouv, post-posit. inferential 
conj., therefore, then. 
adv. back again 
[palin-drome]. 


Tau, 


94 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


ws, conj. adv., as, when; ws padvora, as much as possible ; 
with circumstantial participles to express the purpose 
or pretext of the subject of the leading verb without 
implying that it is also the opinion of the author, as 
if, just as, on the ground that, with the intention 
of, ete. | 


LESSON XXIII. 


THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE. 


Review 150, 151, 2, 8, 4; 152, 153, 154. Note in 
Lesson XXII., 229, 3, a, 6; 230. 


242. Decline in the original form and then contract 
(822): : 


l. Tipawy Tipaovoa Tipaov 
TiPLOV TILOO Oo. TiLOv 
TiLaOVTOS Tipaovons TipLAovToS 
TUL@VTOS TILOONS TIPLOVTOS 

K.T. A. K.T.X. K.T. A. 

2. Tovewy TOLveove-a TOLeov 
TOLWY — TOLoUTa TOLOUV 
K.T.X. K. 7. d. K.T.X. 

3. dndAdwr dnddovea — dn\oov 
dnov dnove'a dndovv 
K.T.X. K.T. X. K.T. A. 


243. The supplementary participle completes the idea 


expressed by the verb. It may agree either with the 
subject or object. 





— 











THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE. 95 


1. Kaéapyos Suaredetro Néyov, Clearchus continued 
- to speak. 

2. éeravoavrTo tohkemovrtes, they ceased warring. 

3. akovw avTov héyovros, [ hear him speaking. 

A, érdyyave héywv, he happened to be saying. 

5. tpebopevov edavOavev 76 otparevpa, the army 
was secretly supported. 


a. Observe that in 1, 2, the participle completes the idea ex- 
pressed in the verb ; that in 3, the participle denotes the action 
or state in which the object is perceived or heard. 

6. Observe that in 4, 5, the participle contains the leading 
idea and the verb may be translated as an adverb, or that the 
participle may become the verb of the sentence and the verb 
a participle expressing manner: AavOdvoy érpépeto TO oTpa- 
revua,! the army was secretly supported. 


RULE. 


244. The supplementary participle resembling the 
object infinitive is used with verbs signifying fo begin, 
continue, end, hear, know, find, see, represent, appear, and 
with verbs of exdurance and emotion. 


RULE. 


-245. The supplementary participle with ruvyydve, 
LavOdva, dave, regularly contains the leading idea of 
the expression, and is usually translated by a verb. 


a. Here the present and aorist have no distinction of time. 


246. Examine the following: 


1 This arrangement would be expected in English. 


96 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


dnros Hv avidpevos, he was evidently distressed, for — 


A > Y > OA 
Onrov Hv OTL HYLaTO. 


6. Observe that the participle is used with 840s ewe to 
change the impersonal construction with 64A0év éore to the 
personal. 

RULE. 


247. ‘The supplementary participle may be used per-— 


sonally with d4dés etpr, davepds ety, haivoyat, etc.’ 


248. — EXERCISES. 


l. npyero modeuetv. 2. 6 Sé Edmidas éyov d1a- 
Tehet. 3. Opa avTov Tapehavvovta. 4. viKoY €tby- 
xavev. 5. etiunoe Kiéapyov devyovta. 6. Kkpavyn 
nravvov ett Tos ToAEmiovs. 7. TOUT TO TpOT@ €Tr0- 
pevovto. 8. ot dé Kal Hrdpouv To Tpadypat.. 9. Ta 
axpa ov bbdvovow ot Kidixes katadkaBovtes2 10. tots 
GAous TapyyyeAde GrrdilecOar Odpak. 11. ovrw dé 
TO €v @erradia eddvOaver ait@ Tpeddpevor oTparevpa. 
12. "Opdvras émBovredav Kipw davepds jv. 13. Ma- 
pvoatis 81 irnpye TO Kipw * dirovoa airév. 14. Kal 


3 /, 3 ld ¢ 4 aA ‘ aajMes 
emoheuer €K Xeppovycov opuapevos Tots Opaki rots 


vrép ‘EXAjomovTov otKovet. 


Examine the datives in 6, 7, 8, 10 (@@pa£&) and note the 
relations they express. 


249. ‘I'he dative is used to denote manner, cause, 
means, or instrument. 


1 This participle will be more fully classified later (777). 
2 See Aap Bava. 3 See 146. 





; 





THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE. Q7 


250. 


EXERCISES. 


1. They were arming themselves with breastplates. 
2. It was evident that Menon desired to be honored. 


3. Cyrus happened to be present. 


shouting. 


clans. 
ry 


251. 

Kpavyy, -ns, shout, outcry, 
clamor. ; 

TAP-OV, -OVTA, -OVv, be near, 
present ; part. of rdperpe. 

davepds,-a,-dv, visible, man- 
ifest, evident | dhaive|. 


Tpomos, manner, charac- 
ter |tpérw; tropic, tro- 
phy |. 


a-ropéw, to be without re- 
source, to be perplexed, 
in doubt | dropos]. 
dua-rehéw, finish, complete 
the distance, continue. 
émi-Ovpew, set one’s heart 
‘upon, desire eagerly, wish 
[Odp6s, soul |. 
Kkata-hapBave, take, cap- 
. ture, seize, overtake, pre- 
occupy \catalepsy |. 


4. | hear him 


5. Clearchus ceased to war with the Thra- 
, 6. He happened to be a guest friend of his. 
i. This army was thus secretly supported for him. 


VOCABULARY. 


LavOdvw, escape the notice 
of, le hid [lethargy |. 
émhile, arm, equip | OmAor}.. 
oppaw, hasten, start ; mid., 
set out, forth. 

tmavw, cause to stop, end, 
stop ; mid., cease, desist, 
cease from | Lat. pausa, 
pause |. 

Tpédw, nourish, support. 

tuyxave, hit, obtain, hap- 
pen. 

dave, be or come before, 
anticipate; with asuppl. 
participle, defore, sooner, 
first. 

67, post-posit. intensive par- 
ticle, ow, indeed, surely, 
accordingly. 


98 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


LESSON XXIV. 
FUTURE AND AORIST OF LIQUID VERBS. 


Review 151, 2, 3, 4; 152, a; 153, 154, 2; 196, 
197. 


252. Verbs are called vowel (pure), mute, or liquid, 
according as their themes end in a vowel, mute, or 
liquid. ) 

253. New themes are often formed by adding € to — 
the verb root. From this new theme some verbs form — 
the present tense stem, and the other tenses (or part of 
them) from the root: Soxéw [Sox-], 56€, edo€a, etc. 
Other verbs form their present from the simple theme 
or root, and the other tenses (or part of them) from the 
longer theme in ¢, and lengthen e as in simple vowel 
verbs (198): e0éd\w, EOeAjow (€Fede-), dHeihw, ddet- 
Ajnow (ddere-). 

254. Some verbs in -ew drop o in the future, and 
contract: kahéw, Kato (kartéow); Tedéw, finish, TEhO 
(rekéow). This form of the future is called Attic. 


a. Observe that these verbs retain the short final vowel, the 
former retains it in the fut. and aor., the latter throughout the 
tenses. | 


255. Liquid verbs form their future by annexing 
-e’/.. tothe theme. ‘They are then contracted like zrovéw, 


a , , a aA 
TOLW : PEVM, MEVEW, LEVO ; peveopat, PEVOULLAL. 





FUTURE AND AORIST OF LIQUID VERBS. 


a Here -e°/.. is for an original -eo°/..; the o is dropped 
' between two vowels (329, Obs. 4). 


256. Liquid verbs form their aorist by rejecting o 
in -oa and lengthening the theme vowel in compensa- 
tion: a to 7 (after c or p to a), € toa, eto, v tov. 
Thus, pévo, eueuva, ; Kpivo (kpw-), expiva, distinguish ; 
ayyéd\kw (ayyed-), nyyeda; KTElvw (krev-), exTewa, 


kilt. 
257. Parapiems (832, 833). 
1. Future Indicative of ayyéAdo, ayyedo. 
ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
S. 1. ayyero 1. dyyedodpat 
2. dyyehets 2. ayyedet, -7 
3. ayyedet 3. ayyedeirau 
D. 2. dyyedetrov 2. ayyedetobov 
3. ayyeXetrov 3. ayyedetobov 
P. 1. ayyedovpev 1. dyyedovpcba 
2. ayyedetre 2. dayyehetobe 
3. ayyehovor 3. ayyedovvrau 
Infin. Tnfin. 
avyyeNetv ayyeheto Oat 
Part. Part. 
ayyedov ayyeNOUpEvos 


a. Apply the rules of contraction to these forms. 


100 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


2. Aorist Indicative. 


S. 1. nyyera l. nyyedradpnv 
2. nyyerdas 2. nyyetho 
3. Hyyedre 3. HyyetdaTo 
D. 2. nyyet\arov 2. nyyetdacbov 
3. Wyyedarnv 3. nyyertacOnv 
P. 1. Hyyethapev 1. HyyeddpeBa 
2. Hyyeidare 2. nyyethacbe 
3. nyyedav 3. HyyelAavTo 
Infin. Infin. 
ayyethau dyyeihac bau 
Part. Part. 
ayyElNas, -aoa, -av ayyeundpevos 


a. Observe that the thematic vowel and endings are regular. 

6. Observe that the stems of the last three verbs in 256 are 
[xpiv-], [dyyea-], [xtev-]. These verbs form the present by 
adding -°/.. to the theme; -A with ¢ becomes -AA (596); with 
themes in v- and p-, ¢ unites with the theme vowel (597, 598). 


258. Write in the active and middle the future and 
aorist indicative, infinitive, and participle of péva, — 


KTELVO. 


259. EXERCISES. 


1. dd€ere ayabot civar. 2. mapryyede Tots ap- 
yovor éexdoros apBavev rods TleXorovynaiovs. 
3. évravla euewev yucpas ertad. 4. €Badde addos Se 
iw kat addos. 5. Kdpos trd “EXAjverv kat BapBa- 


FUTURE AND AORIS? OF LIQUID’ VERBS. 101 


me e€ own r 5 oo vo) © 4. $y: e \ la 
pov direira. 6. opaav adrovs vipwpevous vTd TaV 
oTparnyov. 7. ov otparnyyow TavTnv THY OTpaTy- 
> 

yiav. 8. Hevias 6 Apkas ta AvKcaua voe. 9. év- 
Tevdev Kipos thv Kittooayr eis THY Kidixiav amoméeurre 

\ a3 ¢ ld ~ ¥ > , > , 
Tv pakpav oddv. 10. Ta aye €0édovT. dpydpiov | 
redovpev. ll. EOedjoan péevev ev Tails Kepats. 
12. evravla ewewe Kopos Kod 7 oTpatia nuepas €lko- 
ow. 13. 6 d€ weiPerai Te Kal ovdAdNapBaver Kdpov os 
> A ¥ \ \ e ‘\ \ 4 
amoxtevav. 14. euwevar d€ Kal ol Tapa THY Oddatrav 
> “ 5 > ~ 2 Niyss > A 
olKouvTes Ev LOdots Kal ev ‘Iocots. 

Examine the genitives in 5, 6, and observe that with ize the 
genitive denotes the author or the person by whom an act is done. 


RULE. 
260. ‘The agent with passive verbs is expressed by 
the genitive with wz. 


Examine the accusatives in 7 , 8, and note their relation to 
the verbs. 

RULE. 

261. Any verb whose meaning permits may take an 
accusative of kindred signification. ‘I'his accusative de- 
jines more definitely the predication contained in the 
verb, and may follow both transitive and intransitive 
verbs. It is called the cognate (or kindred) accusative! 


a. When a neuter adjective represents the cognate accusative, 
its noun is implied in the verb (8). 

6. With verbs of motion the cognate accusative expresses the 
ground over which the motion passes (9, oddv). 


1 This is an adverbial use of the accusative. 


102 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 

262. °° “ EXENCISES, 

1. They were throwing stones. 2. These things 
seemed to be best. 3. He happened to be proceeding 
upon a wagon. 4. It was evident that Cyrus was 
-advancing. 5. ‘l'here he remained five days. 6. And 


he will remain in the villages. 7. But Clearchus gave 
orders to the soldiers to cease. 
263. VOCABULARY. 
hifos, stone [litho-graph]. Od, sacrifice, ef. gen. vocab. 
AvKatos, -a, -ov, Lycaean;  otparnyéw, be general, com- 
Ta AvKaa, the Lycaea, mand [orparnyos]. 
festival in honor of redéw, red, erédeca, etc., 


Zeus. finish, fulfil an obligation, 
oTparnyia,-as,generalship, pay. ) 

command | strategy |. vo, prep., wader ; W. gen., 
amro-xreivw, kill off, slay, from under; of agency, 

put to death. by, through ; w. dat., un- 
eivat, to be, pres. inf. of der, at the foot of; w. 

eli. acc., under. | 


LESSON XXvV. 


ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT 
DECLENSION. 


Review 41, c, 2; 208, a, 6, c; 215; 216, 217, 219, 
@; 223, 229, 1, 3. 


264. Adjectives of the consonant declension follow 
in the masculine and neuter the third declension. The 





ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. 103 


feminine, when it differs from the masculine, follows the 
~ a declension, having in the nominative singular a (229, 
= 35d). | 
265. Stems in vt- are declined like the participles 
(229, 1, 3). 

Parapiems (824). 


exav (éxovt-), willing. mas (mavt-), all. 
éexov' €koUTa €KOV Tas* qwaca Tap 
EKOVTOS EKOVONS EKOVTOS TavTos TaonS TavTds 
K.T. A. ne ee 


266. Most stems in y- have the masculine and fem- 
inine alike, and are declined like daipav (220). The 
accent is recessive (XIII.). 


Parapiem (824). 
evoaipwwr (evdatpmov-), fortunate. 
eddatpov eVoaLpLov 
evdaipmovos  evdaipovos 
K.T.. 


267. EXERCISES. 


1. advres® of Kadol raides madevovra. 2. Tov 

\ iid 4 € ‘ a 
motapov Kader Mapovav. 3. 0 morayos Kadetrat 
Mapovas. 4. ods of Svpor Deods evopuilov. 5. Ktpos 


1 éxev.is declined with the same endings as Avr (229, 1). 

2 was is declined with the endings of Adcas (229, 3). In wav, a is long 
by exception. The compounds regularly have it short, dav, cvurav. The 
gen. and dat. dual and plural violate 209, and accent the first syllable. 
may sometimes appears in the voc. sing. 

8 ras regularly has the predicate position. 


104 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


voile. kaxovds* BapBdpovs eivar. 6. SHdos Hv Kdpos 
, la : \ eQv @Q > , \ A s 
onrevdwy Tacav THY Oddv.” 7. ev TabTy SE TH Xapa 
HY H yn wediov amav. 8. mopeverat 6 Kvpos ody Tots 
‘\ : a b) / + ? , 
Tept avrov evdaipoor. 9. akovtos AptaképEov, cvp- 
Bovrevo oadlerOar. 10. of dé Hpdtwv Kipov ra d0- 
Eavra TH oTparia. ll. Kati airet adrov eis*® yudious 
E€vous pioOdv. 12. of Opakes HOedov adaipeto bau 
‘ 5] a 7 \ ~ -, \ 
Tous evoikouvtas EAAnvas thv ynv. 13. macas tas 


* rots “EXAnow 


TavTNS THS KMpas Kdpas SiapTacat 
> , , ea a e A , 

emerpepe. 14. amavtes ovTor ovs opare BapBapor 
qohéutot Tots “EXAnoiv eiow. 15. evredbev é&edavver 
dua Ppvyias oraSpdv tapacdyyas oxTd cis Kopas 
3 /, ~ \ 4 > bs ~ 
evoaiwovas. 16. Kipov dé peraméumerar amd THs 


apXns Ns avTov catpamny éroinoe.® 


Hixamine the pairs of accusatives in 2, 4, 16 (adbrov caTpa- 
anv) and the verbs upon which they depend, and note that one 
accusative of each pair expresses predicate relations such as 
would appear with eZvae with the same verbs (5). Observe also 
that the predicate accusative may be an adjective (4). 


RULE. 


268. Verbs of naming, choosing, making, appointing, 
thinking, believing, or regarding, may take a predicate — 
accusative in addition to the object accusative. 


a. In the passive both accusatives appear in the nominative, 
3 (84). 


1 Predicate adj. after eivac agreeing with its subject BapBdpous, infin- 
itive subj. accusative indirect discourse as in Latin. 

2 Ace. extent (93). 8 Prep., for, governing £évous. 

* The infinitive without an article may express a purpose. 

® The Eng. would use plupf. 


ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. 105 


Examine the pairs of accusatives in 10, 11 (atvrov ... 
- ptcOov), 12, and note their relations to the verbs upon which 
they depend. 


RULE. 


269. Verbs of asking, demanding, teaching, remind- 
ing, clothing, concealing, depriving, etc., may take two 
object accusatives, one of the person and the other 
of the thing. | 


a. With some of these verbs, the accusative of the thing is a 
cognate accusative (261). 


ee: EXERCISES. 


1.. They ask Cyrus for a guide. 2. They bade them 
ask for boats. 3. He made these commanders. 
4. ‘They believe him brave. 5. ‘The good appear pros- 
perous. 6, And all these hoplites withdrew. 7. All 
the rest of the army crossed. 8. For he will not will- 
ingly bid you’ report these things. 9. He has all who? 
muster in the plain of Castolus. 


a71. VOCABULARY. 
d-Kwv, -ovea, -ov, unwilling prosperous, happy (ed + 
(a + Exar). daipwv). See 227. 
d-1as, aoa, -av, all togeth- Beds, 6, 4, god, goddess 
er, all (a + as). [theist, theism ]. 
Exav, -odoa, -dv, willing; Kakds, -4, -dv, bad, base, 
in pred., wedlingly. cowardly ; 7) KaKov, evil, 


ei-Saipov, -ov, fortunate, harm. 


1 juas. ; 2 As many as. 


106 


ocos, -n, -ov, rel. pron. of 
quantity, as great as, as 
many as, how much or 
great; after was trans- 
lated who, ete. 

mats, mardds, 6, 4, child 
[ped-agogue]. 

Tas, waca, wav, all, the 
whole, every; generally 
in pred. position [pan- 
theon, pan-theism, pan- 


orama |. 

aitéw, ask for, demand; 
mid., entreat, beseech, 
beg. 


airéw, ask, demand. 

a&idw, ask as worthy, right. 

Epwraw, ask.a question, tn- 
quire. 


THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


> , , 

amT0-OT AH, -aow, etc., draw 
off, separate, withdraw. 

ad-atpéw, take away; mid., 
rob [amo + aipéw |. 

ev-o.xéw, inhabit, live in. 

émi-T pew, turn over to, ens 
trust, commit. 

> 4, v4 

EpwTaw, -jyow, etc., ask a 
question, question. 

vouilw (voyus-), to hold as 
a custom or usage, think, 
consider, believe, ete. 

maoevw, educate (rats) 
[en-cyclo-paedia ]. 

4 
omevow, urge, hasten. 


Cyréw, ask for what one 
needs. 


LESSON XXVI. 
REVIEW. 


272. Review Lessons XV.—XXV. in order, with 
their vocabularies. Group the related words in form 
and meaning with the allied words of the previous 


vocabularies. 


1 srais violates (209) in gen. dual and plural mraidouw, raider, and has 


voc. in wai as a stem in 66 (219, 4). 


REVIEW. 107 


273. Compounds. 

1. What is a compound word P 

2. How are compound verbs formed, accented, 
augmented ? 

3. What force had the prepositions originally ? 

4. Give special verbs that take the dative of indirect 
object. 

5. What compound verbs take the dative P 

274. Prepositions. 

1. Give the generic uses of the oblique cases. 

2. Give the rule for the use of the prepositions with 
the different cases. 

3. With what case are azo, avri, éx, and apo, used ? 

4. Why cannot eis bé used with the genitive, or év 
with the accusative P 

5. Why is cara not used with the dative? 

6. Give the uses of émi and mapa with genitive, 
dative, and accusative, and give examples in Greek. 

7. Translate the following and distinguish the uses of 
ovv and pera: 1. érodeuer catpamy ovv Tots duyaor. 
2. Kdpos peta tov adr\wv e€edavver. 

8. Give some metaphoric uses of the prepositions. 

9. Translate into Greek: 1. Out of the house. 
2. Before the phalanx. 3. Instead of his brother. 
4. Away from the army. 5. In the plain. 6. Down 
from the hill. 

10. Translate into English: 1. pera radra é€ehavver. 
2. éhatvver emi tov worapdv. 3. euevov emt Tais Ov- 
pas. 4. Tov dvOpwrov jyov mpds Kiéapxov. 5. amé 
OTACE ATO TOU TOTAMLOD. 


108 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


275. Contraction. 

1. When may vowels be contracted ? 

2. How are diphthongs formed ? 

3. Give the rules of contraction for vowels of like 
sound, of o sound. 

4, When a and e come together what forms does the 
contraction take P 

5. Give the rule for the contraction of a vowel be- 
fore a diphthong ; give examples. 

6. What special contractions have verbs? 

7. What special contraction has the vowel declen- 
sion ? © What accent has the nom., acc., and voc. dual of 
the o declension P 

8. Give the rule for the accent of contracted syllables. 

9. How are compound adjectives in -oos accented P 
Adjectives in -eos ? 

10. Why are ‘not other forms of tipdw, to€w, etc., 
than the present and imperfect contracted P 

11. Conjugate in the present and imperfect, active 
and middle indicative, in uncontracted and contracted 
forms vikdo, atréw, and pc Odw. 

12. Explain the contracted forms in the following : 
TLLGV, VLKGY, OOKELY, alTELY, po Oovr. 

13. Decline in the uncontracted and contracted 
forms pva, vous. 

14. Define crasis, elision. 

15. Give the rules for the accent of elided syllables. 
both. in elision and crasis. 

16. Perform crasis upon the following: kat ayafot; 


REVIEW. _ 109 


TO avTd; Ta ayala; Ta adda; Kal aitds; Td dvopua; 
TOU avTOU; Ov EVEKa. 

17. Perform elision upon the following: wapa aiza; 
énTa noav; avi exe(vou; emt avOpdmm; Kata ovs; 
avtt @Y; aro immouv; TovToO aAdXo. 

18. Form compounds of the following: aapda + 
eXavvw; emi todds; amdtaipéw; amd+ ayyéddao ; 
br6 + apxw; mapa t+ ayyédho. 

276. Pronouns, Demonstrative and Intensive. 

1. What substantives are in the main declined with 
the endings of the article? 

2. Decline atrods and give its uses. 

3. How are addos, éxetvos, and ode declined ? 

4, Decline ofros. What is the position of the 
demonstrative ? 

5. Give the uses of otros, ode, and éxetvos, and the 
force of 6 pév ... 6 8¢. 

6. Decline the article, and then change it to the 
relative. 

7. Give the rule for the agreement and construction 
of the relative. 

8. Write inGreek: 1. This man; that man. 2. I 
say these things. 3. He spoke as follows. 4. The 
general himself led. 5. Cyrus loved him. 6. They 
were doing the same things. 7. He showed whom he 
honored. 8. He sent back the army which he had. 

277. Huphony of Consonants. 

1. Write the diagram of the classes and orders of 
mutes. Define cognate and co-ordinate mutes. 


110 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


2. Define smooth and rough mutes. What are the 
double consonants ? 

3. What are the liquids? When is y nasal ? 

4. What consonants only can end words? Why are 
€x and ovk« no exceptions ? 

5. Give the rule for the euphonic changes of mutes 
before the linguals 7, 6, 0. | 

6. What form does od take before a smooth vowel ? 
Before a rough? 

7. What change occurs when a consonant either 
by elision or in forming a-compound word is brought 
before a rough vowel? 

8. Give the rule for the changes of mutes before 
and examples. 

9. Give the rule for the changes of v preceding the 
mutes and liquids. 

278. Explain the euphonic changes in the following: 
ovy-kakéwo, ovd-héyo, €éu-Baivw, ovp-Bovriedo, ovp- 
Tokewéw, éEw, ereEa, Téeupw, apTrdcw, Teicw, d6€a, 
Kehevovot, yyewoot, apyovor (apyo[vT]or), appa 
(appar). 

279. Future and Aorist Active and Middle of Verbs. 

1. How is the future and aorist active and middle of 
vowel, mute, and liquid verbs formed P 

2. Name two vowel verbs that form the future by 
rejecting o. 

3. Explain the several changes in forming the future 
of doxéw, movéw, Oddo. 

4. Give the primary and secondary tense-endings. 


REVIEW. lil 


5. How does the middle differ in the main from the 
activeP © 

6. How does the future differ in form from the 
present? ‘The aorist from the imperfect P 

7. Distinguish between the uses of the aorist and 
imperfect. What is the use of the augment? 

8. Write the future and aorist active and middle in- 
dicative, infinitives, and participles of cedevw, toréw, Ova. 

9. Write the same forms as the preceding of Aéya, 
TéuTo, Tew, ayyéhrw, wéeva, KTELVH, Kpiva. ’ 

280. Consonant Declension. 

1. What substantives does the third declension in- 
clude ? 

2. How is the stem of the consonant declension — 
found ? 

3. How is the nominative singular of masculines and 
feminines formed from the stem? Of neuters ? 

4. Explain the euphonic changes in forming the 
nominative singular of the following: ¢vAakos, Oaépa- 
Kos, Sudpvyxos, Palayyos, puyddos, “ApKddos, apparos, 
6voparTos. 

5. Decline: dvda€, ypjpa, ’Apkas. 

6. Decline and explain formation of nominative and 
vocative singular of wyeuav, yelrwv, 6 dpxywv, doris, 
Xapis, pv. 

7. Give the rule for the accent of monosyllables of 
the third declension in the genitive and dative, and note 
exceptions in mats and as. 

8. Give the rules for forming the vocative of nouns 
of the third declension. | 


112 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


9. When does the accusative singular saat vy instead 
of a? 

10. Account for the euphonic changes in the dative 
plural of yeirav, apywrv, pvdak, aomis. — 

11. Give the general rules for the eee of the 

third declension. 
12. Write the case endings of the third declension. 


281. Participles and Adjectives. 

1. What is a participle? Give the endings of the 
stems of the active participles. 

2. How are the active participles and adjectives of 
consonant stems inflected ? What form has the vocative 
of participles P | 

3. Decline: AWov, Exdv, av, Voas, Tas, EVdaipwr. 

4. Decline in both uncontracted and contracted forms: 
vikav, priov, Sndrov. 

5. What are the three principal uses of the participle ? 
How is it best translated when used with an article? 

6. What are the principal relations expressed by 
the circumstantial participle P | 
7. How any the participle be used with d7Ads ety 

and davepds ett ? 

8. ‘Translate and explain the syntax: 1. ot ayaGot; 
6 apxav; 6 a€wy avOpwiros daivera. 2. Tadra aKov- 
cavtes SieBavov. 3. Thy apynyv etiyxavey Exov. 
4. 7d oTpdrevpa tpeddpevoy éhdvOaver. 5. €xetivov 
héyovros, eropevovto. 6. émavovTo héyovtes. 7. TO- 
‘EAAnvixov éexédevoe Hkewy WS ToAEUHoOwY Iicidats. 


REVIEW. 113 


282. Synopses of Verbs. 

1. Give the Synopers: of the forms already given 
of Wo, Kedeva, TE’Iw, TéuTTH, ayyédro. 

2. Give the forms of etwi that have appeared in the 
preceding lessons. 

283. Syntae. 

1. Give the rule for the agreement of words express- 
ing adjective relations. 

2. Distinguish between the dative of advantage, dis- 
advantage, and indirect object. — 

3. Give the construction with words signifying near- 
ness, likeness, association, and opposition. 

4, How are cause, manner, and means expressed P 
How agent? 

5. Define the cognate accusative, and give an exam- 
ple in Greek. 

6. Name verbs taking object and predicate accusatives. 
' 7. Name verbs taking two object accusatives, and 
give examples in Greek and Latin. 


284. EXERCISES. 
Review 55, a, 6; 97, 1, 2, 3,4; 98, 1, 2; 107. 


I. 1. Give from the preceding vocabularies words 
allied in form to ayyedos, apxw, Bardo, odes, TELpa, 
firos, otpards, dvda€. 2. Give the words allied in 
meaning to épwrdo. 

IL. 1. ra yap emirydera ovk ear eye. 2. eS 

; DS \ A 3 ® ¥ > / ¢ b] A 3 

yap kal Tatra €&€ wv exw éhoidas. 3. evreder é&e- 

havver Sua THS ApaBias wapa tov Evpparnv worapov. 
8 


114 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


A 3." 
4. ravTa ot orparynyot Kip amyyyehdov’ 6 b¢ otpa- 
TLOTN EKAOTH ETrEurbe TEVTE Apyvpiov pvas. 5. EeKddece 
\ », ‘ / la \ \ , 
52 kal Tovs Midnrov TokvopKovrTas, Kal Tos Puyddas 
> / ‘\ > “~ 4 ¥ a“ ‘ 
exéevoe OV adT@ OTpareverOur. 6. edo0€e TadTa, Kal 
> 7 , a > 7 ~ ‘\ , 
avOpémovs TéuTovow ot Hpdtwyv Kvpov ta dd€avTa 
™m oTpatia. 7. Kat otparnyov dé avrov émoince 
Tdvrwv oot eis Kaorwdov rediov aOpoilovra. 8. Yo- 

£ 

daiverov S€ Tov LruuPadov Kai LwKparnv Tov ‘Ayasdy, 
E€vovs ovras kal Tovrous, exéAevoe HKELY, WS TOhELY- 
cov T@ oatpaty. 9. Kal Tp@Toy pev pds TOUS 
, a > 7 \ e ‘ ia € 4, > r 
@paxas €rohéunoa, Kal vrep THS “EhAddos ETiLwpov- 


pny, ek THS Xeppovyicov avrovs €€ehavvav Bovopevovs 


adaipeto0ar Tovs evoixovvTas “EAAnvas THY yHv. 


III. 1. They dwelt along the river. 2. Clearchus 


is honored by Cyrus. 3. Issus is situated upon the 


sea. 4. In Celaenae Cyrus remained thirty days. 


5. But through the middle of Tarsus flows the river 


Cydnus. 6. But Aristippus happened to be a guest 
friend of ‘his. 7. Thence he descended into a plain. 
8. Ariaeus was giving his attention to the barbarians. — 
9. He made him satrap both of Lydia and Phrygia. 
10. But he bade Cyrus continue to send’ for him. — 


11. And he collects both his barbarian and Greek force 


with the avowed purpose of making an expedition 


against the Pisidians. 


1 Use the present. 


q 
| 





READING LESSON. 115 


285. Translate at sight :* 


The March of Cyrus through Lycaonia and Cappadocia. | 


Mera tavra efehavver ctabmovs Tpets Tapacdyyas 
¥ > b] / ~ £ , 2 3 “ 
eixoow ets IKdviov THs Ppvyias modu [city]. évTavla 
»¥ A e , > ~ 4 ‘\ , 
Emeve TpErs Huepas. evredfey Siedavver Sua AvKaovias 
oTabuovs TEVTE Tapacadyyas TpLdKoVvTa. TavTyY THV 
xepav éenérpabe Suapmdca tots “EAnow ws Todepiay 
ovoav. evtevfev Kipos tHv Kilktooay eis tiv Kide- 
m bd A ‘\ / bl ; c , ‘A 
Klay atmoméume THY Taxiotny [quickest] dddv- Kat 
; ? Se , a rd > ‘ 
ouverempev avTn oTpatioras ovs Meévwr elye kai 
avtov Mévwva: Kupos de pera trav addov e€edavver 
X 7 \ , 4 
dua Kammadoxias oramovs rérrapas | four] tapaccy- 
‘ ¥ \ , A id , > ld \ 
yas €lKOoL Kal TeVTE pos Aava, TOALY olKOUpErHY Kal 

b} , > lal ¥ e / A 5 ea lanl 
evdaipova. evTavda euewav yuepas Tpels: ev & Kipos 
> Ry l4 l4 
amexrewe Iléponv Meyadépvnp. 
eX * E 
Observe and explain the position of yapar, “EAAnow, 


6d0v, ovs, avtov. [55, a, O.]. 


1 Tn this selection and in the exercises of (II.) above, the pupil should 
note the arrangement of the parts of a Greek sentence. And in the sub- 
- sequent selections of connected text he should also note particularly the 
order of the Greek, and follow more closely this order in his own writing. 


116 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


LESSON XXVIII. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE OF «iwi.— STEMS IN 
, vy AND A DIPHTHONG, CONTRACT NOUNS 
OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 


Review 28 (active endings), 102, 103, 1, 2, 3; 104, 
1, 2, 3;.151, 1, 2; 194, 4; 208, a2, b,c; 218, 219, a, 8; 
221, 3; 223. 


286. Verbs like vw are called verbs in w (21). 
Those retaining -we in the first person singular of the 
present indicative active are called verbs in mw. In 
certain tenses the verbs in ps add the endings directly 
to the theme. 

287. Present Indicative of the irregular verb «iyi, 
to be. 

Parapiem (859). 


Sing. Dual. Plur. 
1. eipi Eo ev 
EE €OTOV é€oTe 
3. €oTi €OTOV elo 


288. The theme of eiué is éo- (Lat. es, es-se). The 
_ final consonant of the theme, o, is dropped before the 
endings * -we and -o, and the theme vowel is lengthened 
in compensation: eiyé is for éo-ye; « is for €or, 


1 Verbs in -ys are older forms, and retain in the singular some of the 
earlier endings. 


CONTRACT NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 117 


(é0-o1) ; éori retains the Doric ending -r ; etot is for 


€-VOL. 


289. The present indicative of eiui accents the ul- 


tima, and all its forms except ef are enclitics. 


For the 


regular accent éorz, see 104, 3. The present participle 

wv retains its accent in composition: tapav, Tapovoa. 
290. Stems in c-, v-, and ev- in some of their forms 

suffer contraction. 


A. 


6 ix Bis 
(ixOv-) 
fish 


ix fis 
tx Avos 
tx Ovi 
ixOov 
ix Od 


ty Ove 


tx vou 


tx Oves 
ty Ovav 
txPvar 


ix ds 


PARADIGMS. 
” TONS 0 Baodevs 
(zrodt-) (BactA«v-) 
city king 
Singular. 
TONS Baowreds 
TONEWS Baotr€as 
mode (téret) Bacrd€t(Bacrdéi) 
Tou Bao.héa 
TON Bacidred 
Dual. 
mode (édec)  Bacrdée 
Toh€ow Baodréouw 
Plural. 
oneus (rédees) Bacrdets (Bactdées) 
TONEwY Baothéwy 
TOAETL Baowdevor 


ones (édeas) Baorréas 


a. Observe that the vowel stems have -v in the accusative 
sing., and the pure stem in the vocative sing. 


118 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


6. Observe that the final vowel of stems ending in a diphthong 
(Saotnev-) is dropped before a vowel of the ending, and is retained 
elsewhere ; that contraction occurs as in simple vowel stems, ex- 
cept the acc. sing. and plur. have -a@ and -ds/ respectively. 


291. Most stems in v are regular like ixOus. tyOds, 
the accusative plural, is for iy@v-vs.?, Oxytone stems in 
v have long v in nom., acc., and voc. sing. | 


292. Most stems in ct and a few in v-, as myxus, 
cubit, except in the nom., acc., and voc. sing., insert € 
before the c or v, and the latter is dropped: modews. 
Contraction then occurs in the dat. sing., nom. and 
voc. plur. The acc. plur. irregularly conforms to the 
nom. plur. 

293. After e the gen. sing. has -ws instead of -os. 
The accent remains the same as with -os, and the gen. 
plur. follows the accent of the gen. sing. 

294. Neuter substantives in u and v have the stem in 
the nom. sing. (208, 4): 7d émixapi, suavity ; Td aor, 
town. | 

295. Gender. 

1. Stems ending in ev are masculine. 

2. Stems ending in c with nominative in cs are fem- 
inine ; stems ending in v, nominative in vs, are mostly 
feminine. 

3. Stems ending in z, v, with nominatives in « and 
v, are neuter, 

1 ¢-ws, €-d, e-Gs arise by interchange of quantity from the original forms 


nos, -na@, -nas. Further explanation here is impracticable. See grammars. 
2 -ys was the original ending of the accusative plural. 





CONTRACT NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 119 


296. EXERCISES. 


l. eyeu tOv imméwv ta€iv. 2. adrds ely ov Cyreis. 
8. rhv dé “EdXAnvikny Svvapiw nOpolev dde. 4. eve 
dé SUvapw immKyny Hv wavres 
6papev. 5. apaTh Hmépa. ot 
nkovtes Tapa Baoiléws amryy- 
yehdov Kipw tept THs Baot- 
héws orparias. 6. Tov de 
3 am (< a bee | , 
BapBapixov immets els” yxuXI- 
ovs Haoav év deEta. 7. Topev- 

$7) a . P 

c 4 e ra ¥ 
erat ws Baciléa imméas EXov 
@s mevtakogious. 8. Ta d@pa 

7 ‘ “ , 
vomilerar Tapa Bacrdret Tita. 
9. rovrous Tous txfus oi Xwv- 
pot Beovs evouilov. 10. ta 
dppata eis tas tates Tov 
‘EdAjver €Xavvovow. 11. Kai 
> a “A > 4 \ 
evrav0a Kipos é€&€racw Kat 





apiOuov Tov “EXAjver éroin- 
> ~ 7 ¢€ bd ? 4 4 
cev €v T@ Tapadeiow. 12. 6 8 ’Opdrtas vopioas 
¢ 4 Ky > a ‘\ ¢ /, 4 > A 
ETOIMOUS ElvaL AUT@ TOUS imméas, ypader EmLOTOAHY 
mapa Baowéa. 13. e€ote d€ Kat Bacitéws Bacidea 
ev Kehawvais émt tals mynyats tov Mapovouv torapou 
_ ess eng , ea \ ‘\ 238 \ en / 
TO TH akpoToOha: pet S€ Kal ovTos dua THS TOdEwWS 
Kal euBadre eis TOV Maiavdpovr. 
II. 1. You are wise. 2. And the military forces 
appeared. 3. You have both the force and country 


1 eis, prep. governing xtAlovs. Cf. p. 104%. 


120 


THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


of Cyrus. 4. Cyrus sends the tribute to the king 


from the cities. 


5. And fish also were in this river. 


6. And there were horsemen on the left of the enemy. 
7. Xerxes made this palace and acropolis of Celaenae. 


297. 


akpomroXus, -Ews, 7, acropo- 


lis (axpos+méXts) [acro- 


polis |. 

Baovreds, -€ws, hing ; with- 
out the article, the hing 
of Persia; wapa Baor- 
het, at court (basil, basi- 
lica, basilisk]. 

dvvapis, -ews, 7, ability, 

: Sorce, troops [dynamite]. 

e€€Tacts, -ews, 7, inspection, 
review. 

ETLOTOAH, -15, 
[epistle ]. 

ETOL{LOS, -n, ~OV, OF -0S, -ov, 
ready, prepared (dat.). 

EVOVULOS, -ov, Of good name 
or omen, euphemistic for 


a letter 


apiorepos, left ; Td eda- 
vupov, the left wing (sc. 
Képas, Wing). 

imevs, -ews, horseman ; pl. 


cavalry. No. 9. 


VOCABULARY. 


LTmTLKOS, -1), -Ov, Of or for a 
horse or cavalry (immeds). 

laxvs, -vos, 4, strength, 
military force. 

ix Bus, -vos, 6, fish [ichthyo- 
graphy |. 

modus, -ews, 7, cily, state 
[police, metro-polis]. 

TELS, -EwS, HN, arrangement, 
discipline, rank, line of 
batile, array, etc. |syn- 
tax |. 

Tiptos, -a, -ov, valued, hon- 
ored, in honor. 

ypado, to draw, write 
[graphic, grammar |. 

aoe, adv. thus, so, as fol- 
lows (60e). 

ws, adv., with numerals, 
about ; prep. w. acc., to, 
only of persons. 


ADJECTIVE STEMS IN v OF THIRD DECLENSION. 12] 


LESSON XXVIII. 


ADJECTIVE STEMS IN v OF THE THIRD 
DECLENSION. IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 
IMPERFECT OF cipi. 


Review, 111, 112, 113, 116 (active endings), 151, 
1, 2; 194, 4; 290, 291, 292, 294. | 


208. PARADIGM. 
Taxus (Taxv-) (824) 
swift. 
Singular. 
N. taxvs TAXELA TAXV 
G. Tayéos | TAXES TAY EOS 
D. raxet (taxéi) = rayeia Taxet (taxéi) 
A. tayvv TAX ELAY TAXV 
V. taxv TAYELA TAXD 
Dual. 
N.A.V. rayet (taxée) Tayeia Taye (TaXée) 
G. D. rayéow TAaXelau TAX EOL 
Plaral. 
N.V. rayeis (taxées) Tayetar Taxéa 
G. rayéwv TAXELOY TAX Ew 
D. rayxéou TAXELALS TAXETL 
A. Taxes TAXELAS TaXyéa 


a. Observe that the stem of the masculine and neuter inserts 


eas in 292; that the neuter nom. sing. is formed like the stem 
(294); that the gen. sing. is in os; that the nom., acc., voc.. 
neut. plur. remain uncontracted. 


[oy ae THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


b. Observe that the feminine is of the first declension, formed 
from a stem in € (292), with the regular ending ca (p. en 


299. Irregular Adjectives. 


PARADIGMS. 
peéeyas (weya-, weyado-) 
great. 
Singular. 
N. péyas peyadn peya 
G. peyahou peyadns poeyadou 
D. peyaro peyahn —s_ peya@ 
A. péyav peyadnv peya 
V.  péya* peyadn peya 
Dual. 
N.A.V. peyddr\o peyada peyaho 
G. D.  peyadouv peyadatv peyahou 
Plural. 

N.V.  peyadou peyahat peyada 
G.  peyddov peyadov peyadov 
D. peyddous peyadats peyahous 
A. peyadous peyahas peyaha 

mows (oAv-, 7odXo-) 
much, many. 
Singular. 
N. aodvs TOAAH TOAD 
G. odXov mons mo\Xou 
D. wodd\@ TOAAH TOAN@ 
A.  ohtv TOAD TOU 
V.  modd TONY TOAD 


1 yeydie also appears. 


ADJECTIVE STEMS IN v OF THIRD DECLENSION. 123 


Plural. 
N.V.  aodAot mohat qoMd 
G. amov\\ov — TOAA@V TOAA@V 
D. zrodXots qmokXats amo\\ots 
A. odXovs mo\\as TONAG 


Observe that in both wéyas and modus, the nom. acc. and voc. 
mmasc. and neut. sing., are declined like the vowel-stems of the 
third declension; that elsewhere they are declined upon the 
stems peyado- and moAdo- respectively, like 690s (73). 


300. Imperfect of eipt. 


PaRADIGM. 
Singular. Dual. Plural. . 
1. 4 or Hv HEV 
2. Hobo HOTOV OF HTOV HTE OF HoTE 
3. Hv HoTHY OY HTHV Hoav 


Observe that the initial vowel receives the temporal augment, 
and the final o of the theme is dropped regularly before a con- 
sonant of the ending; that -c@a in the second person singular is 
for -s. 


301. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. évravéa jv modus épjun peyadyn. 2. mpods 
To Tiypyte ToTap@ mods HY olKouvperyn, pmeyadrn Kat 
> , ¥ \ 9 ¢ 95 e 4 
eddainwv. 3. exe Taydy immov. 4. 6 oivos ndvs 
> \ ld ‘ / > a la 
éoTw. 5, dua Tayewy Tov mddEuov ErrovetTo. 6. TavTa 
aKovTaVTES ol ayyeho. amyhavvov, Kal HKOV Taxv. 
7. Kupos yap émeume Bixous nd€os oivov. 8. Trav dé 
Tohepiov Ummeis cio ToAAOL Kal ToAAOV agar. 9. Ta 


1 Depends upon d&ia. Cf. 424. 


124 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


& émrydeaa eye ek THS Ev péow yopas, TOANHS Kal 
ayabhns ovons. 10. evrevder e€eXavver oTabpods €€ 
> \ ~ lA Py > , . id 
els KeAawas, Tns Ppvyias todw olkovpevny, weyadnv 
Kat evoaimova. 


IJ. 1. The satrap has sweet wine. 2. And the 
asses ran swiftly. 3. In that place was a large city. 
4. We have many men and much property. 5. The 
king with a large army is advancing. 6. But thence 
he descended into a plain large and beautiful. 7. He 
marches twenty parasangs into ‘Tarsus, a large and 
prosperous city of Cilicia. 


302. VOCABULARY. 
Bikos, jar, wine jar. . hov af.os, worth much, 
ef, siw [hex-agon]. valuable, serviceable ; rd 
EPN|LOS, -7, -Ov, OF -0s, -ov, monv, the greater part ; 
deserted, desert, uninhab- Ton, adv., much, greatly, 
ited, without, deprived of far | poly-syllable, poly- 
[hermit]. gon, poly-theism |. 
nOvs, eta, -¥, sweet [Lat., rtayds, -ela, 3, quick, swift, 
suavis |. Lat., celer ; d:a Taxéwr, 


péyas, weyahn, wéya, great, with speed ; Taxv, adv., 
large |Lat., magnus ; quickly. 


MUCH ; 0-mega]. am-ehavve, drive off, march 
otvos, wine [Lat., vinum ; away, go away. 

WINE]. Kata-Baivw, go down, de- 
OVvOS, ASS. : scend. : 


Tous, TOAAH, rohv, much, tTpéxw, run |troche, tro 
many, Lat., mullus ; moh- chee |. 


TENSES DENOTING COMPLETED ACTION. 125 


LESSON XXIX. 


FUTURE OF ecivit.—TENSES DENOTING COM. 
PLETED ACTION. 


Review 20, 27, 28, 110, 111, 112, 118, 115, 135, 
191, 194, 1, 2, 3; 195, 197, 198, 229, a, 0. 


303. Reduplication. 

The perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect through 
all their moods have reduplication as the sign of com- 
pleted action. | 

304. Reduplication consists in the repetition of the 
initial sound. Most verbs beginning with a consonant 
(except p) repeat that consonant with €: Ad¥w, AédvKa, 
héhupat. This reduplication appears in several Latin 
verbs, as dedi from do, tetendi from tendo. A rough 
initial mute is changed to a smooth: Ova, TéOvka. 

305. In verbs beginning with fwo consonants (ex- | 
cept a mute followed by a liquid), a double consonant, 
or p, the reduplication omits the consonant and consists 
of e only: é€orpadrevpa, elyrnka. 

306. In verbs beginning with a vowel or diphthong, 
the reduplication takes the same form as the temporal 
augment: npaérnKka, npyKa. 

307. When the reduplicated perfect begins with a 
consonant, the pluperfect as'a secondary tense prefixes 
the syllabic augment (113). Otherwise the pluperfect 
retains the reduplication of the perfect unchanged : Aé 
Luka, EheAUKN ; HPwTHKN; EaTPATEvpaL, EoTPATEvPND. 


~ 


126 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


308. Compound verbs take the augment and redupli- 
cation after the prepositions (135): katadva, halt, kara- 
hédvca, I have halted ; an-€oraxa, I have separated. 

309. ‘The stem of the first perfect is formed by affix- 
ing the tense suffix -xa to the reduplicated theme: Aedv-, 
héduka. . 


a. A lingual mute is dropped before «: met@w (7710-), ae 
Teka; apTatw (apirao-), ptraka. 


310. Some verbs have a second perfect formed by 
affixing -a to the reduplicated theme: ypada, yéypada. 
If the theme ends in a labial or palatal mute, this is 
sometimes aspirated before -a (plup. -) or -e): dye, 
Axa. It has the inflection of the first perfect system 
(351, 4; 530, 544). 

311. The perfect indicative represents an action as 
completed at the present time: A€AvKa, J have loosed. 

312. The perfect, as a primary tense, has the regular 
primary endings (28). The thematic vowel -a is changed 
to -e in the third person singular. 

313. Conjugate the first perfect active of Avw, Ee 
huxa, I have loosed; Odo, téOvKa; Toveéw, wEemoinka 
(828). : 

314. The pluperfect indicative represents the action 
as already completed at a given past time; édehvxn, J 
had loosed. | 


a. The pluperfect calls attention to the completion or the 
effect of the act; unless the attention is specially directed to 
this, the aorist is regularly used, 


TENSES DENOTING COMPLETED ACTION. 127 


315. ‘The pluperfect active changes the final -a of the 
perfect stem to-e. In the singular -y is dropped and 
-Ke appears as -«n, -Kn, -Ket. In the third person plural 
the ending -oay is used instead of -v. 


a. In all forms the thematic vowel -ec may appear : -evv, -ecs, 
el, etc. ' 


316. Conjugate the first pluperfect active of Ava, 
éhedvcyn, ededvnev, L had loosed; tovéw, ererouyjKy ; 
EPwTAwW, NPwTHKN (828). 

317. The stem of the perfect and pluperfect middle 
is formed by reduplicating the verb theme, to which the 
endings are directly affixed (286): AéAvpac, EXeAvuyv. 


‘a. These tenses have the -z inflection. 


318. The endings -oa and -go of the perfect and 
pluperfect middle are retained (27; 111, a, 4). 


a. Remember primary tenses have primary endings, and sec- 
ondary, secondary endings (28, 116). 


319. 1. Conjugate the perfect middle indicative of 
vw, Aé€Avpar; mTopedw, Baciledw; aipéw, ypnywa 
(829). 

2. Conjugate the pluperfect indicative middle of Ava, 
ehehvpnv, I had ransomed; Baoitedo, aipéw. 

320. The stem of the future perfect is formed by 
affixing -o°/.. to the stem of the perfect middle: Aedv-, 
Aehicouav. It has the inflection of the future middle 
(195). But a short final vowel is always lengthened 
before -copau. 


128 ‘THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


a. A few verbs have a future perfect active formed from the 
perfect stem: éornEw, I shall stand. 


321. The future perfect indicative represents an ac- 
tion that will be already finished at some future time : 
hekvoopat, I shall have ransomed. 

322. Conjugate the future perfect indicative of va, 
elvoomar; Tinaw, ypadw (830). 


a. The passive perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect use the — 
same forms as the middle. 


323. Learn the infinitives and participles of the per- 
fect active and middle and of the future perfect middle 
(828, 829, 830). 


a. Observe that the perfect active infinitive takes the ending 
-vat, and changes a to €: AEeAuKEVaL. 

6. Observe that the other infinitives have the regular ending ~ 
-o at affixed to the regular thematic vowel (115). 

c. Observe that the perfect active participle ends in -ws (-oT), 
(229, a; 822), but the perfect middle and future perfect  parti- 
ciples have the regular ending -evo affixed to the regular the- 
matic vowel (229, a, 6; 817). 

d. Observe that all infinitives in -av and -vae and the perfect 
infinitive and perfect participle middle and passive accent the 
penult (195, a, 3); that participles in -ws, XeAvKws, are oxytone. 


324. Future Indicative of eipi (éc-), to be. 


Parapiem (859). 


Sing. Dual. Plur. 
¥ 

1. €vopau ecoucba. 
¥ ¥ ¥ » 

2. eve, eon evecOov ecco be 


¥ ¥ 
3. e€oTat exea Vor ED OVTAL 


TENSES DENOTING COMPLETED ACTION. 129 


Observe that the future has the middle form (195); that in 
- ég-rat (for éoerat) the thematic vowel is dropped. 

Norg. éorat, like ay (289) keeps its accent in composition : 
TapéoTal. 

325. The endings -vras and -yro can stand only after 
vowel stems. ‘The third person plural of the perfect 
and pluperfect of themes ending in a mute are formed 
by the perfect participle and etot and joa respectively 
(839): dpralw (apmad-), ypracpévor eiai, they have 
pillaged; jpracpéevor Hoav, they had pillaged. 8 of 
the theme is dropped before o ; elsewhere it is changed 
to a.’ The future perfect may be expressed in a similar 
way; in the active it is regularly thus expressed : Nedv- 
Kas eoopat, I shall have loosed. he themes of some 
verbs, as Kehevw, are enlarged by the addition of o in 
the perfect middle and aorist passive, and are then in- 
flected like themes in 6. The perfect and pluperfect 
indicative active are sometimes formed with the perfect 
participle and eit. The participle here seems to par- 
take of the force of an adjective. Other mute verbs 
drop o between two consonants, and -oor, -cOnv, -oe 
become -@ov, -Onv, -Ae (837, 838). 

326. Perfect active participle. 


Parapiem (822). 


MeAvKcds (NeuKoT-) 
having loosed 


S. N. V. XeduKas NeAvKULE AeduKs 
G. AeAuKOTOS NeAvKULaS NeAvKOTOS 
K. T. X. K. 7. X. K. T. X. 


1 The conjugation of the perfect and pluperfect of other mute verbs will 
be noticed later (836, 837, etc.). 


130 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


a. Observe that the stem of the perfect participle ends in -or 
(323,c), and that the a (309) of the perfect stem disappears 
before -or. | 

6. Observe that the forms of the nominative singular Xedv- 
KOS, NEAUKVIA, NEAVKOS are irregular. The masc. and neut. are 
of the third declension, and the fem. of the first. 


cove EXERCISES. 


I. 1. 6 Aapetos €BeBaorrevce. 2. at apatar 7p- 
Tacpéevas Yoav. 3. Ol OTpaTL@TaL TETELOpMEVOL ciciv. 
4. thv ématodny yéypade. 5. ovmore ert eotar emt’ 
T@ adehp@. 6. 79 600s eoTar pos Baciéa péeyav 
eis BaBvdava. 7. of dé modeuvoi te Tas amovdas 
Kal Tovs opKouvs hedvKaow. 8. TavTa ToLs oOTpaTy- 
yois” memoinra. 9. €rerinto yap wvro Kupov dv 
evvorav. 10. 6 pev ToLavTa pev TETOinKE, TOLAUTA 
dé Aéyer. Il. “Opdvras dé Ilépons mpdcbe émeBe- 
Bovrevcer Kipw. 12. dixpracrto vd tov BactduKod 
oTparevpatos avTa Ta Baotihea. 13. 6 d€ Aapetos 
é€reredeuTHKe, Kal 6 caTpamns SvaBddder Tov Kupov 
mpos Tov adedddv. 6 Oe weiMerai TE Kal gvANapBaver 
Kdpov ws aroKtevav. 


II. 1. The soldiers will have honor. 2. We had 
broken our oaths. 3. The letters he had written to 
the king. 4. You will have been honored by Cyrus. 
9. But we have pursued the enemy through the vil- 


1 Tn the power of. 

2 The perfect and pluperfect passive may take the dative of agent; 
the dative implies that the agent has an interest in the completion of the 
action. 


CONTRACTS OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. 13] © 


lages. 6. The Cilician queen has persuaded the king. 
7. Everything had been done by the satrap. 8. Orontas 
has ended the war against Cyrus. 


328. VOCABULARY. 
BaowdtKds, -4, -dv, royal ém-opkéw, swear falsely ; 
[ basilica |. mid., perjure one’s self 
opkos, oath. [ €aé + dpxos]. 
omovoy, -ns, Libation; pl., Tedevrdw, end, finish ; intr. 
truce [spondee]. ‘end one’s life, die [rédos, 
TOLOUTOS, -aUTH, -OUTOY, end |. 
dem. pro., such, such as er, adv., yet, still; with 
precedes. neg., no longer. 
dua-Baddrw, slander [dia- ov-qore, adv., never [ov + 
bolical |. moreé |. 


mpoo-Gev, adv., before, for- 
merly, sooner [apés]. 


LESSON XXX. 


‘CONTRACT NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES OF 
THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. 


Review 151, 1, 2, 3,4; 217; 221, 1, 2, 3, 4; 223; 
295,.1, 2; 3. 


329. Stems in o (eo and ac-) of the Consonant 
Declension. 


~ 


132 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


PARADIGMS. 


6 Lwxparns (SwKpareo-) 
Socrates 
Ywxparns 
LwKpatous (LwKpare-os) 
Loxpare. (LwKpare-t) 
Loxpary (LwKpare-a.) Loxparnp * 


LoKpares 
TO evpos (€evpeo-) TO Kpéas (Kpeao-) 
breadth ~ meat 
Singular. 
N. A. V. evpos -  _Kpéas 
G. evpovs (evpe-os) Kp€ws (Kpéa-os) . 
D. evpeu (evpe-t) Kpéat (Kpéa-t) 
Dual. 
N. A.V. evper (evpe-e) 
G. D.  edpoty (edpé-ouv) 
Plural. 
N. A. V. evpn (evpe-a) Kpéa (kpéa-a) 
G. edpav (edipe-wr) Kpeav (Kped-wr ) 
D. evpeor Kp€a-ou 


Observe that: 1. The masculine stems in o- lengthen the 
final vowel like stems in v- and p- (217). 2. The voc. has the 
form of the stem and recessive accent. 3. The neut. has -os 
for -es in the nom., acc., voc. 4. The final o of the stem is 
dropped before all case endings, and the vowels thus brought 
together are contracted. 


1 Proper nouns in -ys, gen., -eos, have a form in -ny of the first 
declension. Tvoaachépyns, -ovs has also its vocative Teooadépyyn of this 
declension. 


CONTRACTS OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. 133 


330. Some nouns in -ao have two stems, one in ar-, 
gen. -aros, and another in ao-, gen. a-os, contracted -ws, 
declined like kpéas. 


297, PARADIGM. 
TO Képas (Kepar-, Kepao-) 
horn 


Singular. 


N. A. V. képas 


G. Képaros (Képaos) Képws 
D.  Képare (képat) Képat 
Dual. 
N. A.V. Képare ~ (Képae) Ke pa 
G. D. Keparow (Kepdow) Kepov 
Plural. 
N. A.V. xépara (képaa) xKépa 
G. Kepatwv (kepdwv) Kepar 
D.  Képaor 


332. Gender. 
Neuters are stems ending in as- and es-, with nomi- 
natives in -os (see also 221, 4). 


a. Note that these rules apply to grammatical gender ;' 
names of males of this class are of course masculine. 


333- Give a summary of rules for the gender of 
substantives of the third declension. 

334. Adjectives with stems in es- are of two end- 
ings. ‘The masculine and feminine have the same form 
in -ys and the neuter retains the stem in -es. They 
follow the same contraction as the nouns with steins 
in ¢€s-. 


134 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


335- PARADIGM. 


mhypns (mhnpeo-) 
Jull 


SINGULAR. 
Masc. & Fem. Neuter 


a7hnpns a7 pes 
mAHpous (mAnpe-os) 

a7\nper (anpe-t) 

hiypn (adype-a) Tijpes 
TAN pes ; 


<p yaz 


DuaL. 


amdyper (7AHpE-e) 
aAnpowy (adnpé-owv) 


ps 
Sx 


PLURAL. 
TdHpes (typees) TAH py (a7AHpe-a) 
Trnpov (adnpé-wv) 
TAHpEot 
TAH PELs —awdnpyn (arAnpe-a) 


POS 


Observe that the masc. and fem. acc. plur. conforms to the 
nominative (292). 


336. 1. Decline like adnjpys, Karadarys, -és, 
acberys, -és. 2. Decline Tusoadéprys, opos, ujKos, 
TELXOS. 


337. EXERCISES. 


l. Kat Kdéapyov ta adda Ktpos ériunoe. 2. 
Wapos rotanos nv To evpos mévte TAM pa. 3. St 
¥ \ Lai f ad , » 
fécov O€ pel TovTwY ToTapos Kdpoos dvoma. 4. 


aS2 24 On 


CONTRACTS OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. 135 


Baorréws apyy trYIe avOpadrav ioyvpa jv. 5. Tots 
O€ pyKeo. TOV 6d0v aoberis Hv. 6. odK avOpaTav 
z9 cat , eee, \ , \ 3.5 \ 
atopav BapBapwr epi. 7. Kat LwKkparynv Tov Ayator, 
, ” S. . e Y 2 a) ’ > > , 
€€vov ovta, éxédevoe Heewv. 8. Ktpos 8’ ovy avaBaiver 
> 4 . » N \ , an > , » » ear 
émt Ta Opn. 9. Ta dé Kpéa TOV aypiwr over AY Hdéa. 
10. Mévav S€ kal 7d oTpdrevpa TO evdvupov KEepas 
exye Tov “EAAnvixov. ll. Kat wédts adrdb @xetro 
peyahy Kai evdaipwr Odpakos dvouatr. 12. Aoav de 
Kal arANar K@par TOAGL TAHpELS TOoAM@Y ayalav €év 
~ , \ A“ ~ > 4 x7 % \ 
T® Tediw. 13, pera Tavta Kipos éfedavver emt Tov 
Xddov torapov avta Td evpos S¥o0 TEA pa, TAYpH 8 
> 4 , a ¢€ 4 ‘ 3. & 
ixyQiwv peyddwv, ovs ot por Deovs evopslor. 
Examine the accusatives in 1 (dAAa), 2 (edpos), 3 (dvoma), 
13 (edpos), and note that they are used with verbs and predicate 


substantives to define their meaning more fully or to indicate in 
what respect it is taken. 
RULE. 
338. The accusative of specification’ is joined with 
verbs, adjectives, or substantives, to denote the part, 
character, or quality to which the expression refers. 


Examine the datives in 4 (mA7jOe), 5 (punjweor), 11 
(dvewart), and note that they are used with nouns and ad- 
jectives to denote in what particular point or respect their 
signification is taken. 

RULE. 

339. The Dative of Respect, as a form of dative 
of manner, is used with verbs, nouns, and adjectives 
to denote ix what particular point or respect theit 
signification is true. 

1 See p. 101}. 


136 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


Examine the genitives in 4 (avOp@rwv), 6 (avOpeéreav), 
12 (a@ya@v), and note that they depend upon words expressing 
fullness and want. 


Rote. 
340. Words of fullness and want take the genitive. 


Verbs signifying ¢o fill take also the accusative of the 
thing filled. | 


341. EXERCISES. 


1. They were in plain sight. 2. The soldiers lived 
by eating meat. 3. He carried on war with Tissapher- 
nes. 4. In that place were many villages full of food 
and wine. 5. The country of the king was strong in 
extent of territory. 6. ‘Thence he marches two stages, 
ten parasangs to the river whose width was five plethra. 
7. There Cyrus had a palace and a large park full of 
wild animals which he hunted on horseback. 


342. "VOCABULARY. 
aypwos, -a, -ov, wild. Kpe€as, -ws, TO, flesh; pil. 
ao bevns,-és, without strength, meat [ecreo-sote]. 
weak. peotos, -y, -ov, full, full 
edpos, -ous, 76, width. of, filled with. 
loxvpds, -a, -dv, strong pxos, -ous, 76, length. 
[ioyvs].. pos, -ous, Td, mountain. 
Kata-pavyns, -és, clearly mhéOpov, plethron, 100 
visible, in plain sight. Greek feet or 101 Eng- 


l4 PO & .0 la , ~ 

Képas, Képaros, Képws, Td, — lish. 
horn, wing of an army mdnOos, -ovs, 7d |734], 
[HoRN, rhino-ceros |. fullness, multitude ; w¥- 


AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE INDICATIVE. 137, 


Ba, in number, extent éobiw, eat, live on [xa]. 


[ plethora ]. Caw, live. Has n for a in 
— mdnpyns, -es, full, filled with, contracted forms [z06- 
abounding in, complete. logy]. 
otros, corn, wheat, food avrotr, adv., in the very 
[ para-site |. place, here, there |air 
_ Tetxos, -ovs, Td, wall, for- 76s |. 


tress [DIKE]; 


LESSON XXXII. 


AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE INDICA- 
TIVE. 


_ Review 28, 32; 116, 189, 1; 194, 1, 2, 3,4; 208, 4 
(223, 229, 3, a, b; 260, 323, d. 

343. The passive voice uses the same forms as the 
middle (20, 111, 322, a) except in the aorist and future. 

344. ‘The stem of the first aorist passive is formed 
by affixing -e to the verb theme. In the indicative 
and in other moods before a single consonant of the 
ending -#e becomes -@y. As a secondary tense it 
has an augment in the indicative. It uses the active’ 
secondary endings (116): €dv@np. 

345. Some verbs form a second aorist with the 
tense suffix -e instead of -#e which becomes -n when- 
ever -Je would become -6y. éeypadyny (652). It has 
the same inflection as the first aorist. 

346. The stem of the first future passive affixes -o°/.. 


1 The tense is distinguished from the active by -@e,and not by endings 
as in the middle. 


138 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


to the lengthened aorist stem in @y-, and is inflected 
like the future middle (195): AvOyoopna. 

347. 1. Write the aorist passive ind. of Ava, édv- 
Onv' (831); Ova, érvOnv ;? wovéw; Bovredw. 2. Write 
the future passive of Avw, AvOjoopar (831); Avo, 
TvOjoomaL ;* TULde. 

348. Explain the euphonic changes in the forma- 
tion of the aorist and future passive of apwrdalw (apzas-), 
npracOny ; TéuTra, éeTéudOnv ; ayw, nxOnv. 

349. Learn the aorist and future passive infinitives 
and participles of Avw (831). 


a. Observe that the aorist passive infinitive has the ending of 
the perfect active -vat, and accents the penult; that the aorist 
passive participle forms its stem like the active participles by — 
affixing -vr to the tense stem, AvOeis (AvOevt-s): that parti- 
ciples in -es accent the last syllable (323, d). 

6. Observe that the future passive infinitive and participle 
are formed by annexing the regular middle endings -c@az and 
-phevo (115, 229, a). 


350. The aorist passive participle is inflected like 
hvoas (229, 3). 


PARADIGM. 
Avbeis (AvOevT-) 
loosed 
- SINGULAR. 
Mase. Fem. Neut. 
N. V. Avdeis Avbeto-a AvOev 
G. dAvoeTtos = dAvbeions dvOévros 
D. dAvderr.  ~— AO cio AvOevre 
A. dAvbévra Avbetoav dAvbév 


1 Aorist passive has no thematic vowel (317). 
2 6v- becomes rvu- before -Any, -Ons, etc. (304). 


AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE INDICATIVE. 139 


DUvAL. 
N. A. AvOévtre hvbcioa AvOevte 
G. Avbevrow = dAvOeioaw Avosrow 
PLURAL. 
N. Avbevres dAvOeioas dvbevra 


AvGévrwy AvGecav  dvbévtav 
AvOEetor AvOeioars AvOEtor 
AvOévras Avbeicas DAvOevta 


PUad Ox 


a. Explain the formation of the nominative masc., fem., 
and neut. 

6. Observe that all participles of the third declension ending 
in s, except the first aorist active, are oxytone. 


351. The inflections of the different tense stems 
(23, 195, 4, ff.) are called tense systems. ‘These are - 
divided as follows: 

1. The present system, including the pres. and impf. 
tenses in all the voices ; tense-stem Av?/... 

2. The future system, including the fut.. act. and 
mid.; tense-stem Avo’/... | 

3. The first aorist system, including the first aorist 
act. and mid.; tense-stem Avoa-. 

4. The first perfect system, including the first perf. 
and first plup. act.; tense-stem Aedvea- (first plup. 
AedvKn- Or AeAvKeEL-_). 

5. The perfect middle system, including the perf., 
plup., and fut. perf. mid. and pass.; tense-stem dedv- 
(fut. perf. XeAvo’’/..). 

6. The first passive system, including the first aor. 
and first fut. pass.; tense-stem AvOe-, AvOn- (first future 
passive Av@no°/..). 


140 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


352. Some verbs, as in Latin, are defective, lacking | 
some of the tense-stems. Others have second forms 
of the same tense, called a secondary tense system, 
which supply the place of the first parts or are used 
together with them, but often with a different meaning. 
These are the second aorist (203), second perfect (310), 
and second passive (345). 

353. ‘The principal parts of a Greek verb are the 
first person singular indicative of each of the tense 
systems used in it. Thus, Atw, vow, Elvoa, NéAvKa, 
éAvpan, EAVOnv. 


a. The second tenses may take the place of the corresponding 
first tenses. 


354. Write the tense suffix for each of the tenses 
of the different tense systems of iw, tysdw. 2. Write 
the indicative, participles, and infinitives of the different 
tense systems of A\vw, Baoitevw, Tovéw, apralo. 


Observe that the suffixes and reduplication form the tense 
stems, and the augment and personal endings inflect them. 


355- Give the principal parts of Qo, Ttovéw, Tinda, 
Bovhedo, apmrala, Kedevo. | | 


356. EXERCISES. 


1. bm adrov nduKyOn. 2. 7% Emiarod} Tapa Baot- 
héa €ypadn. 3. Kipos érouOn orparnyos tavTwv 
Y 3 nw 4} > 4 “A ; 
dco. eis Kaorwdov mediov alpoilovra. 4. tTavra 
év T@ add\w Aoyw ScdyHrwTar. 5. ado SE oTpdrevpa 

b) ~ 4 l4 ‘ 4 ‘X \ 4 
avT@ ovvedeyero TOVOE TOY TpdOTOV. 6. Td dé OUpTAY, 






AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE INDICATIVE. 141 


lOndos Hv Kipos omevdwv macav Thy 6ddv.' 7. Kiéap- 
“yos Kal avT@ Kal Tots addous EOdKEL TpoTLiLNOHVaL b7d 
“EdAnvev. 8. 68 dtipacbeis Bovdeverar drws Bact- 
Aevoe avt éxeivov. 9. TO pev TOAD TOU “EAAHVYiKOD 
ed > M4 a % OG , a ¢ s 
outws ereioOn. 10. eri Ta ehovipm To€evOjvar émhi- 

2 7 id e. N “ 7 , 
rns éhéyero. 11. kareréudOy v70 Tov Aapeiov carpa- 
: -Q7 \ / ~ / € 
anys Avdias tre Kat Dpvyias THs peyddns. 12. ot 

nw : Se, A , , / 

qmaioes él tals PBaciléws Ovpars tawevOjoovra. 
‘13. émet dé yoay émt tats Pvpais Tats Termapépvous, 
ou per orparyyot TapekhnOnoav sche ot d€ Aoxayot 
€mt Tats Ovpais emevov. 


Examine the accusatives in 5, 6 (ovu7rav) and note that as 
accusatives of specification they express the particular way in 
which the verbal notion operates. 


RULE. . ; 
357- The accusative is used in certain expressions 
with the force of an adverb. ‘This is called the adverbial 
accusative. 


358. EXERCISES. 


1. When they had heard these things they were 
persuaded. 2. Thenceforth he commanded, and the 
others obeyed. 3. The Greek was shot with an arrow. 
4. Miletus was besieged both by land and by sea. 
5. But they were not hired for this.? 6. We shall be 
hired by Cyrus. 7. He was made satrap both of Lydia 
and Cappadocia by the king. 


1 Cf. 93. 
2 emi with dative. 


142 


359- 


Aoyos, word, speech, 
course [héyw |. 

Nourds, -4, -ov, remaining ; 
76 Noutrov, for the future, 
henceforth, thenceforth 
[ Air |. 


dis- 


, = - v 
ovp-Tas, -aoa, -av, all to- 


gether, entire, all; 7d 
ovprrav, altogether, im 
general. 

aduKéw, injure, wrong. 

aripalw (atiunad-), aTipa- 
ow, etc., dishonor | ry% |. 

picbow, let; mid. hire; 
pass., be hired [proO0s |. 


KaTa-TéuTo, send down. 


THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


VOCABULARY. : 


Tapa-Kahew, -Kada, nea 
heowa, -KeKAyKa, -KeK Y= 
pat, -exARHOny," to call to 
one's side, summon, urge 
ON. | 

Tpo-Tipaw, honor 
before ; esteem. 

to€evw, shoot with arrows, 
shoot [rd€ov], [in-toxi- 


above, 


cate]. 

cicw, adv., within, inside 
of, gen. 

omws, adv., how, tn what 


way ; con)., that, in order 
that. 


LESSON XXXII 


DEPONENT VERBS.—IRREGULAR NOUNS. 


Review 61, 209, 217, 219, a, 6; 221, 2; 2238, 290, 


a,b; 293. 
360. Deponent Verbs. 


Deponent verbs have in general the forms of the 


1 Theme kade- becomes kde« by syncope. 
a short vowel between two consonants. 


Syncope is the dropping of 
For the future, see 254, 


DEPONENT VERBS. —- IRREGULAR NOUNS. 143 


middle with active signification: payopa, fight; Bov- 


—Xopar, wish. 


361. In most deponent verbs the principal parts are 
the first person singular indicative of the tense systems 
as they appear in the middle, — the present, future, 
aorist, and perfect. A few deponent verbs have the 
-aorist passive instead of the aorist middle, and are 
called passive deponents: yyéouor, nyjoowa, nynod- 
env, nynar; BovdrAopar, Bovrjocoua, BeBovrAnpar, 


€BovdyOnv. 


362. Syncopated stems in ep-. 


PARADIGMS. 
6 marnp 7 eATNP 
(warep-) (uxjrep-) 
Sather mother 
Singular. 


- Tarhp parnp 


e b) 4 
Oo avyp 
(dvép-) 
Wan 


avy p 


. matpos (rarépos) pyTpPds (unrépos).avdpds (avépos) 


N 
G 
D. warpi (warépr) = pnt pt (unre) 
A 
V 


. TATEpa pnrépa 
. TAaTEp PNTEp 
Dual. 
N.A.V. marépe - pnTépe 
G.D. marépouw ‘pntépow 
Plural. 
N.V. waré€pes EenTépes 
G. waTépwv — LeNTEepav 
D. marpace pnrpacs 


A. tarépas pNTEpas 


avdpt (avépt) 
_avopa (avépa) 


¥ 
avep 


avope (avépe) 


avd pow (avépow) 


avdpes (avépes) 
avopov (avépwr) 
avdpact 

avopas (avépas) 


144 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


a. Observe that arjp and wayrnp drop ¢€ of the stem in 
the gen. and dat. sing. and accent the ultima: that in the other 
cases they retain e of the stem and accent it except in the voc. 
sing., where they have recessive accent and take the form of the. 


stem ; that in the dat. plur. ep is changed to pa. 


6. Observe that avnp follows the analogy of arp, but syn- 
copates € whenever a vowel follows ep and inserts 6 beween v 


and p. 


c. Observe that in these cases the accent is placed upon the 
penult, except in the gen. and dat. sing. and dual and gen. plural, 
which are oxytone; ovv and wv are circumflexed. 

Remark. In English d is frequently inserted after ~; as, 
tender, Lat. tener ; gender, Lat. genus. 


363." Trrecutar Novns. 


€ e a e lal 
0,7 Bovs 1 vas 


(Bov-) (vav-) 


0x, cow ship 


N. Bovs  vaus 
G. Boos vedas 
D. Bot vi 
A. Bovv  vavy 
V. Bov — vav 


N.A.V. Boe — ve 
G.D. Booty veo 


N.V. Boes  vyes 
G. Boov veov 
D. Bovet vavor-. 
A. Bovs vais 


€ 4 e yd 
Om0vS 1 yuUrY 
(z08-) (yvvatk-) 
Soot woman 
Singular 
TOUS =—s- yur 
ITOOOS YUVaLKkos 
TOOL yuvarki 
Toon yuvaika 
TOvs yovar 
Dual 
, A 
qTOOE - yuvaike 
qTOOOLY yUVaLKow 
Plural 
, o 
TOES yuvatKes 
TOO@V yUvatK@v 
Toot = yuvan€i 
mooas = -yuvatkas 


0 hayas 
 Qayu-) 
hare 


Layas 

Layo 

Layo 

Layov or-o 
| Layas 


DEPONENT VERBS. — IRREGULAR NOUNS. 145 


a. Observe that in Bods and vais the final v} of the stem is 


‘dropped before ‘a vowel (290, 4); that they have v in the acc. 


sing. and the simple stem in the voc.; that in the acc. plur. 
Boos and vats are for Bov-vs, and vav-vs, v being dropped as 


in ty@ds (291); that in vats, va- becomes ve- before a long 
vowel and vn- before a short vowel, and the gen. sing. may have 


-ws instead of -os. 

6. Observe that in zrovs, o of the stem is irregularly length- 
ened in forming the nom. masc. sing. (7rod-s), (194, 2). 

ce. Observe that yvv7 is of the first declension, but all other 
forms come from a stem in yuvatx-; that the gens. and dats. - 
accent the ultima, and the voe. sing. takes the recessive accent. 


364. Aayds is of the Attic second declension, a form 


of the second declension having stems in instead of o. 


This w appears throughout, but takes « subscript where 
the regular endings have cv. The genitive and dative 
of this declension, when accented on the ultima, are by 
exception oxytone. 7 ews, dawn, has regularly rv €. 


355. EXERCISES. 


l. wavTa ebevopar. 2. Kdmrovar Tovs Bows. 3. Kal 
Kvp@” tapynoav ai €x Medotovyyjcou vies. 4. Taphv 
d€ Kat Xeupicodos eri Tov vedv. 5. 68’ avnp avTys 
hayas €Oypa. 6. éred) 8° ews Hv, dieBavov thy 
yepupav. 7. avaBatvovo. mapa tov matépa Tov 
Kvpov. 8. hapBaver avdpas ws émuBovdrcdovtos Tic- 
wapépvous Tats moder. 9. exw avTav Kal Taidas 
aa a b , 8 a \ \3 PS) , 
Kal yuvaikas €v Lapdeor. 10. Tots pev moot® dpduo 

1 These stems were changed to BoF, vaF (F digamma), before a vowel 
and the F then went out of use. F is equivalent to v or w. 

2 See 212. 


5 ypdopat regularly takes the dat. of means or instrument (249). 
10 


146 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


xpovra. 11. €BovdeTro TH Taide audorépw mapeivat. 
12 > \ y y \ \ a s 
2. eis THY Ew HE Bacileds oY TH OTpaTEdpaTi 


ACT 


Baht PR) C ETL 
PRAM WWII Aware = 








No. 10. Naids. 


paxovpevos. 13. evtavla Sé€ éropeiOnoar dia THs 
, ‘\ a , , > ‘ 
Mndias oraPpovs €€ Tapacdyyas TpidKovTa eis TAS 
, , ~ , : \ , ld 
Tlapvodridos Kamas THs Kvpov kal Bacidéws pntpds. 


Il. 1. But I see many cattle. 2. His wife per- 
suaded him. 3. Cyrus sent for the ships. 4. Cyrus 
fought with him.? 5. He was sent down by his father 
as satrap both of Lydia and Phrygia. 6. He will 
employ those who are obedient. 7. But his mother 
begs him off and sends him back again to his province. 


366. VOCABULARY. | 
apddorepos, -a, -ov, both, ‘yuvy,yuvaikds, woman,wife. 
pred. position. _ Spdpos, running, flight ; 
avyp, avdpds, man, hus- dpopw Oetv, on the run, 
band ; Lat. vir. double quick [drome- 
Bovs, Bods, 6, 4, 0x, cow ; dary ]. 
pl. cattle [Lat. 40s; bu- éws, ew, 4, dawn [mast]. 
colic]. ayws, -@, 0, hare. 


1 What does payovpevos express? _ 2 See 225, a. 


ATTRIBUTIVE AND PREDICATE GENITIVES. 


eATHP, pyTpos, mother: 
_ [Lat. mater ; MotuER]. 


vavs, veds, 7, ship [ Lat. na- 
vis; nausea]. No. 10. 

Twatnp, tat pos, futher [ Lat. 

s pater; FATHER]. 

mous, Todds, 6, foot [ Lat. 
pes; FOOT, tri-pod ]. 

BovrAopan, BovAnjoopat, Be- 
BotAnpar, €BovdrnOny, 
will, wish [Lat. volo; 
WILL |. 

NYCOhal, HNynropar, nyN- 
oaunv, ynynpa, lead, 
command, think, go before, 
guide, w. dat. [ayo]. 


147 


Onpdw, hunt, chase, pursue | 
[Onp, wild beast |. 

Komtw, cut, fill, slaughter 
[chor ; comma |. 

pdxopar, payovpar, €ua- 
Xerdpny, —pepadx pan, 
fight, give battle, w. dat. 

map-ert, be near, present, 
arrive. 

Xpdopar, xpyTopat, €Xpy- 
caunv, Kexpnpat, use, 
employ, w. dat. Has y 
for a in the contracted 
forms; cf. Caw (342). 

Wevdw, evo, deceive, mid. 
le, cheat | pseud-onym |. 


LESSON XXXII. 


ATTRIBUTIVE AND PREDICATE GENI- 
TIVES. 


Review 77, 79, a, 6; 80, 81. 
367. A noun in the genitive may define or limit the 


meaning of another substantive. 


Attributive Genitive. 


This is called the 


368. The relations of the attributive genitive are 
not expressed by the genitive alone, but implied by the 


1 See 253, 254, 520, a. 


2 a is lengthened to n contrary to the rule (198). 


148 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


relations actually existing between the gemitive and the 
words upon which it depends. ‘These are generally 
translated by the possessive casein English, but may be 
sometimes best translated by of, for, from, ete. 

369. The most important relations of the attributive 
genitive are the following : 

1. Possession, or other close relations, as power, 
quality, characteristic, etc.: ra Kupov Baoihaa, the 
palace of Cyrus; 6 Baovéws adeddos, the brother of 
the king: ta xpéa avrav, their flesh; 1 i®vdtns THs 
ndovns, the peculiarity of its flavor. The Possessive 
Genitive. | 

2. The subject of an action or feeling: 6 Képov 
otoXos, the preparation of Cyrus: 4 épodos Tov oTpa- 
tevpatos, the approach of the army ; Tov Dedv tohenov 
devyav, escaping the hi tk aw ‘of the gods. The Sub- 
jective Genitive. 

3. The object of an action or feeling; 8a tov ode 
Opov tev avotpatiwtav, on account of the destruc- 
tion of their fellow soldiers (the enemy destroy thewr 
fellow soldiers); Kipos é€€racw movetrat Tov “EAdnvar, 
Cyrus makes a review of the Greeks. The Objective 
Genitive. 


Observe that the word upon which the subjective or objective 
genitive depends contains an idea of action or emotion, that this 
implied action or emotion may always be expressed in the form 
of a verb with the subjective genitive as subject and the objective 
as object: 0 Kupou otddos, Cyrus prepares or makes prepara- 
tion; Kipos é&éracw troveirat tov “EXAjvev, Cyrus reviews 
the Greeks. 


ATTRIBUTIVE AND PREDICATE GENITIVES. 149 


4. Material or Contents, including the class, or that 
of which anything consists: mévre dpyupiov pvas, five 
minae of silver; Bikos otvov, a jar of wine ; Kudtikov 
dudaky, a garrison of Cilicians ; otros ieee, oa 
bread. The Genitive of Material. 

5. Measure of space, time, or value: twotapos edpos 
mr pou, a river of a plethron in width ; m&Te Hpepav 
600s, a journey of five days ; proBds €€ pnvov, pay for 
six months. 'The Genitive of Measure. 

6. The whole after a word denoting a part, or the 
relation of the whole to a part taken: d¥o0 Adyou Tod 
Mévwvos otparevparos, two companies of Menon’s 
army ;-T mokv “EXdnvixod, the greater part of the 
Greek force ; oi tpoto. Tov Tohepiov, the first of the 
enemy. Partitive Genitive. 


Observe that the attributive genitive has regularly the same 
position as the attributive adjective (79) except partitives and 
genitives of personal pronouns (1, avr@v), which have the predi- 
cate position. ‘The objective genitive also frequently has this 
position. 


370. Predicate Genitive. 

With verbs signifying ¢o de, Scene: and the like, the 
attributive genitive (867) may stand in the predicate in 
the relation of the predicate adjective or noun. ‘The 
most common forms of the predicate genitive are 
possessive and partitive : 

1. (Possessive.) ai 5€ Kapat Tapvodridos qoar, 
but the villages belonged to Parysatis. 

2. (Partitive.) Av d€ 6 Lwxparns Tav apdt Midnyrov 


150 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


orparevopevar, bul Socrates was of those ivy the field 
about Miletus. 

a7Y. EXERCISES. 

I. 1. wyetro’ rats vavoi. 2. atret Kvpov weévre 
pnvev picbov. 3. 7d Tetyos eiye Kidixwy hvdaxy. 
4. érvyxave yap Takis a’T@ éropevn Tov oOmhiTwD. 
5. Kal yap noav at modes Tusoadhépvous TO apxatov. 
6. rod d€ Mapovouv 7d etpds éoTw ElKOoL Kal TEVTE 
mooav. 7. TOV yap paxn ViKeVTwY Kal TO apyeLY 
éoti. 8. Kipos yap émeume Bixovs dos owvov. 
9. kal avtn ad addAn mpddacis Hv a’T@ Tov alpor- 
Caw? orpdrevpa. 10. ot d€ dudEavtes ToV imméwv TaXD 
€mavovTo, Tov yap % aTpovlds (ostrich) ameoraro 
devyovoa. 11. ypypara ovveBdddovTo abr eis THY 
Tpodyny Tov oTpatiwT@v at modes Exovoa.” 12. exe 
Nevoevy avTov apBavey pépos map’ ExdoTov Tor 
NYEMOVOV. 

II. 1. The captains of the Greeks remained at the 
doors. 2. He received pay for six months. 3. But the 
width of its (fem.) wall was twenty-five feet. 4. But the 
fear of the barbarians was great. 5. But the villages 
in which they encamped belonged to Parysatis. 6. But 
Clearchus at that time made an assembly of the sol- 
diers. 7. The Cilician queen admired the order of 
the army. 

1 See 366. 

2 rod aOpoifew gen. (117) depends upon mpddacis; as a verbal noun 


the infinitive may be used in any case. 
3 Voluntarily. The predicate adj. sometimes has the force of an adverb 


(271). 


COMPARISON 


372. 

apyaios, -a,-ov, old,ancient ; 
TO apxatov, formerly 
[ archives, archaic ]. 

/€pos, -ovs, TO, part, share. 

Tpo-pacis, -Ews, yn, pretext 
[ prophecy ]. 

aTo\os, preparation, expe- 
dition. 

Tpopy,-ns, nourishment, sup- 
port (rpépw)[a-trophy |. 

eropat, follow, accompany, 
w. dat. 


OF ADJECTIVES. 


151 


VOCABULARY. 


Oavpdlw [Pavpad-], won- 
der at, admire. 

oKnvéw, to be im or occupy 
a tent, encamp, be en- 
camped [aoxnvy |. 

ovp-Badro, bring together, 
contribute [symbol |. 

pevyw, flee. 

kai yap, and (this is or was 
so) for, for indeed, for 


even; Lat. etenim. 


LESSON XXXIV. 


COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 


Review 73, 194, 1; 266, 344. 


373. Verbal adjectives are formed from the verb 
theme, usually as it appears in the aorist passive, by 
affixing -reos and -ros. ‘The former corresponds to the 
Latin gerundive; sounréos (faciendus), that must be 
done: the latter has regularly the force of the perfect 
passive participle, wounrds (factus), made ; weramewaros 
(€réudOnv, aor.), summoned. 

374. There are three degrees of comparison of 
adjectives in Greek, —the positive, comparative, and 
superlative. 


152 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


375. lixamine the following : — 


POSITIVE. CoMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE. 

l. mords, faithful  mvoro-repos TLOTO-TATOS 
(auoTo-) | 

2. aadadys, safe aopadéo-repos acdadéo-Taros 
(aodaheo-) 

3. mode€uios, hostile modeuid-repos - modepie-TaTos 
(zrohepto-) 

A. paxpos, long [LaKpO-TEpos pakpo-TaTos 
(wax po-) 


Observe that the comparative is formed by adding -repos to 
the masculine stem of the positive, and the superlative by adding 
-ratos: that stems in 0, retain o unchanged in comparison when 
the penult is long (1), or followed by a mute and a liquid Ss 
otherwise the stem vowel is changed to @ (3). 


RULE. 
6: Most adjectives are compared by: adding to the 
stem of the positive -repos for the comparative, and 
-rtaros for the superlative. 


377- Some adjectives, chiefly those ending in -us 
and -pos, are compared by adding to the root of the word 
-iwv for the comparative, and -toros for the superlative. 

378. Certain changes occur when t follows the final 
consonant of the stem or root. 

1. cafter X forms with it AA, waddov (for Hawi@en 
pada, very. 

2. v after «, y, x forms with them regularly 77; with 
y it sometimes forms €: Oarrwv (ray-iwv), Taxvs ; 
peCov (Ton.), (pey-twr), wéyas. 


COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 153 


379. Examine the following : 


1. 
2. 
3. 
4 


a. 


HOovs (75-), -Hditwy, 7OLoTOS. 

, Lf 1 £ , 
Taxds (rax-), Oarrov (rax-var),; TAX-LOTOS. 
alo xpos (atoy-), aioxtov, alo YX-LOTOS. 
Kakos (Kak-), KaK-LwV, KdK-LOTOS. 


Some adjectives have both forms of comparison. Kxaxds 


has irregular forms, which will be noticed later. 


380. Some common Forms of Irregular Adjectives. 


PosITIvE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE. 
1. dyalds OLLEtva@Vv &PLOTOS 
(ap-ery, fitness) 
Bedtiwv | BédrioTos 
KpelTT@V KPaTLOTOS 


(kpar-os, strength) 


¥ 
2. Kadtdés2 KaAALwv KOAALoOTOS 


(kadXos, beauty) 


3. péyas "  peilov beytoTos 


(uélav, pey-iwv) 


4. dodvs TELwY aTNELOTOS 


(qrohe-, whe-)® (7A €wv) 


Observe that the comparative and superlative regularly are 
modified forms of -twv and -toTos ; that apetver is for auéuor; 
that « with y in pey-twv forms ¢ (378, 2). 


1 Originally the root is supposed to have been @ay-; by transfer of 
aspiration the first aspirate reappears whenever the second is lost for any 
cause, similar to the change in réOvxa (304). 

2 xa\Xioy is formed from the stem of kadAos, beauty, produced from an- 
alogy to 378, 1 

8 Syncopated, p. 1421. 


154. THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


381. The comparatives and superlatives in -os, are 
declined like 690s (73). The comparatives in -vwy are 
of the third declension and are declined like eddaipev 
(266); but shorter forms may occur in the accusative 
sing. masc. and fem., and nom., acc., and voc. plural of 
all genders. 


382. Parapiem (824), 
Singular. Dual. 
N. maAelov a \€Lov N. A. adeiove - 
G. mdetovos mEtovos G. D. mrevdvou 
D.. rretov am\Etove 
A. adeiova meio mdetov 
Plural. 
N.V. adAeioves mielous mrelova mreEiw 
G. wrEerovev TELOVaV 
D. mhretioor m\Eloot 
A. mdetovas mXEtouvs mAciova mew 


a. The shorter forms come from stems in -os; -@ and -oug 
are contracted from o-a and o-es. ‘The acc. plur. conforms to the 
nominative, as -eas becomes -evs in mods (292). 


383. Decline kaxiwv, Bedtiwv, peilov, paxpdrepos. 
384. EXERCISES. 


1. ot 6€ Hoav Kipw mordraro. 2. Tots peiloor 

, A N x , ase 4 1 

Tohepious payouvra. 3. Ta d€ Kpéa avTav Hovora 
> € i , N 2227 

nv. 4. 0 ovv mpeaBirepos Tapwr éetvyxave. 5. ape 


Bdvovow avdpas oru* mrelorovs Kat Bedriorovs. 
1 The sup., as in Latin, is often best translated by very, exceedingly, 


etc. 
2 Strengthens the sup. as as; Lat. quam, as possible. 


COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES, 155 


6. mdelous 7 Sioyihios €otparomedevoarTo Tapa K)e- 
ey A \ x / ¥ eQr 
dpx@. 7. Kupos yap éemeume Bixovs owov 7diovos 
, > , es de ¢e 4 “~ 4 e€ , 
tovtov. 8. “ABpokdpas. d€ vaTépyoe THS payns Hue 
z vm O€ TOAA@ V L Ta 
pas wévte. 9. xpdvm S€ TOAA® VoTEpoy ai Takes 
pe Bane of ‘\ a) e v4 “a 3» 
davepat éyiyvovto. 10. Kat trav imméwy Toho aoda- 
héorepoi é€opevr. 11. wapyv Xeipicodos emi Twv 
veov petdameumtos vo Kivpov. 12. ovykadet els 
Thv oxnvyv Iépoas tovs apiorovs Tov mepl avTov 
c , , s A , , 
émtd. 13. Aapeitw oav maides dv0, mpeaBurepos 
pev “Apra&épéns, vewrepos 5€ Kupos. 14. mparov pev 
\ ¥ A x ee ee 4 \ ‘ “a 2 aA 
yap €Tt wats @y, OT émaideveTo Kal adv T@ adehoa 
Kal avy TOS AaANOLS TaLol, TavTwY' TaVTA KPaTLOTOS 
evopileto. 


Examine the genitives in 7 (tovrov), 8 (uayns), 10, and 
observe that they depend upon words denoting comparison. 
RULE. 


385. All words expressing or implying comparison, 
superiority, or inferiority are followed by the genitive 
when 7, than, is omitted. 


Examine the datives in 8, 9, 10, and observe that they are 
connected with comparatives and denote the excess or degree by 
which one thing differs from another. 


RvteE. 


386. The dative of manner is used with comparatives 
to denote the degree of difference. é 


1 The partitive gen. may depend upon the sup. of an adjective (369, 6). 


387. 


THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


EXERCISES. 


They ran faster? than the horses. 2. He will use 


the most faithful. 
est way.” 
long as possible. 
suaded, 


6. Those are by far worse than these. 


3. He sends her back by the quick- 
4, ‘hey will make the first days’ stages as 
0. Most of the Greeks were thus per- 


7. All 


these whom you see are more hostile to the king than to 


the Greeks. 
388. 


ainypos, -a, -dv, shameful, 
base. 
aopadys, -€s, not to be 
tripped up, safe, certain. 
véos, -a, -ov, young |neo- 
logy |. 
, e oP 
ampéo Bus, -ews, 0, as adj. in 
comp. and sup., peo Bv- 
4 
TEpos, TpeaBUTartos, old, 
reverend ; ot mpéo Bes, 
ambassadors [priest |. 
vaTeEpos, -a, -ov, later, be- 
hind ; as adv., vorrepor, 


VOCABULARY. 


later, afterwards [ovr, 
UTTER |. 

xpovos, time, season, period 
[chronic]. 

OT paro-TEdeva, 
usually mid. 

e€ 7 . 

votepéw, be later, arrive 
after, w. gen, [varepos]. 

; ; 

ore, conj., adv., when, be- 

Cause. 

ort, conj., that ; causal, de- 
cause, since ; to strength- 
el a sup., as possible. 


encaip, 


dpeivav, aproros, refers more to excellence. 
Bedriwv, Bédrvo70s, refers more to bravery. 
KpeitTwv, KpatioTos, refers more to power, strength. 


389. ‘Translate at sight :— 


1 Oarrov. 


2 Cf. 357. 


PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 157 


The Arrival of Cyrus’s Fleet. 


"Evred0ey e€ehavver otal pods dv0 Tapacdyyas trev- 
, > F) \ al , , a Re 
Texaioexa els “Ioaovs THs Kudixias modu, emt TH 
, > , 4 ‘\ > / > 
Oadarrn oikouvperyny, peyahynv Kat evdaiwova. “Ep- 
a A XN “ 
Tavla ewervay nméepas Tpeis’ Kal Kipw mapynoav at 
€x IleXotmovyyjcou ves, TpidkovTa Kal TEVTE, Kal eT 
avtats vavapyos (admiral) NdOaydpas Aaxedarpdros. 
‘Hyeiro 8 avrais Tapas Aiyiamos &€ “Edécov, eyov 
vavs €répas Kvpou wévTe kai etkoow ais émohidpKet 
t > 
Midnrov, ore Ticoadéepva fidrn jv, Kat ovveroheuer 
Kip@ mpos avrév. Tlapyny dé kai Xeupiaodos 6 Aa- 
KEOaLLOVLOS él TOY VvEwY, peTaTEeuTTOS UTO Kupov, 
¢ , x € s a oes 
emtakoctous (seven hundred) éxwv omitas wv” €oTpa- 
THya Tapa Kipo. Ai dé vnes wppovr (lay at anchor) 
Tapa THY Kipov oKxynvyy. : 


LESSON XXXV. 
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 


Review 9, 10, 24, 28, 70, 102, 103, 1, 2, 8, 4; 104, 
1, 2; 116, 162, 164, 1, 2, 3; 369, 6, obs. 


390. ‘The personal pronouns are éyd (ue), L, od 
(ce-), thou, and ob (€-), gen. of him, of her, of it. 


1 Gen. after verbs of commanding (399.) 


158 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


301. PARADIGMS. 
Singular. 
N. eye ov a 
G. é€uov pov oou ov 
D. éuot pot oot ot 
A. eye pe oe € 
Dual. 
N. A. vo oho 
G. D.  vev opav 
Plural. | ; 
N.  Hpets vpets =—-s—(ss HES 
G. pov bpov opav 
D.  npiv bpiv odiot 
A. pas vpas opas 


Observe that éy@ is a distinct formation, that the other forms 
of the sing. and dual are similar to those of the o- declension 
(61), but those of the plural are similar to third declension, 
(223); that the stems of the plural are spe-, vpe-, ope- and 
that final € is contracted with the endings, except in odiot, 
where ¢€ becomes Z. : 


Examine the following : — 
l. ratra Soxet por, this seems best to me. 
2. Kat cot dntoow tadra, T will make known to you 
these things. 

3. doKxet Kapot tavra, this seems best to me also. 

A. muoTta apBave map épuov, he takes pledges 
Jrom me. , 


392. The longer forms of the first person éuod, énoé, 
éué are more emphatic than the shorter pov, jot, wé, and 


PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 159 


are generally used after a preposition (4). The latter 
forms, with the oblique cases in the singular of ov and 
ov, are enclitics except when they are emphatic (2). 

Examine the following : 

1. cupBovrevopeba oo, we ask your advice. 

2. mdota nets ovK exopuev, WE have not boats. 

3. ov Te yap “EdAny et Kal nets, for YOU are a 
Greek, and so are WE. 


393. The nominatives of the personal pronouns are 
generally used only for emphasis. In English the 
emphasis would be expressed by a stress of voice 
(2, 3). 


Examine the following : 

1. Aé€yerau “ATdé\A@V viKHoat Mapovav épilovra 
ot, Apollo 1s said to have conquered Marsyas, who con- 
tended with him. 

2. 6 dé weiBera, and he believes. 

3. ouTos émoheunoev emot, he made war upon me. 

4. dmémeute Tovs Sacpovs aire, he was sending the 
revenues to him. 

5. avros ov héyers tavra, you yourself say this. 


394. The forms od, of, etc., of the pronoun of the 
third person are in Attic’ Greek usually cxdirect reflea- 
éves, used in a dependent clause to refer to the subject 
of the leading verb (1). The nominative of this pronoun 
is regularly supplied by the article or demonstrative 
(2, 3); the oblique cases by ards (4). 


~ 1 The standard dialect. 


160 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


395- EXERCISES, 


\. , A 3 eens | ¢ 4 : ; S 

l. ov mépmas Tov omdurwov. 2. 0 TpdTos pds 
> , 9 \ > , , bel , > 
avOpdrwv €oti aicxpds. 3. TovTwy Bevias hpyev. 
4. n€lov adehdos dv abrov TeupOyjvar of Tavra Ta Sapa. 

A > al , @ ‘\ 4 ¢ 
5. Kvpos ypxe Tov Adyou @de. 6. mapa Kup ot 
> \ b) "$ ~ , XX \ ‘ 
ayalot a€vwrépas Tyuns Tvyydvovor. 7. 7d dé Aowrov 
neels Tepacoucla tavtrns THs Ta€ews. 8. Liypns 
LauwBave. tov —BaBapixod otpatov. 9. exdpmevor dé 
avtav noav omdtra. 10. thy éemBovdrnv ovk yobd- 
vero. ll. KZevodwv vuas tapakadetrar emt Ta Kadd- 
y an A A 93 , , 

ota epya. 12. Kupos 7s kpavyns axover. 13. rovrou 
exaoTos emOupet. 14. ovK apedhioovTa TOY OTpaTio- 
Tov. 15. vets emot od Oédere meiHecOar. 16. 6 ai- 
‘\ ©. 19 , b] \ \ e A ‘\ > “4 
TOS vp oTodos €oTt Kat yu. 17. Kat Eexeheve 
Kiéapxov peév tov deEiov Képws ryetoba, Mévwva de 
Tov @errahoy Tov evwvipov. 


Examine the genitives in 1, 8, and note the signification of the — 


verbs upon which they depend. 


RULE. 


396. The genitive is used with verbs whose action 
affects the object only in part. 


a. The genitive with many of these verbs originally depended 
upon pépos as a partitive genitive (371, 12). This principle 
_ applies particularly to verbs of sharing or enjoying. 

Examine the genitives in 5, 6, 7, 9 and note the signification 
of the verbs upon which they depend. 


1 Some of, ete. 


PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 161 


Rute. 

397. The genitive is used with verbs signifying ¢o 
touch, to take hold of, to begin, to make trial of, to aim at, 
to reach, to attain, to hit, to mass. 

a. These verbs affect the object only in part. 


Examine the genitives in 12, 13, 14 and note the signification 
of the verbs upon which they depend. 


RULE. 

398. ‘The genitive is used with many verbs signifying 
the action of the senses or of the mind; as fo hear, taste, 
smell, remember, forget, care for, neglect, spare, wonder — 
at, desire. 

a. The genitive with some of these verbs (397, 398) depends 
upon the same principle as 396 ; with others it depends upon 
the nominal idea of the verb instead of the verbal. When the 
verbal idea prevails, or when they affect the object as a whole, 
they take the accusative (10), (émreBovAnv). 

Examine the genitives in 3, 17, and note the signification of 
the verbs upon which they depend. 


Rv.eE. 


399. ‘The genitive follows verbs apn Ye to rule, 


command, fo lead as commander. 


400. 1. The Greeks began the crossing. 2. He 
will not neglect the Greeks. 3. He will take care of 
the barbarians. 4. But when Cyrus called me I pro- 
ceeded. 5. You do not desire to accompany me. 
6. He commanded the peltasts. 7. And this one 


missed him. 
il 


162 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


4ol. VOCABULARY. 
épyov, work,deed|Ge-orge|. d-pwehéw, be careless of, 
aio Odavopar, perceive,learn; neglect | were }. 

w. gen., hear, hear of émi-ped€opat, care for, give 

[ zesthetics |. attention to [péde]. 


c , a . 
apaprave, miss, fail or err 
an conduct. 


LESSON XXXVI. 


REFLEXIVE, RECIPROCAL, AND POSSES- 
SIVE PRONOUNS. 


Review 10, 70, 162, 163, 164, 1. 
402. The reflexive pronouns are éuavrov, esavrys, 
of myself ; ceavtov, ceavris, of thyself ; éavrov, éavTys, 


eauvtov, of himself, of herself, of itself. 


403. PARADIGMS. 
SING. PLUR. 
Mase. Fem. Mase. Fem. 
G. €uavrov éepavuTns NOV AUTOVY NUoV aUT@V 
D. €uavT@ = Ewa Hp avTots nul avrats 
. A A Z£ 
A. €wavrov é€mavTyv Neas avTovs Wuads avrTas. 
Sine. 
Mase. Fem. » 
G. gweavrov, cavrov TEAUTNS, TAVTHS 
D. ceavT@, cavT@ TEavTH, TavTy 
4 - 
A. oeéavtTov, cavTov CEAUTHVY, TAUTHY 
Puour. 
£ a 7 oA £ A 7 A 
G. VL@Y AUTOV VLOV AUVTOV 
a ee: a cecrigreg 
D. VELL QUTOLS vey avrats 


NETS, > , Ste 
A. VLAS AUTOUS UVLGS AUTAS 


* 


REFLEXIVE, RECIPROCAL, POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 163 


Sine. 
Mase. Fem. Neut. 
e la) e ~ € ~ | ees e “A ¢ A 
G. €avTov, avTov €auTNS, avTHS €auTOU, avToU 
e a en ¢ a cn € nw ec oR 
D. €avT@, avr@  €avTy, avuTy EAUT@, avT@ 
e c , ¢ 
A. €avrov, avTévy €avtny, avTnv €avtTd, avd 
Pur. 
rs Be. amb en ¢ an ean A ean 
G. €avT@v, avT@y EavToV, avT@OV éavToV, avToV 
¢ “ e “ e€ aA e “A e aA e A 
D. €avrots, avTois eauTais, avTais €avTols, avTols 
¢ s e , e Ps e£ ¢ , ree 7 
A. €avrovs, avrovs €auTas, avTas eauTa, avTra 


Observe that the reflexives are formed from the stems of the 
personal pronouns (390) compounded with the intensive autos ; 
that in the plural the two pronouns are declined separately in 
the first and second persons, and sometimes in the third. 


Examine the following : 

l. ddummever eri thy Eeavtod aKxnvyy, he rides back 
to his own quarters. : ‘ 

2. o€ Op@ THY GeavTOV apynv oadlovta, I see that 
you retain your own province, 

3. Tapayyédka.7T@ ApiotinT@ aoméeupar pos éav- 
Tov TO oTpatevpa, he orders Aristippus to send the army 
to him. 


404. The reflexive pronouns regularly refer to the 
subject of the clause in which they stand. But in a 
dependent clause (3) they sometimes refer to the sub- 
ject of the leading verb, and are then called indirect 
reflexives (394). 

405. The reciprocal pronoun is a\A7jAwr, of one an- 
other, formed from adXos (163) compounded with itself, 
add-ndo- (for ddA-a)Xo). 


164 


THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


406. PARADIGM. 
Dual. 
G. addndowv adj Aa aAAH Ow 
D. addndow addyaw addy ow 
A. addAndw GhAHAG aAAHAW 
Plural. ‘ 
G. daddAndov aAnA@v addA7nwv 
D. adAndors adAnAaLs addy ows 
A. adAnXous addnAaS addnra 


Observe that @AAAowv has the endings of aAXos; that in the 
accusative plural neuter, where the last syllable is short, it has 
the original accent of aos. 


407. ‘I'he most common possessive pronouns are €0s, 
my, ods, thy, hpérepos, our, vpérepos, your. These 
pronouns are formed from the stems of the personal pro- 
nouns. They are declined like adjectives in -os (70). 
They have nearly the same force as the possessive geni- 
tive of the personal pronouns, but are more definite, 
especially with the article. 


408. EXERCISES. 


1. od€utor addAnAors Yoav vpeTEepor OTpaTL@TaL. 
2. éudos dé adekdds akover cov TovovTovs hoyous. 
A. Kat 

edo0€e 


6. evrav0a 


3. nkovoe Ticcadépvous tov Kipov orodov. 

“~ > € “A \ 4 b] A 
Tov wap éavT@ de BapBapwv émemedetro. 5. 
TovT@ TOD Tpods €“e TOKE“oV TravaacHar. 
Siéyovow ahdjhov Baorreds Te Kal ot “EAAnves os 
7. ovvédeEe Td adtov oTpaTevpa 
8. Ilpd€evos Kat Mévav elo iy 


TpiaKovTa OTAOLG. 
QA lat »y 
Yopls Tov ah\wv. 


€ , , Q ¥ Ve eae} “~ LO X “A hée- 
Heerepoe oTparnyol. %. Eat. TH Eu@ adEAP@ ToOdE 


REFLEXIVE, RECIPROCAL, POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 165 


_puos, ewot dé ditos Kal moartds. 10. tHs €devdepias 
e a ~_ gh 70 / \ We) , A > A 
Vpas eyo evdatmovifw. 1]. cE evdaipovica THs apeTys. 
12. ewoi ody SoKet ovy wpa civar Huy apedety Huov 
avtav. 13. Kal ovykadet els THY EavToV oKHYHY 
Ilépoas tovs apiorovs Tov mepl adtov Enrda. 

Examine the genitives in 2, 3 (Tusoadépvovs), and note the 
signification of the verbs upon which they depend. 


RULE. 
409. Many verbs take a genitive of the source. 


a. Verbs of hearing, learning, etc., may take an accusative 
of the thing heard and genitive of the person heard from. 

Examine the genitives in 5, 6, and note that they express the 
point of departure or the idea of separation. 


RULE. 

410. The genitive is used to denote that from which 
anything is separated or distinguished. ‘Thus it follows 
verbs signifying fo remove, to-restrain, to release, to 
cease, to fail, to differ, to be apart, etc. 


Examine the genitives in 10, 11, and note that they express 


cause. 
RUvLE. 


411. The genitive is used with verbs of emotion to 
express cause. 


Examine the genitive in 7 (@\A@v), and note the word upon 


which it depends. 
RULE. 


412. The genitive follows many adverbs of place and 
time. | 


166 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


413. EXERCISES. 


1. They encamped near one another. 2. I shall 
deprive myself of hopes of safety. 3. He hindered 
the army from crossing. 4. Clearchus heard from Cy- 
rus of the multitude of the barbarians. 5. Orontas 
ceased from war against Cyrus. 6. The two armies 
were distant from one another twenty stadia. 7. He 
summoned the captain to himself. 


4l4. VOCABULARY. 
apern, -ns, fitness, virtue, e&-Sapovilw (evdapord-), 
bravery, valor. count happy, congratu- 
edevbepia, -as, freedom, lib- late [Saiper]. 
erty. orepew, deprive, rob. 


aotad.ov, stadium, 600 ywpis, adv., apart, away 
Greek ft., 5825 Eng. ft. Srom. 

Si-€xo, hold apart, be dis- 
tant from. 


LESSON XXXVI. 


THE IMPERATIVE ACTIVE, MIDDLE, AND 
PASSIVE. 


Review 16, a, 6; 25, 202, a; 304, 343, 344, 351, 
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. 


415. The tenses commonly used in the imperative 
active are the present and aorist. The present denotes 
an action as continued or repeated, the aorist denotes 


IMPERATIVE ACTIVE, MIDDLE, AND PASSIVE. 167 


a simple occurrence of the action; the time of both is 
the same (202, a). 

416. ‘The tenses occurring in the middle and passive 
are the present, aorist, and perfect. 

417. The personal endings of the imperative are as 
follows : 


AcTIVE. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 

Sing. Dual. Plur. Sing. Dual. Plar. 

2. -O. -tov -te -co -c0ov -obe 
3. TM -TowV -vT@Y OF -c0m -cbwv -ocbwv or 
TWO ay -cOacav 


-# is always dropped after a thematic vowel. 


418. The imperative has the thematic vowel of the 
corresponding tenses of the indicative, o before v, and « 
elsewhere (25). In the aorist active and middle it is a. 
But by exception the second person singular of the aor- 
ist active ends in -ov,.and of the aorist middle in -ac. 
The middle endings, except the second person singular, 
differ from the active in having -o6- for -r-. 

419. 1. Write the present and aorist imperative act- 
ive and middle of Atw: 2. Ade, 3. AVET@, K.T-A.; 2. AD- 
gov, 3. uvcaTw, etc. (825, 827). 

2. Write the present, aorist, and perfect imperative 
middle and passive of Avw (825, 829, 831): 


Pres. Mip. & Pass. Aor. Mip. Perr. Mip. & Pass. Aor. Pass. 
2. dwov - NVo-ar héAvco hWOnre 
3. dAvécba luodc$w —-— eho Bw hvOyTe@ 


K.T. A. KT. A, KT. A. K.T. A. 


168 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


Observe that in the second person singular of the present o is 
dropped after a thematic vowel (27), and eo contracted to ov; 
that in the aorist passive the active endings (344) are used ; 
that -@c is changed to -7 to avoid the recurrence of a rough 
mute at the beginning of successive syllables (304) ; and that 0y- 
stands before a single consonant, otherwise @e- remains (344). 


420. Write the indicative, imperative, participles, 
and infinitives of Ave, Bovhedo, Beene; apna 


Examine the following : 

1. py Oavpalere, do not be surprised. 

2. A€Eov dé Kat ov, and do you also speak. 

3. AeEdtw 6 oTpariarys, let the soldier speak. 
A. mpdo0vpos hawvécbe, let him appear zealous. 


RULE. 


421. The imperative is used to express commands, 
exhortations, and entreaties. Its negative is pp. 


422. Ne egatwves. 
ov is used in denying statements of fact, uw in other 
cases; ov is positive and definite, wy indefinite. 


423. EXERCISES. 


1. pn dAéyere. 2. od A€yere. 3. at Orovdat pevor- 
9 XN , ¥ ind is! , s lal 

Tov. 4. ovTw THY yvouny exete. 5. ov AduBave Tod 
_ BapBapixov otparov. 6. 6 yérepos otparnyds Toe 
pov tavodcbw. 7. tTiunfPévtwv ot wyafoi. 8. tov 
nyopace TéeVvTE pv@v apyupiov. 9. éxecbe avdpes a€vor 
THS EdevMepias Hs Bas eyo evdampovilw. 10. ra Se 
emiTHOELA TapEtyoy ToANOV apyvpiov. 11. dmécmaca 


IMPERATIVE ACTIVE, MIDDLE, AND PASSIVE. 169 


amo Tov wotapov TO Se€vov Képas. 12. Baorrevs od 
 paxetrar Séka nuepov. 13. ov Toddov Xpovov TovTOU 
HOtove oivm éemervyxave. 14. adda, e Bovre, weve emt 
T@ oTpatevpati, eyo 8 eHédw Topever Oar. 

Examine the genitives in 8 (uwv@r), 9 (éXevGepias), 10 (apyu- 
piov), and observe that they denote price or the worth, value, as 
worthy of, valued at, etc. 

_ RULE. 


424. The genitive is used to denote the price or 
value of a thing (301, 8). 


Examine the genitives in 12, 13 ey and note that they 
denofe the time within which. 


RULE. 


425. ‘The genitive is used to denote the time within 
which an action takes place. 


426. The objective genitive follows many adjectives 
which are kindred in meaning or derivation to verbs 
taking the genitive: tay els Tov ToAEuoV epywr dido- 
paléotatros Hv, he was most eager to learn military 
exercises. 


a. The genitive follows adverbs derived from adjectives taking 
the genitive: of éurre(pws avtod éyovtes, those who are ac- 
quainted with him. 

427. EXERCISES. 


1. They advanced to the wall of Media. 2. The. 
man is a valuable’ friend. 3. They buy provisions 


1 worth much. 


170 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. - 


at a great price.’ 4. He bids you come during the 
night. 5. Let the messenger of my brother be hon- 
ored. 6. Procure yourselves provisions. 7. It seems 
best to me not? to fight within ten days. 8. Advance 
to the mountain, but I wish to remain by the army. 


428. VOCABULARY. 


yvaun, -ns, opinion, plan, map-éxw, hold near, offer, 
judgment [gnome]. Jurnish, make. 

vvE, VUKTOS, H, night| NIGHT}. et, con}., 7. 

diriopabys, -és, fond of péxpr, adv., up to, until, 


learning, eager to learn gen.; conj., wntd, Lat. 

[ pavdve |. dum, donec, etc. — 
ayopala, | d-yopas-], buy, pm, adv., not, used with all 

purchase | ayopa]. moods expressing depen- 
emitvyyavw, chance upon, dent or indefinite ideas. 


meet with, find. 


LESSON XXXVIII. 


IMPERATIVE ACTIVE AND MIDDLE OF 
CONTRACT VERBS. 


Review 150, 151, 1, 2,3, 4; 152, 153, 154, 1, 2, 3; 
242, 1, 2, 3. 


429. Write the present imperative active and middle 
of tTysdew, tovéw, Snow (843, 844, 845): 


1 Cf. 423, 10. 
2 un; the infinitive, being indefinite, will take pn (422). 


fe 


IMPERATIVE OF CONTRACT VERBS. 171 


ACTIVE. 
2. Tluac, Tyna —— ‘Totee, mrocet dn doe, SyAov 
3. Tiwaera, TYMaTw ‘ToveeTw, ToLEiTw Sydo€rw, SnovTa 
K.T A. ay og © K. TX. 
MIDDLE. 
2. Tipdov, Tiu® ‘oreov, movov = SydAdov, SynAod 
3. tipacoba, troveeo Ou, onroéoba 
Tipacbo mroveto Ow dynrovaba 
K.T.A. K.T.A, K.T.A, 
430. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. Hyepsva aire Kopov. 2. diromabys qv trav 
apdi ra€eus. 3. TH Kvpov gidia ypnobe. 4. ra Oi- 
Kava Toveite. 5. py mpos TOUS Opakas Toleua. 6. mar 
pakadeitw Tovs EavTod pH payerOu. 7. ovitw 
exk\ynoiav Tov avTov oTpatiwrav. 8. ja) Tole TavTA, 
> , , e an € A oN 
® Kiéapye. 9. pusbovobwy ot orpariorar vueov émi 


Tow 10 KONE €ls THY GavTOD oKnYHy Lé 
TOUT. . ovy sTHV GavTov oKnryny Ilépoas 


Tovs apiotovs. 11. dydrovvTwr ods Tiuwor. 12. we 
pdobwrv <ioBddrew «is THY Kuduxiav. 13. ra dkpa 
pyre’ Kdpos pyre of Kiduxes xatatapBavorter. 
14. Kdéapyos pév tov defiod Képws nycicbw, Méevor 
d€ TOV EVoVU MOU. 

II. 1. But choose commanders. 2. Try to conquer 
the barbarians. 3. Lead the way” to the provisions. 
4. Fear to embark in the boats. 5. But shout to one 
another not to run double quick. 6. Let him make an 
assembly of the Greeks and: barbarians m the plain. 
7. Withdraw from the royal army a journey of five 
days. 


1 unre... pyre, neither... nor. 2 Omit. 


172 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


431. The first three chapters of Xenophon’s Anaba- 
sis, divided into suitable portions, are introduced with 
the following lessons. A few sentences, chiefly such as 
contain matter irrelevant to the main narrative and rare 
words, have been omitted. Sometimes a word or phrase 
has been changed for a simpler form, but the text for 
the most part has been retained intact. The meaning at 
least has in no way been changed. ‘The selections are 
introduced in the order of the narrative as the pupil 
becomes prepared to understand their principal con- 
structions. ‘I'hey may be omitted until the lessons have 
been completed, and then taken with a review of the 
lessons. But it is better that they be taken in order 
with the lessons, and be read according to the directions 
of 55, a, 6; 96,1, 2,3; 97, 1, 2, 3, 4; 107, p. 115%. 
The pupil should endeavor to recognize sentences that 
have occurred in the preceding selections, and to apply 
the rules of syntax to the new ones. With this in view, 
rules especially applicable to each selection are given at 
the beginning as a review, and such foot-notes as the 
pupil should need have been added to aid him in apply- 
ing the principles of syntax. The more analytical study | 
should be deferred to later reading. ‘The meanings of 
new words are given in special vocabularies ; but: they 
should be further studied in connection with the gen- 
eral vocabulary. 


432. THE STORY OF THE ANABASIS. 


In 407 B.c. Cyrus the Younger, the second son of 
Darius Nothus, king of Persia, was appointed by his 





READING LESSON. Ks 


father satrap of Lydia, Phrygia the Greater, and Cappa- 
- docia. At this time he was only seventeen years of age, 
but even then he aspired to the throne of his father, and 
began to prepare, if need be, in the event of the accession 
of his elder brother Artaxerxes to the throne, to wrest it 
from him by force. When now, at the death of Darius 
Artaxerxes became established in the kingdom, Cyrus 
began to execute his plans; and accordingly in the spring 
of 401 B.c. he set out from Sardis with a large army. 

The first book of the Anabasis, the march upward, 
tells the way in which Cyrus levied his Greek army of 
over ten thousand, and the incidents of the journey 
until they reached the plain of Cunaxa, about fifty miles 
from Babylon, where the decisive battle took place. In 
this battle the forces of Cyrus were victorious, but 
Cyrus himself through his own rashness was slain, and 
thus the purpose of the expedition was defeated. 

The remaining books, which should be called the 
“ Catabasis,” the march downward, gives an account of 
the retreat of the “Ten Thousand,” among whom was 
Xenophon, the historian of the enterprise, and of their 
adventures until, in the spring of 399 B.c. in Asia 
Minor they joined the army of Thibron. 


433: Accession of Artaxerxes. Imprisonment and Pardon of 
Cyrus. 


Review 92, 97, 1, 2, 8; 119, 121, 147, p. 77’, 236, 
1, 6, ce; 237, 238, 245, a; 268. 

1. Aapetov cat Tapvodridos yiyvovrar’ matdes dvo, 
mpecButepos pev “ApraképEns, vedrepos d€ Kiupos, 


174 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


b] A \ > e “A \ ¢€ , ‘\ A 
emet S€ joleve. Aapeios Kat bramreve Thy TEehevTHY 
Tov Biov, éBovrkero TH Taide apdorépw mapetvar. 
2. 6 ev ody mpeaBuvrepos Tapwr eTUyxave* Kupor dé 
p p by 

A bp) “A «@ a 4 4 
PETATEMTETAL ATO THS APXNS NS aVTOY TaTpamyy Erol- 
noe. davaBaive. ov 6 Kdpos tov “EXAjvev éyov 
z 4 / ¥ de 3 A i / 
émhiras TpvaKkocious, apxovTa d€ avTav Feviay Lap- 
pacvov. 

3. "Emesdy Sé érededrnoe” Aapeios, Kai éBacihev- 
oev® Apra€épEns, Ticoadepyyns Sua Bahra tov Kdpov 
Tpos Tov ddehdov ws emiBovrevar adT@. 6 S€ Teiferai 

x 4 a ¢ > ey. Uae. de / 
Te Kal ovALapBaver Kupov ws atoxtevwy"* 7 O€ pyTHP 
eFaitnoapern” avrov amoméume wah em THY apXHV. 


yiyvopau, become, happen,be, tedevrn -ys, end, death. 


accrue, be born,| genesis |. [réNos]. 
acbevéw, be ili, sick. Bios, life, [QuicKk; bio- 
viromTeva, suspect, appre- graphy ]. 

hend. 


1 Explain the tense, and note the recurrence of the same. 

2 The aorist in a subordinate clause, especially after temporal or rela- 
tive words, as, eet, ov, Gre, etc., frequently has the force of the pluperfect 
(314, a). Cf. Lat. historical perfect with postguam, ete. 

3 The aorist of verbs denoting a continued state generally expresses the 
entrance into that state. This is called the zaceptive aorist. | 

4 Cf. 236, obs. ce. 

5 Made intercession for him, lit. having begged him off. 


INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS, I[75 


LESSON XXXIX. 


INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE 
PRONOUNS. 


Review 103, 1, 2, 3,4; 104, 1,2; 178, 184, 186, 
223. 


434. The interrogative pronoun tis, ti, who, which, 
what, takes the accent on the first syllable, and never 
changes the acute to the grave (XIV.). The indefinite 
Tis, Tl, some one, any one, a certain one, is distinguished 
from the former by the accent, which it receives upon 
the last syllable. This pronoun is enclitic (102). 


435- PARADIGMS. 
Interrogative. Indefinite. 
Masc. & Frm. Nevt. Masc. & Fem. NEvtT. 
Singular. 
N a , A A 
. Tis Tt Tis Tl 
v4 A a A 
G. tivos, Tov Tivos, Tov TWOS, TOV ~—«TLVOS, TOV 
P ~ , nw 
D. rin, to Ti, TO Tiwi, TO Tivi, TH 
“A. tiva TL TLVa Tl 
; Dual. 
4 4 , v4 
N. A. ive . TIVE TLVE TLVE 
, onl 
G. D. tivo TiVOLV TLVOLV TLVOLV 
Plural. 
N , 4 , , 
. TWwes Tiva TLVES TLV 
, wn wn 
G. rTivev — Tivev TLVOV TLVOV 
yd 
D. tion Fit TLL TLOL 
4 - 
A. tivas Twa TLVasS TUG 


176 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 
a. The Ionic has gen. téo, ted; Attic Tod. 


436. The indefinite relative pronoun doris, whoever, 
whichever, whatever, is formed by uniting the relative 
os with the indefinite ris. Hach is separately declined, 
but the accent of the enclitic is dropped 


437. Parapiem, 
Singular. 
Nae y 9 9 
. OOTLS NTLS OTL 
G a 9” y - M4 
. OUTLVOS, OTOU NOTLWOS OVTLVYOS, OTOU 
@ Y @ = ns 
D. @tim, o7@ HTL @TLVL, OT@ 
yY Y 
A. -ovtia nvTiwa OTL 
Dual. 
y Y y 
N. A. orwve ATLVE WTLVE 
G. D.  otvrivow QivTivoly ~— OL TLV OLY 
Plural. 
Y Y Y 
N. owtuves  Q@UTLVES = aTiva 
e@ 4 a a 
G. @VTLV@V, OTwY @VTLVOV QOVTLVOV, OTWV 
2 9 e 
D. otor.ct, oTos QLoTLOL OLOTLOL, OTOLS 
y 7) 9 
A. ovotivas aC TLWaAs aTLWa 


438. Examine the following : 

1. €veaGe aio. ris éhevbepias Fs [for Hv] Kékry- 
abe, prove yourselves worthy of the freedom which you 
POSSESS. 

2. ovv ois [for ody éxeivors ots] pddiora dudeis, 
with those you most love. 

1 When an enclitic forms the last part of a compound word, the com- 


pound is accented as if the enclitic were a separate word: do-re. 
2 6re is thus written to distinguish it from Ore, con}. that, ete. 


INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 177 


3. Wye Ooov Hv avt@ otparevpa, he led whatever 


army he had. 


Observe that in 1, 7v is assimilated to the case of its antece- 
dent; that in 2, this assimilation still takes place when the 
antecedent is omitted; that in 3, the antecedent, orpatevga, is 
incorporated into the relative clause. | 


RULE. 


- 439. The accusative of the relative as object of a 
verb is generally assimilated to the case of its antece- 
dent, if this is a genitive or dative. ‘The antecedent is 
often attracted into the relative clause and agrees with 
the relative in case. 


440. Examine the following: 

l. tis Sh ten at 3; who gives the order ? 

2. tiva yvdunv exere ; what opinion do you hold ? 

3. éyoval ties TAde, some speak as follows. 
ehaivero avOpwrds tis, a certain man appeared. 


441. ‘The interrogative ris and indefinite tis may be 
either substantive or adjective. 


442. Examine the following : 


l. ri BovrAeobe ; what do you wish ? 

2. épwrdc. éxetvov ti Bovderau, they ask him what 
he wishes. 

3. déye te oe Hdiknoa, tell what injury I have 


done you. 
12 


178 ' THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


Rute. 


443. The interrogative zis is used in both direct and 
indirect questions. But in indirect questions the indef- 
inite relatives are commonly used, 3. 


444. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. Tlepo@v tives edevyov. 2. Kat & €Xeyov 
7, A r) , ‘ > tal y , 
Exetvos’ amynyyeANev. 3. emepedetTo OTL Tornoe Ba- 
—aureds. 4. Ti* Bovderar nuiy xpnoOa; 5. épwra 
OTL movetre. 6. €dHAwoE TOdTO ois EmparTe”* TH VOTE 

, Y cn 2 2 a , 7S 
pain. 7. oats Cyv* eémdupe, meapdcbw var. 
8. édevepiav aipov av’ adv exes. 9. uot ovv. doxet 

> 3 a) e ~ > ”~ > \ 4 Y \ 
OvK apedety Hud avTov, aha BovreverBar OTL Xp) 
an p) , ety > ..2 5 a 
mTouw €k TovTwv. 10. omocas ciye dudaKas” ev Tats 
TOEL, TapHyyerd€e Tots Ppovpapxois ExdoTors ap- 

4 + , 4 , \ 
Bdvew avdpas Wedorovynaiovs ort meiorous Kal Bed- 
tiatous. ll. 6 Ktpos améreume tovs yuyvopévous 
dacpovs Baciret €x Tav Tohkewv av* Tiroadéprns 
ETUY XK AVEV EXOD. 

II. 1, Speak whatever seems best to you. 2. Xen- 
ophon asks what announcement ® he is making. 3. Pro- 
ceed with those you have. 4. What then do I bid you 
to do? 5. They trusted the guide whom the satrap 
sent. 6. But if any one sees any other plan better than 
this, let him speak. 7. He orders Aristippus to send 
to him the army which he had. 


@ See the general vocabulary. 

1 Cf. 261, a. 2 Cf. 342. 

5 For rév dudaxey depending on dpovpipxos (439). 
* Explain the case. B git: chidy 4: 


NUMERALS. 179 


LESSON XL. 


NUMERALS: CARDINAL, ORDINAL, AND 
NUMERAL ADVERBS. 


445. The most common forms of the cardinals, ordi- 
nals, and numeral adverbs are the following :* 


CaRDINAL. ORDINAL. ADVERB. 
1 fs, pia, ev, one Tpatos, first amaé, once 
2 duo, two devrepos, second Sis, twice 
3 Tpets, Tpla TpiTos Tpis 
4 rértapes, TéeTTApa TETapToOS TETPAKLS 
5 mévre TELTTOS TEVTAKLS 
6 €€ EKTOS EEAKLS 
7 énta eBdopmos ENTAKLS 
8 éKTo oydoos OKTAKLS 
9 évvéa EVATOS EVAKLS 
10 déka d€KkaTos dexaxus 
ll évdexa EVOEKATOS EVOEKAKLS 
12 dedexa dwd€KaTos SwOEKAKLS 
13 pets Kal déka TpiTos Kat d€kaTos 


or TpeoKaideka | 
14 rérrapes kai déka = térapros Kal dékaros 
or TEeTTApETKaideKa. 


1 For complete lists see the grammars. Note the forms in the list that 
have already occurred in the Lessons. Commit to memory the first twenty 
of the cardinals and the first five of the ordinals and adverbs. Give the 
meaning of the remaining forms in the list from their composition. 


180 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


15 qwevrexaideca. = méumTos Kat déKaros 
16 éexxaideca etc. 
17 énraxaideca 


18 éKxrwKaidexa 
19 évveaxatdexa 


20 etkoou(v) ELKOOTOS 
21 ets Kal etkoot TPOTOS Kal ELKOOTOS 
or etkoot ets 

30 TpiaKovTa TpLaKOOTOS 

40 rertapaKovta etc. 

50 wevTnKovTa 500 mevrakdoro, -at, -o 

60 é&nKxovtTa 600 €€dKdor0L, -at, -a 

70 €BdouyKovra 700 émrdxKootot, -at, -a 

80 dydoryKovra 800 6éxraKoc.oL, -at, -a 

90 é€vevyKovTa 900 évaxdorol, -aL, -a 
100 é€xarov 1000 yidvou, -at, -a 
200 Siaxdoror, -at,-a . 2000 Sducyidvor, -a, -a 
300 TpiaKdcror -at, -o 3000 sproyidtor, -at, -a 


400 rerpdkdoror, -at,-a 10000 pipror, -at, -o 


a. Observe that the numbers from déka to etxoor are com- 
pounds ; that in compound pxBReesns like 21, 22, etc., the 
numbers may be connected by «ad in either order; but if xaé 
is omitted, the larger, as in English, precedes. 

6. Observe that: 1. Above e’xoov the tens end in -xovta 
(Lat. -génta), the hundreds in -«écvor (Lat. -centi), and the 
thousands in -ytAvor. 2. Tpiaxovra and Tertapaxovta have 
a and a respectively before -covra, but the others have 7 ; 
Siaxdotot, -al, -a and tpaKdotol, -at, -a have a before -xdcvor 
and the others @. 38. The thousands to mupsoe are formed by 
wipe the numeral adverbs to.-x7 x00. 

Observe that the ordinals with the exception. of Tparos 


NUMERALS. 18] 


‘are derived from the cardinals ; that all except dedtepos, &Bbdo- 
pos, and dySo0s have the suffix -ros (Eng. -¢/), and those from 
twenty upward all end in -ootds (Lat. -eszmus). 

d. Observe that the numeral adverbs, except the first three, 
have the suffix -a«is, denoting how many times. 


446. ‘I'he cardinals from wévre to Exardv are inde- 
clinable. ‘he higher cardinal numbers in -cou and all 
ordinals are adjectives of three terminations of the vowel 
declension (70). 

447. The first four cardinals are thus declined : 






Masc. Fem. NeEuvt. Masc. Fem. & Nevt. 

N. eis pia ev 

. €VOS puas  EVOS N.A. dvo. 
D. evi pug. Evi G.D. dvoty 
A. @a pilav ov | 

Masc. & Fem. Nevt. Masc. & Fem. NeEvtT. 
N. rpeis Tpia TETTAPES TETTAPA 
G. Tpiov Tpiov TETTAPWV —« TETTAPwY 
D. tpici = Tpiai _ *TéeTTAapot TETTAPOL 
A. Tpeéis T pla Te&Tapas TérTapa 


a. Observe that eis has endings of the third and first declen- 
sions, dvo of the second, and tpe’s and térrapes of the third. 

4. The compounds ovdeés (oddé and efs), wndets (wndé and 
eis), are declined like efs; as, odde%, oddSeula, oddS&v; oddevds, 
ovodemlas, ovdevds, etc. : 


448. EXERCISES. 


; \ fa) A @ 
I. 1. obdets ratra edeyev. 2. rH Sétpirn fre. 3. rov- 
Tov TO eupos eat dv¥o* mrAMpwrv. 4. Kal e€ehavver 
\ ~ ~ 
dua THS Avdias orabpmods tTpEels Tapacdyyas elkoor Kal 


1 $0 is often used with a plural noun. 


182 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


SSM ne RA! es ae: ma unhen OL We 4 
dvo. 5. evravl”’ euervay nuépas Tpets Kal eXapBavov 


> A ’ . , - @ ak & A 
€K TYS XePas Ta ET LTHOELA. 6. KEV €T7l TO OpPOs TH) 


, peers \ 9 \ A 5 , , 29 
TETAPTY HEP. ce KQU €7L TOU OEVTEPOVU Addov TAVTaA 


~ eae e , A ~ e lal 1 > Q nw > 
_éyiyvero. 8. Urdpye yap vov Huiv’ ovdey Tov ém- 
, = ? > a 4 ¥ ca) ; 
Tndciwv. 9. TH 8 ovv OTpaTiG TOTE ErEurpe KUpos 


pucbov terrdpwrv pnvov. 10. Kupos & ov avaBaive 
emt TA Opn, OVdEVOS KwAVOVTOS. 

II. 1. There the army remained seven days. 2. He 
asks him for two thousand mercenaries. 3. Socrates, 
the Achaean, came with five hundred hoplites. 4. But 
in the first day’s journey the enemy did not appear. 
5. But on the fourth day they descend into a plain. 
6. But of the army of the king there were four com- 
manders. 7. Thence he marches three stages twelve 
parasangs. But in the third stage Cyrus holds a review 


of the Greeks and barbarians. 


VOCABULARY. 


449. 

SevTEpos, -a, -ov, second ; 
SevTepov Or TO Sevrepor, 
as adv. or adv. acc., a 
second time |deutero- 
nomy |. 

did-ytdwo1, -at, -a, two thou- 
sand. 


eis, pla, ev, one; Lat. unus. 


> , , v4 
ovdeis, -pia, -€v, 20 one, not 
any, none, nothing ; ovdé€v, 
as adv. acc., zot at all. 


rérrapes, -a, four |tetr-arch, 
tetra-gon |. 

TéTapTos, -y, -ov, fourth. 

Tpets, tTpia, three [THRER, 
tri-pod]. 

Tpitos, -n, -ov, third. 

vrapxw, begin, be under, 
be on hand, support, w. dat. 

TP@TOS, ~n, -ov, first ; Tpo~ 
Tov OF TO Tp@ToP, as adv. 
or adv. ace., first, at first. 


1 See 146. 


REVIEW. 183 


450. ‘l'ranslate at sight : 
A Halt and Numbering at Celaenae. 


> ‘a > 4 \ “A , 
Evrev0ev efehavver orafmovs tpets Tapacayyas 
» > , “~ , 4 > , 
eiKoow els Kedawvas, THs Ppvyias Tow olKovperny, 
4 \ > / > “~ ¥ la) ¢ - 
peyadny Kat eddaipova. évtavia ewerve Kidpos juépas 
, \ 2 , e , , 
TpidKovta* Kat nKe Kiéapyos 6 Aakedaimdvios duyds, 
¥ € 7 6 \ \ A > 
éxov omditas xtAiovs Kal TeATacTAas Opakas oKTako- 
4 ‘\ ? ~ / 9 \ \ 
giovs Kal tofdtas Kpyras diaxociovs. apa dé Kal 
Loos TapHv O Lvpakdavos Exwv OmAitas TpLaKkogious, 
‘\ 7 ec 3 ‘ ¥ e 7 4 \ 
Kal Lopatveros 0 Apkas €ywy omhitas xAlous. Kat 
evravla Kipos e€éracw Kat apiOuov trav “EdAjvev 
éroinoey ev TO Tapadeiow, Kal Hoay ol ovptarTes 
the whole number] omXirar pev pdpvoe Kat xidvor, Ted- 
pre se ) 
\ + F \ \ a 
TaoTal d€ audi Tovs dicytdiovs. 


LESSON XLI. 
REVIEW. 


Ravivw Lessons XXVII.—XL. in order, with their 


vocabularies, and note the allied words in the same. 


451. elpt, enclitics, contract nouns and adjectives of 
the consonant declension. 

1. Conjugate ecui in the present and imperfect. 

2. In the inflection of these tenses, how do the verbs 
in -we differ from verbs in -w ? | 

3. What forms of the present of eiwi are enclitics ? 

4. What forms of the pronouns are enclitics ? 


184 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


5. What other enclitics have occurred in the preced: 
ing lessons P 

6. Decline dvvamis, rd€is, ioyvs, and tazevs. - 

‘7. What peculiarities of contraction of most stems 
in vc of the third declension ? 

8. What peculiarity in the inflection of stems ending 
in a diphthong of the third declension ? 

9. Decline Bovs and vavs, and explain the form of 
their accusative plural. 

10. Decline 7dvs, Taxds, wéyas, and zodvs. 

11. Explain the formation of the nominative masce. 
and neut. sing. of stems in eo-. 

12. Give peculiarities of contraction of stems in eo- 
and ao-, 

13. Decline képas, kpéas, SwKparns, evpos, opos. 

14. Decline rAnpys, Kkarapavys, and compare their 
inflection with stems of nouns in es-. 

15. Define ie es nouns, and give their pecu- 
harities of accent. 

16. Decline raryp, avyp, yuvy, and dayas. 

17. Give a summary of the rules for gender of nouns 
of the third declension. 


452. Tenses of Completed Action, the Passive Voice, 
Imperative Mood,.ete. 

1. Define reduplication, and give the different forms 
that it can take. : 

2. How are the perfect active, perfect middle, and 
future perfect tenses formed? What do these tenses 
denote ? 


REVIEW. 185 


8. Conjugate the perfect and pluperfect indicative 
active and middle of BovAeva, Fda, and rovéw. 

4. Conjugate the perfect and pluperfect indicative 
active and middle of apwa{w and Kedeva. 

5. Decline AeAvKds, and state how its stem differs 
from the other active participles. 

6. In what tenses does the passive differ from the 
middle ? | 

7. How is the stem of the aorist passive formed ? 
What personal endings does the aorist passive use ? 
What further peculiarities in its inflection ? 

8. Conjugate the future perfect, future, and aorist 
passive of Avw, wav, and Kededvo. 

9. Explain the consonantal changes of the themes in 
ervOnv, TevKa, HpTacOnv, nxXOnv. 

10. Give summary of rules for euphony of consonants. 

1l. Decline AvOeis, and give the rule for accenting 
its nom. sing. masc. 

12. Give the personal endings of the imperative . 
mood active and middle. 

13. Conjugate the present and aorist imperative ac- 
tive, middle, and passive of Avw, Bovrtedo, Biw, toréw, 
and dnddw. 

14. What does the imperative mood express ? - 

15. Distinguish between the use of the present and 
aorist in the imperative. 

16. Distinguish between the use of wy and od. 

17. Define a tense system, and give the tense suffix 
of each of the first six tense systems. 


186 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


18, What are the principal parts of a Greek verb ? 

19. What are the principal parts of a deponent verb? 

20. Give the principal parts of BovdeJo, rovéw, dp- 
Talw, ayw, apy, payoua, Bovropar, ypaomat. 

21. How does the future tense system differ from 
the present ? 

22. How does the aorist tense system differ from the 
future ? 

453- Comparison of Adjectives. 

1. How are adjectives regularly compared ? 

2. What adjectives form their comparison with the 
endings -twy and -voros ? ; 

3. Compare vod€uos, muordés, Hdvs, Kakds, Kaés, 
ayalds, rods. 

4. Decline peilov, ndiov, dpeivwr, Kpeitrov. 

5. How are all adjectives in -os regularly declined ? 

454. Pronouns, Personal, Reflexive, Interrogative, etc. 

1. Decline éya, ov, 6, ds, avrds. | 

2. When is the nominative of the personal pronouns 
used? 

3. What supplies the place of the pronoun of the 
third person in the oblique cases? What supplies its 
place in the nominative case ? 

4. Name the reflexive pronouns and explain their 
composition. Decline éuavrov and Eéavrov. 

5, Distinguish between direct and indirect reflexives. 

6. Give the most common possessive pronouns. 

7. Decline ris; 6a7us and explain its accentuation. 

8. How may the interrogative and indefinite pro- 
nouns be used ? 


REVIEW. 187 


455. Numerals. 

l. Write the first ten cardinals and the first five 
ordinals. 

2. How are the numbers from déka to efkoor formed? 
How can 21, 22, etc., be written ? | 

3. Write the endings of the tens above eixoot, the 
endings of the hundreds and the thousands. 

4. Decline eis and rpets. What other numbers are 
declinable ? 

456. Syntaz. 

l. Distinguish between the use of the dative of re- 
spect and accusative of specification. 

2. Define the adverbial accusative. 

3. Distinguish between the use of the attributive 
genitive and the appositive. | 

4, Define the subjective and objective genitives, and 
give examples of each in Greek. 

5. Define the genitive of material, of measure, and 
the partitive genitive, and give examples of each in 
Greek. 

6. How can the attributive genitives be translated ? 

7. What position does the attributive genitive regu- 
larly take ? Give exceptions to the general rule. 

8. What verbs may take the predicate genitive? What 
are the most common forms of the predicate genitive ? 

9. Give the construction with words implying 
Jullness. 

10. Give the sonetecetion with words implying com- 
parison, superiority, etc. 

11. Define the dative of degree of difference. 


188 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


12. Give the construction with verbs affecting the 
object only in part. 

13. Give the rule for the construction with verbs sig- 
nifying to touch, etc. 

14, Give the rule for the construction with verbs of 
sense perception, etc. | 

15. What construction do verbs of commanding take ? 

16. Distinguish between the use of the genitive of 
time and the dative of time. 

17. Give a summary of the genitives that have ap- 


peared in the preceding lessons. 
18. Give the construction of the relative pronoun. 
Give the rule for its assimilation ? 


457. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. ot "EAAnves axovovor THs TOV BapBdpwr Kpav- 
A , pes 5 Le A aA » 
yyns. 2. ovre yap EAXnp €t kal ypets To~ouToL ovTEs 
9 Kea an \ , fa an F) e A 
Ogovs ovdpas. 3. TaV dé TohEuiwn im7eEts Elot Ol TEL 
\ , + ‘\ , \ ~ 4, 
oro. kal mreiorov a€ior. 4. diva pécov dé THs ToAEwS 
pet torapos Kvdvos ovoua, edpos S00 mA pwr. 5. €v- 
revlev eLehavver oTaO pov Eva Tapacayyas TEVTE ETL TA 
, , > , > ¢ A ree 
Supias Teiyyn. 6. avaBaiver ody 0 Kipos, Kadovvros 
a) ‘\ > Sie, ¥ A \ A ‘ 
Tov waTpos avTov. 7. édo€€ TavTa Kal avdpas ovv 
Kiedpyw méumovor ot Hpatwv Kipov ra dd€avta TH 
otpatia. 8. of De@y yuas dpKor Kwdvovot TohEmious 
s > , ( , AS ee 2 ae = ay | \ 
civat ahAnAos. Y. TELPATOVTaL Kal VELLY Kal NUL TA 
Bédricta oupBovredoa. 10. ot dé “EdAnves airot 
net gee a > , e , y +” Ky 
ep éavT@y eTopevovTo tyemovas exovtes. ll. aye, @ 
K\éapxe, TO oTpdrevpa KaTa pécov TO TOV TOhEMioV. 
12. ywyepova airyoovar ot orpati@ta Kdpov oatis dud 


“REVIEW. 189 


- didias THS Xdpas ada. 13. “Apsatos ervyyaver Tod 
| immkod apxwv* ovtos be edevyey Exwv Kal TO.oTpa- 
TEVA TAY OU WYELTO. 


II. 1. But those of the horsemen whe pursued 
quickly stopped. 2. Cyrus had plotted against his 
brother. 3. The war against Cyrus has been made 
by Orontas. 4. He sent to the men thirty days’ pay. 
5. Say, therefore, to me what you have in mind. 
6. There are many Persians better than this man. 
7. And these wagons of flour and wine those’ with the 
king at that time plundered. | 


458. ‘I'ranslate into Greek : ? 

Darius and Parysatis had two sons: the elder, Arta- 
xerxes ; the younger, Cyrus. But when Darius was ill 
and apprehended the termination of his life, he desired 
that both of his sons should be present. Now Arta- 
xerxes happened to be by him; but he summoned Cyrus 
from the province of which he had made him satrap. 
Cyrus accordingly went up with three hundred hoplites 
of the Greeks. But when Darius had died and Arta- 
xerxes had become king, 'Tissaphernes falsely accused 
Cyrus to his brother, charging that he was plotting 
against him. And he was convinced, and had Cyrus 
arrested ; but his mother interceded for him, and sent 
him back again to his province. 

1 See 79, a, b. 

2 The pupil should translate this selection from the dictation of the 


teacher, and then compare his own translation with the Greek of 433. In 
like manner frequent recompositions of the Anabasis should be given. 


190 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK.. 


LESSON XLII. 


FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF 
ADVERBS. 


Review 374, 375, 1, 2, 3, 4; 376, 377, 378, 1, 2; 
379, 1, 2, 3,4; 380, 1, 2, 3,4; 385, 445, d. 


459. Adverbs, as in Latin, are frequently derived 
from adjectives. Examine the following: | 


ADJECTIVES. STEMS. Gen. Prur. ADVERBS, 
1. Kakos KaKo- KQK@V KAKOS 
2. dSikatos OuKaLo- OuKaiwv OuKatws 
3. KaXds KaNo- KaN@v KANOS 
4. dds nOv- oer deus 
5. dodalys aodareo- aodarov acdahas 


Observe that. adverbs in the positive are formed from adjec- 
tives by adding -ws to the stem, which take the same form as 
before -wv in the gen. plur. neut.; that the adverb is contracted 
when the adjective is contracted, 5, and has the accent of the 


gen. plur.} 


460. Examine the following : 
peya, peyada, greatly. 
mparov, first. 
Todv, much, far, a great way. 
Taxv, quickly, soon. 
vorepor, later, afterwards. 
Sevrepor, for the second time. 


1 Note that the form of the adverb, including its accent, may be found 
by changing the » of the gen. plur. to s. 


FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 19] 


| a. The neuter accusative of the adjective, both singular and 
plural, may be used as an adverb. . 


461, Examine the following : 
avrov, here, there, gen. of avros. 
mavTy, on all sides, dat. of was. 
tédos, at last, acc. of téXos. 
otkot,! at home, loc. of otkos. 


a. The oblique cases both of adjectives and nouns are used 
as adverbs. 


462. Allied to case endings are certain endings mark- 
ing relations of place: -Oev, whence ; -61, where ; and 
-de, whither. The endings -Oey and -@ are affixed to 
the stem, but consonant stems assume an -o-; the end- 
ing -de (enclitic) is affixed to the accusative: otxo-Oer, 
Jrom one’s home; abrd-A, in this or that place ; otka-d« 
(irreg.), homeward. ie 

463. Other forms of adverbs are common, with va- 
rious terminations denoting relations of place, time, or 
manner: avw, up; éyyvs, near; para, very; ela, 
where, there; €b, well. 


464. Examine the following : 


PosiTIvE. CoMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE. 
Adj. dodadys dodadréorepos dodadéoraros 
Adv. aodahas acdadéotepoy dodadréorara 
Adj. Kadds Kad\twv Ka TOS 


Adv. kKad@s Ka\Niov KgANLOT SO 


1 Final -o« in otkos is regarded long in determining the acceut (XI.,.N.). 


192 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


a. Adverbs derived from adjectives use the neut. acc. sing. 
of the adjective for the comparative, and neut. acc. plur. for the 
superlative. 


465. Examine the following: 

a. ; d€ TUXN EoTpaTHynTE KaANOY, but fortune led 
them more honorably. 

2. hoav wokv wpofvpdrepor, they were much more 
zealous. | 

3. Tod yap Tov imma erpexov Oarrov, for they ran 
much faster than the horses. 


Ruiz. 


466. Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, and other 
adverbs. 


467. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. Form adverbs in the positive degree from 
péyas, BapBapiKkos, tpd0vpmos, and rays. 2. Compare 
Hews, TAXEwWS, TOAV, KaKas, and dikaiws. 

“II. 1. atrév te dyabov emote. 2. Sixaiws radra 
Toul. 3. mopevodpela oikade. 4. Kal ovtw Oarrov 
TmavoovTar. 5. Kpaticta éeudyovto. 6. Kahas éxeu." 
7. Ta Tap €uot” aipod avyti Tay olka. 8. TIpd€evos 
Eevodovta petretéupato oixoler. 9. ov Bovdrducba 
Thv Bactkéws yopav Kakds woveiv. 10. ravrys THs 


1 yo with an adverb is equivalent to etvat with an adjective. 

2 In general, any qualifying word or phrase standing with the article 
has the force of an attributive. Here a noun denoting men or things is 
often omitted (79, a, 4). 


FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 193 


neepas TovTO TO TEéAOS HY. 11. Kat TodLs adTdAt wKeEtTO 
- ar X WN) / e , ad 12 > 4 
“peyahn kai eidaipwv Oapakos ovopa. . G&KOVOVTES 
\ 
Tyv Kupov apernv ndvoyv Kat tpofupdrepov cvveTroped- 
ovto. 13. avdpes otpatiata, py Oavpdlere ort 
xaher@s dépw tots mapovor mpdypacw. 14. od 
, lal + ia / 
KivduvevoravTes TOV adAdwv Théov TiunOjocerOe oTpa- 
Tiwtav UT Kupov. 15. ti? ovv, edeye 6 Ktpos, adu- 
TOPS Fae ne to \ , ) , ( > 
KnOeis br Enwov voy TO TpiTov EmiBovdevers por. 16. ev 
7@ Tpocley ypdv@ Has avTovs ev EmroieL. 


Examine the accusatives in 1, and note the signification of 
the verb upon which they depend, and observe that one of the 
accusatives denotes the person and the other the thing; note 
in 9 and 16 that xaxds and ed take the place of the accusative 


of the thing. 
RULE. 


468. Verbs signifying fo do anything to, or say any- 


thing of, a person or thing take two accusatives. 


a. €v or Karas, well, or Kaxas, ill, frequently takes the 
place of-the accusative of the thing. 

6. The accusative of the thing is of the nature of a cognate 
accusative (261). f | 


469. 1. Let it be otherwise. 2. At last they all 
also rode away. 3. And it seemed best to make quickly 
the treaty. 4. They were proceeding more safely. 
5. Hedesires to do harm tothe country. 6. And they 
gladly obeyed, for they trusted him. 7. But a moun- 
tain surrounds it [avrd] on all sides from sea to sea. 


1 Explain the case. 
2 Cognate accusative (261, a). 
13 


194 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


470. VOCABULARY. 


dddws, adv., otherwise. otxobev, adv., from home. 
acdadas,adv., firmly, safely. oixor, adv., at home. 
avrov, adv., ix the same mavrTyn, adv., in every way, 


place, here, there. on all sides. 
duxaiws, adv., justly. Tayéws, adv., Oarrov, tda- 
ev, adv., well, happily. xtra, guickly, soon. 
ndéws, adv., gladly. TéXos, -ouvs, 70, end; adv. 
kakos, adv., dl, badly. ace., at last, finally [talis- 
Kahos, adv., fairly, well. man |. 
Kpatiota, adv., im the best yaren@s, adv., with diffi- 
manner, most bravely. culty, painfully. 
vov, adv., now [Now]. kwdoveva, be in danger, in- 
oikade, adv., fo one’s home, cur danger. 
homeward. CUP-TOPEVOMAL, ACCOMpAny. 


LESSON XLIIL. 
FORMATION OF WORDS. 


Review 10, 20, 22, 23, 24, 25, 28, 40, 41, 48, 49, 
58, 61, 73, 111, 116, 1383, 1438, 194, 1, 2, 3, 4; 195, 
9085223, 229;-05 267, B51, 1.2) 3.4, Beirbse OFa, 
$75, 1,2, 8, 4;.879, 1,2, 3,4; 380, 1,2, 3, 4; 402, 
403, obs.; 417, 437; Lessons XL., XLII. 


471. The Greek is developed from a small number 
of primary elements. ‘These, divested of everything 
that is formative or accidental, are called roots. The 


~ 


FORMATION OF WORDS. 195 


root is properly of one syllable, with a short vowel, and 


expresses the general meaning of a word, ‘This may be 


modified in various ways, and from the same root several 
different words may be formed. ‘Thus, dpyo, degin, 
apyy, rule, apxos, leader, are all from the root and also 
theme (apx-). ‘The themes of verbs-or stems of nouns 
thus formed may in turn be modified: as apyatos, 
ancient, from (apxa) the stem of apyy. . 


472. Simple and Compound Words. 

A word is either simple or compound. A simple word 
is formed from a single stem (133); as axpo-s, highest, 
moni-s, city. A compound word is formed by combin- 
ing two or more stems ; as axpo-zrodus, citadel. 


473. Primiives and Denominatives.. 

A word formed directly from a root or theme of a 
verb is called a primitive; as apyy, beginning, (apx-). 
A word formed directly from a stem of a noun or ad- 
jective is called denominutive ; as apyatos, of the begin- 
ning, ancient, from (apxa) stem of apy. : 

474. Prefixes and Suffixes. 

‘The formative elements by which the root is qualified 
and new words formed are ealled affzes. An affix 
placed before the principal root is called a prejiz ; 
placed after a principal root, a sufiz. | 


475. Only the most important suffixes are here given. 
These should be thoroughly committed to memory, and 


regularly applied in acquiring the meaning of words. 


Special exercises will be given in the following lessons 
for the formation and grouping of words. 


196 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


Primitive Nouns. 
476. Examine the following : 
1. vddrrw,' guard, [dvdak-] ; dvdra€,? a guard. 
2. Kypitra, proclaim, [knpdx-|; Knpv€, a herald. 


Observe that the noun stems in some words have no suffix ; 
the root serves as the stem of the noun. 


477. Examine the following : 

1. payxopa, fight, way-, (way-a-) payn, battle. 

2. tpérw, turn, Tpew-, (tpor-a-) tpomry, turning. 

ic, ‘¢ _ (tpot-o-) Tpdtros, turn, manner. 

4. aré\dw, send, ared-, (aToh-0-) oTddos, expedition. 

Observe that the suffix annexed to the roots in 1,2 is length- 
ened to m7 in the nom. sing. (40); that the suffix in 3, 4 is o, 
and ¢ is added to form the nom. sing. (58); that when the suf- 
fix is added in 3, 4, € of the root is changed to o; that the 


suffixes -@ and -o regularly denote the abstract filea of the 
verb.? 


478. Examine the following: 

1. rovdw, make, move-, (roun-ra-) tounrys, maker, poet. 

2. Kehevw, command, Kedev-, (kehev-oTa-) KehevoTySs, 

commander. 

3. colo, Tdw, save, Tw-, (Tw-THP-) TwWTHP, savior. 

4. %yéopar, lead, wye-, (Hryepov-) Hyyeudr, guide. 

a. Observe that sometimes when the ending is added, the final 
vowel of the root is lengthened, 1,(198); that a consonant is some- 


1 See 378, 2. : 2 See 208, a. 

8 In general, the meanings of the suffixes hold good ; but their distine- 
tion as forming primitives and denominatives is not always applicable, and 
their meanings in the figurative use of words havea wide range: as, oTdAos 
may mean what is sent on an expedition, army, navy, force, ete. 


FORMATION OF WORDS. 197 


times added, as in forming the perfect middle and aorist passive, 
. 2, (325). The consonants most commonly added are », p, o. 
6. Observe that the suffixes -ra, -rnp, and -wov denote the 
—agent.: 


479. Examine. the following : 


kpiva, decide, kpw-, (kpiv-ot-) Kpiots, decision, trial. 


mpattw, do, mpay-, (mpay-o1-) mpakis, undertaking. 
tem, persuade, m0-, (m8-r1-) wiotis, belief, faith. 
Sém, bind, Se-, (Se-o-p0-) Serpds, binding, band. 
tiw, honor, tT-, (ti-wa-) Tysn, worth, honor. 


OR oo 1 


Observe that the final consonant of the root is subject to the 
regular euphonic changes before a consonant of the ending, 1, 2, 
3; that the suffixes -ov, -rt, -wo, and -wa denote action; but 
sometimes, as -wa, 5, they may express the abstract zdea of the 
verb. 


480. Examine the following : 


l. ypdopar, use, xpa-, (xpy-pat-) xpnua, thing of use. 
2. mparra, do, tpay-, (mpay-pat-) mpaypa, decd. 


Observe that the suffix -uar denotes the resu/t of an action. 


Denominative Nouns. 


481. Examine the following : 

1. trmos, horse, immo-, (imm-ev-) immeds, horseman. 

2. rdé€ov, bow, to€o-, (to€o-ra-) ro€dtyns, bowman. 

3. OTpaTid, army, oTpatia-, (oTpariw-Ta-) oTpaTia- 
Ts, soldier. 


1 The pupil should explain the formation of the nom. sing. of each 
~ noun in the lesson. 


198 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


Observe that: 1. The final vowel of the stem is sometimes 
dropped before a suffix beginning with a vowel, 1. 2. The final 
vowel of the stem may be changed, usually o to e, and &@ to o or 
wo, 3. 3. The suffixes -ev and -ra denote the person with refer- 
ence to his function. 


482. “Hxamine the following : 

1. codds, wise, copo-, (sopo-va-) copia, wisdom. 

2. evvous, well disposed, ebvov- (ebvoo-), (edvo-La-) Ev- 
vora, good will (p. 63°). 

3. motos, faithful, muoto-, (muoto-rnT-) moTOTNS, 
fidelity. | 

Observe that the suffixes -.a@ and -rnr affixed to adjective 

stems denote the abstract idea of the adjective or quality. 


. Primitive Adjectives. 
483. Examine the following : 


Roots. 
1. cad-, cop- (cod-o- and -a-) codds, -7, -dv, wise, 
2. KaK- (kax-o-and-a-) Kakds, -4, -dv, bad. 


Observe that primitive adjectives, like nouns, are formed 
from roots or themes by the suffixes -o and -a. 


484. Examine the following : 
1. dopa, be pleased, 78- (nd-v-), ndvs, -eta, -v, sweet. 
2. Taxos, swiftness, Tax-(TAaX-v-), TAXVS, -€ta, -v, swift. 


3. wevdonar, lie, pevd- (Wevd-eo-), wevdys, -és, false. 


a. Observe that adjectives of the first and third declensions 
are formed from roots by the suffix -v, and those of the third 
from roots or themes by the suffix -es. 

6. Observe that adjectives derived from verb roots or themes 
express relations to the actions or states denoted by the verbs, © 





FORMATION OF WORDS. 199 


and those derived from roots common to nouns express relations 
to the persons or things denoted by the nouns. 


Denominative Adjectives. 

485. Examine the following : 

1. Baowreds, king, Baovdrev- (Bacide-v0-), Bacidevos, 

2. Bacireds, hing, Baoidev-(Bacrd-tKo-)," BaciduKés, 
kingly. 

3. modenos, war, Tohewo- (7rodEp-Lo-), ToAguLOS, hos- 
tile. 

4. mdédewos, war, tmodeno- (modep-LKo-), TodEurKds, 
warlike. 

5. apxy, rule, apya- (apyx-uKo-), apxuKds, jit to rule. 

Observe that the suffixes -o and -1«o express that which per- 


tains or belongs to the noun, but -t*o sometimes denotes fitness 
or ability; that adjectives in -txos are regularly oxytone. 


486. Examine the following ; 

1. ypvads, gold, xpuco- (xpva-eo-), yptoeos (xpv- 
cous), golden. 

2. Hidos, stone, MuBo- (AvBo-wvo0-), AiPwvos, made of stone. 


Observe that the suffixes -eo and -tvo denote the material. 


487. The suffix -evr- expresses fullness : 

xapis, grace, xapt- (xapt-evt-), yapiers, -eooa, -€r, 
graceful ; yapievros, etc. 

488. The suffix -repo- distinguishes one of two ob- 
jects, and -raro- one of several : 

motos; faithful, muarorepos, murrératos (376). 


1 A diphthong is often dropped before a vowel in the ending. 
2 Primitive ending (373). 


200 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


489. Decline: 1. pvda€, dpxwr, apy, Moyos, Hye 
pav, mpagis, mpaypa, woNrirns, tmreds. 2. codds, 
nous, Wevdys, Uwv, Avoas, Avdpevos, HSiwv, Xpucods ; 
Xaples, yapieroa,' yapier. 


490. EXERCISES. 


Give the meaning of the following words at sight, 
and show their formation: 1. rpiros, Sedrepos, dourds, 
TPOTOS, NMETEPOS, UueTEpos.. 2. apy, apxatos, apxt- 
KOS, APXo, apywv, apydpevos. 38. huddtTo (dvdak-), 
pvrag, pudaxy. 4. omovdy, Tyuy, ayn, Tpohy, do- 
yos. 5. ragis, Siw€is, wohirns, omdiryns, Kopyrns. 
6. rofevpa, Pidvos, oixia, tipsos, Mudyoros. 7. a.p- 
yupous, ummKos, vautixds, BapBapixds, BapBapikas. 


491. ‘Translate the following at sight, ascertaining the 
meaning of the new words by their derivation: 

1. ébedcOn rovTo, 2. wiores hapBdve. 3. eu- 

7 , > A » 4 
Baivovor Taxéws els mAotov. 4. yKovoe Tiooadépvous 
X , , a > 3 ‘ t ee e 4 
Tov Kipov orddov. 5. Av toxvds aitav éxatépwbev 
ae > \ ¥ ‘ 
[éxdrepos, each of two]. 6. els duyny etpabe Tods 
éEaxioyidiovs. 7. Kal Tots immo apiora expovTo. 
8. qv dé ev to Se&i@ 7d “EdAQuikoy TedtacTLKOr. 
9. e&jyyerte Tots didous THY Kpiow Tov ‘OpdrTa. 

e A A , 

10. peilov dé  wpakis rhs mpdcbe daivera. 
ll. éreriuntro yap td Kipov & evody te Kat 
U4 € , > \ , \ , 
muotoryta. 12. 4» Baotrtéws apyn mrAynGeE pwev KOpas 
kal avOparav ioxupa nv, Tors dé pyjKeor TOV dd@V Kat 
To SueomdoOa Tas Svvapers doOevys. 


1 -egaa is for -er-ca, a shorter stem giving -oo-; « after r and 6 some< 
times forms oo (378. 2). The dat. plur. mase. and neut. is yapieot. See 824. 


DENOMINATIVE VERBS.— COMPOUND wWorRpbs. 201] 


LESSON XLIV. 


DENOMINATIVE VERBS.— COMPOUND 


WORDS. 


492. A verb whose theme is derived from the stem of 
a noun or adjective is called a denominative. | 
493. Hxamine the following : 


: 


a. 


Tih, Tyua-, Tinaw honor. 


2. oikos, oiKko-, oikéw, dwell. 

3. Ondos, Sndro-, SnrAow, make clear. 
4. 
5 
6 


Baotrevs, Baoirev-, Bacirevw, be king. 


. Bovdy, a plan, Bovka-, Bovredvw, plan. 


. KIVOUVOS, KLVOLVO- KLVOUvEtw, Tun a risk. 


Observe that the verbs are given as they appear in the 


present indicative active ; that o of the stem is sometimes changed 
to €, 2. : 

6. Verbs in ev first arose from nouns in -evs, 4. Afterwards 
by analogy others were formed, 5, 6. 


494. Compound Words. — First Part. 
Examine the following : 


1. 


2, 
3. 


A. 


otpato-medov (oTpatds, oTpato-, médov; ground ), 
camp ground. 3 

Kop-apyns (Koun, Kwpa-, apxyw), village chief. 

hoy-ayds (Adxos, Aoyo-, company, ayos, leader 
[ayw]|), captain. 

aKevo-hopos (aKevos [oxeves], bagyage, pépe, 
carry), baggage carrier. 


202 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


Observe that when a noun or adjective stands as the first 
part of a word only its stem is used; that the stem vowel is 
regularly dropped before a vowel; that stems in o- may be 
changed to o- stems, 4. 


495. An adverb may be the first part of a compound 
word: ev-vous, well disposed. 

496. A preposition may be the first part of a com- 
pound word: ém-Bovdy, plot. 

497. Compound verbs are formed directly only by 
prefixing a preposition to 4 verb: ava-Baivew, I go up. 
In other cases, compound verbs are denominatives formed 
from compound nouns and adjectives: orparnyéw 
(orpatnyés), be general. 

498. Inseparable Particles as Prefixes. 

Examine the following : 

1. adskos (a-[ Sinn], justice), unjust [ a-theist]. 

2. adaopos (a-[adpos], way), impassable. 

3. avodos (av-[6d6s], way), impassable. 

4. Svamopos (dus-[adpos], way, ford), hard to’ pass 

[ dys-pepsia ]. 
evTropos (€v-7dpos), easy to pass [eu- phony]. 
6. npurdens (np-[déw], wanting), pews a half 
[hemi-sphere]. 
7. a-mas, all together. 


i 


Observe that: 1. The prefix av- (a- before a consonant), 
called alpha privative, has a negative force, like Eng. wn-, Lat. 
in-. 2. The prefix dvo- denotes 2//, difficult, and is opposed 
to the prefix ed-, weld. 3. The prefix #ue- denotes half, Eng. 
hemi-. 4, a- (older form a@-, akin to Gua) in Grds is copula- 
tive, denoting union. 


DENOMINATIVE VERBS. — COMPOUND WORDS. 203 


499. Compound Words. — Last Part. 
Examine the following : 
l. ortparnyds (oTpards, otpato-, ayos), general. 


2. dirddOnpos (gridr0-s, Ojnpa), fond of the chase. 


Observe that the initial vowel of the last part of a com- 
pound noun or adjective may be lengthened ; that when a noun 
stands as the last part of a compound word its final syllable may 
be changed, 2. 


500. Compound adjectives in -ys, -es are very fre- 
quent, and are regularly oxytone: mu-deys, half full ; 
kata-havys, in sight ; a-pavys, out of sight. 

501. In meaning, compound nouns and adjectives 
are of three classes : 

1. Objective compounds, of which one part is a sub- 
stantive and stands to the other part in some relation 
expressed by an oblique case: otpat-nyds, leader of an 
army ; Kop-apyns, the head of a village. 

2. Determinative compounds, of which the first part, 
in the sense of an adjective or adverb, qualifies the last 
part: dKpd-molis (axpa-modis, highest city), citadel ; 
ev-vous, well disposed. | 3 

3. Possessive compounds are adjectives in which the 
first part qualifies the second as in determinatives, and 
the whole describes some person or thing: yxpuco- 
xahivos (xpucds, gold, yadives, bridle), with a gold- 
mounted bridle ; iod-m\evpos (ivos, equal, trevpa, side), 
equilateral. 

502. Explain at sight the meaning of the following 
words by their derivation : 


m 


204 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


1. dddws, 7ddws. 2. xpvoiov,' madiov. 3. Ee 
, > , / / 4 
Kos, Aiyvmrios. 4. orpdrevpa, to€drns, ro€evpa. 
5. carpatedw, tofevw, Topedw, motTedw. 6. viKdo, 
pucdw, a€idw. 7. diroxivdvvos, vavapxos, dpovpap- 
xos (dpovpds, guard, garrison soldier). 8. mpodpdda€, 
émucbodvrda€ (omober, in the rear), tpd0vpos (Bvpos, 
heart, soul). 

503. ‘Translate at sight, ascertaining the meaning of 
the new words by their derivation: 

1. rd evpos TrEPpaiov Hv. 2. 7d Epos HuimdeOpov 
a , , , Y 
nv. 3. moTevoconey Kipw. 4. Svévveois wrmov xpu- 
coxadiwvov réure. 5. TovTwY ToAAAa KpHumaTa Exomer. 
6. orpatnyjoe tavtny THY oTpaTynyiav. 7. Toheny- 
oe Ticcadépva avy tots dvydo. Tov Muidynoior. 
8. éxédkevoe 5é Kal Tods Midnrov mohvopKodytas adv 
> “s UA ~ ¥ » , 
aito otpareverOar. 9. Kipos yap emeume Bixovs 
¥ e “A 4 > 4 > N 4 € wn 
olvov Hprdoeets ToAAaKis. 10. ddurmeder eri THY EavTod 

\ \ A 4 , ae 

oKxnvyny dia ToU Mévwvos orparevparos. 11, ra dra 
Kal Ta oKevoddpa ExovTes eoTpaToTedevcavTO Tapa 
Knveapxo. 


LESSON XLV. 
GRIMW’S LAW.—WORD GROUPING. 


Review 87, 88, a,1, 46; 189, 1, 2, 8, obs.; 190; 
Lessons XLITI. and XLIV. 


504. The English language contains many words 
(87), that have been directly borrowed or adapted from 


1 -,ov, a diminutive ending, small, etc. 


» 


GRIMM’S LAW. — WORD GROUPING. 905 


the Greek: émuorod%, epistle; daday€, phalanx, ap.6- 
pos, arithmetic. It contains also important words 
which have not been borrowed, but which have been 
handed down in both languages from the same original 
source.’ These are called cognate. In each language 
they undergo certain changes of form, and sometimes of 
meaning. ‘There is generally a corresponding Latin 
and German word : warjp, pater, vater, FATHER ; “HTP, 
mater, mutter, MOTHER. 

505. The principle regulating the interchange of 
mute consonants in these different divisions of the Indo- 
European language is known as Grimm’s “ Law of 
Permutation of Consonants.” 

506. Examine the following : 


OricINAL Sounds. GREEK. Latin. ENGULiIsH. 
1. Rough or ph dépw , Jero BEAR 
kh nv (L)anser GOOSE, GAN- 
aspirate. x" 
th Oyp fera DEER [DER 
9. Middleor ( & BovAovar(Bod-) volo wit 
smooth. 4g yevos genus KIN 
) duo duo TWO 
3. Smooth or ( 7 movs (7ed-) pes — FOOT 
ava K Kaew calo HAUL 
T TpEeis trés THREE 


Observe that: 1. The tendency of consonantal change is from 
rough to smooth, and from smooth to rough. 2. In Latin the 
rough consonants are represented by the aspirates / and 4, some- 


4 “ Tndo-European Original Language.” 2 Cf. p. 231, 


206 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


times by v.! 3. In other cases the mutes are generally the same 
in Greek and Latin, but all of the mutes are changed to one 
degree in English :? a, 8, , generally appear in English respect- 
ively as f, p, and 4; x,y, x, as 4, & or c, and g; 7, 6, 0, as th, t, 
and d. 

507. ‘The vowels of the roots and stems also undergo 
a phonetic change. ‘This is termed Vowel Gradation. 
The vowels arranged in the order of their strength, 
beginning with the weakest, are u, v, €, o, a; in Latin, 
2, wu, €,0, a. At change of any vowel into one farther 
to the right or into a long vowel or diphthong is vowel 
increase ; a change to the left is vowel decrease (weak- 
ening or loss). The general direction in the phonetic 
change of vowels is toward the weaker; and a change 
from the weaker to the stronger vowels is generally for 
a special purpose. But the principle that underlies 
much of phonetic change is the tendency to ease of 
utterance, and the particular form of a vowel depends 
greatly upon the influence of the adjacent consonants. 

508. Give the Latin and English words cognate with 
the following, and apply the principles of phonetic 
change both to consonants and vowels: 1. dépw. 2. Oyp. 
3. yévos. 4. mods. 5. tTpets. 6. wnrnp. 7. warp. 
8. P¥pa, DOOR. 9. Hv, ménsis, MOON, MONTH. 10. ox7n- 
vy (oKa-), scena, SCENE, SHADE. 11. oivos (fowvos),? 

1 In the middle of a word the aspirates are frequently represented 
by the smooth. Other exceptions to the law can best be learned by 
observation. 

2 They are changed to two degrees in German: 6vyarnp, daughter, 
tochter. 


8 (F) obsolete vau or digamma, equivalent to Latin v and English w 
(p. 1457). 


GRIMM’S LAW.— WORD GROUPING. 207 


vinum, WINE. 12. otkos (fouxos), vicus, village,‘ vicula, 
villa, -WICK, -WicH, as in Berwick, Norwich. 18. xcopy 
(«u-, rest), guies, civis, HOME, HIVE. 14. Bovs, Bor-), 
bull, cow ; bos, bovis, cow. | 

509. Give the words? cognate with the following : 
l. d&a. 2. E(oe€). 3. dxTd. 4. uTép. 

510. In acquiring a Greek vocabulary, associate with 
the Greek words belonging in a group the related Latin 
and English. If the student is acquainted with Ger- 
man, he should associate also with these the German. 
words. | 

511. Groups of related words are given in the fol- 
lowing lessons. ‘The Greek groups contain in the main 
only such words as have occurred in the preceding les- 
sons, except a few needed to show the connection ; but 
other related words should be added as they occur in 
the subsequent lessons. Compound words and proper 

names have generally been omitted. The Latin groups 
contain only the most common words ; but other Latin 
words should be added by the teacher, if need be; to suit 
the larger vocabulary of the pupils. 

In the Greek groups, simple words that are generally 
formed on a stem derived directly from a root or from 
an ultimate theme are printed in black-faced letter. But 
simple words, on the contrary, derived generally from 

1 Borrowed from the Latin. 

2 See the general vocabulary for Latin and English forms. 

8 For a fuller treatment of Latin words see Lewis’s “ Latin Dictionary 
for Schools,” or his “ Elementary Latin Dictionary.” For a fuller history 


of the English words see Skeat’s “‘Etymological Dictionary of the English 
Language.” 


208 | THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. — 


-astem that appears in some preceding word, and com- 
pounds, are printed in light-faced type. 

In the English groups, the cognate words are in 
light-faced capitals, and the borrowed words are in 
black-faced letter. 

512. In the following typical group, analyze the 
Greek words according to the principles in Lessons 
XLIII. and XLIV. Distinguish the case or personal 
ending, suffix, stem, theme, or root, on which the word 
is made, observing the changes of form. In denomi- 
native verbs, point out the ending and preceding stem. 
In compounds, give the parts that compose the word. 
Note the related Latin and English words, and when- 
ever practicable, apply Grimm’s Law. 


513. R. ay-, ag-, drive, lead, weigh, consider. t&y-w, 
drive, lead, bring, carry ; &y-dv, -@v-os, 0, a bringing to- 
gether, an assembly, a contest ; ay-pé-s, 0, field (a place 
where herds are driven); ayp-o-s, -a, -ov, living in the 
fields, wild; & y-6-s, 6, leader ; otpat-nyo-s, 6, general ; 
aoTpatny€e-w, be general; orpatny-ia, -as, generalship ; 
hoy-ayd-s, 0 (Adxos, R. Aex-, company), captain ; nye 
o-pat, go before, lead, command, think ; ny€-pov, -dv-0s, 6, 
leader, guide ; &&-wv, -ov-os, 6 (ay +o =a), aale; 
dp-ata, -ns (apa, adv., together), a wagon with two con- 
nected axles, four-wheeled wagon ; apak-.r6-s, -6v, passa- 
ble by wagon ; &&-10-s, -a, -ov, weighing as much, worth ; 
a&ib-w, think worthy, demand. — 

ag-o, lead, drive; ag-men, -in-is, n., army, band ; 
ag-e-r, -gri, m., field; axi-s, -is, m., aale. | 


VERBS OF THE FIRST CLASS. 209 . 


AcRE, ACORN; agony, ant-agonist, strat-agem, strat- 
egy, etc.; dem-agogue, etc.; axiom. : 


514. EXERCISES. 


Translate at sight, ascertaining the meaning of the 
new words by their derivation or by allied forms : 

l. radra dé Ta Onpia oi immets ediwmxov. 2. év dé 
Tals oiKiats Hoav xHves. 3. Hoav de Kat Boes ev Tats 
Beg ¢€ a 5 a , 34 a , 
oikiats. 4. nets evikdpev Bacrhéa emi rats Ovpas 
avrov. 5. katadapBaver tavtas evdov Todvs KopyTas 
Kal TOV Kwopapxynv Kat THY OvyaTépa TOU Kwpdpxov. 
6. mavres yap ot Tov apiorwr Ilepoay Traides émi Tats 
Baorréws Ovpats tadedovtTa. 7. Kat diroOnpdraros 
> it % \ NS , , , 
Hv Kat mpos Ta Onpia perto. dirtoKiwdvvdratos. 
8. “Opdvras dé Ilépons avnp, yéever Te tpoojKov Ba- 

~ \ ‘ , ‘4 > “A > / 

gihet Kat Ta TOAEWLA AEyopmEVOS EV TOLS apioTots Ilep- 
“~ > , 4 
gov, emuBovdever Kiipo. 


LESSON XLVI. 


PRESENT SYSTEM OF VERBS.—VERBS OF 
THE FIRST CLASS.’ 


Review 23, 198, 252, 253, 254, @; 255, 256, 325, 
$51, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,6; 352, 393. 


515. Each tense system is formed by some modifica- 
tion of the theme of the verb (23). The present system 


1 Review questions upon the formation of words may be found in 
Lesson LXV. (p. 308). 
14 


210 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


of most of the verbs thus far presented is formed by 
adding the suffix °/. to the theme: Ava, toda, déya, 
pévw. Verbs that form their present stem in this man- 
ner belong to the Variable Vowel or First Class. 

516. In respect to the formation of the present stem 
from the theme, verbs are divided into seven classes. 
For convenience a few verbs forming their tense stems 
from essentially different themes are put by themselves 
as an eighth class. ; 

517. The First Class is the most numerous of all the 
classes. Most of the verbs of this class are regular, i. e. 
they are formed according to the general rules for form- 
ing the tense systems, but they may at the same time 
be defective, or lack some of the principal parts (352, 
353). 

518. Conjugate the octet i bailing in the forms thus 
far presented, of Avw, Aéyw, wovéw, Tysdw. Explain the 
endings -a, -ews, -ec in the act. ind. sing. 

519. Give the principal parts of the following verbs: 
alréw, airing, etc.; dnrAdw, SyrAdow; ToLeéw, TOLNTw ; 
TELPAW, TAL, Saeed. Onpedw, Tadevo. 

520. In some vowel verbs the final stem vowel is 
variable in quantity, remaining short in some of the 
forms, and lengthened in others.’ 


1. Oia, sacrifice, Oico, voa, TévKa, Tevpa, 
eTvOnp. 
2. iw, loose, bow, éhioa, h€huca, AEAvan, EAVO nD. 


1 For a more complete list of the verbs of the several classes see the 
grammars. Only the most common appear in these lessons. 


VERBS OF THE FIRST CLASS. 211 


8. Kkaréw, call, Kado, éxdreoa, KeKhynka, KeKANpaL, 
exhnOnv. 

A. pdyopat, fight, waxodpar, Euaxeraunv, pmeuayy- 
par. 

a. The future of cadréw and wadyopuat is formed by dropping 

and contracting (254). 


6. The theme care- of cadéw becomes xAe- by syncopation 
p. 1421), and appears as «A7- in the last three principal parts. 





521. Vowel verbs that retain the short vowel, and a 
ew others, add o to the theme in the perfect and 
luperfect middle and passive and in the first passive 
ystem (325, 344). 


1. ondw, draw, ondow, €oTac4, EoTAKA, EOTAT LAL, 
| éomaa nv. 
* 2. reréw, finish, TEho, ETéKETA, TETEEKA, TETEAET PAL, 
erehéo Onv. 
3. KerteUw, order, Kedkevow, ExéAEVTA, KEKENEUKA, KE- 
Kéhevo par, exedevo nv. 
| 4, tratw, strike, waiow, éravoa, Téraika, eraic nv. 
522. Sometimes the present is formed from a longer 
theme in ¢€ and the rest of the tenses on a shorter theme 
without €: Soxéw! (Soxe-, 253), Sdéw, etc. But gener- 
ally the present is formed on the shorter theme, and the 
other tenses or part of them, except the second tense 
system (352), on a longer theme in € (198). 


1. BovrAopm, will, Bovjcopar, BeBovdAnpa, €Bov- 
AynOnv. 


1 Most verbs in -ew have regular stems in € as rouew. 


213 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


2. dSéw, need, Sejow, edénoa, Sedénxa, Sedénpan, 
eden nv. 

8. péva, remain, epewva, pewevynka. 

4. éédw or Oéda, wish, edyjow, nOEdnoa, HOEy«Ka. 

5. paxoua, fight, waxovpar, etc. 

6. pédd\ow, intend, pedinow, EwedAd\noa. 


523- EXERCISES. 


I. 1. érdyyave yap Ovdpevos. 2. Ovdpevos déyes 
b) a ¢ \ b an , e al Fs 
avT@ oTt Baoidevs ov paxeitar déka Huepov. 3. Ar- 

, yes 4 Fe \ ¥ ¥ , ars 
ciov Hv 6 oTabuos eva Eewedde Kataveav. 4. avrov 

7 XN 4 XN A , af 
maiee Kal TiTpm@oKE dia TOU Oapakos. 5. Suerédour 
Xpopevot TOLs TOV TOdELiov Tokevpacr. 6. vUY dEetraL 
Kdpos éreoOar Tovs “EXAnvas emi Baothéa. 7. ot Se 
OTPATLOTAL Ol TE AUTOU Exeivou Kal oi GAOL TAaVTA aKOv- 
cartes erynverav. 8. Tov pev Kaos TOLOVYTA ETaLVEl, 

\ \ 39 aA 3 > fay 
TOV O€ GOLKOUYTA OVK ETaLVEl. 

II. 1. No one fought with him. 2. He will not 
fight within five days. 38. The army halted for provi- 
sions. 4. And calling the generals he speaks as follows. 
5. Clearchus did not desire to withdraw the right wing 
from the river. | 


524. VOCABULARY. 


déw, need, want, crave; mid., Kata-hiw, unloose,.make an 
need, desire, ask, beg; Set, end, halt. 
impers., ¢¢ as necessary, péddo, intend, be about. 
one ought. tatu, strike, hit[ana-paest]. 
ET-ALVEW, -ALVETW, ~-NVETA, TITPOTKW, Wound. 
prawse, commend, applaud. 


VERBS OF THE SECOND CLASS. 948 











525. The groups of related words that appear in this 
esson and the following should be analyzed according 
o the directions given in 512. A faithful analysis of 
hese groups,will enable the pupil to classify the words 
f the preceding vocabularies and greatly increase his 
acility in ascertaining the meaning of new words. 


526. R. apx-, Je first.  apx-w, be first, lead, rule ; 
art. as subst., apy-wv, -ovt-os, 0, ruler, commander ; 
b-dpx-w, be under as a foundation, support ; &px-h, -7S; 
beginning, rule; apxario-s, -a, -ov, from the beginning, 
ancient ; apx-vKO-s, ~, -ov, fit for rule ; apy-6-s, 0, leader ; 
Ur-apyxo-s, 6, under-oficer, lieutenant ; av-apXxo-s, -ov, 
without leaders; vav-apxo-s, 6 (vads), commander of a 
eet, admiral ; dpovp-apxo-s, 6 (Ppoupos, P> garrison 
soldier), commander of a garrison; Kwp-apxy-s, -OVv 
(kop-n, village), village chief. 

archi-, arche-, arch-, chief (prefix) ; arch-angel, arch- 
bishop, arch-duke, etc., archon, archaic, archaeo-logy 
(\dyos), archives, archi-tect, an-archy, mon-archy, etc. 


Eanes OF THE SECOND CLASS. — SECOND 
AORIST SYSTEM. 


Review p. 145"; 203, 290, 6; 351, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6; 
$52, 507. 
527. Second Class. he theme vowel a, t, or v takes 


the strong form 7, e, ev. ‘The themes of this class end 
in a mute or v-: Aeitw (AuT-); pew (pr-). 


| 
: 
LESSON XLVII. 


214 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


528. The verbs with a weak stem in v- originally had 
the strong form in ev-, which appearet as e¢- before a 
vowel, and finally ¢ was dropped: péw ( (Br), p pevoopat. 


529. Examine the following: : 

Tureme, Pres. Stem. For. Aor, 
1. retro, leave Num- revTr?/.. RAEehbo éXuTrov 
2. qel0w, persuade wiO- rev?/.. + Treicw érevoa 
3. hevya, flee guy- gevy?/.. gevEouat! or &puryov 

devEotpat * 

4. Odo, run Ov- Be°/.. Oevoopar 
5, péw, flow pu- - pe?/.. pevoomat 


530. The second tenses (352) differ from the corre- — 
sponding first tenses in form, but regularly have like 
meaning. When, however, both tenses appear in the 
same verb, they often differ also in meaning; but they 
appear only in a few verbs. | 

531. The stem of the second aorist system is formed — 
by affixing the variable vowel °/.. to the theme. Its 
tense sign is the short theme vowel : 


INDICATIVE. IMPERATIVE. 
Act. Mid. Act. Mid. 
€durov — urounv Aime Aurrou 
INFINITIVEs. PARTICIPLEs. 
Act. Mid. Act. Mid. 
Aurrety Nuréo Bar hirdv  rmdpevos 


1 Some verbs use the future middle form for the active. 
2 Some verbs, besides the regular future middle form -couat, have one 
in -ceouat, contracted to codpa, formed with the suffix ve?/e-. This form — 
of the future is called the Doric. “- 











VERBS OF THE SECOND CLASS. 215 


| Observe that: 1. The second aorist, like the other secondary 
__ tenses, has in the indicative the augment and secondary personal 
_ endings. 2. It has the inflection of the present system, being 
- inflected in the indicative lke the imperfect, and in the other 
forms like the present. 3. Acrezy and Xerod have the circum- 
flex on the last syllable ; Ava@v is accented like AvOe (350) ; 
_ and AvréoOar is accented on the penult (195, a; 3823, d; 
». 849, a). 3 

a. Formulate a rule for the above exceptions to the recessive 
accent. 


532. Conjugate the second aorist system in the forms 
above presented of deirw (834). 

533- Examine the following common verbs of the 
first class that form second aorists : 


For. 2 Aor. Stem. 2 Aor. 
1. dyo, lead ay- dé ayay?/.. nyaryov 
2. ylyvoua, become yev- yevncomat  yev?/..  eyevounv 
3. €rropat, follow ocer- &ropat om?/..  éomouny 
4. éyow, have aey- EEworaynow ox°/..  eoxov 
5. wimto, full TET- TETOUMAL mweo°/,. &mecov 
(for ézrerov) 


Observe that: 1. The theme is reduplicated in nyayov 
(ay-ay-) (545), 2. yiyvoua and wire reduplicate the theme 
by prefixing their initial consonants with ¢ and dropping the 
theme vowels. 3. In &fopae the rough breathing takes the 
place of o; éo7dpny is for écemounv, the rough breathing 
comes from the present. 4. In &w the rough breathing takes 
the place of o; in ox7jom the theme vowel undergoes meta- 
thesis,1 the theme cey becoming oye; éoyov is for éaexov. 
5. meocodpmat is for met-ceopat. (p. 214%.) 


1 Metathesis is the transposition of letters in a word, generally a liquid 
and a vowel. 


216 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


534- In giving the principal parts of verbs, the 
second aorists are put in place of the first aorists, or are 
given in addition if the first parts occur (353, a). 

535- The lengthened forms of the theme of the second 
class verbs are retained in. all tenses except in the sec- 
ond aorist and second passive systems, where they have 
the short forms a, t, and v. 

536. Conjugate the present ayatan of Aeimw and 
weiOw in all the forms that have been presented (pres., 
impf., imv., inf., and part., act., mid., and pass.). 

537. Conjugate the second aorist system active in 
all the forms that have been presented of dyw, exe, 
and wimrw. 

538. Conjugate the second aorist system middle in 
all the forms that have been presented of dyw, yiyvowa, 
and e€ropau. 


539- EXERCISES. 


I. 1. ereode to jyoupevm. 2. 6 dé KXéapxos eoxe 
To Se€idv. 3. els Tas Ta€as eov. 4. 7d S€ oTpa- 
e a Pah Sart ie 1 ‘ € 7 ¥ r ‘ 
Teva O OLTOS ETEAUTEV. 5, TOUS OmAITAS Hyayor TeEpL 
~ 4 > \ > l4 ~ \ e / 
Tv oKnvyv. 6. apiudss eyévero Tov pev “EAAjvov 
domis pupia Kal Terpakocia. 7. ot BapBapou doBov 
> , ¥ > XN / ‘\ , 
€umeoovtos ebuyov els TO oTpaTdmedov. 8. dia péecou 
dé THs ToAEws pet ToTawos Kvdvos ovopa, edpos Svo 
, > a ¢€ 4 y X Ph 
TreIpwv. 9. “Apratos 0 Kvpov virapxos To evavupor 
, ¥ ‘ Lal ‘al > ? > XN e “A 
Képas exxye Tov BapBapixov. 10. addA eet vets 
> \ > 5 , id SQN YF 3 \ ‘ ©. 
€wot ovK eBédere wreiVerOar ovde emer Oar, eyd adv vty 
4 ‘\ ‘ A c ? ‘\ > l4 : 
epouat ll. Kat rovs tov “EAAjvav orparnyods exe. 


1 See 314, a. 


VERBS OF THE SECOND CLASS. 217 


hevoev Omitas ayayetv. ot S€ TadTa éemoinoar, aya- - 
yOVTES WS TpioXLALous OmiTas. 

IJ. 1. They fled from their tents. 2. They followed 
the guide. 3. The king and the Greeks were distant 
from one another twenty stadia. 4. After they heard 
these things, they were persuaded. 5. It seemed best 
to them to lead the hoplites. 6. The inhabitants left 
their houses and fled to the mountains. 


540. VOCABULARY. 
TeTpa-KdcLol, -at, -a, four ép-rinrw, fall upon, occur 
hundred |\rérrapes+éxa- _— to. 
Tov |. rey ovod, neg. conj., but not, 
Tpia-Xiduor, -ar, -a, three and not, nor yet, nor, Lat. 
thousand [Tpets + XtAor]. neque, nec; adv., not 
Vr-apxos, under officer, leu- even, not at all, Lat. ne 
tenant. .. . guidem [od+ dé]. 


€x-heiw, €&édurov, leave - 
out, leave, forsake, aban- 
don, fail | eclipse |. 


541. Apply Grimm’s law to the following: 


Neir@ linguo LEND, LOAN; eC-lipse. | 
vw luo LOSE, LOOSE; ana-lyze, ana-lysis 
mint |mer-| pelo FIND. 


218 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


LESSON XLVIIL. 
FIRST AND SECOND PERFECT SYSTEMS. 


Review 189, 1, 2, 3; 190, 194, 1, 2, 3; 303, 304, 
305, 306, 307, 308, 309, a; 310, 311, 312, 313, 351, 
1, 2, 3, 4; 352, 507, 517. 


542. Examine the following verbs, and note how they 
differ in the perfect from éAvKa: 


1. ypédw  ypad- eypapa —yeypaxpa 


2. Aetrw \ur- €kurov _éAourra 

3. mew 70- ereloa — TémeiKa Or réroa 
4. tpébm Ttpep- etpeba rérpoda 

5. hevyw gvy- epvyov mépevya 

6. ayo avy- nyayov ya 

7. dwoK@ Ovwk- édiwfa  Sediwya 

8. méumo TeuT- erempa métopda 

a. Observe that the perfects of these verbs are regularly 


formed by adding the tense suffix -a directly to tie theme ; 
.that some verbs in forming the perfect, as dyw and d:oKo, 
aspirate their final mute. 

6. Observe that the stem vowel ¢ becomes o; that verbs of 
the second class have the strong form of theme vowel, but have ~ 
ot instead of eu. 


543. These are called second perfects (310), and they 
have the same force as the first perfects with the tense 
sign -Ka. 


FIRST AND SECOND PERFECT SYSTEMS. 219 


544. The stem of the second perfect system is formed 
by affixing the tense suffix -a (plupf. -y or -ex) to the re- 
duplicated theme. But some verbs aspirate a labial or 
palatal mute at the end of the theme, changing z, B, to 
g, and x, y, toy. It has the inflection of the first. per- 

fect system (310). 

545. Attic Reduplication. Some verbs beginning 
with a, €, o, followed by a single consonant, reduplicate 
the perfect and pluperfect by prefixing their first two 
letters ; the second vowel of the resulting form is then 
regularly lengthened as in the temporal augment: axy- 
koa [daKxovw (aKof-, akov-) |. 

546. Learn the principal parts of the following verbs, 
and explain the formation of their perfects : 


1. dyw, a€w, nyayov, etc. 2. SidKkw, dda, ete. 
3. exo, wo or oxnow [oxe|, Exxov, EoxNKa, ErXN- 
pa, exxeOnv. 4. Tpéra, Tpébw, etc. 5. mov€éw, mrou- 
now, etc. 6. ypddw, ypdipw, etc. 7. deimw, heib, 
éurrov, etc. 8. meiOw, reiow, ereroa, etc. 9. réuTra, 
Tréurpo, eremrpa, Térouda, Térenpar, ereupOnyv. 10. awi- 
mrtw |wet-, mTE-, TTO-|, TecOovaL, ETECO?, TENTWKA.” 
Ll. yiyvopo, yerpoowa, eyevdunr, yéyova, yeye 
VHA. 


547. Conjugate, in the forms thus far given of the 
first perfect, the second perfect system of Aetzo : 


1 When ppp occurs, one p is dropped. 
2 In the perfect the theme mer-(nte-) becomes mro- 


220 THE BEGINNER’S GREEK BOOK. 


2p PERF. 2p PLUPERF. Inr. Part. 
A€houta ~— ENA hedourrévan AeouTraés 
Aédouras €eAOLs 

K.T. Xd. K.T.X. 


548. Conjugate the second perfect indicative of the 
following verbs: dyw, Sidkw, reiOo, Téuro, pedyo, 
yiyvopa, 

549. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. dxyxoa tHv Kvpou apernv. 2. Tods “EXAr- 
» > N , 3 , 3 , 
vas nyaye els Tous BapBapovs. 3. Opovtas éyeypa- 
5 A X\ - AX A A wn 
ger emioto\nv mapa Baorhéa. 4. Td 81) odd ToD 
c Ae , > \ > bean” \ 
EdAnvikov ovtws méreixe. 5. eis huyny ererpoder Tovs 
e 4 A 5 4 5 4 e > 
e€axirxidious. 6. Tas oikias e&ehehoizeray of évor- 
Kouvtes. 7. €mohvopKe. Midyrtov kat éreuparo KkaTayew - 
A ~ , 5 7 , X , 
TOUS ExTETNTWKOTAS. &. eh€yovTo AeAOuTrevat TOV odov 
ouimmes. 9. Tavrnv THY Xopav emererpode Svapra- 
gar’ Tos “EXAnow ws Todeuiav odoav. 10. ri? odv 
) \ e a A A \ 4 > , 
aoucnoeis UT €£0U VUY TO TpiTOV ETLBovrAEV@Y jLOL da- 
X v4 > A A A 5 ~ 
vepos yeyovas; ll. Apuatos de TEPEVYWS ev T@ 
’ , ¥ \ an ¥ , 
OTPaToTedw Eweve PETA TOV AAwV BapBapov. 


II. 1. They have not escaped. 2. The satrap has 
left the heights. 3. He has heard from Tissaphernes 
of the equipment of Cyrus. 4. The horsemen had pur- 
sued these wild animals. 5. He had sent with her the 
soldiers of Menon. 


1 Cf. 267, 13. 
2 Cf. 467, 15. 


SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE ACTIVE OF w VERBS. 22] 


550. VOCABULARY. 


pryy, -Hs, flight | pevyo |. be driven out, banished, 
ato-pevyw, flee back, es- extled. 


cape. kat-aryw, lead down or back, 
£ 
ex-7imtTa, fall out or down, restore. | 


551. R. Bod-, vol-, will, choose. Bodtd-o-par, will, wish } 
ovr, -ns, well, plan; ém-Bovdy, -Hs, planning against, 
a plot ; cvp-Bovd-o-s, 6, adviser ; Bovdev-w, plan ; Bed- 
T-lov, -ov, gen. -ov-os (stem Bed-ro-, comp. of dyabds), 
better ; Bé\-t-tT0s, -y, -ov, superl., dest. 

vol-o, will, wish ; vol-un-ta-s, -atis, f., will, choice ; vol- 
untarius, willing, voluntary ; vel... vel, either. ..or; 
nolo, de unwilling ; malo, prefer. , 

WILL, WILD (self-willed), WELL, WEAL, WEALTH. 


LESSON. XLIX. 


SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE ACTIVE OF 
wo VERBS. 


Review 20, 28, 110, 116, 202, a; 351, 1, 2, 3, 4; 
415, 417, 418, 419, 422, p. 170%, 531, obs. ; 544. 


552. Lhe Subjunctive and Optative. 


The subjunctive expresses contingency or the will of | 


the speaker. Its uses are generally those of the primary 
tenses of the Latin subjunctive, but it has neither an 
optative (expressing a wish) nor a potential force. The 


| 


222 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


optative takes generally the place of the Latin subjunc- 
tive after a secondary tense.1 But it has its proper 
optative force, and joined with the particle ay it obtains 
‘a potential force. 


a. The indicative, subjunctive, optative, and imperative, as 
opposed to the zufinitire, are called finite moods. The subjunc- 
tive, optative, imperative, and infinitive, as opposed to the indic- 
ative, are called dependent moods. The indicative expresses the 
action as definite and decided in point of fact whether in a decla- 
ration or a question. . 


553- Subjunctive Active. 
Conjugate the following (825, 827, 828, 834, 835): 


PREs Ist Aor.? — 2p Aor. PERF. 2p Perr. 
iw iow hiro heAVK@ heoirrw 
hvys ions Aimys Aehv«ns hehoimrys 
hin ion hiry hedvKy Medoirry 
hin-tov vonTov Rimnrov Hedvnnrov eAol@yTov 
hin-rov hionrov Nlmynrov edVKnTov — edAotmnTov 
Nvo-pev vowpev Nitopev AedvKoper edoimwpev 
hin-re dvonTe Rimyntre AedAvKyTEe  AeAoimnTE 
hiwot iowor XAlimwor dedvcwor  dedolmwor 


Observe that: 1. The subjunctive has no augment.® 


2. It 


has the long thematic vowel instead of the final vowel (°/.., -a, -a) 
of the tense suffix; @ stands before mw and v and 7 elsewhere. 
3. The subjunctive uses the endings of the primary tenses, but 
‘with ¢ of the original endings ov and 7: of the singular transferred 


1 These supplemental moods are sometimes called ‘The conjunctive 
mood.” 

2 The force of the subjunctive precludes the use of the future. 

8 The augment denoting definite past time can be used only with the 
indicative. 


SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE ACTIVE OF w VERBS. 223 


_ as in the present indicative, giving ys, 7 (26). 4. The long 
thematic vowel “/,. may be regarded as the mood sign of the 
subjunctive, being used in each tense without variation. 


554- Optative Active. 
Conjugate the following (825, 826, 827, 828, 834, 
835): 


PREs. For. Aor. 2 Aor. - Perr. 2 Perr. 
P 4 £ 

Avol-pe Avoope Avoaipe DHltroiwe RedvKoime NReAolrrowpe 
Z£ : Z£ , 

Avol-s Avoois Avoais Ximois ReAvVKOIS AeAol7rois 
Z 2 

Avot Avo ot Avoat Alimrot =. ~ANEAUKOL ANeAOlrrat 
Zz 

AVOL-TOV K.T.A. K.T.A. K.T.A. K.T.A. K.T.A. 
‘Avoi-Tnv 

Zz 

AvOL-peEV 

* 

AVOI-TE 

7 4 

Avole-v 


a. Observe that the optative has the thematic vowel o in all 
tenses except the first aorist, where it has a; that it adds the 
mood suffix -¢ (in the third person plural -7 changed -to -ce before 
v) to the tense stem, and uses the endings of the secondary 
tenses, but has -we in the first person singular active. 

b. The forms Avoea-s, AVoELe, AVoeva-v, in the aorist are 
Aecolic, but are more common than the regular forms Avoass, 
Avoat, AVoaev. c. In determining the accent final o¢ and az 


in the optative are regarded long. (XI. N.) 


555- The subjunctive and optative are chiefly used 
in subordinate or dependent clauses. But some of their 
so-called independent uses will be first noted. 

556. The Subjunctive as Imperative of the First 
Person (Exhortation). 

Examine the following : 


- 


224 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. : 


1. pH pévopev addovs, let us not wait for others. 

2. add’ yuets apEwopev tod SiaBaive, but let us be- 
gin the crossing. 

Observe that: 1. Both of these sentences express exhortation. 
2. The verbs are used in the first person plural and perform the 
function of the first person of the imperative. 38. If the exhor- 
tation is negative, “7 is used as in the imperative and infinitive 
(422). | 

RULE. | 

557: The first person of the subjunctive (generally 
plural) is used to express exhortations. Its negative 
1S py. 

558. Subjunctive of Prohibition. 

Examine the following : 

1. per. pe Kopov vopilere, think me no longer 
Cyrus. : 

2. pu Toons Tovro, do not do this (this particular 
act). 

Observe that in negative commands or prohibitions the pres- 
ent imperative or aorist subjunctive may be used; that the dis- 


tinction between the present and aorist subjunctive is the same 
as that between the present and aorist imperative (415). 


RULE. 
559. In prohibitions py is used with the present 
emperative if continuance 1s thought of, otherwise with 
the aorest subjunctive. 


560. Subjunctive of Deliberation or Hesitation. 
Examine the following : 


SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE ACTIVE OF w VERBS. 225 


1. pa) roujow rodro; shall I not do this ? 
2. Bova otv tavTa amayyé\wpev ; do you wish 
_ then that we should announce this ? 


Observe that these questions do not ask for information, but 
imply doubt and hesitation about the course to be pursued. 


RULE. 


561. The first person of the subjunctive may be 
used in questions of appeal, expressing doubt and hesi- 
tation concerning the course to be pursued.’ 

a. The question is sometimes introduced by BovAe or Bov- 
reo Oe. 

6. The third person is sometimes found in these questions, 
chiefly with tis. 

e. Why does this subjunctive take wn ? (422). 


q 562. Optative of Wishing. 
Examine the following : 
1. rovatra tods €xPpods ot Oeot roujoerav, may the 


gods inflict such things upon our enemies. 
2. rovroy py evdatpovioay, may I not count him 


happy. 
RULE. 


563. The optative is used to express a wish referring 
to the future. 
a, Why does this optative take 7 ? 

5604. Potential Optative. 
1. 008" abrév arroxretvan dv eOédouper, nor would we 
wish to kill him. Bs 


e Generally it expresses necessity of action in submission to some com- 
mand or power. It is often called the interrogative subjunctive. 
15 


ie 


226 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


2. OTws Tis av atrohetyo.; how could one make his 
© meee 
escape ? 


Observe that the optative with av expresses willingness to 
admit a consequence in view of some circumstances as in 1, if we 
could, if we should have the power, etc.; but too vague to be defi- 
nitely expressed, and therefore this optative expresses future 
action as possible or less positively than the indicative. 


RULE. 


565. The optative with av expresses future action 
as dependent upon circumstances or conditions, and is 
translated with may, can, might, could, would, should, 
etc. Its negative is ov. 


a. Why does the potential optative take ov ? 


566. ay is a post-positive particle without any corre- 
sponding word in English. It has a conditional force. 
Here it shows that the predicate with which it is placed 
is conceived only under certain conditions expressed or 
implied. ay regularly stands after the verb, but it may 
attach itself to any prominent or emphatic word relat- 
ing to the contingency. 

567. Tenses of the Subjunctive and Optative. 

The subjunctive expressing contingency regularly re-— 
fers to the future. The optative also refers to the future, 
but generally with reference to an historical tense.’ In 
both subjunctive and optative the tenses chiefly used are 
the present and aorist. ‘The time of both is precisely 


1 The optative then will regularly denote more remoteness or less prob- 
ability than the subjunctive. 





SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE ACTIVE OF @ VERBS. 227 


the same, but the present expresses'the action-as con- 
tinued and the aorist as a simple occurrence. The 
perfect subjunctive and optative are rarely used, and 
express the action as simply completed. The subjunc- 
tive has no future. The future optative is never used 
except as the representative of the future indicative in 
indirect discourse’ (768). 

568. Give the difference in the use of the present 
and aorist tenses of the dependent moods not in indirect 
discourse. } 

569. 1. Conjugate the present, future, aorist, and 

perfect systems active of cehedw, Kwrvo, Oda, Bacidredo. 
2. Conjugate the second aorist active and second per- 
fect systems of deizrw, devyw, ayo. 
570. 1. Change the subjunctives in 556, 558, 560, 
‘to optatives of wishing. 2. Change the optatives in 
562 to potential optatives, and the optatives in 564 to 
optatives of wishing. 3. Give original examples of the 
deliberative subjunctive. 

571. 1..Give the synopses in the active of Kedeva, 
Kodvo, O¥w. 2. Give the synopses of the second aorist 
stem active of deitw, devyw, and ayw. 3. Give the 
‘synopses of the sécond perfect stem of wéuro, devyo, 


-ypade. 
E572. EXERCISES. 
I. 1. pr Oavpalere. 2. pr) Oavpdonre. 3. Th 


, lal \ 
pevopev; 4. py Tadta Toyow; 5. TOY TOTAapOV 


1 Here the optative is less positive than the indicative, which is fre 
quently retained. 


228 TUE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


SiaBaivwuev. 6. pndels tuov eyérw ToUTO TEpt Emo. 
7. Kat TO ourdv 6 péev apxor. 8. 7d dourdv Kiéap- 
xos av apxo.. 9. ov 8 ovde* Todr’ adv tis NeEau. 
10. ndvrr’ Gv akovoayw Ta TOV avOpdéTwv dvdmara. 
ll. rov yap Peav rodenov ovK av hevywv Tis atrodvyot. 
12. mapa thy yédupav réupope puraxyqv. 13. azo- 
CTATwWmEV ATO TOD TOTAapOU TO SEeELdv KEepas. 

II. 1. Do not send the soldiers. 2. Let us destroy 
the bridge. 3. What shall any one do? 4, May the 
soldiers not end the war. 5. The soldiers would trust 
the guide. 6. May he not escape the vengeance of the 
gods. 


LESSON L. 


SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE OF eipi.— 
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MIDDLE 
AND PASSIVE OF » VERBS. — PRESENT 
AND SECOND AORIST SYSTEMS. 


? > 


, a,b 
5, Os 


Review 27, 28, 116, 151, 1, 2, 3, 4; 229, 1 
287, 300, 317, 320, 344, 346, 351, 1, 2, 3, 4, 
531, obs. | 

573. Present Subjunctive and Optative of cit (éo-) 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Sing. Dual. Plur. 
Lasjaee @mev 
> > Rs 
2. nS HTOV HTE 
> > S 
SA TOV WOU 


1 When a negative is followed by a compound negative in the same 
clause, the negation is strengthened. Cf. p. 2667. 


SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MIDDLE. 229 


~~ 


OpraTIVE. 

Sing. Dual. * Plur. 

¥ ¥ > 
Leap ELN MEV, Elev 
9 A » + > + 

.  €NS ElNTOV, €iTOV ELNTE, EiTE 

¥ 27 ¥ ¥ > 

3. Ely ELYTHY, ELTHY ~— ELLY, Elev 


a. Observe that the subjunctive has the long thematic vowel 
#/,,as in @ verbs. (553, obs. 2); that & is for éw from éo-@; o 
is dropped as in 329, obs. 4, and the two remaining syllables are 
contracted (151, 3; 288). 

6. Observe that the optative has the mood suffix -1m (554, 
a) added to the theme, that e’nv is for éo-ty-v; o is dropped 
(288). 


574. The mood suffix -ty is used only before active 
endings ; after -1y the first person singular is always -v. 
The contracted forms of the dual and plural are more 
common than the longer forms with -un. 


_ Subjunctive Middle and Passive. 


575. Conjugate the following (825, 827, 829, 831, 
834) : 


Pres. M. & P. lst Aor. Min. 2p Aor. Min. 

S. 1. Adw-pae hicwpat hitrwpae 

2. oy ion hin 

3. vy-TaAL hUonTat Aianrat 
D. 2. in-obov K.T. X. K.T. X. 

8... dbn-o Dov 

P. 1. dva-peba 

2. hin-obe 


i 


Nbw-vTrat 





230 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 

Perr. Mip. & Pass. Ist Aor. Pass, 
1. edvpevos (-7, -ov) @ vba 
2. a ‘HS vOns 
3 e n Avon 


KOPN K.T.A. 


S. 


a. Observe that the long thematic vowel °/,. of the active is 
used in the middle and passive; but in the aorist passive this is 
added to the tense stem (344) ; that the forms Av@4, etc., are 
for AvGéw, etc., by contraction. — 

6. Observe that the primary endings of the middle are used, 
but the primary endings of the active occur in the aorist passive 
(344). 

c. Observe that the form by is for Adn-cat; Adon for 
Avon-cat; that o is dropped dnd the last two syllables are 
contracted (27). 

d. Observe that the present and aorist differ from the active 
_ only in having the middle primary endings. 

e. Observe that the perfect is a compound form consisting of 
the perfect middle and passive participle and the present sub- 
junctive of etwé; that the participle is declined like adjectives 
of the vowel declension (70). 


Optative Middle and Passive. 


576. Conjugate the following (825, 826, 827, 829, 
830, 831, 834): : 


Pres. M. & P. Fut. Mrp Ist Aor. Min, 
S. 1. Avoi-pnv vo oi-unv hvoai-pHv 
2. dvot-o hicot-o héicai-o 
3. vot-To Nioou-TO hioat-ro 
K.T. Xr. K.T.X. K.T. A, 


1 Compare the perfect passive in Latin, 





SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE PASSIVE. Zt 


2p Aor. Mip. Perr. Min. & Pass. 
S. 1. Auroi-pyv heAvpevos (-n, -ov) einv 
2. Atzrot-o ‘f eins 
3. lzrot-To < ein 
Kore K.T. X. 
Fut. Perr. M.& P. Ist Aor. Pass. Ist Fur. Pass. 
S. 1.) Nedvoo-pnv hvdein-v hvOncoi-unv 
2. edvoro-o Avbein-s vOyoo-o 
8. edvorou-rTo Avoein AvOyo-ou-To 
K. 7X. K.T. X. K.T. A. 


a. Observe that the same mood: suffix and thematic vowel 
-ot (-at in aor.) is used as in the active (554), except in the aorist 
passive, which has -cy added to the stem (344) after the analogy 
of verbs in-e (286), but in the dual and plural, as in e’nv (573), 
forms in -¢ frequently occur ; AvOetrov for AvOetnTor, etc. 

6. Observe that the secondary endings of the middle are used, 
but the secondary endings of the active occur in the aorist pas- 
sive (344). 

c. Observe that in the forms Awvor-0, etc., -o is dropped, and 
the last two syllables are contracted (27). 

d. Observe that the perfect is a compound form consisting of 
the perfect middle and passive participle and the present optative 
of ecpé. 

577- Subjunctive and Optative in Clauses expressing 


Purpose or Motive. 
Examine the following : 


1. ditov Setrar ds cuvepyods en, he needs friends 
that he may have co-workers. 

2. dirwv éd€iTo as cuvepyovs eyou, he needed friends 
that he might have co-workers. 


232 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


3. Kipos tas vats pereréuipato Orws Tovs omXiras 
aTtoBiBacaer, Cyrus sent for the ships, im order that he 
might disembark the ie sae 

A. ra rota Katéxavoev iva pn Kupos diaBaivor, he 
burned the boats in order that Cyrus might not cross. 

5. kedevovor puvrarrevbar pn vew éemPavrar THs 
vuKtos ot BdpBapo, they advise you to be on your guard 
that the barbarians may not attack you during the night. 


a. Observe that purpose is expressed in Greek as in Latin by 
the subjunctive, but after a secondary tense of the principal verb 
the optative is used as a secondary tense 2, 3, 4 (552). 

6. Observe that a purpose clause is introduced by any of the 
particles, d7rws, os, va, wy; that the negative is m7 following 
the particle, 4, but.sometimes in a purpose clause pu alone is 
used in the sense of that not, im order that not, 5. 


578. The law of sequence of tenses in Latin — pri- 
mary tenses follow primary and secondary follow secon- 
dary — becomes in Greek the law of sequence of moods : 
the subjunctive follows primary tenses and the optative 
secondary.’ 

Rove. 

579. Purpose or motive is expressed by 67s, ws, 
iva, that, in order that, pH, that not, in order that not, 
with the subjunctive. But if the clanse depends upon 
a secondary tense, the optative may be used The neg- 
ative 18 4%. 

a. The subjunctive is frequently used after a secondary tense 


to retain the mood in which the thought originally occurred to 
the mind. 


1 The optative is here regarded as a secondary tense (552). 


SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE PASSIVE. 233 


580. Subjunctive and Optative in Object Clauses after 
Verbs of Fearing. 

Examine the following : 

1. éxvovor py ot "EXAnves peivwor ev TH xapa, they 
Sear lest the Greeks may remain in the country. 

2. wkvnoav py ot Eddnves peiverav ev TH yopa, they 
feared lest the Greeks might remain in the-country. 

8. bd0rKa" wy odk exw ixavods didous, I fear lest 

I may not have friends enough. 

Observe that the clause expressing the thing feared is the ob- 
ject of the leading verb, and is expressed by mw, that, lest, with 


the subjunctive, but after secondary tenses of the leading verb 
the optative is used, 2 (578); that the negative after 7 is ov. 


RULE. 


581. After verbs of fearing, caution, danger, the 
object of the fear is expressed by yy, ‘hat or lest, or py 
ov, that not, lest not, with the subjunctive. But after a 
secondary tense the optative may be used (578). 

582. Conjugate the present, future, aorist, and perfect 
systems middle and passive of Kedevo, Kwria, Ova, 
Bactrevo. 

583. Conjugate the present and second aorist sys- 
tems of ayo, deima, eyo. 

584. Give the synopses of the first six tense systems 
of Avw, Kehedw, Kova, O¥o, Bacriredo. 


585. 7 EXERCISES. 7 
I. 1. otkade tpebducba 4 éerdpela Kipw; 2. dé 
Souxa* wn 7 yébupa hehupervy 7. 3. Bovdevopeba 6 71 


1 Force of the present. 


4 


234 {HE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


N ~s* ) , ee e . » 
XpH Tovey ex TovTwV. 4. Vuas ayew iKavol Elmer av. 
5. dxvycover ot dyyedou py ov Sdfy Hut Tas amovdds 

, ¥ \ ¢ "ED: RAS , 7 
roncac0a. 6. oKvnoTay pH ob nves TA €mUTY- 
Sera exorey €k THS Ev weTw Xapas. 7. TOTO EmoINCE 

aA y. 
iva mo\ka mpodaivorto tots “E\Anou Sewa eis TH 
“a 4 
mopelav. 8. adda moddAas Tpopaces Kipos evpiokev 
iva Uas avaryoL. 


II. 1. We would proceed homeward. 2. The 
Greeks feared lest the king would advance against their 
wing. 3. The king made this trench in order that the 
way might be impassable. 4. The king is making 
a trench in order that the way may be impassable. 
5. Menon desired to rule that he might receive more. 


586. VOCABULARY. 
dewvds, -4, -ov, fearful, ter- doxa, fear, be fearful ; of 
rible, skilful ; 75 Savor, reasonable fear. Perfect 
danger, peril | deb]. has force of the present. 
Topela, -as, journey, march. evpiokw, find, devise, pro- 
TOTEpOS, -a, -ov, which of cure. e- and ev- are of- 
the two, whether ; more- ten without augment. 
pov...7, whether...or. %,conj., or; y .. . 7, either 
dv-dyw, lead up, take up. ...or; with comp., than, 
deidw, Seivouar, ederoa, Sé- Lat. guam. 


FUTURE AND AORIST SYSTEMS OF MUTE VERBS. 235 


LESSON LL. 


FUTURE AND AORIST SYSTEMS OF MUTE 
VERBS. — OBJECT CLAUSES WITH ozws 
AFTER. VERBS OF STRIVING, ETC.— 
VERBS OF THE THIRD CLASS. 


Review 194, 2; 196, 197, 199, 201, 202, a; 351, 
Ds 8. 


Future and First Aorist Systems of Mute Verbs. 

587. Some labial mute verbs (252) form the present 
by adding 7°/.. to the theme. ‘These verbs belong to 
the third or Tau class. 

Examine the following : 


Tueme. Pres. Stem. For. Ist Aor. 
Ko7T@, cut KOTr- KoTIT’/.. Koo exova 
KpvtTo, hide. pud- Kpu7T’/.. Kptbo  expula 
el e e- o/- eZ Yy - 
pirte, throw _—pud- punt’ /.. pupa Eppuba 
Observe that the.final labial of the theme becomes co-ordinate 
(194, 1), 8 and @ change to-7 before 7 of the tense suffix 7°/.. 


588. Object Clauses with orws after Verbs signifying 
to strive for, to care for, to effect. 

Examine the following : 

1. rovrov &vexa dirwr deiTo ws auvepyovs Exot, for 
the sake of this he needed friends that he might have co- 
workers. 


236 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


2. oxoretvy Set drws Ta emiTHdera EEopev, we must 
consider how we shall have provisions. 
€Bovdevorev Ors pHTOTE ETL EOTAL ETL TO AOEADO, 
he planned that he might never again be im the power of 
his brother. 
A. émepedetro ws modeuety ikavol einoav, he took 


care that they might be able to fight. 


a. Observe that the purpose clause, as in 1, stands in appo- 
sition to TovTou évexa. 

6. Observe that the clauses denoting the object aimed at, as 
in 2 and 3, are the objects respectively of the leading verbs, and 
may stand in apposition to an object accusative like rotro in 2; 
we must consider this, how we may have provisions. 

ce. Observe that these clauses are regularly expressed by é7ras 
with the future indicative after both primary and secondary 
tenses; that the negative is m7. 

d. Observe that these clauses implying the end of the action 
of the leading verb are closely allied to the purpose clause, and 
that when the object of forethought is present as in 4, these 
clauses may be expressed as final clauses with &s instead of 
OT WS. 

RULE. 


589. After verbs signifying /o strive for, to care for, 
fo effect, the object of the endeavor is exppesaes by the 
future indicative with oaws or ozs py aller both 
primary and secondary tenses. 

But the subjunctive and optative of the present or 
aorist may be used instead of the future indicative, as 
in final clauses (579). 


590. Conjugate the present system of ayo, réuro, 
Sidkw, Tew, Ow, Bacrrevo. 


FUTURE AND AORIST SYSTEMS OF MUTE VERBS. 237 


591. Conjugate the future and aorist systems of aya, 
mépro, Svdkw, Tew, KoTTH, and KpUTTM. 


592. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. xérrovot rovs Bods Kai ovovs. 2. Tods dé Kat 
e€€xoav. 3. Kal Ta KTypatd tis ov Kopov' expv- 
arev. 4. Ta O€ Gra Els TOV ToTapoVv EppuTToOL. 
5. adn éreiparo ypnoOar Tois TOY amoKpyTTOmEevar 
xpypacr. 6. Kipos edeace pi) Baorheds karaxdn” 76 
‘EXAnvixov, 7. Bovdederac orws Baoiledoe av’ 
éxeivov. 8. tav map éavt@ Se BapBdpwr érenedetro 
Ws Tohepety TE ikavol elnoav Kal ebvoiKds exouev® adTa. 
9. tovs oTpatidras KaTaKkoat av Tept TavTds ToLT- 
gato iva Kal Tots aANows “EAANot HoBos 7 et Baorhéa 
péyav oTpateve. 

II. 1. They cast. aside their arms. 2. The Greeks 
cut down the barbarians. 3. He feared lest the bridge 
might have been broken down. 4. I will take care 
that you also will praise me. 5. We must consider 
how we may remain most safely. 


593- VOCABULARY. 


evvotkos, adv., with good amo-kpintw, hide from, 
will, friendly ; ebvoikas conceal |apocrypha]. 
eye, be well disposed, €x-KdmTw, cut off ; of trees, 
Jriendly. | etc., cut down. 

KT) LA, -aTOS, TO, possession, Kata-KoTTw, cut down, slay. 
pl., property |krdopat|.  Kdatw | Ko7-|, Kobe, exowba, 


1 See 269. 2 See 579, a. 3 See p. 1924 


238 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


kéxoha, Kékoppar, éxd- pirro, [pup-] pupw, eppirba, 
anv, cut, hew, slaughter ; Eppipa, eppimpar, eppi- 
of trees, fe// | cHop, syn- hOnv, throw, hurl, hurl 
copate, comma]. down, cast aside. 
kpvatoa, [Kpud-], Kpiijo, oKo7éw, only present and 
expuia, KEKPU[LLaL, EK PU- impf., spy out, watch, 
hOnv, hide, conceal consider, observe. (See 
[crypt, grotto]. the general vocabulary). 


594. R.a6-, fid-, Jind. et0-w [theme w0-|, ‘bind to 
one’s self, win over, persuade, mid., be won over, obey, 
trust ; verbal, wevo-réo-v, one must obey ; wi0-r6s, i, -dv, 
to be trusted, trusty, faithful ; mvoro-ry-s, -nt-os, 7, 
faithfulness, fidelity; wtoti-s, -e-ws, 4, trust, faith ; 
miotev-w, put faith in, trust. 

fid-e-s, f., trust, faith; fid-u-s, adj., trusty; fid-o, 
trust ; foed-u-s, -er-is, n., league, treaty. 

BIND, BAND, BOND, BUNDLE, BODY. 


LESSON LIL. 


FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST SYSTEMS OF 
LIQUID VERBS.— LIQUID VERBS OF THE 
FOURTH CLASS. Sead 


Review 151, 1, 2, 3,4; 152; 153, 154, 2; 252, 255, 
256, 257, 1, 2, a,4; 378, 1. 


595- Fourth Class (Iota Class). In this class the 
present stem is formed by adding .’/.. to the theme. 


FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST OF LIQUID VERBS. 239 


596. Many liquid verbs belong to the fourth class, 
of the theme, uniting with cv of the tense-suffix v°/., 
forms with it AA (378, 1). 

Examine the following : 


THEME. Pres. Stem. For. Aor. 
ayyéAAw, announce ayyed- ayyerd?/.. ayyeA@ Hryyetra 
Barro, throw Bar- Bard?/.. Baro éBaXov 


597. When the theme ends in vor p,c of the present 
tense suffix .°/.. is transferred and unites with the theme 
vowel to form a diphthong. 

Examine the following : 


THEME. Pres. STEM. For. Aor. 
Kteivo, kill xtev- KTELV?/ KTEVO) éereva 
onpaiva, aonpav- onpaw/.. onwave é€onunva 
signify, 3 
haive, show dav- daiv?/.. hava édnva 


Yaherraiva, yareTTav- yarerraty?/.. yadeTava éyarérnva 
be angry. 


598. But when the theme vowel is c or v, it becomes 
long when u of the present tense suffix .°/.. is transferred, 
and the added « disappears. 

Examine the following : 


THEME. Pres. THEME. For. Aor. 
4 ~ n ~- 
atcxuve, shame aicxyuvy- aicyvr/.. alcyvvd -noxvva 
Z . . . 4 on nr - 
Kpwve, distinguish ~Kptv- Kpiv?/.. Kplva éxpiva 


599. Conjugate the present system of dyyéA\ho, 
daiva, and pévo. 
600. Conjugate the future and aorist systems of 


240 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


ayyéelio, ayyero, dyyedoips* or -oiny, etc.; myyetda, 
dyycio, ayyeihau, etc.; paiva, Kpivo, pevo, and 
aicyvve (832, 833). 

6o1. Conjugate the second aorist system of Badde, 
€Bador, etc. 


602. EXERCISES. 


l. ai omovSat pevovtov. 2. omovdas 7 modepnov 
dmayyeka; 8. Bovderal tr TapayyeiAa. 4. ot de 
oTpaTiaTar ToLs oTpaTnyots Exaherawov. 5, TO peyt- 
oTov aicxvvouar ore epevopar avrov. 6. ovToL TWWE 
Kahecay TOs OTpaTHyoUs Kal hoyayods, iva amayyel- 
hoot Ta Tapa Baoréws.. 7. ob ayyedor OKYnTAY my 
ov of EdAnves atoxpivawrTo Baowel. 8. aioyvvopeba 
Kal Jeovs kai avOpadmovs TavTa TovEetv. 


RULE. 


603. Many verbs governing the accusative in Greek 
are translated into English with a preposition. Thus, 
aloxvvopat, be ashamed of or before; pevya, flee from ; 
émuopkéw, swear falsely by; pévw, await for ; havOave, 
escape the notice of, etc. 


604. EXERCISES. 


1. We will truly announce these things. 2. There- 
upon the horses appeared. 3. Let us announce these 
things. 4. What shall I announce? 5. I would 
announce these things. 6. We were ashamed both 
before gods and men to deceive him. 


_ 1 Contracted form; explain the contraction in the subjunctive and 
optative. 


FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST OF MUTE VERBS. 24] 


605. VOCABULARY. 
aicyvve,aicyua, noxuva, €K-Baddo, throw out, banish, 
noxvvOnv, shame ; mid. expel. 
: ‘ £ mn ¥ - , 
as pass. dep., de or feel Kpivw, Kpivo, EKpwa, Ke 
ashamed. Kpika, KéKpiwaL, eKpi- 
atro-Kpivomat, make answer, Onv, distinguish, judge, 
answer. estimate | critic]. 


Bardo, Baro, &Barov, Bé- xKreiva, KTEva, ExTeava, 2d 
Brnxa,* BEBAnpar, €BAH- pert., aéxrova, kill, (See 
Onv, throw, cast. the general vocabulary.) 
606. Translate into Greek :* | 
Thence Cyrus marches a three days’ journey, twenty 

parasangs, to Celaenae, a populous city of Phrygia, 
large and prosperous. Here Cyrus had a palace and a 
large park full of wild animals, ‘Through the middle of 
the park flows the Maeander river, and its sources rise 
under the palace; it flows also through the city Celae- 
nae. ‘The great king also has a palace in Celaenae near 
the sources of the river. 


LESSON LIT. 


FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST SYSTEMS OF 
MUTE VERBS (continued). —-MUTE VERBS OF 
THE FOURTH CLASS. 


Review 194, 2; 196, 197, 198, 199, 200, 201, 202, 
a; 204, 309,@; 351, 2,3; 378, 1, 2; 471, 472, 473, 
A474, 492, 493. 


1 The stem suffers metathesis (BaX-, Bda-) (Pp, 915 ae 
? A few verbs in vw drop » in the perfect and first passive systems. 
8 Cf. 107, 458. - 

16 


242 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


607. Many palatal mute verbs belong to the fourth — 
class, forming the present by adding °/,. to the theme. 
x or x unites with the c of this present tense suffix, 
forming with it rr. y unites with the , forming gener- 
ally rr, sometimes { (378, 2). 

Examine the following : 


Tueme. Pres. Stem. For. AOR. 
1. TatTTo, arrange Tay- TATT?/.. Takeo éraka 
2. patra, do mpay- mpatT?/.. mpadtw  émpata 
3. gurdtro, guard dvdax- gvratT/,. durAdEwm éedvrAaEa 


Observe that in the future and aorist « and y with o of the 
tense suffix o°/.. or oa- form & (194, 2). 


608. Many lingual mutes with themes ending in 6 
form the present stem by adding the tense suffix v’/.. 
6 unites with this ce forming ¢ (200). These verbs be- 
long to the fourth class. 

Examine the following : 


Tueme. Pres.Stem. Fort. Aor. 
1. aOpotfw,collect 4Opo1d- abpolt?/.. abpoicw nOpowwa 
2. dpmate, seize dptrad- dprrav?/.. apTacw npTraca 
3. Oavpato, Oavyad- Oavpal?/.. Pavpacowar eavmaca 
admire 
4. voutl&o, think vowd- vomt?/.. vom évouica 
5. cave, save owd- cof/. cacw éowooa 


a. Verbs in -t@ of more than two syllables, with themes in. 
L- regularly drop -o of the future and insert ¢, then sew and 
leowat are contracted to 1@ and toduat. This is called the Attic 
Future (254). 


FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST OF MUTE VERBS. 243 


609. ‘I'wo vowel verbs belong to the Fourth class, — 
Kato, burn, and Kk\aiw, weep. Kaiw is thus formed : 


THEME. Pres. Stem. Fur. Aor. 
kalo, burn Kkav- Kat/.. (for kav-t?/.) Kavow éxavoa 


a. v is dropped between two vowels (290, 4; 363, a; 528). | 
Attic prose uses x&w instead of xaéw; e is dropped between — 
two vowels and a lengthened. 


610. Conjugate the future and aorist systems of 
ayo, apyo, TéuTo, TatTw, pvddtrw, vouilo, cela, 
KpvaT@, and pimrw. 

611. Conjugate the future and aorist systems of Ava, 
Kolvw, Topedw, TOLEW, haivw, KTEiVa, TONPaAlve. 

612. Denominative verbs of the Fourth Class : 

1. pila, strive (for épid-.w), from épis [épid-], strife. 

2. aOpoilw, collect (for adOpod-.w), from dOpdo-s 
[ aOpo-o-|, in a body. — | 

3. avayKkalo, compel (for dvayxad-.w), from avayKn 
[avayx-a-], necessity. 

4. aicxive, shame (for aicyvr-w), from aicyivy 
[atoyuv-a-], shame. 

5. onpaiva, signify (for onnav-w), from onpa [or- 
part-|, sign. 

6. xaderaive, be angry (for yaderapv-iw), from yade- 
mos [xader-o-], angry. 

7. ayyé\ho, announce (for dyyeh-vw), from ayyedos 
[dyyeh-o-], messenger. 


a. Observe that épéw is formed by affixing the present tense 
suffix v°/.. to the stem of the noun. 


244 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


b. Observe that, by analogy, many denominative verbs in 
-$@ and -afw are formed, 2, 3. 

e. Observe that in like manner themes in -av and -vv of verbs 
in -atv@ and -vvyw come from stems without v, 5, 6. 

d. Observe that the final vowel of the stem is often omitted 
when the suffix ¢°/.. is added, 4, 7. 


613. Summary of the Luphonic ee of Consonants 
before v. 

1. » with c forms AA. 

2. After v and p, u passes over to the preceding vowel 
and unites with it by contraction. But if the preceding 
vowel is « or v, it becomes long when is transposed (598). 

3. K, Y, x, and sometimes 7 and 8, with . become rr. 


a. vt with this ¢ becomes va in the feminine of participles and 
adjectives (p. 891), in which v is regularly dropped and the 
preceding vowel is lengthened ; tT with ¢ sometimes becomes -oo- 
(p. 2001), xapéies, yapicooa, yapiev. 


4, § (sometimes y or yy) with « forms €. 


614. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. rovro mpd&o. 2. mdvta éowoav. 3. éexaov 
Ta Tota. 4. tTHv yédvpay épvrdéarto. 5. n Oe 
Kikiooa tyv tag Tov otparedvpatos eOavmace. 
6. onpaver o7r xpy moey. 7. éviknoe Mapovar 
eEpilovTa ot wept codias. 8. peilov 7» mpagis ris 
mpoabev daiverar. 9. Kal Bacrreds 5x, eel HKovoe 
Tiroadepvous tov Kipov orddov, avtimapeokevdlero. 
10. ra rogevpara yvdykalov ot "EXX\nves éxBaddew 
tovs BapBdpovs. 11. ravras ras dpdéas peoras 
ahevpwv Kal olvov TapecKevdcato. 


FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST OF MUTE VERBS. 245 


IL. 1. They saved their property. 2. The Cilicians 
guarded the tents. 3. They admired the army. 4. But 


he will signify what he will do. 5. He conquers those 
who have been drawn up before the king. 


615. VOCABULARY. 

aevpa, -wv, Ta, flour.  tmapa-okevalw [-oKevad-|, 

avaykalw, avaykaow, etc., -acw, etc., get ready, . 
Jorce, compel. prepare; mid., provide 

- avti-rapacKevalopar, pre- [oxevy, equipment. | 
pare one’s self in turn. onpaiva, onpave, etc., 
epilw, npioa, strive, con- show by sign, give signal, 
tend, w. dat. signify. 

Kaw, Kavow, ekavoa, Ke TaTTH, Ta€w, etc., arrange, 
KQUKA, KEKQAUILAL, éxav- order, draw up; wid. 
Onv, burn [caustic]. and pass., de stationed 

[tactics |. 


616. R. ax-, ac-, pointed, sharp, swift. &K-wv, -OvT- 
os, 6, javelin; dxovrilw, hurl the javelin ; &Kk-po-s, -a, 
-ov, at the point or end, highest ; axpo-v, 70, height, axpo- 
_ mots, -€-ws, 9 (wdAus, city), upper city, citadel. da«-%-s, 
-ela, -U, swift. .tamo-s, 6, 9 (for ix-fo-s), horse (‘the swift 
one’); imm-apxo-s, 6 (R. apx-, 526), cavalry commander ; 
didw-mo-s, -ov (didros, fond), fond of horses ; imm-.Ko-s, 
-ov, of a horse or of cavalry ; imm-evd-s, -€-ws, 0, horseman ; 
immed-ow, ride; adurrev-w, ride back. 

ac-ié-s, -ei, f., sharp edge, line of batile ; ac-er, adj., 
sharp, pungent. equ-u-s, -i,.m., horse ; equ-es, -it-is, m., 
a horseman ; equ-ester, -tris, -tre, adj., equestrian. 

Eper, nae (‘egg on, goad); acme, acro-bat, acro- 
polis, etc.; ox-ide, oxy-gen, oxy-tone, etc. 


246 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


LESSON LIV. 
REGULAR VERBS IN p.—tornm. 


Review 27, 28, 116, 151, 1, 2, 3,4; 153, 154, 2; 
229, 3, a; 286, 287, 288, 300, 309, 315, 323, a, 4, ¢, d; 
344, 350, a, 6; 351, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,6; 417, 530, 531, 
obs.; 544, 553, obs.; 554, a, 6,c; 573, a,6; 574, 575, 
a, b,c, d; 576, a, b,c; 578. : 


617. Verbs in jw form their present and second 
aorist systems, and in a few verbs the second perfect, 
by adding the personal endings directly to the theme, 
omitting the variable vowel except in the subjunctive. 
Tenses thus inflected are called pe forms. In other 
tenses verbs in pu are inflected like verbs in a. 

618. Monosyllabic themes are often reduplicated : 
yiyvopar (533, 2), didmpe [So-], and rin [Oe]. 
iomnue has reduplication: i for ov, ovornpt, theme 
ota- (533, obs.*). | 

619. The Active of tornps |ora-|, place, set (847, 
851). 


PRESENT. 
Inp. SuBy. Orr. Inv. Inr. 
S. l. tornpe iord — iorainv loTavat 
2. torys iaTns torains tory 
3. toTno. toTn totaly ioTaTa 
D. 2. torarov «.t.d. KT Dd, K.7. d. Parr. 
3. lorarov ioTas 


Ke T. Ne 


REGULAR VERBS IN pt. 247 


Impf. 8. 1. tornv, 2. torns, 3. tory. 


9 € 
D. 2. toratov, 3. torarny, K.T.X. 
Seconp Aorist, 
Inp. SUBJ. Opt. Imv. Inr. 
S. l. €ornv ota oTainv OTHVAL 
¥ A , A 
2. €oTNS  oTNS oTains orn au 
¥ a , , 
3. €OTY OTN oTaln OTHTH Parr. 
Kit Ae KR) UH Keows KT. X. oTas. 


a. The dual and plural of the present and second aorist 
optative of the regular ws forms may be contracted: totairov, 
etc. (573). 

6. Observe that :.1. The final vowel of the theme is lengthened 
in the singular of the present and imperfect indicative active, 
and in all forms of the second aorist before a single consonant, 
or wherever the ending is lacking. 2. In the present singular 
indicative the endings -ws and -ou are retained, and the third 
person plural ends in -aov contracted to dow.) 3. The third 
person plural of the secondary tenses has -cav (116, 300, 573). 

c. Observe that: 1. The subjunctive has the long variable 
vowel “/,. as in the verbs in » (553, obs.*), but contracted 
with the theme. 2. The contracted forms arise as if from a 
theme in € (tore-, ore- which appear in Ionic), (151, 2, 3). 3 

d. Observe that: 1. The mood suffix of the optative is -17 
before the active endings (elsewhere -c) (574). 2. The second 
aorist system differs from the present mainly in rejecting the 
reduplication ? (531). 

e. Observe that the present imperative foTn omits -@¢ and 
lengthens the stem vowel; that @ is retained in the second 
aorist. 

1 -aou is not contracted with other vowels of the theme. 


2 Let the pupil form the second aorist from the present system by re- 
jecting the reduplication, ete. 


248 ~ THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK. 


J. Observe that the infinitive has -vas, 

g. Observe that the participles have the same stem ending as 
the verbs in w (vr), iotas (for ioravts); that they have the same 
accent as participles in ws (350, 0). 


620. Second Perfect and Pluperfect of iornps (stem 


eoTa- for oeoTa-). 


Srconp Prerrect (855). 


Inp. SuBJ. Opt. Inv. In. 
S. 1. (€ornka) <oT® €EoTainv EOTAVAL 
stand. 
y c ns e , 9 
2. (eoTnKas) €oTHs éoTains eatabe 
4 e “~ e , e , 
3 (co7nKe) éoTH €oTain €oTaT@ 
2. €oTaTrov KT A .T.N. °° - mT. AL Pant: 
Y e fees | 
3. €OTATOV ETTOS 
K.T.X. 


SeconD PLUPERFECT. 


S. 1. (€oryKyn or eloryHKy), stood. 


2. (€ar7HKns) D. 2. €orarov 
3. (€aT7KEL) (8B. éordrny 
K.T.X. 


Observe that the singular of the perfect and pluperfect is sup- 
plied by the first forms; that the perfect has the force of the 
present, and the Anneriect of the imperfect. 


621. The second aorist of tornp, both perfects and 
pluperfects active, and the middle except the first aorist, 


1 Contracted from éoraas : 
EOTHS ésTaoa  €oTds, OF EoTaS 
EOT@TOS éoT@ons EOT@TOS 
K.T.A. 


—- = 


REGULAR VERBS IN wm. 249 


are intransitive. This distinction applies to their nu- 


merous compounds. 
622. Passive and Middle of tornps' (847, 851). 


PRESENT. 


Inp. Susu. Orr. Inv. Inr. 
al 9 
S. 1. torapau ioropa ioraipnv toracbat 
lanl A yy 
2. toTaca. torn ioTato © taoTaco 
8. torata. iornTa, iotairo ioTrdcdw Parr. 
¢ , 
K.T.A. KTM. K.T.A. - K.T.N. == LOT ALEVOS 


c 2 2 
Impf. 8. 1. totdépnv, 2. toravo, 3. torato, K.T.X. 


Observe that: 1. In the middle the final vowel of the theme 
is not lengthened. 2. The mood suffix of the optative is -1- 
(619, d), contracted with the theme vowel, and hence the con- 
tracted form takes the accent. 3. In other respects the middle 
differs from the active in having the middle endings ; o in the 
endings -aaz and -co is retained in the indicative and imperative 
(27, 318), but dropped in the subjunctive and optative. 


623. Decline (like Avoas, 229, 3, a) (823): 


e Z e A e , 
toTaS ioTAC a LOTAV 

e , a 4 , 
\STAaVTOS  LtoTaoNsS LOTAVTOS 
K.T. A. K.T. A. K.T. AX. 


a. How does the second aorist participle differ from this ? 
6. Monosyllabic participles are accented in the genitive and 
dative on the penult, and do not conform to the rule for mono- 


syllables (209). 


1 torn has no second aorist middle. émpeduny, I bought [mpra-], is” 


added (846). 


250 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


624. Conjugate the present system of aipadyp! 
| rAa- |. 

625. Conjugate the present system of dvvayar? 
[Suva-], be able, ériorapar” [ émora-], understand. 

626. Write the synopsis in the present and second 
aorist systems of tornpu. 


627. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. tordpeBa. 2. 01 d€ BapBapor odk eoryoar. 
8. ot d€ wod€uor ovK ay ioraivto. 4. Karéorn «is 
\ / ? , im ¥ ee: N 
Tv Bacwreiay “AptraképEns. 5. eatnoe TO appa mpd 
A 4 , € ae ‘ ¢ ld 9 
Ts dddayyos péeons. 6. 6 d€ éumipmtdas amdvtav THv 

4 > ?, * r , PS) aa er 
yrounv anéreutev. 7. Twapa Kdéapyov dé ervyyave 
€ 6, , > > 6 % lal “> 
éaTnKkds. 8. Tore S adaoryKecav mpds Kipov macar 

! , Noe , a 21589 / 
anv Muidntov. 9. Kat EBevia, 0s avT@ mpoeornKe 

A SF A , la) 9 4, c 
Tov ev Tals TOAEoL EeviKOV, HKELY TapayyeAde. 10. ot 
d€ Kal EoTagay aropovrTes TH Tpdypatt. ll. eve de 
Svvapw Kal immKHVY Kal VaUTLKHY NY TaVTES OPOpev TE 

\ 9 , c 9 > 4 , 3 , 4} 
kat emiotapea. 12. ddd ed ye pevTor emiotacwoav 
OTL OV atroTEepetryacty. 


II. 1. Let the soldiers stand. 2. I know how to 
be ruled. 3. He will be able to stand. 4. There- 
upon the barbarians took their places on the left. 
5. Cyrus halted with the noblest and most prosperous 
about him. 6. But the horsemen of the barbarian. 
‘army to the number of a thousand stood on the right 
near Clearchus. 


1 The reduplication is strengthened by the nasal p. 
Accent the subjunctive and optative as if there were no contraction, 
Svvopar, dvvaro, etc. See émpidnv (851). 


REGULAR VERBS IN pt. 


628. 
Baorreia, -as, kingdom, roy- 
alty | Baotdevs |}. 
ad-ioTy pr, remove, make re- 
volt ; intrans., revolt. 
dvvapat, Suvvyoopat, Sedv- 
vynpat, EOvvnOny, be able, 
be capable | dynamic}. 
€u-ripmAnpe, fill up, satisfy. 
év-Tuyxave, chance upon, 
meet. : 
eTioTapal, emoTHoOOMaL, 
nmistyOnv, understand, 
know, know how. 
LOTHML, OTHYTW, EOTHOA, 
 €OTHV, EXTHKA, ETTAPAL, 
éatalny, set, make stand ; 
intrans., stand, halt. 


629. dddos, other. 


251 


VOCABULARY. 


Kab-iornps, set down, ap- 
point ; intrans., take one’s 
place, be established. 

Tipthypme, THC, fill| FILL, 
FULL, plethora |. | 

mpo-taTnpt, put at the head 
of; intrans., de at the 
head of, command, w.gen. 

ye, enclitic and postposit. 
intens. particle, even, at 
least, indeed ; emphasizes 
the preceding word, etc. ; 
often to be indicated in 
Eng. only by emphasis. 

adyHv, conj., except, except 
that; improper prep., 
except. 


dddos, -y, -ov, another, other ; 


adAd, conj. (neut. plur. with changed accent, zz another 
way), but; adds, adv., tn another way or manner, other- 


wise. 


adddo-bev, adv., from another place; &dp-ov, 
reduplicated stem add-nho- (405), of one another. 


an- 


Ndrrw (ddday-), make over, change, exchange. 
aliu-s, adj., another, other; ali-quis, pron. indet., 


some one; ali-6nu-s, adj., of another, strange, foreign, 
hostile ; al-ter, adj., the other (of two); alter-nus, adj., 
one after the other, alternate. 

ELSE; all-egory, allo-pathy, par-allel. 


THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK, 


ey 
or 
ew 


LESSON LV. 


VERBS OF THE FIFTH CLASS. — PERFECT 
MIDDLE SYSTEM OF VOWEL VERBS. 


Review 198, 245, 252, 314, a; 317, 318, 319, I, 2, 
320, 321, 322, a; 325, 351, 5; 553, 554, 573, 575, 
576. | 


630. Fifth Class (Nasal Class). Verbs of the Fifth 
Class form their present by adding a suffix containing 


vy to the theme. 
631. Some verbs add the suffix v°/, to the theme. 
Examine the following : 


Tueme. Pres. Stem. For. Aor. ° 
1. téuve, cut TEM- Temy?/.. TEW@ €TEMOV 
| érapov 
2. blavea, anticipate p0a- pbav/.. hOncopar épbaca 
3. Baive, go Ba-, Bav- Bawv?/,. Bnoopat é&nvi 
(for Bav-1?/..) 
4. édavvw, march éra-  édavy?/,. er@ nraca 


(for éXa-vv’/..) (for €rdow) 


a. Observe that Raive belongs both to the fourth and fifth 
classes, but the liquid form of the stem is found only in the 
present system. 

6. Observe that éXavve is for éXa-vu-@; that vand v are trans- 
posed ; and that its future is formed like that of eaxdw (254). 


1 Baive has second aorist @8yv of the -ws form (619, 4), éBnv, B&, Bainy, 
BnO., Biya, Bas. 


— 


PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM OF VOWEL VERBS. 253 


632. Some consonant themes add the suffix av’/... 
Examine the following : 


ToemMe. Pres. Stem. For. 2p Aor. 
aia Oavopat, aic@- aicbar/,. aic@ncopat! joddunv 


perceive 
dmapTave, miss dmapT- amaptav?/. auapticopat! ywapTov 


633. If the last vowel of the theme of verbs taking 
the present tense suffix av’/. is short and followed by a 
single consonant, another nasal is inserted after this 
vowel; yw” is inserted before a labial, y before a palatal, 
and v before a lingual. 

Examine the following : 


THeme. Pres. Stem. For. 2p Aor. 
1. AapBavo, take AaB- AapBav?/.. AArowat? EraBov 
2. AavOavea, escape AaO- RAavOar?/.. Ajow? éXabov 


the notice of 


3. pavOdve, learn pab- pavOav).. pwabnocopwatt éuabov 

4. truvOavopat, av0- muvOar?/.. revocowar®  érrvOdunv 
| learn by inquiry. 

5. tuyyave, hit, Ttvy- Tuyxyav/.. revEouat ETUYOV 

| happen 


634. A few themes add ve’/.. 


Examine the following : 


1 The theme assumes e¢, as in some verbs of the first class (522), in all 
the systems that occur except the present and second aorist. 

2 The nasal is in fact v changed to p before labials and y before palatals 
(194, 4). 

® Some themes of verbs of this class are lengthened as in verbs of 
class 11 (527), in other systems than the present and second aorist. 

4 See 522. 


254 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


TuEme. Pres. STEM. Fur. 2p Aor. 
A 5-7 
l. txvéopat, come tk- ixve?/.. (Eo mat LKOMLNV 
/ 
2. ta-woyvdowat, cex- -loyve?/,. -oXNTOMAL -EoXOUND 


promise 


a. -tox- of the present stem is from toya, for cvay-, ioy- 
(533, obs.*), the reduplicated theme of ey, ot-cey-. 


635. Conjugate the perfect middle system of Avo, 
Kelevo, Kova, Odw, TYwdw, Tovéw, SynrAdw (829, 830, 
836). 

636. Conjugate the second aorist system of aioPavo- 
pat, NapBaveo,' NavOdve, Tvyyave, ikvéopas. 


637. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. kat A\aBovres* Ta Ora TapHnoapv eis Yapdets. 
2. eruxe TAELS AUTO ETOMeVy TOV OTALTOY. 3. évTavOa 
\ , 9 , e \ ¢ , » 9 
6%) Kvpov amoréuvera 4 xelp 7 Sefud. 4. nobero dri 
\ , , » 5 , 3 ¥ A 
Td Meévwvos orparevpa non ev Kidikia Hv €iow Tov 
épéov. 5, tovrov diaBas eéfehavva dia Dpvyias 
\ Y , > \ > Ud > 
oTabuov eva Tapacayyas OKTw els KoXooods. 6. év- 
tav0a adixero 1 Yevvéovos yuvn Tov Kidikwy Baor- 
\éws mapa Kopov. 7. tHv de “EAAnuikyy ddvapw nO por- 
Cev ws padiora ETLKPUTTOMEVOS, OTWS OTL ATapacKEvO- 
ratov AdBo. Bacidéa. 8. dvaBaiver ovv 6 Kipos haBav 
Tisoadéprynv ws didov, kal Tov “EM\jvov € €yov omhi- 
Tas aveBn Tpraxog tous. 9, mepabopie dé Kal mpoxarar 
RaMopevous ” Ta GKpa, OTS [7 oboe! pyre Kvpos 
pyre ot Kidtxes katadhaBovrtes.! 


1 NapBdvew. has second aorist imy. AaBé. 
2 Often rendered with, like éyov. 


8 Sc. avdpas. © CL 345.0: 


PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM OF 


IL 1. These arrived in Sardis for him. 
Cyrus accordingly went upon the mountains. 
4. And he took the money 


he promised gold to them. 


and collected an army by this means.’ 


learned of the difficulty by inquiry. 


VOWEL VERBS. 255 


2. But 
3. And 


d. And Cyrus 
6. But he de- 


scended through this plain and marched four stages, 
twenty-five parasangs, into ‘l'arsus. 


638. 

d-TApPa-TKEVOS, -oV, unpre- 
pared |oxevy, eguip- 
ment |. 

> ¥ A 

amToTeprvea, -Tew, cut off, 
entercept. 

> , e - 4 

ap-iKveopas (ixveoprat, tEo- 
pal, Kony, vypac), ar- 
rive, return. 

Baivw (Ba-, Bav-), Byoo- 

¥ , 

pat, eBnv, BéBnka, Be 


639. R. fix, ix, vic, arrive, dwell. 


VOCABULARY. 


> 4 
Bapa, EBabnv, come, go 
[vento, COME, basis ]. 
> , : 
emi-KpumTw, conceal, hide. 
mTpo-KaTa-hapBavw, preoc- 
cupy. 
, _f > 
TuvOdavopat, TEevoOLat, €mrU- 
Oopunv, wérvopat, learn 
by inquiry, inquire, ask. 
UT-LOXVEOMLAL, -TYHTOMAL, 
ET XOLND, -ETXN PAL, 
promise. 


&ib-LK-VE-0-LALL, 


come to, arrive ; ik-avé-s, -7, -dv, coming up to the needs 
or demands, sufficient, able. otx-o-s, 6 (fouxos), a dwell- . 
ing-place, house, home ; oix-ta, -as, house, dwelling ; oiKo-t, 
at home; otxo-Oev, away from home; oix-a-de, hone- 
ward ; oiko-vdpo-s, 6 (vduos, law), one who controls a 
household, steward ; oiké-ty-s,-ov, member of one’s house- 
hold, servant ; oixé-w, dwell, have a home. 


* xpipa. 


256 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


vicu-s, -i, m., abode, village ; vic-inu-s, adj., of the vil- 


laye, near, neighboring ; vil-la, ae, f., country-seat. 


-WICK, -wicH (508, 12), di-ocese, eco-nomy, ecumen- 


ical, par-ochial. 
640. Cyrus plans to become King, and secretly raises a Greek 
Army. 
Review 146, 237, 238, 239, ws (241), 380, 1,4; 381, 
382, dru (388), 398, 433, 437, 464, a; 466. 


A.°O 8 as andre kwdvvedoas Kai atipacbeis, Bov- 
An ‘al > x 
heverau Orws pmymore ETL e€oTar ETL TH AdEAP, GAN, HY 
, 1 , > 2 iB , Tl 4 , \ on 
dvvyntat, Baciievoe avT €EKELVOU. APUTATLS MEV OY 
e , € s ei , Xr A a aNd x \ 
n RATHP VINpXE TO Kvpo, driovaa avtov wahdov 7 Tov 
, > v4 
Baowhevovra *“Apraképénv. 


5."Ooris 8 adduxveiro Tov Tapa Baoitéws mpos 


oy , 7 \ > /, 7 b] c -/ 
avTov, TavTas ovTw Sdiatilels ameméumeto wo avT@ 
paddrov didovs eivar” 7 Baorret. Kal Tov Tap’ EavT@O 
de , LS eee A e a er 4 
€ BapBapwr” évepedetto, ws TohEE TE iKavol ELnoaV 
Kal EVVOLKMS EXOLEY AUTO. 

6. Thv dé “EXAnuicny Sdvapiv nOpolev ws padvora 
edvvato* éemiKpuTTOMEvos, OTwS OTL aTapacKEVvoTAaTOV 
haBo. Bacrréa. ade ody Eroretro THY oTvANOYHP. 
€ / +3 SG) as la) , 4 a 
omoaas €ixe hudakas” €v Tats TodEoL, Tapyyyerde TOLS 

4 e 4 , ¥ 
dpovpapxos exdorois AapBaverw avdpas Iedorovyy- 

, 4 , \ , e b] 4 3 

gious ott wAEioTous Kal BedTiorous, ws emiBovdevorTos 


1 qv Svvnra, tf he should be able, if possible (687). 

* Governed by éore, denoting the result which the action of the leading 
verb tends to produce. 

8 Explain the construction. 

* os edvvaro, etc., as most he was able. 

5 Give the derivation. 

© Cf. 444, 10. 


5 


REGULAR VERBS IN pm. 257 


. \ A x 
Ticcadépvous tais Todeot. Kal yap joav' ai “lwvixal 


qmoXeus Teotragepyads TO apxato €K Baovhéos d<d0- 
pévar* tore Oe tomate mpos Kupov macau mA1v 
~Mudnrov. 


amndOe, 2 aor. of d-epyouwa, go away, back. 

ovTw diaTileis, so disposing, pres. part. of SiatiOnpt, 
arrange, dispose. 

dedouevat, having been given, perf. part. mid. or pass. 
of didam, give. 


LESSON LVI. 


REGULAR VERBS IN pu.— diSom. 


Review Lesson LIV., 151, 1, 2, 3; 152, 153, 
154, 3. 


641. Active of dap [So-], give (848, 852). 


PRESENT. 
Inp. Susy. Opt. Imv. Inr. 
S. 1. dep 8:80 = SO0inv® dvddvat 
2. Sidws - Sidas Sid0ins Sidov 
: 3. didwor 610@ Sudoin = Sud ~~. 
D. 2. dSidorov x.T-d.  K.TX. K.T.. OLo0vS 
3. didoror | 


K.T. A. 


1 Tite impf. 7eav is used with ré dpyaiov of a time prior to the main 
action, as plupf., but to denote a continued act, — had originally belonged, 
used to belong. The imperfect in this sense is usually preceded by od, 
_ ore, etc. (314, a; 433, N. 2). 
2 See 619, a. 

17 


258 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


Impf. 8. 1. @i8ovv, 2. edidovs, 3. edidov, 
‘Dz 2. €didorov, 3. ediddryr, 


K. 7.0. 


Seconp AORIST. 


IND. Susi. Opt. Inv. Inr. 
S. 1. (€wxa) 80  ~—- Soinv Sovvat 
2. (€dwxas) das doins dds 
3. (€dwKe) do doin dd6Tw Parr. 
D. 2. edorov K.T. A. K.T. A. K.T. A. dovs | 
3. eddrnv 
K.T.A. 


a. Observe that in the imperfect indicative active éd/dovr, etc. 
(instead of édé8ev, etc.), are formed as if from a contract verb in 
ow (d1ddw for didmpe). aa 

b. Observe that ow, ons, o7 in the subj. of verbs in -wpt, are 
contracted to @, @s, @ (151, 3). 

c. Observe that in the present imperative active 5édou. (instead 
of 6/508:) is formed as from a contract verb in ow (154, 3). 

d. Observe that the part. d:d005 is for dud0vTs (619, g ). 

e. Observe that: 1. The singular of the second aorist is lack- 
ing, and it is supplied by the first aonst «a, etc., formed by 
the tense suffix -«a for -oa (197). 2. The second aorist by 
exception does not lengthen its final theme vowel. 

J. Observe that in the second aorist imperative éds is irregular 

for 600. 

g. Observe that the second aorist infinitive Sodvat (for So- 
evat) is formed with the ending -evav. ° 

h. Observe that the second aorist system differs in the main 
from the present in rejecting the reduplication (619, d, 2). 


642. Middle and passive of didmpus (848, 852). 


REGULAR VERBS IN pu. 259 


PRESENT. 
Inp. Subs. Opt. Inv. Inr. 
S. 1. dopa. Svddpour Sid0ipnv didoc00ar 


2. Sidoca did@ dtO0t0 ~=3—_—d Sooo 
3. didora. dida@Trar did0iTo d1dd00w Parr. 
KT. KTM KT. ke TN. SLOdpevos 


Impf. 8. 1. &ddpnv, 2. eidoc0, 3. édidoro, k.7.X. 


Seconp Aortst.?. 


Inp. Subs. Opt. Iuv. Inr. 
S. 1. eddunv Sapac doipnv - bdaOau 
2. dou d@ Soto Sov 
3. €00TO dora.  dotTo d000w Parr. 
K.T.A. KT KT KT SS pevos 


a. Observe that the mood suffixes and formatign of the middle 
are the same as in torn (622, obs. 1, 2, 3). 

b. Observe that o of the ending -co of the second aorist 
middle is irregularly dropped, and that then the two last vowels 
are contracted. 


643. Decline (like Avor, 229, 1; 823): 


O.Ld0vs dvdovca Ovoov 
SLOOVTOS dLd0vans dLddvTOS 


K.T. A, K.T. A. K.T. X. 


a. How does the second aorist participle differ from this. 


644. Conjugate the tense systems of diam having 
-w forms, 


1 See p. 247 2. 


260 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


645. EXERCISES. 
I. 1. 6 8€ Ktpos didwow ait@ els TeTpakvoyxidious 
kat €& pnvav piobov. 2. tpov d€ Tov “EXAjvev axt- 
j; er ‘ 
vakynvy €KdoT@® XpvoodY 
doow. 3. Tavtra d€ Ta 


Tots hirous duedidov. 4. ov- 
Tot héyovot oT. Baowdevs 






5 ovv oTpatia Tore ame 
dwxe Kuvpos puobov rerra- 
pov pnvov. 6. €v Miryr@ 


> ~ 2 X la) 
Tal, aTooTHVaL mpos Kvu- 


No. 11. *Axivaxys. j 
‘ i pov. 7. mpos dé Baorréa 


3 


Téutov n€iov SoOnvar ot® TavTas Tas mdAELS Paddov 7H 
Ticocadépryyny apyew avtav. 8. Ta mola kaTexavoer, 
Y \ A “A ‘\ e 4 \ > , 

iva pn Kipos duaBn. 9. Tas apatas peotas adevpwv 


TapeoKevacato Kipos tva duadoin Tots “EAAnow. 


II]. 1. He gave to each man five minae of silver. | 


2. He will be able to pay as much as he promises. 
3. He commanded the Greeks to surrender their arms. 
4, 'Tissaphernes and the brother of the king’s wife gave 
to the generals of the Greeks their right hands. 5. The 
Ionian cities formerly had belonged to Tissaphernes, 


having been given to him by [éx] the king, but at that 


time they all had revolted to Cyrus except Miletus. 


1 Depends upon padiora. 2 Apposition to ra abra. 
5 Indirect reflexive. Explain the accent. 


dapa wavrav’ 81) padiora 


Kehever TOs "EAAnvas ta- 
NS i ,. ¢ ~ 
padovvat Ta omAa. OD. ™ 


A ‘\ > ‘ la) 4 ‘ 
d¢ Ta avTa TavTa BovAevov- 


—— ee 


READING LESSON. 261 


646. VOCABULARY. 
dxivakns, -ov, short sword, give, allow, offer | Lat. 
dagger. do; dose, anti-dote |. 
dro-SiSap., give back, re- Kata-Kadw, burn down, burn 

store, pay; mid., sell. up. | 
dia-didwpn, distribute. Tapa-didwp., give up, de- 
Sidwpr, Sdcw, edwKka, dé liver over, surrender. 


; dwxa, Sédopa1, €dd0nv, 


647. R. S0-, da-, do. 8(-8a-pi, give; wapa-di-d-1, 
give up, surrender ; mpo-Si-dw-p, give over, betray, desert; 
mpo-50-7y-s, -ov, betrayer, traitor ; psrobo-d6-rn-s, -ov, 
one who pays wages, paymaster | pro Ods |; 88-po-v, 76, 91/1, 
present. 

do (da-re), give; pro-do, give forth ; tra-do, surren- 
der ; pro-di-tor, -oris, m., a traitor ; dd-nu-m,-i, n., gift ; 
do-no, present, donate. 

dose, anti-dote, anec-dote. 


648. Siege of Miletus. 


Review 121, 147, 182, 235, 236, 2; 244, 245, 261, 
369, 3, 6; 394, 399, 640. 

7. "Ev Mujr@ d€ Ticoadépyys. tpoacbopevos Ta 
aira tavta Bovdevopevous, amocryvar mpos Kipor, 
TOUS pev avT@Y arméKTeve, Tos 8 e€€Badrev. 6 dé Kd- 
pos, vTohkaBev rods devyortas, ovdde€as orpdrevpa 
emoudpKe. Midyntov Kal Kata ynv Kat kata OddarTar, 


1 Bovdevopévovs, agrees with twds understood, indirect discourse after 
mpoacOdpevos (776) ; in Latin the infinitive would be used. 


962 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


A 4 ‘ 7 
kal éreiparo Katdyew Tods éxmenTwKdTas. Kal avTy* 
> . ~ a) “4 
ad d\n mpddacrs Hv adt@ Tod dOpoilew* oTparevpa. 
, > x 
8. IIpds S¢ Baoiréa réurov n&iov, adekdos av 
Aw A aw lan) wn 
abrov, SoOnvar ot® Tavras Tas TOES PaAAOY H Tio ca- 
“A ‘ ¢ , ww 
déprnv apyew avTav, Kal H wYTHP TuveTpaTTey avT@ 
lal 4 X \ \ ‘ ¢ ‘ > ‘ 
ravta’ wate Bacidevds THY ev Mpos EavTov EemBovAnv 
ovk jyobavero, Tiwoadhepva dé évdpile todepourta 
y TR b) \ \ 4 8 wn - 4 a Oe 
avTov apde TA OTpaTEevpaTa OaTavav’” WOTE OVOEV 
¥ 5 ‘A , 5 \ XN e Ky, > , 
nxXGero avtav TodepovvTav.” Kal yap O Kupos aze- 
mMEemTe TOUS yuyvonevovs Sacpovs PBacitet Ex TOV 
4\ ge , Ly eS By A 
Todkewv av® Tisoadp€epvous ' ervyxavev Exwr. 


4 . 
mpo-aicOdvopa, observe ovp-mpartw, do (ri) with, 


beforehand. co-operate with, aid. 
bro-hapBavew, take under Satravdaw, spend, expend. 
one’s care, receive. ay Goma, be troubled, angry 


at | AWE, UGLY]. 


1 avrn instead of rotro, agreeing with the predicate noun. 

2 See 117; 371, 9. 3 See 645, 7. 

* Samravay with adrov as subject depends upon évdpurge, indirect discourse 
as in Latin (267, 5; 723). 

5 See 239 ; 236, 2. 6 See 439. 

7 Depends upon &v (369, 1) ; regularly it would limit rév médeov. 


LESSON LVI. 


VERBS OF THE SIXTH CLASS.—FIRST AND 
SECOND AORIST PASSIVE SYSTEMS. 


Review 344, 345, 346, 349, a,4; 350, 351, 6; 352, 
353, 417, 418, 419, 2; 557, 575, 576, 579. 


VERBS OF THE SIXTH CLASS. 263 


649. « as Augment or Reduplication before a Vowel. 

A few verbs beginning with a vowel take the syllabic 
augment. ‘These verbs have also e for the reduplica- 
tion, and this with initial © is contracted to a: exe, 
have, etyov (from é-exor).’ 


- 


a. opdm, see, generally takes the temporal augment after ¢ : 
EWPWV, EWPAKA, EWPALAL. 

650. «€ changed to a. In liquid themes of one sylla- 
ble, € is generally changed to @ in the first perfect, per- 
fect middle, and second passive tense systems: oréA\o 
(ored-), send, eoradka, €oTahpoar, €oTadny, orahyco- 
ae. 


a. The same change of € to & occurs in a few other verbs, 
usually after p; Tpé7@, Térpappal, érparnv; tpépa, pabiscae 
peat, etc. 

6. It occurs further in the second aorist system of id 
étpatrov; KTElv@, ExTavov ; TéMVYW, ETAMOD. 


651. Sixth Class. Verbs of the Sixth Class form 
their present stem by adding -ox’/, or -tox’/,. to the 
theme. The final vowel in the theme before -oxw is 
generally lengthened. 

Examine the following : 


Toeme. Pres. Stem. For. 2p Aor. 

l. yiyvooke, know yvo- yiyvock/.. yvooopat &yvav 
2. evpicxa, find  eup- evpick?/,. eupnow nupov 

, : or evpov 2 


1 This form is explained on the supposition that these verbs originally 
began with a consonant, F or o (533, obs‘). 
_ 2 edpioxe has second aorist imv. ebpé. 


264 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


3. OvnoKke, die Oav-, Ova! Ovnok?/,. Oavodpar eBavov 
4. mdoxo, suffer rab-,rev0- racy?/.. metcouwat érabov 
| (for 7a0-cKw) 


5. duddonw, teach diday- didack?/.. diddEw  edidakéa 


a. Observe that yuyvéoxo is reduplicated® (533, obs.2); 
that the final vowel of the theme is lengthened, and that the 
second aorist is of the -w form of inflection (286, 619, 4, 1, 
2, 3).4 

: Observe that in edpfoxw the theme assumes € as in several 
verbs of the first class (522) in all the systems ae the pres- 
ent and second aorist. 

ce. Observe that: 1. wdoye is for ra0-cxo, 6 is dropped 
before ox (for « becoming x, see p. 1531). 2. melcopar is 
for 7rev0copmat. 

d. Observe that d:dd-cxw is for dday-cxw; x is dropped 


before ox. 


652. Second Aorist Passive System (842). 
Examine the following : 


Inp. SuBs. Opt. Inuv. > Tyr. 
épdvnv . pavO . haveinv davynvat 
epavns darys daveins hdvnb 3 
epavn avn davein daryirw Pay. 
KT. KTM TN. kT. haweis 


a oe 


Observe that the second aorist passive has the same inflection 
as the first aorist, and differs from the latter in form by rejecting 


1 See p. 2151. 

2 The theme assumes the form ev (or mav); v is inserted, as in the 
fifth class (630). 2 

® This form occurs most frequently in the sixth class. 

* eyvar, éyvas, ete., with long vowel throughout (856). 


VERBS OF THE SIXTH CLASS. —- 265 


the -@ in the tense sign, and by retaining -0 in the imperative 
ending -@. 


653. Second Future Passive (842). _ 
Examine the following : 


Inp. Opt. Inv. | 
‘S. Ll. davyjcopa davycoipny davncerOau 
2. daricer pavycoro 
3. pavyceras  pavyco.to Parr, 
KoTs Ke Ke TX. pavnoomevos 


Observe that the second future passive has the same inflection 
as the first future, and differs from the latter in form by rejecting 
-@ from the tense sign. 


654. The stem of the second aorist passive is formed 
by adding -e to the theme. This suffix, as with the first 
aorist, is lengthened to -y in the indicative, and in other | 
moods before a single consonant of the endings. 


a. Ane in the theme regularly becomes a. 


655. The stem of the second future passive is formed 
by adding o°/.. to the lengthened stem in -y of the 
second aorist passive. 

656. 1. Conjugate the first aorist passive system of 
vo, TéuTT@, haivw, 2. Conjugate the second aorist 
passive system of daive, éddvyy, etc.; orpédw, éotpa- 
pnv ; Tpédhw, eTpadyv.’ 


1 In the sense of the middle. Let the pupil write the first passive and 
then reject the -0 in the tense suffix for the second passive. 


266 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


657. Give synopsis in the second passive system of 


ypabw; pimta, éppidyv; myttw [wAny-], €rAnynr, 
in compounds -erAdynpv, e€eraynv ; KomTw, EKOmyv. 


658. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. tyas diddfwo. 2. Kat dbs eyvaoay mavrtes 
6Ti eyyvs eotparomedevero Bacihe’s. 3. ovd addos 
Q A c v4 > , GS, , ¥ , 5) iE | > 
dé Tay “EMAjvav ev TavTy TH paxyyn ewabllev ovdeis' ov- 
, ‘ 4 4 4 
dev. 4. Kal ot EdAnves orpadévtes tapeckevalovto. 
5. ov wod\A@ voTepoy ot oxayol KaTeKomnoar. 
6. vmép yap THS Kapuns ddos Fr, Ep’ ov avert pady- 
¢ 3 XN 4 A ‘ ¢ 4 tie 
cav ot apupit Baortréa. 7. ovrte We a aah das €T 
ovoev earn ovTe oTparomedov. 8. ézel ETLOPK@Y TE 
epdvn Kat Tas omovdas Aver, EXEL Thy Sten Kat 
tévynKe. 9. amoOvioKovros yap Kvpov mavres ot Tap’ 
2." A , > / , e A > “~ x 
avrov giro. améavoy payxopevor vrép avTov myv 
9 , , , y 3 a 
Apwaiov. 10. ropevdpuela tayéws, va atootacbapev 
Tov BaoiduKov oTparevparos. 


II. 1. On the third day the enemy appeared. 2. One 
hundred hoplites were cut down by the Cilicians. 
3. Many of those about the king were killed. 4, And 
this one suffered no harm. 5. But what I wrote, that 
the king was terrified at the approach of the army, was 
evident from the following? 


1 When a negative is followed by a compound negative or by several 
compound negatives in the same clause, the negative is strengthened. All 
but the first negative must be rendered in English by an affirmative. It is 
equivalent to the English phrase, zo¢ at all, etc. 

2 Dative. 


VERBS OF THE SIXTH CLASS. 


6590. 
€p-050s, 9, way to, approach. 
ava-oT peda, turn back, face 
about; pass., be turned 
back, rally. 
ato-OvyoKw, die, be killed ; 
often as pass. to azro- 
KTELVO. 
duddoKw, diudatw, etc., 
teach, show { Lat. doceé ; 
TEACH, didactic |. 
ex-tAyTtTw, strike out of 
one’s senses, alarm, ter- 
rify | wrAjTTo, strike]. 
OvncKw, Oavovpat, Cavor, 
tévnxa, die. Pf. has the 
force of the present, am 
dead, be slain. 


267 


VOCABULARY. 


sy / ¥ 
Taco, Teicopat, etalon, 
mérov0a, suffer, exper 
5 s 
ence, feel; @ Tacxa, 
pass. of €d zrovety [ Lat. 
pator. 
logy]. 
oTpého, oTpébw, exTpepa, 
eoTpappar, eoTtpepOny, 
€atpadyy, turn, twist ; 
intr. and in pass., ¢ura, 
Jace about [strophe, apo- 
strophe, cata-strophe |. 
ovte, and not, Lat. neque ; 
» ¥ ‘ 
ovTe... oute, neither... 
nor. 


pathos, patho- 


660. R. yvo-, yvw-, gna-, gno-, perceive, know. yt- 


yva-ox-w, perceive, know, think ; yvd-py, -ns, means of 
knowing, mind, thought, opinion ; 6-vo-pa, -at-os, 76 (for 
O-yvo-a), name ; ev-dvUpLO-s, -o-v, of good name or omen; 
v6-o-s, contr. vots, 6 (for yvo-fo-s), mind; voé-w, observe. 
think out ; kata-voé-w, mark well, observe ; €b-voo-s,-00-V, 
‘well disposed ; esvova, -as, good will ; e-vo-ikd-s, -4, -6-v, 
kindly disposed ; eb-votkas, adv., with good will ; Kkaxd- 
voo-s, -oov (Kkakos, bad), ill disposed, hostile. 

gna-ru-s (na-ru-s), adj., /nowing, skilful ; i-gna-ru-s 
(in + gnarus), <guorant ; i-gnd-ro, not know, be ignorant 


268 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. : 
of; nar-r-6, make known, tell; na-vu-s (gna-vu-s), adj., — 
diligent, active; i-gna-vu-s, inactive, slothful ; nO-sc-6, 
know ; no-bili-s, adj., well known, famous ; no-men, -inis, © 
n., name. 3 
CAN, KNOW, KEEN, CUNNING, NAME, gnome, gnostic, 
a-gnostic, dia-gnosis, al-onymous, met-onymy, patr- 


onymic, Syl-onym. 


LESSON LVIIL 


CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 


Review 236, 6; 422, 563, 565, 566. 


661. Conditional sentences consist of two parts: the 
one, introduced by et, z/, states the case or condition ; 
the other states what follows under a certain condition. 
The former, which usually precedes, is a dependent 
clause, and is called the protasis ;* the latter is the main 
clause, and is called the apodosis? 


662. Present and Past Suppositions implying Nothing 
as to the Fulfilment of Condition. 

Examine the following : | 

1, -et vuets Oedere CEoppay, erecOar vpyiv BovrAopat, - 
f you wish to set out, IT am ready to follow you. 

2. el d€ py tis Bédriov dpa, Xepicodos Hyotro, but 
f any one does not see a better plan, let Chirisophus lead. 


1 mporacts (mporeivw), a putting before, a proposal. 
2 drddoots (arrodidwput), a giving in return. 


CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 269 


8. et tus Exdbdvev, odk Hv eloehOetv, if there was any 
hindrance, it was not possible to enter. 


a, Observe that in all of these conditions the protasis is intro- 
duced by eé, if, and takes the indicative ; that it states a particu- 
lar supposed case in the present or past simply as a fact without 
implying any judgment as to its fulfilment ; and that the apod- 
osis takes any form of the verb to express what may follow if 
the fact be granted. 
. 6. Observe that the negative of the assumed case is wu, and 
that the negative of the apodosis, when it asserts a consequence 
of the admitted reality of the protasis, is od (422). 


Present and Past Suppositions with Nothing implied. 
— Simple Particular Suppositions. 


Rute. 


663. When the protasis simply states a present or 
past particular supposition, implying nothing as to the 
fulfilment of the condition, it has the indicative with ei. 
The apodosis may take any form of verb, but generally 
the indicative. 


664. The negative of the seid is regains BY, 
that of the apodosis is ov. 

665. Potential Indicative. 

Examine the following : 

l. émoince ravra, he did this. 

2. é€moinoe av Tavra, he would have done this. 


Observe that: 1. In 1, the indicative asserts the action. 2. In 
2, the past indicative with dv. (566) states the action as depen- 
dent upon some unfulfilled past circumstances or conditions, 1. e. 
what would have happened if the conditions had been fulfilled. 


270 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


RULE. 


666. The past tenses of the indicative with dy ex- 
press a past action as dependent on past circumstances | 
or conditions. ‘The negative is ov. - 


667. Present and Past Conditions with Suppositions 
contrary to Fact. 

Examine the following : 

1. éroinoe dv tadra, ei avrov éxéhevoa, he would 
have done this, if I had commanded him. 

2. ef ur vets NADerE, €mopevdpela av pos Bacrréa, 
if you had not come, we would be marching against the 
hing. 

3. é€moie dv tavra, e& avtov éxédevor, he would be 
doing this, of I were commanding him. | 


a. Observe that in 1, the unfulfilled condition is expressed as 
part of the sentence dependent upon ézrodjae av as the apodosis 
which still expresses, like the potential indicative, what would 
have happened if the unreal condition had been fulfilled, 1. e. the 
action did not happen because the condition was not fulfilled. 

6. Observe that when the protasis having the past tenses of » 
the indicative is intended to imply non-fulfilment of condition, 
the adverb av is added to the past tenses of the indicative in the 
apodosis. 

c. Observe that since the condition is contrary to fact, or 
implies that the protasis is not or was not fulfilled, past tenses of 
the indicative must be used in both protasis and apodosis ; that 
the imperfect refers to the present as in 2, 3, the aorist to a sim- 
ple occurrence in past time, and the pluperfect (rare) to an act 
completed in the past or present. 


CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. o7% 


Present and Past Conditions with Suppositions con- 
trary to Fact. 
. RvLg. 

668. When the protasis states a present or past sup- 
position implying that the condition zs xot or was not 
Jubjilled, \t has the past tenses of the indicative with et, 
and the apodosis the past tenses of the indicative 
with av. | : 

The imperfect here refers to the present time, or to 
an act as going on or repeated in past time, and the 
aorist to an act as simply occurring in past time. 


Wishes contrary to Fact. 

669. When a wish refers to the present or past, im- 
plying that its object zs zot or was not attained, it is 
expressed by the secondary tenses of the indicative with 
eiMe or et yap: €ife TovTo pH émoinaa, O that I had 
not done this. 

670. In wishes unattained the tenses and moods are 
distinguished as in conditions contrary to fact. 

671. ‘The negative in all wishes is py (422). 


672. | EXERCISES. 
I. 1. eiMe Ktpos ely. 2. Kdéapyos ehatvo. 3. KAS 


apxos ndéws av eLavvor. 4. oddév Gv KaKkdv Empatrer. 
5. ovdev &y KaKov exrpatev. 6. “Opovras émuBovdrever 
Kvpo, Kat mpdcbev tmoeunoas kataddoyeis Be.-08s5 et 
/ 207 e A 9 >. oA , 

Kreavap eléda yyeto0a, erecPoa aita Bovdr\omar. 
8 > ny 3 4 Aw b ] A 2 3 aN Q > 

. OUK Gy €roinge TadTa, Ei 7) avTov exéhevoa. YY. EF 
Emos adehpds E€o7TL, ov TadT ey@ Ajowu. 10. Tatra 
erpage Oarrov 4 Tis Gv wero. 11. ei dé Tus dAdo Opa 


272 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


Bédrvov, addrAws exerw. 12. of S€°ENAnves, ef Tis Kal 
> / oy \ XN c] , > , \ , 
dOuporepos Hv mpos THY dvdBacw,, dxovovtes THY K¥pov 
apernv novov Kal tpolupdrepov cuveropevorTo. 


II. 1. He would have been on his guard. 2. If any 
one sees any better plan than this, let him speak. 
3. And he would be doing this, if he were seeing you. 
4. If Abrocomas had opposed, Cyrus would have sent 
after the ships. 5. It was not possible to capture the 
asses, unless the horsemen hunted. 6. -If Clearchus 
does not wish to lead us back, let the captains lead. 


673. VOCABULARY. 


a-Avj.0s, -ov, without heart, Kar-adddrre, change from 
dispirited [Ovuds, soul, hostile to friendly terms,re- 


heart |. concile | addarrw, change 
-ava-Baors, '~€0S, n, ascent, (adXos) ]. 

march inland |anaba- oiopar, think, believe, [Lat., 

sis |. opinor |. 


674. R. kad-, cal-, cla-, call. Kah-é-w, call ; Kd\H-o1-s, 
-e-ws, 9, a calling; éx-Kdn-ota, -as, summoned assembly ; 
Kfipu-f, -ux-os, o (formed on the stem «np-v«-), herald ; 
knputte, be a herald, proclaim; xpétw (formed on the 
stem xpa~y-), cry out, call; kpavy-7, hs, outcry, shout. 

calo-, call together ; kale-ndae, -arum, f., the day of 
proclamation, Calends ; con-cil-iu-m, -i, n., assembly, 
councu ; cla-m6, cry out ; cla-~mo-r, -dr-is, m., shout, cry ; 
cla-ru-s, adj., clear, famous ; clas-si-s, -is, f., class, fleet. 

Haun (i.e. drag), HAL-yard, HAUL, ec-clesiastic. 


SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE OF CONTRACT VERBS. 273 


67 5- An Army is collected by Clearchus in the Chersonesus. 


Review 66, 146, 212, 357, 648. 
Y¥ A , 5 ~ , > 

9. "AXXo b€ orparevpa aiT@ cuvedeyero ev Xeppo- 
v4 / 8 X / 1 hé 5 , 
vHowW TOVOE TOV TPOTOV. Kiéapyos Aakedatpmovios 
duyas nv* tot ovyyevdpevos 6 Kipos yyacby te 
avTov kai didwo. avT@ pupiovs Saperkous. 
€ x WY ON , s , 
6 d¢ haBov* 76 ypvoiov oTparevpa ouve- 
he€ev amd TovTwy TOV ypHnpaTwV Kal 
€mohepen EK Xeppovycov Oppu@pevos Tots 
OpaEi® rots vrep “EAAjomovtov* olkovo No. 12. Adpe 

\ 3 4, ef 9 4 XN , ay 
Kat whee Tous EXAnvas* worte Kal ypn- Kos. 
pata avveBdddovto aiT@ els THY TpodnY TOV OTpaTio- 

A ec ‘ / ¢ a) 5 la ? > 
tov at EdX\nomortiakal modes Exovaa.” Touro d ad 





7 , > , 5 Lal ‘ , 
ovTw Tpepopevov ehavOavey avT@ TO oTpaTevpa. 


avy-yiyvomat, meet, become acquainted with. 
ayapal, nyacdpnv, nyacOnv, admire (433, N. 3). 
dapeiKos, daric. adeéw, aid, assist. 

1 ‘Which of the above rules applies to tpdzroy ? 


2 What force has AaBeéy P 4 Of. 79, a, b. 
% What does Opagéi depend upon ? 5 Cf. p. 1508; 371, 11. 


LESSON |. LIX. 


SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE OF CON- 
TRACT VERBS.— GENERAL CONDITIONS. 


Review 28, 114, 115, 116, 150-154, 228, 229, a, 4; 
230, 242, 417, 418, 552, 553, obs.; 554, a,b; 567, 
968, 578, 579. 


18 


274 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


676. Learn the subjunctive and optative active and 
iniddle of tyzdw, zrovew, and dydrdw (843, 844, 845). 


a. Observe that o-et and 0-7 contract to os (152, 4). 
6. Observe that in the active these verbs generally have -1y 
(574) as mood sign of the optative. 


677. The adverb ay is regularly joined to e in the 
protasis when the verb is in the subjunctive; ei with av 
forms édy, Hv, or av (692). 

678. In animated language the aorist is used in the 
sense of the present. ‘This is called the guomic aorist, 
and is naturally translated by the English present. 

679. The unperoet and aorist are sometimes used 
with the adverb av to denote a customary action (680). 

680. Particular and General Conditions. 

Conditional sentences are either particular or general. 
In a particular supposition (663), the protasis refers to 
a definite act or acts occurring at a definite time. | 

In a general supposition, the protasis refers indefi- 
nitely to any one of a given series of acts occurring 
at any time, and the apodosis expresses an habitual or 
repeated action or a general truth. — | 


a. This distinction of suppositions as particular and general 
may be seen in all classes of conditional sentences, but it is only 
in the first class (662) that the distinction is represented by the 
form of the sentence. 


Examine the following : 
l. édy tw brdoxnTai 71, ovmore pevderas, if (ever) he 
makes a promise to any one, he never breaks his word. 


SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE OF CONTRACT VERBS. 275 


2. eb T@ VIdcKXOLTS TH, OVTOTE epedSeTO, if (ever) he . 


made a promise to any one, he never broke his word. 


a. Observe that: 1. The protasis implies the occasional or 


repeated fulfilment of the condition, and the apodosis states what 
‘happens if the supposition ever is fulfilled. 2. The protasis 
takes the subjunctive with éav, and the apodosis has the present 
indicative. 


6. Observe that when the apodosis as in 2, denotes a con- 


tinued or repeated act in the past, the protasis following ‘the 


: 


sequence of moods (578), has the optative with ei, and the 


-apodosis states then what did happen if ever the supposition was 





fulfilled. 


Present and Past General Suppositions. 


RUuLgE. 


681. When a protasis states a present or past suppo- 


‘sition implying the occasional or repeated fulfilment of 
‘the condition, it has the subjunctive with édv after the 
present indicative in the apodosis, and the optative with 
ei after the imperfect indicative in the apodosis. 


a. In the apodoses of general conditions, any form denoting 
present or past repetition may be used. ‘Thus, for the present 


the gnomic aorist may be used; for the imperfect, the imperfect 
and aorist with dv (679) frequently occur, and sometimes the 
simple aorist with ‘ often,’ ‘ never,’ etc. 


682, The subjunctive in general conditions never 
refers distinctly to the future, but expressing indefinite 
frequency, assumes the fulfilment of the condition at any 
time. | 


276 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


683. Give the synopses of the present system of tunae, 
Boda, paw, Trovéw, prr€éw, Soxéw, picOda, Snrdw. 


684. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. kpdrucra av paxoipefa. 2. Kdéapyos édv- 
Adrrero pn Soxoin devyew. 3. Kupov airapev mota, 
¢€ b) 4 1 2N es / b 
ws atroT\éwpev. 4. Eav ol ApyovTEs pécov ExwoL TO 

Sater ekg 3 > , > v4 > , c 4 
avTav, ev achareotate cioi. 5. e0€hopev ws TaxXLoTa 
mopeverOar eis tHhv “EhAdda, ei Bovderar Kdéapyos 
admdyev. 6. e Kredvwp nOerte yyetcOa, ererbar 
> weAMe 4 ¥ > “ ‘ i“ x 
ait@ éBovdero. 7. € Tis aiT@ havepds yiyvo.ro Sewds 
@v apxwv, del treiw Tpooedidov. 8. émevd7y dé KUpos 
> , \ e A > / Y 3 , > , 
exade, LaBov vas eropevdounv, wa wpedoinv avrov. 
9. Kal et Tis avT@ SoKolin TaV Tpds TOUTO * TeTAypPEVwY 
KQKOS ELVAL, AUTOV ETALOEV GV. 

II. 1. Let us try to conquer. 2. We will be on 
our guard lest we seem to flee. 3. If (ever) any one 
does me a favor or an injury, I try to surpass? him. 
4. If (ever) any one sent gifts to him, he distributed 
them to his friends. 5. If Cyrus wishes to be a friend 
to any one, he is most able to benefit him. 6. If (ever) 
there was a force on both sides of them, they were in 
the safest place. 


685. dpa, together, like [a- for oa- (498, obs. 4*), ap- 
for oap-], sem-, sim-. d-Opd-0-s (Opdos, noise), in a 
noisy crowd, in a body; a&0poila, collect, assemble; a-gras, 
all together; dpa, adv., at ‘the same time, together ; 
ap-aga, -ns (cf. R. dy-, 513), wagon with two connected 


1 Cf. p. 828. 2 For this purpose. 3 wiKd@. 






FUTURE CONDITIONS. 277 


ferics; four-wheeled wagon ; dpaki-ro-s, -o-v, passable by 
wagons ; app-dpagta, -ns (cf. R. ap-, fit, 764), covered 


carriage ; pss, -y, -ov, one and the same ; opov, adv., 


together, at once ; dps, con)., all the same, nevertheless ; 
e ld 2? ¥ e 7 
-6pd-Aoyo-s, -o-v (A€yw |Aey-], say), agreeing ; opo-Aoyé-w, 
agree, confess ; op.0-0-s, -a, -ov, like ; opotws, adv., in 
Like manner, alike ; 6pa-do-s, -y, -o-v, even, level ; omar 


hos, adv., evenly. 
sem-per, adv., always ; simili-s, adj., Ake, resembling ; 


-sin-guli, adj., oue to each, single ; seme-l, adv., once ; 
-simu-l, adv., at the same time. 


SAME, SOME; hom-ily, homo-geneous, homo-logous, 


-homoeo-pathy, hom-onym, hom-onymous, etc. 


LESSON Lx. 
FUTURE CONDITIONS. 


Review Lessons X LIX. and L., noting 552, 557, 559, 


563, 565, 566, 567, 579, 581, 589. 


686. Future Conditions. 

Examine the following : 

1. édv pou recOnre, TyunOyoerVe bd Kvpov, if you 
obey me, you will be honored by Cyrus. 

2. éav dé pr) YKapev, Tavta toie, but if we shall not 
come, do these things. | 


a. Observe that: 1. The apodosis in 1 takes the future in- 
dicative whose action depénds upon the accomplishment of some 
future event; the protasis has the subjunctive with av to express 


278 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


this future supposition} vividly or with expectation of fulfilment. 
2. The apodosis in 2 takes the imperative for the regular 
future. | 

6. Observe that the adverb dv, although modifying the verb, 
attaches itself to the conditional particle as in general conditions 
(677). 

c. Observe that the protasis is translated in English by the 
present or by shall or will. 


RULE. 


687. When a supposed future case is stated vividly, 
implying probability of the fulfilment of the condition, 
the protasis has the subjunctive with ay, and the apod- 
osis has the future indicative or some other form ex- 
pressing future time. 

The protasis is translated by the present indicative or 
by shall or will. 


688. In the apodoses of future conditions, the im- 
perative, infinitive, hortatory, and prohibitive subjunctive 
may be used as equivalent expressions for the future 
indicative. In fact, any clause or phrase that expresses 
future time may be so used. 


689. Examine the following: 

1. Kupos €Bovdevero mas Gv Thy paynv TovoiTo, 
Cyrus was planning how he should make the battle. 

2. € euot Soins imméas xtAlovs, TOUS TOV TOhELioV 
e s , » . : 
umméas KaTakavouu av, if you should give me a thousand 
horsemen, I would cut down the horsemen of the enemy. 


1 The future conditions are ideal conditions as the present and past are 
fixed 


FUTURE CONDITIONS. 279 


3. «i viK@pev, ovdéva av KaTakdvoiper, if we were to 
conquer, we should kill no one. 


a. Observe that the apodoses of these conditions: have the 
same form as has the potential optative in 1, and like it, express 
possibility ; that the protasis has the optative with e¢ to express 
the supposed case less vividly than the subjunctive (567) or as 
_ possible. 

6. Observe that these conditions are translated by should, 
would, were to, ete. 


Conditions possible.’ Apodosis in the optative with av. 


RULE. ‘ 


690. When a supposed future case is stated less viv- 
idly, without implying expectation of its fulfilment, the 
protasis has the Splatn gs: with e«, and the apodosis has 
the optative with dv. 


The condition is translated by should, would, were to, ete. 


691. It is the mood, not the tense as in Latin, that 
determines the condition. The subjunctive regularly 
follows primary tenses in the principal clause, and the 
optative follows secondary (578) and the optative mood. 

692. av is used with the ‘subjunctive to represent 
the condition as dependent upon circumstances or as 
assumed. Hence it is also used to express indefinite 
frequency (if ever, as often as). Whenever av is used 
in a dependent clause it is always closely attached to 
the particle or relative, with which it is often united, as 
in €av, orav, everday (677). 


1 The future conditions may be also distinguished respectively as more 
and less vivid, or less remote and more remote. 


yA 


280 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


693. QUESTIONS. 


1. What does the optative standing alone in a sen- 
tence express? What would it express with ef? with 
ap? | 

2. What does the first person of the subjunctive 
standing alone in a sentence expressP What would it 
express with édy? with wa, dozas, etc. 

3. How does the present general condition differ in 
form from the future probable ? 

4. How does the past general condition differ in 
form from the future possible ? 

5. Which is the principal clause of a conditional 
sentence P 


694. EXERCISES. 


[. 1. ydpuv oor ay exourer Suxaiws. 2. éav dé py 
6160 TavTa, Hyewova ait Kv 3. é€ayv Kado 
@ TavTa, Hyenova aitHoonev Kipov. 3. é€ayv Kados 
, 24? a , ¢ A , mA 
Katampatw ép a oTparevouar, twas Katd&w oikade. 
4. € mapa Tovs 6pKous eAvE TAS oTOVdas, THY SiknV 
¥y 2 > U4 Lal 1 > no e€ , 
exer. 5. ef addrdous payeiobe,' ev THdE Hepa KaTa- 
/ NES LA > x A > 93 4 > v4 2 
KoTmjoerbe. 6. Kat Huiv y ay Tadr éroie, ei Edpa” 
yeas péverv TtapacKkevalopevovs. 7. ei Suoydlovs 
Eévouvs hd Bor, mepvyévoiro av Tov avtTicTaciwrav.® 
¥ , , é ry ae ae aA e , 2S) a A 
8. et Tis ye TL avT@ Kaos UaNpEeTHoOEEV, Gel ETVEL. 
> > a 
9. 00d’ * ei didos Kai maTds cot yevoiunv, @ Kdpe, col 


1 The future is sometimes used for the subjunctive in a protasis as a 
still more vivid form of expression, especially in appeals to the feelings, and 
in threats and warnings. e 

2 Cf. 649, a. 8 Cf. 385. 

* otf limits dd€ayur, why ? 


FUTURE CONDITIONS. 281 


| SES. » § $4 10 NE KN e ae > 

yf av rote ere SdE aun. . kal éav 9 mpakis 9 Tapa- 
mdnoia oiamep' Kat mpdober éxpyto tots E€vois, érd- 

pela Kal nets. 


II. 1. They will not proceed, unless some one shall 
give them money. 2. But if he shall not even givea 
guide, let us fall into battle line as soon as possible. 
3- But if he shall flee, we will deliberate there about 
these things. 4. If we should: follow, we would follow 
zealous and friendly to him. 5. But we would proceed 
homeward, if no one should hinder us. 6. But he plans 
that he may be king instead of his brother, if he shall 
be able. 


695. VOCABULARY. 

AVTL-OTATLOTNS, -Ov, One of a battle line, fall into bat- 
the opposite party, oppo- tle line [syntax]. _ 
nent [ardors, faction |. éxet, adv., there, in that place. 

oloc-mEp,-amrep,-ovrrep, just jm-Sé, adv. and conj., dut 
as, such as, ete. not, and not, nor, Lat. 

kara-1patTo, accomplish. meque, NCC; NE... gul- 

Tepi-yiyvomat, be superior, dem, not even. 
conquer. more, indef. encl. adv., at 

ovrv-Tatto, draw up in ar- some or any time, once, 
ray, marshal ; mid., form ever. See pyrrore. 


696. R. «pa-, cre- cer-, do, make. avto-Kpd-tap, 
-op-os, 0, 7 (cf. avrds, se/f), one’s own master ; Kp&t-os, 
-€-0s, TO (kpa + 7-), strength, might ; kparé-w, be strong, 


1 otamep for otavmep (438, 2; 439; 261). 


282 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


conquer ; Kpeittwv, -ov (for Kper-iwv), comp., stronger, 
mightier, better ; Kparsoro- Ss, ~, -ov, sup., strongest, 
mightiest, best ; yee -€s, in the power of, in pos 
session of. 

Cer-és, -er-is, f., Ceres (‘ goddess of creation ’), goddess 
of agriculture; cre-6, create; cré-sc-6, come into being, 
tucrease ; in-cré-mentu-m, n., growth; cré-ber, adj. 
(made to increase), frequent, numerous ; cor-pu-s, -or-is, 
n., body. | 

Harp; auto-erat, aristo-crat, aristo-cracy, demo- 
crat, demo-cracy, pluto-crat, pluto-cracy, etc. 


LESSON LXI. 


VERBS OF THE EIGHTH CLASS.— RELATIVE 
AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 


Review 178, 184, 351, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,6; 515, 516, 
517, 530, 544, 545, 649, 654, 655, 663, 664, 668, 681, 
687, 690, 692. 


* 

697. A few verbs have ei- in the perfect instead of — 
the reduplication (304) : 

1. AapBavw (AaB), take, ethnda, ethnppac. 

2. éyw, collect (in composition), -eihoya, -eiheypat 
or -éheypa. 

3. [pe, 698, 2], etpnxa, have said, cipnua. 


698. Lighth Class (Mixed Class). Verbs of this 
class form their different tense systems from essentially 
different themes. 


RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 283 


* 

Examine the following : 

1! aipéw (aipe-, €d-), take. 

aipyjow, ethov' (eda, etc.), npnKka, npnuat, npeOnv.? 

2. elmov® (én- elm-, Ep- pe), said. | 

€p@, elov (elm, etc., imv. el7é), ElpyKa, elpnuat, 
2 , 4 
eppyndnv. 

3. epyopa.” (epx-, EAvO-, €hO-), go, come. 

HAGov (imy. €dPé),° EAnjdvOa.! : 

4. dpdw (dpa-, td-, d7-), see. Impf. édpwv.® 

oyopat, etdov' [id-, FLd-, Efvdov | (ide, etc., imv. idé), 
édpaka and édpaka, edpayar and dupa, opOnv. 

‘5. tpéxo (Tpex-, Spap-), run. 

Spapodpat, COpapov,-Oedpaunka,’ -Sedpaunpar. 

6. dépw (dep-, oi-, éve-, eveyx-"°), bear. 

¥ ¥ il d ¥ > iP . Bios 2 

Olow, NVEeyKa” and nveyKov, Evnvoya, Evnveypat, 
nvexOnv. - 

699. Relative and Temporal Clauses. 

Relative clauses may be introduced by relative pro- 
nouns or by relative adverbs of time, place, or manner. 
They include in their construction temporal clauses. 

1 Cf. 649. 2 Cf. 520. 

8 Cf. 530. The present and imperfect are supplied in Attic by Aeya, 
npi, ete. The theme of eizov was originally Fer, contracted from é-eemov 
(for ¢-Fe-Femov, reduplicated, 533, obs.*). - 4 See 193. 

5 Future in Attic supplied by eiuc (739, 3). 

6 Compounds of oxytone imperatives are regular; as amedOe. 

7 See 545. 

8 Cf. 649,a. The syllabic augment takes the rough breathing from the 
theme. ® Cf. 522. - 


10 A nasal is inserted as in verbs of the fifth class (633). 
41 Aorist irregularly formed without o. 12 Cf. 545. 


284 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


5 4 


700. A relative clause with a definite antecedent 
takes the indicative or any other construction that could 
occur in a simple sentence. Its negative is ob (183, 1, 
2,3; 184). 

701. A relative clause with an indefinite antecedent 
(general or not yet determined) has the force of a prota- 
sis of a conditional sentence, and is called a conditional 
relative clause. Its negative therefore is j.%. 


702. Hxamine the following : 

1. or@ doxei radra, AeEdtw, to whomsoever these things 
scem best, let him speak (= €t tw Soxet radra, eEdra, 
663). . 
2. ovs ewpa eVédovtas Kivduvevev, TOvTOUS a.pyov- 
tas emote, he made those whom he saw willing to incur 
danger commanders (= et twas édpa, etc., 663). 

3. 60 dvnp Toddov akios didos, @! dv didos 7, the 
man is a valuable Sricnd to whomsoever he ws a Je 
(= édy To piros 7 7H, etc., stil 

4. éreutre yap Bixovs olvov, ordre wavy Hdvv Aa Bou, 
Jor he was accustomed to send jars of wine whenever he 
received any very sweet (= et tore, etc., if ever, 681). 

5. OTe pn €Bovdero Sovva, ovK av vaécryxero,” he 
would not have promised what he did not wish to give 
(= et ru pr) EBovdero, etc., 668). | 

6. T@ Hyeudre TiaTEVT ope dv av Kdpos d@, we will 
trust the guide (any guide) whom Cyrus will give (687). 

7. €medav duampdEopar a déouar, n&w, when I shall 
have accomplished what I wish, I will return (687). 


+ The definite relative for the indefinite. 3 2 This form is rare. 


RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 285 


8. hoBoipnv § av ro wyyendr @ Soin erecOu, T 
should fear to follow the guide whom he would give (690). 


a. Observe that a conditional relative clause is introduced by 
a relative or relative adverb instead of the particle e¢, 7/; that in 
other respects they are like the ordinary conditions, the antecedent 
clause forming the apodosis. 

6. Observe that dv is attached to the relative word (692) ; 
that these clauses can usually be changed to the pate condi- 
tions by resolving the relative word or the same with dv, into She 
conjunction ec or é€av with tis, 1,2, 3, 4, etc. 


Rue. 


703. A relative clause with an indefinite antecedent 
has a conditional force, and may take the form of any 
of the ordinary conditions (661 ff.), of which the antece- 
dent clause is the apodosis. 


704. Temporal clauses with ews, éote, mex pl, Ay pt. 

- Examine the following : ; 

1. eas p&voper abrod oxoretv Set d7ws aadadéorara 
pevopev, as long as we remain here, we must CORRE 
how we shall remain most safely. 

2. €mrodeue tots Opaki péxpe Kopos deyOn rod 
otpatevpatos, he continued to make war upon the Thra- 
crans until Cyrus needed the army. 

3. €ws av apy Tis, Kp@par, as long as any one is 
with me, I make use of his services. 

4. péxp. 8 av eyed yw, at orovdal pevovTwr, until 
L shall have returned, let the treaty remain. 

5. meppevorey dv adypr adixouro K)éapyos, ts 
. would wait until Clearchus should arrive. 


286 THE BEGINNER'S GREBK BOOK. 


a. Observe that ay is attached to the particle as m 692. 

6. Observe that when é€ws, éore, péxpt, etc., as long as, 
while, or until, 1, 2, refer to a definite time. present or past, they - 
take the indicative; that when they refer to an indefinite time, 
they take the construction of conditional relatives in general con- 
ditions, conditions contrary to fact (rare), and future conditions, 
3, 4, 5. : 


RULE. 


705. When ews, eore, wéxpl, axpt, as long as, until, 
refer to a definite time, they take the indicative; other- 
wise they follow the constructions of conditional relatives 
(703), in general conditions, conditions contrary to fact, 
and future conditions. 


706. Temporal clauses with mpi, before, until. 

Examine the following : | 

1. &u€Bynoav mpiv rods ahdovs droxpivacOa, they 
crossed before the others replied. 

2. ovTe Tadra éroiow amply Kéapyos Fee, nor did 
they do these things until Clearchus.came. 

3. ov Katalioe pos Tovs avTLOTaTLMTas TpLV 
av Kipw avpBovredonra, he will not make peace 
with his opponents until he shall have consulted with 
Cyrus. 

A. ov Tpoabev ratoerat, mp av adrods karaydyn 
oixade, he will not cease before he shall have restored 
them to their homes. | 

5. obk dy mpdrepov dpyyoaiwro, mply ta éavrov 
Tapackevacavro, they would not set out before thew 
own affairs were all ready. 


RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 287 


a. Observe that in 1, mpiv, before, depending upon an affir- 
mative sentence expresses a simple temporal relation, and takes 
the infinitive. 

6. Observe that in 2, 3, 4, 5, mpi, until, before, depending 
upon a negative sentence, expresses a limit of time like éws, and 
takes the same constructions (705). 

ce. - Observe that in 4, 5, wporepov and mpdaGev precede piv 
in the leading clause, but are superfluous in English. 


RUvtugE. 


707. piv regularly takes the infinitive when the 
leading verb is affirmative; and the constructions of ews 
when the leading verb is negative or implies a negative. 


a. tpiv or mplv 7 is often preceded by wpdrepov or mpdabev 
in the leading clause. 


708. EXERCISES, 


I. 1. of 8 eel atrods mpotdouer, duioravto. 2. mue- 


, N A ¥ A ¥ 
Copevos bd THY oikoL’ avTLaTACLWwTOY EPXETAL POS 


\ A ae. eA \ S 6. A. Oe NN 
Tov Kupov. 3. aipnoopat vas Kal ov vyiv OTL” ay 
dé) tmeicopa. A. » 5é Kittooa idovoa thy rd€éwv 
“A 4 > 4 \ > 4 ¢ rs 
TOU maeeiy atpare. 5. THv ehevOepiav €Xoi- 
pny av av? av® exe mavrav. 6. Kupos d€ exer ovs 
, , 
eipnka opparo a7 Xdpdewy. 7. LYodaiverov, E€vov 
, > an ¢ 
ovTa Kal ToUTOV, Exédevoe avdpas AaBovTa €Oety ort 
, a Be , , a 

mreiotous. 8. detrar avrov* pn mpdcbev Kataddoat 


‘\ ‘\ > ? \ x > “os 4 
MpOs TOUS AYTLOTAGLWTAS TPLY ay avT@ OvpBovrevoNTAL. 


1 Force of an attributive, 79, b. 

2 Se. macyew. 8 See 438, 2; 439. 

* Cf. 340. When déonae means request, it may take gen. of the person 
and acc. of the thing, or the infinitive. 


288 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


9. 6 8 avnp' xaderdratos éyOpis @ Gv Tod€mLos 7. 
10. tpas yp dvaByvar tov Eidhparyny torapov piv 
OnAov eivat OTL of GAdot “EAANves arroKpivodvTar Kipo. 
ll. 6 & dvdpi Exdorm Sdoe TévTE apyupiov pvas 
emmy eis BaBviava nkwor, Kal TOV purbov evTEhH MEX pL 
dv Kataoctyon Tovs “Eddnvas eis “Iwviay madu. 
12. é€yo yap dKvoiny pev Gv eis Ta trota EuBaivew 
ad np doin, py Has Tats vavol” Edy? 13. ov mpo- 
TEPOV TpOS Nas EeTo\eunoav Tpilv Kad@s TA EavTOV 
Taper KevacavTo. 

II. 1. He said these things. 2. He would run for 
victory. 3. All the cities chose Cyrus instead of Tissa- 
phernes. 4. You will take provisions whenever we do 
not furnish a market. 5. I will obey the man whom 
you shall choose. 6. But Menon, before it was evi- 
dent what the rest of the soldiers would do, spoke as 
follows, 


709. VOCABULARY. 
évtedns, -€s, at the end; mpo-opaw, see in front, 
complete, full [réXos]. before. 
dv-iornmt,set apart; tostand emedév [éredy + dv], 
apart, open the ranks. temp. conj. w. subj., 
melo [med-], méow, éri- as soon as, whenever, 
exa, emieoOnv, to press, after. 
crowd ; pass., to be hard énav or éewyy [| éwet + av], 
pressed, oppressed. temp. con}. w. subjunc- 


1 What verb must be understood ? 
2 Cf. 249. 3 Cf. 579, a. 


Ct otrtson Le re 2 ae 





RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 289 


tive, whenever, when, as mpiv, temp. conj., before, 


S00n as. until; Lat., priusguam. 

_Omore, conj., adv., when, mporepos, -a, -ov, former, 
whenever, since, because; previous, sooner; neut. 
Lat., cum, quando. as adv., previously. 


: €xOpos, -a, -dv, hostile, unfriendly ; 6 €xOpos, foe, private 


enemy ; Lat., hostis, inimicus. 

6 mod€uros, public enemy, enemy in war ; often mod€uor, 
the enemy. at. hostés. 

deidw, to fear, deliberate and reasonable fear. 

doBéowat, to fear, instanstaneous and inconsiderate 
fear. } 


_éxvew, to fear, dread, hesitate, shrink from, in a moral 


sense. 


710. paxk-, mac-, mag-, have power, be great. pax-pé-s, 
-d, -dv, long; padx-ap, -ap-os, 0, y, powerful, wealthy, 
happy, blessed; pakapilw, esteem happy ; pakapioto-s, 
-y, -ov, be deemed happy, enviable; pf\k-os, -€0s, TO, 
length ; pnx-avy, -Ns, means, device, machine ; a-pHx- 
avo-s, -ov, without means, impracticable, impossible ; wéy- 
a-s, weya-hyn, peya, great, powerful; peyados, greatly ; 
pettwv, -ov (for pey-iwv), comp., greater ; péy-.0T0-s, -, 
-ov, sup., greatest. 

mag-nu-s, adj., great; maior (for mag-ior), ad}., 
greater ; maximu-s (for mag-simu-s), adj., greatest ; 
mag-is, adv. (for mag-ius), more ; mag-is-ter, -tri, m., 
master. 

MAY, MAKE, MIGHT, MUCH, MORE, MOST, MANY, MAIN; 


-macro-cosm, machine, mechanic, 0-mega. 
19 


290 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


7X1. Additional Forces are collected by Aristippus 
and Others. 


Review 238, ws (241), 245, 269, 369, 5; 385, 675. 

10. ’Apiotummos 5€ 6 @errahos E€vos dv ervyxavev 
avT@, Kal mueComevos' UTO TOV OlKOL aYTLOTATLMTOV 
¥ Q QA la \ > “A } oe, > ys! 4 
EpxeTar Tpos TOV Kvpov kat aitet avrov eis” ducyudLovs 
Eévous*® kai Tpiav pynvov* pucbdv, ws ovTw TeEpLyevd- 

5 A > a ee - , 

pevos? Gv TOV avtictaciwTay. 6 d€ Ktpos didwow 

ae te a A . 
avT@ els TEeTPaKLTyXLAiovs Kal E€ pHnvov pucbdr, Kat 
detrar avTov pn mpdcber Karaddoat Tpds TOUS avTiCTa- 

, <> oh 2 A , 9 Q. tgieh ag 
olwras Tply av avT@ ovpBovrevontar. ovTw dé ad TO 
ev @errahia ehavOaver avo Tpepdopevor * l 

0 aVEV AUT@ TpEpopevov * oTpaTevjpa. 

1]. Ipd&evor dé tov Bovdriov, E€vov dvta abto, éxé- 
hevoe AaBdvTa avdpas ort TrEioTOvs TapayeverOau,® 
ws eis Iicidas BovdAdpevos otparever Oar. Lodaiverov 
Se \ ts \ 4 a , , 
é Tov Yruphadioy Kal Lwxparynv Tov “Ayardv, E€vous 
* X , > la ¥ 4 > “~ 
ovTas Kal TovTous, ekédevoevy avdpas AaBdvTas é€Oety 
Y , e , 7 , a n 
OTL TAELaTOUS, WS TokEUHOwWY' TicTadepver TV TOS 
dvydo. Tov Mutnoiwv. Kal éroiovy ovTws ovToL. 


1 What does mueCopevos express ? 

2 eis when used with numerals is a preposition (p. 119%). 

8 For E€vous kai pio ov cf. 267, 11. 

* Syntax ?P 

5 crepryevouevos av, participle in the so-called indirect discourse (776) : 
saying that thus he could overcome, etc. In the direct form, mepryevoipany 
dv, etc. ; cf. 694, 6; 648, n. 1; ovrw implies the protasis. 

6 rapayeveorba is compounded of what ? 

7 Force of wodenpnowy? Use of as? 


RELATIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE, CAUSE, ETC. 29] 





LESSON LEXI. 


IRREGULAR VERBS IN mw.— SUBSTITUTIONS 
FOR CONDITIONS. — RELATIVE CLAUSES 
OF PURPOSE, CAUSE, AND RESULT. 


Review 103, 1, 2, 3, 4; 104, 1, 2; 117, 118, 119, 
120, 121, 236, 2, 5, 6; 287, 289, 300, 324, 573, 579, 
617, 619, 661. 


712. Irregular verbs in jw follow the analogy of the 
regular verbs in pe in the present and second aorist 
systems (617), but are more or less irregular in forma- 
tion. Most of them, however, lack the second aorist 
system entirely. 

713. Conjugate epi (859). 


ce > »y > 
a. eivat is for éo-vat; wv for écor. 


714. Conjugate dnt [da-], say (858). ° 


a. Note that it is inflected in the main like fornuc (619). 
6. All the forms of the present indicative are enclitic, except 


ons. 


715. Substitution for Conditions. 

The place of a protasis may be supplied by a partici- 
ple (236, 6), by a preposition and its case, or implied 
in an adverb or some other form of expression (711, N. 5, 
end). When a participle takes the place of the protasis, 
its tense is always the same as that which the verb itself 


292 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


would have had in the indicative, subjunctive, or opta- 
tive. ‘The present includes the imperfect. E. g. 

Kal ovY vey meV GV Einv Tiptos, Duav dé Epnwos av 
ovK av ixavos ein av pitov wpehnoa, and with you (if 
I should remain with you) J should be honored, but being 
separated from you (e&... env, ff I should be, etc.) I 
should not be able to assist a friend. 

716. Relative clauses expressing Purpose. 

The relative with the future indicative may express a 
purpose. Its negative is yy. HE. g. 

nyenova aiter Kipov ootis dia gidias THS Yopas 
amage, he asks Cyrus for a guide who will lead them 
back (to lead back) through a friendly country. 


a. After verbs of motion purpose is regularly expressed by 
the future participle (236, 5). 


717. Causal Clauses. 

Clauses denoting cause or reason are regularly ex- 
pressed by the conjunctions with the indicative after 
both primary and secondary tenses. ‘The most common 
causal conjunctions are ort, ws, because; émet, €medy, 
7] euny ‘ . : 3 
ore, ordre, since. The negative is ov. EH. g. 

A 4, bd a , a lal , 
pn Oavpalere dr. yader@s hépw Tots Tapovar Tpday- 
pac, do not wonder because I am greatly distressed on 
account of the present affairs. 


a. For causes expressing another’s reason, see (788). 
6. Cause is frequently expressed by the participle (236, 2). 


718. Clauses of Result with oore. 
Examine the following : 


RELATIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE, CAUSE, ETC. 293 


¥ \ , + e a ME 7 “A 
_ L. €yw yap tpinpes wore ede 70 Exeivav tortor, for 
I have triremes, (so as to take) so that I can take their boat. 
; ‘N e ra 7 > ~ a“ 7 
2. Kal ) PYTHP TuveTpatTey avTw TavTa, woTe Ba- 





otheds THY ev TPOS EavTov EemLBovhyv ovK ynoOavero, 
and his mother was co-operating with him in this, so that 
the king did not become aware of the plot against himself. 


Observe that: 1. ‘The infinitive is used with @ore to express 
the result as one which the action of the leading verb i to 
produce; that wove here is regularly translated so as. 2. The 
indicative is used with wore to express the result as one ode the 
action of the leading verb does really produce or states it as a 
fact, and hence its negative is od. 


RUueE. 


719. wore, so that, so as, with the infinitive ex- 
presses the result as one which the action of the leading 
verb tends to produce, with the indicative as one which 
that action really does produce. 


a. In Greek the result clause never has the subjunctive. 


720. Indirect Discourse. 

A direct quotation gives the exact words of the origi- 
nal speaker or writer; as, The king will come at dawn. 
In an indirect quotation or question, the original words 
conform to» the construction of the sentence in which 
they are quoted; as, He said that the king would come 
at dawn (cf. 267, 5). 

721. As a verbal neuter noun, the infinitive may be 
the subject or object of a verb; it is qualified by 
adverbs, and not by adjectives. 


294 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


1. As subject, the infinitive is used chiefly with im- 
personal verbs ; as ypy, det, 2¢ 1s necessary, or with €ori 
(117, 1; 118). | 

2. As object, the infinitive is used chiefly with verbs 
whose action implies another action as its object (119). 

3. With the article the infinitive becomes more dis- 
tinctly a noun, and it may be used in either of the above 
relations, or may depend upon a preposition, or stand 
in most constructions belonging to nouns: i.e. 7p€av 
tov duaBaivew (648, N. 2). 

722. The infinitive in indirect discourse is used as 
the object of verbs of saying or thinking, or equivalent 
expressions, and represents an indicative or optative of 
the direct discourse. 

Examine the following : | 

l. ot orpariorat KaTeKornoav vTd TOV Kidixor, the 
soldiers were cut down by the Cilicians. 

2. ehacay Tovs OTpaTLaTas KaTaKoTHVaL UTd TOV 
Kidixwr, they said that the soldiers had been cut down by 
the Cilicians. 

3. mpos Tovtov BovrAopar edOeiv, L desire to go to 
this one. | 

4. mpods Tovrov edn BovreoOar éOety, he said that he 
desired to go to this one. 

5. vm éuov noixyntar, he has been wronged by me. 

6. vopilovor avtov vm euod HnoducnoOa, they believe 
that he has been wronged by me. | | 

7. ovv vp av etnv Tinos, with you I should be m 
honor. 


RELATIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE, CAUSE, ETC. 295 


8. ody dpi Gv oipar eivar Tiymos, with you I think I 
should be in honor. 

9. €av karos tpaka, ov tpocbev Tavcopar piv av 
bas Katayayw oikade, if I shall be successful, I will not 
cease before I shall have restored you to your homes. 


10. tméoyero avrots, et Kak@s mpd€eev, od tpdaberv 
mavocecOar mpiv avTovs KaTaydyo. oiKade, he promised 
them that if he should be successful, he would not cease 
before he should have restored them to their homes. 

1l. rovro 7d Tetyos Bactdéws ehéyero hudakny dr- 
Ndrrev, it was said that a garrison of the king was guard- 
ing this wall. 


12. rovro 7O Tetyos Baorhéws ehéyero hudaky du- 
Narrewv, this wall a garrison of the king was said to be 
guarding. 


a. Observe that in 1, 3, 5, 7, the words of the original 
speaker are given; that in 2, 4, 6, 8, the sentences represent 
the words of the original speaker changed to conform to the con- 
struction of the verb upon which they depend (720). 

6. Observe that in 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, the infinitives depending 
upon a verb of saying, thinking, etc., represent the verbs of the 
direct discourse, and their tenses the corresponding tenses of the 
finite moods, the present including the imperfect, and the perfect 
the pluperfect. 

c. Observe that the leading verb of the complex sentence in 
9, is changed to the same tense of the infinitive in indirect dis- 
course ; that after a secondary tense the verbs of the subordinate 
clauses are changed to the optative (578). 

d. Observe that ay qualifying the main verb of the direct is 
retained in the indireéteZ, 8, but av attached to the particle is 


296 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


dropped when the subjunctive is changed to the optative in the 
indirect 9, 10. 

e. Observe that indirect discourse frequently audlved a 
change of person, chiefly of the first and second to the third, 
3, 4,' 9, 10. 

J. Observe that in 12, Aéyerae may take the personal con- 
struction for the impersonal (246, 247). 


RULE. 


723. 1. The infinitive in indirect discourse is used 
as. the object of verbs of saying or thinking, or equiv- 
alent expressions.” Here each tense of the infinitive 
represents the tense of the leading verb which would be 
used in the direct form, the present and perfect includ- 
ing the imperfect and pluperfect. If the original had 
av, the infinitive retains it. 

2. The negative od of the finite verb is regularly 
retained in the indirect, but it is sometimes changed to 
py, the regular negative of the infinitive. 

3. After primary tenses, dependent verbs in indirect 
discourse retain the same mood and tense; after sec- 
ondary tenses, they may be either changed to the same 


tense of the optative or retained in the original mood and - 


tense (579, a); but dependent secondary tenses * of the 
indicative remain unchanged. - 


1 Tn indirect discourse the subject of the sentence (6) seems to be put 
in the accusative as the grammatical object of the reporting verb, while the 
verb of the predicate is changed to the corresponding tense of the infinitive 
as a verbal noun, and the construction assumes the form of two accusatives 
after the same verb (268). 

2 Nouns denoting hope, thought, emotion, combinations of words ex- 


pressing thought, etc. 
® If these were changed they might be aghTidea with the subjunctive. 
j 


? 


RELATIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE, CAUSE, ETC. 297 


a. When a subjunctive becomes optative av is dropped. 


724. Verbs of hoping, expecting, promising, etc., allow 
either the object infinitive or the infinitive in indirect 
discourse. But in the latter construction the future 
infinitive is more common. | 

725. éyow, especially in the passive ; Soxéw, seems ; 
and a few others, while allowing either the personal or 
impersonal construction, are regularly used personally. 

726. EXERCISES. 

7 ‘ \ ec 4, x / 3 A ‘ 

I. 1. ovrw yap Kat emopevor av dihor aiT@ Kat 

, € , 3 N € PR sy ¥ 
mpodvpor eroipefa. 2. ov yap jpets* exeivov e€ru 
OTpaTiOTat, eTEl ye ov ovveToucla aviT@. 3. Erépous 
nyeuovas emeupev ot avtovs, €av omovdal yévwrTat, 
»¥ ¥ Y, \ : , > rn 
afovow elev eLovor ta emitydeva. 4. aduketoOar 
voile vp Hav’ wore kal perarentopevou avrov ovK 
eéw eetv. 5. cot doxodpev imméwv trHOovs azro- 

lal x c lal 2 Aw ¥ , e nw 
pew 19 omditav; 6." tovTo wero tomnoev 6 Kipos 

\ > , e Ss’ ¥ , 3 \3 , 
Tov ABpoxouav. 7. 0 0 ovre mpdrepoy ovdevi® Kpeir- 

ec la > A“ > “ Y 3 , ‘ 
Tove E€avTov els yxetpas Efe Eby. 8. evdmile yap 
y 4 A ¥ , > , A 
dow* Garrov €hOor, TorovTw dtapacevotépw Bacire 
paxetoOa. 9. of d€ dacw ovd’, ei BovdrA10, SivacBa 
&v amodovvaL O7a UTLTYXVEL. 

II. 1. Cyrus so treated ° the satraps that they were 
more friendly to him than to the king. 2.° For he 
thought that on this day the king would not fight. 


1 What verb must be understood ? 

2 Let the pupil give the direct form of the following sentences. 

8 With ets xetpas eXOeiv (225). * See 386. 5 ScariOnpu. 

6 Let the pupil first give the direct form of the following sentences, and 
then change them to indirect, 723, 1, 2, 3, etc. - 


298 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


3. And he said that Abrocomas, an enemy, was at the 
Euphrates river. 4. For I think you are both my 
friends and allies. 5. He said that he should fear to 
follow the guide whom Cyrus would give, 


727. R. da-, fa-, show, shine. y-pt, declare, say ; 
da-cx-w, say, allege; a-o1-s, -€-ws, , saying ; mpo- 
dhaci-s, -e-ws, 7, pretence, pretext; da-vh, -ns, sound, 
voice, language; gaivw [da + v], bring to hight, show, 
cause to shine; hav-epd-s, -a, -d-v, open to sight, visible ; 
dhavepas, adv., evidently; a-pav-ys, -és, out of sight, 
invisible, ; Kata-hav-ns, -€s, in pluin sight. 

for, say ; fa-ma, -ae, f., report; fa-s,n., dwime right. 

BAN, BANNS, pro-phet, pro-phesy, phase, em-phasis, 
phenomenon, phantasm. 


7 28. Cyrus assembles his Forces at Sardis. 


Review 106, 146, 212, 399, 648, 675, 711. 

1. *Exret & €86xe adt@ Hn Topever Oat ava, Thy pev* 
mpopacw émoetro ws” Iluridas Bovddpevos exBadety 
: A , \ 9 , € 8 9 _\ , , 
€k THS Xopas* Kat aOpoile ws” eri TovTovs TO TE Bap- 

\ \ \ X , q b] las 4 \ 
Bapixdv kat 76 “Eddnvixdy otparevpa. evtad0a* Kat 


Tapayyedha TO TE Kdedpyw aBdort. yeew ooov Hv 


te! , \ n° , , 5 
avT@ oTpaTevpa, Kal T@ Aplotin7@ ovvaddrayerTL 


N \ ¥ Sts , \ € \ A 9 , 
T POs TOUS OLKOL aTroTrEe psa T POs E€AUTOV O ELYE OT pa- 


é NC ot , Nh DP , a 1 eS , 
Tevpa* Kal Hevia to “Apkdds, 6s aiT@ mpoeoTyKeEL 
ww 3 an) , wn 7 y Ay 
Tov év Tats modeou Eevikov,’ yKev Tapayyedde da- 
8 


, \ ” \ Seas is \ 4 \ 
Bovra® rods avdpas mv OTdcoL” iKavol Hoay Tas 


dxpordders duddrreav. 2. éxdheoe Sé Kal Tovs Midy- 
a ‘ \ , ed ‘ 
Tov ToNopKouvTas, Kal Tovs ghuyddas exéhevoe TV 


~~ A > nw 
avta@ oTpareverOar, vrooydpevos avTois, el Kahos 


eS 


REGULAR VERBS IN wpe. 299 


0 pH tmpoc0ev trav- 


\ ree , ” § e x es 
cacbau 7 Pw QvuTOus KaTaAayayot OLKQOE, Ou de no€éws 


?, 3 > a > 4 
katampageaey eh a éoTparevero, 


ent. Te ‘ 2 7, \ , . 9 
emeiVovto* €miatevov yap avT@* Kal haBdvTes Ta OTha 
Tapnoav els Yapdecs. 


1 uev is used alone for emphasis; it implies a clause with dé, but in 
truth, ete. 

2 Explain the use of os. 

8 @s emt TovTovs, as if or avowedly against these. 

4 evrav6a, there, i. e. at Sardis, the capital of Cyrus’s province. 

® See cuvadAdrra, to make terms with ; cf. karakvoa, 711, § 10. 

6 Cf. p. 1922. 

7 rov evxod, Sc. orpatevparos, the mercenary force. 

8 AaBdvra agrees with the unexpressed subject of ;jxew instead of with 
Revi, since the latter is so far removed in position (780, 2). 

® Se. rooovrey as the antecedent of éxdaou. 

10 Changed as in English, instead of the optative (7238, 3; 770). 


LESSON LXxIIl. 


REGULAR VERBS IN mw; riOnuu.—VERBS OF 
THE SEVENTH CLASS. 


Review Lessons LIV., LVI. 


729. Write the present and second aorist systems of 
TiOnpu’ [Oe-|, place (849, 853). 


a. In the imperfect active singular, éré@eus, ér (Oe, are formed 
as if from a verb in ew (154, 2). See 641, a. 
6. For the second aorist system, see 641, 4. 


1 Let the pupil inflect this verb entire before referring to the paradigms. 


300 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


c. The imperative active, r/@ec (for TeAeOc) is formed as if 
from a contract verb in ew, cf. trovéw (429). 

d. The active participles r1Oeis (reHevrs) and Geis (for Oevts) 
are declined like Av@eis (3850). For their formation, see 619, 9; 

641, d. 

- e, The singular of the second aorist indicative active, as in 
§/Semt, is lacking, and it is supplied by the first aorist: €@n«a, 
etc. (641, e). 

jf. The second aorist imperative active is Oé (for @e0:), 
(641, /)). 


g. The second aorist infinitive active is Oetvae (for Oe-evar), 
(641, 7). 


730. Verbs of the Theme or Seventh Class. 

Verbs of this class form the present by adding the 
personal endings directly to the theme, which is often 
reduplicated with «. This class includes all verbs in 
pe except those in vups (736). The tense stems of 
these verbs, excepting the present and second aorist, 
are formed like verbs in w (617). 

Examine the following : 

1. lornpu [ora-], set (621), oryoo, Cakes EOTHY; 
EOTHKA, EOTAapal, EoTaOyy. 

2. Stvapa [Svva-], be able, Svvpoopas, dedvv nwa, 
eduvynOnv. 

3. émiotapyor [émuora-], understand, émuornoopat, 
nmotnOnv. 

A. didwpr [S0-], give, ddcw, ewxa, dddaxa, d€dopat, 
€dd00 nv. 


5. riOnur’ [Oe], put, place, Onow, enka, réBeKa,’ 


THeypar, ereO nv. 


1 The theme vowel is lengthened to ec instead of 7 in the first perfect 
and perfect middle systems. 
2 See 304. 


REGULAR VERBS IN pu. 301 


731. Some common -w verbs that have second aorist 
of the -we form : 

1. Baive [Ba-], (631, 3), go, EBnv,' Bo, Bainv, Bn, 
Bynva, Bas. 

2. yyvorKe [yo] (651, a), eyvar, yvo, yvotny, 
yvab, yvavat, yvous. 

"3. Glave [0a-] (631, 2), anticipate, epOnv,' 00, 
bainv, d0nva, bas. 


732. EXERCISES. 

I. 1. kat dydva Onxe. 2. €ore TOv hoxaydv 
apioro.. 3. ol ayyeho. Tov Tisoadépvovs adedpov 
éyywoav. 4. ovdey yap THs dd00 émorTdpuca. 
5. deEtas edocav ot THs Baoitéws yuvaikds adehdot. 
6. thv yédupay AVoe Ticoadhépyys THs vuKTOs, éav 
dvvntat, ws pn SiaBynre. 7. Ti Tmonoavtes POdoas 
Bovdcpevor piv tabety, éroincoav Kaka Tovs ov péd- 
hovras TovovTov ovdev.” 8. dédocKa pr) AaBav pe dé 
knv éemOn av® vomile. vm éeuov nducnoOa. 9. THs 
payns Tavodpevor auddtepor kata yopav* evto ra 
omha. 10. Tovs dmdiras éexéheve OéoOar Ta oda Tept 
Thv avtov aoxynvynv. ll. Kat Kedevovor dvddtrecOar 
BY vptv emPovrat THS vuKTos ol BadpBapo.. 

Il. 1. They stood under arms in line of battle. 
2. They will attack us during the night. 3. He said 
that he would come with as many horsemen as possible. 
4. But there the Greeks halted and rested, grounding 


1 Like gorny (619, “} 8 See 438, 439. 
2 Sc. roveiv. 4 In their proper place, 


802 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


their arms. 5. Leading his line of battle into the 
space between’ both of them, he halted under arms. 
6. If he is there, I desire to inflict punishment upon him. 


733. VOCABULARY, 
dyav, -Ovos, 6, assembly, tiOnut, put, place; riBewar 
contest, games [agony ]. Ta OmAda, ground arms, 
erri-TiOnpu, put upon, imflct ; stand under arms [vo, . 
mid., attack [epithet]. DOOM, theme, thesis ]. 


734. R.ada-, wre, ple-, fill. wi-p-wdy-p1, fill (redupli- 
cation strengthened by the nasal pw); wh-p-ys, -es, full ; 
trH-0-w, be full; wdnOos, -e-os, 76, throng, multitude ; 
qhé-Opo-v, 70, measure of extent, plethron; mdeOpi-ato-s, 
-a, -ov, of a plethron ; ovp-Thears, -wv, full; mretov, -ov, 
comp., more, greater ; mhyv, prep. and adv., except (more 
than); wetoros, -n, -ov (for mde-voTo-s), sup., most ; 
TOA-L-S, ~€-ws, %, city (mass, ‘crowd’); oXt-r1-s, -ov, cit- 
wen ; moht-opKe-w (€eipyw, hem in), besiege ; axpo-mod.-s, 
-e-ws, (cf. R. ax-, 616), upper city, citadel ; wrod-t-s, 
moA\-Ay, ToA-v, Much, many; TwoddAd-Kis, adv., many times, — 
often. 

im-ple-6, jill up; plé-nu-s, adj., full; plua-s, adj., 
more ; plé-b-s, -is, f., the common people; po-pulu-s, -i, 
m., people, nation; pt-bli-cu-s, adj., of the people ; am- 
plu-s, adj., of large extent. 

FILL, FULL; plethora, pleonasm, acro-polis, metro- 
polis, cosmo-polite, poly-gon, poly-nomial, etc., di- 
ploma. 


7 Re \ , a 
€ls TO ECO, 


REGULAR VERBS IN ML. 303 


735. The Character and Number of the Forces assembled at 
Sardis. Tissaphernes warns the King. 

Review 236, 8; 238, 370, 1, 2; 723, 1; 728. 

3. Hevias pev 57) Tovs €x Tov Tédewv AaBav Trape- 

ld > 4 ¢ , > , 4 
yéveTo eis Ydpders OmiTas Els TeTpaKLoyXLALovs, IIpo- 
Eevos S€ wapny exwv omiras pev els TevTaKogiovs Kat 
é - -~ A P 4 de ec 
xXtAious, yupvyntas d€ mevtakociovs, Lodpativeros de oO 
Stuuddduos omitas eywv ytAlovs, Lwxpdrys dé 6 
> x e 7 ¥ cm , * , de 
Ayauos om\itas exywv ws* tevtakoaious, Ilaciwy oe 

X X ’ 
e > A - 
Oo Meyapevs Els ETTAKOT IOUS EXwWV avdpas TO.PeyEVETO * 
Hv oe Kat sai Kat 0 LwKpaTns TOV ke MiAnrov 
orparevopeven ~ 

4, Ovdrou pev eis Ydpders ait@” adixovto. Tisoa- 
dhépvns dé, kaTavonoas TavTa, Kal peilova” Hynodpevos 
> > eae | e S ESN ‘8 \ Vong , 
civat” 7 ws emt Iluoidas THY TapacKevny, Topeverat 


4 


e j 4 > 20 7 , e , ¥ € 
. ws” Baotléa 7 edvvaTo TAXLOTA LTTEAS EXWY WS 


TEVTAKOCLOUS. 


yupvys, -ntos, a light-armed foot soldier. 
Kata-voew, observe, consider (cf. R. yvw-, 660). 
TapacKeuy, -ns, preparation (cf. 638). 


1 Cf. 297. 

2 Syntax ? 

3 Subject of efvas. 

4 9) eddvaro TaxtoTa (sc. 686, 249), in whatever way he could most quickly, 
as rapidly as possible. 


304 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


LESSON LXIV. 


REGULAR VERB OetKVUPL. — IRREGULAR 
VERB €ipt. 


- Review 531, obs.; 619, a, 4; 630, 631, 632, 633, 712. 


736. Some verbs of the Fifth or Nasal Class form 
the present stem by adding to the theme -vv, or after a 
vowel -yyv. Most of these verbs end in pu.’ 

Examine the following :. 

1. Setxvipu [Sex-], point out, show, deiEw, Edaka. 

2. Cedyvupn [lvy-],? join, yoke, CevEw, eleva. 

3. oddoue’ [6d-], destroy, loose, 6X@, ohera,* Gopunv. 


737. Conjugate dSeixvoje in the present system (850). . 


Observe that in the present system. of verbs in vupt, the end- 
ings are added to the present stem, and not to the theme as in 
617, 619; Setxvops, dedevis, etc. : 

6. Observe that the subjunctive and optative are formed as in 
-@ verbs (553, 554) ; Seaview, Serxvidoipt, etc. 

c. Observe that the present imperative rejects -@ and length- 
ens the final vowel of the theme, dedxvv, etc. 


738. Seixvvyu has no second aorists. édvy, the sec- 


ond aorist of dd, enter, is here presented for inflection 
(854): 


1 These are sometimes called the second class of -ye verbs. 

2 The theme is lengthened as in the second class (527, 535). 

8 For 6d-vu-p. 

4 The theme assumes ¢ as in some verbs of the first class (522). 


Eee 


REGULAR VERB Oecixvupt. e OUn 


IND. Suss. Opt. Imv. Inr. 
S. 1. &vv dvo Lacking. Sivas 
2. €dus dvys ove 
3. €dU dvy dvuTw Parr. 
KT. K.T.X KT». Svs, dvoa, Suv 


5 * £ an 
a. The active participles Sevxvus, decxvica, Secxviv, gen. 
detxvbvTos, kK. T. A. and dis, dica, Suv, gen. duvToS, K.T. r., are 
4 % e z / 
inflected like toras (823). 


739. «ius [i-, Lat. re], go, has only the present 
system (860). 
Conjugate the following : 


Inv. Susu. Opt. Inv. Inf. 
S. 1. eiut tw towor oinv iévau 
ae ek ins tous Ou 
3. elov iy toe iT Part. 
D. 2. trov «.t.d. K.T.X. KT.» Lov, Lovoa, Lov 
3. UTov 
K.T.A 
Impr. 


S. 1. ya or jew 
¥ ¥ 
2. yeus or neo Oa. 
»¥ ¥ 
bs nee or yew 
K.T.A. 


a. Observe that the subjunctive and optative are inflected as 
in Sefevvpe or Av@; that the imperative retains -6:; that the 
infinitive has thematic vowel e, and the participle thematic vowel 
0, as in wy (232). 

b. The present ezye has a future force, sha// go, and regularly 


takes the place of the future of épyouar (698, 3). 
| 20 


306 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


740. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. adda idvrwy. 2. of oTpati@Tra ovK éda- 
1 27 os x" 19 , > a > 
oav' idvar. 3. Kal amiovTes, aodadas av arrioiper. 
4. todto T@ epyw EmedeixvuTo. 5. Ore TavTa HV Kal 
nruos edveTo. 6. yépupa dé ernv elevypevyn motors 
emta. 7. €x d€ TovTov Oarroy mponeray Gv Kpavy?. 
8. of 5€ dvioravrar emidekvivTes ola éoTlv % atropia. 
9. édv To cvvPdpar, ovdev Wevdopar. 10. 81eBavov 
Tv yépupay elevypevnv moios TpidkovTa Kal énrd. 
ll. kai orparnyov Sé abrov admédeke Tavtwv daot eis 
Kaotwdov mediov abpoilovra. 12. év be rH vmep- 
~ wn > , al b ] A , ¥ , ~ 
Bon tev dpéwv Tav eis TO Tediov S¥O dxou TOU 
Méveavos otparedpatos adméhovto. 13. 6 8 ovre mpo- 
] 4:3 ld e le) b A 3 A ¥ 
TEpov ovdevi” KpeEiTToOVL EavTOU els yeElpas eAOetv edy, 
x , , 327 ¥ Kine . Ss Meee 
ovte TOTE Kip” ievar nOede, Tpiy H yuvy adtov ereoe 
Kat miores edaBe. 

IJ. 1. They advanced with a great shout. 2. Let 
us show our good will. 3. They would go to their 
tents. 4. In these marches many of the beasts of bur- 
den perished. 5. Cyrus desired to show his army to 
the Cilician queen. | 


741. VOCABULARY. 
atropia, -as, difficulty. av-ioTnpr, make stand up, 
virep-Bohy, -Ns, crossing, rouse; mid., stand up, 
mountain pass [Baro]. rise. 


1 od is frequently used with pnpi in the sense of deny, where we would 
expect yn with the infinitive, as in English, J do xot think, ete. 

2 Follows els xeipas éddeiv (726, 7; 225). 

3 Sc. eis xeipas. See preceding note (2). 


REGULAR VERB Oeikvup. 


-adr-eyut, go away or back, 
depart. 
a.ro-Oeikvup, point out, ap- 
pout; mid., declare. 
am-dAupt, -oA\@, -wdewa, 
-wopny, -oh@deEKa, -OX\w- 
Aa, destroy; mid. w. 2 pf. 
and plpf. act., perish, die. 
Ei, gO, come, proceed. 
em-ept, be on or upon, be 
over [eipi]. 
€m-eyt, gO or come on, ad- 
vance, allack | «ciys|, 


Baive, go, walk. 
éehavva, march, make an 
expedition. - 


307 


émi-Ocixvipn, point out, make 
clear; mid., show for 
one’s self, show. 

Cevyvipn, CevEw, yoke, join ; 
of bridges, made of 
[Yoke]. 

mpo-eyut, go forward, ad- 
vance. 

avv-TiOnus, put together, 
make an agreement, con- 
tract. 


EpxXopmat, go, come. 
eiut, go, in the wide sense. 


742. Counter Preparations of the King.. Cyrus begins his March 
through Lydia and Phrygia, and arrives at Celaenae. 


Review 92, a; 
409, 677, 703, 735. 


93; 107, 186, 249, 340, 369, 1, 2; 


. Y 
5. Kat Baoireds pev 5x eet neovae Tiroadépvous 
tov Kipov' orddov, avturaperkevalero. 


Kvpos Sé €yav ods” cipnka® wppato amd Ldpdewr * 
ied , \ ~ , ‘\ ~ Ud 
kat e€ehavver dia THs Avdias orabpmods Tpets Tapacdy- 

¥ \ 5 , Sic % x , 8 , 4 
yas €lKOoL Kal Ovo emt TOY Maiavopor veggies Tov-. 
Tov TO evpos duo AM pa’ yédupa dé éeajy elevypery 
mrolos* érra. 

6. Totrov dvaBas* erative dua Ppvyias cralpov 


308 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


yy , > \ > ‘\ / > id 
&va Tapacayyas éxT@ eis Ko\oooas, Tohw oikovperny, 
evoaipova Kal peyddynv. evTavla eweuvev Hu€pas enra' 
y *® , 4 ‘ 4 , y , ‘ 
Kat nKe Mévwv 0 Oerrados omdiras el XAtovs Kal 
TENTACTAS TEVTAKOTLOUS, Adhoras Kat Aiviavas, Kat 
‘Odvvbiovs. 
7. "Evred0ev eEeavve crab movs tpets Tapacayyas 
» > Q A , , > 6 
eixoow els Kehawas, THs Ppvyias modw oikovperyny, 
\ lal 
peyadny Kat évdaiwova. eévrad0a Kipw' Bacidea 
9 XN 
jv Kat Tapddecos péyas aypiwv Onpiwv' mdypys, a 
“yr. 20 P SVE e+ , , 5 
exevos eOnpeverv amo Liou, oTOTE yupvacat Bovdo.To 
‘\ 4 la! 
€avTov TE Kal TOUS UmTouvs. Sia péoov O€ TOU Tapa- 
, Ce ie , : pag ¢ \ 7 > a 
deioov pet 0 Maiavdpos morapds* ai dé myyal avrod 
elow ex Tov Bacireiwy’ pet dé Kal dua THS Kedouwaov 
TONES. 
1 Syntax. 
2 Account for the omission of the antecedent. 
8 Give the principal parts (698, 2; 708, 6). 


4 Explain the formation (731, 1). 
§ Explain the mood. 


LESSON LXV. 
REVIEW. 


Review Lessons XLII.—LXIV. in order, with their 


vocabularies, and note the allied words. 


743. Formation of Adverbs. 

1. How are adverbs regularly formed from adjectives? 
2. Give the forms of adjectives and nouns that may 
‘ be used as adverbs. 


REVIEW. 309 


3. Give the meanings of the endings -@ev, -@, and -de. 

4. How are adverbs compared? What may adverbs 
qualify? What force has €yw with an adverb? 

5. State the force of a qualifying word or phrase 
with the article, and give examples.. 

6. Give the construction with verbs of doing any- 
thing to, or of saying anything of a person or thing. 
Give the force of ed, kada@s, etc., with these verbs. 

7. Name other verbs that take a similar construction. 
Name corresponding constructions in Latin and English. 


744. Formation of Words. — Substantives. 


1. Define a root. Define simple and compound 
words. Define primitive and denominative words. 

2. What are prefixes and suffixes? Give the most 
common suffixes denoting the abstract idea of verbs. 
Give the suffixes denoting agent, and examples. Give 
the suffixes denoting quality, and examples. 


3. What consonants may be added to the stems in 
the formation of words? What changes occur in the 
final consonants of the theme or stem before consonant 
endings ? 

4. Give the force of the denominative endings -ou, . 
“Tl, ~[O, -Wa; -waT; -€L, -Ta, and give examples of each. 

5. What endings have adjectives in their formation 
common with nouns ? 

6. What do the endings -1o and -cxo denote? -eo 
and -woP -repo and-raro? Give examples of each 
of these endings. 


310 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


745. Formation of Verbs. — Compounds, 

1. Give several examples of denominative verbs. Ex. 
plain the formation of those in eve, wlw, and vve. 

2. Give the meaning of the inseparable particles. 

3. State the common ways of forming compound 
words, and give examples. What change may the initial 
vowel of the last part of a compound word undergo ? 

4. Define objective and determinative compounds, 
and give examples. 


746. Grimm’s Law. 

1. Define cognate and borrowed words. 

2. Give Grimm’s Law of permutation of consonants. 

3. In the middle of a word how are the rough mutes 
frequently represented ? : 

4. What is the general direction in the phonetic 
_change of vowels? In transliteration how are the 
- vowels changed ? 

5. Give the Latin and English words cognate with 
hépw, Tovs, wATNp, olvos, Seka, €€, UHV. best 

6. Give the most common Greek words formed from 
the roots: ay-, apx-, Bod-, ix-, yvw-, and mha-. 


747. Classes of Verbs. 

1. In respect to the theme ending of verbs, into what 
classes are verbs divided ? 

2. In respect to the formation of the present stem from 
~ the theme, into what classes are verbs divided ? 
3. What verbs are included in the fourth class? 


REVIEW. 31] 


What in the fifth class? Define briefly the remaining 


classes. 

4. Explain the classification of rarrw, ayyédho, 
daivo, onpaivo, vopilo, aioxive. 

5. Explain the classification of AapBdve, dbdvo, 
éLavveo, aigbdvopa, wmoyvéopar, Seixvip, oAUpL. 

748. Subjunctive and Optative. 

1. What does the indicative express? The sub- 
junctive ? 

2. What relation does the optative bear to the sub- 
junctive P 

3. What is the mood sign of the subjunctive? Of 
the optative? What endings does each of these moods 
take P 

4. How does the aorist subjunctive differ from the 
present in form? In meaning? 

5. Give the synopses of the present system of Ava, 
Kedevw, AEitrw, ToLew, SNAG. 

6. Conjugate the present and aorist systems of Avo, 
KEAEVH, TLLAW, SOKEW. 

7. Conjugate the future system of daiva, péva, 
ayyedho. 

8. Conjugate the aorist system of daive, péva, 
ayyéehio, Kehevw, TEETH, KOTTW, TATTH. 

749. Second Tense Systems. 

1. Give the formation of the first tense systems of 
verbs. ' 

2. How does the second aorist system compare with 
the present in inflection P 


Sig THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


8. What is the tense sign of the second aorist ? 
What exceptions in accent has it? Conjugate the 
second aorist system of deirw. 

4, Give the synopses of the second aorist system 
active of dyw, mado xw, Opdw, epyonat, pev'yw; the sec- 
ond aorist system of hapBave, aipéw, yiyvomat. 

5. How is the second perfect formed? How does 
the second perfect system compare with the first in in- 
flection P Conjugate the sees perfect system of 
Neitro. 

6. Give synopses of the second perfect system of 
ayo, TéuTo, TEOw, hevyw. 

7. Give the synopses of the perfect middle system 
of Abw, Oiw, Kehevo, TéuTro, Tew, ayo. 

8. How does the second passive system compare 
with the first in inflection ?P 

9. Conjugate the first and second aorist passive 
systems of daivw and orpéda. | 

10. Give the synopses of the second aorist passive 
system of ypadw, tpédw, Kort and KarahdrTo. 

11. Decline AvOeis, orpadeis, and éxrdayeis. | 

750. Syntax of the Subjunctive and Optative — Con- 
ditional Sentences, Result Clauses, ete. 

1. What does the subjunctive mood express ? 

2. Give the uses of the subjunctive and optative in 
independent clauses. Distinguish in the use of the 
tenses of the dependent isla not in indirect discourse. 

3. What principle governs the use of ob and pay P 

4. Why has the subjunctive no future? What use 
has the future optative P 





REVIEW. 313 


5. State how purpose, and object clauses after verbs 
of fearing are expressed, and give examples in Greek. 
_ Give other ways of expressing purpose. 

6. Give the law for the sequence of moods, and give 
its corresponding law in Latin. 

7. Give the two general uses of av. When is av 
retained in indirect discourse ? 

8. How does the potential optative differ in mean- 
ing from the potential indicative ? 

9. What special use has av with the imperfect and 
aorist indicative ? 

10. Why do the simple particular conditions take 
the indicative ? 

11. How are conditions contrary to fact expressed ? 

12. Give the uses of the subjunctive and optative in 
conditional sentences. 

13. Define a general condition. How does the pres- 
ent general condition differ in form from the past 
general ? 

14. How does the Jess vivid condition compare in 
meaning with the more vivid ? 

15. What may take the place of a protasis of a con- 
dition P Give examples in Greek. 

16. Give examples in Greek of the six ordinary con- 
ditions, and translate into English. Into what classes 
can they be placed ? , 

17. How are relative clauses with indefinite antece- 
dent classified? What takes the place of the particle 

et in a relative conditional sentence ? 


314 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


18. Write a summary classification of both ordinary — 
conditional and conditional relative sentences: simple — 
particular, general, ete. 

19. How are clauses with €ws, éore, etc., classified ? 
Give the constructions with piv. | 

20. Distinguish between the use of the infinitive and 
indicative with wore. 

21. How are causal clauses with ézet, dre, etc., ex- 
pressed? What other common expressions of cause ? 


751. Lnflection of the -y Verb. 

1. Explain the -ps inflection of verbs? What forms 
of the -s verbs have this inflection? What. peculiari- 
ties in endings has the inflection of the -ms verbs? 
What modifications of the theme vowel? 

2. Decline iords, didovs, and Beis, and give their 
formation and accentuation. | 
3. What tenses of -w verbs take the -yx inflection P 

4, Give the synopses of the present and second 
aorist systems of tornws and did@pr, and explain how 
the two systems differ in. form. 

5. How are the subjunctive and optative of -~z verbs | 
regularly formed ? 

6. How does the mood sign of the optative active of 
-yw verbs differ from that of the middle ? 

7. What two -us verbs have subjunctive and optative 
like -w verbs P 

8. Conjugate the present and second aorist systems 
of riOnpr. 

9. Conjugate the present systems of deikvupe and 
eit. 





REVIEW. B15 


10. Give the synopses of the second aorist system 
active of. Baivw, yuyvdonw, and conjugate the indi- 
~ cative. 
11. Give the synopses of the nga system of eipi 
and dypi. 

12. Give a brief abstract of the reading lessons within 
this review. 


752. Infinitive in Indirect Discourse. — Subordinate 
— Clauses. 

1. Give the two uses of the object infinitive, and 
distinguish between the use of the tenses in each. 

2. What verbs regularly take the infinitive in indirect 
discourse? What construction may verbs of hoping, 
etc., take? Explain the personal construction. 

3. Explain the use of the negative in indirect dis- 
course; of av. 

4. What form do subordinate clauses in indirect dis- 
course take ? 

5. Translate the following, and explain the use of 
the infinitive and optative: (1) éby et tw cvvAotro, ov- 
dev WevderIar. (2) briryxveiro dé adTo@, eb EM, hirov 
avTov Kip@ troujoey. 


753- Formation of Words (continued). 

Give the formation and meanings of the following: 
1. rpdzros, Todos, Hyewadv, Tpakis, TYLA, OTPaTLOTNSs, 
wevdys, mod€utos, xptoeos. 2. Sydrdw, Bacrredvo, 
a&idw, PBovrevo, Kiwwduveda, ddicéo, diiéw, picbda, 
Toenew, TELpaw, olKew. 3. amopos, amas, addLKOS. 


316 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


4. dyov, adypios, Ppovpapxos, Kwapyns, Vrapyos, 
émiBovdy. 5. yaderas, otkobev, oikade, Sukaiws, wodv, 
TaXv, wavTn, paddov, KaddAdoTA, KpatioTa. 6. Béh- 
TLOTOS, KTNUA, xXpHya, mioTdOTHS, Takis, PvdAa€, 
miotis. 7. avayKkalw, yaderaiva, ayyéh\iw, KnpvTTo. 
8. Bacidikds, avepds, KaTapavys, evvous, evvola, 
apaga, dpakités, ovoma. 9. Kpeittwy, éxKdnoia, 
peyas, wANpyS, TANOOS, TrEtoros, ToNiTys, vmephant, 

754. Grimm's Law (continued ). 

Give the Latin and English words cognate with the 
following: 1. deta, tintw, dépw, Bovdrdopa, reifa, 
yryvarka, TARPS, Kahé€w, iw. 2. Onp, TpEts, TaTHp, 


, = y, , , 
Ovpa, olvos, €€, wyv, Tovs. 


755. EXERCISES. 

l. Hv dé hevyn, nets Exel mpods TadTa Bovrevoducba. 
2. els Tovrov de Tov otabudsy Ticcadépyns éemedavy. 
3. eyeTw Ti EoTAL TOLS OTPaTLOTaLS, €ayv a’T@ TadTa* 


xapiowvtar. 4. Bovroiuny & av axovtos” amov® 


Kvpov dafeiv abrov ameOav.s 5. édéyero 5€é kal Sv 
, 5 5 Af la » , A > 4 
EVVEOLS Elval ETL TOV AaKpwY dvdatrav THY Ea Bodyy. — 
6. AaBav vuas éropevduny, iva et TL d€oiTO” wdheoinv 
ofe% 5 9° BW. G > » a? b] v4 XN nA 
avrov av?’ wv’ eb erafov vm éxeivov. 7. Kat Kupos 
1 See 338. 
2 dxovtos Kupov, sc. dvros (239), expresses manner, against Cyrus's will 
(236, 3). 
8 Equivalent to ef dmioun (236, 6; 715). 
* See 245, to get off without his Paiitsdy 
5 Might have been the subjunctive, changed sinned to 579, a; 787, 
2; Re. 
8 Gv &v = avti exeivor a (438, 2; 439), for the benefits I have received 
from him, ed macxe, pass. force (659). 


REVIEW. 317 


A 
1 8. Kat odk 


ide TAS OKNVAS Ov ob Kiduxes EpdarTTOV. 
¥ 27 2X / > A , , ‘ 
epacay tévat, €av py TLS avTots ypypaTra bdo. 9. Kal 
a F) , > Si 8 , 32 9 9 \ na 
TQUTA ETOINTE OVK ETL ayynY LovTav,” adda KadovVTOS 
lal ‘ A \ \ \ > / 
tov tatpos Kupov. 10. Kat kpavynv woddnv éroiovy 
A > ay 4 \ \ 4 > , 
Kadouvtes aAAnAovs, WATE Kal TOUS TOEMLOUS AKOVELD ° 
7 a lal 
WOTE OL pev eyyUTaTa TOV TOhEMiov Kal epuyov EK TOV 
~ / > HK Lg. / ®& ‘4 4 
oxnvev. 11. doBoipny 8 av te yyeudu @ Soly ere 
Q Ne Ae > , 50 > @/ 38 b) XO la 
oHar, pn Has ayayn ofev ovy otdv Te* Eorar EEedOeiv. 
12. e& Bovrdeobe amevar, yKewv yon Kehever THS VUKTOS" 
> \ \ HN Y hae. 2 / > 4 4 
el O€ pn, avTOS Gua TH Hepa amevar dyoiv. 


750. The Palace of the King. Cyrus holds a Review of his 
Troops. 
Review 84, 92,a; 104,3; 107, 394, 450, 725, 742. 
8. "Eor 5€ Kai peyddou Bacikéws Bacihea év Ke- 
a > Pp.’ a A la , 3 ie SS ~ 
awaits €rt Tats myyats TOV Mapovov Torapov 7d TH 
> / . en de ‘ «& 8 wN A aN ae 
akpomo\e* per S€ Kat ovTos dua THS Toews Kal ep- 
Badde cis Tov Maiavdpov’ tov dé Mapovov 76 ebpds 
> ¥ ‘\ 7 “A > ~ lA > , 
€oT €lkoo. Kal TévTe TOO@Y. €vTavOa héyeras *AmO)- 
hov” éxdetpar Mapovav, viknoas' épilovtd ot mept 
, ‘ ‘ , 4, > ~ ¥ 9 ¢ 
gopias, Kal TO Sépya Kpeuaoa ev TH avTpw ofev at 
rahe \ \ A e ‘ Ne , 
amnyai’* Sia dé TovTo 6 morapos héyerat Mapavas. 
9. "Evtad0a BépEns, ore €x THs “EdNddos 7rrnOets 
TH payyn ameydper, héyerat oiKodounoa TavbTa TE TO 
, ‘\ \ “A > , > vO » 
Bacttkeaa kat THY KeXauvov axpotohuy. evtavla Eenerve 
Ktpos nuépas tpidkovra* Kai nKe KNéapyos 6 Aake 
daipovios duyas, exov omditas ywdiovs Kal TeATATTAS 
@pakas dxtakocious Kal Tofdtas Kpyras diaxoctovs. 
9 \ A A ~ c / ¥ ¢ re 
dpa S€ Kal Loous TapHv O Xvpakdo.os Exwv omitas 


1 See p. 2571. 2 Sc. adrév, gen. abs. 8 oids te, able, possible. 


318 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


> \ ¥ c , 
Tpiakociovs, Kat Lopaiveros 6 “Apkas exwy omdiras 
aA la) \ 
xtdiovs. Kal evtavla Kupos e€éracw Kat apiOpov® 
an ¢c / > / 2 Mee 5 / 3 i: Rr 
Tov EdAnvev éroinoev Ev TH TAPadELa@” Kal EYEVOVTO 
A \ , 
of ovpmavtes* OmNirar” pev pvpror Kal xiALoOL, TEATA- 
otal” dé dudi® Tovs duryidiovs. 


ex-d€pw, flay [THAR]. —* pass. of vuxdw, be con- 
déppua, -atos, 76, hide (epi- gquered. 

dermis). dvtpov, cave. Lat. an- 
Kpepnavvup, hang up, sus- trum. 

pend. oixodopéw, build [déua, 


HTTAOLAL, YTTHTOMAL, YT- build |. Lat. aedifico. 

THpaL, nTTHOnvY, used as 

a. Give examples of the review syntax. 

1 Supply the object of vuxnoas. 

2 Supply the predicate of mnyai. 

8 Eng. derivative ? 

* of cvpmartes, subject, the whole body. 

5 Pred. nom. with éyévero. 

$ dui with a numeral is a preposition like eis (711, n. 2). The total 
is here given in round numbers, 


LESSON LXVI. 


PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM OF CONSONANT 
THEMES. —PERIPHRASTIC FORMS. 


Review 189, 1, 2, 3, obs.; 190, 191, 192, 198, 194, 
1, 2, 3, 4; Lesson XXIX., noting 325; 521, 545, 574, 
650, 697. | 


757. Conjugate the perfect middle system of the 
following (836, 837, 838, 839, 840, 841): Kedevo, 





PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM OF CONSONANT THEMES. 3819 


| 4 Y 4 

i Kexéd\evopar; eimw, édeimpar; TATT@, TETHYypaL ; 
: id l4 es > a ¥ X : ld , 
mew, méneaopar; ayyéd\d\w, nyyehuar; Paivw, Te 


dacpar; Kpivw, KéKpiwat, KéeKpioat, etc. 


Observe that: 1. The rules for euphony of consonants (194, 
ete.) apply to the concurrence of the consonants of the stem and 
endings; o is dropped between two consonants (325, end). 
2. The third person plural of the perfect and pluperfect indica- 
tive are formed respectively by the perfect participle and ¢éo/ 
and noav! (325). 3. When a liquid verb drops v in its per- 
fect middle system, it is inflected like a vowel verb; but when 
vy of the stem is not dropped it becomes o before mw, and is 
retained before all other endings, répacpat, etc. 


758. The perfect subjunctive and optative active are 
more frequently formed by the perfect active participle 
with @ and einy than by the forms in » and out of 
the paradigms (553, 554); as, AedkuKas @, eAUKS 
ELnv. 


a. In a similar way the perfect and pluperfect indicative 


‘active are sometimes expressed by the perfect active participle 


and e¢ui; as, éxmert@Kotes joav (325, end). The future per- 
fect active of most verbs is expressed by the perfect participle 
and écopma. 


759. Periphrastic Future. 

A periphrastic future is formed by the verb péddo, 
intend, be on the point of, and the present or future (or, 
rarely, the aorist) infinitive to express the future act as 
immediately intended or expected: pwérdrkw Hew, L ins 
tend to come. 


1 The third plural is sometimes found in -ata: and -aro. 


320 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


760. ‘Ihe agent with the perfect and pluperfect passive 
is sometimes expressed by the dative: mdv0’ Ayuiv Ta pe- 
oKxevacrat, all things have been prepared by us (p. 130?). 

761. Conjugate 1. The first perfect system of déo, 
Keheva, ayyé\ko ; Kpiva, KéKpiKa; Baha, BeBhyxa. 
2. The second perfect system of wéuro, deiro, ot ayo, 
TpEeTH, Frpepy 3. The perfect middle i hegisee of 7 
aptdlo, tpére, TpEpa, abpoilo, méumrw, wérenpar? 
(wemepp-par); mpdrTw, dyw. 


762. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. péddovor otro mot. 2. *Apratos adeory- 
€ \ 4 > / 
fea. 3. of orparnyot cuverknppéevor noav. 4. didros 
np ovdels ehetperar. 5. adyopay obdels ert Tapetery > 
¥ € \ XN “A 4 ld > / 
ewehrevy. 6. of d€ mpds TovTo Kipw teraypévor cioiv. 
7. ore 0 €&w Tov davov yévowTo, Toddol avtov ane 
Aetrov. 8. ot orparvaras TavTa MYYE Aaa Tpos 
Kupov. 9. €pwra ei 707 dmoKéxpwran ot “EdAnves. 
10. trav ahd\wv ypynudtrev ra mretora Sinpracpéva 
noav. ll. ot dé tepacpévar cio Trav Aoyayav Kat 
Tov oTpatnyav apioto.. 12. tdv dmrwY TOs OTpa- 

? \ 3 \ e A > ‘\ e 7 
TiwTars moka émt apatoav AKTO Kal nosey tat 
13. éverdyyavov Tappots vdaTos miajpeow ws° ral 
dvvacbat SuaBaivew a aveEev eee oolg ad’ €rovodvTo é€k 
Tov S&dpov & Hoav éxrenTwKéra. 


1 When pp or yy would be brought before p, the first consonant is 
dropped (p. 219%). 

? With this exception the future infinitive is regularly used only in in- 
direct discourse to represent the future indicative (723). 

® ws is sometimes used for dare to express result, rarely purpose. 


PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM OF CONSONANT THEMES. 321] 


II. 1. Very many were likely* to see him. 2. The 
horsemen had been drawn up on the right. 3. He 
marches on with all of his army drawn up in battle 
array. 4. The soldiers have been drawn up by my. 
brother. 5. The messengers have been sent back and 
Chirisophus with them. 6. The station was near 
where they intended to halt. 


763. VOCABULARY. 


vowp, -aros, 76, water [Lat. ew, adv., outside; w. gen., 
unda, hydar-ant, hydro- without, beyond | exotic, 
gen, WATER, WET]. '  exoteric }. 

aveu, prep., without, w. gen. 


764. R.ap-, ar-, fit, join. adp-éor-a, jit, suit, please ; 
tip-t-oTos, -7, -ov, sup., fillest, best ; dp0-yd-s, 6 (ap + 8), 
bond, friendship ; dpr0-.s-s (ap +1.-+ 0), series, number, 
numbering ; ; &p-pa, -ar-os, 76, chariot, team ; apy-dpa€a, 
ns (cf. gua and R. dy-[513]), covered carriage ; dp-e-rh, 
ns, fitness, goodness, valor. 

ar-s, ar-ti-s, f., skill, art; in-er-s, adj. (ars), wnskil- 
Sul, inactive ; ax-tu-s, adj., close, narrow ; ar-ma, -orum, 
)., armor, arms ; ar-m0o, fo arm. 

ARM, RIME (rhyme); arithmetic, harmony, aristo- 
cracy, log-arithm. 

765. Cyrus continues his March to Cayster Plain. There Epyaxa, 


the Cilician Queen, supplies him with the Money required 
for the Payment of his Troops. 


Review 244, 246, 247, 261, 369, 5; 756. 
10. "Evred0ey e&ehavver orabpods S00 Tapacdyyas 
dexa eis Ilddras, modu oixovpéerny. éevravl’ euewer 


1 pedro. 
21 


322 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


Heéepas Tpeis’ ev ais Revias 6 “Apkas ta Avcasa’ vce 

\ > A ty) o3 20 4 de \ > “A \ lal f 
Kat aywva eUnKe’” eVewper O€ TOV aywva Kat Kupos. 
evtedev e€ehavver orafpmovs d¥0 Tapacdyyas dédexa 
eis Kepapov ayopar, 7okw olkouperny, €oxarnv mpds 
™ Mvoia xopa. 

ll. *Evredéer é€ehavver orabmovs Tpets Tapardyyas 
Tpiakovta eis Katvorpov mediov, modu oikovperny. 
evTav? euevey nuépas mete’ Kal Tols oTpaTL@TaLs 
> 7 \ / 38 x A Pa ds ‘ 
adeihero pucbds mréov® 4 Tpi@v pyvov,* Kat ToA- 

la 9: > TS ‘\ , > / ¢ \ 3 lA 
Adis ltovres Ent Tas Ovpas amyrovv. 6 dé édmidas 
héyov” Sunye al Sndos jv dvidpevos* ov yap Hv pos 

a , , ¥ so es , 

Tov Kvpovu tpomov eyovta® pn) amoo.ddvan. 

12. “Evrav0a adixvetrar "Exvaga 7 Svevvéoros yun) 
Tov Kudikwy Bacthéws mapa Kipov* Kat édéyero Kip@ 
Sodva, xpypata moddd. tH 8 ov orparia Tore 
> 5 a ‘\ , A 4 > de e 
amédwKe Ktpos puoOov retrapwv pnvdv. eiye 0€ 7 
Kittooa Kat dvdrakyy mept avtny Kidikas kat 
"Aoevdious. 


fewpéw, view, witness. .  amattéw, ask from, demand. 
 -€xxatos,.-n, -ov, farthest; Sudyw, lead on, continue. 
éxxarnv mpos, the last avidw, grieve, trouble. 

on the road to. 


1 Syntax of ra Avcaia ? 

2 Prin. parts ? 

3 gdéov, indeclinable adj. = mredvev. 

4 Syntax P 

5 See 244, continued to express hopes (of paying them). 

§ Zxorra, agrees with omitted subject of dmodiddvat (728, N. 8; 780, 2), 

when he had money. 

7 otv, however that might be, at any rate, ete. 


INDIRECT DISCOURSE AFTER OTt AND os. 323 


LESSON LXVII. 


IRREGULAR VERB oioa. — SIMPLE SEN- 
TENCES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE AFTER 
6re AND as. 


Review 436, 437, 438, 1, 2,3; 439, 443, 561, 565, 
620, 666, 668, 721, 1, 2, 3; 723, 1, 2, 3. 


766. oida [id-, <id-, cf. cidov (698, 4)], now, an ir- 
regular verb in pu, is a second perfect formed without 
reduplication, with present meaning ; the pluperfect has 
the force of the imperfect. Learn the inflection of otda 
(857). Observe that oida has mainly the -y inflection, 
and that the subjunctive and optative are formed upon 
the stem eide-; that in the forms beginning with i6-, 8 
of the theme becomes co. | 

767. Simple Sentences in Indirect Discourse after ort 
and ws. ‘ 

Examine the following : 


1. wept omovddav nropev, we have come concerning a 
treaty. 

2. (a) ot dé Aéyovor ori wEpi orovdar jKovoy, they 
say that they have come concerning a treaty. 

(4) ot & €deyov Oru wept orovdarv jrovev, they 

said that they had come concerning a treaty. 

3. 1 000s extat mpos Bacrhéa péyav, the expedition 
will be against the great king. 


324 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. | 
: 

4. Kipos édeyer bru % 680s Exouro mpds Baorhéa | 
péyav, Cyrus said that the expedition would be against 
the great king (567, end). J 

5. émopevducla av emt Bacrréa, we would be advan-— 
cing agaist the king. 

6. eirev dru éropevovro av émi Bacrhéa, he said that 
they would be advancing against the king. 

7. ov Tovr av tis mpd€eve, no one could do ths. 

8. elrev ws ov Tour av Tis mpakeae, he said that no 
one could do this. 

9. ti Bovr\eoGe ; what do you want ? 

10. (a) Kdéapyos épwra ri (or ort) Bovrkeobe, Cle- 
archus asks what you want, 

(4) KXéapyos npdérnce ti (or O71) BovdowrTo, 

Clearchus asked what they wanted. 

ll. ré woujow ; what shall I do? 

12. yrdpe ti moujoee, he was at a loss what to do. 


a. Observe that 1, 3, 5, etc., give simple sentences in- the 
- form of statements ; that 2, 4, 6, etc., give these sentences with 
ore and ws quoted indirectly. 

6. Observe that after primary tenses the leading verb retains 
its own mood and tense, 2 (a); that after secondary tenses it is 
regularly changed to the same tense of the optative (578); that 
it may be retained in the original mood and tense for emphasis 
(579, a). 

c. Observe that the change of the person is the same as in 
722, obs. e. 

d. Observe that if the optative refers to the future, it is 
translated by would, etc., otherwise by the past tense of the 
indicative. : 


INDIRECT DISCOURSE AFTER OTL AND ws. 325 





e. Observe that the.secondary tenses of the indicative with av, 
_ §, 6, and all optatives, 7, 8, are kept unchanged in mood; and 
that if the original had ay it is retained. 

J. Observe that the principles of changing simple sentences 
apply to questions and to the interrogative subjunctive, 10, 4; 
12; that the interrogative pronoun may be changed in indirect 
questions to the general relative ! (443). 


768. Indirect Quotations after ore and os. Indirect 
Questions. Interrogative Subjunctive. 


RULE. 


1. After primary tenses, each verb of the simple sen- 
tence retains both the mood and the tense of the direct 
discourse. After secondary tenses, each indicative or 
subjunctive of the direct may be either changed to the 
same tenses of the optative, or be retained in the origi- 
nal mood and tense. But all secondary tenses of the 
indicative in unreal conditions (668) and all optatives 
remain unchanged. 

2. Indirect questions and interrogative subjunctives 
quoted indirectly, follow the rule for simple sentences. 

3. The negative of the direct discourse is regularly 
retained in the indirect form, but indirect questions in- 
troduced by et, whether, may take 7. 


a. After a past tense the idea of the dependent verb is made 
more remote, and the optative is used to represent this remoteness 
and greater uncertainty. ‘The optative also disclaims the respon- 
sibility of the truth of the statement, thought, or feeling of some 
other person presented (567). 


1 This applies to all relative words and interrogative adverbs. 


326 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


6. The imperfect and pluperfect generally remain unchanged, 
but sometimes they, become the present and perfect optative. 

c. Ort emphasizes the assertion rather than the fact. 

d. If the original had ay, it is retained. 


769. Of the three common verbs of saying, — 

a. npi regularly takes the infinitive. 

b. eimov takes oru or ows with the indicative ot 
optative. 

c. éyw allows either construction, but in the active 
it regularly takes ore or ws. 

d. Both etzov and déyw in the sense of command, 
propose, etc., take the object infinitive like Kedevo. 

770. Sometimes the Greek, like the English, changes 
the tense instead of the mood, as the present indicative 
to. the imperfect, and the perfect to the pluperfect: 
noOero ori 70 oTparevpa ev Kidixia Av (for éoré or em, 


728, n. 10). 


771. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. otk of0a émas Tis Gv atopetyor. 2. HpaTnoe 
71 


ei! mu mapayyé\do. 3. Kal édéyero SenOjvar® 7. 


Kitiooa Kvpov éemdetEar 76 oTparevua aitn. 4. ovK 
EOédw edOeiv SediHs* pr AaBov pe Sixnv emO7. 
5. a€vovow eidévar ti ohiow eorar, €av KpaTnowow. 
6. tT 8 0 ia iyyedos hé OTL AEAOLTTO 
. ™ © torepaia Kev ayyehos héywv oT NehouTos 
er .. , ee a ¥ 9 A 
ein Yvervveois Ta axpa. 7. ovTor edeyov ott Kupos 
pev TeOvynKer,* ’Apiatos 6€ mepevyas ein. 8. Eheye Ort 


1 ¢i, whether. 2 708, n. 4. 3 See defda. 
4 Force of the present. Why retained in the indicative? One mood 
may be changed while another remains unchanged. 





INDIRECT DISCOURSE AFTER OTL: AND os. 327 


“TavTny THY nuépay TEepiEeiverey Gv avTovs, ei pédAdoLED 
nKev. 9. Omws dé Kal eldnTe eis olov Epyerbe ayava, 
duas eldas Siuddfw. 10. Hpdrnoe Kipov ri* Bovdouro 
—hty xpjoOa. 11. év rovrw? Kdéapyos Are, Kal hpd- 
toe el “on atoxexpinevon ciev. 12. To avdpi dv av 
Ednobe Teivopat, iva. eidnre oT. Kat apxyerOau ed émi- 
orapa.” 13. ets dé dy eize,* ec py Sidon Tavra, Hye 
pova airety Kipov datis dua didias THs xopas amd&e.° 

Il. 1. He asked what the watchword was. 2. You 
did not know what you were doing. 3. But he did 
not make known what he would do. 4. He knew that 
he had the middle of the Persian army. 5. Silanus 
said to Cyrus that the king would not fight within ten 
days. 6. Some reported that they intended to attack 
them. 


772. VOCABULARY. 
ovv-Onpua, -aros, 76, watch- strong, rule over, conquer 
word | riOnpr). (696) [demo-crat ]. 
epouat, Attic only in fut. ofa, 2 pf. with pres. force, 
epyooua, and 2 aor. know, understand. 
npopnv, ask, inquire (cf. mepi-péva, wait around, re- 
€paTaw).. main, wat for (603). 


KpaTéw, Kpatnow, etc., be 


héyw, 1. to say, in a wide sense, Lat. dicd. 2. to speak, 
in general. 3. ¢o speak with art, as the orator. 


1 Cog. ace. (261, a; p. 1458). 4 See 769, d. 
2 Sc. xpdve@ ; ef. ev ais (765, § 10). 5 Explain the mood. 
8 Know how, ete. 


328 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


dypi, used in conversation and replies, said I, said he, 
etc. It has besides the notion of affirmation, to assert, 
affirm. 

eizov, used with Aéyw and dnp to complete them. But 
it frequently retains its own meaning, advise, command, 
propose (769, d). 


773. R.orpa-, ster-, stra-, stla-, strew, spread. otpa- 
tés, 0, an encamped army, host; otpardo-medo-v, 7d 
(7éSov, ground), camping ground, camp ; orpatote-ded-a, 
encamp ; otpat-yyo-s, 6 (cf. R. ay- (513)), leader of an 
army, general ; otpat-nyéw, lead, command, be generat ; 
orparny-ia, -as, office of general, generalship ; orpar-.a, 
-As, army ; oTpatid-Tys, -ov, soldier; orpared-w, serve 
in the army, make an expedition; orparev-wa, -at-os, 
TO, an armament, army. 

ster-n-6, spread out; stra-tu-s, adj., stretched out ; 
stel-la, -ae, f., star; la-tu-s, (stla-tus), adj., broad, 
wide ; 1o-c-u-s, -i, m. (stlo-cus), place; stru-d, place to- 
gether, arrange, build; in-stru-mentu-m, an wnplement, 
enstrument. | } 

STAR, STRAW, STREW; strat-agem, strat-egic, strat- 
egist, strat-egy. 


774. Continuing his March Cyrus arrives at Tyriaeum, where, 
at the Request of Epyaxa, he holds a Review of his 
Troops. 


Review 66, 106, Lesson XV., 235, 249, 369, 3; 765.. 
13. "Evred0ev § é€ehadver crabpovs Svo0 Tapacdyyas 
Séca eis* OvpBpiov, wou oixovpéernr. évtad0a Hv 
mapa’ thy dddov Kpyvy 7 Midov Kadoupévyn® rov Ppr- 


READING LESSON. 329 


yav Baorréas,? éf’ 7 éyerar Midas Tov Ldrvpov 
Onpedoar ov Kepdcas” adryy. 

14. “Evreddey eEehavver crabpovs dv0 Tapacdyyas 
d€xa els Tupiatoy, rodw olkoupéevyny. évtadfa ewever 
neepas Tpels. Kal éyerar SenOnvar 7» Kituooa Kv- 

4 3 PS) A \ , , ee Xd > 
pov* eémdetEar TO oTpaTrevua avTy. Bovddpevos ovv 
emideifan e€€racw Toveitar ev TO TEdiw TOV “EAAjvar 
Kat Tov BapBapwr. 15. éxédevoe SE Tovs “EANnvas, 
ws vopnos® avrots cis paynv, ovTw TaxOnvar Kal oTHvat, 
ouvtagar® d€ Exacrov Tovs EavTov. eTadyOnoay odv 

~ | , .6 5 \ ‘ 4 ‘ V4 \ e 
emt terrdpwy** eixe de TO pev deEvov Mévwv kat oi 

\ - Ria \ de t AeA , N ee , 
ovv avT@, TO S€ evdvupov Kréapyos Kat ot €xeivon, 

‘\ \ , e ¥ 7 
TO O€ pecov ot ardor oTparnyot. 

16. *Eedpe otv 6 Kipos mporov pev tovs BapBa- 
pous* of d€ wapydavvoy Teraypevor KaT thas Kal Kata. 
Tages’ eira d€ Tovs EdAnvas, Tapehavvav ef’ apyaros 

PAS / pe > ae 4 
Kat 9 Kiktooa €b appapaéns. 


Sdrupos, the well known idn,-ns, troop, band ; Kar’ 


satyr, Sulenus. thas Kal Kata Ta€ets, by 
KEPavvUpL, NUL. troops and by companies. 
vomos, custom, usage. eita, then, thereupon. 


a. Give special attention to the prepositions of this Lesson (141, 142). 
1 rapa thy ddr, flowing along the road side. 

2 Foree of this participle ? 8 Syntax ? 

4 See 708, n. 4. 5 Explain the use of the mood. 

© emi rerrapwr (dvdpav), only four deep. : 


~ 330 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


LESSON LXVIII. 


PARTICIPLES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. — 
VERBAL ADJECTIVES. 


Review 82, 83, 119, 235, 237, 238, 239, 244, 245, 
247, 373, 648, §7; 711, Nn. 5, 759. 


775. Participles in Indirect Discourse. 

Examine the following : 

1. Kdpos év Kutuxia qv, Cyrus was in Ciheia. 

2. nkovoe Kipov év Kuidsxia ovta, he heard that 
Cyrus was in Cilicia. 

3. Kupos réOvnkev, Cyrus is dead. 

4. ovk ydeoav Kipov teOvnkora, they did not know 
that Cyrus was dead. | | 

5. BopvBov nrovoe dua Tov ra€ewv idvtos, he heard 
a noise going through the ranks. 

6. avt@ Kipov orpatevovta patos yyyeda, J first 
announced to him that Cyrus was making an expedition. 

7. to. dyabds wv, know that you are brave. 

8. cvvoida EemauT@ ebevopevos (or epevepeve) adror, 
I am conscious of having deceived ham. 

9. davepos 8 Hv Teipdpevos ypnoOa Tots ypypact 
(for mepoyar ypnobar), but it was obvious that he strove 
to bring into use their wealth. | 


a. Observe that in 2, 4, 6, 7, ete., the verbs take the parti- 
ciple in indirect discourse. 


PARTICIPLES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. ood 


b. Observe that the participle in indirect discourse represents 
the corresponding tense of the direct ; that it is put in the accu- 
sative agreeing with the object of a verb (sometimes called the 
subject of the participle) to express a fact. , 

c. Observe that this participle must be distinguished from the 
participle after verbs of perceiving, finding, etc. (244), as in 5, 
which represents the actual perception of the action by the 
senses; that here verbs of- hearing take the participle in the 
genitive. 

d. Observe that when the object of the verb is the same as 
the subject, the participle is attracted to the case of the sub- 
ject, 7. 

e. Observe that in 8, with avvoida and the dative of the re- 
flexive pronoun, the participle may be either in the nominative 
or dative. : 

jf. Observe that in 9, with dArds ecys, havepds evpt, the 
participle is used personally (247) in indirect discourse, similar 
to the personal construction with Aéyeras (725). 


RwLgE. 


776. With many verbs of perceiving, hearing, .know- 
mg, and ayyéA\w, announce, the participle stands in 
indirect discourse, and conforms to the rules of the in- 
finitive (723, 1, 2) in regard to the tenses, the uses of av, 
and the negatives. 


777. With verbs and phrases of appearing and show- 
ing, such as daive, daivopar, dndds eips, and gavepdos 
ety, etc., the participle may be used personally in indi- 

rect discourse. 
* 778. Most of these verbs may also take a clause with 
ort or ws in indirect discourse, or the infinitive; but 


832. THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


with the latter there is usually a distinction of meaning : 
the participle regularly denotes a fact (775, 8). 


a. oda and érlorapar with the participle mean know that, 
with the infinitive, know how ; as, dpyecOat érrictapat, I know 
how to be ruled (771, 12). 


779. Predicate referring to the omitted Subject of an 
Infinitive. 


Examine the following : 

1. det twas eivar ayalovs, you must be brave. 

2. ereBvpe yevéoOar avyp, he desired to become a 
man. | 

3. mapayyédr\e. T@ KNedpyw aBdvtr nev ooov Fv 
avt@ orparevpa, he ordered Clearchus to come with what- 
ever army he had. 


RULE. 


780. 1. When the subject of an infinitive is omitted 
because it is the same as the subject of the leading verb 
(121), predicate nouns and adjectives are assimilated to 
the preceding nominative. | 

2. When the subject of an infinitive is omitted be- 
cause it is the same as the object of the leading verb, 
predicate nouns and adjectives are generally assimilated 
to the case of this object (121), but sometimes stand in 
the accusative agreeing with the omitted subject (728, 
~§i,n. 8; 765, wn. 6). 


a. These principles apply also to a predicate with @v, or with 
a participle of a copulative verb (775, 7, 8). 





PARTICIPLES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 333 


| 781. The personal and impersonal Construction of 
- Verbals in réos. 

Examine the following : 

1. morapos & adddos Hiv €ote SiaBaréos, but some 
other river must be crossed (as to be crossed) by us. 

2. npty S€ ravra twounréa, but everything must be done 


by us. 

3. avrots meoTéov €oTi TH Kieapyxo, they must obey 
Clearchus (equivalent to abdrovs det weifeoOar Tm Kire- 
dpxyw). Cf. eis parendum est Clearcho. 


a. Observe that: 1. The verbal adjective in réos, 1, 2, is 
used personally in agreement with the subject of the sentence, 
like any predicate adjective. 2. The copula e¢ué is often omitted 
asin 2. 8. This verbal has the force of the Latin participle in 
dus, and takes the agent in the dative. 

6. Observe that: 1. The verbal in 3, is used impersonally, 
being in the neuter nominative singular (sometimes plural), with 
éori expressed or understood. 2. Although still passive, as is 
the Lat. -dum. est, it is practically active in sense and governs the 
same case as the verb in the active or middle would take. 3. The 
expression is equivalent to de?, one must, with the infinitive, and 
takes the agent in the dative (sometimes in the accusative). 

c. Observe that the subject of the personal construction be- 
comes the object of the impersonal, hence the latter emphasizes the 
action rather than the person or thing ; that verbals of transitive 
verbs admit either construction, but those of intransitive verbs 
the impersonal construction only.1 . 


Rute. 


782. 1. The verbal in réos in the personal construc- 
% . . . ’ . 
tion 1s passive in sense, and expresses necessity, like the 


1 Tn Latin this is confined to intransitive verbs. 


334 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


Latin participle in dus. The agent is expressed by the 
dative. | 

2. The verbal in the impersonal construction is in 
the neuter of the nominative singular, with éori ex- 
pressed or understood. ‘I'he expression is equivalent to 
de? with the infinitive. 

It is active in sense, and takes the same case as the 
verb would take. 

The agent is regularly expressed by the dative. 


a. The negative of the verbal adjective in both personal and 
impersonal construction is ov. 


783. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. radra €uot ov mountéov é€otiv. 22. pede 
\ , » . lie. e A » , 
purakas dvdagew. 3. Opn vp opare ovTa TopeuTéa. 
4. tovto 8 émoia €« Tov yademos elvar. 5. dpets 
ddgere ayaloi elvar dp€avres Tov diaBaivew. 6. 87- 
> a e , A 
hos Hv oidpevos TavTy TH NmEPGA paxetcOar Bacrhéa. 
Cal Y la 
7. Kat emempé twa €epovvTa ore ovyyevéoOar avT@ 
4 \ > \ > 7 > ‘\ ¢ 
xpyto. 8. Kat avrot €BovdevovTo et Ta oKevodopa 
3 lal » Cee J af : Ve! x , : 
evTav0a ayouTo 4 atiovey én T6 oTpaTémedov. 9. TpL- 
, ee , See , F) , 
Hpeis” Kove TepiTAcovTas amt Iwvias ets Kudcktav. 
10. 6 8 dmexpivato 67 axovor “ABpokdpav éxOpov 
¥ 5 a ‘al Ea , A co ll \ 4 
avopa emt T@® Evdpatryn moray elvan. . Kal €ws 
pevomev avTov oKeTTéov €oTt OTS aodaéeoTaTa pEva- 
: 9 = Pein N , \_ 83 
pev. 12. aopevréov Hew TOUS TpwTOVs TTABpoUS 
1 Tnflected like mAnpns (335), but has recessive accent in the gen. of th 
dual and plural (821). 7 ; 


2 Se. éori. 


3 Cog. ace. (261). 


PARTICIPLES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 335 


pe Y 3 A 
ws av Suvapefa paxpordtous' tva ws trEtoTOY®? azo- 


oracbapev Tod BaoitKod oTparedmaros. 





II. 1. We must consider how we shall have provi- 
~sions. 2. I know that right hands have been given by 

us. 3. Clearchus formerly was manifestly plotting 
against us. 4. For I am conscious to myself of having 
deceived him in all things. 5. But when Ariaeus per- 
ceived that Cyrus had fallen, he fled with all the army 
which he commanded. 


784. VOCABULARY. 
Tpinpys, adj., fitted; y Tpi- avv-o1da, share in know!l- 
npns (vais), trireme, edge, be conscious. 
war vessel (821). xpnle, (ypno-), want, de- 
Tepi-Tréw, sail around. sire, need. 


det, it is a duty, it is necessary. Set regularly takes the 
infinitive subject accusative to express. duty, obligation. 
With the dative instead of the accusative it more fre- 
quently has the notion of need, Lat. debeo, ypy has 
more reference to use, utility ; it ws useful, u is of 
advantage, Lat. oportet. 


785. R. re, pay. rho, pay honor, value ; ti-ph, ~Hs, 
honor, worth, value; a-rijwo-s, -o-v, without honor, dis- 
honored; atipalw, dishonor; didd-rijo-s, -o-v (cf. didos, 
797), loving honor, ambitious ; rip-vo-s, -a, -o-v, valued, 
honored ; ripd-w, value, honor ; tip-wpd-s, -o-v (fopo-s,? 


1 
2 


@s .. . pakpordrous, as long as possible. 
as tAcioTov, as far as possible ; cf. 384, Nn. 2; 640, 4. Here there is 
an ellipsis of some form of dvvaya. Cf. os in the preceding N. (1). 

3 Cf. dpdo. 


336 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


watcher), upholding honor, avenging ; Tipmp-ia, -as, help, 
vengeance ; Tiwwpé-w, succor, avenge. 
timo-cracy, timo-cratic, Timo-thy. 


4 86. Mock Charge of the Greeks. Cyrus sends the Queen home 
escorted by Menon, and continues his March to Dana. 


Review 141, 142, 239, 261, 0; 285, 357, 621, 721, 
2; 723, 1; 774. 

17. *Ered) 5€ rdavras tapyhace, oryoas TO appa 

a A , , , Api ite , N 
mpo* THs parayyos, Tépbas Itypynta Tov epunvéa Tapa 

‘ ‘ “A C+ry - 5 - 4 
Tous oTpatyyous Tov EhAnvev exéhevoe tpoBaréo bar 

A Y \ 3 ‘a 4 \ , e 4 
Ta oTha Kal emiywpynoar oAnv THv dadrayya. ot de 
TAUTG TPOELTOV TOLS OTpaTLa@TaLs* Kal ere exddmy€e, 

2 b > , > \ 4 a 

TpoBahrouevor TA OTTAa Erryecav. €k dé TovTov Oarrov 
MpolovTwy* ovv Kpavyn amd TOV avToudrov Spdmos 
éyéveTo TOS GTpaTidTais” éml Tas OKHVGS. 

18. Tov dé BapBdpwr® ddBos* words, Kai y TE 

, ¥ Fe = A € , \ e b ia 
Kikiooa epvyey emt THS appayatns Kal ot é« THs 
3 A 5 , scar, ¥ a e€ oe, . 
ayopas” KatahurdvTes TA Wri Evyov’ ot dé “EAAnves 

\ , > \ ‘ s a e \ s ; 
ov yédore ert Tas oKnvas AOov. 7H dé Kidtooa 
idsovoa THY hapmpoTynTa Kal THY Tak TOU OTpaTEdpLa- 
tos ® €Bavpace. Kipos dé noOn tov éx Tov “EXAjvav® — 
eis ToUs BapBdpovs PdoBov idar. 

19, “Evrebfev eehavver orabpovs tpets tapacdyyas 
cikoow €is ‘Ikdriov THs Ppvyias modu éoydryy. év- 
wn Yy “~ e - 3 A“ b] y ./ Q “w 
Tava ewewe pets Nucpas. evTedfer Eedavver Sid THS 
Avkaovias oTa0povs révTe Tapacdyyas tpidKovra. 

4, ‘ (a 3 7 PS , wy ¢ a gF 
TavTny THY x@pav Eeméerpepe Svaptaca.’ Tots "EAAnow 
os Todeuiay ovoav.® 

20. *Evrevbev Kupos tiv Kituooar eis thy Kiduxiav 
aroTéuTe THY TAXtaTHY 6d0v"* Kal Guverembev aiTH 





, 
Aava, 


READING LESSON. 


337 


oTpatioras ovs Mevwr cixe Kat aitov Mévwva* Kipos 
d€ pera Tov add\wv e€edXavver dia Kanmadokias orab- 
-pous TérTapas Tapacdyyas elkoou Kal TéeVTE TPOS 
TOW oiKouperny, peyadnv Kal evdaipova. 
evTavla euewav nucpas Tpets’ ev @* Kupos améxrevev 


avdpa Wéponv Meyadéprvnv, dowixvotyiy Bacideor, 


A 9 a , 
“Kal €TEpoV TVA TOV UTApXwV, aiTLacapevos e7LBou- 


Aedew aiTo. 


Epunvevs, -€ws, 6, imlerpre- 
| ter (hermeneut). 
mpo-Badho, throw forward ; 
mpoBaréoOar ta oma, 
advance their arms for an 
attack (King., charge bay- 
onets). 

E€TL-Kopew, advance. 

Odos, -n, -ov, whole, entire ; 
olny tiv ddrayya, the 
phalanx in a body [cath- 
olic |. 

cadzrilw, sound the trumpet ; 
impers., éet €oadmuy€e, 
when the trumpeter (vah- 


7 


muyKTyns) sounded the 
charge. 
> / > / 
avTouartos, -y, -ov (avrds), 
self-prompted ; amo Tov 
avTowarov, voluntarily. 
kata-hetrw, leave behind, 
abandon. 
” - ‘ 
@VLOS, -a, -ov, for sale ; Ta 
ovia, wares. 
vedas, -wros, 6, laughter. 
Aapmporys, -yTos, n, bril- 
hancy, splendor. 
howikioTys, -ov, wearer of 
the purple. 


aitudopar, charge, accuse. 


a. Give special attention to the prepositions of this lesson. 


1 Se. at’ray, gen. absol. 
2 Syntax ? 


The soldiers broke into a run upon the camp, but below én 


“tas oxnvas 7AGov, dispersed to their own tents. 


3 Syntax ? 


4 Se. jv. 


5 6,2 a > ee ~s a> a 4 > a > a 
Ol EK TNs ayopas epuyov 5 — Ol EV TH ayora ecbuyov €K THs ayopas. 


6 Cf. 79.63 rov.. 
the barbarians. 
7 See 267, 13. 


. PoBov, the terror with which the Greeks inspired 


8 Sc. xpdv@; cf. p. 3277. 


338 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


LESSON LXIX. 


INDIRECT QUOTATION OF COMPLEX 
SENTENCES. — ELLIPSIS, ETC. 


Review 720, 721, 1, 2, 3; 722, 723; 1, 2, 3; 724, 
725, 752, 5, (1), (2); 755, 5, 8, 12; 768, 1, 2, 3, a, 4, 
c,d; 769, a, b, c, d; 770, 776, 777, 778, 780, 1, 2, a. 


787. Indirect Quotation of Complex Sentences. 


RULE. 


1. When a complex sentence is quoted indirectly, 
the leading verb follows the rules for simple sentences 
(723, 1; 768, 1; and 776). 

2. After primary tenses, dependent verbs retain the 
same mood and tense ; after secondary tenses, they may 
be either changed to the same tense of the optative or re- 
tained in their original mood and tense; but dependent 
secondary tenses of the indicative remain unchanged 
(723, 3; 768, 2, 3, a). 


a. When a subjunctive becomes optative, av is dropped 
(723, 3, a). 

6. One verb may be changed to the optative, while another 
remains unchanged (771, 7). 


788. Implied Indirect Discourse. 
The rule for the change to the optative (787, 2) 
applies also to all dependent clauses which express 


INDIRECT QUOTATION OF COMPLEX SENTENCES. 339 


indirectly the thoughts of another person. This con- 


struction applies especially to causal clauses expressing 
another’s reason (717, a), clauses depending upon final 
clauses (755, 6, N. 5), upon the infinitive with verbs of 


commanding, wishing, etc. (771, 13), or upon verbs of 
emotion, wonder, etc.: ot & @xrecpov, eb dddécouTo, they 


pitied them if they were to be captured. 


a. Upon this principle depends the use of the optative in 
final clauses (579, a), or after €ws or mpiv, expressing past in- 
tention, or expectation (708, 8). 


789. LMilipsis. 

1. The subject is generally omitted when it is a pro- 
noun of the first or second person, unless emphatic 
(393). . 

2. he nominative of the third person is omitted 
when it is implied in the context, and without emphasis : 
ikavetatos €oTe ev Tovety, dv av BovdrAnTaL, he is most 
able to benefit whomever he pleases. 

3. When it is a general idea of persons: dé€yovor, 
they say. 

4. When it is indefinite, or when the verb implies its 
own subject. The verb is then said to be impersonal : 
paxns det, there is need of a battle; Kadds eye, it is 
well; éaadmuy€e, the trumpeter sounded the trumpet 
(786, vocab.). 

5. Verbs are called impersonal also that have an in- 
finitive or clause as subject: Se?, yp7, it is necessary, one 
ought ; Soxet, it seems best, good, etc. (721, 1). 

790. 1. ‘The copulative verb is frequently omitted, 


340 - THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


especially in the forms éort and eiot, and with such 
words as d7\os, €ro.os, Suvardés, apa, avayKn, etc. : 
apa déyew, it is time to speak (p. 288'; 786, N. 4). 
2. Any verb may be omitted where it is readily under- 
stood from the context, especially the common verbs of 
being, doing, saying: ov Te yap “EXXnp el, Kat Hpets (sc. 
éopev “EXAnves), for you are a Greek, and so are we 
(392, 8; p. 287%, p. 301*). 


791. EXERCISES. 
~ . A y ean > , so > ~ 
1. djdos yap ore Hyty emOnoa. 2. eddKa avTa@ 
a , A] 3 nO 4 ees | a 
non Tmopever Oar. . Noe TEepvyevopmevos av* Tov 
dVvTLOTATLWTO@Y, € TOUTO yevoiTO. 4. avayKn dH pov 
o~ 4 2? A 4 y , 9 

7 Kupov didria ypno0a. 5. wore wpa héye 671 TLS 
, x > @ Se Sy cy 2\ Se 
ylyVooKel apioTov evar. 6. Els O€ On Ele, Eav poe 
¢ , 5 PS} ~ , A 4 A 4 3 20) 4 
nyenova 010M, ovvTartecau” THY TayioTynV. 7. EOav- 
palov ore ovdapov Ktpos daivorro ovd adXos am’ avrou 
ovodels mapein, 8. TO Kredpyw €Bda ayew To oTpa- 
TEVA KATA pecoV TO TMV TOhELioy, OTL exer Bacrdeds 

¥ 4 C \ e A > hx is Y jee Soe | - > e? 
ein 9. Kal nuiy y ay oid oTL TavT Emoie, EL EOpPa 

ean , ld \ (a 
nas pevery mapacKkevalopevovs. 10. davepds 8 Hv 
kal, e¢ tis TL ayaldy 7 KakOv Topoeey avToY, VLKaY 

, 6%, eA 4 ‘ Saet< 

Tmepapevos. ll. érédakev avrov ore mept metorov 
TOLOLTO, EL TH OTELTAITO Kal EL TH VTOTYOLTO TL, WHOdEV 
, ¢ Bt Ee Dee Mee: N C3 SN Oe a ct 
wevderOar. 12. od’ Epet oddeis ws eye ews pev av TapH 
aA \ 
TLS KpOpaL, errerdav dé amevar BovrAnTar, rvANaBov Kat 
> ‘\ “~ A ‘\ b) ¥ a 2X , 
avToUs KaK@S ToLo. 13. Kal ovK ehacay tévat, €av My 
A 4 A ‘\ 
TLS aUTOVS KpHpaTa O10, WamTEP? ToOLs TpOTEpOLs PETA 


CC 7, 5. 2 Sc. adrovs. 3 Syntax ? 
* See 717, 788. 5 Sc. dake, as he had given it (790, 2). 


INDIRECT QUOTATION OF COMPLEX SENTENCES. 34] 


: ait epaBags wapa Tov TaTépa Tov Kvpov, kat tadra? 


OUK em peaynv lovTwv. 7. 

II. 1. He desired to live so long a time, until he 
should surpass* his enemies. 2. He replied to Cyrus 
that he would care that it would be well. 38. He said 
that if they should obey him, they would be honored 
more than the rest of the soldiers by Cyrus. 4. He 
said that if he should be there, he desired to inflict pun- 
ishment upon him. 5. He announced that if we had 
not come, they should be marching against the king. 
6. I said to him that he should justly gratify me, be- 
cause I first announced that Cyrus was making an 
expedition against him. 


702. VOCABULARY. 
pede, be a care to; éuot BovrAopa (Bovdy), to wish, 
pede, dis acaretome, — be willing, of choice and 
I take care, see to ut. preference after delib- 
OTEVOW,-OTELTW, ETTELT OA, eration. 
offer a lbation; mid. €0éde, to wish, with more 
make a treaty. reference to natural in- 
oveap.ov, adv., nowhere. stinct; may be used of 
. @o-TrEp, conj., adv, like as, man, irrational animals, 
Just as; as it were. - etc. 


xpnce, desire, long for. 


7093: Cyrus enters Cilicia through the Mountain Pass, and arrives 
at Tarsus. 


Review 158, 212, 239, 314, a; 369, 5; 668, 758, 
768, 1; 770, 776, 786. 


1 And that too, sc. éroince. 2 Se. avrav. 8 Cf. 10, above. 


342 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


21. "EvredOev éereapovto eioBaddew eis* tv Kite 
, = \ 3 \ 9 eQn e N > , 5 nA 
kiav* 7 dé eiaBodn Hv 600s apakirds dp0ia ioyupas 

A~ <9 / > a 4 1 ¥ Des 2 
Kal aunyavos eloeNew orpareduarti, et Tus exddvev. 
\ 7 \ \ , 5 2X a ¥ , 
éd€yero S€ Kal Lvevvecis eivar ETL TOY aKpev dudar- 

\ > Foca > aA ¥ 2 > n s 
Tov Thy eioBodrjv* du oO Ewevvey Huepay Ev TO Tredio. 
a o € , ® 7 , y \  ¥ 3 
™ © voTepaia HKev ayyedos héywy ori hedouTras Ein 

, \ » 3 \ » 9 4 , 
Lvevveris Ta aKpa, EEL YoOETO Gotu TS TE Mévwvos 

, ¥ > 4 G4. a sv \ ¢ 
oTparevpa dn ev Kidixia Av* etow Tov dpéwv, Kal Ort 

, » , RSE Pee Oe , > , 
Tplnpers yKove TEpiTAECOVTAs” aw Iwvias els KudtKiav 

‘\ 7 \ > ~ = 
Tas Aakedaipoviwr Kai avrov Kupov. 

22. Kupos 8’ ody avéBn emi Ta Opn ovdevds KwAvov- 
Tos’ Kat €lde Tas OKNVas ov ot Kiduxes édvdarrovr.® 
> A \ , > 4 4 ‘\ ‘ 
evrev0ev dé KatéBawev ets mediov péya Kal Kadov, 


* otptrewy Kai apumédwv. opos 8. avro’ 


, 
dévdpav 
mepiexen OXUpov Kal wWydOov TdvTy EK Oadartrys Els 
Oddarrav. 

23. KaraBas dé 61a tovrov tod mediov Hace oral- 
povs TérTapas, Tapacdyyas TévTE Kal EtKooLY, Els 
Tapoovs, THs Kiduxias moduv peyadnv Kat evdaipova. 
evTav0a joav Ta Xvevvéctos Bacihaa Tod Kidricwv 

4 Mi l4 \ ~ é Aga: Xx 
Baothéas' dua péons Sé THs wodews pet ToTapds 
Kvdvos ovopa,' evpos dvo mA pav. 

24. Tavrnv tyv modw €€€durov of EvoukovvTEes peTa 

Lvevvervos els ywpiov dyupdv émt TA Opn TAHY Ol TA 

na YY es \ tical es. , 
Kamnieta exovTes’ eweav dé Kat of Tapa THY Oddart- 
Tav olkouvTes Ev YdAous Kat ev “lawots. 


opfos, -a, -ov, steep. elo-€pyouat, go or come in, 
auUNxXavos, -ov, Unpractica-- _ enter. 


ble, impossible (710). dé&vdpor, tree. 


IRREGULAR VERBS (np, Har, Ketpwar. 343 


“ obp-theas, -ov, full, filled anmdds, -7,-dv, high, lofty. 


with (734). Kamyreov, To, stall, shop, 
aumehos, 1, vine, grape- in [Lat. caupo, huck- 
vine. ster, whence cheap]. 


dupes, -a, -dv, tenable, for- 
tified by nature. 


a. Note the uses of prepositions of this lesson. 

1 Syntax ? . 

2 €xwdvev, attempted action, trying to oppose (114, end). 

3 Why the optative ? 

4 What mood would be expected here ? 

5 Syntax ? (783, 9). 

6 See 755, 7. The imperfect, épdAarrov, expresses continued action 
prior to that of the main verb, hence with plupertect force, had been guard- 
ing (cf. p. 2571). Note that the English and Greek pluperfects are not 
equivalent terms (314, 2). The English pluperfect expresses mere priority 
of time; the Greek denotes an action continuing in its effect up to the time 
of the main verb; the aorist, on the other hand, denotes momentary or 

transient acts (cf. 802, 12). 


LESSON. LXX. 
IRREGULAR VERBS in, hua, Ketpar. 


Review 617, 619, a-g; 712, 729, a-g; 739, a. 

794. Conjugate imu [é-], send; KéOnwar! [kard + - 
nua, no-|, sit down; and ketpar |Ke-, Ke-], le. (861, 
862, 863). 

a. Observe that imme is inflected like té@nmt, except in the 


third person plural which has ¢@ov, and in the second person 
singular of the second aorist middle which has eioo. 


1 KaOnuat is commonly used in-Attic for Hat, sit. 


844 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


6. Observe that «a@@nua has only the present system; and 
that o of the theme is regularly dropped before the endings ; the 
optative is the same as in @ verbs. 

ce. Observe that xetwat has subjunctive and optative as in @ 
verbs. 


705. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. tevto womep av Spdpou tis wept vikns. 2. os 
ede TOV OTpaTnyov SieAavvorTa, inot iOw. 3. SyHdos 
np av TavTa Tomy, el euévouev. 4. eyparbe emucro- 
Anv wapa Bacrhéa ore HEou €xwv imméas ws av SvvyTras 

Ld o~ ‘ , 22% al Y ¥, 
mreiotous. 5. TH O€ Tpitn emi Tov appatos Kaby- 
pevos THY topeiav émovetro. 6. Kipos 8€ ards Te 
> 4 \ > A ey ~ ‘N ae ” > 3 
ameave Kal OKT@ OL ApLtoToL TOV TEPL AUTOV EKELVTO ET 

ae i , > > ee. N¢ e , , 
aut@. 7. ovtos Kipe cimer, ei aita@ Soin imméas xudI- 

9 A \ 2 A d y A 
ovs, oT. Cavtas todkdovs avrav av e€dot. 8. ToUToU 
EE 1 , e , > \N Q Si AQ Ys 
evexa PBaorl€a viemtTevey emt TO TEdLOY TO LOWP 
2 s 7 a , > A + , a Bae 
adekevar. 9. Soxet S€ por afiody 4 TeicavTa” nuas 
¥ i , \ - > , & 
ayev » tweaclérvta mpos didiay adiévar. 10. ovror 
2 eee: > wad ‘ , , bs n 
dé dru ovK HOedre Tos hevyovTas mpoécAar éepoBovvTo 
QuTov. 


II. 1. But another and another threw stones at him. 
2. But there was a hill above them upon which the 
guards were encamping. 3. For now these good things 
lie in our midst. 4. But saying, “I see the man,” he 
rushed upon him and wounded him through his breast- 
plate. 5. Very many desired to entrust to him both 
their property and cities. 


1 vexa follows its case. 
2 Agrees with the subject of dyew understood. 


IRREGULAR VERBS inp, pat, KEipwar. 345 


706. VOCABULARY. 
ad-inut, send away, let go, Keipar, Ketoopar, lie, he 
let flow. | : dead ; used as the pas- 
dv-ekduva, ride or drwe sive of TiOnpu, be placed, 
through, be laid, be situated | ceme- 
input [é&|, How, HKa,' eka,” tery |. 
efuar, elOnv, send, throw; ampo-inus, send forth ; mid., 
mid., send or throw one’s commit, entrust, surren- 
self, rush, charge. der. 


KaO-yua, sit down, be 
— seated, be encamped. 


797. didos, one’s own, dear. tho-s, -n, -ov, dear, 
beloved ; 6 dhidro-s, a friend ; did-to-s, -a, -o-v, friendly ; 
gid-ia, -as, affection, friendship ; drdré-w, love ; hth-ur10-s, 
-o-v (tartos, horse), fond of horses ; hidd-Onpo-s, -o-v (Ohpa, 
a hunt), fond of hunting ; diro-Kivdivos, -o-v (kivdevos), 
fond of danger, adventurous ; diro-pabys, -€s (wavOdva), 
fond of learning ; dido-1ddep0-s, -0-v (7ddEp10-s), fond of 
war ; puirsaodo-s, 6 (codd-s), lover of wisdom, a philoso- 
pher. 

Philip, philtre, sophist, . phil-anthropy, phil-ippic, 
philo-logy, philo-sophy. 


7 98. Menon loses two Companies in the Passage of the Moun- 
tains. Cyrus and Syennesis meet. Exchange of Gifts. 


Review 66, 141, 142, 182, 225, 369, 3; 385, 386, 
705, 707, 723, 1; 793. 
25. *Emvaka dé 4 Svevvéoros yur) mpotépa Kvpov' 


1. See 730, 4, 5. 2 See 649. 


346 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


> 3 \ en 4 A 
Tévte nuepais' eis Tapaovs adixero’ ev de TH UTEpBodrH 
aA > Reese opt | a > \ ot 5 , do a) Mé 
Tov dpav' TH els TO Tediov dVo Adyou TOV Mévwvos 
, b) aN Pap ¢€ 1.3 Eb ¢ al ss 
oTpatevpatos am@\ovTo’” ot pev” ehacay apmalov 
lal mn € 
Tas TL KaTakoTnvar UTd ToV Kidjikwv, ot dé vrode- 
A + 4 
pbevtas* Kai od Suvapeévous evpeiv TO AAO OTPaTEevpa 
i 4-2 € 
ovee TAS OdOvs atohécOa* joav 8 ovv ovTOL ExaTov 
om\tr au. 
4 
26. Oi & addou eel HKov, THY TE TOMY SinpTaca?r, 
» lal a , ‘ ‘ 
dua TOV OACOpov TaV GVOTpaTLwTaV dpylopevar, Kal TA 
‘ ~ wn QA 5 > 
Bacihaa ta ev aitn. Kitpos dé émei ciondacer eis 
€ 4 € 
THY TON, pETETEeUTTETO TOV YvevvETW pods EavToV' O 
* nw > A 
& ovre mpdtepov ovdevi® mw Kpeitrou® Eavrod’ eis yei- 
va ¥ \ e 
pas ehOewv? ebn ovre Tore Kipw” iévar nOede, plv 4 
‘ eR ¥ \ la “dr 
yuvn avrov ereoe Kal miores eae. 
27. Mera S€ ravra émel cuveyévovto addqXots," 
4 \ x 4 / \ > \ 
Lvevveris ev edwKke Kipw ypyuata mokda els THY 
wma a a \ 
otpatiav, Kipos 8 éxeivw' dopa & vopilerar mapa 
Baothet’ ripia, trmov’ ypvooxyddwov Kal otperrov 
Xpvoovv Kail Wédia Kal aKivdkny ypvcodv Kal oTo- 
Anv Tlepoukjv' Kal Thy yopay pynkeéri abapraler bars 


- oToXAn, -Ns, robe. 
. Byker, not again (as at Tarsus). 
ad-apralw, plunder, pillage. 


1 Syntax ? * Agreement and force ? 
2 Give the prin. parts. 5 Cf. 740, 13, wn. 2, 3. 
8 Whiat force? See of dé, below. ® Compare and decline. 


7 At the king’s court. 
8 One of the objects of Saxe ; see 790, 2. 





REVIEW. 347 


LESSON LXXI. 


REVIEW. 


Review 723, 1, 2, 3, a; 724, 725, Lessons LXVL-— 
Xe: 


799. Perfect Middle System of Consonant Themes. — 
Irregular Verbs. — 

1. How is the third person sae of the perfect and 
pluperfect middle of consonant themes formed ? 

2. Explain the formation of the periphrastic future. 

3. Write the perfect and pluperfect indicative middle 
of Kekevo, aprrdlw, TéuTrw, ayw, paivw, and explain the 
euphonic changes of the concurrent consonants. 

4. Conjugate the perfect middle system of deta, 
TatTw, and eiOw. 

5. Give the inflection of otda. 

6. Conjugate the-present and second aorist — 
of ine. 

800. Summary of Constructions in Indirect Discourse, 
ete. 

1. Give rule for the use of the infinitive in indirect 
discourse. 

2. What verbs take the object saithitive P P 

3. Distinguish between the use of the tenses of the 
object infinitive and those of the infinitive in indirect 
discourse. 


348 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


4, Give the rule for changing simple sentences into 
indirect discourse after ore and as. 

5. Give the forms of indirect discourse that follow 
the three common verbs of sayiq. 

6. What verbs take the participle in indirect dis- 
course P . 

7. What constructions follow d7yAds eipu, ete. ? : 

8. Explain the uses of the tenses of the participle i in 
indirect discourse. 

9. Distinguish between the participle in indirect 
discourse and the participle after verbs of perceiving, 
Jinding, etc. 

10. Give the principles governing the use of av in 
subordinate and principal clauses in indirect discourse. 

11. What is the principle governing the negatives in 
Indirect discourse P 

12. In how many ways are simple sentences indirectly 
quoted ? 

13. How are all subordinate clauses indirectly 
quoted P 

14. Give the rule for changing ‘pomplex sentences to 
indirect discourse. 

15. Distinguish between expressed and implied indi- 
rect discourse. 

16. Give the formation of the verbal adjectives. Give 
the construction of the verbal adjectives in reos, and 
examples in Greek. | 

801. Lllipsis, ete. 

1. When can the subject of an infinitive be omitted ? 


REVIEW. 349 


‘When the subject of an infinitive is omitted, with what 
do the predicate nouns and adjectives agree P 

2. When can the subject of a finite verb be omitted ? 
When can the verb be omitted? Give examples of the 
ellipses of the latter. 
_ 8. Distinguish between the use of yp7 and Se; of 
BovrAopat and éfédrw. 

4. Give words allied to orpards and diXos. 

5. Give a brief abstract of the reading lessons within 
this review. 


802. EXERCISES. . 


1. Kaka ov péddovor Torey. 2. ovTOL TPO avTOd 
> ¥ 
Baciréws TeTaypeva Hoav. 3. avOpwids tis Hpdrynce 
Tovs PvAakas tov ay too IIpdEevov. 4. Hparnoer el 
ol oOTpaTL@TaL TeTELTpEvoL Einoay. 5. péddEL THY ye 
wn l4 gal . 54 , 
gupav vga. Tiocadépyyns THs vuKTos, éav Sdvyrar. 
s 

6. addXov' ovtwos” adv Sénobe ofda oti ws didov” 
tevEeobe Kipov.® 7. dvioravto ot S€ kal tm’ éxeivou 
> aN > 5 4 4 + e > , ¥ A 
EYKEAEVTTOL ETLOELKVYULTES OLA Ein 7 ATOpia avev THS 
Kvpov yvouns Kat pevey Kal ameévar. 8. ws pev 
OTpaTnyyoovTa® eue TavTyY THY oTpaTyyiay,’ poets 
e a , . ‘ \ > A 8 3. ayes ‘ ~ > 
vpov heyérw* tohdka yap evop® Ov a EmLol TOUTO Ov 
mounteov. 9. npiy Sé ye, olor, mavTa TounTéa ws 

la > a % A , , , 
pymot émt tots BapBdapows yevoueba. 10. ravrns 
ovv eveka THS Tapddov Kupos tas vavs pereréubaro, 
9 , ‘ , , > , 
omws Buawdpevor TOVS Todepious TapedOorev, et pudar- 


1 @dov for adXo, obj. of revEerOe (439), whatever else you need. 

2 Syntax ? 3 See 409. 

4 &s otpatnynoorta, acc. after Aeyerw. The part. with ws approaches 
indirect discourse (776). ; 


350 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


2 \ a s , ¢ Ween y 7% ~ 
Tovey emi Tats Yupiars mUAas* 11. Kat eOds maou 
iy > 4 20D / \ a NTS a 
ois evervyxavey Boa Kal BapBapikws Kal eAdnviKas, 
ore Baoied’s dv oTpaTedpaTL TOAA@® TpoTEpyerat ws 
. 4 7 b] \ A 8 4 
els paynv maperkevacpevos. 12. eset d€ 6 MiP pidarns 
, "ee . ae , > a 1 
KaTedype avTovs Kat yon Tokedpata e€ixvodrTo, 
éonpnve*® tots “EXAnow TH oadmuyyt, Kal evOds eov 
, ee A \ ee A » ‘ . 
dpdum ot OmAira Kat ot tmmeis HrAavvov’ 13. apov- 
, \ > SN \ € \ , p) p/ , 
deddxeray S€ avrovs Kal ot ody Kip@ avaBdvtes Bap- 





3 


, de Xr yX , = poe e 4 
Bapo., povor o€ Katadedeyppevor Yoav ovde imméa 


> , 4 » 4 “ > 9 la 
ovdeva oUppaxov ExovTes, wate SHrAOV HY OTL ViKOP- 
25 , x ge 3-9 3 A an 
Tes ovdeva av Katakavorey, 14. eimdvtos® dé Tov 
"Opovra Oru ovdev ® aduKnOeis ErBovrevwr ait@ davepds 
4 b] , Ce. “ : MES, c “~ oy 
yeyove. ypwtnoey o° Kupos avrov, Opodoyets ovv 
ae ee “1 4 A 75 8 Meds. 4 ¥ e 
TEpt Ewe adikos* yeyernoba ; “H® yap avayKy, edn o 
> , b) , , > , € la) » > 
Opovras. €k TovTov Tahw npwtnoev o Kupos, Ext ovv 


adv yevowo® T@ eu@ adeAh@ Tohepos, Ewol dé didos Kai 
, e Qi > , Y 9? eek. , BS un 
TLITOS ; 6 O€ ameKpivaTo ort Ovd ‘ Ei yevoimnv, @ Kupe, 


, a a ¥ , 
got y av more ert OdEatm. 


803. VOCABULARY. 

éyKédevoros,® -ov, bidden, Bialopar [B.rad-], Brdco- 
incited, urged on |ke- pat, etc., force one’s way, 
Leva |. Jorce or compel. 


, e b] , “4 
oadmuy€, -vyyos, n, trumpet. €v-opdw, see in, sce, observe. 


1 Cf. 793, n. 6. 8 Syntax ? 

2 Force of the tense ? * Why not ace. ? 

5 7H yap, etc., sc. €oriv duoroyetv (790, 1, 2), (yes), for, indeed, it is 
necessary, etc. 

6 Explain the mood. 

7 What does ovd¢ limit ? (694, 9). § Cf. 373, 521. 


READING LESSON. 351 


éE&tavéopar, reach, reach mpo-didiam, give up, surren- 


the mark, hit. der, abandon. See 647. 
6uo-Aoyéw, agree, confess, mpoo-epxopal, come or go 
acknowledge. See 689. to or towards, approach, 
Tap-epxouat, pass by or advance. 
along. 9, adv., indeed, really, truly, 
certainly. 


SELECTIONS FROM THE ANABASIS. 


804. The Troops refuse to advance. Speech of Clearchus. 


Review 120, 202, 249, 269, 422, 439, 579, 581, 681, 
687, 690, 715, 721, 1, 2, 3; 723, 1, 2, 3; 780, 2; 
790, 1, 2; 798. 

1. "Evrad0a guewe Kipos kai 7 oTpatia nuépas etKo- 
ow" ol yap oTpaTiaTar ovK Ehacay i€va TOV Tpdcw ** 
e 4 ‘ ¥ I+ Xg , If, = A 
bremtevov yap yon emt” Baoiléa tévar* picbwln- 

an oy FON 4 ¥ a 2 A , 
vat d€ ovK emt TOUT@ Ehacayv. mMpaTos* dé Kiéapyos 
N eon s 3 s 8 27 i e \ naeiey 
Tovs avTov oTpatidtas €Bidlero® igvar* ot dé avrov 
yy ‘ a’ ¢ 4 ‘\ 3 4 > \ »¥ 4 
te €Baddov Kal TA vTolUyla TA EKElvoU, Emel apEawvTO 
Tpolevan. 
2. Kréapyos dé tore peév. puxpov e&épuye py) Kara- 
aA 5 NA ? > A * 9 > 8 , 6 
metpwOnvat. vorepov O, émet eyvw ort ov Suvycera 
Bidcacba, cvvyyayey éxk\ynoiay Twv avTov oTpaTia- 
TOV* Kal Tpa@Tov pev eddKpveE TOhdY ypovov éEaTas. ol 
d€ d6pavres COavpalov Kal éovdtwv' cira ede€e Toudde’ 

3. “Avdpes orpari@rat, yy Oavudlere, ote yaeTas 
hépw TOis Tapovor mpdypacww.' épwol yap Kdpos E€évos 
eyeveto Kai pe devyovtra ex THS TaTpioos Ta TE adda 


352 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


22 ‘ 7 »” 4, ae a | x 
eripnoe Kal pupiovs edwKe Saperkovs* ovs eyo aBav 
> > \ » , 3 \ 7 > > > ec lal 3 4 
ouk eis TO LOvov KaTeHgunv Eepol,' add Els tuas edama- 
vov. 
4. Kat mparov pev éri Tovs Opakas eroheunoa Kat 
e % “A ec 4 3 4 b] e lanl > A 
vmép THs “EdAddos éripwpovpnv pe? vor, ex THS 
Xeppovycouv avrovs e€ehavvav Bovdopévous acaipet- 
‘ ‘\ 5] lal yY \ ~ b] \ \ 
ofa. tovs évorkovvtas “EhAnvas thy ynv. émevd7 Se 
Ktpos éxahe, haBov vuas éropevdunv, tva, et TL €- 
8 


Pee | , Yee eu > @ @ > » fa Hee Meee Wee 
oro, wpedoinv® avrov av wv” ev exallov vi €Exeivov. 


5. “Emet d€ ders od Bovrdeobe covpropeverOa, 
avaykn® dy por ) vas mpoddvTa’”’ TH Kupov didria’ 
es A x X b] la , 10 A’ eon 27 
xpnalar 7 mpos exetvov Wevodpevov” wel’ vor Lévat. 
> \ \ , 4 > 3 ; e 4 1 b) 3 
el pev 81) dikata moujow ovK oda, aipyooua: 5 ov 
CEA ‘ \ We y 1l x d¢ 4 , \ aA . 
vpas, Kal OUY vuly OTL” av OEN* TELTOMaL. Kal OVTOTE 
Epel ovdels ws eyad, EdAnvas ayayav eis Tovs BapBa- 

7 A 

pous, mpodovs” tovs “EXAnvas tiv tav BapBdpwv 
didiayv ethounv. | 

6. "AAN ézrel tpets emol’ ob Oédere weiMeaOar ovde 
Y 6 > oN N en °¢ \ ¢ my Ss , 
ereoOar, eyo ovv viv eboua Kal OTL ay S€y TEicopmat. 

, \ en. 9 \ \ , N , \ 
vopila yap vuas €mot eivat Kal TaTpioa Kal pidovs Kat 
TUMpaYous, Kal ody viv” pev av olpar eivar”* TipLos 
y XN gs he teen f Se ¥ a. 79 > Xd ec \ “2 
omov av @,° vuav' d€ epnos WY” OUK GV iKavos Eivat 

bs A 
ovr av dihov wdedknoat ovr av’ éyOpov adreEacGar. 
e b] A > >F7 17 9 x \ e a 18 Y A 
@S €“ov ovv tovTos” omy av Kal vpEls,” OUT@ THY 
yrounv exere. 


Tpoow, adv., forward. ovv-dyw, bring together, 

Kata-TmeTpdw, -eretpalnr, call. 3 
stone to death |mérpos, Saxpdw, weep [TEAR]. 
slone ; petrel]. ovwmaw, be silent. 





RETROVERSION. 353 


tduos, -a, -ov, personal, to my own personal use 
private ; 75 Wuov, one’s ~ [idiom]. 
own property, benefit; Kata-tiOnpr, place away, 
> XX 3 7 
eis TO (Ovcov . . . epol, hoard. 


a. Note the use of the peposiit’ans of this lesson. 

1 rod mpdo@, prose use ot the gen. of place, as the adverbs in -ov, — 
ov, avTov, etc. 

2 mparos, he was the first to undertake it ; mp@rov would mean that he 
did this before something else. 


8 Give force of the imperfect. ® Cf. 791, 4. 

4 Explain the mood. 10 What case would be expected ? 
5 See 119. 11 See 708, 3. 

® What mood might have been used? 12 What force ? 

7 Syntax ? 18 What force ? (716, end.) 

® See 755, 6. 4 Explain the mood (722, 7, 8). 


8 Grov av &, wherever I may be, represents the supposed future case 
more vividly than the more regular dézov einv (686, a). This condition, hav- 
ing protasis and apodosis of different forms, is called a mixed condition. 

16 dy belongs to eivat, repeated for emphasis. 

W &s é€uod_obv idvros, gen. absol. with as (802, 8), éue ievae, might have 
been used. 

18 What verb is understood with tpeis ? 


805. Translate :* 


1. The soldiers refuse to go against the king. 2. For 
they said that they had not been hired for this. 3. Cle- 
archus was the first to begin to advance. 4. The sol- 
diers wondered that Clearchus was distressed at the 
state of affairs. 5. Clearchus did not lay up the darics 
for his own use, but expended them upon his soldiers. 
6. I will join? Cyrus, that, if he has any need of me, 
I may aid him in return for the benefits I have received 

1 Most of the words in these exercises appear in the Greek narrative. 


2 qropevopat. 
23 


354 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


from him. 7. Clearchus said that he would choose his 
own soldiers instead of Cyrus, and in their company 
would suffer whatever might be necessary. 


805. The Soldiers approve. Claeurtiis sends a secret Message 
to Cyrus, and makes a Secénd Address. ; 


Review 369, 3; 370, 1, 2; 398, 581, 589, 681, 705, 
717, 725, 739, 5; 790, 1, 2; 804. 


A 5 rd \ lay 4 5 “93 , 
7. Tadra eimev* ot d€ OTPATLWTAL, OL TE AUTOU EKELVOU 





a , P yo 
Kat of dAAo, TadTa aKkovoartes ernverav’ Tapa de 


Seviov kat Haciwvos mielous’ 7 dirxidtor AaBovres 


Ta ét\a Kal Ta okevoddpa éoTpaToTEdevaavTO Tapa 
x 1 


- 
KAcapyo. 
: la) b) A 

8. Kdpos dé tovtos* amopar 

, \ , ae ¢ ho re \ > x4. 
pereréumero Tov Kiéapyov' 6 d€ tévar pev ov HOehe, 
hdOpa 8é Trav orpariwtdv* TéuTwv aiT@ adyyedov Eheye 
5 


3 \ , ; 
TE Kal AvTOvpEVOS 


Jappetv as Katactnoopever® tovTwy eis Td Séov' 
, S 3 /, > , Hf Ss  & 8 > » 
peraméumerOar 8 éxédevey adttov’ avtos 8 ovK ey 
tévat. 
9. Mera de ravra ouvayayar Tovs pel” EavTov orpa- 
, Red & hO6 2 7g \ as tXX 
TioTas Kal Tovs mpooedOdvTas aiT@” Kal Tav addov 
tov Bovddpevov ede€e Tordde ° 
—"Avdpes otpariorar, Ta pev d1 Kipov dHdov? ore 
: P A Y A 
ovTws ever® pds NUaS WOTEP TA HueTEpa TPdS EKELVO 
ovTE yap nuels exelvou” é€r. oTpatiorat, emel ye ov 
f ba: ~~» 2 A x ¢ na 7 0 SS 
cuverrouela avro,” ovre exeivos ert Huty' proboddrns. 
10. "Ore pévrou aduxetobar vopile tf’ hyov otda’ 
5 


9 \ lA > A 3 > , b] lal \ 
WOTE KAL PMETATELTOMEVOUV GAUTOUV OVUK EOdrw €dOeiv, 7d 


8 


> y “ , 
pev péeyrorov® aioxuvopevos or. ovvowa ewavT@ mavTa 


es en 


READING LESSON. 343 


epevopévos avtov, emeta Kat Sedvds pry AaBadv® pe 
- 66 > An ges ey / en *es A 5 A 0 

ixnv emOn” wv” voile. ut Ewou HouKyoU a. 
11. *Epot obv Soxet ody dpa civar” nuiv Kabeddev”™ 
ovd dpedrely uav avTav, adda BovreverOar oT ypr 
2 


MOLELY EK TOUTWV. 
10 


NOP, , a 
Kal EWS YE MEVOMEV AUTO, TKETTEOV 


y . € > la , 9 ¥ 
oTws ws aopa€otaTa pEevwper, EL 
0 9 


poo. Soket eivar 
» Tal > , 1 9 e > / »¥ 
Te Hon SoKEl amievar,” dws ws adodadr€oTaTa amiper, 
‘\ 4 ‘ b) Py 4 Y, y \ 4 A 
Kal Omws Ta emiTHOELa EEouev’ avev yap TOvTwY OUTE 
OTpaTnyov ovTE oTpatidrov odedos ovder. | 
¢ e Nishi whe n2 \ ¥ , @2 x 
12. ‘0 8 avnp* moddov? péev akios didos @” av 
: ir 3 9 X , 8’ > 0 \ @ Aa hé a 
ditos 7, xarerararos 0 €xOpos @ av Tod€uLos 7. 
¥ de ? ‘ \ \ \ Ne \ 
eyes 0€ OVvamw Kal welHY Kal vaYTLKHY Kal LTLKnD, 
HV TAaVTES Gmolws Opapev TE kat emiaTapeDa* Kal yap 
Se , 8 la 47 10 5 “18 An ra) 9 
ovde moppw dSoKoupév’” po. avtov’” Kalnolar. wore 


4 2: ? Y , ¥ > 
wpa” A€yew OTL TLS YLyVMOKEL ApLOTOV Elva. 


> A > 7 
ELTTF@V ETAVO ATO. 


huréw, pain; grieve. 
haOpa, adv., without the 
knowledge of (havbave). 
Dappéw, be of good courage. 
eis TO Séov (Séw), in the 
right way, satisfactorily. 
pabo-ddrns, -ov, paymaster 
[647]. 
er-eira, adv., then, moreover. 
Kab-evdu, sleep, lie idle. 


1 Compare and explain the form. 
2 Syntax ? 
©*Force ? 


* Depends upon Adépa. 
5 Syntax and force ? 


Lal 
TAUTa 


odeXos, 76, advantage, use. 

melos, -4, -dv, on foot ; 6 
melos, foot-soldier; ot 
meCot, or mely Svvapts, 
enfantry. 

opotws, adv., m like man- 
ner, alike [685]. | 

Toppw, adv., forwards, far 
from. 


_& Cf. 1991, 
¥ CRAT2) a: 


356 THE BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 


8 Chiefly, adv. acc. What is its correlative ? 
® Explain the mood. 


10 Soxéw, to seem, takes the infinitive in indirect discourse; Soxéo, Z6 


seem good or. best, does not take the infinitive in indirect discourse ; but in 
either case the infinitive is the subject except when doxéw, seems, has a per- 
sonal subject (725). For oxerréov . . » eivat, below, see 783, 12. 

11 Depends upon dpa. Give the rule. 

12 x rovtav, in these circumstances. 

18 qirod depends upon wdppo. Give the rule. 


807. Translate : 
l. Both the soldiers of that one himself and the 


others, praised these things. 2. Since Cyrus was- 


troubled about these affairs, he kept sending for Cle- 
archus. 3. But secretly sending a messenger to him, 
Clearchus bade him to be of good courage, since these 
matters would be settled satisfactorily. 4. Although 
he keeps sending for me, I do not wish to go; for I 
fear lest he may seize me and inflict punishment upon 
me for the wrongs he has suffered from me. 5. It is 


not a time for us to lie idle, but to consider what it is” 


necessary to do in these circumstances. 6. Clearchus 
said that Cyrus was a valuable friend to whomsoever he 
was a friend, and a most bitter enemy to whomsoever he 
was an enemy. 


808. Plans proposed by the Soldiers. Clearchus refuses to lead. 


Review 236, 5; 238, ds (241), 245, 579, 581, 663, 


687, 703, 716, 768, 1, 2; 769, d; 778, a2; 782, 15.2; - 


788, 806. 


13 > 8 , ee 2 e \ 3 A b) , 

. "Ex d€ rovTov avioravTo ol pev EK TOU aUVTOMATOL, 
‘ \ \ > , 3 /, 

AeEovres' a eyiyvwokov,” ot S€ Kal vr €Kelvou eyKe- 


READING LESSON. B09 


: 3 , a 4 ¥ 3 e b) 4 + A 
Aevoror, emiderxvivTes* ola ein® 1 amopia avev THs 
Kvpov yvauns Kal pméve Kat amevan. 

14. Efs* dé 81 ete,” rpoorootpevos oreddew ws 
, , ee: t.3 \  ¢€ dr ‘5 ‘ \ 
Tax.oTa Topever au” ets THY EdXada, oTparnyovs pev 
éhéaOar® addous ws TaXLOTA, Eb pry Bovdrerar® Kréap- 

ae ipaps’? eS > , Bar® oars x 
xos dmdyew* Ta 8 émirydeva ayopalerar°—7 8 ayopa 
hv ev T@ BapBapik@ orparevpwati—Kal ovoKevalerbau'® 
eMOdvras* S€ Kipov airety mola, Ws arom)éouev** ea 
dé py 580° radTa, yyeudva aitety® Kipov dotis dua 
z M4 7 a , pean « sot ty 5e Se e / 
girias’ THs xyopas amd&a** éav dé pyndé yyenova 
PS) 8 o , 6 \ , 8 , 6 de \ 
10@, ovvTattecOar® thy TaxioTny, mémpar” OE Kat 

, 9 _\. » Y \ ff , 3 , 
Tpokatahnpouevous” TA akpa, oTws pn POdowor”® parE 
Kdpos pyre ot Kiduxes katadkaBovtes.' otros péev 57) 


2 tocovTov’' 


TovavTa Ele’ pera O€ TOVTOY Kdéapyos eizre 
15. ‘Os pév orpatnyjocovra” eve ravrny Thy oTpa- 

, NE eA s ‘ ‘ ? ~ QO? «a 
Tyyiay pydels vuav eyérw* To\AA yap evopa & a 


oS rn > Aw ehh EVE Se a 3 § UV abn a Si) 
€fou TOUTO OV TOLYTEOV” WS =) TO Qv Pe OV QV EAY- 


obe® reicopa” 4 Suvvatov™ padiara, iva eidnre® ore 
Xs rye g 13) oe , » 
Kal apxyerOau eriorapar” ws Tus Kat aos. 
Tpoo-mroveopar, profess, pretend. 
duvatds, -4, -dv, able, possible (Svvapa.). 
1 Force ? 2 Principal parts ? 
$ Explain the mood. 
4 cis dé Sn, etc., one in particular, ete. 
5 Cf. 771, 13. 8 Of..791, 6. 
6 Syntax ? (769, d.) ; ® Sc. avdpas (637, 9). 
7 Explain position ? 10 Cf. 802, 8. 


11 Se. exaoros Aeyero. 

12 Sc. éori; ef. 735, n. 4, to the best of my ability. 

18 Cf. 778, a. I know how also to be governed, xai is emphatic here as it 
is before dAXos, — as Tis Kal GAXos (as well as) any other man. 


358 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


809. ‘Translate : 

1. He showed that it was not possible to go back 
without the knowledge of Cyrus. 2. One pretended to 
be eager with all possible speed to proceed to Greece. 
3. Let us choose other commanders, if Clearchus does 
not desire to lead us back. 4. A certain one urges 
them to go to Cyrus and ask him for boats, that they 
may sail away. 5. Clearchus said that he would 
obey the man whom they might choose. 6. He pro- 
posed that they should send men to preoccupy the’ 
heights, in order that Cyrus might not get possession 
before them. 


8r0. A Plan to treat with Cyrus is proposed. It is accepted, 
-and the Greeks agree to go on. 


Review 172, 182, 225, 239, 249, 385, 581, 687, 690, 
415, 7235) 1, 2,59 3,724; 768, 1,2. a; 778,157, eae 
808. 

16. Mera rovroyv addos avéatn, emiderkvds pev THY 

rg an \ A > A , 79% 4 
evyevav Tov Ta Tota aiTeiy KEXEVOYTOS, WOTEP TAAL 
\ , , , 2 2 \ i ¥ 
Tov oTdorov Kipov rrovovpeévov,” émiderxvis 5€ ws evnbes 
¥ ge , oe wuls ‘ , 4.4] , . 
ein” Hyenova airety’ rapa Tovrov* @* hupawwoueba THY 
moat. e¢ d€ Kal T@ Hyeuove’ muoTevoopev® Ov av 
Kdpos 80,° ri kwdveu kal Ta akpa Huiv” Kedevew Kdpov 
, > \ \ \ > 4 s > 
TpokatahapBavev; 17. éyo pev yap OKvoiny ay ets 
\ aA > , A 38 2 4. 6 \ e a a , 
Ta Tota euBaivew a Huy Soin,® un Huds Tals TpLy- 
pect’ katadton’® doBoiunr 8 av ro nyepovi'’ @' Soin ?® 
- 9 \ ea ee ees + x 2 eS 
ereoOar, 7) Nuas ayayn® obey ovK eorar e&edOetv 
Bovdoipnv 8 av, dkovtos® amav™ Kupov, habety adrov 


ll 


aTehOav:'" 6 ov Suvardv eat. 


READING LESSON. 359 


~ 18. ?AAN éyod dnt radra pev drvaptas eivar’ Soxet 
dé pou avdpas' éMdvras” mpds Kupor, ottwes™ ém- 
‘THdeor, ov Kredpyw €pwrav éxeivov ti Bovderau 
a O . = \ Nis \ € A 33 > 

nety xpnolar* Kal é€av pev 7 mpakis 7° TapamdAnoia 

Q A A ld 7 

oiamep™ Kat rpdoabev éxpyto tots évois, emeoOan Kai 
a Rie tN , > an , , 1 
Huas, Kal pa Kakiovs eivar tov mpdcbey Tovrea 

* 19. é€dv dé peilov 4 mpaéis rhs 
8 


ovvavaBavTov * 

mpocber” aivnrar 
s > nw , 64¢ An.» 3.4 , 

Suvorépa, a€voby H meioavTa’® nuas aye ® 7 recb&ra 


.3 y \ S$ aed 17 2 
OUTW Yap KQAL ETOMEVOL av 


A A ‘ 
KaL ETLTOVOT EPA KQL €7TLKLD- 


Tpos didiay advévar 

of 2 AI \ ‘A € , é ah ke , 17 
dito. att@’ Kat mpoOvpor EroipeOa Kat amidvTes 
> “A Py 5 , “ Y 3 aR 4 rn Fd 3 
aopahes av amioev* OTL 0 Gv mpos TavTa héyn, 
amayyerhar * Sedpo* Has 8 axovoavTas Tmpos TadTa 
Bovrever Far. 

20. "Edo€e radra, kat avdpas edopevor adv Kredpyw 

4 a 3 4 ie) ‘ 8 / 1 ~ eee | 
TeiTovolw ot Hpdtwv Kvpov ra dd€avta* tH oTparia. 
e S’ 3 , 6a > FID 2 pont, 4 b] os 
6 amexpivato® ott axovor “ABpoxdpuav, €xOpov 
¥ + es. “~ > ld 1 ~ > 3 3 , 
avopa, emt To Evdparn* rorapy@ civat,’ am€éyovra 
dadexa oTaluovs': mpos TovTov ovv edn Bovde- 

by Bo NG x \ So F< 2A X , Sd , 

ofa édeiv:® Kav pev n° Exel, THY Siknv edn xpHlew 


> a 6 ie aes ea de 4 8 .¢ a 3 a AN as 
emifetva® atta, Hv de pevyy,’ Nmeis EKEL mpos TadTa 
BovidevoropeBa.” 

pba. 


21. “Akovoavtes S€ Tavra ot aiperot avayyéhAovar 
1 20 


las , é a \ 4 5 > D4 ¥ 
Tos oTpatiarais** Tots Se vrowia pev Av dtu aye 


mpos Baoiéa, ouws Se eddxer erecPar. mpoowatrovor 
dé puobov: 6 Sé Kipos tmuryvetras nutdduov Tact 
dadcav® ov” mpdtepov éedepor,® avti SapeKod tpia 
¢€ 8 \ a“ S Aw , rae | Y de oN 
HploaperKa TOV pHvdos TO” OTpaTidty’* oT. SE Ez 
Baciréa ayou® ovd€ evtatOa nKrovoey ovdels Ev ye TE 


pavepe. 


360 


evyera, -as, folly, simplr- 
city. 

evn Ons, -es, stupid, foolish. 

hvpaivouat, ruin, frustrate. 

Kata-ouew, sink. 

émi-trovos, -ov, toilsome, la- 
borious [advos, toil]. 

émi-Kivouvos, -ov, danger- 
ous. 

dvapia,-as, nonsense, bosh. 

devpo, adv., here. 

an-exw, be away from, dis- 
fant. 


? Syntax ? 


THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


aipeTos, -4, -dv, chosen ; ob 
aiperoit, the deputies 
[ aipéw |. 

v7-opia, 

— [épaa |. 
Opes, adv., 
[685]. 
mpoo-aitéw, ask for more. 
npi-odtos, -a, -ov, half as 

much again (odos, 498, 

obs.*). 
Hpt-Oa pecKor, 

(498, obs.’) 


“aS, suspicion 


nevertheless 


half-daric 


2 Construction? Just as if Cyrus were marching home again, i. e. to 
renounce the expedition, and would not longer need his boats as tenders 


to his army. 


3 Explain the mood. 


* What construction might have been used ? 


> What dative ? 
§ Principal parts ? 


7 Explain the case. 


* What other mood might have been used ? 


9 Cf 755, 4. 


10 ‘What does this participle express ? (755, 4.) 


11 Force ? 


12 ‘What verb must be supplied ? 


15 Se. mpdfews. Syntax ? 


% Gt. Wil. 30: 
14 Cf. 694, 10. 


26 T. e. by holding out higher pay ; ef. 795, 9. 


Force? Cf, 726, 1. 


18 What is the subject? What other infinitives have the same subject ? 
What other mfinitives have the same dependence ? 

19 Could the infinitive have been used ? 

20 What other mood might have been used ? 

21 The gen. depends upon midAcoy, implying comparison, for ‘rovrou 


(ut0G0d) ov. 


22 +@, each, the article here has the distributive force ? 


REVIEW. 361 


811. Translate : 

1. Cyrus himself will need his boats. 2. Cyrus 
will not give us,a guide, for in going back’ we will 
ruin his expedition. 3. If we should embark in the 
boats that Cyrus might give, he would sink us with his 
triremes. 4. And if we should follow the guide that 
he might give, he would lead us to a place from which 
it would not be possible to escape. 5. And I say it is 
not possible to get off without the knowledge of Cyrus. 
6. But it seems best to me that we should go and ask 
Cyrus what use he intends to make of us. 7. If the 
undertaking appears greater than the former one, Jet us 
demand additional pay. 8. ‘This seemed best, and the 
deputies asked Cyrus the things which were agreed 
upon by the army. 


LESSON LXXIL. 


REVIEW OF THE ANABASIS, [. I. II. III. 


812. I. Review the Anabasis I., 1, 1-6; 432, 433, 
458, 640..- 


II. Translate: I, 1, 1-6. 

1. Aapeiov cai Tlapvodridos yiyvovra taides Svo, 
mperBvtepos pev ‘AptraképEns, vewtepos dé Kipos. 
? ‘ ‘\ > 7 ~ ‘ e 4 \ a 
Eret d€ nobévaa Aapetos Kal vrewmreve TedXEvTHY TOD 

, > 4 \ ad > , lal 
Biov, éBovdero TH Taide audorépw mapetvat. 

2. ‘O peév ody mperBvtepos Tapav éeriyyave* Kipov 


pe sa 
aTrLOVTES. 


362 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK. 


, A 3 a @ $355 4 s 

dé perameumerar amd THS apXHs Ns avTov Garpamyv 
éroinoe, Kat orparnyov S€ adrov amédake mavtwv 
doo. eis KaotwXovd mediov alpoilovra. avaBaiver 
la c X n 
obv 6 Kipos, haBov Ticoadépynv ws irov, kat TOV 
¥ 
‘Eddjver 8€ éxwv omhitas avéBn Tpiakoctovs, apyovra. 
d€ avrav Heviav TMappactov. 

3. *Emeidn 5é éeredkedrnoe Aapetos Kal Karéaty els 

4 
mv Bacireiay *ApraképEns, Tiooadépyyns SiaBdddre 
tov Ktpov mpos Tov adehpor, ws emuBovdrevou avT@. 6 
dé meiMerai te Kai ovANapBaver Kdpov ws amoKrevav’ 
e \ la 3 4 >. * > 4 ld ta 
» O€ pytnp eEautnoapevn avTov amoméwmre mahw emt 
THV AapXHv. 

4. ‘08 as amndOe xivduvedoas Kal atipacbels, Bou- 
Aeverau OTwS pore ETL EoTAL ETL T@ AdEAHO, GAN’, HV 
, , > > 3 / 4 \ A eS 
dvvyntar, Bacirevoe: avT Eexeivov. Llaptaatus pev 81) 7 
, ¢ oA rn , N A 2 8 ma 8 a LN 
pATHp UmnpxXe TO Kipo, driovoea avrov paddov 7 Tov 

4 > , 
Baowhevovta ’“AptaképEnv. 

5. “Ooris 8 aduxveiro tev Tapa Bacitéws mpds 
avTov, mavTas ovTw diatifeis ameméutero, WoTE avT@ 
padXov dirous evar 4 Baorrel. Kal Tov Tap éavT@ 

\ , 3 : A c nA rd Q ¥ 
d¢ BapBdpwv émepedetro, Ws TodEuety TE ikavol Einoar, 
Kal EVVOLKMS EXOLEY AUTO. 

6. Thy d€ “EXAnvikny Stvapiw jnOpolev ws padiota 
EOvVATO ETLKPUTTOMEVOS, OWS OTL aTapacKEevdTaToY 
ha Bou Baoitéa. dde ody Eroreiro THY ovdAOyHP. 
O 4 > X \ - A aN 4 X a 
mooas etye pudakas év Tats TodECL, TAapHyyeELr€E TOLS 

, e / : , + 
dpovpapyos exdorous hapBdvev avdpas Tledomov- 
lA 4 4 4 , € > 4 
vno.ovs ott mrEioTovs Kat BedTioTous, ws emuBovdevov- 
tos Tiroadépvovs tais méheot. Kal yap Hoav ai 
"lwv ‘ aN T , \ ae va > hé 
ial TOhELS Tisoadepvous TO apyatov, ex Bacii€ws 


REVIEW. 363 





3 , } lal » > , QA ww nw 
| Oedopevar* Tore ) apeoTyKerav mpos Kupov macau 
anv Midnrov. 


III. 1. The mother of Cyrus sent him back to his 
province, because she loved him better than the ruling 
Artaxerxes. 2. But when he had gone back, after he 
had been in danger, he planned that he might be king 
in place of his brother. 3. He was said so to dispose 
of both the barbarians and the Greeks that they were 
more frieridly to him than to the king. 4. And he also 
cared for the barbarians about himself that they might 
be able to fight. 5. He collected his Grecian force 
secretly that he might take the king unprepared. 6. He, 
therefore, kept finding many pretexts for collecting his 
army. 7. He ordered the commanders of the garrisons 
which he had in the cities to enlist the best men pos- 
sible, on the ground that Tissaphernes was plotting 
against the cities. 


813. Review the different selections of the Anabasis, 
and apply the principles of syntax given both by Greek 
and English translations. For the selections see the 
English index. 


eA, te 





APPENDIX. 


PARADIGMS OF THE SUBSTANTIVES. 


NOUNS. 


814. A Declension. — Feminines. 


Wotpatia hXdpa wy yépvpa Wtipy 1 dpaga 


N.V. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 

. N.A.YV. 
G.D. 

. N.V. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. | 


815. 


army 
4 
oTparia 
OT paras 
OT Paria 
£ 
oTpaTiav 
Z£ 
OTparia, 
oTparlaty 
, 
OTPATLat 
OTPATLOV 
oTpariais 
£ 
oTpaTias 


- 
a r i 


| A Declension 


land 

xXopa 

Xopas 
X“pe 

xXopav 
Xopa 

xXopay 
xXopat 
Xopav 
xwpars 
| xXopas 
» pe 


bridge 
yépipa. 
yedhipas 
yedipa. 
yedipav 
yepipa 
yepdpav 
yépipat 
yehipav 
yedipats 
yehvpas 
7 


he “ 


J z 
. — Masculines. 


dOveavias 46 caTpdarrys 
young man SATRAP 
S. N veavias carparns 
G. veaviov caTpamrov 
D. veavia caTpary 
A veaviav caTpamnv 
V. veavia. caTparn 
D. N.A.V.  veavia caTpaTa 
G.D. veaviaw carparaw 
Ro NV: veaviat carpamat 
G. veaviov caTparav 
D. veaviaus waTpamats 
A. veavias cwatparas - 


€ 
0 


honor 
Tien 
TiLAS 
Tie 
TYLHV 
Tipe 
Tia 
Tipat 
TLLOV 
Tiwats 
Tipas 


wagon 
dpaga 
dpaens 
dpaky 
cpagav 
Gpaca. 
opagarv 
cpacar 
dpagov 
Gpagats 
épagas 


CTPATLOTHS 


soldier 


OTPATUITYS 
OTPATUITOU 
CTPATWOTY 
OTpaTLOTHV 
OTPATLOTA 
oTpaTwra 
OTPATLOTALY 


_ OTPATLOTaL 


OTPATLWwTav 
, 

OTpaTiTats 

OTPATUOTaS 


366 APPENDIX. 


816. O Declension. 


Sotvos du&vOpwros bbds 7d Sdpov 


wine man way gift 

S. N. olvos _ aVO perros 600s d@pov 
G. oivov avOpurov 6500 dwpou 

D ov avOpurw 680 dd pw 

A olvov avO pwr ov Oddy. dapov 

Ve oive avOpwire 60€ ..- dapov 
D. N.A.YV.  oivo avO para 600 — bape 
G.D. olvow avOpwrow ddotv Swpow 

ry. Nays olvou avOpwrrot 6008 dopa 
G. olvewv évOpwmruv dd0v dHpwv 

D. olvots avOpurrous ddots depots 

A. oivous avOpdrrous dd0vs dopa. 


817. Adjectives of the Vowel Declension. 


SfAos . &Evos 

clear worthy 
S. N djros }= SHAN ~—s SpA déios aia = Evov 
G. SyAov dyAns SyAov dgiov agias  aégtov 
D. Sylow dyryn dnAw dgin d&ig dw 
A Snrov dSyAnv  dyAov aéiov agiav  aguov 
V onde  dnAn ~—-OAov age aia. ~— @Evov 
D. N.A.V. dno dyra — OnAw agin agia «= tw 
G.D. dyAow dyAaw Sydow dfiow dfiav agiou 
Pedy « SyAot Onda dda réwo. «= aélat = Et 
G. dyAwv Ondwv dyAwv dgiwv déliwv agéiwv 
D. dyAows dyArats dyHAous aéiots a&lais a&tou 


A. dyAovs OnAds SyAa aéiovs a&ias ata 


APPENDIX. 


367 


818. Contract Nouns of the Vowel Declension. 


HVA (yea) 


« a 
H pva. 

mina 
pvaa pv 
pvdas vas 

, A 

algae SORE cath 
pvaav pvay 
pve = pve. 
pvaa = pve 
pvdawv pvaiv 
pvdo. pvat 
pvaov pvaov 
pvdoas pvats 
pvaas = pvas 


earth 


3) > 3; 


Ss 


3 3; 


e lel 
0 VOUS 
mind 

, an 
voos vous 
voov vow 

4 nw 
voy» V@ 

/ ”~ 
voov vovv 
voe vov 

tA , 
vow VO 
voow vot 

, a 
voot vot 

, na 
vow vav 
voois vois 
voovs vovs 


819. Contract Adjectives of the Vowel Declension. 


a 2 


a 


N-A.Y. 


G.D. 


QZ 


>> 


£ 
Xpva«Eos 
xpio-éov 

i 
XPvrEew 

f 
Xpvceov 


xpucew 
xpucéowv 


£ 
Xpdoreot 
Xpvoéwv 


xpueéots 


Xpucods 
xXpucov 
- nw 
Xpvow 
Xpvaovv 


xpiow 
Xpuaotv 


xpucot 
Xpvoav 
xXpucots 


Xpvaeovs xpicods 


Xpvoots 
golden 
SINGULAR. 
Xpioea = XpVTH 
xXpvaéas pions 
xpioeg pve} 
xXpioeav xpionv 
Duat. 
xXpucea_ xpdoa 
xpuréaw xpruc 
PLURAL. 
xXpdoca xpioat 
xpicewv § xpiroav 
xXpucéais xpuoais 
Xpdaéas  XpTGs 


£ ~ 
Xpvoeov Xpicodv 
Xpvoéov xpvaov 

= / _ n 
XPvTEwD = XpVTw 

£ es 
xXpvacov xpioodv 


xpioew xpioe 
xpucéouv Xpvootv 


"4 - _A 
xXpvoea xpica 
Xpioéwy xpiodv 
Xp eos ypdoots 


xpdoea Xpvea. 


- 


368 APPENDIX. 


evvovs . 
well disposed 
SINGULAR. DvAt. PLURAL. 
N.V. — evwvovs evvouV evo evvot evvoa 
G. evvou evvow evvov 
D. evv@ evvolv evvols 
A. EVVOUV evvOUV EvVo evvovs _ evvoa 


820. The Article, Adjective, Demonstrative, and Rel- 
ative Pronouns. 


SINGULAR. SINGULAR. 
N e e , é 5 , 3 , tJ , 
‘ Oo ” TO avTos avTy avTo 
aA A cal 3 cal ae ad 3 “ 
G. TOU TS TOV QuTOU QuTys QUTOU 
D a a a ao Sl 2, A sa 
. T® TH TO avT@ avTn avT@ 
, , 7 , 
A. TOV THV TO avTov avTny auto 
Doat. Duan. 
, , , 3 / > TS 3 , 
N.A. to TO TW avTw avTa avTw 
“~ nm Aw 3 A > a > n 
G.D.  rotv TOL TOW avrotv auratv avTotv 
PLURAL. PLURAL. 
N e e , 3 , 3 ¢ . eee 2 
‘ Ot at TA avTot QvTat QvTA 
G. TOV TOV TOV QUvuTOV QUTOV =—s aUT@V 
D a aA a > a 3 ny > a 
3 Tols TOLLS TOLS avrots avTats avrots 
, Z£ d 
A. TOUS Tas Th avrovs abras aura 


APPENDIX. 7 369 


SINGULAR. SINGULAR. 
e A 5 
N. OUTOS avTn TOUTO ode noe TOOE 
G. TovTov TavTHS  TOUTOV TOUvvE THEE TOVOE 
D TOUTW TAV TOUTW TOE Hoe TOOE 
mS t UT) t [7 TT) & 
A. TOUTOV TavTyV TOTO Tovoe THVOE THE 
DUAL. ' Dvat. 
N.V. rovrw TOUTW TOUTW TWOE TWOE TWOE 
G.D. tovrow Trovrow  Tovrow TOLWWOE TOLVOE TOLVOE 
PLURAL. PLURAL. 
N. OUTOL avrat TavTa OLoE aide TaOE 
G. TovTwv = TOUTWV—s- TOUTwV TOVOE TOVOE TaVvoE 
D. ToUTalsS § Tav’TaIs TOUTOLS Toisde taicde Toicde 
4 4 = “ , £ / 
A. TOUTOVS TavTaS TavTa Tovaoe TATE TOE 
SINGULAR. SINGULAR. 
3 a > , > a 7 9 gq 
N. €xetvos €Kelvn _— EKELVO os 7 oO 
G. éxeivov exeivns ~—eeLvou ov ys ou 
D >. a Ss €i >. , e e @ 
: exeiv éxeivy éxeiv ® 7 @ 
| ee, > , > A 7 7 9 
A. €xetvov = Eeivyv —s ELV ov nv OO 
DvAL. DUAL. 
3 , ae 2 3 , 4 9 9 
N.A. éxetvw €xeiv €Keivw @ @ @ 
, e e 
G.D. éxeivow éxeivow éxeivow oiv ow ow 
PLURAL. PLURAL. 
>’ ~ >. Lal > a8 4 o g 
N. exetvot éxetvat  eKetva ot au a 
> , 5 , > , eS ba @ 
G. €xeivwv Ss EKELYWV EK EVV Ov- ov ov 
D > 7 > ey 4 : e @ 2 
; éxeivols exetvats = ex etvols ots ais ols 
pee > 4 - . A NA = Cd 
A. éxeivous €xewas éxeiva he _ovs. as a 


24 


370 


APPENDIX. 


821. Consonant Declension. — Variations in the Sin- 


gular. 
6 Hyepov 
ator) 
guide 
aN. WYEMOV 
G. HrYEOVOS 
D. ayepove 
A. HyEHOva. 
M4 WY EMOV 


D. N.A.V.  apyepove 
G.D. YEOvow 

P.N.V. - ipyepoves 
G. _ TYELOVvev 
Ds: HyYELOot 
A. HyEpovas 


6 dpxov 
(hacer) 
commander 
apXwv 
dpXovrTos 
dpxovrt 
apxXovTa 
dpXwv 

D. N.A. apxXovrTe 
G.D. dpxovroww 


P. NY: dpXovres 


See ee 


G. épxovTwv 
D. _ apxovart 
A. apxovras 


Spyv S8atpov i XApts 4 edtris 
(unv-) (Satprov-) (xaptr-) (éAzi6-) 


month divinity grace hope 


pny daipwv xXapis éArris 
pnvos —Saipovos. xaputos _— eAridos 
pyvi Saipove xapire =— Arid 
pnva daipove. xa.pw éArriba 
pny daimov  —s-_- xaipts éArri 
pve daipove xapire eAmride 
pnvoiy datudvow _xapitow _— eAmridow 
pnves Saipoves  -xdpires ~— Erde 
pnvov daydvuov xapitav = Arid wv 
pyot daiuoot xapice eArrion 
pivas Saipovas x xadpiras  éArridas 


H xelp % Tpinpys ! (sc. vads) 


(xeup") (spuypes-) 

hand trireme 

xetp TpLnpns 

xELpos Tpinpovs (Tpiypeos) 
xetpi tpinper (Tpinpet) 

xetpa tpinpn — (pujpea.) 

xelp TpLnpes 

XElpe Tpunper (Tpinpee) 

Xepowv tpinpow (tpunpéow) 
x<lpes | Tpinpers (Tpinpees) 
XELpov Tpinpwv (Tpinpéwv) 
xXepot TplnpEere 

xeipas Tpinpers (Tpunpeas) 


1 Has recessive accent in the genitive dual and plural. 


APPENDIX. 


37) 


822. Participles.—w Verbs. 


AVOV (AvovT-) 
loosing 
SINGULAR. 


Adwv Atovea Adov 

Aiovros Avovans AvovTos 

Abovt. Avoton AvovrTt 

Aiovra Advovoay Adov 
Dvat. 

Atovre Adtov’ca Atovre 

Atovrow Avovoaw AvovToL 


PLURAL. — 


Atovres Avovcat Avovra 
Advovtwr AvoveGy AdovtTwv 
Avover Advotouts‘Advover 


Avovras Avovcads Avovra 


hicas (Avoavt-) 
having loosed 
SINGULAR. 
ioas Aicaca Artoav 
Aicavtos todays Aicavros 
Aicavtt Nicdion Aicavtt 
Nicavra Ricacav icav 
Dvat. 
Atcavre Aitoica HRicavre 


Avodvrow Aicaicaw Atodvrow 


PLURAL. 
Aicavres Atoaoa Aicavra 
Avocavrwy Aicacav AitoavTwr 


Aicaot dRioacas Aicaor 


g - a4 - 
Aicavtas Aicaicds AtcavTa 


AeAVKOS (AeAvVKOT-) 
having loosed 


SINGULAR. 
N.V. AeAvKws AeAvKvia AedvKOs 
G. AeAvKOTOS ANeAvKvias NeAvKOTOS 
D. AeAvKore AeAvkvia AeAvKOTe 
A. AeAvKoTa AeAvKviav AeAvKOs 
Doat. 

N.A.V.  AeAvKore AcAvKvia. AeAvKOTE 
G.D. AeAvKdrTow AeAvKviaw AeAvKOTOLy 
PLuRAt. 

N.Y. AeAuKdres AeAvviat AeAvKOTa. 
G. AeAvKOTwv AeAvKviOV AeAvKOTwv 
D. AeAvKOCt AeAvKviats AeAvKdor 
A. AcAvKoras AeAvKvias AeAvKoTa 


872 


APPENDIX. 


TUPOV (r1.0-0VT-) 


honoring 
SINGULAR. 
N.V.  tivGvy = Tip@oa = Tipo 
G. TILOVTOS TILWONS TYLOVTOS 
D. TILOVTL TYLMON TYLOVTL 
A. TILOVTA TILOTAV TYLOV 
Duvat. 
N.A.V. tipavre tiwwoa Tipavre 
G.D. — tipevtow Timecaw Tipeovrow 
PLURAL. 
N.V. ripavres Tipaoco Tipovra 
G. TILOVTOV TILWOOV TILOVTWV 
D. TILOGL TipmMoOals TILL 
A. TILOVTAS TimMods TIUL@VTO 


TrOLOV (arove-ov-) 
making, doing 


SINGULAR. 
TOLOV TOLOVTA  7TOLOvV 
TOLOVVTOS ToLOVE-NS TOLOUVTOS 
TOLOvWTL ToLwovon ToLodvTL 
TOLOVVTA TOLOVTaV TTOLOUY 
Dvat. 
“‘TOLOWTE ToLOVTa ToLOdVTE 


TOLOVVTOL TOLOVCaLY TOLOUVTOL 


PLURAL. 


TOLOUVTES TOLOVTAL TOLOUVYTA 


TOLOUWWT WV TOLOVO av TOLOVVTWV 


TOLOVEL 


TOLOVO'ALS TOLOVCL 


TOLOUVTAS TOLOVOGS WOLODVTA 


823. Participles. — pu Verbs. 


dv (dv7-) 


being 
SINGULAR. 

N.V. Ov ovca Ov 
G. 6vTOS ovoNs OvTOS 
D. OvTt ovo? OvTt 
A. 6vTa ~=s ov'oav = OV 

DUAL. 
N.A.V.  ovre otca = Ove 
G.D. OvTOW ovca OVvTOLW 

PLURAL. 

N.V. Ovres ovcat ‘OvTU 
G. ovTov otcav bvTeV 
D. ovol  ‘ovoals ovct 
A. ovTas ovcas ovTa 


SLd0vs (ddovr-) 


did0vs 
duddvTos 
d.dovTt 
d.d0vra. 


dvOovTeE 
dLd0vToLW 


duddvTes 
did0vTwr: 
dido0det 
d.d0vras 


giving 
SINGULAR. 
didotca —- Sudov 
didovens dSid0vros 
didovon  — SuddvTe 
divdotcav dud0v 
Dvat. 
dudovca ~—- OuddvTE 
didovcaw didovroww 
PLURAL. 
didotcar. — diSdvra 
-OtdovcGv. —- OrddvTw 
didovcas  Sidodor 
didovcds  siddvra 


APPENDIX. 373 


lords (icrarr-) 


erecting 
SINGULAR. 
N.V. iordis iotadaca iorav 
Gr iotavros iotaons ioravros 
D. iotavte. toraocy toravte - 
A. ioravTa. toragav iorav 
Duat. 


N.A.V. ioravre toraca tordyvte 


7 3 
G.D.  ioravrow toracaw toravrow 


PLURAL. 
e , e ~ e , 
N.V. iorayres iotaoca ioravra 
G. iotavrwv iotadcav toravrwv. 
a P 4 
D. ioract  icracas toract 
Ps: - 
A. iordyras. toracas toravra 


SevKVUS (Sexvuvr-) 
showing 
SINGULAR, 
dexvis  Setvdoa = Setxviv 
Secxvivtos Sexvoans Secxvivros 
dexvivte Sexvion Setxvivre. 
dexxvivta decxvicay Seukviv 


DUAL. 
dSecxvivre Secxvioa Seuxvivre 


£ 
dSexvivrow dexvicaw Secxvivrow 


PLURAL. 
dexvivres Seuxvicar Secxvivra 
dexvivrwy Sexvicay Secxvivtwv 
Secxviot  Setkviooaus Servier 


decxvivras Sexvioas Secxvivra 


824. Adjectives of the Consonant or Consonant and 


A Declensions. 


EKOV (€xov-) 


willing 
SINGULAR. 
N.V.  €kov = Ekovoa = Exov 
G. ExQvTOS EKOvONS EKOVTOS 
D. éxdvt. éxovon EkdvTL 
A. éxOvTa Exodoav EKOV 
Dvat. 


N.A.V. éxovre éxovica éxovre 


ene F e , Be oh 
G.D. — Exdvrow éxovoaw' Exovrow 


PLURAL. 
enV e lal nS 
N. EKOVTES EKOvOGaL EKOVTA 
G. EKOVTWV EKOVTO@V EKOVTWV 
D éexodot €Kxovcais ExovotL 
, - 
A. €xovras éxovoas éxovTa 


Xaptets (xaprevr-) 
pleasing 
SINGULAR. 


xapies = xapiecoa = xapiev 


” xapievros yaptéeoons yxapievTos 


xXaplevtt yxapieocn xapievte 

xXapievta xapiceooav yapiev 
Dvat. 

xaplevre xapieooa yapievre 

Xaprevrow yYapiecoraw yaptevrow 
PLURAL. 

xaplevres yapieroo yaplevra 

XapievTwv yapiecoav yapievTwv 

xapieot xapreaoais xapleor 


xaplevras xapiecods yxaplevta 


<P UR 


APPENDIX, 


TAS (ravT-) 


all 
SINGULAR. 
Tas Taoa Tav 
mavTés warns javTos 
mavtt TaN mavTt 
TaVTa Twacav Wav 
PLURAL. 


nw , 
TAaVTES TWacal wTavTa 
- a , 
TAaVTWVY  «=6oTaCOV. TavTOV 
a zZ an 
Tact Tacas Tact 


r 4 - 
TavTaS wacas 7avTa 


Hdvs (78v-) 


> 
eVdaipov (eddarpor-) 
JSortunate 
- SINGULAR. 
3 / 
eddaipwv €VOQLLOV 
> , 
evoalpLovos 
> / 
evoaipovt 
evdaipova — evoupov 
eVOaLpLov 
Dvat. 
> , 
evoaipove 
evvaLpovow 
PLURAL. 
evoaipoves  evOaipova 
3 , 
EVOaLpOvev 
> rae 
evoaipoor 
> 4 > , 
evdaipovas  evdaipove. 


petlov (weLov-) 


sweet greater 
SINGULAR. SINGULAR. 
Hous yoeia OU peilov peiCov 
nO€os Hdelds — HO€os peilovos 
Hot (Hoei) Hdeia Oe (SEt) peilove 
novv yoetay 70v peilova, peilw  reiCov 
nov - yoeia = HOU peetCov 
Dvat. Dvat. 
. Hoel (Adee) HOELG HOT (HEC) peilove 
HO€OLV yoeiaty d€otv pecCovow 
PLURAL. PLURAL. 
Hoets (dees) HOetar ydea - peiLoves, weiLous petlova, peila 
oewv MoeLov d€wv peclovev 
Hoeor Hoelars Hdeot petlooe 


moets yoeias  ndéea. peilovas, weiovs pecilova, pei 


APPENDIX. 345 





PARADIGMS OF THE VERBS. 
825. Present System of rKxw, loose. 


ACTIVE. MIDDLE and Passive. 
Present. Imperfect. Present. Imperfect. 
S. 1 9 Ado €dvov Avopat €Avdpny 
( 2 vets édves vee €\tiov 
© 3 Aves éAve Aderac €\beETO 
$s D.2 Averov eAverov AveoOor €\vecbor 
| 3 Averov éhverny AveoOor €ieobny 
iBook Avopev é\vopev AvopeOa €hiducba 
[ 2 Abere édvere hieo be €dtea be 
vind Avovat éAvov Avovrat €\vovTe 
Present. Present. 
[ 8.1 Avo Aveopat 
J 2 dons Avy 
£ 3 hin Aunrat 
S D. 2 Ainrov Avne Gor 
A 3 hunrov Advno Gor 
i i Ad@pev Avopucba 
Rocks Aone Avnabe 
L 3 Avoot Avevrat 
S. 1 Avorpe Adoipny 
2 vats Avouo 
3 3 Avot Avotro 
& D.2 Adocrov ~ voir Gor 
= 3 Avoirny AvoicOny 
O P.l Avowpev Avoipeba 
9 votre riot Ge - 
3  -dovev AvowTe 
(“ses Ade Avov 
© 3 vero Aveo bw 
2p; 9 Averov Aver Gor 
3 3 AvET or AveoOar 
5 “g AveTE Aver Ge 
l 3 Avovrev Avecbav 
Infinitive. dvew Aver Oat 


Participle. 


Avov, -ovea, -ov 


Addpevos, -n, -ov 


( NS 
a 
AA 
E Pp. 
= 
ji Pp: 
fs. 
| 
= 
a) 
= 
= 
= 
“s 
7 9) 


t : =) g 
CRM RM WW OOH WD KH WWW WHR WH Ww 


Imperative ———Optative-——-— -~-- 
‘s | 


sal 
WwW Ww &W LT 


Infinitive. 


Participle. 


APPENDIX. 


826. Future System 


ACTIVE. 


of Niw. 


MIDDLE. 


Future. 


Aico 


hioets 
ices 
AdoeTor 
iceror 
vooper 
Avoere 
Aucovee 


hiororpe 
Avoous 
Avorou 
vooeroy 
dooirny 
Aicouper 
Avootre 
Atdaavev 


Adee 


ioopae 
ices 
hioerat 
ioe Gov 
hiceo bor 
Avodueba 
Aioeabe 
Adoovras 


Adooipny 
Avooto 
AvooTto 
Avoows Gov 
Avooicbnv 
Adooipneba 
Avooww be 
AdooawTo 


AioerGae 


827. First Aorist System 


of rw. 
AcTIVE. MIpDLe. 
First Aorist. 
€hioa éAdodpnv 
éAvoas é\to@ 
éA\toe €hveato 
€\vearov €A\voagbov 
edvoaTny ehvadaaOnv 
evoapev éAvoapueda 
evoate éd\voag be 
ay é\veavro 
ico do@pae 
vons von 
ion AvonTae 
Avonrer hvono Gov 
Avonror Avona bor 
igoper Ato a@pueda 
Avonre ionabe 
veooe AvVo@vrat 
Avoratpe veaipny 
ioeras,Avoats Avoca 
hicese, AVoOat ~=— waTO 
doasrov Adourc bor 
Aveairny AvaaicOnv 
Adoamper hicaipeba 
doarre Aioaabe 
Nioeray,Avoatey icatwTo 
ADoov Avoat 
voatro hicacbo 
dcarev Avoca bor 
‘vdoatav hvodaOwv 
odoare Aicagbe 
Avoavrav Avodcbov 
doa Atoacbae 


£ ~- = - ~ 
Avowvr, -oveu, igduevos, -n, ioas, -caga, vodpevos, -n, 


-OV 


-OV 


-Tav 


~Ov 


APPENDIX. 377 


828. First Perfect System Rie: Perfect Middle Sys- 


of Aw. tem of diw. 
AcTIVE. Mippte and Passive. 
First Perf. First: Plupf. Perfect. Pluperfect. 
S. 1 Aedvca éAeXvKn, -ev = AEAUpaL eAcAvpny 
[ 2  AeAvKas edeXuays, -ers AeAvoat eXeAvoo * 
3 3  eAuKe eAeAvKEL AeAuTae eAeAuTo 
SS D.2 — Aeddcarov éeAUKELTOV AeAva Gov eXeAvobov 
= 3  AeAVKaTOv edeAuKeitny AéeAva Gov eXeAvaOnv 
S P. 1 Aeddcaper eAeAvKepev Aedvpeda eheAvpe ba 
2 educate edehvxeire heAvode ededvobe 
l 3 NeAvxace éAeAvKEecav AéAvvrae. éXeAuvTo 
First Perfect. Perfect. 
( Ss. 1 AeAvK@ pic (-n, -ov) @ 
, 2 AeAvKNS 7S 
= 3 AeAvK x 7 
2 D. 2 AeAUKNTOY AeAupeva (-d, -w) jrov 
= 3 AeAUKnToy ” Arov 
= ie i AeAvKopev Nepvecteos, (-at, -a) dpev 
[ 2 AeAvKNTE Are 
3 AeAvKwor . aot 
S. 1 AeAVKoLpe Led iy age (-y, -ov) cin 
[ 2 AeAvKols eins 
ee AeAvKoe 3 etn 
8 D. 2 AeAvKorTov AeAvpeve (-d, -w) elroy or etnrov 
=. Be NedvKoirny ‘ eitny eintny 
OC Ph AeAvKOLMEY AeAvpevor (-at, -a) eiucy €inuev 
| 2 AeAvKorTe sh eire entre 
L 3 AeAvKoLev cs elev €lna'av 
f 8. 2 héAvKe AeAvoo 
© 3 AeAvKEeT@ Aedvabw 
3 2 AeAvKETOV AéAva Gov 
3 3 AeAvKEeT@V AeAvobwv 
ts AeAvKeTE AeAvabe 
L 3 AeAvKerooay or AeAvKdvT@Y AeAvoOcav 
Infinitive. AeAvKevat AeAvabat 


Participle. AeAuKaS, -KVIA, -Kds XeAupevos, -n, -ov 


378 APPENDIX. 


830. Perf. Mid. System 831. First Passive System 
of Aiw (Fut. Perf.). of rdw. 
Mipvie and Passive. PASSIVE. 
Future Perfect. First Aorist. First Future. 
Souk Aehvoopat eAvOnv AvOjropat 
. 4 AeAdores edvOns Avojnoes 
oS 3 AeAVorerat €dvOn AvOnoera 
6 D.2 AeAvoeaOov €AvOnrov AvOnced Gov 
= 3 AeAdoer Gov edvOnrny AvOnaeaOov 
eee AeAtodpeba éAvOnpev Avonodueba 
2 AeAvoeabe edvOnre Avonoea Ge 
3 AeAvoovrat €AvOnaav - AvOnoortas 
[ S. Avb@ 
: 2 AvOns 
£ 3 Avb7n 
3S D. 2 AvOnrov 
2, 3 AvOnrov 
= Pk Avoapev 
sg 2 AvOnre 
3 AvO@ae 
Sek AeAVooiunv Avbeinv AvObnooiuny 
| 2 AeAvoovo Avbeins AvOnacoto 
~ 3 AeAvootro Avbein Avénooro 
- D.Q AeAvoorsOov Avbeirov or Avbenrov AvOncorcbov 
= 3 AeAVooia Onv AvOeitny AvoeuTnv AvOnooiaOnv 
OrP; 1 AeAVooipeba AvOeipev AvOeinuev AvOnooipeba 
2 Aeddoourbe AvOcire  AvOeinre Avoncobe 
3 AeAVoowro AvOeiev = AvOcingav ~=— AvOnaawrTo 
" §. 2 AVOnre 
g 3 AvOnTo 
S D. 2 AVOnTov 
a 3 AvOnrev 
= P.2 AvOnre 
l 3 AvOevt@v 
Infin. AeAvoer Oar AvOjvat AvOncer Oa 
Partic. AeAvodpevos, -n, Avbeis, -eloa, -Ev AvOnoduevos, -1 


“OV “OV 


-—Imperative.— peat) pba hive dictating 7——Subjunctive——, ——— Indicative ——, 
kd a] kg 


7 


a 


: Pp 
mM WOH WOWDHH WMH wD WOH 


So 


A 


o 


WwW wm RH WwW 0% 


yi om 
Go do & Ww Ww” 


Infin. 


APPENDIX. 


379 


832. Future System of Liquid 833. First Aorist System of 


Verbs: ayyédw (ay- 
yeA-), announce. 


ACTIVE. 
ayyer@ 
ayyereis 
ayyede 
dyyeXcirov 
ayyedetrov 
dyyeAovpev 
dyyeh«ire 
ayyeAovot 


dyyeAotm, 
ayyedoinv 
ayyeXois, 


dyyeXotns © 


dyyeXot, 
ayyedoin 
ayyeotrov 
ayyedoitny 
ayyedoipev 
dyyeoire 
dyyeotev 


dyyeXeiv 


Partic. dyyehar, 


-ovaa, -ovv 


Mivprz. 
dyyeAodpat 
dyyehet, dyyeAj 
dyyedetra 
dyyedeio bov 
ayyedeio Gov 
dyyeAotpeba 
dyyedciobe 
ayyedovrrat 


ayyeXoiunv 
/ 

ayyeXoto 
ayyedoiro 


dyyeXoia Gov 
dyyedoicOnv 
ayyedoipeba 
ayyedoirbe 

ayyedoivro - 


ayyerciobat 


> , 
ayyeXoupevos, 
“1, ~OV 


— Liquid Verbs: ayyé\do 
(dyyeA-), announce. 


ACTIVE. 
qyyeAa 
tyyeAvas 
Wyyetre 


' IpyyeiAarov 


nyyetAarnv 
nyyethapev 
nyyeiAare 
ifyyethav 
ayyetho 
ayyeiAns 
ayyeidn 
ayyeiAnrov 
ayyeiAnrov 
ayyeihopev 
ayyetAnre 


> , 
ayyeiAhwot 

> ’ 
ayyetNatpe 


dyyeidats, 
ayyeidevas 
> ‘ 
ayyeiXat, 
> 
ayyetihete 
ayyeihairov 
ayyetdaitny 
dyyeihaipev 
ayyeihare 
ayyeidaer, 
ayyeihevay 
dyyevdov 
> , 
ayyethaT@ 
ayyetharov 
ayyewdtrov 
ayyet\are 


> , 

ayyeWdvT@v 

ayyeidat 

> lo es 

ayyetvas, ° 
-aga, -av 


MIDDLE. 
nyyeAdpnv 
nyyciio 
nyyetAato 
nyyethaa Gov 
nyyethao Onv 
nyyetAdpeba 
nyycihaabe 
nyyetAavro 


ayyeiAopat 
ayyeidn 
dyyetAnrat 
dyyeiAna boy 
ayyeitAnaOov 
dyyeiopeba 
ayyeihnobe 


> lé 
ayyetA@vrat 


ayyethaipny 
ayyeihaco 
ayyeiAato 


ayyeidac ov 
ayyethaicOnv 
dyyetAaipeba 
ayyeiAaobe 


dyyeihawro 


ayyerat 
ayye.\dobo 
ayycitaa Gov 
ayyeida bev 
ayyethaabe 
ayyewdoOav 


ayyeihacOat 


ayyeAdpevos, 
~n, -Ov 


380 


- 


vw 
WOH ww wrmort 


-— Indicative — 


TP . . . 
CP§nwwnmownvn wWNwHorwwnwne WANWwWOHYwWWwnr 


Imperative -——Optative-——, -—Subjunctive—, 
oO 


APPENDIX. 


834. Second Aorist System 835. Second Perfect System 
of rela (Aur-), leave. 


ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
Second Aorist. 
€\utrov eAurropuny 

éXurres ~ éXitrov 
€Aure éXimero 
éXimerov €Xizreo Gov 
éurréernv eure Onv 
éXitropev éAurropeba 
é€Almere edimeo Oe 
€\urov €Xizrovto 
Aire Alim@pat 
Aimns Lian 

Aimy Aimnrat 
Aimnrov Ninna Gov 
Aimnrov himno Gov 
Aimropev Aurr@peba 
Aimnre Aimnabe 
Air@ct Aim@vrat 
Alrroupe Aurroipny 
Altos Alzroto 
Alrrot Xirotro 
Alrrowrov Aitrova ov 
Aurroitny Auroia Onv 
Airroipev AurroipeOa 
Alrroure Airouo Ge 
Almrovev . NitowrTo | 
Ale Aurrov 
AiréTo@ urea Oa 
Almerov AireaOov 
Aurer@v AurecOov 
Almere Alreobe 
Aurdvre@v Aurea bov 
Aurety Auer Oar 
uray, -ovca,  durdpevos, 


-ov 


1), -Ov 


of det (AuT-), leave. 


ACTIVE. 
Second Perf. Second Plup. 
eAoura eXeAoinn, -ev 


AeAowras 
NeAoure 
XeAoimarov 
AeAcirarov 
AeA olrrapev 
AeA oirare 
AeAdoinaoe 


€XeXoimns, -€us 
éXeAoivet 
€NeAXOlsreTov 
edeAourrerny 
€AeAolmepev 
éXeXoinete 
eA\cAoimecay 


Second Perfect. 


AeAolrr@ 
AeAolmns 
AeXoirn 
AeAoimnrov 
AeAoimnrov 
AeA oim@pev 
Aeoimnre 
AeAoirwot 


NeAolmoupe 
AeA ois 
AeAoiroe 
AeAolzrorrov 
AeAouroirny 
AeAoimroipev 
AeAoirrolre 
AeXoizrotev 


[AeA ourre 
AeAouTrEeT@ 
AeXoizrerov 
AeAoureT ov 
AeAolrereE 
AeAourdvrov] 


AeAourrevat 


AeAourras, -via, 
-0s 


APPENDIX. 


836. Perf. Mid. Sys. of Pure 
Verbs with added o: KxedXevw 
(xeXev-), command. 


8. 1 
3 

3 3 
‘3 D. 2 
oe 
mort 
2 

: 3 


woe 


wm 


~ 


_—Imperative— -Opt.— -Subj.5 
fi 


ee 
2 ro oo 9 O9 


Infin. 
Partic. 


Indicative. 
Optative. 
Infinitive. 
Participle. 


Mippie and Passive. 


Perfect. Pluperfect. 
Kex€Aevopat- — ekekeAevopny 
KekeAevorat éxexeAevoo 
kekeAevorat éxexeAevoTo 
kexeA evo Gov exexeAevo Gov 
xexehevo Gov exexed evo Onv 
kexehevopeba  exexeNevopeba 
kexeevobe exexeevobe 
KeKeAevopevot KekeNevopevor 

eici qoav 
Perfect. 


KexeAevopevos &, etc. 
Kexehevopevo ATov, etc. 
KekeAevopevor Oper, etc. 


KekeAevopevos einy, etc. 
, > 

KekeAevopevw ettov, etc. 

kexeAevopevor eiper, etc. 


KEKeAEVTO 
_Kexedevob@ 
KekeAeva bov 
KexeAevabav 
KexeAevobe 
KekeAevo bav 


kexeAevdo Oat 
’ 
‘KEKENEVT PEVOS, -7), - OV 


Future Perfect. 


KexeXevoouat, etc. 
KEekeEvTOLunY, etc. 
kexeAcvoer Oa 
KekeAevodpevos, -n, -ov 


381 


837. Perf. Mid. Sys. of 
Labial Mute Verbs: 
Nei (Aur-), leave. . 


Mippzz and Passive. 


Perfect. Pluperfect. 
AeAerppat €AeXelpapenv 
AeAevwat - eheReto 
héAeurrat é\eAeurTo 
herechOov ehehecpOov 
herepOov — eAeAeihOnv 
heAcippeOa ~— eAeAeippeOa 
hederpbe ehedecpbe 
AeAeyppevor “DAeAecppevoe 

igi qoay 
Perfect. 


AeAetppevos &, etc. 
AeAetppeva Arov, etc. 
AeAeppevor Gpev, etc. 


AeAetppevos einv, etc. 
AeAetppev@ eirov, etc. 
AeActppevor eiper, etc. 


AéAeuyro 
Aereipba 
AérAecpOov 
Acreipbwr 
eAecpbe 
AedeipOav 


ANEeActPOur 
AeAewppevos, -n, -ov 


Future Perfect. 
AedeiWouat, etc. 

.. .Achewpoiuny, ete. 
AereierOar 
AeAeudopevos, -n, -ov 


382 


Ss. 1 
[Ad 
3 3 
-sacD,2 
S 3 
= 
A P; : 
ie 
4 oe 
S D. 
7 P. 
Bes | 
a Dp 
5 Ge 3 
(r 8.2 
S 3 
e 2).2 
f° 2.8 
& ‘ 
L 3 
Infin. 
Partic. 
Indicative. 
Optative. 
Infinitive. 


Participle. 


APPENDIX. 


838. Perfect Middle System 839. Perfect Middle System 


of Palatal Mute Verbs: 


vdrttw (Tay-), arrange. 


MippteE and Passive. 


Perfect. Pluperfect. 
TeTaypat ereTaypn 
réeragéat erérago 
T€TaKTat €TETAKTO 
TéraxOov erérax Gov 
TéTaxOov ereTaxOnv 
retdypeba ereTaypeba 
réeraxbe eretax Oe 


> 
TeTaypevot eligi TeTaypEevor joay 
or Terdyarat OF ereraxaro 


Perfect. 


"< 
TeTaypevos @, etc. 
TeTaypeva Hrov, etc. 
TeTaypevor Dpev, etc. 


TeTaypevos env, ete. 
TeTaypeve eirov, ete. 
TeTaypevor einer, etc, 


rérato 
TeTax Ow 
TéraxOov 
TeTayOwv 
réraye 
TeTayOwv 


TeTax Oa 


TETAYEVOS, -n, -Ov 


Future Perfect. 
Terdéopat 
rera£oiunu 
rera&eor ba 

TeTafopevos, -n, -Ov 


of Lingual Mute Verbs: 
TeiOw (7i6-), persuade. 


Mrpvte and Passive. 


Perfect. Pluperfect. 
méeTeropat eTreTreLo ny 
TeTrEww aL émeTrEtoo 
TETELTTAL em eT ELTTO 
memeto Gov énemetoOov 
mérreva Gov erereio Onv 
metreiopeOa erretreia weOa 
memecobe érémreta be 
TETTELO EVOL TETELO EVOL 

eioi qoav 
Perfect. 


memevopevos , etc. 
TeTreva eva HTOoV, etc. 
meTrELo pevor @pev, etc, 


memetopevos elny, ete. . 
meTreLopEevw@ etrov, etc. 
memeropevor emer, etc 


TeTELoo 

ae 
merreio bw 
merreto Cov 
meTreicO@v 
mere be 
metreicOwv 


memreo Oat 


TETELO {LEVOS, -1, -OV 
Future Perfect. 


No Future Perfect. 


APPENDIX. — 883 


840.- Perfect Middle System 841. Perfect Middle System 


of Liquid Verbs : of Liquid Verbs : 
ayyé\Xw (ayyeA-), announce. gaivw (pav-), show. 
Mrppte and Passrve. Mippiz and Passive. 
Perfect. Pluperfect. Perfect... Pluperfect. 
S. 1 HyyApa myyeApnv mepacpar eretbag pny 
2. HyyeAoat Hyyed\oo 
Ps} 3 ifyyeATat ityyeATo mepavra érebavrTo 
- D.2 = tyyedor ityyedOov medavOov erresbavOov 
s 3 HyyeAOov ny yer Onv meavbov emecpavOnv 
a P.1 = nyyeApeba nyyeApeba nehdaopucba éerresbag cba 
2 mryyeAde iyyerbe mepavbe erebavbe 
3 nyyeApevot NyyeApevot mepacpevon = rebacpevoe 
eigi joa eioi hoay 
Perfect. Perfect. 
8 8. hyyeApevos &, ete. meacpeévos &, etc. 
sae TyyeA\peveo jrov, etc. mepacpéeva hrov, etc. 
M > , Ud Ed 
( P myyeApevot Oper, etc. mepacpéevor per, etc. 
oe: myyeApevos einy, etc. neacpevos etny, ete. 
ane 9S nyyedpeve etror, etc. metaopeve etrov, etc. 
[ P nyyeApevot einer, etc. mecacpevor eipev, etCe 
f 8. 2 fryyeAco Lacking. 
S 3 INyyerOw mepavOw 
= D. 2 iyyedOov mespavOov 
2 3 nyyerdav nepavOav 
ae ee Hyyerbe mebavbe 
L 3 iryyedOav mepavOwy 
Infin. nyyerda mepavOa 
Partie. Ny yeApevos, “7, -ov meparpévos, -n, -Ov 


No Future Perfect, No Future Perfect. 


384 APPENDIX. 


842. Second Passive System of paivw (pav-), show. 


PASSIVE. 
Second Aorist. Second Future. 
s. 1 _epayny davngopat 
2 earns pavnoe 
S 3 epavn 3 avncera 
6 Dz 2 ecbavntov pavqaer Gov 
= 3 epavirny ‘paren Gow 
ee epavnuev davnodpeba 
2 epavnre pavnvecbe 
3 epavncav avncovrat 
[ 8. 1 pave 
£ 3 avn 
S D. 2 pavarov 
=, 3 avnrov 
2 ; 
Zt 1 pavapev 
2 avnre 
L 3 pavaat 
Si aveinv barvnooipny 
2 paveins bavncoto 
3 3 avein gavncotro 
6. D. 2 bavetrov or daveinrov davnco.c bov 
oF 3 gaveitny cbaveinrnv pavnooicOny 
0 8 havetwev chaveinpev pavnocoipeba 
2 daveire cbaveinre parncow be 
3 dbaveiev chaveinoav avncowro 
if <2 avn 
= 3 davnre 
¢ D.2 bavnrov 
Bes gavnrov 
& P.g pavnre 
l 3 avéevrwv 
Infin. — & “havivat ~ gharnoeobat 
Partie. aveis, -cioa, -év - thavnospevos, -n, -ov 


APPENDIX. 385 


843. Present System of tipdw, honor. 





Indicative. 





-—— Subjunctive. ——\ 


wn wn Wd eS 


wm rH WM woe 


weno weve wwor 


ACTIVE. Mipp.e and Passive. 
Present. Present. 
Tide TiL@ Tiwdopat Tip@pat 
(ripdw) fe (ridopuar) pop 
(rijsdecs) Tias " (ripdet, tivdy) Tipe 
Tiadet Tia TiydeTat Tiarat 
(rider) 6 (rivderat) = Tis 
(rijderov) Tiarov (ride bor) Tipacbov 
(riderov) Tiwarov (riuaeo Gov) Tia boy 
(ripdopev) = Ti@pev (ripadpeba) Tipo@peba 
(ripdere) Tiare (riuaeo Oe) Tipacbe 
(tiudovot) = Tipaor (ripaovrar) Tiuavrat 
Imperfect. Imperfect. 
(€ripaov) eri wav (€ripadéunv) eTiu@pny 
(eri paes) eri pds (éripdov) €TiL@ 
(éripae) eripa (€ridero) ériparo 
(eriuderov)  ériparov (eriudecOov)  — eripaobov 
(€ripaérnyv) — eriparnv (eriuaéaOnv) = eriprac Onv 
(eriudopev —- €Tip@pev (éripadueOa) = eri ppwmpeba 
(eridere) eripare (ériudea Oe) €riao be 
(éripaov) eTipwv (€ripdovro) €TiL@VTO 
Present. Present. 
(ripdw) TiL@ (Tizdwpac) Tiu@pat 
(riwans) Tias (rivan) Tipa 
(rian) Tia (ripanrac) Tivarat 
(ripanrov) Tiarov (ripanoOov) ~~ rivacbor 
(tiwanrov)  § Tiarov (rizanobov) ~~ ripacbov 
(riudopev) = Tiu@pev © (ripadpeba) _ tinapeba 
(riuanre) Tiare .~ (riwanode) Tiuacbe 
(ripawot) Tim@ct (Tiwawvra.) Ti@vrat 


25 


386 - 


we woe 





rs 
Cn Wwe 


Optative. 


eSwmore Kw © VOre 





o ma 
rm wwe Wh 


~~ 


-— Imperative.-— 


os 


_ Infin. 


Partie. FE. 


ee 


APPENDIX. 


Present System of riwaw. — continued, 


ACTIVE. 


Present. 


(rijdoupe) 


(ripaots) 
(rijdor) 
(ripcdotrov) 
(riaoitny) 
(ripdowpev) 
(ripdaocre) 
(Tipdover) 
or 
(ripaoinv) 
(ripaoins) 
(ripaoin) 
(riavinror) 
(ripaounrny) 
(ripaoinuev) 
(ripaoinre) 
(tipavinoav 


(ripae) 
(ripaero) 


(riderov) 
(ripaérov) 
(ripdere ) 
(ripadvre@r) 


(rijudew) 


(ripdov) 
(tipdovea) 
(ripdov) 


[Ti@yc 
TLS 
Tin@ | 
TUL@TOV 
TiL@THV 
TiL@MEV 
TLUL@TE 
Ti@ev 


Tian 
Tip@ns 
Tien 

[ Tip@nrov 
Tipeonryy } 

[Ttuqnper 
TYL@nTE 
Tipe@neay | 


ti pa 
Tiar@ 
Tiparov 
TipaTev 
Tiare 
TiLOVTOV 


- 


MippieE and Passtve. 


Present. 


(ripaoipny) 
(rijzdoto) 


(ridorro) 
(ripdoOov) 
(ripaoiaOnv) 
(ripaoipeba) 
(ripdowo be) 
(ripdowro) 


(ripaov) 
(ripaéoOw) 
(rideo bor) 
(ripaéobav) 
(ripaeobe) 
(ripaéabwv) 


(ideo Oat) 


(rinadpevos) 
(ripaquevn) 


(ripadpevov) 


Tim@unY 
TiL@O 
TUL@TO 
Ti@abov 
Tinea Onv 
Tin@peba 
Tiu@obe 


rive 


Tipo 
Tipad ba 
Tipao Bov 
Tipaobav 
riacbe 
ripacbov 


Tha@pery 


Tip@pevor 


-——Subjunctive 


f 8. 





Indicative. 


2 





- 


ro 
¢ 


4 
one wnt 


Orme WCW wp 


oSowo wonde 


eo na Fe 


ws 3 


844. Present System of rovéw, do, make. 


APPENDIX. 


ACTIVE. 
Present. 
(movew) TOL@ 
(mroveeis) qovets 
(mroceet) Tovet 
(moéerov) — mrovetrov 
(moteerov) —rotetTov 
(mroveomev) — roLodpev © 
(mroveere) TOLetre 
(moveover)  rotodat 
Imperfect. 
(€roieov) — €roiovy 
(€moiees)  — erroiets 
(éroiee) emroiet 
(emoveerov) érrovetrov 
(émoveérnv) éroteitnv 
(€moveopev) érrovodpev 
(emoeere) erroveire 
(émoieov) — eroiouv 
Present. 
(trovew) roe 
(wovens) mors 
(moven) Town 
_ (mrovénrov) — rrotirov 
(movenrov)  moijrov 
.. (mwovewper) trodpev 
(movenre) — rounre 
‘(roéwat) —- rordou 


387 


Mrppie anv Passive. 


Present. 
(rrovéopat) Tovwovpat 
(movéet, oven) movet, mou 
(movéerar) ToOLetTat 
(movéec Bor) mroveto Gov 
; ia n 
(moveeo Bor) mroveia Gov 
(srovedpeOa) Trovoupeba. 

4 Cal 
(moveer Ge ) mroveta Oe 
(sroveovrat) mowouvTat 
Imperfect. 
> , > ’ 
(€rrovecpnv) eTFOLOULHY 
(€moveov) €TFOLOU 
(€rroveeTo) €TFOLELTO 
(€moeecOov) — emmotveta Oov 
: , 3 , 
(€moreecOnv)  — érroveio nv 
(€motedpeba)  _— errotovpeba 
> , > - 
(€moueer be) €rroveio Oe 
(€roveovro) €mroLovvTo 
Present. 
(motéwpat) Tov@pat 
(mroven Town 
(movénrat) mowrat 
(moreno Pov) mrouna Gov 
, A 
(moteno Gov) moujobov 
(rovempeba), . rrowpeba 
(mrovtnabe) mounobe 
(movewvrat) Towmvrat 


388 





Optative, 


= 





a 


i, 
wwe Ww wv 


-— Imperative. — 


Partie. 


wWDvVorre wWrwme wnwvr wore wwo wnvdre 


Ce xe 


MM. 


F. 
N. 


APPENDIX. 


Present System of movew. — continued. 


ACTIVE. MIDDLE AND Passive. 

Present. - Present. 
(mrovgoume) — [rrocotpe (moveoipnv) Trovoiwny 
(mroveors) qrotots (mroveoww) qrowoto 
(movéot) 7rotot | (mov€ouro) qrowotro 
(mov€orrov) — mrototrov (moveocOov)  —rowoic bor . 
(moveoitny)  rovoirny (moteoiaOnv) — rrovoia Onv 
(motgousev)  trovoipev (moteoiueba) — rovoipeOa 
(moveorte) —rovoire (moveoto be) mooie be 
(moveotev) —-Trototev (mroveowrTo) TOLowvTo 

or 

(moveoinv) —trotoinv 
(moteoins)  motoins 
(sroteoin) movoin 
(oveoinrov) [zrovoinrov 
(moveountny) rrovounrny | 
(troveoinwev) [ rovoinuev 
(moveoinre) mrovoinre 
(moveoinoav) rovoinoay | 
(woiee) Toilet (mrotéov) moLou 
(moveer@)  moveiro (moveéc Ow) mroveia Ow 
(moveerov) — rroveirov (moveec Bov) mroveta Gov 
(moveerwv) mroveirov (moveécOwv)  moveicdav 
(mouere) — mrovetre (movéer be) moteia be 
(movedvt@y) trovovvToy (moécbwv)  moveicbwv 
(mroveeuv) qoLev moveea Oat moteta Oat 
(moor)  — roLev ns (troveduevos) ToLovpevos 
(moveovea) mowvica (qroveopern) —strotoupevn 
(trov€ov) Trotoov (moveduevoyv)  motovpevov 








-—— Subjunctive——, 


PS: 


Indicative. 
7) 


SCwnore ww Wd 


Owner wCNMD Wd eS 


won wed Wd Ee 


APPENDIX. 


845. Present System of dnrow, make clear. 


ACTIVE. 


Present. 
(6nAd@) dnro@ 
(dnAdecs)  SnAois 
(dnrdev) — SnAot 


—(8nAderov) SnAodrov 


(dnAderov) dnAovrov 
(OnAdopev) SnAodpev 
(SnAdere) Sndodre 
(dyAdovar) Syrovor 


Imperfect. 
(€dnroov) ednAouv 
(€dnAoes) ednAous 
(€dnroe)  ednAov 


(édnAderov) édnAovTov 
(€dnAoernv) edndovrnv 
(€dnAdopev ednAodpev 
(ednddere) edndodre 


(edjAo0ov) edndovy 
Present. 
(8yAdw)  Snr@ 
(SnAdyns)  —SndAois 
(SnAén) = Bnet 


(SnAdnrov) SnA@rov 
(dnAdnrov) Snr@rov 
(8nrAd@pev) SnrAdpev 
(SnAénte) Sndr@re 
(dnAdwor) SndrAdor 


339 


MIDDLE AND PAssIvE. 


Present. 
(SnAdopar) SnAovdpat 
(dnAder, SnrAdn) Sndoi 
(8nAderat) dnAovrat 
(dnAdea Gor) dnAove Gov 
(dnAdea Gor) dnAova Gov 
(dnAodpe6a) dnAovpeba 
(dnAdeaGe) dnAodobe 
(8nAdovrar) dnAovvrat 

Imperfect. 
(ednXoounv) ednAovpnv 
(€8n\dov) ednrod 
(€8nAdero) ednAovro 
(ednrAdecOov)  edndovoFor 
(edndo€cOnv)  — edndAovaOnv 
(ednAo0dueOa) —- ednAo’peOa 
(edndAdeabe) edndovabe 
(edyAdovro) ~—s-_ eddy TO 

Present. 
(dnAdwpat) dnA@pat 
(8nA6n) dnAot 
(dnAdnrar) dnA@ra 
(dnddno Gov) 8nrA@o Gov 
(dnAdno Gov) dnrA@o bor 
(Sn\o@peOa) Snrapeba 
(dnAdno be) dnraoGe 

dnA@vrat 


(SnAde@vrtat) 


390 


r S. 





o 
Sowore wow wnwnore 


Optative. 





v 
SOwnore WOH WD 


© wm CP WwW PV 


-——Imperative.— 


Infin. 


M. 


Partie. ; F. 


N. 


APPENDIX. 


Present System of Snow — continued. 


ACTIVE. 


‘Present. 
(SnAdorpe) [ Syrotue 
(SnrAdo1s) Sydots 
(SnAdot) — SnAot} 
(8nAdotrov) Sndotrov 
(Sndooirnv) Sndoirnv 
(dnAdotpev) SnAoipev 
(dnAdoire) Sydoire 
(SnAsdoev) SyAviev 

or 

(dnrooinv) Sndoinv 
(SnAooins) Sdndoins 
(Snrooin)  SndAoin 
(3nXooinrov) [ dnAoinrov 
(SnAoountnv) Syrounrny] 
(8nAooinper) | SnAoinuev 
(SnAooinre) Sndoinre 
(8nAooincav) dndoinaav | 


(8nAoe) dnAov 
(dnAo0€rw) SndovT@ 


(dndAderov) dSydovrov 
(dnAv€er@v) dyrovTev 


(dndrdete) Sndovre 
(SnAodvr@v) Snrovvrav 


(8nr\dewv) Sydodv 


(dnrAdov) dndrav 


(8yAdovea) dynrodca 
(SmAdov) — dyAovdv 


Mippte and Passtve. 


Present. 
(SnAooipnv) dnroipnv 
(dnAdot0) dnAoto 
(8nAdatro) dnXotro 
(SyrAdorcbov)  — Sndoicbov 
(SnAooicbnv) — SndoieOnv 
(SyAooiweOa) Sndoipeba 
(8nAdovw be) dnd otobe 
(8nAdowrTo) OnAotvto 
(8nAdov) dndov 
(dnroeo ba dnrovcb@ 
(dnAdeaOov)  SdndovaGov 
(8nArAcécbwv)  Snrovcbwv 
(dnrAdeobe) dnArova be 
(Snr\0€cbav)  Snrovacbav 
(dnr\decOar) SndrovaOa 
(SnAodpevos) SyAovpevos 
(SnrAoopevn) = SnAovpevy | 

(8nAoduevov) SndAovpevov. 


APPENDIX. 391 


846. The Regular -wc Verbs. 
SYNOPSIS. 


Since the second aorist middle of terns is lacking » Empuapiny, I bought, 
is added. Since the second aorist active of Beteripa is lacking, eddy, Z 


entered, is added. 








ACTIVE. 
Indie. Subj. Opt. Imper. Infin. Partic. 
iommpe iote iotainv tory ioravaa iorads 
P Sap 50 S:d0inv didou dcddvae dud0vs 
Bes Awd pe «= TLD riOeinv — rie riOévat Tibeis 
deikvips Serkvia - Secxvuoymw deixvd Secxvivar Sevkvis 
Z 
iorny 
Imof edidour 
as a v 
edeikvov 
OTe orainv ornde = =arnvat ords 
| (ore) ra) doinv dé dodvat Sovs 
(€Oerav) Oe Geinv Oés Oeivac beis 
edi die dvb ddvae dis 
Mippxe and Passive. 
iorapet lorapat ioraipny torace teracba iardpevos 
neh Bidouac bidduac Sidoiuny idoe0 idorba  didduevos 
tidepat TiOdyuar rtibeivny Ttideco TideoOar rTiOepevos 
Seixvypac dexxvuapat Serxvvoiuny Seixvuco Seixvucbar Secxvipevos 
tordpny 
Impf €dcddpny 
ohne 
eSeuxvipny 
erpiauny mpiopat mprainny mpi mpiacOat  mpiduevos 
2 Aor.}edduny Sapmac Soiuny dod d6aGat Sdpevos 
Mid. |eOcunvy Oadpa beiunv $at bé0ba 6€éwevos 














392 APPENDIX. 


VERBS IN pu. 


- 


847. Present System of torn (ora-), place, set. 


ACTIVE. Mippte and Passive. 


Present. Imperfect. Present. Imperfect. 


S. 1  fornpe tony iorapat tordpunv 
[ 2  forns torns ioraca foraco 
3 3 tornac torn iorarat icrato 
— D.2 ~~ torarov iorarov ioracOov icra Oov 
= 3 torarov torarny ioracbov tordaOnv 
4 Pl iorapev iorapev iordpeba tordyeba 
| 2  torate torare toracbe icraobe 
L 3. iardce _foracav ioravrat foravro 
Present. Present. 
f Ss. I ioro ior@pat 
} z iorns iorn 
= 3 iotn iornrat 
3 D. 2 iornrov iotnoOov 
a3 5 iorntov iornobov 
2 wa sae 
z P. I igT@pev iota@peba 
2 iornre . iornobe 
t d ioraoe | ior@vrae 
S. I iorainv ioraiuny 
[ 2 iorains ioraio 
aS 3 iorain igratro 
8 D. 2 istairov or iorainrov ioraia Gov 
p ama iotaitny —_toranrny ioraiaOnv 
oO P. 1 ioraipev = iorainuer ioraipeba 
2: ioratre iorainre ioraiabe 
3: iaratey icrainoay ioraivro 
f S. 2 torn ioraco 
© 3 iordte iordcbea 
3 D2 toraroy torac bop 
o 53 iordtov icracbov 
= P.2 iorare ioraa be 
t 3 ioravrer ioracbwv 
Tnfin. ioravae iorac bat 
Partie. isras, -Goa, -dv . iordpevos, -n, -ov 


-——-Indicative.-—— 


-—Imperative— —-—-Optative.-——, ——Subjunctive— 


ee 
2 
3 
D, ..2 
3 
1 
2 
3 
Si 4t 
2 
3 
dD «3 
3 
E. 
2 
3 
S. 
D. 
S, 
D. 
Infin. 
Partic. 


APPENDIX. 


ACTIVE. 


393 


848. Present System of didwp. (do-), give. 


MIpDLE and Passive. 


Present. 


didapu 
bidws 
bidoae 
diSotrov 
didorov 
didopev 
. didore 
d:ddaoe 


Imperfect. 
edidovv 
edidovs 
€didov 
edidorov 

e08drnv 
edidopev 
ed:dote 


edidocav 


Present. 
didopae 
didocae 
didorat 
61500 Gov 
6id00 Gov 
d.ddpe8a 
did006e 


didovTo 


Imperfect. 
eduddunv 


edid000 
€di00To 
€0i1d00 Gov 
eduddc0Onv 
ed.ddueGa 
edidoabe 


€di00vTO 


dudoirnv 
dcdotper 
d.doire 
didatev 


WO WO WO W 0 C8 DO rR & 0D WD 


Present. 


8156 
ddas 
6156 
d:d@rov 
d:darov 
didapev 
é:dGTe 
b:dace 


didoinv 

ded0ins 

bd0in 
d.dotrov or did0inrov 
Sidoenrnv 
didoinuev 
did0inre 
didoincay 


didov 
bid0T@ 
d{dorov 
6:dd6T ev 
didore 


d:ddvT@v 
d:ddvae 


didovs, -otcra, -dy 


Present. 


dddpae 
dd6 
b:darat 
&:da00ov 
d:d406ov 
d:dapeba 
dda00€ 


d:davra 


didoiunv 
drdot0 
d:d0tTo 
dd0tc Gov 
did0ia nv 
dd0ipe8a 
d.d0ic Ge 


d:d0tvro 


didoc0 
6:d600@ 
6id00 Gov 
d:d600av 
d1d006e 
d:dd00av 


idoa Oat 


d:ddpevos, -7, -ov 


394 


s. ] 

[ Pong 
3 3 
sp; 
Ss 3 
ei 1 
9 

Ee ong 
[ ae 
2 
2 3 
S Ds'3 
—s 3 
= 1 
7 r) 
Ae 
Rete | 

Q 

Ps 3 
ze D. 2 
44 3 
eee h 
I Q 
3 
ae 
© 3 
3 D. 2 
az 3 
= 9 
L 5 
Infin. 
Partic. 


APPENDIX. 


ACTIVE. 


Present. 
riOnpt 
, 
riéns 
riOnot 
, 
TiGerov 
, 
tibetov 
, 
Tidepev 
7, 
Tibete 
Pm 
Tibeact 


Imperfect. 
eriOnv 

> , 
eribets 
erider 

>. ff, 
ériOerov 

5 4 
eriOerny 

o. 2 

eT iOepev 

: MEY : 
eridere 

; 
eriGecav 


Present. 


849. Present System of tiOnas (Oe-), put, place. 


MIpDLE and Passive. 


Present. 
tidepar 
tidewat 
tidera 
tiberbov 
tibecbov 
tibepeba 
tidecbe 
tibevrat 


Imperfect. 


eriOepnv 


étideco 


erideto 

eTiOeabov 
eribeaOnv 
éribeueba 


 érideabe 


éribevro 


Present. 


Ti0@ 
riOns 
TOn 
TiOnrov 
TiOnTov 
TiOGpev 
TLOnTeE 


TUba@oL © 


Tueinv 
Tieins 


rein e 
TiOeirov or TLOeinrov 


riOeirny 
riOeipev 
Tieire 
TiOeiev 


Tieuntny 
Tieinuev 
riOeinre 

Tieinoav 


ribet 
Tiber a 
, 

tiberov 

"2 
Tiberwv 
tiOere 
Tibevr@v 


TiOevat 


tibeis, -eioa, -v 


TWO@pat 
707 
TiOnrat 
ttOnoOov 
tiOnabov 
TiOapeba 
tiOnabe 
TiO@vrat 


Tieiuny_ 
tOeio 
teito 
tbeia bov 


tieicOnv 
Teipeba 
tOeiabe 
TOeivro 


Ttideco 


tibec ba 
tibecOov 
tibecOwyv 
tiGeabe 
tiUécbav © 


riber Oat 


Tibémevos, -n, -ov 


PD 


o 
wSC§worwnwnre 


-—-—lIndicative-—\ 


ive.— 
a 


o 
Cwr ww evn ey 


Ae 


wae Wd WW wnorewwow wor 


tv 


Imperative -——Optativee— -— Subjunct 


850. Present System of deixvipr, show. 


APPENDIX. 


ACTIVE. 


Present. 
Seixvipe 
Seixvis 
Seixvige 
Seixvutov 
Seixvutov 
Seixvupev 
Seixvute 
decxvuaar 


Imperfect. 
edeikvv 

> , o 
edeikvus 

> , — 
ed€iKYU 

> , 
€OeikvuToy 
edecxvuTny 
> , 
edeikvupev 
EQ€(KYUTE 

> , 
edetkvugay 


395 


MrIpp.e and Passive. 


-Present. 


Seixvupat 
Seixkvucat 
Seixvurat 
Seixvuabov 
deixvua Gov 
Secxvypeba 
deixvuabe 
Seixvuvrat 


Imperfect. 


_ eckvipnv 


> , 
€deikvuco 

> , 
€OeiKYUTO 
edeikvucbov 
edecxvua Onv 

~ , 
edecxvupeba 
edeixvuabe 
ede(KvUYTO 


Present. 
derxvio 
Secxvins 
Secxviry 
Seuxvinrov 
decxvinrov 
Secxvi@pev 
decxvinrte 
dexvi@ar 


Secxvvouue 
Serxviious 
Secxvvor 
Secxvvourov 
Secxvvoirny 
Secxvvoupev 
Seckvvort€ 
Seckvvovev 


Seikvu 
SeuxviTo 
Seixvutov 
Secxvitov 
Seixvute 
Secxvuvt@v 


. Secxvovae 


PA a , 
Setxvis, -doa, -vv 


Present. 


deckvi@pat 
Secxvin 

+ Secxvinrat 
Seixvina bov 
Secxvino Bov 
Secxvuapeba 
derxvina be 
dexkvv@vrat 


Secxvvoiuny 
Serxvvoo 
Setkvvorro 
Serxviorabov 
decxvvoiaOnv 
decxvvoipeda 
Secxviiourbe 
Secxvvowro 


deixvvco 
Secxvic bw 
Seixvvcbov 
derxvicbav 
Seixvuc be 
decxvicbav 


deixvvcbat 


, 
Setkvupevos, -n, -ov 


396 APPENDIX. 


852. Second Aorist System 
of didwpe (do-), give. 


851. Second Aorist System 
of iornps (ora-), set. 


ACTIVE. MipDLz. ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
Ss. 1 eoTny empiapnv (€S@xa) eddunv 
| 2 éorns eTpi@ (€Swxas) €dou 
3 3 €oTn émpiato (edaxe) €doTo 
> ” > , a” a 
6 D.2 éornrov empiac Gov edotov €d00 Gov 
= 3 eorntny empuaa Onv eddrny €ddaOnv 
Ge tu | EOTNLEV empiapeOa edopev eddpueba 
2 €aTnTE émpiacbe edore edoobe 
3 ' €oTnoav empiavTo édovav edovro 
( Ss. 1 oT® Tpi@pat or) dapat 
: Q oTHs mpin des 86 
= 3 OTH mpinrat b6 dara 
eo D.2 oTHTOV mpina Oov darov da06ov 
= 3 oTnTov apino Gov d@rov ba06ov 
= P.l oTapmev mpr@peba S@pev dape8a 
ries oe OTHTE mpinabe dare dab 
l 3 oTaot mplovrat daor da@vrat 
Ss. 1 orainy mptaiuny doin doipny 
2 orains Tpiato Soins Soto 
g 3 oTain Tpiarto doin doiro 
-= D.2 orairov or orainrov § mpiacbov Sotrov or doinrov Ssoiabov 
3 3 oTraitny oraintny mptaicOny Soirny Sountnv SoicOnv 
© P.1 oraipeyv crainuev mptaipveba Soiuev Soinuev Soipeba 
L 2 oraire arainre  mpiacbe doire Soinre  Soiade 
3 oraiev.  oraincay mpiawrTo - Soiev Soincay Soivro 
( 8. 2 _oTnde Tpia dds dod 
v 3 OTHT@ mpiacbw ddre dé606e 
€ D. 2 oTnTov mpiac ov Sérov dda6ov 
of 3 OTnT@v mpiaoO@v ddérav d6c0 bev 
= P. 2 OTHTE mpiac be ddre dda6€ 
| 3 oTavTOY mpiacbwv Odvtev 860 Oar 
Infin. orivat mpiacba dodvat dd0Gat 
Partic.  oras, ordoa, ordv mpidpevos, — Sovs, Sovoa, ddv Sdpevos, 
“1; -Ov “), Ov 


APPENDIX. 397 
853. Second Aorist Sys- 854. Second Aor, 855. Second Perf. Sys- 
tem of tiOnpu (Ge-), System of tem of iatn (oTa-), 


place, put. Siw, enter. set. See 620. 
ACTIVE. MIDDLE. ACTIVE. ACTIVE. 
| ‘ Q9d Aor. 2d Perf. 2d Plup. 
8. 1 (€6nxa) eO€unv edo (€ornka) (€a7nKn) 
2 (€Onxas) Gov dus (€atnkas)  (€aTHKns) 
S 3 (€Onke) éOero 60 (€ornke) — (€aTHKeL) 
6 D.2 eOetov €GeaOov edvTov €orarov €oTarov 
= 3 eOernv - ebeaOnv edurnv €oTarov €orarny 
a Pot eJepev edepeba eOvpev eorapev eoTapev 
2 eOere eOea be edure €oTare | eorare 
3 eGecav €Gevto edtcav = Eo Tat éoracay 
2d Perf. 
8. 1 @ Gapat dve éoT@ 
[ 2 Ons 67 duns éaTis 
© 3 On Onra dun éoTh 
& D.2 Onrov Ono Oov Suvnrov éoTnrov 
5 3 Onrov Ono bov dvnrov é€oTnrov 
a Oapev Oape8a dvepev éoTapev 
“ 2 Onre Ono Ge dunre éoTnTe 
3 baat Oavrat dvwot -€OTOOL 
Ss. 1 beinv . Ocipny éorainv 
[ 2 Geins Geto See 738. éorains 
i. 3 Gein Geiro éotain 
= D.2 @cirov or Ocinrov bei bov éorairov oY éorainroy 
= 3 Ocitny Oeunrny OeicOnv €oraitny éoraiuntny 
© P.1 Gcivev Ocinuev Ocineba éoTaipev éorainuev 
“2 Ocire  Oeinre Ociobe éoraire éorainre 
3 Ociev  Oeinoav Ocivro éoraiev éorainoay 
‘ae és 60d b06 eoralt 
2 3 bérw baba dito éotdta 
8 D.2 bérov beabov ddrov €oTarov 
3 3 bérav béabwv dvrev €oTaT@V 
& P.2 Oére babe dire éorare 
l 3. Gévrev béabav dvvtev éoravT@v 
Infin.  *  Oeivac Gea bar ddva éoTavat 
Partic. eis, Ocica, bev Oéuevos, dvs, ddaa, éoTas, éstaoa, éards 
~Ny Ov Suv 


398 


856. Second Aorist Sys- 
tem of yryvooKw 


APPENDIX. 


IRREGULAR VERBS IN MI. 


(yvw-), know. 


Ss 
09 TO 


-——Indicative ———, 
: i) 
oo Hoo tO 


D. 
if 


-—Imperative ——Optative—— —-Subjunctive-— 
o 
C8 BD SS WO SW WH wonorewweowndr wCnrewn 6w ee 


Tnfin. 


Partie. 


857. otda (id-), know. 858. Sat (pa-), say. 


ACTIVE. 


ACTIVE. ACTIVE. ° 
Qd Perf. 2dPlup. Present. Imperf. 
e-yver oida = dn or HOew = ni Ev 
éyvas oicOa 7Snoba or dis or &pnoba or 
eyva oide jderoba ons  edns ~ 
; noe or 7dew noi ey 
€yv@rov torov jorov gbarov édarov 
eyvarny iorov yoTny gardv earn 
eyvapev iopev nope dapev ehapev 
eyvwre iore yore garé edare 
eyvacav ioaot joavor joecay paci epacay 
2d Perfect. Present. 
ya ida po 
yos. eidns pis 
ye «in on 
yvaerov eid7Tov prov 
yva@rov eiOnTov pyro 
‘ yvepev elO@pev popev 
yvare eiOnre * ire 
yrace eiddat pact 
yvoinv eideinv ainv 
yvoins eideins gains 
yvoin eidein ain 
yvotroy or yvoinrov eidetrov atrov or painrov 
yvoirny —-yvountnv eideirny gairny . haunrny 
yvoimev yvoinuev eidcipev or eldeinuey gainer chainuev 
yvoire  yvoinre — eideire eideinre gaire ainre 
yvotev yvoinouy eidetev eideinoay§ = =aiev = sainoar 
yvabt toe pall or fabdi 
yore lore dara 
/ ywerov torov arop » 
yrorov ioraw ddrev 
yraere tore. . gare - 
yudvT@v icrav pdavrov 
yvevat eldévat pavat 


, a 
vous, -ovca, -Ov 


3 , ~ , 
eld@s, -vla, -ds 


2 


r— Indicative —— 
CG TO eS GO OH W dO 


ive. 
P 


~ 9 


wraorwrawnewnvor Wwe ww ownre 


se 


9 


-—-Imperative— —— Optativee—— —-—— Snubjuanct 
wwe w YO &w WD 


APPENDIX. 


859. «ii (€0-), be. 


” io y 
@Y, OVO, OY 


ACTIVE. 
Present. Imperfect. Future. 
’ eipi A or Av €oopmat 
> 2 4 »” 
€i noba Evel, EON 
> , > 7 
€ori nv €orat 
€ardv jotovor roy éeocecbov 
> , + a 6. 
€ordy joTnvy Arnv eaeador 
éopev ev éoopueba 
éaté ore are €aeade 
eioi qoav €covrat 
Present. 
4 
ns 
> 
7 
Arov 
TOV 
@pev 
fre 
aot 
ww b , 
€inv €ooiny 
eins €oaLo 
ww + 
€in ; €voiTo 
elroy or einrov éoo.o Gov 
a s/f 3 , 
€itTyv — eintnv ecoicOnv 
> Es > , 
® eiuev ete evoipeba 
> ww * 
eire — €uTe evo be 
elev einoav EvoLvTo 
ioOe 
ww. 
éoT@ 
* 
éorov 
€oTov 
eore 
» 
€CT@V 
_ 
eivat Eaec ar 


€odevos, -7,; -ov 


860. 


399 


eit (i-), go. 


Active. . 


Present. 


Imperfect. 
a or jew 
Rid cd 
jes neioda 
Ad a 
nee yew 
TOV 
” 
ny 
Hpev 
> 
TE 
qoay or jeoav 


Present. 


” 
t@ 


a 
ays 
nw 


477 

” 
inrov 
inrov 
topev 
a” 

inte 

ww 

toot 


” Fea OF 
tout Or loiny 
” 

tots 

» 

tou 

» 

tOLTOV 

: Seed 

toLTHV 
Tower 
toure 

»” 

lovey 


” 

10% 

a” 
iT@ 
” 
trov 
” 
ir@v 


5 


3? . aA bd 
t@V, Lovoa, Lov 


4.00 APPENDIX. 


861. type (é-), send. 


ACTIVE. Mr». and Pass. ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 


o 


iy 
WCwmorrewwNnw wore 


— Indicative —— 


Sag 


iyiah A 
Wwmor ww wore 


i 


oS 


Owe wwewre 


eg 


= 
9 2~ Ww ww 


Imperative ——-Optative——, -——Subjunctive.—\ 


Tnfin. 
Partie. 


Pres. Imperf. 


inpe 
ins 
inot 
ierov 
terov 
tepev 
iere 
taot 


cad 

ty 
fets 

a 

TEL 
terov 
iérnv 
fepev 
fere 
feoav 


Pres. 
fepat 
feoat 
ferat 
fea Oov 
feo bov 
igueOa 
terbe 
fevra 


Imperf. 
téunv 
ievo 
tero 
tea Oov 
iéoOnv 
iépeOa 
tea Oe 
fevto 


Present. 

i 

ins 

tf 
inrov 
tirov 
tOpev 
inre 
iéot 


teinv 

teins 

tein 
tcirov, teinrov 
feirny, teunrnv 
tciwev, teinuev 
teire, teinre 
tciev, teinoav 


. fet 
térT@ 
ow 
teTov 
iérav 
tere 
tévrov 


£7 
tevat 


teis, teioa, tev 


Present. 
i@pat 

tn 

inra 

ino Gov 
ino Oov 
topeba 
inode 
i@vrat 


feiunv 
teto 
teiro 
iciaOov 
teicOnv 
teipeOa 
teiabe 


teivro 


teoo 
téecOa 
tea Oov 
técOav 


teoOe 


técOav 


. feo Oat 


féevos, -n, -ov 


Second Aor. 


(ja) 
(jas) 
(7jKe) 
elrov 
eirnv 
eipev 
e 
€iTeE 
e 
eioav 


° 6 
aS Sa 


So 303 
5 tee ba. 
m oo SS 
2s S 8 


ein 
ce o 
€LTOV, €lnTOV 
a ‘ 
€LTNV, €iNnTHY 
ay 
eiwev, einpev 
cite, e€inre 
e 7 
elev elnoav 


7 

€s 

hd 
€T@ 
” 
€Tov 
oe 
E€T@V 

¢ 
€TE 
° 
E€VT@V 


at} 
elvat 


7 e o 
els, Elo a, EV 


a 
eiunv 
e 
€ioo 
= 
€iTO 
ec 
eia Gov 
a 
eto Onv 
ov 
eipeba 
e 
elabe 
gic 
€ivTO 


APPENDIX. 40] 





862. KaO-yyar (jo-), sit down. 863. Keipar (xet-), lie. 


Present. Imperfect. - Present. Imperfect. 
[ S. 1 «adOnya éxabnpny or KaOnuny Ketpat exeiunv 
; 2 Ka@noa exdOnco ~—S xaj)00 keloat EKELTO 
2 3 KdOnrac exaOnro Kadnoro keirat EKELTO 
SD. 2 = xdOnoOov = exanabov =Kabjobov keiabov —- Exerc Bov 
5 3 KaOnobov exabnacOnv KabyoOnv ketaOov = exeia Onv 
SP. 1 xaOnpeba exabnpeba Kabnpeba keieOa = €xeiseOa 
l 2 Kabnode exdOnobe  Kabynobe KeioGe — Exerc Oe 
3  KadOnvrac exdOnvto KaOnvro KeivTat = EKewvTO 
Present. Present. 
f S. 1 kab@pat Ke@pat 
; 2 Kan Ken 
| a ae kaOnrat ’ Kenrat 
3 D. 2 xaOno Gov Keno Gov 
Sa 3 kana Oov Keno Oov 
= Pl xabapeba KeapeOa 
MN = , 
2 kabno be kéenaGe 
L 3 xaba@vrat Ké@vTat 
S. 1 Kaboipnv Keoluny 
2 xaOoio KéoLo 
é 3 xaboito K€OLTO 
Be D. 2 xaboiabov xéora Bov 
a 3 caboiaOnv KeoiaOnv 
© 1 kaboipeba xeoiveOa 
2 xaboia Ge ceo be 
3 KaOoivro KEOLVTO 
eat KaOnoo KEtoo 
© 3 Kano Ow xeio Ow 
4D. 2 kano Gov Keio Gov 
o 3 kabnobav Keio bay 
5 P. 2 Kana be keto Oe 
L 3 kabnobov kelaOov 
Tofin. kabjo Oa Keio Oat 
Partie. xaOnpevos, -n, -ov keljevos, -1, -Ov 


26 


Cpyyrigue he 
Wea fe { ey = s 4 a i a. - ‘ tats 
oS 4 nN at ZEN ree A 

2 - ge aa: rege 
“lyre 
a eae . 20 
sochtgh Ie ‘aa 


. 24 ” => = er ' x A x 
ce 
Ee 2 ; “ ie 


= ead. 


+ WM - 
sytem 4 


. 


‘ 
~*~ 


of 


. 


* ee toa 


.) st be 








VOCABULARIES. 





INDEXES. 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


ace. = accusative. 

act. = active, -ly. 

adj. = adjective, -ly. 

adv. = adverb, adverbial, -ly. 
a., aor. = acrist. 

apod. = apodosis. 

art. = article. 

attrib. = attributive. 

cf. = confer, compare. | 
comm. = commonly. 

comp. = comparative. 

cond. = condition, conditional. 
con}. = conjunction. 

const. = construction. 


contr. = contraction, contracted. 


dat. = dative. 

decl. = declension. 

def. = definite. 

dem., demon. = demonstrative. 
dep. = deponent. 

der. = derivation. 

dir. = direct. 

dise. = discourse. 

Dor. = Doric. 

e. g. = for example. 

encl. = enclitic. 

Eng. = English. 

esp. = especially. 

ete. = and so forth. 

ex. = example. 

exc. = exception. 

f., ff. = following. 

fem. = feminine. 

fut. = future. 

gen. = genitive. 

i. e. = that is. 

impers. = impersonal, -ly. 
impf., imperf. = imperfect. 
imv. = imperative. 

indec., indec]. = indeclinable. 
indef. = indefinite. 

ind., indic. = indicative. 
indir. = indirect. 

inf., infin. = infinitive. 
interr. = interrogative, -ly. 


intr., intrans. = intransitive, -ly, 


Lat. = Latin. 

masc. = masculine. 

mid. = middle. 

N.= note. 

neut. = neuter. 

No., Nos. = Number, Numbers. 
nom. = nominative. 

obj. = object. 

obs. = observation, observations. 
opt. = optative. 

Pp.» Pp» = page, pages. 

part. gen. = partitive genitive, 
part , partic. = participle. 
pass. = passive, -ly. 

pf., perf. = perfect. 

pl., plur. = plural. 

pipf., plupf. = pluperfect. 
post-posit. = pest-positive. 
pred. = predicate. 

pred. posit. = predicate position, 
prep. = preposition. 

pres. = present. 

prin. = principal, principally. 
pron. = pronoun. 

prot. = protasis. 

q. v. = whieh see. 

R. = root. 

reflex. = reflexive, -ly. 

reg. = regular. 

rel. = relativé, -ly. 

rem. = remark. 

rev. = review. 

sc. = sci/icet, understand. 

2, sec. = second. 

sing. = singular. 

subj. = subject. 

subjv. = subjunctive. 

subst. = substantive, -ly. 
sup., super. = superlative. 
suppl. = supplementary. 

syn. = synonyme. 

synt. = syntax. 

tr., trans. = transitive, -ly. 
voc. = vocative. 

vocab. = vocabulary. 

w. = with, 


GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 





This vecabulary includes both the words of the special vocabularies, and those 

which have been used in the exercises and reading lessons. They are here given 
with their definitions, cross references, and related words, etc., but generally with 
a fuller treatment. 
_ The verb stem and class follow immediately the present indicative of all verbs 
whose formation presents any difficulties, and whenever additional references are 
introduced, they follow generally a like order of application. This arrangement will 
not only review the references of the words in the order in which they first appeared, 
but will furnish the most natural order for consultation. 

Derivations of the more obviously related words are further indicated here by the 
dagger pointing up (}) or (t) or in both directions (f) to a simpler source. While 
in the special vocabularies, the genitive of the O declension, and the gender of nouns 
coming under the general rules, were mostly omitted, they are here generally 
indicated in the usual way. 





a- A. 


a (dv- before a vowel), an insepara- 
ble particle called alpha privative, 
(a) negative, (4) copulative (498, 
obs.). atheist. 

ABpoxépas, -a (Dor. gen.), (49, obs. 
1, 2); Abrocimas, satrap of Phoe- 
nicia and Syria, and commander 
under Artaxerxes. 

ayalds, -7, -dv (comp. 380, 1), good, 
noble, brave; fertele. 

dyapat (675, voeab.), -aodpny, nyd- 
oOnv, admire, esteem. 

Tt ayyAdo (ayyeX-, iv-), (596,612, 7); 
ayyer@ (255) ; fyyerra (256); iPy- 
yerka, ifyyeAua, nyyerdOnv, . an- 
nounce, report, carry news (188). 

dyyedos, -ov, 6, a messenger (14). 
angel, c\-angelist. 


adehdhds 
ayopa, -ds, 7, place af assembly, 


market-place, market ; as a mark 
of time, dyepa wAnOovea, the time 
of full market, i.e. from mune 
o’elock till noon. 

f dyopdie (dyopad-, iv.), -aow, fre- 
quent the market, buy, purchase. 
¢ d&ypwos, -ia, -cov, living iu the fields, 

wild, savage (513). 

ayo, d&w, iyayov (533, 1), hxa 
(542,6), Trypat, 4xOnv, lead, bring ; 

- carry, march. axiom (513). 

4 aydy, -dvos, 6, an assembly at the 
games ; a contest, games. agony 
(513). 

adeAdos, -o8, 6, a brother; voce. 
aehde. Adelphi, Adelphian, 
Phil-adelphia. 


GQOLKEW 


+ &5ixco, -joe, 7dixyoa, etc., to act 
unjustly, wrong, injure; pres. 
may have the sense of the pf. I 
do wrong, or I have done wrong, 
am tn the wrong. 

G5ixos, -ov, unjust, wrong (498, 1). 

aet, adv., always, from time to time, 
ever, constantly. EVER, AYE. 

Gerdes, -0d, 6, an eagle, an eagle asa 
standard. 

"AGivan, -av, ai, Athens. 

}’A@nvatos, -aia, -atov, Athenian ; 6 
*AOnvaios, an Athenian. 

Gpottw (dOpod-, iv. (608, 1)), 
(dOpdos, close together), (612, 2), 
aOpoice, etc., collect, assemble, levy 
forces ; mid, muster. Lat. cogo. 

GOupos (Gipcs, 673), without 
heart, dispirited, depressed (498, 
obs.}. 

Alytrrios, -ia, -tov (Atyunres, Egypt), 
Egyptian. 

Almayes, -ar, oi, Aenianians, a Thes- 
salian tribe. 

} alperds, -7, -dv, chosen ; oi aiperoi, 
the persous chosen, deputies, dele- 
gates. 

aipéw (aipe-, EX-, Vill), -0@, €irov, 

' Hpnxe, Fpypat, ypeOny (698, 1); 
take, seize, capture; wid., choose. 
di-aeresis, heretic, heresy. 

aloBbdvopar (aicd-, v.), (632); ai- 
céjcopas, noOdunv, noOnpar, per- 
ceive or apprehend by the senses ; 
learn, see, become aware of; w 
gen., hear, hear of. aesthetic. 

aloyxpés, -d, -dv, shameful, base, dis- 
graceful, infamous; aicxior, ai- 
oxtoros (379, 3). 

} aicxive (aigxvr-, iv.), (598, 1), 
(aio xivn, shame(612,4)),-vv@(255), 
Hoxova (256), poyvvOny (605), 
shame, disgrace, dishonor ; wid. 


406 


9 
pL 


as pass. dep., be ashamed at, feel 
shame before, stand in awe of. 
Synt, 603. 

aitéw, airnow, etc., ask, demand; with 
two acc., ask a person for some- 
thing (269); mid., ask for one’s 
self, entreat, beg. Syn. 271. 

airidopat, -acopar, yriaoduny, re- 
proach, blame, accuse. , 

Gkivdkns, -ov, 6, @ short sword, dag- 
ger. (645, No. 11.) 

&Kovw, -copat, NKoveOny, iKovoa, W- 
both gen. and ace. hear, hear of, 
learn ; with gen. alone, hear, obey, 
listen to. acoustic. 

Gxpo-roAts, -ews, 1 (dKpos, mdAus, 
(501, 2)); a acropolis, a citadel. 
acropolis. - 

dxpos, -a, -ov, at the end, extreme, 
outermost, topmost, highest ; td 


dx pov, summit ; ra akpa, the heights, 
In the pred. position, the 


cte. 
end of. (616). 

dxov, Gkovoa, dkov (éxav), unwill- 
ing. 

adeEw, mid. ddeLopat, 7\eEdpnv; ward 
off, avenge one’s self on, requite. 

dAevpa, -wv, Ta (615), fine flour. 

} GAAG, adversative conj., expressing 


opposition more strongly than 8é, _ 


but, otherwise, on segenge tine yet, 
however (629). 

tGdAHrwv (405), setae pro- 
noun, of ove another, each other. 
par-allel. 


GAXos, -n, -o (629), indef. pron: other, - 


another ; 6 a@dXos or of adda, the 


rest of (174). 


| @AAws, adv. (470), otherwise, in’ 


another way. 

dua, adv. at once; same time (227), w. 
dat. at the same time with (225); 
dua tH npepa, at daybreak; apa 


apata 
TH emiovan nuepa, at the dawn of 
_ the following day (685). 
dp-ata, -ys, 7 (dua), (41), @ wagon 
(513). 
4 diy-aturds, -dv. passable for wagons ; 
000s duakirés, wagon road. 
Gpaptave (duapt-, v.), (632), dpap- 


THTOMAL, Huaprov, NudpTnKa MLSS, 


- fail, ox err in conduct. 

_ Gpetver, -ov, comp. of dyaéds (380,1). 
Syn. 388. 

G-pwehew (ueAex), be careless of, neglect. 

G-phXxavos, -ov, difficult, impossible ; 
600s dunyavos, a difficult road, 
impracticable (710). 

Gutredos, -ov, 7, & vine, grape Vine. 

Tt dpi (141), primarily signifies on 
both sides of; w. gen. and dat., 
about, concerning, on account of ; 
mostly w.ace., around, about, near. 

t dudédrepos, -a, -ov, both ; pred.posit. 

ft apdorépwbev, adv. on both sides, at 

both ends. 

Gud, gen. and dat. same form in 
all genders, doth. BOTH. 

av (566) is joined: (a) to all the 
secondary tenses of the indic., 
and to the optative, infinitive, or 
participle, to denote that the ac- 
tion of the verb is dependent on 
some condition (565, 668, 690) ; 
(4) it is joined to eé, if and to all 
relative and temporal words (692); 
(c) it is used in iterative sentences 
(679,). 

av, contr. from édv. 

dvd, prep., acc. wp, over, by. ON. 

dva-Baive, go up, ascend, mount, 
march inland, up, ete. 

| dvd-Bacts, -ews, 7, the march up, 
inland ; ascent (673). anabasis. 

dv-ayyéAho, bring back word, report 
(188). 


407 


aéiow 


t dvayndto (dvayxad-, iv.), (dvdykn, 
(612, 3)); avayxdoo, ete., force, 
compel. 

avayKn, -ns, 7 (123), @ necessity ; 
avayxn €or, tt is necessary (79). 

av-dyw, lead up or back ; take up. 

dva-mrave, cause to rest.; mid. rest, 
halt. 

dva-orpépw (659), turn back, face 
about ; pass., rally, be turned back. 

dvev, prep. w. gen., without. 

avip, dvdpds, 6 (3862), a man, hus- 
band ; avdpes orpatiara, fellow- 
soldiers. lat. vir. 

dvOpwrros, -ov, 6, 7, a human being, a 
man. Lat. homo. philanthropy. 

dvidw, -dow, nviaca, nvidOnv, grieve, 
trouble. 

dy-iornp (741), make stand up, 
raise up, rouse; intrans. in mid. 
w. 2a, pf., and plupf. act., stand 
up, rise. 

dv-o80s, -ov, 7) [6866], way up, march 
inland.. 

avrl, prep., w. gen. (141), [over 
against |, instead of; against. an- 
swer, anti-pathy, anti-dote (188). 

avri-rapacKevdfopat, fo prepare 
against, or one’s self in turn. 

ayri-oraciarns, -ov, 6 (695), an op- 
ponent, one of the opposite party. 

dvtrov, -ov, Td, a cave. Lat. antrum. 

dvw, adv. (dva) (463), up, above ; 
comp. dv@rép@, sup. adverdra. 

d£vos, -ia, -ov (817), of like weight, 
worth as.much, w. gen.; worthy, 
valuable ; moddod a&vos, worthy 
of much, great value (513). 

4 dfid0, -dow, etc., think or deem 
worthy of a thing (241); w. ace. 
and inf.; think worthy to do or be; 
claim, demand, ask (269). ii 
271. 


atayyedhw 


Gr-ayyedio, bring back word, an- 
nounce from, report (188). 

ar-dyw, lead back or away, off, march. 

Gmr-arréw, -no0, demand, demand 
back. 

&-mapdoKevos, -ov (638), wuprepared. 

Gnas, dndca, dnav (a4 + mas), 
strengthened form of mas (498, 
obs.*), all, quite all, all together. 

Gar-eypt (etuc), (741), go away or 
back, depart. 

dar-eLaive, dislodge, drive away ov 
off, march away, ride or go back. 

Gr-épxopar, go away, depart from, 
go over. : 

aa-€xo, hold back, be distant ; mid., 
abstain or desist from. Syunt. 410. 

drhrOov, see arépxopar. 

a6, prep. w. gen. only (141), from, 
away from (123). Lat. ab, apo- 
logy, apo-stasy, OFF, OF. 

Grro-Selxvipr, point out, show forth, 
appoint ; mid., express one’s opin- 
ton, declare. Synt. 268. 

Gro-SiSwpr (646), give back, restore, 
pay; wid., sell. 

G1ro-OvicKkw (659), die, be killed ; 
used in Attic as pass. toa GroKreive. 
See vara. 

Garo-kptvopar, dmokpivodpat (255), 
reply, answer. Lat. respondeo, 
Garo-kptim@rw (593), hide from, con- 

ceal. apocrypha. 

&tro-ktetva, ‘ill, put to death; for 
pass. see d&mroOvhoke, (263). 

Gtro-Acltrw, leave behind, abandon. 

Gar-6\Avut (741), amrodéow or -oAa, 
adroh@\-ka, am@éd\wda, destroy ut- 
terly, slay, lose; with mid., 2 pf., 
and 2 plupf. act. (as pres.), perish, 
die. 

"Améddov, -wvos, 6, Voc.” AmoAXor, 
Apollo, god of music and poetry. 


408 éprate 


Gro-réprw (68), send off or away, 
send home or back ; wid., dismiss. 

atro-mEw (p. 52°), sail away or home 
(214). 

} G-tropéw, “Ow, ete., be in want, be 
perplexed, in diate without means; 
be in want of (340). 


+ a-ropla, -as, n, difficulty. 


G-mopos, -ov (mdpos, passage), im- 
passable, tmpracticable, —_ 
(498, 2). 

Gro-o rdw (271), -oTdow, -éoTaca, 
-€omaka, -€omacpat, draw awoy 
or off, separate, withdraw. 

dtro-cTéANw (650), send away, send, 
despztch. apostle. 

aro-répva, cul off, intercept. 


| dtro-evya, flee back, escape. 


&tro-xwpéw, -now, etc., withdraw, 
retreat. — 

"ApaBia, as, 7, Arabia. 

Gpytpeos, a-, -ov, contr. dpyupods, 
etc. (170, 2), of silver. 

dpytpiov, -ov, 7d, a piece of silver, 
silver money. 

dpert, -As, 7, fitness, virtue, good con- 
duct, bravery, valor (764). 

*Aptaios, -ov, 6, Ariacus. 

GpOyds, -ov, 6, number, enumeration. 
arithmetic (764). 

dpurtepds, -a, -dv (227), left; ev 
apiorepa (sc. xetpi), on the left. 
Lat. sinister. 

*Aplorurtos, -ov, 6, Aristippus. 

dpirros, -n, -ov, best, noblest; sup. 
of ayabés (380, 1); dapera, adv., 
in the best way. Syn. 388. 

"Apkds, -ddos, 6; an Arcadian. 

dppa, -aros, td (764), a chariot. 
(214, No. 7). 

{ dpp-dpata, -ns.9, a covered carriage. 

dpwatw (dpmad-, iv.), (608, 2), 


dpracw (200), praca, pmaxa 


*Apraképins 


(309, @); fpwacuar jprdobny, 
plunder, seize, carry off. larpy. 

Apratéptns, -ov, Artaxerxes, Artax- 
erxes LL., a brother of Cyrus (432). 

tdpxatos, -a, -ov (372), from the 
beginning, old, ancient; to ap- 
xaiov, formerly. archaic, ar- 
chives. 

+ 4px, -ns, 7, beginning, government, 
empire, province, satrapy- 

t doxikés, -7, -dv, fit to rule (485, 5). 

dpxe, apo, fp§a, fpxa, jpypat, 
npxOnv, begin, govern, rule, con- 
mand.  arch-, in compounds 
(526). 

| dpxov, -ovros, 6, leader, ruler, com- 
mander, chief. Syn. 227. 

td-cbevéw, -now, fo be weak, ill, sick. 

dacevis, -€s (abévos, 7d, strength), 
without strength, weak, feeble. 

*Aoévivos, -ov, 6, a2 Aspendian. 

artis, -idos, 9, a shield (227, No. 
8); domis pupia, ten thousand 
shield, 1. e. shield-bearers (Nos. 
1, 8). 

d-odadts, -€s (apadrw), (388), firm ; 
sure, trusty ; certain. 

+ adohahas, adv., firmly, securely, 
safely ; aapadéotepov, -€arara, 
(464). | 

derepail on, (drqpad.- : iv. )s (rin), ari- 
pdow, Arivaca, Aripacpas, to dis- 
honor (785). 

av, adv., again, back, in turn, more- 
over. 

+ avré0, adv. cz the very place, here, 
there. 

+ avTé-paros, -ov (786, vocab.), act- 
ing of one’s own will, self-prompt- 
ed; amd tov avtoudrov, of one’s 
own accord. automaton. 

airés, -7, -d, intens. pron., self. Lat. 
ipse; with the article, the same; in 


409 


Baive 


the oblique cases, him, her, it, 
them (164, 1, 2, 3; 174). auto- 
graph, auto-crat. 

Lavrot, adv. (461), here, there, in 
the very place, same place. 

avrov, -7s, contr. from éavrov, -js. 

op-aipew, take away, deprive ; mid., 
rob. 

d-bavijs, -és, unseen, out of styht, in- 
visible. 

dp-apTrafeo, -dow or -doopa, steal 
Srom, plunder, pillage. 

a-inus, adjncew, apna. adeixa, apet- 
pat, abeiOny, send away, let go, 
dismiss, suffer to escape, allow ; 
mpos dudriav aduevar, let depart in 
peace. 


ap-xvéopar (638), -ifouar, -ixduny, 


~typat, come to, sale return 
(639). 

ap-urmevw, -evow, ride back, ride 
away. 


ap-icrnpt, separate, remove, to make 
revolt ; intrans. in the pass., 2 a. 
act., pf., plupf., and f. mid., stand, 
withdraw from, revolt. apostate. 

"Axatds, -ov, 6, am Achaean. 

dx Popa, ayOecouar, 7yOecOnv, be 
displeased, troubled, angry at. 
AWE, UGLY. 

a&xpt, before a vowel dypes, adv, 
up to, until, w. gen. (412); conj., 
until ; see 705. 


B. 


BaBudév, -dvos, 7, Babylon, capital 
of Babylonia. 

Batve (Ba-,iv., v.), (631, 3). Bioouat, 
eBnv (7 31), BéeBnxa, BeSapac, 
€BaOnv, go, step, walk, syu. 741 ; 
Bnow, ¢Bnoa, cause to go 


Baddr\w 


Lat. veni6, come. 
(638). 

Borrow (Bad-, iv.), (596); Baro 
(255); €Barov, BeBAnKxa (605) 5 
BeBAnpa, €8rnOnv, throw, hurl, 
throw at, hit ; the object thrown 
(188) is in the dative. sym-bol, 
para-ble. . 

+ BapBapikéds, -7, -dv (214), burbarian. 

t BapBapixds, adv., 2m a barbarian 
language (e. g. Persian). 

BapBapos, -ov (123), barbarian, not 

_ Greek, foreign; BapBapos, 6, a 
barbarian. 

t Bacrrela, -as, 7, a kingdom, sover- 
eignty. 

ft Bacireos, -ov (109, 485, 1), de- 
longing to a king, royal ; 6 Baai- 
Aevcov or ta Bacidea, palace ; 
7 Baciheta, the queen. 

Bacrcds, -€ws, 6 (297), a hing; with- 

~ out the article, the king of Persia ; 
mapa Baownel, at court (798, § 27). 
basilisk. 

| Bactredw (493, 4), -edow, be king, 
reign. 

4 BacrrKés, -7, -dy (328, 485, 2), 
royal, of aking. basil, basilica. 

BeAttwv, Bédriov, comp. of ayabds, 
better, braver (380, 1). Syn. 388. 

Brdfopar (Biad-, iv.), (Bia, force), 
(S03), -doopat, etc. ; force, over- 
power, compel. 

Bios, -ov, 6, a large earthen vessel, 
jar. 

Bios,-ov, 6, /ife. QuicK, bio-graphy. 

Bodw, mid. -yropa, shout, cry out. 

Bowortld, -as, 7, Bocotia. 

4 Bovsrtios, -ov, 6, a Boeotian. 

Tt Bovréve (493, 5), -edow,.ete., coun- 
sel, advise, plan, plot (34); mid. 
deliberate, consider, plan, resolve ; 
Ta avra tavta BovAevopevous, 


410 


COME, basis 


yiyvowa — 


plotting these same things (648, 
§ 7). 

+ Bovdn, will, plan. 

BotAopar (366), BovAnoopa (522, 1), 
will, wish, be willing, prefer, 
choose; syn. 792. Lat. volo; 
wit (551). 

Bots, Bods, 6 or 9 (363), an ox o1 
cow; pl. cattle. Lat. b0s, cow. 
cow, bu-colic (508, 14). 


i. 


yap, post-posit. conj., for, because, 
certainly. Lat. enim. Kat yap, 
Jor indeed, for, and really (Lat. 
etenim), regularly denotes an ellip- 
sis, this is or was 80, for. . + (372). 

TavaAirys, -ov, 6, Gaulites. 

yé, enclitic and post-posit. intensive 
particle (628), even, at least, 
too, indeed, emphasizes preceding © 
word, but often rendered only by 
emphasis. Lat. guidem. 

yelrov, -ovos, 6 or 7 (yn), (227), @ 
neighbor ; as an adj., neighbor- 
ing, w. gen. or dat. (225). Lat. 
vicinus. 

yéAas, -wros, 6, laughter. 

yévos, -cos, -ous, 76 (yiyvopat), birth, 
descent, family, race. Lat. genus, 
KIN. 

yébipa, -ds, 7 (41), a bridge. 

yf, -js (contracted from yéa), 7 
(170, 1), earth, land; xara ynv, 
by land. lat. terra. ge-ology, 
ge-ometry, ge-ography. 

| y4-Aodos, -ov, 6 (Addos, crest), a 
hill. 

yiyvopar (yev-), (533); yernoropat, 
eyevounv, yeyova, yeyevnua (433, 
vocab.), become, be, happen, amount 


yiyvacke 


to, accrue, be born, come. Lat. 
Gigno, KIN, KIND, KING, hydro-gen, 
genesis. 

yryverke (yo, vi.), (651, 1), yvo- 
copa, éyvov (731, 2), eyvoka, 
éyvacpat, eyvaaOnv, know (by ob- 
servation), understand, recognize, 
judge, think. Lat. nosco, gnostic 
(660). 

Trois, -ov, 6, Glus, an officer on the 
staff of Cyrus. 

yvovs, 2 aor. partic. of yryvacke. 

yvSpn, -ns, 7, opinion; judgment, plan 
(660). gnome. 

ypiho, ypayo, eypaya, yéypada, 
yéypappar, eypapyy, write, paint, 
engrave. GRAVE, graphic, photo- 
graph. 

t yopvate (yupvad-, iv.), -doo, etc., 
exercise, train. gymnastic. 
YpVis, -jros, or yupviitys, -ov, 4, 

a light armed soldier. 
yeh, gen. yuvarkds, 7 (363), (yi- 
 -yvopat), woman, wife. QUEEN. 


a: 

Saipwv, -ovos, 6, a divinity, spirit. 
demon. 

Saxpiw, -vow, edaxpvoa, Seddxpvpat, 
weep. TEAR. 

Adva, -wv, ra, Dana, a city. 

Satravae, -now, etc., incur expense ; 
inid., spend of one’s own. 

Sapekds, -od, 6, a daric (675, No. 
12); a Persian gold coin= 20 
Attic drachmae, about $5.50 in 
American gold. - 

Adpetos, -ov, 6, Darius, 
Persia (432). 


king of 


Sacpds, -ov, 6, fax, revenue, tribute. | 


8€, post-posit. conj., not so adversa- 
tive as adAd, but, on the other 


Al} 


dé€u 


hand, still; it often serves to 
distinguish one thing from an- 
other, then rendered and, further, 
for; with correlative pév, perv... 
dé, on the one hand... on the 
other, on the contrary, ete.; Kat 
.. b€, d€. . . kai, and also (109). 

SéSorka, see Selda. 

Set, sce S€éa. 

SeiSa (pres. is not Attic), detoopae, 
édeca, Sedona (586) and dedca 
(as pres.), fear, be fearful (of rea- 
sonable fear). Syn. 709. 

Selxvopt (Secx-, v.), (736), delEo, 
edecéa, dedetya, Sederypat, edeixOnv, 
show, point out. TEACH. 

Sevds, -7, -dv (Seidw), terrible, fear-. 
ful, wonderful, skilful ; +6 Sewvdv, 
danger, peril. 

S€xa, indeclinable, ¢ez. Lat. decent, 
TEN, decade, 

SévSpoy, -ov, 7d, a tree. 

SeEtds, -a, -dv, right ; év deka ( aiity, 
omethe right hand ; 8e&ias €docap, 
they gave their right (hands) or 
pledges. Lat. dexter. 

S€opar, see S€w. 

t Séppa, -aros, 76 (756, vocab.), shin, 
hide. epi-dermis. 

Sépw, Sepa, fay. See éx-8épo. 

Seopds, -ov, 6 (479, 4), a band, chain, 
strap. 


“Setpo, adv., Azther, here. 


Sedrepos, -a, -ov (Sv0), second ; 8ev- 
tepov, as adv., second time (460). 
deutero-nomy. 

@ (524), Senow, edénoa, Sed€enxa, 
Sedenua, edenOnv, want, need 

. (340); mid. Séopae, ask, bey, want 
back ; w. gen.; Setrat adrod, he 
asks him (708, 8); impers. Set, 
there is need, one ought, must 
(524); 1d Sé€ov, the needed or 


Si 412 


proper thing (806, voeab.) ; syn. 
784; kai ody tpiv ore dy Sen meivo- 
pat, and with youl will suffer what- 
ever inay be necessary (708, 3). 

84, intensive particle, post-posit., 
now, already, truly, indeed, surely, 
accordingly. 

Sijdos, -n, -ov (73, 817), plain, clear 
manifest, evident; Omdrds cipe 
(777). 

| SyrAdw (154, 3), -ac@, etc. (160), 
show, make clear, declare. 

Sud, prep. (141) with gen. between, 
through, of time, place, means; w. 
ace., on account of. dia-meter. 

Sia-Balve, go through or over, cross ; 
W. ace, 

" Sta-BadrAo, throw across, comm. slan- 
der, accuse falsely. Aiabolical. 
Si-dyo (765, vocab.), lead through 
or across, continue; of time, spead, 

live. 

Sra-SiSopr, distribute. 

Sid-Kdero1, -au, -a, (wo hundred, 

Si-aprdfw (188), -apmagw, tear in 
pieces, lay waste, plunder, carry 
off as plunder, sack, ravage. 

Sia-cmde, draw apart, scatter, sep- 
arate. 

Sia-reh€w (251), -reAa, finish, get fo, 
arrive at, continue doing. 

Sia-TlOnw, arrange, dispose, manage; 


/ A LY b , 
mavras ovT@ duaTiGeis amemmépmero,: 


so disposing all, he sent (them) 
back (640, § 5). 

Sibdokw (diday-, vi-), (651, 5), 
aw, -axa, Sedidaypa, diddxOny, 
teach, show. Lat. doced, aidac- 
tic (559). 

didwpr (do-, vil.), (730. 4); eaxa, 
dedaxa, Sedona, eddOnv (641), 
give, allow, offer, present. Vat. 
do; dose, anti-dote (647). 


dvaTopos 


S-eAatvea, drive or ride through. 

S1-€xo, hold apart, be distant from, 
separated from. Synt. 410. 

Si-iornpt, se¢ apart ; intrans. in the 
mid., and 2 a., pf., and plupf. act., 
sfand apart, open ranks. 

Slkatos, -aia, -atov, just, right. 


t Sikalws, adv. (459, 2), justly, 
rightly. 
Sixyn, -ns, 9 (46), right, justice ; 


a penalty, punishment, deserts. 
theo-dicy, syu-dic. 

Sio-x tron, -ar, -a, f20 thousand. 

Sidkw, -E, -Ea, dedimxa, <di@yOny, 
pursue, chase, hunt. 

4 Slwkts, -ews, y pursuit. 

Sidpv§. -vxos, 9, trench, canal, ditch. 

So0fvar, sce SlSape. 

Soxéw (160, 522), ddE@, edoEa, dedoy- 
pat, €06xOnv, think, suppose ; intr., 
seem, appear, seem best or good, 
be voted. ortho-dox, para-dox, © 
dogma. 

Adrores, -wv, oi, Dolopians. 

Spdpos, -ov, 6, running, flight ; Spope 
Geiv, to run hastily, at full speed, 
double quick. Aromedary. 

Svvapon (duva-, vil.}, (730, 2), dv- 
vnoopat, Sedvvnua, eduynOnv, be 
able, can, have the power. ay- 
namic. 

4 Sivapus, -ews, 4, ability, power, 
Jorce, military power ; kata Suva- 
pv, to the best of one’s power. 
dy nanite. 

4 8uvarés, -7, -dv (808, voeab.), 
possible, practicable, able. 


Sive, sef; see Sia. 


Sto, duvoiv (447), two. Lat. duo, 
TWO. 

Suc- (498, obs?), hard, ili. days: 
pepsia. 


Svc-ropos, -ov (498, 4), hard to pass 


Sta 


— Sta, Siow, ediaa, make enter, put on ; 
mid. and 2 aor. €d0v (738), comm. 
enter; of the sun, enter, set. 

§4-5cxa, indeclinable, ¢ielve. 

Sapov, -ov, rd, a gift, present. Doro- 

thea (647). 


‘E. 


éav (ci + ay), contr. Fv, ay, if, used 
w. subj. ; see 677, 692. 

€avrod, -7s, -0d, OF aUTOV, a’THS, av- 
tov, reflex. pron. (403), of him- 
self, herself, itself, his own, her 
OWN. 

éyyts, adv., near, nigh at hand ; 
comp. éyyutépw or -Tepoy, sup. 
eyyurare or éyyurara. 

éyévero, see ylyvopar. 

éy-xeAevorrros, -ov (803), (kedevo), 
bidden, incited, urged on. 

éy-Kparns, -és, master of, W. gen. 

éyo (391), 7. Lat. ego, 1, ME. 

@érdw or VA, COeAHow (198, 522), 
nOeAnaa, HOEAnKa, wish, be willing. 
Syn. 792. 

et, conj. ¢f, with indic. or opt. (661, 
663, 668, 681, 690); in indirect 
questions, whether (p. 3261); « 
pn, if not, unless (791,13). Lat. 
nist. . 

ei yap, Oif..., O that... !/ would 
that.../ see 669. Lat. utinam. 

eiSov, see dpdw, sce, know. Liat. 
vided, Wit, spher-oid. 

Ge, inter}. O that! would that ! 
see 669. Lat. wtinmam. 

elxoo, indeclinable, ¢wenty. TWENTY. 

eldov, sce aipéw. 

eit (€o-), (288, 859), Evopar, be, exist ; 
w. gen. or dat., belong to, have, pos- 
sess (106, 370,1)3 gore, if ts possi- 
ble, one can (104, 3). Laat. sum. 


413 


> a= 
exk\noia 


ety (i-), (739, a, 55; 860), go, come, 
proceed. Syn.741. Lat. €6, ire. 

elrrov (€r-, ép-, viii.), (698, 2), 2 a. 1 
said; the pres. is supplied by 
nul, eyo (p. 283%), the fut. and 
pt. by ép@, etpynxa, ete. For the 
use of etzov, hypi, Aéy@, in con- 
struction of indirect discourse, see 
769 ff. Lat. vocd, woRD. 

els, prep. w. ace. only (141), zxto, Zo, 
among, against ; up to, for; to 
the number of: 

eis, uia, €v (447), one. Lat. unus. 

elo-BodAw, throw into, enter, tuvade 
(157, 10) ; of rivers, empty. 

} elo-Bodh, -js, 7 (160), entrance, 
pass. 

elo -eLavve, vide or march into. 

elo-épxopat (793, vocab.), go or 
come tit, enter. 

elow, adv. (ev), within; WwW. gen., 
within, inside of (412). 

eira, adv., then, thereupon. 

elre, disj. conj.; etre... €tre, elre 
... %; Whether... or, either... 
or. 

éx, before a vowel €€ (46), w. gen. 
only (141), from, out of; €x rovrov, 
after this, hereupou. ~ Lat. er, é. 

éxacros, -n, -ov (241), each, every ; 
pl., each, several, severally. 

éxarépw-Sev, adv. (€xarepos, each of 
two), on both sides. 

éxarév, indecl., one hundred. 

&-BadrAw, throw out, banish, expel. 

éx-8€pw (756, vocab.), -dep@, -ederpa, 
-Sédappar, eddpny, skin. flay. TWAR. 

éxet, adv., there, in that place. 

éxetvos, -7, -o, dem. pron. (180), 
that, he. Wat. alle; frequently 
best rendered he, she, t¢ (188). 

éx-Kyola, -as, 7, an assembly, meeting 
(674). ecclesiastic. 


EKKOTIT@ 


éx-Korre, cut out, off, or down. 

éx-Aclrw (540), leave out, leave, 
abandon, forsake, fail. eclipse. 

éx-atarre, fall out or down; as yass. 
to éxBadrAo, be driven out, be 


banished. 
ék-mAqtTe,  -wAnko,  €&emdAn€a, 
~rémdnya, -wenAnypat, -erddynv, 


strike out of one’s senses, confuse, 
alarm, terrify. YLAG, apo-plexy. 
éx-pevyo, flee forth, escape. 

éxov, -ovoa, -dv (265), willing ; in 
pred. willingly (271). . 

ZaBov, see AapBave. 

éLavvw (eda-,v.), (631, 4), €A@ (520.2); 
HAaoa, éAndaxa, €Andapat, HAd- 
Onv, drive, ride, sc. dppa or tmmov; 
ride, march, Syn. 741. elastic. 

Eder Gar, see aipea. 

— Aev¥epia, -ds. 7, freedom, liberty. 

t “EAAds, -ddos, 7, Greece. 

"EXAny, -nvos, 6, a Greek. 

4 “EAAnvixés, -7, -dv, Grecian, Greek; 
To “EdAnuxdy (orparevpa), the 
Greek army. Hellenic. 

| ‘EA\Aqvunds, adv., in Greek. 

t ‘EdAnorovriakds, -7, -dv, situated 
on the Hellespont. 
‘“EXAforovtos, -ov, 6, 

Dardanelles. 

earls, -idos, 7 (227), hope. 

épavrod, -7s (403), reflex. pron., of 
myself. ; 

ép-Balva (183, 3), -Bnoopat, -¢€Bny, 
-BéBnxa, go into or on board, 
embark. 

ep-BodrrAw (188), throw in; empty ; 

' tnflict ; make an attack, invade. 

én00, pol, eye ; see €yd, 

éuds, -7, -dv (407), my, mine. 
meus, MINE, MY. 

eu-wlardnpt, -7Anow, -érAnoa, -1e- 
mAnka, fill up, satisfy. 


Hellespont, 


Lat. 


414 


3 4 
e€ixveomar 


éu-mtarrw, fall upon, occur to. 
ep-mpoobev, adv. w. gen., before, in 
Jront of (412). 
év, prep. (141) w. dat. only (46),. in, 
at, by, on, among, during; év 8e- 
Eva, on the right; év & (xpdve), 
. while. Lat. in, 
évdov, adv. (ev), within, inside. 
évexa or €vexev, post-posit. prep., w 
geu., on account of, for the sake of. 
év0a, adv., where, there, here, whither; 
when, then, thereupon. 
4 évOev, adv., thence, whence; of 
time, thereupon. 
évvéa, indecl., zine. 
év-o1kew, -now, live in, inhabit. 
év-opaw, sce iv a person or thing. 
évratOa, adv. (€vOa), there, here ; 
then, thereupon, hereupon. 
év-redgs, -€s (709), (rédos, end), at 
the end, full, complete. 
évretOev, adv. (€vOa), thence, hence, 
thereupon. . 
éy-ruyxave, happen upon, fall in 
with, meet, find. Synt. 147. 
é€, prep. ; see é. 
é€, indecl., sax. 
agon. 
&-ayyeAdw, bring out word, report. 
é€-orréw (241), ask from, demand ; 
mnid., beg off, intercede, gain a 
person's release. Syn. 271. 
éfaxio-xtrvor, -at, -a, six thou- 
sand. 
é€a-Kéovor, -at, -a, siv hundred. 
é-eXavve (95), drive out, expel; intr., 
ride, march forth or on, proceed. 
é€-€pxopar, yo or come out, escape. 
é-€racts, -ews, 7, a military inspec- 
tion or review. 
e-uxvéopar (634), -i£ouat, -ixduny, 
~typat, come forth to, reach, reach 
the mark, hit ; amount to (808). 


Lat. sea, SIX, hex- 


e&w 


e&w, adv. (763), without ; w. gen. 
(412), outside of, without, beyond. 
ér-aivew (524), -€ow, emnveoa, émy- 
vexa, praise, thank, applaud, com- 
mend, 
érav (enei + av), when, whenever, as 
soon as. 
érel, conj. (709), when, after, since. 
éred-dv (erevdy + av), temp. conj., 
(709), when, whenever, as soon as, 
after that. 
érret-54 (57), when, ure now, since, 
now indeed. 
€ar-eupue (eli), (741), be upon ; over. 
éar-eupt (eij:e), (741), go or come on, 
advance, attack. 
én-erra. (emi + ira), then, thereupon, 
moreover. 
érfhy, temp. conj. (709) ; see émray. 
émi, prep. (141), upon : w. gen , upon, 
at, near, for ; émi tovrov, for this 
purpose (142) ; emi rerrdpwr, four 
deep, cf. 774, N. 6; w. dat. near, on, 
émt Oadartrn, on the sea ; of hostil- 
ity, against ; of time, in, on, by, 
orat ; émt rovre, upon this, there- 
upon; in the power of, éri r@ aded- 
Po, in the power of his brother ; 
Ww. ace., upon, on, to, towards, 
- against. epi-gram, epi-logue. 
+ émi-Bovdetw (149), plan or plot 
against, design. Synt. 147. - 
émi-Bovdh, -js 4, a plot. 
ému-Seixvope (741), show, point out, 
exhibit, make clear; wid., show 
for one’s self, show. 
ér-Ovpéw (Gipds, soul), (251), -nrw, 
to set one’s heart upon a thing, 
_ desire eagerly, wish. 
ému-«lvB0vos, -ov, dangerous, insecure, 
perilous. 
ém-Kptrrw (638), conceal, hide. 
émt-elrrw, leave behind, fail, be left. 


Ald 


Epomar 


émrt-peAopan (peer), -weANOopat, -pe- 


peAnuat, -euednOnv, cure for, take 
care of, observe carefully, give at- 
tention to. 

ém-opkéw (dpkos), -now, etc. ; swear 
falsely ; mid., perjure one’s self ; 
synt. 603. 

éri-trovos, -ov (aévos, toil), painful, 
toilsome, laborious. 

érlotrapoa. (emita-, Vil.), émuornoo- 
pat, nmiotnOnv (730, 3), uander- 
stand, know, know how. 

émi-oToAH, -7s, 7, a letter. epistle. 

émitHderos, -d, -dv, suitable, fil ;. 
neut. pl., provisions. Lat. idd- 
Neus. 

émi-rlOypr, place upon, inflict, im- 
pose ; mid., attack. epithet. 

ém-tpéra, turn over to, permit, in- 
trust, commit. 

ému-ruyxave, chance upon, fall upOny 
Jind, meet with. 

émi-halvopar, appear. 

émrt-x wpe, -7ow (786, vocab.), advance. 

Eropar, Eyronat, Eomdunv (533) ; fol- 
low, accompany, pursue; w. dat. 

émtd, indecl., seven. Lat. septem. 
hepta-gon, SEVEN. 

| émra-Kécrvot, -ar, -a, seven hundred. 

"Ervaga, -ns, 7, Hpyara, wife of 
Syennesis. 

épyov, -ov, 7d, work, deed, execu- 
tion. en-ergy, Ge-orgic, Ge-orge, 
WORK. 

Epynuos, -7, -ov or -os, -ov (302); 
deserted, uninhabited, without, de- 
prived of. hermit. 

épitw (épd-, iv.,), (612, 1), -ica, 
qptaa, contend with, strive; w. dat. 

Eppnvets, -ews, 6, an interpreter. 
hermeneutic. 

Epopat (772), epnoopuar, npdunv, ask, 
inquire ; cf. épwrdw (271). 


/ 


EPKOMAL 


Epxoper (€py-, eAvO-, vill.), éXevoo- 
pas. edi vOa, 7 nrOov (698, 3), come, 
yo; in Attic prose, «jus is used 
for éededcopuat (739, 4). Syn. 741. 
pros- velyte. 

épwrdw, -now, etc. 2 a. mpopny, 
ask, ask a question, inquire ; ct. 
€popat (772). 

to Piw (€oO-, €5-, pay-, Viii.), Copuac, 
épayov, <dndoxa, edndecpar, de- 
abnv, cat, live on (342). HAT. 

gore, conj. (705), unéil. 

éxxaros, -n, -ov (€&), furthest ; “high- 
est, lowest, like Lat. summus, e2- 
treme, last, worst; méddkw €oxa- 
ry, a frontier city. 

repos, -a, -ov, the ove or the other 


oftwo. Lat. alfer ; without arti- 
cle, another, other. Liat. alius, 
hetero-dox. 


én, adv. (328), yet, as yet, longer, 
still; w. aneg., 20 longer, at all, 
never again. 

Erousos, -y, -ov, OF -os, -ov, ready, 
prepared. 

ev, adv. (470), well, happily; «d 
moveiv, do well by (468,a). eu- 
phony. 

t eb Bapovite (edSapowsd-, iv.),(414), 
-is@, esteem or count happy, con- 
gratulate. 

ed-Saipwv, -ov, -ovos (Saipwv), of good 
Sortune, fortunate, happy, prosper- 
OUus ; -ovéaTEpos, -oveaTaros. 

T eb-78er0, -as, 7, goodness of dispost- 
tion, simplicity ; in a bad sense, 
silliness, stunidity, folly. 

ev-HOns, -es (700s, character), well 
disposed, simple-minded; Mm a 
bad seuse, simple, silly, foolish. 
ethics. 

ed0s, adv., straightway, at once, im- 
mediately. 


416 


7 


Cam 


f ed-voua, -~as, 4 (482, 2), good-will, 
fidelity. 

+ ev-voikds, adv. (593), friendly ; eé- 
voikas €xotev avT@, that they might 
be friendly to him (592, 8). 

ev-vous, -ovy (170, 3), well-minded, 

well or kindly disposed, attached 
to oue. 

ev-tropos, -ov, casy to pass through. 

evploxw (evp-, Vi.), eXpnow, etpov 
(586), or ntipov, evpnxa, evpnpat, 
etpeOnv (651, 2), find, discover, 
devise, procure. 

eupos, -eos, -ous, -T6 (edpus, broad), 
(329), breadth, width. 

Evdparns, -ov, 6, Huphrates. 

ev-dvupos, -ov (ed + dvoua), (297), of 
good omen or name, left; euphe- 
mistic for the ill-omened word 
aptotepos, left, on the left hand; 
TO evovupor (képas), the left wing. 


"Edeoos, -ov, 7, Ephesus. 


€-o80s, -ov, 7, way to, approach. 

éxOpés, -a, -dv, hostile, unfriendly ; 
comp. 379, 3; 6 €xOpés, foe, enemy. 
Lat. hostis. Syn. 709. 

exe (vex), €&@ or oxHow (holding), 
éoxov, EoxnKa, éoxnpat, éaxeOnv 
(533, 4); imp., efyov (649), have, 
hold; mid. w. gen., cling to; 
gen. intrans. with adv., be; éxew 
Kahos, be well (p. 1924). Lat. 
habed ; scheme, hectic. 

tws, cw, 9 (364), dawn, morning. 
EAST. 

ws, adv. and conj., as long as, white, 
antil ; see 705. : 


“ ) 


{dw (342). noe, live, be alive. Zo- 
diac, Zod-logy. 


Cevyvupe 


Leoyvane (Coys ¥.); (736, 2), Cede, 
eCevga, eCevypar, eCevxOnv, eCuynr, 
yoke, join or bind ; made of (141). 
YOKE. 

tiv, fav; see fdw. 

Zatt, Auds, 6, Zeus ; 
J. upiler, Tues-day. 

tarée, Now (241), seek, ask or. 
Syn. se 


voc. Zev. Lat. 


H. 


i, con)., or ; . 9, either... or 

- mOrEpov « « if (586), whether . 
or ; iulennopatite in indlvbele or 
. direct questions, whether ; com- 
parative, than (586). Lat. guam. 

q adv. (803), truly, verily ; in in- 
terrog. sentences = Lat. -ne ? 

- what? pray? Yea. 

q dat. of és, often used adv. (Se. 

' 630), in what way, where; 4 

. édvvato Tdaxiora, as: quickly as 

possible (p- 3054). 

+ ryepaov, “dros, 6 (227), guide, leader 
(513). 

“ayéopan (361), -yoouar, ete. ; Hynpwat 

- (366). go before, lead; w. dat., 
go before; w. gen., lead, com- 
mand ; decide (518). 

ydews (ndvs), adv. (459, 4), with 
pleasure, gladly; dior, tN 
(464, a). 

45n, adv., already, now, at once. 

Woopar, noOncopar, yoOny, be pleased 
with, glad. 

1 WSs, -efa, -d (484, 1), sweet, agree- 
ahle, pleasant (302) ; ndiov (382), 
noirtos (379, 1). Lat. sudvis, 
SWEET. 

WAGov, see Epyopon. 

yxo (95), impf. Hor, 7éa, the pres. 

indice, is used as p!., and the impf. 


417 


27 


beds c 


comm. as plupf., come, have come ; 
return, come back. Liat. adsum. 
Atos, 6, he sun. peri-helion, helio- 
trope. 
mpEpa, -as, 7 (46), day ; Gua rh juépa, 
at daybreak (224, 7). epl-eme- 
* ral. 
WPETEpOS, -a,-ov (Hueis), Our; Ta Hye- 
Tepa, our affairs. 
jpt-, only in composition, half (498, 
~ obs.8). Lat. sémi-, Eng. hemi-. 


4 tps-Sapekdv, -ov, 7d (Saperkds), 


half-daric. 
4 rpr-Bers, -€s (dée), wanting half, 
‘half-full (498, 6). 
| rjpr-ddvos, -d, -ov (ddos), (810, 
vocab.), whole and a half, half as 
much again. 
4 npi-mAcOpoy, -ov, 7d, half a te 
ron, fifty Greek feet. 
iv, = tay, q. v. 
7v, see ely. 
ApopHY, sce Epopar 
qtrdopar (756, vocab.), Arrmaopat or. 
“ATTnOnoopat, Arrgpat, qr7neny, 
used as pass. t0 wkd, be falas 
be conquered. 


e. 
Odkarra, -ns, 7 (46) sea; Kara aé- 
Aartay, by sea. 
Bappéw, -yow (806, vocab.), be of 
good courage, be bold. 
Savpdto (Oavpad-, iv.), (608, 3) Bav- 
pacoua, €Oavpaca, reOavpaxa, 
eOavpacOnv, wonder, admire, won- 
der at, be surprised or astonished 
(420, 1); 467, IT, 13. . - 
Ocipaxos, -ov, 7, Thapsacus. 
GéZAw, see Eero. 
Qeds, -od, 6, 9 (271), god, goddess. 
a-theist, theism, theo-logy. 


@errahta 


Oerradria -ds, n, Thessaly. 

errands, -od, 6, a Thessalian. 

Oéw (Av-, ii-), (529, 4), Oevooua, run, 
charge. See rpéxo. 

Gewpew, -ya@, view, observe, review. 
theorem, theory. 

Onpdw (Onpa (Anp), a hunt), (366),-arw, 
ete.; hunt or chase wild beasis. 

4 Onpetw (123), -evow, etc., hunt, 
catch. 

} Onplov, -ov, ré (123), wild animal, 
beast. 

SvicKw (Aav-, vi.), (651, 3), Aavodpas, 
€Gavov, téOvnxa, die, be slain ; used 
as pass. to dsroxreivw ; pf. has force 
of the pres. (659). 

Opgé, Opaxds, 6, « Thracian. 

Gvyarnp, -rpés, 4 (362), a daughter. 
DAUGHTER. 

OupBprov, -ov, 7d, Thymbrium. 

Qupa, -as, 7 (46), a door ; én rais Ba- 
gthéws Oupats, at court; so Obpae 

_ denotes a general’s headquarters. 
Lat. foris, Door. 

Qvw, Ovow, eOvca, réOvxa, réOvuat, 
érvOny, sacrifice, celebrate with 
sacryices (259, 8); mid., to sacrs- 
Jice m order to read the future. 

t Swpaxife (Aopaxrd-, iv.), -tow, arm 
with the breastplate. 

QadpaE, -axos, 6 (214, No. 6), a hreast- 
plate. thorax. 


I. 


iSeiv, Say, see opaw. 

tStos, -ia, -ov, private, personal ; as 
subst. 7d t&ov; eis 7d idtov, for 
one’s private use (804, vocab.). 
idiom, idio-synerasy. 

impr (€-),( 796), Foo, fia, etka, etpat, 
eiOnv, send, throw; mid., rush, 
charge (861). 


418 


Kanwar 


} ixavos, -H, -dv(123), -repos,-araros, 
sufficient, able, enough, fit (639). 
ixvéopar (ix-, v.), iouas, come (639). 

*Ixonov, -ov, 76, Iconium. 

iAn, -ns, 9, a crowd, a band, company, 
a troop of cavalry (774, vocab. ). 

iva, final conj., that, in order that 
(579). : 

} immeds, -éws, 6 (481), horseman ; 
pl. cavalry (297, No. 9). 

} twmuxos, -7, -dv, of a horse or horse- 
man ; TO immKdv, cavalry. 

twos, -ov, 6, 9, @ horse, a mare; 
aro or ép tmmov, on horseback 
(616). hippo-potamus. 

iod-Aeupos, -ov (wevpa), (501, 3), 
with equal sides, equilateral. 

"Iocol, -dv, of, Zssi, commonly Lssus. 

tornpt (ora-, vil.), (730, 1), ornce, 
€oTnoa, eoTnv, €oTHKa, éoTapat, 
eotaOnyv; f. pf. éorn&o, place, 
station, set, make to stand, make 
halt (Lat. sts¢6); intrans., m 2 
aor., pf., plupf., and fut. pf., act. 
and mid., exeept aor. (621), stand, 
halt, be set or stationed (Lat. sto); 
the pf. and plupf. are used as pres. 
and impf. (620, obs.). STAND, STAY. 

{ lox dpes, -a, -dv, strong, powerful. 

t toxvpas, adv., strongly, exceed- 
ingly, very severely. 

loXts, -vos, 9 (290), strength, military 
force. 

ix Bis, -vos, 6 (297), a fish. ichthyo- 
logy. 

*Iwvia, -as, 7, Tonia. 

4*Iavixds, -7, -dv, Ionian. 


K. 


Ka8evdse, lie down, sleep, lie idle. 
Kod-ynpat (796), st¢ down, be seated, 
be encamped (862). 


Kabiornpws 


Kab-lornpt (628), se¢ down, appoint, 
make, arrange ; Wtrans. in 2 aor., 
p!., and plupf., and in all tenses 
of mid. except aor. (621), take 
one’s place, be placed, set down, 
be established. 

Kat, conj., and (Lat. ef); intens. 
also, too, even (Lat. etiam) ; kai ei, 
even tf, kai yap (372), see yap; Kal 
---kaiorte... kai, both... and, 
not only, but also (109). 

Kkalw, see Kaw. 


Kakos, -7, -6v (271), bad, wicked ; 


base, cowardly ; tO kakdv, evil, 
harm ; kakiwv, kaxiotos (379, 4). 

| wands, adv. (459, 1), cll, badly ; 
moeiv Kaxas, to treat ill (468). 

KaAew, Kaeo, KAN@ (254), exdrea, 
KéxAnka (p. 142+), KéxAnpat, éxdn- 
Onv, call, summon, name ; xpnrn H 
Midov xadovupevn, the so-called 
spring of Midas (774, § 13). HAUL, 
ec-clesiastic (674). 

Kaos, -7), -dv, beautiful (Lat. pulcher); 

fair, favorable ; honorable, noble ; 
of sacrifices, auspicious, favora- 
ble; KxadXiwv, kdddoros (380, 2). 
HALE, WHOLE, HOLY, Calli-graphy. 

| Karas, adv., fairly, well ; Karas 
éxewv, to be well (p. 192") ; Kad- 
Atov, kdAXoTra (464). 

Kav — kai dv, éav, and if. 

kamnAetov, -ov, td (793, vocab.), 
stall, shop, tnn. 

Kammasoxia, -as, 7, Cappadocia. 

Kadopcos. -ov, 6, the Carsus. 

Kacrtwdos, -ov. 7, Castolus ; Kaoro- 
dod rediov, the plain of Castolus. 

kara, prep. (141), down; w. gen., 
down from, down, down upon ; w. 
acc., down, down along, along, over, 
throughout ; over against, opposite, 
against ; according to, by ; kata 


A419 


£ 
Kaw 


yiv, by land; xara thas, by or 
tn companies. Cata-strophe. 

kata-Baive (3802), go down, descend, 
dismount. 

kat-ayo, dead down or back, restore. 

kata-80e, make go down, sink. 

kata-kalvw (Kav-, iV.), -Kav@, -€kavov, 
-kéxova, cut down, kill, slay. 

Kata-Kaw, burn down or up, destroy. 

KaTa-komTw, cul down oY in pieces, 
slay. 

kara-AapBave (251), take, capture, 
seize, preoccupy, overtake, fall 
upon, find. catalepsy. 

Kata-Ael@@ (786, vocab.), leave, 
abandon ; pass., be left, aban- 
doned ; stay or remain behind. 

Kat-adddrre (addos), (673), -ad- 
AdEw, -nAA aka, -HAaya, -HAaypat, 
-mrXAaynv, change, reconcile (629). 

Kata-hvw, wnloose, destroy, break 
down ; make an end; wid., se. 
moXepov, make peace ; W. mpds and 
acc., to terminate the war against, 
to come to an agreement with 
(708, 8); sc. tous, unyoke, 
halt, rest (523, 3). 

kata-voew (vdos), -now, observe well, 
consider. 

kara-répmre, send down. 

kara-metpow, (mérpos, stone), -eme- 
tpoOnv, stone to death. petrel, 
petrify. 

Kara-mparre, execute, accomplish. 

kara-riOnur (804, vocab.), put or lay 
down ; mid., place away, hoard. 


kata-davis, -és (daivw), (342), 


clearly visible, in plain sight. 
Kata-devyo, flee for refuge, escape. 
kat-€x, hold down or back, restrain. 
Kawtorpov medlov, -ov, 7d, the plain 
of Cayster, Caysterfield. 
Kaw, Att. for kalo (kav-, iv.), (609, a); 


KELLOL 


Kavo@, €kavoa, Kékavka, KeKavpat, 
exavOnv (615), burn, kindle, set on 
Jire. caustic. 

ketat (863), imperf. éxeluny, Keico- 
pat, lie, lie dead; used as pass. 
to ti@nut (796). cemetery. 

Kedaval, -dv, ai, Celene. 

Kedevo (836), -edow, exédevoa, KeKé- 
Aevka, kexeAevopat (325, mid.), éxe- 
evo Onv (521, 3), command, bid, 
urge. Lat. tubed. 

Kepapav ayope. -as, 7, the market of 
the Ceramians, Ceramon Agora. 
Kepavvopus (Kepa- Pe ae (774, voeab.), 
Kepdow, €képaga, KeKpGat, éKe- 
pacOnv or expaOnv, mix, mingle. 

crasis. 

Képas, -aros, -aos, -ws, 7d (331), a 
horn, the wing of an army. Lat. 
cornu, HART, rhino-ceros. 

Kijpué, -v«os, 6 (476, 2), a herald 
(674). 

| xnpirre (knpix-, iv.), -Eo, exnpdéa, 
ete., be a herald, proclaim. 

t Kurtxla, -as, 9, Cilicia. 

Kacé. KOuxos, 7, 6, a Cilician. 

| Ka&tooa, -as or -ns, 9, Cilician 

_ woman or queen. 

t kw5ivevo (493, 6), -evow, ete., be 
in danger, incur danger, run a 
risk. 

klv8dvos, -ov, 6, danger, risk. 

Knreavop, -opos, 6, Cleduor. 

Knréapxos, -ov, 6, Clearchus, a Spar- 
tan commander in Cyrus’s ser- 
vice. 

Kodoooat, -av, ai, Colossae. 

KomT@ (kom-, lil.), (587, 1), exowa, 
kéxoca, Kéxoppat, exdany, cut, hew, 
slaughter; of trees, fell (593). 
CHOP, Comma, syn-cope, syn- 
copate. 

Kparéw (xpdros, strength), -now, ete., 


4.20 


Kupos 


be strong, rule, conquer, become 
master of, hold (696). demo- 
crat, etc. - 

kparioros, strongest, best ; sup. of 
ayabés (380, 1) ; Syn. 388; xpa- 
tucta, adv. (464, ad), in the Lest 
manner, most bravely. 

Kpavy, -7s, 1), a shout, outcry, clamor. 

Kpéas, kpews, Td (329), flesh, meat 
(342). creo-sote. 

Kpelrrwv, stronger, better ; comp. of 
ayaéés (380, 1; 388). 

Kpepavvoue («pena v.), (756, ae 
Kpep@ (254), expeuaca, hang up, 
suspend, — 

Kphvyn -ns, 7, fountain, spring. 

Kpis, Kpnrés, 6, a Cretan. 

kptvw (xpiv-, iv.), (598), pure (255); 
€xpiva, Kéxpika, €xpysar, expiOnv 


(605), distinguish, judge, 


mate. iat. cerno, critic. 
dupiots, -ews, 7 (479, 1), decision, 
trial. crisis, hypo-crite, ete. 


Kpimrw (Kkpud-, iil-), (593), -Wo, 
-Wa, -pd, -pOnv, Kéxpuppat, éxpv- 
gdynv, hide, conceal. at. teyod, 
crypt, grot, grotto. ' 

KTQOPOL, KTOOMAL, EKTNOGENY, KEKTN- 
pa, extnOnv, acquire, gain, win ; 
pf. as present, possess, enjoy ; 
plpf. as impf.; fut. pf. as fut. 

Kretvo (krev-, iv.), (597, 1), Kxreva, 
(255) Exrewa, exrova, kill ; rare 
as simple verb; see daroxtetve. 

KTH pO, -atos, Td(kTaopat), (480, obs.), 
possession ; pl. property (593). 

Kvdvos, -ov, 6, Cydunus. 

KUKXos, -ov, 6, circle. cycle, bi- 
cycle. 

Kipos, -ov, 6, Cyrus. Cyrus the 
Younger, the younger brother of 
Artaxerxes, whom he attempted 
to dethrone (432). 


esli- - 


Kohvw 4 

Kwortw (123), -iow, etc., hinder, 
oppose ; W- gen., hinder one from 
doing a thing. 

‘t Kop-dpxys, -ov, 6 (501, 1), village- 
chief. ) 

Kopn, -ns, 7) (Keipat, lie), a village, 

- Lat. civis, a villager; HIVE, 
HOME, comic, com-edy. 

~ § Kophrys, -ov, 6 (481, obs.), villager. 


A. 


AaPetv, AaBav, see AapBavo. 

Aayas, -@, 6 (363), a hare. 

Adfpa (AavOdve), adv., secretly ; w. 
gen. without the knowledge of: 

AaxeSaipdvios, -a, -ov, a Lacedae- 
monian ; W. 6, a subst. 

AapPBavw (AaB-, v.), (633, 1), AnwWo- 
pat, édaBov, elAnpa, €tAnppat, 
eAnpeny, take (Lat. capio); re- 

. ceive (Lat. accipio); obtain, get,° 

-ete.; overtake, find, seize, cap- 

ture (52); AapBdavew avdpas, en- 
list men. Ai- lemma. 

Aapmrporns. -yTOs, 7. splendor. 

AavOava (Aad-, wn), (633), Ajoo, 
- €Xabov, A€AnOa, A€Anopar (Lat: 
lated), lie hid, escape the notice of 

~ (251), Synt. 603; mid., forget ; 
tpepopevov ehdvOaver, was secretly 

_ supported (245). lethargy, lethe, 
lethargic, etc. 

héyw, AcEw, BeEa, A€Aeypar, éde- 
xOmv (for pf. and 2 a. act. etpnKa 
and eizov are used), (698, 2), 
say, speak, mention ; bid, propose 
(769, d) 3 éyerat, it is said, 

_ reckoned, considered (725). Syn. 
772. Tat. dico. 

Aéyo, gather ; see ovddéyo. 

Aeltrm (Aum-, ti.), (529, 1), eAurop, 
“NeAourra, Acheyspat, EeiPOny, leave, 


» 


~ 


] Maiavdpos 

abandon, forsake ; pass. be left, 

be left over, survive. Lat. lingud 

(541), LEND. 

ft AlOvos, -7, -ov, of stone. 

AlBos, -ov, 6, a stone. litho-graph. 

Adyos, -ov, 6 (359), a word, dis- 
course, speech, argument. logic, 
dia-logue, bio-logy, eu-logy. 

Aoutrs, -7, -dv (Acimw), (359), deft, 
remaining, the rest of ; to houndy, 
Jor the future, henceforth. 

Addos, -ov, 6, a ridge, hill. 

t Aox ayes, -0d, 6(494, 3), a captain, 
the commander of a Adxos (518). 

AoXOs, -ov, 6 (A€ya, lay, gather), am- 

' bush, men in ambush, a company 
composed of about one hundred 
men. LIB, LOG. 

Avdia, -as, n, Lydia. 

Avnatos, -d, -ov, belonging to Mount 
_Lycaeum, Lycaean; Ovew ta Av- 
kaa, to celebrate the Lycaea with 

sacrifices (263), a festival cele- 
brated by the Arcadians in honor 
of Zeus. 

Av«dovia, -as, n, Iycaonia. 

Awvxvos, -ov, 6, Ly Crus, a Syracusan. 

Avpalvowar (Avuap-, iv.), ADpavodpat, 
AeAupacpat, treat with indignity, 
outrage, spotl, frustrate, ruin. — 

AdMéw, -Now, annoy, grieve, harass. 


. Ave (34). Adow, CAdoa, AéAvKa, A€Av- 


pear, €dvOnv, loose, break a treaty 
or oath, destroy, break down. Lat. 
lud, LOSE, LOOSE, ana-lyze (541), 
(20, 825-831). 


M. 


Matav6pos, -ov, 6, the Maeander, a 
river separating Lydia from Caria, 
of winding course. meander. 


[aKpos 


pakpos, -a, -dv, long; paKpdrepos, 
paxporaros (375, 4). 

porta, adv. (463), very, much, ex- 
ceedingly ; paddov (378, 1), more, 
rather ; padvora, most, especially. 

pavOdve (uad-, v.), (633, 3), padnoo- 
pa, éuabov, peudOnka, learn by 
inquiry, understand, hear of. 
mathematics. 

Mapo-vas, -ov, 6 (756, § 8), Marsyas, 
a Phrygian satyr (52); the Mar- 
syas, a small river of Phrygia, 
flowing into the Maeander. 

Macxdas, -a, 6, the Maseas. 

paxy, -ns, 9 (477, 1), battle, fight. 

fpdxopar (361), payotuar (520, 
4, a), pepdynua, €payeodpnv 
(366), fight, fight with, give battle, 
w. dat. (225, a); w. mpds, against ; 
w. ow, with the aid of. 

peydrws, adv. (459; obs.), greatly. 

Meyapeis, -€ws, 6, a Meyarian. 

péyas, peydAn, peya (299), great, 
large; important, powerful; pei{ov 
(378, 2); péeysoros (380, 3); péya, 
peydAa, often adv. (460), greatly ; 
To peyioroy, chiefly. Lat. magnus, 
MUCH, o-mega (710). 

Meyadépvys, -ov, 6, Megaphernes. 

perc. (792), peanoer, eueAnoe, pewe- 
Anke, impers., t¢ ts a care, it con- 
cerns ; éuot peAnoe, I will see to 
it (589). 

pérdrAw (522, 6), wedAAnow, euedAnoa, 
intend, be about, or likely to do 
anything (528, 3). 

pév, post-posit. adv., indeed, truly ; 
now, on the one hand, first (728, 
N.1); yet, however, still, neverthe- 
less. Used comm. merely to show 
some relation between its clause or 
word and another which follows : 
the latter is generally introduced 


422 


Mndia 


by the correlative 8é, but some- 
times by aAAd, pévro, eretra 
(109); 6 pev...6 S€, the one 
.. « the other ; the former . .. the 
latter (182). 

pévror, adv., im truth, really, cer- 
tainly ; conj., yet, still, however. 

pévo (522, 3), pev@ (255), fuera, 
‘pepernka, remain, wait, tarry, Lat. - 
maneo; await, wait for; W. acc. 
Lat. exspecto. : 

Mévov, -wvos, 6, Menon. 

pépos, -ous, 76, a part, share. 

péoos, -n, -ov, middle; comm, cen- 
tral, between ; in predicate posi- 
tion, the middle of (107); péoov, 
with or without rd, the centre, 
middle, space between ; dua péoou 
rovtav, between these (337, 3). 
Lat. medius, MID. 

perros, -7, -dv, full of, w. gen. (340). 

“perd, prep. (among), (141), w. gen. 
with, in company with, in com- 
mand of (786, § 20); w. ace, in 
guest of, among, after; next to, 
next ; pera tadra,. after this, 
meta-phor, meth-od. 

peta-réprw, send for or after ; 
comm. in the mid., summons. 

péxpr, adv. (428), wp to, even to; w. 
gen., until, as far as (412) ; conj., 
antil(705). Lat. dum, donee, ete. 

ph, adv., zot ; conj., lest, that not ; 
ei ph, see el; see 422, 428. Com- 
pounds of py follow the usage of 
the simple word. 

pny-5é, adv., conj. (695), and not, 
nor, but not, not even. 

prdels, pndeuia, pndév (eis), (447, 6), 
nO one, none, nothing ; pndev, adv. 
acc., 7% no respect, not at all. 
Lat. némd, nillus. 


Mysia, -as, 7, Media. 








pnKere 


paket (un + «+ ére),adv., uot again, 

no longer. 

_ piixos, -eos, rd, length, height. 

phy, pynvds, 6 (220, 227), @ month. 
Lat. ménsis (508, 9). 

 ph-wore (un + moré), adv., never. 
Lat. nunguam. 

pyre, and not, nor; pire +s pire, 

neither... nor (430, 13). 
Byrne, pytpds, » (862), a mother. 
Lat. mater, MOTHER. 

Midas, -ov, 6, Midas. 

MiOprBarns, -ov, 6, A/ithridates. 

pixpos, -d, -dv, small, little ; neut. 
as adv., pikpév, narrowly, hardly. 

+ Midjovs, -a, -ov, Milesian. 

Midnros, -ov, 7, Miletus. 

pioBo-Sorns, -ov, 6, paymaster. 

pirdds. -od, 6, pay, wages, reward. 

4 pro Ode (359), -orw, etc.; let out 
for hire; mid., hire ; pass. be hired. 

pva -as, 7 (170, 1), a mina, $18. 

dvos, -n, -ov, alone, only (227), neut. 
povoy, adv., solely, only. 

puptos, -d, -ov, countless ; puptor, -at, 
-a, ten thousand. myriad. 

Mics, -a, -cv, Mysian. 


N. 


f vav-apxos, commander of a fleet, 
admiral.. 

vats, veds, 7 (363), a ship. Lat. 
navis. nausea, No. 10. 

| vavruxds, -7, -dv, naval. nautical. 

véos, -a, -ov, young; new, fresh; 
veatepos, -@ratos (376). NEW, 
neo-logy, neo-phyte. 

t vixdw (160), -yow, etc. ; conquer, 
surpass, outdo ; the pres. often has 
the force of the pf., am victorious. 
Lat. vinco. 


423 


d0e 


vikn, -ns, 9, victory. Nicholas. 

vopite (voysd-, iv.), vopad (608, 4, a); 
evoptoa, vevdpixa (309, a), vevd- 
puopat, évonicOnv, hold as a cus- 
tom, think, consider, believe ; 
vopiterat, ts customary, ts usually 
recognized (798, § 27). 

vo“os, -ov, 6, a custom, a law. 

vots, -od, 6 (170, 1), mind, attention ; 
ev v@ €xw, have in mind, intend. 
Lat. mens. 

viv, adv., 200, just now. Liat. nunc, 
NOW. 

vut. vuxrds, 7 (428), night. NIGHT. 

= 

Elevias, -ov, 6 (48), Xenias. 

{ Eevixds, -7, -dv, foreign mercenary ; 
To Eevikdy (sc. orpdrevpa), the 
mercenary force (728, N. 7). 

Eévos, -ov, 6, a stranger, guest, host, a 
mercenary . 

Eevodav, -dvros, 6, Xenophon, an 
Athenian. See 432. 

Elépéns, -ov, 6, Xerwes I. (756, § 9). 


Oo. 


6, 7, Td (9, 10); the ; 6 pév.. . 6 de, 
this one... that one; 6 8€é, and 
he (182); for its use before a 
participle (234,4; 285); used 
with persons or things to mark 
them as well known (p. 30?) ; r# 
pdyn, in the well known battle 
(756, § 9), with a distributive 
force (p. 3602); with numerals 
to denote an approximation 
(p. 318°). 

65e, 7de, dd (176), this, what fol- 
lows ; révde rov tpdmov, in the fol- 
lowing manner (180). 


600s 4s 


650s, -00, 7 (61), away, road, route ; 
a march, expedition. Lat. via, 
meth-od, ex-odus, peri-od. 

6-Oev, rel. adv. (462), whence. 

ota (766), 2 pf. with present force, 
know, understand (by reflection). 

t olxa-be, adv. (462), homeward, to 
one’s home. 

toikéw (493), -yow, inhabit, live, 
-dwell, occupy ; pass. be inhabited, 
be situated ; peopled, populous. 

t olkla, -as, 7, a house, dwelling. 

t oiko-Sopew (756, § 9), -now, build. 
Lat. aedifico. 

+ otxo-Gev, adv. (462), from home. 

f otkor, adv. (461), at home. 

olkos, -ov, 6, house. Lat. vicus, Eng. 
-WICK, -WicH, — Ber-wick, Nor- 
wIcH; eco-nomy (6389). 

olvos, -ov, 6, wine. Lat. vinum, 
wIneE (508, 11). 

otopar, or oipat, oinoopat, @nOnv, sup- 
pose, think, believe. Lat. opinor. 

olos, ofa, olov, rel, pro., of what 
kind, such as, as; Lat. qualis ; 

oids te, able, possible. 

| otoc-mep or oldo-mep, -arep, -ovmrep 
(695). just as, such as, ete. 

6Kvew, -770, shrink ca hesitate, 

- dread, fear; -dxvoinv av eis ta 
troia €pBaivew, I should. fear. to 

» embark in the boats. Syn. 709. 

— “KOTLOL, -al, -a (445), eight 
‘hundred, 

SKrd, indecl., eight. Lat. octa,. niduHr, 
octa-gon. 

OAOpos, -ov, 6, destruction, loss. 

tn (6A-; V.), GAG (254), rea, 
dAwAexa, GAwAa; mid., dAdAvpaL, 
dodpat, @Adpnv (736, 3); aet., 
‘destroy, lose ; mid. perish ; 2 pf. 

Intrans., Lam — in ‘prose 
Grove. | | 


4 } épdw 


6Xos, -n, -ov (786, vocab.), whole, 
entire, all; comm. in-pred. posit. 
cath-olic. 

"OduvOu0s, -ov, 6, an Ligeibion: 

+ dpotws, adv., in like manner, alike. 

}t dpo-oyéw, -7a@, @uordynoa, wpo- 
Adynxa, agree, confess, acknowl- 
edge. — 

opod, adv. (685), together, at once. 

| Spos, yet, still, nevertheless, how- — 
ever. - 

6vona, -atos, Td (208), a name. 
Lat. nomen, an-onymous, syn- 
onyme (660). 

évos, -ov, 6 OF 7, AN ass. ASS. 

éry, rel. adv. (804, § 6), where, 
wherever, in what wtf, how, as. 
Lat. gud. 

omic Bo-puAak, ~akos, 6, rear guard. 

Tt omdiLe (émdLd-, iv.), (608), (6m)ov) 
(612, 6), d&mu0a, pare 7: 
amdicOnv, arm, equip, 

} omAtrys, -ov, 6 (48), a heavy-armed | 
Joot-soldier, hoplite ; pl., aefntey 
No.-ds, 


OTrAov, -ov, Td, inpiansiiog arms, 
armor, pansoply. = 
Ototos, -a, -ov, rel. pron., of what 


sort, kind, or quality. Lat. qudlis. 
6100-05, -7, -ov (6 4- 2dc08), rel. pron., 
as many as, whatever, as large as ; 
*- In indir. questions; how much, how 
large or many. Lat. quantis: 
drote (699), when, whenever, since 
(709). Lat. cum, quando. © 
dmov, rel. adv. (804, § 6), where, 
wherever. Lat. ubi. - | 
dtrws (359), adv., how, in what wy, 
w. fut. indic. (589) 5 conj., that, 
in order that (579). 
dpa» (dpa-, 15+, dm-, vill.), (698, 4), 
ovroua, etdov, E@paika or €dpaxa, 


Eopayat, @upar, @POnv, see, be 








épyile 


hold, perceive, observe. Lat. vided, 
EYE, Optic, aut-opsy, pau-orama. 
opyitw (dpyd-, iv.), (241); in the 
Anabasis dpyifopat, -icouae or 
-codpat (608, a), make angry; 
mid., be angry at, be in a rage. 

OpOtos, -d, -ov, straight-up, steep. 

Opkos, -ov, 6 (328), oath. 

Sppaw (251), -now, etc., pul in mo- 
tion, start, rush ; mid., set forth, 
start. 

Oppéo, -now, 
anchor. 

*Opovras, -a or -ov, 6 (52), Oronias. 

Opos, -ous, Td (342), a@ mountain. 

és, 7, 6 (178), which, what ; Kai ds, 
and he. 

Ocos, -n, -ov (271), rel. pron. of 
quantity, so much or many as, as 
great as ; rel. pron., as many as, 
as; how much, how great ; after 

_ was, who, ete. 

do-mep, Amep, Omep, the very person 

_ who or thing which ; who, which. 

Oo-T1s, ATis, Ott (437), whoever, who, 

. whichever, whatever ; in indirect 
questions, who, Bhich, what. 

érav = dre div, whenever. 

été, conj., when, since, because. 

ért, conj. (388), (orig. neut. of darts), 

_ that, because, because that, Lat. 
quod ; in quoting another’s words 
(768); w. asup- intens. like Lat. 

_ quam ; 6tt amapackevdratov, as 

unprepared as possible (637, 7). 

od, ovk, ovx (68, 422), neg. adv., 
marking the negation as absolute. 
Lat. non. 

od (ds), adv., of place, where. 

0% (391), pers. pron., dat. of (394). 

ovsapod, adv., nowhere. 

ob-8¢ (ob + dé), (540), neg. conj., but 
not, and not, nor as ; a not atall. 


be. moored, lie at 


425 


, 
TALW 


ov5-els, ovdepia, ovdev (447, 5), no 
one, not any, none, Lat. nillus ; 
nobody, Lat. némd ; nothing, Lat. 
nihil; ovdév, adv. acc:, not at all 
(449). 

ovk, adv., not; see od. ; 

ovv (241), post-posit. conj., therefore, 
then, accordingly, at any wet, 
Moreover 

ov-trote (ov + more), (328), al pot 
ever, never. 

ov-Te, neg. con). (797, § 96), and 
not, nor; ovte ... ove, neither 

.. nor. Lat. neque. 

ovTos, avTn, TovTo (181 ff., 188, $20), 
dem. pron., this. 

ovrws (188), adv. of otros, otra 
-before a consonant, 7m this man- 
ner, thus, so. 

ovx; not; see ov. 

shethw (dded-, iv.), (95), -eAnoo, 
aeiAnoa, dpedov, apeirnka, etc., 

» owe, be indebted, Lat. debed: 
pass. be due; in wishes, would 
that (669). 

opedos, 7d, only in nom. and acc., 

: adeaniage, use. 

oxupds, -a, -dv, rugged, strong, ten- 
able, fortified by nature. 


ee Ey 

f wadevw (271), -cw, bring up. a 
child, educate., Lat. institud, 
cyclo-paedia. 

t mavdlov, -ov, 7d, infant, little child, 

mais, madds (271), 6 or 7, gen. dual 
raidow, zen. pl. raider, boy, child; 
in Anab. mase. in the sing., boy, 
son. Lat. puer, ped-agogue. | 

walw, taicw@, émaca, mwéematka, emat- 
anv, strike, smite, wound, strike 
at. ana-paest. | 


TaN A! 


wddw, adv., back, back again, Lat. 
rarsus ; of time, once more, Lat. 
itexum. pal-aestra, palin-drome. 
roArTév, -ov, Td, lance, javelin, spear, 
mavty (461), adv., in every way, 
everywhere, on all sides. 
arapa, prep. (beside), (141); w. gen. 
From beside, from ; w. dat., by the 
side of, near, at, on, with ; w. acc., 
te the side of, to, towards, along, 
beside; against, beyond, contrary 
to, mapa tas omovdds, contrary to 
the treaty (142, 4). para-graph, 
para-ble. 
map-ayyéAdw (214), pass an order 
along; to give the watchword : 
send orders, command, order, 
announce, 
mapa-ylyvowa, be present, come, 
arrive. 
mapaseuros, -ov, 6, a park. para- 
dise. 
mapa-diSwp. (646), deliver up, give 
over, surrender. 
mapa-Kahéw (359), call to one's self 
summon, exhort, urge on. 
Tapa-TAHCLOS, -a, -ov (227), near by, 
nearly like, similar. 
Tapardyyyns, -ov, 6, a parasang, 
= 30 stadia, about three and one 
_ third miles. 
} wapa-cKevolw (oxevad-, iv.), (615), 
-dow, ete., prepare, get ready; 
ihid., provide, make ready, be 
ready. 
Tapa-oKevt, “is, 5 
ration. 
map-ept (eipi), be near or present, 
have come, arrive ; ra mapovra, the 
present affairs. Lat. adsum. 
tap-ehavvw, march or ride by, re- 
riew. 
map-€pxonat, pass by or along, pass. 


(735, § 4), prepa- 


6 wreiOw 


map-éxw, hold near, offer to, fur- 
nish, supply, provide, produce, 
make; mpaypata tmapeéxew, give 
trouble. 

mdp-o80s, -ov, 7 (ddds), (86), a way 
by or past, passage, pass. 

Tlappastos, -ov, 6, a Parrhasian. 

Tlapicaris, -Sos, 7, Parysatis. 

was, waa, wav (265), all, the whole, 
Lat. omnis ; without the article, 
every, Lat. quisque ; w. the att., 
generally in predicate position 
(271); in attrib. posit. to denote 
totality, whole; mepit mavros, of 
the highest (ujmost) importance. 
pan-theist, pan-demonium. 

Tlaxtwv, -wvos, 6, Pasion. 

mdoxo (ma6-, vi.), (651, 4), meico- 
pa, erabov, rérovba, suffer, expe- 
rience, feel; ed or KakOs mao-yxeL, 
be well or ill-treated, pass. to eb 
movetv (659). Lat. patior, pa- 
thos, patho-logy. 

mwatnp, watpés, 6 (362), a father. 
Lat. pater, FATHER. 
4 warpis, -idos, 7, fatherland, native 
land. 
mave (251), ravow, éravod, réravka, 
metravpat, eravOnv, cause to cease, 
end, stop ; mid., cease, stop, desist. 
Lat. pausa, paucus, pause, 
FEW. 

medlov, -ov, Td (éd0v, ground), plain, 
level, ground. Lat. campus. 

me{ds, -7, -dv (mots), (806, vocab.), 
on foot; of infantry; pl., foot 
soldiers, infantry. 

melOw (m8-, li.), (529, 2), meiow, 
€meloa, WémetKa, Téemevopal, e7et- 
gOnv, win over, persuade ; pass. 
and mid., be won over, be con- 
vinced (433, § 3), believe, yield, 
obey. Lat. pared (594). 








TeLpa 
meipa, -ds, 9 (46), trial, proof, ex- 
perience. em-piric. 


fmepaw (160), comm. setpdopuar, 


meipaoopat, emeipaoduny, meneipa- 


par éretpabnv, attempt, endeavor ; 
make trial of, test. pirate. , 

Tlekotrovvyjovos, -a, -ov, Peloponne- 
sian ; as a subst. a Peloponnesian. 

TléArat, -v, ai, Peltae. 

+ wedXTactris, -0d, 6 (52, No. 2), one 
who bears a light shield (méXtn), 
peltast, targeteer. 

{ weArartikds, -7, -dv, belonging to a 
peltast ; 1d meracrikdy (sc. oTpd- 
revpa), the targeteer force. 

wéeAty, -ns, 7, a small, light shield 
carried by the peltasts, shield, 
target. No. 2. 

mwéprw, yo, Apa, meroucha, memep- 
par, emeppOnv (546, 9), send, 
despatch... pomp. 

+ mevra-Kdoror, -at, -a, five hundred. 

wévre, indecl., five. FIVE, penta- 
gon. 

| wevre-nal-Sexa, indecl., fifteen. 

-rép, intens. enclit. part., just, very, 
even. 

mept, prep. (141), (around, about); w 
gen., about, concerning, above, 
for (Lat. de); mept mdeiorov or 

gept mavros moveio Oat, to consider 
of the highest (utmost) importance ; 
w. dat., around, near; w. ace., 
about, all around ; in respect to. 
peri-od, peri-meter. 
amepi-ylyvopat, be superior, conquer. 
trept-exw, surround, encompass. 
mept-peve (772), wait around, remain, 
wait for ; w. ace. (603). 

mepi-tAéw, sail around (783, 9). 
See théo. 

Tlépons, -ov, 6, a Persian. 

¢ Tlepoixds, -7, -dv, Persian. 


« 


4.27 


a7Hv 


mY, “Hs, 4, fountain, spring ; pls 
the sources of rivers. 

Iliypns, -nros, 6, Pigres. 

melo (med-, iv.), (709), -€ow, éni- 
€oa, Temiecpar, émecOny, press, 
crowd ; pass., be hard pressed, 
oppressed, 

mipardnpe (7Aa-, Vii-), rAnow, érAnoa, 
méemAnka, TéemAno pat, enAnaOny, fill 
(734); w. acc. and gen.; w. acc. 
of person, fill full, satisfy. Lat. 
imple6, FILL, FULL, plethora. 

mtarw (mer-, mro-), (533, 5), mecou- 
pat, recov, méentoxa, fall. Laat. 
peto, FIND, sym-ptom. 

Tlic (Sys, -ov. 6, a Pisidian. 

t moreio, -evow (149); trust, believe. 

{ wiorts, -ews, 7 (479, 8), faith, 


pledge. 
mores, -7, -dv (594), faithful, 
trusty ; trustworthy, sure; as 


subst., pledge; mora Sodvat kai 
AaBeiv, give and receive pledges. 

4 mororns, -nros, 7 (482, 3), fidelity. 

{ TAcOpiatos, -a, -ov, of a plethron. 

twAOpov, -ov, Td (342), a plethron ; 
one hundred Greek feet, or one 
hundred and one English feet. 

trelwv or wAcwv, more, larger (382), 
and mAeioros, most; comp. and 
sup. of moAvs (380, 4). 

ahéw (mdv-, ii.), (214), rrevooua or 
mAevoodpat, Emdevoa, mémA€vKa, 
memdevopat, sail, take ship. Lat. 
plud, FLOW, FLEET. 

tAAOos, -cos, 75 (342), fulness, mul- 
titude ; length oft time (734). ple- 
thora. 

fwryPo (734), be or become full. 
Lat. pled. 

mArv, adv. w. gen., except, sare; 
conj., except, but, except that, 
save that. 


™hapns 
mAnprs, -es (335), full, full of, filled 
with, complete. Lat. plénus (734). 

¢ wAnoidle. (wAnowd-, iv.), (227), 
draw near, approach. 

mAnolos, -a, -ov (227), near, neigh- 
boring ; rAnatos, a neighbor ; adv., 
mAnaiov, near, hard by, at hand. ° 

mdytTw (adny-, iv.), (657), mAnga, 
ém\néa, mémAnya, wemAnypat, 
éxAnyny, in comp. emdayny (650, 
a), strike, smite. apo-plexy. 
See éxrAyqrro. 

amdoiov, -ov, Td (wAéa, sail), (68), a 
vessel, boat. 

movew (154, 2), -now, etc. (198), 
make, appoint, do, accomplish, 
cause; movivy ed or kakas, treat 
well or ill (468, a); for epi 
mAciorov, etc., see mept, Lat. 

- facid, poet, poem. 

} tmodepéw (160), -now, ete. (198), 
war, carry on, make, or wage war, 
Sight with ; w. dat. or w. mpés and 
emi W. ace., against. 

t wodepuKes, -7, -dv (485, 4), of war, 
warlike, skilled inwar. polemic. 

t tod€pos, -a, -ov (485, 3), hostile ; 
subst., an enemy in war, oi trode- 
pot, the enemy. . Syn. 709. 

tohewos, 6, war, hostility, pense 
vengeance. 

TovopKéa (174), -jow, ete. (198), 
hem in a city, besiege. 
mots, -ews, 7) (290), @ city, state. 
policy, police, metro-polis. 
moXtrys, -ov, 6, a citizen. politics. 
t wodAdkis, adv. (445, d), often, 

many times: 

mods, mokAn, modd (299), much, 
great, large, many (302); of 
space, large, far, wide; Jat. 
multus ;- moddod a&ios, worth 
much ; of moddXotl, the many, ma- 


428 


TpatTa 


- jority ; as adv. in neut. sing. and 
pl., woAv, modAd. much, many 
times (460); Tro modu, the greater 
part; én mod, a great distance, 
or over a great extent ; for mepi — 
mAetovos, etc., see mept; w. comp. 
and sup. intens. woAv Oarror, far, 
or much quicker (465, 3); mAciov 
or mAéwv, mdeiotos (380, 4): 
poly- in compounds, — poly-gon, 
poly-theism ; pleonasm. 

mopela, -as, 7, journey, march. 

mopevw (mdpos, passage), (34), -evow, 
make go, carry ; comm. pass. dep. 
mopevopat, Topevoopat, exopevOnv, 
be carried, march, go, proceed, 
advance. lat. der facts FARE,: 
FERRY, pore. 

mopttw (moptd-, iv.), mopi@ (608, a), 
furnish, provide; mid., procure, 
get. 

moppw, adv., far, far from, farther: 

moTapos, -od, 6, a river. hippo- — 
potamus. 

moré, encl. adv. (695), at any time, 
once, ever. 

mortepos, -a, -ov (586), which of the 
two? whether; Lat. uter ; worepov 

e | ehetlers; - it 
ns interrog. adv., where ? Lat. wbi. 


‘gov, encl., indef. adv., somewhere, 


anywhere. 

movs, odds, 6 (363), ‘foot. 
pés, root, tri-pod.. 

t tpdypa, -aros, Td (480, 2), a thing 
done, a deed; plur. affairs, dif- 
ficulties, trouble (227). prag- 
matic. 


Lat. 


‘+ -mpatis, -ews, 7) (479, 2), doing, ac- 


tion, deed, undertaking. praxis. 
mparre (mpay-, iv-), (607, 2), mata, 
empaga, pf. mémpaya or mempaya, 
némpaypar, empaxOny, act, do, per- 





mpéa Bus 


form; accomplish; ed mparra, 
fare well, be fortunate. practi- 
cal, practice. 
tptaBus, -ews, 6 (388), old man ; as 
adj., old, reverend ; oi mpéoBes, 
elders, ambassadors ; as from an 
adj. come the degrees of compari- 
- son, Comp. mpeaBvrepos, sup. mpe- 
oBuraros. presbyter, priest. 
sealant, 2 a. infin. of @véouar, buy ; 
2a. indic. émpidpny; see 846. 
awplv (705), adv., sooner, before ; 
- eonj., Gefore that, sooner than, 
- until, Lat. prius. 
apo, prep. w- gen. only (141), before, 
in front of (160); in preference 


to, in behalf of, for the sake of 


(142, 2). pro-phet. 
po-aroGdvopar, observe beforehand. 
mpo-Baddw (786, vocab.), throw for- 
ward ; mid. with ra émAa, present 
as for an attack. problem. 
apo-SiSwp. (803), give over or up, 
surrender, desert, abandon, be- 
tray. 


mpo-eypt (eit), (741), advance, go | 


forward, come on. 


mpo-etrov, say beforehand, an- 
nounce. 

apo-Oipos, -ov, ready, willing, ea- 
ger. 


| wrpo-Oipws, adv., willingly, eager- 
ly ; comp. -érepov, sup. -drara. 

apo-tnpt (796), send forth; mid., 
commit, entrust, surrender. 

twpo-lornp. (628), place at the head 
of, place before ; intrans. in mid. 
with 2 aor., pf., and plupf., act. 
stand before, or be at the head of, 
command ; w. gen., command. 

mpo-karahapBave (638), seize upon 
beforehand, preoccupy. 

II potevos, -ov, 6, Proxenus. 


429 


mpo-puhag 


mpo-opaw (709), see in front, bes 
fore. 

mpos, prep. (141), (in the presence 
of ), (142, 5); w. gen., in front 
of, before, from, in accordance 
with; w. dat., near, at,in addi- 
tion; w. acc., towards, to, against, 
about, in respect to (206) ; mpos 
giriav, in a friendly manner. 
pros-ody. 

mpoo-atréw, ask in addition. 

mpoo-SiSwpr (647), give in addition, 
add. 

mpoo-epxopar, advance, come to or 
on, approach. 

mpor-éxw (174), hold, apply, direct. 

mpoo-nkw, come to, be related to; w. 
dat. 

mpooGev (xpds), (328), adv., before, 
in front of ; formerly, previously, 
sooner ; mpdaOev . . . mpiv, before, 
until (707, a). 

Tpoo-Toreopat, Assume, pretend ; eis 
dé 6) eire, mpoonoodpevos orev- 
dew, but then one of these in par- 
ticular said, pretending to be in 
haste (808, § 14). 

mpoow, adv., forward, onward ; 
lévat Tov mpdow, go forward, fur- 
ther (804, § 1). 

mporepos, -a, -ov (709), former, 
sooner ; previous, before ; w. gen., 
before; Lat. prior; adv., mpére- 
pov; before, previously (707, a). 

mpo-Tipaw (359), honor more, above, 
before ; esteem. 

mpo-halvw, show forth, show before, 
declare ; mid., appear before, ap- 
pear in the distance, appear. 

mpo-pacis, -ews, 7, a pretext (372). 
prophecy. 

mpo-bidak, -axos, 6, oul-quard ; pl. 
picket. 


TPWTOS 


mparos, -n, -ov (449), first, foremost 
(804, N. 2); mpa@rov, TO mpeTor, 
as adv., in the jirst place, first, 
at first. 

TliPayopas, -ov, 6, Pythagoras. 

TIvAa, -wv, ai, Pylae. 

awvvOdvona. (7vb-, v.), (633, 4), 
mevoopa, eémvOdunv, memvopat, 
learn by inquiry, inquire, ask 
(638). 

a, indef. encl. adv., up to the pres- 
ent time, yet. 

mas, adv., how ? 

aos, indef. encl. adv., somehow, in 
some way, in any way. 


P. 


pew (pv-, li.), (529, 5), pevoouar, 
eppunka, éppiny, flow, run (188). 
Lat. flud, stREAM, rheum, ¢a- 
ta-rrh. 

pirra (pid-, iii.), (587), pryo, 
eppiwa. éppipa, éppinpat, eppipény, 
eppepny (593), throw, cast, hurl, 
cast away or aside. 

“Pwpn, -ns, 7, Rome. Lat. Roma. 


2. 


oddmy€, -vyyos, 7 (803), a trumpet. 

cadmifo (gadmyy-, iv.), éoddmcy€a, 
sound the trumpet; impers. wad- 
mi¢er, the trumpet sounds (786, 
voeab. ). 

Zdpdes, -ewv, ai, Sardis, capital of 
Lydia. 


;oatpatevw, -evcw, be a satrap} 


rule as a satrap. 
4 © 
cwarpamrns, -ov, 6 (48), a satrap, a 
Persian viceroy. 


430 


omevow 


Ldrvpos -ov, 6, the satyr Silénus. 

we-avTod, -7s, contr. cavrov, -7s(403), 
reflex. pron., of yourself. 

onpatve (onuar-, iv.), (612, 5), 
onwave (255), éonunva, show by 
a sign, give signal, signify (615). 

UtrAaves, -od. 6, Silanus. 

citos,-ov, 6 (342), corn, wheat, food. 

TLWTAW -7OOMa, eol@mNTAa, FETLo- 
ma, be silent; trans. keep si- 
lence, be silent. 

TKETTOPAL, SCE TKOTEM, 

akevo-hopos, ov (oKxevos + depo), 
(494, 4), carrying baggage ; subst. 
baggage carrier, sutler ; ta oxevo- 
popa, baggage animals. 

ToKnvéw (372), -now, encamp, be 
encamped. 

oKyVy, -Hs, 7. @ tent, shed. scene. 

okoTméw (593), only used in pres. 
and impf., the other tenses, oxé- 
Woua, eoxefadunv, éoxeppar, are 
supplied by oxémwroua, see, view, 
look at or observe carefully, spy 
out, waich, consider. sceptic. 

Zcror, -wy, of, Soli, a city of Cilicia, 
solecism. 

Zodatveros, -ov, 6, Sophaenetus. 

foopla, -as, 4 (482, 1), wisdom, 
skill ; skill in music (756, § 8), 
sophist. 

codes, -7, -dv, wise, clever, skilful. 


philo-sophy. 

Ladprn, -ns, 7, Sparta. 

oro», ondow, tomaca, eomaka, 
comagpa, <¢ondoOny, draw. 


SPLKED, Spasm. See drowmdw. 
onéviw (792), omeiow, Eoreiwa, 
eomrecxa, offer a libation, make a 
drink-offering ; mid., make a 
treaty. 
omevdw, -evow, éomevoa, urge oF 
press on, hasten, be in haste. 








oTovoen 


- grovdh, -7s. 7 (omevda), a Libation ; 
pl. emovdai, a treaty or truce, 
spondee. 

- grddiov, ov, Td (414), a siade, a fur- 
long, nearly 600 Greek feet, or 
5824 English feet. 

oradpos, -00, 6 (iotnus), stopping 
place; a station, day’s march. 
Lat. stabulum. 

oreves, -7, -dv, narrow. 
graphy. 

orepew (414), orepnow, éotépyoa, 
-eotepynka, deprive, rob, 

eTohh, -7js, 7) (aTEAA@, send), robe, 
garment. stole. 

4 @roXos, -ov, 6 (477, 4), preparation, 
equipment, military force, expe- 
dition (372). 

Forparevpa, -atos, 76 (773), an 
army, host, division of an army. 
Syn. 214. 

ft erpareiw (206), -eicw, make an 
expedition, make war, of officers ; 
mid., serve in the army, make an 
expedition, take part in an eape- 
dition, lead an army, march, of 
officers and soldiers; «is or émi 
Tuva, against any one. 

} orpat-nyéo, -jo@ (263), bea gen- 
eral, lead; w. gen. command. 
torpar-nyia, -as, » (263), general- 

ship, command. 

+ erpar-nyos, -od 6(501, 1), general, 
commander (513). Syn. 227. 
stratagem. 

ft orparia, -as, 7 (41), an army, host. 
Syn. 214. 

Totparwrns, -ov, 6, soldier; pl. 
troops. 

t orparo-meSedo, -eicw, to encamp ; 
comm. in the mid. 

ft orpard-wedov, 7d (redov, ground), 


a camp, an encampment. 


steno- 


431 


CUp-TOPEVOMaAL 


gtpatos, -o0, 6 (773), encamped 
army, army, force. Syn. 214. 

otpetrds, -7, -dv, easily bent, twisted ; 
6 otpentos (174), a twisted collar, 
necklace. No. 4. 

otpepo (659), orpeya, eorpeva, 
eatpopa, €orpappat, eatpepeny, 
eorpapny (650, a), turn, twist; 
intr. and in pass., turn or face 
about. cata-strophe, apo-stro- 
phe. 

Urvpdartos, -ov, 6, a Stymphalian. 

ov, cod (391), thou. Lat. ta, rHov. 

ovy-ylyvopat (675, § 9), meet, be 
with, confer with, become ac- 
quainted with, be intimate with. 

gvy-Kadkéw (174), call or summon 
iogether, assemble, convene. 

Zvevvects, -sos, 6, Syennesis, king of 
Cilicia. 

gvA-AapBdve (109), seize, arrest, 
apprehend. syllable. 

ovd-Aéyw, gather together, colleet ; 
pass., assemble. 

| evd-Aoyh, -7s, 7. @ gathering: a 
levying of soldiers, levy. 

ovp-BdoAAw@ (372), bring together ; 
mid., contribute. symbol. 

oup-Bovrevo (149), advise, counsel ; 
mid., consult together, confer with, 
deliberate, ask advice: w. dat. 

oip-paxos, -ov (way), wm alliance 
with ; ovppaxos, 6, an ally. 

ocup-plyvopr, mingle with, join. 

ovp-mas, -raaa, -mav'(359), all to- 
gether, all, entire; 1d ovprar, 
altogether, in general. 

oup-réepare (149), send with. 

cip-trrews, -ov (734), full, very full, 
abounding in. 

oup-modenew (174), make war together 
with, aid in war. 

TVUp-TopEevowar, Accompany. 


L 
OUP-T pAaTT@ 


cup-rpdrra, do with, help, assist, 
co-operate with, aid, w. dat., or 
w. dat. of person and ace. of 
thing (648, § 8). 

ovy, prep. w. dat. only (141), with, 
in company with, with the aid of. 
Lat. cum. sym-metry. 

cuv-cyo, bring together, 
gether, join. 

cvv-adddrrw (ddray-, “iv.), -d&a, 
-ndda€a, -nAdAaxa, -NAdaypat, -nA- 
Adynv, reconcile ; mid. and pass., 
make terms with, be reconciled. 

cvy-ava-Balvw, go up with. 

ovv-éropat, follow with, accompany. 

civ-Onpa, -aros, Td (riOnur), thing 
agreed upon, signal, watchword, 
countersign. 

civ-oba (784), share in knowledge, 
be conscious. 

ovy-tatre (695), draw up, marshal ; 
mid, place one’s self in military 
order, form a battle line, ete. 
syntax. (808, 14.) 

ovuv-TlOnus (741), put together; mid., 
make an agreement, contract. 
synthesis. 

Lvpakdoros, -ov, 6, a Syracusan. 

+ Zupta, -as, 7, Syria. 

Lvpos, -ov, 6, Syrian. 

ov-oKevdfopa, -dow, make prepara- 
tions, pack up. 

ov-orpatiorys, -ov, 6(773), a fellow- 
soldier. : 

voto (cwd-, iv.), (608, 5), coca, 
éowoa, céowKa, cécwopat Or e- 
copa, er@Onv, save, rescue, pre- 
serve, conduct safely; mid., save 
one’s self, escape, return safely. 
soz-odont. 

ZwKparys, -ovs, 6 (329), Socrates, 
an Achaean, one of the Greek 
generals. 


call to- 


_ TaThp, 


432 Té 


Laos, -ews, 6, Sosis. 

-npos, 6 (478), savior, de- 
liverer. 

corTnpla, -ds, 7 (calw), means of 
safety, safety, deliverance. 


T. 


tddavrov, -ov, Td, talent, equal to 
sixty minas or about $1080. See 
pve. 

Tapas, -o, 6, Tamos. 

TALS, -ews, 1) (ratTw), (297), an ar- 
rangement; esp. of troops, disci- 
pline, order, rank, line of battle, 
cohort, company, array (774, Vo- 
cab.). syn-tax. 

Tapool, -dy, oi, Tarsus, chief city 
of Cilicia. 

ToTT! (ray-, iv.), (607, 1), ra&o, 
éraga, TétTaya, Téraypat, erdxOnv, 
(615) arrange, draw up in mili- 
tary order, appoint, order ; mid. 
and pass., take one’s post, be sta- 
tioned; reraypevor, drawn “up 
(7 4, § 16). tactics. 

TavTy, adv., in this or that way or 
manner, here. 

Tadpos, -ov, 7, a ditch, trench. 

} raxéas, adv. (470), swiftly, quickly, 
soon. 

Taxus, ‘ela, - (298), swift, quick * 
raxv, adv., swiftly, quickly, soon ; 
dia taxéwv, with speed (302); Oar- 
tov and rayiovr, raxurros (379. 2); 
as tayora, as quickly as possible ; 
7 edvvato tdxiora, as quickly as 
he was able (735, nN. 4). Lat. 
celer. 

té, post-posit. encl. conj., and, like 
Lat. -que; te... xai, both. ..and 


(109). 








TELXOS 


Tetxos, -eos, -ovs, 76 (342), a wall, 
fortress. DIKE, DIG. 

+} reAeuTdw, -70@, etc. (rédos), (328), 
end, finish, end one’s life, die. 

+ redevth, -As, 7, end, completion, 
termination, death. 

fT teAéw (263), finish, fulfil an obli- 
gation, pay. 

wéXos, -eos, To, an end, result; adv. 
ace., at last, finally. talisman. 

réuve (rep-, V.), (631, 1), Tew (255), 
érapov (650, b) or érepov, térpHxa, 
TeTpnpa, erunOnv, cut, wound. 
au-tom, ana-tomy. 

+ réraprtos, -n. -ov, fourth. 

| Terpakio-xtArot, -at, -a, four thou- 
sand. 

} TeTpa-Koorot, -at, -a, four hundred. 

Térrapes, -a (447), four. tetr-arch, 
tetra-gon, FOUR. 

Tiypns, -nros, 6, the Tigris. 

riOnpur (Ge-, vii.), Onow, €Onxa, Teerka, 
reOewpat, éréOnv (730, 5), put. place, 
set; mid., put, place (for one’s 
self), (733); for pass. xctpae is 
comm. used; tideoOat ra dma ius 
three senses: (|) ground arms, 
Ocpevo: Ta Onda averravovro (732, 
IL. 4); (2) order arms, halt, or 
stand under arms ready for action 
(732, 10); (3) generally take up a 
military position, draw up in order 
of battle (732, 9); év ra&er OecOa 
GmAa, place one’s self in- order 
of battle; with dyéva, appoint, 
institute (732, 1). DEEM, DO, 
poom, theme. 

Trtpdw (154, 1), -7ow, ete, value, 
honor, esteem. 

Tun, -ns, 7 (41), honor, worth, 
value (785). 

1 riutos, -a, -ov, held in honor, val- 
ued, honored. 


433 


28 


T pera 


| rip-wpéw, -yow (241), avenge, pun- 
ish ; mid., lake. vengeance on 
(785). 

vis, ri (435), interrog. pron., who? 
which? what? ri often as cog- 
nate acc. (261, a). 

tls, ti (435), indef. pron. enclit., 
any one, some one, something, 
anything; as adj., any, a, a@ cer- 
tain, a kind of. 

Tircadépvys, -cos, -ovs, 6 (p. 132), 
Tissaphernes, satrap of Caria. 
TiTpPoTKwW (Tpo-, Vi.), (651) Tpade, 

eTpaca, TEeTpwpat, ETPOOnY, Wound. 

Towede, Toade. rovovde, dem. pron., 
‘such, of such a kind, nature, qual- 
ity; somewhat as follows. 

ToLotTos, Tola’Tn, To.ovTov, dem. 
pron., such, of such kind, nature, 
or quality, such as precedes, 

+ rogeupa, -atos, dé (480, obs.), an 
arrow. 

} tokebw, -evowm (359), hit with an 
arrow, shoot. with arrows, shoot. 
in-toxicate. 

tobov, -ov, Td (52), bow. 

4 roforns, -ov, 6 (481, 2), a bowman. 
No. 3. 

TorovTos, Toga’Tn, TocoiTov, dem. 
pron., so or thus much (808, § 14), 
so large, so great, so many, Lat. 
tantus ; 60m... TooovTa, lit., by 
how much the sooner... by so 
much the more, i. e. the sooner 
. . . the more (726, 8). 

Tote, adv., then, at thal time. 

tpeis, rpia (447), three. Lat. trés, 
THREE, tri-pod. 

Tpémw, tpeo, erpeira, etparov 
(650, 5), rérpoda, rérpaypat, érpa- 
my (650, a), erpepOny, turn, turn 
aside or back; mid., turn, betake 
one’s self; put to flight, rout; 


TpEepw 


rpenew eis uyny, put to flight. 
THREAD, THRONG. 

roehw (rpep- for Oped-, p. 153°), 
Opera, €Opewa, rétpoda, réOpap- 
pa, eOpepOny, éetpadyny (650, a), 
nourish, rear, support. 

Tpéx (rpey- for Opex-, p. 153}, viil.), 
(698, 5), Spayodpat, eSpapor, de- 
Spdpnxa, Sedpaunuar, run, the 
general word. Ge denotes haste 
and speed, usually of men. Lat. 
curro. 

vpioxovra (rpeis), indecl., thirty. 

TPLG-KeotoL -at, -a (Tpeis + €éxaTov), 
three hundred. 

Tpi-hpys, -ovs, 7 (821), adj. treply 
fitted ; as subst. sc. vais, a galley 
with three banks of oars, galley, 
trireme, war vessel (784). 

Tpio-xtruor, -ar, -a, three thousand. 

tpiros, -7, -ov (tpeis), (445), third ; 
TO Tptrov, adv., the third time. 

tpomh, -75,7(477,2), a turning, a rout. 

| rpomos, -ov, 6 (477, 3), one’s turn, 
manner, character (251). trop- 
ic, trophy, trope. 

Tpopth, -7s, 7 (tpehe), nourishment, 
support. a-trophy. 

TvyXAvw (rvx-, V.), (633, 5), revEopat, 
€TUXOV, TeTUXNKA OF TETevVXa (251), 
hit, hit upon, meet with; gain, 


obtain; intrans., happen; w. a 


participle (245), happen, by 
chance, just, now, mapov éruy- 
xave, happened to be present 
(250, 3). 


Tupratov, -ov, rd, Tyriaeum. 


Ze 


twp, vdaros, rd (763), water. Lat. 
unda, hydr-ant, WATER, WET. 
Upérepos, -G, -ov (407), your. 


AS4 


voTepew 


trr-apxos, -ov, 6(540), a subordinate 
officer, lieutenant. 

var-dpxw (449), begin, be under as 
a foundation, be, exist; be devoted 
to, belong to, favor, support. 

umép, prep. (141) w. gen., over, 
across, beyond ; for, in defence of, 
in behalf of ; w. acc. over, beyond ; 
of number, above, upwards of, 
more than (149). Lat. super, 
hyper-bole, over. 

umep-Bodrt, -7s, 7 (Badrw), the act of 
crossing or of passing, passing 
over ; mountain passage or pass. 

| Umr-npetew, -now, serve as a rower ; 
serve, aid, supply. 

im-npérns, -cv, 6, an under-rower, a 
sailor, servant, attendant. 

tar-roxveopar (634, 2), imo-cynoo- 
Hal, UT-eoyouny, bm-€oxnyat (638), 
hold one’s self under, promise, 
Synt. 724. 

waco, prep. (141), under (263); w. 
gen., from under; of agency, by, 
through, from; w. dat., under, 
beneath, at the foot of, under the 
power of ; w. ace. of motion or 
extension, under, beneath. 

umo-Luy.ov, -ov, rd (188), a beast of 
burden, a pack-animal. 

tro-AapPave, receive, take under 
one’s protection, answer. 
vrro-Aelarw, leave behind. 

vT-orredw, -evow, impf. tin-onrevor, 
suspect, apprehend. 

tiro-xwpéw, -jow, withdraw, retreat. 

vr-ola, -ds, 7 (dpd@), suspicion, 
mistrust. 

} torepaios, -d, -ov, following, next ; 
Th votepaia (sc. Hepa), on the 
Sfollowing day. 

+ dorrepéw (388), -How, be later, arrive 
after, w. gen. 





VOTEPOS 


terepos, -G, -ov (388), latter, behind, 
later; w. gen., later than; dore- 
pov, adv. (460), later, aflerwards. 
OUT, UTTER. 


dros, -7, -dv, high, lofty. 


. 


alve (par-, iv-), (597), pave, epyva, 
méepayka or mednva, répacpat, 
epavOny, édavny, make appear, 
show, make known; mid. and 
pass., appear, seem, be seen; with 
a part. evidently, manifestly 
(777). phenomenon. 

orayé, -ayyos, 7 (208), a line of 
battle, a phalanx. phalanx. 

avepds, -a, -dv (paivw), (251), in 
plain sight, visible, manifest, 
evident ; gavepéds eit (777). 

hépw (dep-, oi- évex-, vili.), (698, 6), 
olt@, fveyKa, evivoxa, evyveypat, 
qvéxOnv, bear, bring, carry (68), 
Lat. ferd; of wages, receive; pro- 
duce, yield; yaheras épew, be 
troubled (467, Il. 13). Berar, 
BURDEN, meta-phor. 

eee (uy-, ii), (529, 3), gevgo- 
pat or gev€oipat, evyov, Teé- 
devya, flee, be an exile; oi 
hevyovres, the fugitives, the exiles 
(241); the pres. may have the 
sense of the pf., I flee, am in ex- 
ile. Synt.603. Lat. fugid, Bow, 
BAIT, BUX-OM. 


dnpt (714), pyow, epynoa, say, 
affirm, declare, speak; syn. 
772. Synt. 769, a; (727). 
Lat. dicé. 


P0dve (pOa-, v.), (631, 2). -foropa 
or édow, épbaca, epOnv (731, 


, 2), come before, arrive before, 


435 


pura€ 


anticipate (251); with a part. 
(245) frequently best translated 
before, quicker, sooner, first 
(248, 9). 

Trréo, -yow, ete. (206), love, of 
family and friends (797). Lat. 
diligo. 

T PiArla, -as, 7, friendship, affection ; 
mpos diriav, in a friendly man- 
ner. 

Tt pituos, -a, -ov (86), friendly, at 
peace, used esp. of countries. 

+ id0-Onpos, -ov, fond of the chase. 

t pdr0-Kivbuvos, -ov, fond of danger, 
adventurous, 

T prto-pabhs, -és (335), (narbave), 
fond of learning or eager to learn. 

diros, -n, -ov (86), dear, friendly, 
kindly disposed. phil-anthropy, 
Phil-ip, phil-tre (797). 

| idos, -ov, 6 (86), friend. 

+ poe, “oo, epdBnoa, frighten, 
terrify, Lat. terreO: comm. pass. _ 
dep., fear, be afraid, dread, Lat. 
timed. Syn. 709. . 

oBos, -ov, 6, fear, fright, dr ead. 
hydvo-phobia. 

Powikn, -ns, 7, Phoenicia. 

4 howikurris, -od, 6 (786, vocab.), 
wearer of the purple; courtier. 

povp-apxos, -ov, 6 (ppoupds or 


gpovpd, garrison), (502, 7), 
commander of @ garrison ot 
fortress. 


+ Ppvyia, -as, 7, Phrygia. 

Ppvé, -vyds, 6, a Phrygian. 

tT pvyds, -ados, 6 (208), fugitive, 
exile. 

bvyh, -fis, } (pevyo), flight, rout. 

+ oudaxh, ~js, 4 (46), guarding, 
watch, guard ; jarrisuv. 

+ bvAak, -axos, 5 (476, 1), watch- 
man, guard ; pl. body-quard. 


pudarro 


gvddrre (pvaAak-, iv.), (607, 3), -Eo, 
epvraga, mepddaya, etc., guard, 
watch, defend (125) ; intvans., 
keep guard (793, § 22); mid., be 
on one’s guard, guard against. 
Lat. custodio. 


X. 


+ xaAeraive (yaderar-, iv.), (612, 6), 
-av@ (255), éxadennva, €xaderdv- 
Onv.be severe, be angry ; pass., 
be offended (149). Synt. 146. 

Xaderds, -7, -dv, hard to bear, griev- 
ous, difficult, hard to deal with, 
Lat. difficilis ; of persons, severe, 
bitter, hostile, dangerous ; oi xa- 
Aero, dangerous enemies ; comp. 
-@TEPOS, SUP. -wTAaTOS. 

| xadeds, adv. (470), with difficulty, 

; hardly, painfully, severely. 

- XaAkods, -7, -odv (174), of bronze, 
bronze. 

Xedos, -ov, 6, the Chalus. 

+ xaples. -eooa, -ev (487), graceful, 
pleasing (824). 

+ xapifopa (xapid-, iv.), (608), 
-covpat (608, a), exaptoduny, kexd- 
ptopat, favor, please, gratify ; w. 
dat., or w. dat. and ace., gratify 
a person in regard to anything, 
oblige. 

Xapts, -cros, 7 (220), favor, gratitude, 
thanks. 

xelp, yeupds, 7 (220), the hand, wrist 
(821); els yelpas édOciv tim, 
come into the power of any one 
(726, 7). chiro-graphy. 

Xerplrodos, -ov, 6, Chirisophus. 

Xeppdvyros, -ov, 7, the Thracian 
Chersonésus or Chersonese. 


436 


Wedvov 


X1Y, xnvds, 6, 7, goose. Lat. Gnser, 
GOOSE, GANDER. 

xAton, -au, -a, a thousand. 

Xpdopar, xonoouar (366), éxpnoduny, 
Kexpnpat, expnoOyv, use, employ ; 
enjoy, have (804, § 5); w. dat. 
(p. 145%). Lat. ator. 

Xp, impers. (123), infin. ypjvas, it 
is necessary, it is needful; w. 
acc. and inf. one must needs do a 
thing. Syn. 784. 

Xprto (xp76-, iv.), (784), need, lack, 
wish, desire. Syn. 792. 

XP%pa, -aros, 7d (480, 1), thing used; 
pl., goods, property, money, re- 
sources (214). 

XpOvos, -ou, 6, time; season, period. 
Lat. tempus; chronic, chron- 
icle. . 

T xptcois, -7, -odv (486, 1), of gold, 
golden (170, 2; 174). 

Txpvciov, -ov, 7d (174), piece of 
gold, gold coin, money. 

XpUTs, -od, 6, gold. GOLD, chrys- 
alis. 

4. xpvoo-xaXivos, -oy (501, 3), with 
gold-mounted bridle. 

+ xpd, -as, » (41), a place, post, 
position; eis Thy Eavtod xopay, to 
his own position (732, 9); esp. 
land, country, territory. 

xeplov, -ov, rd, a place, position, 
stronghold ; space. 

xopis, adv., apart; w. gen. (412), 
without, apart from. 


Ww, 


Wadpos, -ov, 6, Psarus, a river of 
Cilicia. 

WéedAvov, -ov, 7d, a bracelet (174, 
No. 5). 


Wevd7s 


+ evdrs, -€s (484, 3), fulse, lying. 

WeiSo (366), pevow, eevoa, eev- 
cpa, éevodny, deceive, be false, 
Lat. falld; mid. cheat, lie, deceive. 
pseudo-nym. 


2. 


&, inter}. O (52); with voc. (56). 

aSe (dd), (297), thus, so, as follows, 
in the following manner. 

wveopar, -noouat, ewvnuat, éewvnOny 
(649), buy, purchase ; émpidyny is 
used as 2 aor. (846); for accent, 
see $51. 

4 dvos, -a, -ov, for sale; ra dma, 
wares, goods. 

wpa, -ds, 7, time, season, proper 
time. Lat. hdra; YEAR, hour, 
horo-scope. 

ds, relat. adv. (241), when, as; 68 
as amnOev, but when he departed 
(640, § 4); as conj., that; os 
emBovrevot, (saying) that he was 
plotting (433, §3; 812, IL, § 3); 


437 


apehew 


before a partic. to express the 
purpose or pretext of the subject 
of the leading verb, without imply- 
ing that it is also the idea of the 
speaker or author (241), as if, on 
the ground that, with the intention 
of, pretending that, cte., as eis 
Tliaidas BovAdcpevos orpatevecbat, 
pretending that he wished to lead 
an army against the Pisidians 
(710,§ 11); os gdidrov, as a 
Jriend (637, 8); w. sup., Lat. 
quam, as raxiota, as quickly as 
_ possible (637, 7); w- numerals, 
about ; w. infin., denoting purpose 
or result, so that, so.as; final, Lat. 
ut, that, in order that; causal 
conj., because ; temporal, when ; 
as prep. w. accus., used only be- 
fore names of persons, to (297). 
ao-qmep, rel. adv. (ws), just as; as, 
like as, even as; as if, as it were. 
adore, conj. w. infin. or indic., so 
that, so as (719). 
a@pedew, -now, etc., assist, aid, ben- 


efit. 


ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 





In this vocabulary no word appears that has not been previously given. The 
etymology of the words has here been briefly stated; but for a more complete 
treatment of the forms, and fuller meanings and uses of Greek words, consult the 
Greek-English Vocabulary and the Greek Index. 





Abandon 


Abandon, deizw (Auz-), Aelia; 
ex-hein@, leave a place; dmo- 
Aeir@, Kata-heit@, desert a per- 
son or cause; mpo-didwpe (60-, 
vii.), -da0@, etc., betray. 

Able, ixavds, -7, -dv; be —, ixavds 
eijyt, SUvapat. 

About, dudi, mepi; be —, pédr- 
do. 

Above, izép. 

Abrocomas, ’ASpoxépas, -a. 

Accompany, éxopa (cer-), éWo- 
pat, €omdunv; ovpmopevouat. 

Accordingly, 57, odv. 

Achaean, ’Ayaidés. 

Acropolis, dxpdéroXis, -ews, 7). 

Admire, Oavydto (Aavyad-, iv.), 
Oavpdcopat, ete. 

Advance, mopevouat, ropedoopat ; 
mpoo-epxouat, -nAOov ; €rr-expe (i-). 

Advise, cup-Bovrcva, -evow. 

Afraid, be —, doBéoua. Syn. 709. 

After, perd. 

Afterwards, vorepor. 

Again, madw. 

Against, ézi, mpds. 

Aid, adedréo, aperjco. 

All, ras, vaca, wav. 


Ariaeus 


Ally, cvppayos, -ov, 6. 

Alone, pdvos, -n, -ov. 

Along, or beside, mapa. 

Already, 75n 

Also, kai. 

And, xai, dé. 

Angry, be —, be offended, yane- 
maiva (xaderav-, iv.), yaderava. 

Animal, wild —, Onpiov, -ov, r6. 

Announce, ayycAho (GyyeX-, iv.), 
ayyere, etc. ar-ayyéddo. 

Another, d\dos, -n, -0; one —, 
@Anrov ; 
-ov. 

Answer, dro-xpivoyat (kpwv-, 1V.), 
atro-kpwvoupat, 

Anxious, be —, be troubled, avide, 
aviaow, etc. 

Any, tis, ri, gen. revds; anybody 
or — one, tis; anything, rh. 

Appear, daivoua (dav-, iv.), pa- 
ynoopat; eme-caivopat. 

Applaud, ér-avéo, -now, ete. 


of two, €repos, -a, 


Appoint, dzo-deixvups (Seix-, V+), 


arro-SeiEouar, ete. : 
Approach, ¢-oSdos, -ov, 7. 
Arabia, ’Apafia, -as. 7. 
Ariaeus, ’Apiaios, -ov, 6. 


Arise 


Arise, dv-icrapa: (ora-, vii.), dva- 
oTnoopuat, etc. ; yiyvopat (yev-), ye- 
vncouat, etc., of disturbance, eic. 

Aristippus, ’Apictimmos, -ov, 6 

Arm, 6mifw (é7\08-, iv.), érAioe, 
etc.; arms, armor, mda, Ta « 

Army, otparid, -Gs, ) ; oTpdrevpa, 
-aTos, T6; oTpards, -ov, 6. Syn. 
214. 

Arrangement, td&vs, -ews, 7. 

Array, to —, rarr@ (ray-, iv.) ; in 


batile —, ovy-retaypevos, -n, -ov. - 
Arrest, ovd AapBdava (AaB-, v.), 
-AnWopat. 


Arrive, ad-txvéopat (ix-, v.), apigo- 
pat, etc. 3 map-eupt, -Evopat. 

Artaxerxes, ‘Apragep&ns, -0v, 6 

As, as; — much —, Soes; —. 
— possible, ére or es with the 
superlative ; — follows, rade; — 
to, Gore. 

Ashamed, feel —, aioyivopa 
(aicyvr-, iv.), aioyuvodpac. 

Ask, épordw, epwtntw, inquire ; 
airéw, aitnoe, ask,demand. Syn. 
271. 

Ass, dvos, -ov, 6 

Assembly, éxxdnoia, -ds, 7. 

At, emi, mpés. 

Athens, ’AOjvai, -dy, ai. 

Attack, émrideywar (e-, vil-), éme- 
Onoopat. 

Attempt, weipdopat, reipacopat. 

Attention, give or pay —, mpos- 
éx@ Tov voor, mpoaééa, etc. 

Away from, ard. 


B. 


Babylon, BaSviar, -avos, 7. 
Back, mavuwv. 
Bad, xaxés, -n, -dv. 


4.39 


Breastplate 


Barbarian, BapBapos, -ov; BapBa- 
ptkés, -n, -6v; BapBapixds. 

Battle, pdyn, -ns, 7; in — array, 
Ouv-TEeTAypEVOS, -, -OV; Give —, 
pdaxoua, paxotpa; fall into — 
line, wuv-rarropat (ray-, 1V.), -rago- 
pat. 

Be, «iyi (€o-), Erouat; — present, 
ylyvopar (yev-), yernroua, map- 
eur; — Upon, emerpe (€o-) ; being, 
Ov, ova, bv, gel. dvros. 

Bear, dépa, ola. 

Beast, Onpiov, -ov, t6; — of burden, 
inovytov, -ov, Td. 

Beautiful, xadds, -7, -dv. 

Because, 671, as, ore. 

Become, yiyvoua (yev-), yernoo- 
pat, ete. 

Before, mpd, mpdabev, mpiv. 

Beg off, ¢£-auréopat, -arrnvopat. 

Begin, dpyoua, apfoua, — for 
one’s self; dpyo, dpe, ete., take 
the lead. 

Believe, jycopat, nynoopat; vopnitea 
(voutd-, iv.), voped. 

Benefit, apedéw, apedAnca, help, 
assist ; treat 
well. 

Besiege, trodvopkew, -noo. 

Bid, xedevo -evow; eyo, AeEw. 

Boat, mhoiov, -ov, Td. 

Boeotia, Bowwrid, -as, 7. 

Both, dyuddrepos, -a, -ov; on — 
flanks, éxatépwhev; — . . . and, 
Kal... Kai, OF Te. .~ Kal. 

Bow, réfov; use the —, ro€eva. 

Bowman, ro£érns, -ov, 6 

Boy, sais, rads, 6 

Brave, dya0ds, -n, -dv. 

Bravely, xahés. 

Break, Ava, Ado. 

Breastplate, Oapaé, -cos; arm with 

—; Oapaxife (Owpaxs-, iv.), -roa- 


> s ‘ 
€U TOLE@, TONTO, 


Bridge 


Bridge, yedupa, -as, 7 

Bring, dyo, ago; —- back word, 
dn-ayyeAhw (dyyer- -, 1V.), -ayyer@. 

Bronze, yadkois, -7, iki 

Brother, ddeAgus, -ov, 6 

Burn, xa, Kata-Ka@ (kav-, 
Kavo@. 

But, adda, de. 

Buy, dyopa{w (ayopad-, iv.), ayo- 
pace. 

By, emi, td w. gen. of the agent; 
— the side of, rapa; — means of, 
ard, Sta; — land and sea, xara 
ynv kai xara Oddarrap. 


iv.), 


Cc. 


Call, cadéw, cake; — out, Boda, 
Bonropat; — together, ovy-ka- 
A€é. 

Camp, orpardredor, -ov, Td. 

Cappadocia, Kamzadoxia, as, 7)- 

Captain, Aoyayds, -ov, 6 

Capture, AapBave (AaB-, V.), ANWo- 
pat; aipéw, aipnoa, ete. 

Care, take — of, émi-pehéopat, éme- 


peAnoopa; take —, pedet, pedn- 
O€e. ; 

Carry, dy, do ; — away, apndto 
(dpraé-, lv.), dpmdcw; — on 


war, ToAELEw, TOAELNTO. 

Cast aside, away, pirre (pup-, iil.), 
ptyo. 

Carsus, Kadpoos, -ov, 6. 

Castolus, Kacra@néds, -ov, 6 

Catch, Onpetwo, -evow; apBave 
(AaB-, v-), Anopat. 

Cattle, Bots. Bods, 6, 7. 

Cavey; sBeis; -EWY, of 5 — man, 
immevs, eas, 6 D5 imvaruKds, - - 1); -Ov- 

Cease, ravopat, mavoopat. 

Celaenae, Kedawvat, -dr, ai. 


440 


Cowardly 


Charge, iepa (é-); — double quick, 
Spéu@ O€w, (Ou-, li), Oevoopar, — 
etc. 

Chariot, dpa, -aros, rd. 

Chase, d:axw, dioFo. 

Chersonésus,. Xeppdvycos, -ov, 1. 

Child, wuis, wadds, 6, 7; matdiov, 
-Ov, TO. . 

Chirisophus, Xeupicodos, -ov, 6. 

Choose, aipéopat, aipnoopat. 

Cilicia, KiAckia, -as, 7. 

Cilician, Kic&, -txos, 6; — queen, 
Kiluooa, -ns, 7. 

Citizen, woXirns, -ov, 6. 

City, m0Xus, -ews, 7. 

Clearchus, K\éapyxos, -ov, 6. 

Collect, dOpoifw (aépord-, 
dOpoicw; avd-heyo, -héEo. 

Colossae, KoAdoocai, -Hp, at. 

Come, épyouat, AAGov; Heo; have 
—, ixo; — On, mpoo-epxopat, 
mpo-etpe (i-). 

Command, xedeva, -evo@; TaTT@ 
(ray-, iv.), tak; Hyeopas, yh 
copa, order; dpxw, ap§e, rule. 

Commander, dpxev, -ovtos, 4; 
otpatnyos, -od, 6. Syn. 227. 

Company, Adyos, -ov, 6; nm — 
with, avy. 

Conquer, vixdw, viknow ; Kpatéea, 
KpaTnoe, etc. 

Conscious, be —, viv-oida. 

Consider, oxomém; oxenTopae 
(oxen-, iii.), oxéyouar; Bovdevo- 
plat, -evoopae. 

Consult, — with, Pe Ss aoe 

Continue, dia-reAew; di-dyo. -d€o. 


iv.)s 


‘Contribute, avp-Bddd@ (Baa-, iv.), 


-Bara. 
Counsel, cvp-Bovdrevo, -evoo. 
Country, xapa, -as, 7; ito the — 
of, eis. 


Cowardly, xaxds, -n, -dv. 








Cross 
‘ 

Cross, or — over, d:a-Baivw (Ba-, 
iv., V-), -Byropat. 

Cut, — to pieces or down, xata- 
kemr@ (Kkom-, lil.), -Kkoyo; — 
dawn, €x-KénT@. 

Cydnus, Kvédvos, -ov, 6. 

Cyrus, Kupos, -ov, 6. 


D. 


Damage, do —, kaxas Trotéw, -now. 

Danger, xivdvvos, -ov, 6. 

Daric, daperkds, -ov, 6. 

Darius, Aapeios, -ov, 6. 

Day, npépa, -as, 7; on the following 
—, ™ wvotepaia ; day's march, 
orabds, -0v, 0. 

Deceive, Wevdw, Weico. 

Declare, dmo-deixvipe (deux-, v-), 
-beiEopat. 

Deed, épyov, -ov, 70. 

Defeat, vikdw, vixnoo. 

Deliberate, BovAevouat, oup-Bov- 
Aevouar, Bovrcdoopat. 

Demand, airéa, aitnow; ago, 
adétoow; — back, ar-airéo. Syn. 
971. 

Deprive, orepéw, -noo. 

Descend, xata-Baivw (Ba-, iv., v-), 
-Bnoopat. 

Design, émi-BovAeva, -evoo. 

Desire, émi-Oipéw, -now; 
noo; xpnto (xpyd-, iv.). 
792. 

Desist, ravoua, ravcopat. 

Destroy, Atw, Aivow. 

Die, redevtdw,-now ; OvnoKw (Oav-, 
Vi.), Oavodpar; aro-OvnoKe. 

Difficult, yaXerds, -7, -dv. 

Distant, be —. an-éya, d1-€xo. 

Distribute, d1a-dida@pe (do0-, vil.), 
-dace. 


eGeo, 
Syn. 


4A] 


Error 


Ditch, radpos, -ov, 7. 

Do, row, roujow; mparra (mpay-, 
iv.), mpago; — harm, xakés 
Tow; — wrong, adiKéw, -Now; 
— well by, ed rovew. 

Door, 6vp4, -as, 7. 

Double-quick, charge —, Spdu@ 
Gém, Oevoopuat. 

Down, xara. 

Draw, onde, ordow; — up, TdTT® 
(ray-, iv.), Ta&éo. 

Dread, dxvéw, -now. 

Dress, cron, -is, 7)- 

Dwell, oixéw, oixnow. 


Syn. 709. 


E. 


Each, éxaoros. -n, -ov. 

Eager, mpddvpuos ; be —, émt-Oipéw. 

Eat, cofiw, gSopat. 

Educate, raideva, -evoo. 

Embark, ¢u-Baivw (Ba-, iv., v.), 
-Bnoopa. 

Empty, eu-Bdddo (Bad-, iv.), -Bara ; 
cia-Badro. 


-Eneamp, orparomedevoua, -evoo- 


pat; oKnvew, -now; be encamped, 
KaOnpat. 

Encampment, orparézedor, -ov, 76. 

End, rav@, mavow; come to an —, 
mavopat. 

Enemy, mrodéputos, -ov, 56; éxOpds, 
-od, 6; the —, of modeptor. Syn. 
709. 

Enlist, AauBave (AaB-, v.), AnWo- 
pat. 

Entire, das; was, naca, wav. 

Entrust, rpo-inue (€-), -now. 

Enumeration, dpiOyuds, -od, 6. 

Equipment, ordXos. -ov, 6. 

Error, commit —, duaprave (duapr-; 
V.), duaprncopat. 


Escape 442 3 Gold 


Escape, dro-hevyo (puy-, li-); — the 
notice of, AavOava (ad-, V.), AjTw. 

Especially, padcora. 

Buphrates, Eipparns, -ov, 6. 

Even, xai; not —, pnde, ovde. 

Everything, rayvra. 

Evident, dos, -n, -ov. 

Except, mAnv. 

Exile, g@uyds, -ados, 6. 

Expedition, ordXos, -ov, 6; 600s, -ov, 
3 make an —, orpareva, -edoo ; 

take part in an —, orparevopat. 

Experience, zeipa, -as, 7. 

Extent, 7\7Oos, -ovs, 16. 

Express, amo-Oeixvips (detk-, v.), 
-beiEo. 


FE. 


Pair, xadés, -n, -dv. 

Faithful, micros, -7, -dv. 

Fall, — on, €u-tinte, -recovpat. 

Fast, rayéos. 

Father, rarnp, natpds, 6 

Fear, ddBos, -ov, 6; poBéopai -Bn- 
coua, of sudden fear or terror ; 


deidw, dédSouxa, of reasonable fear; - 


dxvew, -now, dread. Syn. 709. 

Fellow-soldiers, dvdpes orpatia- 
rat, with or without . 

Fidelity, evvo.a, -as, 7). 

Fight, payn, -ns, 7; paxouat, pa- 
xoupat, ete. 

Find, cipioxw (evp-, vi.), ebpnow. 

First, mpdros, -n. -ov; mparov. 

Fish, iyOus, -vos, 6 

Five, mevre ; — hundred, revraxé- 
Flot, ~at, -a. 

Plee, heiyo (pvy-, ii.), pevEouas 
or devéovpar. 

Plesh, xpéas, xpéws, +d 

Plour, adevpa, -wv, rd. 

Flourishing, eidaipyer, -ov. 






Flow, péw (pv-, il.), pevoouar. 

Pollow , éropa, €omdunv; as fol- 
lows, &de, or some case of d8e; 
on the following day, th barepaia ;— 
in the following manner, &de. 

Food, airos, -ov, 6 

Foot, ovs, 10dds, 6 

Poot-soldier, re(ds, -ov, 6. 

For, yap ; wept, emi, mpds- 

Force, dvvapis, -ews, 1; toyds, -vos, 
3  OTpdrevpa, -atos, Té; the 
Greek —, rd “EAAnuikov. . 

Formerly, ro dpyaiov. 

Four, TETTapEs. 

Fourth, rerapros. 

Freedom, edevlepia, -as, ae 

Friend, didos, -ov, 6; &€vos, -ov, 6. 

Friendly, iduos, -a, -ov; idos, 
“Hs -OV. 

Priendship, quid, -as, 7. 

From, ¢&, amd, mapa. 

Fugitive, dvyas, -ddos, 6; pevyar, 
-ovTos, 6 

Full, peords, -n, -dv ; mAnpns, -es- 

Furnish, ropitw (mopid-, iv-), mo- 
pl@; map-exw, -€£o. 





G. 


Garrison, dvAakn, -is, 7. 
General, orparnyés, -ov, 6 
Gift, dapor, -ov, rd. 

Give, Sida (do-, vii), dao@; — 
over, mapa-bidapt. 

Gladly, 7d€ws. 

Go, «im (i-); %pyoua, AAGov;— 
up, avaBaive, -Byoopat; — back, 
away, am-ecpe ; — through, ba- 
Baiva. Syn. 741. 

God, Geds. 

Gold, xpuciov, -ov, rd; of —, xpv- 
gous, -7, -ovv. 


Good - 






Good, dyads, ~7, -dv. 
Good-will, etvo.a, -as, 7). 
iGratify, xapigopa (xaptd-, ly.), 
Xaprovpat. 
|Great, péyas. peyddn, peya, of size ; 
gods, TOAAN, TwoAd, Of amount or 
number; greater part, Td mond. 
Greece, ‘EA\ds, -ados, 7)- 
Greek, “EAAnv, -nvos, 63 “EMqu- 
kés, -f, -6v; in —, ‘EAAnucas. 
Grieve, \izéo, AUTH. 
Ground, — arms, ridepat Ta dma. 
Guard, gvdaxh, js, 73 pera, 
-axos, 6; — or be on — vddrte 
(pvAak-, iv-), guaddgo. 
Guest, or guest-friend, §€vos, -ov, 6. 
Guide, iyepar, -dvos, 6. : 


H. 


Halt, dva-ravoyat, in order to rest; 
— under arms, 6éc0a ra oma; 
iornus (ora-, Vil-), oTNT®}; KaTa- 
Avo, unyoke. 

Hand, xeip, xetpos, i: 

Happen, rvyxdve (rvx-, V-) Tevgo- 
par; ylyvowar, yernoopar; — 
upon, éy-rvyXava. 

Happy, cvdaipor, -ov. 

Hard, yadends, -1, -dv- 

Harm, do —, xak@s Trovew, TOUT 5 
suffer —, kaxas racxe (wab-, vi), 


Teioopat. 
Hasten, orevdo, -omeiow ; dppdeo, 
oo. 


Have, fy (cex-), a 5 eipi (€o-), 
Zocopat, with dat. 

He, generally omitted; when em- 
phatic, odros, éxeivos, and dde; 
and —, 6 8é, ete. (182, 393 ff.) ; 
— who, 6 with the part. (284, b). 

Hear, dxovw, dcovoopat. 


443 


Inhabitants 


Height, dkpor, -ov, 76. 
Her, oblique cases of adn. 
Herald, kijpv&, -vKos, 6. 
Here, évrava, avTou, avTd@u, Sevdpo. 
Hill, Adqos, yndopos, -ov, 6- 
Him, oblique cases of avrés ; ov, 
indir. reflex; see He. 
Himself, éavrov, reflex. ; 
intens. 

Hinder, xadio, Kodvoo. 

Hire, prc Odopa, -ovopat. 

His, when not emphatic, by the ar- 
ticle; referring to the subject, by 
éavrod; when not referring to 
the subject, by avrod, éxeivov. 

Hold, Zw (cex-), eo, oxn7@. 

Home, homeward, otkade. 

Honor, typ, -fis; ) 3 Tada, -Noo. 

Hope, éAzis, -idos, 7)- 

Hoplite, émitns, -ov, 6- 

Horse, imros, -ov, 6; on horseback, 
dm immov or ad’ imnov. 

Horseman, inzevs, -éws. 6- 

Hostile, woésuos, ~G, -ov; € x9pés, 
-, -Ov. 

Hostility, mdA«pos, -ov, 0- 

House, oikid, -ds, i); olkos, -ov, 6. 

How, as, dros; — large, dos, 
-n, -ov ; Omdaos, -N, -OV- 

Hundred, éxarov. 

Hunt, Onpevo, -<ebow ; Onpdw, -aro. 


> 4 
auTos, 


i 


I, eyo. 

If, i, eav, dv, nv. 

Immediately, <idus. 

Impassable, dzopos, -ov- 

In, év, eis; — order that, iva,. OS, 
Om@s- 

Inflict, éme-riOnue (6e-, vil-), -noe. 

Inhabit, oikéw, -jow; €v o1Kéw. 


Instead 


Instead, — of, arti. 

Intend, pédAo, peddAnoo. 

Into, eis. 

Invade, éu-Badrdo (Bar-, iv.), -Badro. 
Ionian, "Iwvkds, -7, -dv. 

Issus, Iocoi, -@v, oi. 


J. 


Jar, Bixos, -ov, 6. 

Javelin, maArTov, -ov, Td. 
Journey, zopeia, -as, 7; 606s, -od, 7. 
Judge, xpivw (kpw-, 1V.), Kpiv@. 
Justice, dikn, -ns, 7. 

Justly, dixaios. 


K. 


Kill, xreivw (xrev-, iv.), KTev@, aro- 
kteiva ; be killed, dmo-Ovnoka, 
-Oavovpat. 

King, Bacudevs, -€ws, 6, be —, Bacr- 
Aevo, -EVTw. 

Know, yyvockw (yvo-, Vi-), yvo- 
goua; oda, eloouar; .— how, 
eniotapa, emioTnoopat. 


L. . 

Lacedaemonian, Aaxedaipdvos, -a, 
-OoV, 

Land, yj. yns, 73 x@pa, -as, 7. 

Large, peéyas, of extent; modus, see 
Great. 

Last, af —, réXos. 

Lead. ayo. df ; nyéopat, hynoopat, 
— back, an-dyo. 

Leader, 7yeuar, -dvos, 6. 

Learn, — by inquiry, muvédvopa, 
(wv6-, v.), mevoopat. 


Add 


Marsyas 


Leave, deir@ (Aur-, ii-), Aeiro; 
ex-hein@, émt-eima; — behind, 
kata-\ein@, brro-deiTro. 

Left, evavupos, -ov; dpiorepos, -a, 
“Ov. 

Lest, pn. 

Let, — loose or — go, ap-inu 
(-é). 

Letter, émiarodn, 7s, 7. 

Lie, keipat, keicoua, of position; 
Weida, Pevoo, falsify. 

Line of battle, rdéis, -ews, 4, fall 
into battle —, ovy-rarropat. 

Little, pikpéds, -d, -dv. 

Live, (do, (joo. 

Long, pwaxpos, of space or time; 
ToAvs, TOAAN, woAV, Of time; To- 

" godros, -n, -ov, SO, so much, 

Loose, Aiw, Atow. 

Love, dudéw, pilnco. 

Lydia, Avdia, -as, 4. 


M. 


Maeander, Maiavdpos, -ov, 6. 
Make, rogo, rouow ; — answer, 
dmo-kpivopat (kpwv-, iVv.), azo- 
Kptvovpat ; — War, TOAEBEw -HOw ; 
—an expedition, orpatevw ; — 
known, onpaive (onpav-, iv.), on- 
pave; — treaty, omévdoua. - 
Man, dv6pemros, -ov, 6. Lat homi; 
avnp, avdpés, 6. Lat, vir. 
Manifest, havepds, -a, -dv; dndos, 
~n; -Ov. : 
Many, zoA\oi. See Much. 
March, édavvw (éda-, V.), €A@; Tro- 
pevopat, mopevoouar; — on, e&e- 
Aav’vo ; — up, avaBaivo,-Bycopar; 
day’s —, oraOpos, -od, 6. 
Market-place, dyopd, -as, 7. 
Marsyas, Mapovas, -ov, 6. 





Mascas 


Mascas, Macxas, -a. 6. 

Means, by — of, ano. 

Meat, xpéas, xpéws, TO. 

Media, Mnéia, -as, 7. 

Meet, ovy-yiyvopa, ~-yernoopat ; 
ev-tuyxav@ (Tvy-, V-),-Tevgopar. 

Meeting, éx-xAnoid, -as, 1). 

Menon, Mévwv, -wvos, 6 

Mercenary, &évos, -ov, 6. 

Messenger, dyyeNos, -ov, 6. 

Middle, péaos, -, -ov; pécor, -ov, 
TO. 

Midst, pécov, -ov, Td 

Milétus, MiAnros, -ov, 7. 

Mina, pva, pvas, 7. 

Mind, vois, vow, 6. 

Miss, duaprdva (dpapr-, V.), duap- 
THT Opa. | 

Money, dpyvpuov, -ov, ro; xpnuara, 
-dT@V, TA; XpUior, -ov, TO. 

Month, piv, pnvos, 6 

More, paddov, miéov. 

Mother, piryp, pytpos, 1 

Mountain, dpos, -ovs, Td. 

Much, zodvs; mwodv; see Great. 


Multitude, 7AjjGos, -ous, ro. 


Must, d<i, xp, dvaykn eori; the 
verbal in -réos. 

Muster, aOpoifoua; see Collect. 

My, when not emphatic, by the 
article; éuds, generally with the 
article; sometimes pod, éyol eivac; 


> $—? > , 
of mine, éuos or époi; — own, 
euds, €uauTou. 
Myself, ¢uavrov, reflex. ; adras, 


intens. 


N. 


Narrow, otevos, -7, -ov. 

, , > , 
Near, mapa; mAnaiov, eyyvs. 
Necessary, it is —, dei, yp. 


4A5 


Our 


Necessity, dvayxn, -ns, 7). 

Need, déoua, Senoowar; there is 
—, dei. 

Neglect, duehéw, dueAnoo. 

Neither, — ... zor, 
ovTe; pte... pane. 

Next, on the — day, rn iorepaia. 

Night, w&, vukros, 7. 

No, ovdeis, -evds; pndeis; —one or 
nobody, ovdeis, pndeis. 

Noble, xands, -7, -6v ; dyads, -7, -ov. 

Noise, GopuBos, -0U, 0- 

Not, ov, wn; — even, odde, pide ; 
— only . - but also, kai . . . Kai. 

Now, vor, as time ; 76n, already ; 
8n, accordingly. 


oy 
OUTE . + « 


oO. 

O, &. 

Oath, dpkos, -ov, 6 

Obey, meiSoua (m0-, ii.), meioopat. 

Obtain, rvyxdve (rvx-, V.), revEouat. 

On, emi, €v; — account of, &d, 
evexa ; — horseback ; see Horse ; 
— the one hand. . . — the other, 
pev... O€. 

Once; at —, eidus. 

One, eis, tis ; — another, dd\Anrov. 

Opinion, yvapuy, -ns, 7. 

Oppose, ckwdiw, Korvoo. 

Or, 7 . 

icin Kehevon, iedtiiceiny bid, com- 
mand; give the or pass the — 
along, map-ayyehAw (ayyed-, iv.), 
-ayysh@; military — rakts, -ews, 
9; in — that, va, os, ores. 

Orontas, ’Opdvras, a or ~ov, 6. 

Other, dAXos, -n, -0; — wise, ad- 
Aas. 

Our, when not emphatic by the 
article ; mperepos, sometimes by 
Lav. 


Overcome 


Overcome, xpatéw. kpatnoe ; mept- 
yiyvopat, ~yevnvopat 

Owe, fo —, dpeihw (dper-, iv.), 
openow. 


P. 


Palace, Bacixeua, -wv, ra. 
Parasang, rapacayyns, -ov, 6. 
Park, mapddeuos, -ov, 6. 
Parysatis, [apvcarts, -1dos, 7. 
Pasion, Ilaciwv, -vos, 6. 

Pay, piods, -0v, 6; Tedéw, TEAG ; 
arro-Sidapt, -Soow. 

Peltast, meAraorns, -ov, 6. 

. Perceive, aic@avopa (aic6-, v.), 
aicOnoopat. 

Perish, dm-d\\vpat, am-oAovpat. 

Perjure, — one’s self’; ém-opkew, 
emu opknow. 

Persian, [lepouxcs, -y, -ov;; Tlepons, 
-ov, 6- 

Persuade, reiOo (m6-, li.), meio. 

Phalanx, daday€, -yyos, 7- 

Phalinus, Badivos, -ov, 6. 

Phrygia, @pvyia, -as, 7. 

Pisidians, [taidat, -dv. oi. 

Place, ywpiov, -ov, to; take one’s 
—, xad-icrapat, -noopar; from 
that —, évredOev; in this —, 
evravéa. 

Plain, m<Sdiov, -ov, ro; dyAos, -n, -ov. 

Plan, Bovdn -is, 7; Bovdevw. Bov- 
Aevow, — against, ém-Bovdevo, 
-€UTO. 

Pledge, miaris, -ews, 7. 

Plethrum, w)¢<Opor, -ov, To. 

Plot, émi-Bovdn, -ns, 73 — against ; 
emt BovAreva, -Aevow. 

Plunder, dmpaf{m (dmpad-, iv.), 
dprac@; di-apratw. 

Point, — out, ém-deixvipe (Setk-. v.), 
-beiEo. 


AA6 


Region 


Possible, duvards, -n, -ov; it is —, 
€oTt; aS... as —, orvor ws with 
the superlative. 

Praise, én-a.véw, €n-avero. 

Prefer, aipeouat, aipnoowa ; Bov- 
Aopat, BovAnoopat. 

Present, map-ov, -ctoa, -ov; at 
—, vov; be —, wap-«uyt, -eoopat; 
mapa-ylyvopar, ~yernvopat. 

Pretext, mpodaots, -ews, 7)- 

Previous, or previously, mpoo ev. 

Proceed, mopevouat, mopevoopuat, 
e&-eAavva, -€AO. 

Procure, mopi¢w (mopid-, iv.), opie. 

Promise, imioyvéeopa, -oxnvopas. 

Property, ypipara, -atev, Ta. 

Prosperous, evdaiper, -ov. 

Province, dp x7, -7s, 7). 

Provisions, ra emirndeva, -wv, Td. 

Proxenus, Ilpd£evos, -ov, 6 

Punishment, inflict —, dixny ém- 
TiOnur, -Onoopat. 

Pursue, diaxo, diwéo. 

Pursuit, go in —, diaxo, duoEo. 


Q. 


Question, épwrde, épwrngw. Syn. 
271. 
Quickly, rayt, rayes. 


R. 


Rank, raéis, -ews, 7). 

Ravage, d:-upra{w (dpmad-, iv.),- 
-apTrag@. 

Receive, Aap Bava (AaB-, v.), Anyo- 
par; Séyoua, deEouae. 

Refuse, of dn. | 

Regard, vopif@ (voptd-, iV.), vo 
pie. 

Region, rozos, -ov, 6. 


Reign 


Reign, Bacikevo. Bacirevoo. 

Remain, péva, pevo. 

Remit, dro-réure, -wépwo. 

Report, ayyéh\@ (dyyed-, iv-), ay- 
YAO; an-ayyér@; €&-ayyédXo ; 
hey, AeEw. 

Rest, dva-ravopa, -ravoopat; the 
— of, 6 Xourds ; the —, oi GAor; 
of the future, rd Nour. 

Review, e£éracis, -ews, 7; hold a 
—, e&€racw motéopat, rounoopat. 

Revolt, ad-iorayat (ora-, vil), 
-oTNTopat. 

Ride, éhavva(€éha-,V.), eh; — away 
dr-ehavva. 

Right, dikaos, -a, -ov, of actions; 
deEids, of direction ; on the —, év 
deEia ; give the — hand, Seka 
didom, doco. 

River, rorapos, -ov, 6. 

Road, 690s, -ov; 1): 

Rome, “Pon, -ns, 7)- 

Royal, Baciresos, -ov. 

Rule, dpyw, dp; ruler, dpxer, 
-OVTOS, 6. 

Run, ingeneral, tpexyo ; — with 
haste and speed, usually of men, 
Géw (Ov-, ii.), Oevoopat. 

Rush, feua (€-), Foopac. 


Sack, d:-apnatw (dpraéd-, iv.), -ap- 
Tao o. 

Sacrifice, dia, bic. 

Safe, dodadns, -és. 

Safely, dodahas. 

Safety, owrnpid, -ds, 7; in —, 
asparas; in the greatest —, 
aodakécrara. 

Sail, — away, aromhéw (mdv-, ii.), 
-mevoopat. 


447 


Six 


Same, 6 ards, 7 adty, To até 

Sardis; Sapdecs, -ewr, ai. 

Satrap, carpamns, -ov, 6. 

Save, cal (cwd-, iv.), cove. 

Say, réeyo, ew; yp, hyco; 
said, eirov. Syn. 772. 

Sea, @aXarra, -ns, 7. 

See, dpdw, oyoua; — to, oxento- 
pat (oxen-, lil-), oxéoua; be 
seen, paivopat (pav-, iv.), pavov- 
peat. 

Seem, daivoua (dpar-, iv.), da- 
voopar; — best or good, Soxéw, 
d6€a. 

Seize, dpmd{w (dpmad-, iv.), dprd- 
Tw; aipew, aipjow. 

Seif, airds, -n, -d. 

Send, réura, repo; avo metro; 


— for, peta-nméuropar; — away 
or home, dro-nepira; — down, 
kata-répmre@ ; — with, cvp-népro. 


Seven, énra. 

Severe, yaderds, -n, -ov. 

Shield, duis, -idos, 7; 
“1S; 1). 

Ship, vais, vews, 7. 

Shoot, rofevw, rofevoo. 

Shout, xpavyn, -js, 7 ; Boaw, Bon- 
vopat. 

Show, dyrdo, dnreca; daiva 
(par-, iv.), pave, make appear ; 
Seixvipu (Seux-, v.), deiEo, émeSei- 
Kvupt, point out. 

Side, by the — of, mapa; on all 
sides, mavtn- 

Sight, in plain —, xaradavis, -és. 

Signal, give the —, onpaive (onpnar-, 
iv.), onpave. 

Silanus, Siravos, -ov, 6. 

Silver, dpyvpwy, -ov, rd. 

Situated, be —, olxéopas, vixnao- 
pat. 

Six, e&£; — thousand, é£axirxirior. 


> 


wéEATN, 


Slaughter 


Slaughter, «xdérro iil.), 


KoWo. 

So, ovrws, &de, of manner; Tovvd- 
ros, — much, of degree ; — that, 
or — as to, ore. 

Socrates, Swxpdrns, -ous, 6. 

Soldier, orpariarns, -ov, 0. 

Some, ris;'some.. . others, ot pev 
... of d€; some one or something, 
Tis, Tl, TLWOs. 

Soon, rayv; Taxeas. 

Sort, what —, oios, -a, -ov. 

Speak, Neyw, AeEw. Syn. 772. 

Speech, dédyos, -ov, 6. 

Speed, at full —, dvd kpdros, -ovs, 
TO. 

Stade, ordd.or, -ov, Td 

Stage, oradyds, -ov, 6. 

Stand, ioraya (ora-, vil.), orn00- 
pa, €ornka ; — under arms, 6é- 


(koz-, 


oat Ta Orda. 
Station, orayds, -od, 6. 
Still, er. 


Stone, didos, -ov, 6; Baddw (Bad-, 


ly.), Baro. 
Stop, rato. tavow. 
Strike, zaiw. raico. 
Strong, ioyuvpds, -a, -dv. 


Suffer, macy (maé-, vi.), meivopar; 


— harm, xaxas racxa. 

Summit, d«por, -ov, Td. 

Summon, pera-répropat, -mépyo- 
par; kadéw (Kade-), Kado, call; 
mapa-kakew, — to one’s side. 

Support, rpodp7, -js, 7; Tpeha, 
Opera ; im-dpxe, -dpéo. 

Surrender, mapa-didapi (So-, vii-), 
ooo. 

Surround, repu éxa, -e£o. 

Sweet, 7dvs, -eia, -v. 

Swift, rayvs. -€ia, -v. 

Swiftly, rayv. raxews. 

Syennesis, Svevvecis, -tos, 6. 


448 


oes 


Take, AauBave (AaB-, v.), AnYrouat; 


aipéw, aipyow ; — place, yiyvopa 
(yev-), yevnoopat. 

Talent, tadavtor, -ov, Td. 

Tarsus, Tapooi, -@v, oi. 

Teach, diddoxnw (didak-, v.), de- 
ddéo. 

Tell, Aéya, A€Ew ; told, etrov. Syn. 
772. 

Ten, déka; — thousand, pipiot, 
-al, -a. 

Tent, oxnvn, -7s, 7 

Terrify, éx-7AntTw (mAny-, iv-), e&- 
emdaynv. 

Territory, ywpa, -as, 7. 

Than, 7. 

That, dem., éxeivos, -n,-ov; rel., és; 
those who, ot with a part.; conj., 
étt; in order —, wa, os, dros, 


or by fut. part.; — nol, pn; so. 


—, @oTe. 

The, 6, 7, Td. 

Their, when not emphatic, by the 
article; atrt@v, ékeivoy; — own, 
€auT@v. 

Them, oblique cases of adrds. -7, 
-6 in plur. See 182: obras, exei- 
vot (188). . 

Themselves, éavrér, reflex. ; avdroi, 
intens.; by the middle voice. 

Then, rére, éz-erta; dn, ody, infer- 
ential. 

Thence, éevrevder. 

There, évravéa, éxei. 

Therefore, odv. 

Thereupon, évraida. 

Thessalian, GerraXds, -od, 6. 

They, generally omitted ; when em- 
phatic, obrot, exeivor, oide, of dé, 
ete. See 180 ff, 188. 

Thing, generally omitted; some- 


6 te el ae 


. Think 


times, mpaypa, -atos, TO; xphpa, 
-aTos, TO. 

Think, vopifo (voud-, iv.), vousd, 
believe; Soxew, dd€w, suppose ; 
oivat, generally used parentheti- 
cally, or in the form of a private 
opinion. 

Third, rpiros, -n, -ov. 

Thirty, Tplakovra. 

This, odros, avrn, TovTo; 
rode. 

Thousand, yiAvoi, -a, -a; ten —, 
puptot, -at, -a. 

Thracian, Opa£, Opaxés, 6. 

Three, rpeis, tpia; — hundred, 
TpLtakooo1, “al, -a. 

Through, d:a. 

Throw, fizro (pid-, lil.), pivo; 
— at, BO Ae (Bad-, iv.), Bade. 

Thus, ovras, dde.: 

Thymbrium, OvpBpiov, -ov, To. 

Tigris, Tiypns, -nros, 6. 

Time, xpovos, -ov, 6, the general 
word ; @pd, -as, 7, proper — or 
season; at that —, rore. 

Tissaphernes, Ticcaépvns, -ovs. 6. 

To, els, €mi, mapa, mpos, as W. acc. 
of person; up —, pexpe; sign of 
the dat.; sign of the infin.; sign 
of purpose, by fut. part. or by ia, 
ores, as. 

Treaty, orovéai, -dy. al. 

Trench, radpos, -ov, 7. 

Tribute, dacpds, -ov, 6. 

Truce, orovdai, -ay, ai. 

Truly, 57. 

Trust, micrevw, misTevow. 

Try, metipdopat, metparvopat. 

Twelve, dadexa. 

Twenty, eixoou. 

Two, dvo, dvoiv; — thousand, d0- 
xfALot, -at, -a. 

Tyriaeum, Tupraior, -ov, ro. 


’ 90€, 


449 


Who 
Uv. 


Undertaking, mpaé£ts, -ews, 7. 
Unless, «i 7. 

Until, pexp., ore, Ews, mpiv. 
Upon, ézi. 

Use, make — of, xpaopat, xpnoopat. 


Vv. 


Valuable, dé.os, -a, -ov. 
Vengeance, moAeuos, -ov, 6. 
Victorious, be —, vikdw, viknow. 
Victory, vixn, -ns, 7). 

Village, xopn, -ns, 7- 

Visible, davepos, -d, -cv. 


W. 


Wagon, duaga, -ns, 7). 

Wall, reiyos, -ovs, To. 

‘War, modepos, -ov, 6; carry on, 
make, or wage —, modepew, wode- 
pence. 

Watchword, ovvOnya, -atos, 76. 

Way, 60s, -od, 7. 

Wear, éyw, ea or oxnoo. 

Well, ed; do — by, ed rovew, ror 
now; be —, xadas eye, e€er. 

Well disposed, etvous, etvvour. 

What? ris, ri, gen. Tivos; do-T18, 
Aris, OTL; — sort, oios, -G, -ov. 

Whatever, 6o-r1s, 7T1s, 6 Tt. 

When, érei, émeidn. 

Whenever, ézore, érevdn. 

Where, évéa, od. 

Wherever, ézov. 

Whether, ei; —... or, mérepov 
le 

Which, és, 7, 6. 

Who, or —? ris, 6s, 7 ; doris, HIS. 


Whoever 


Whoever, és, 7; doris, arts. 

Why, zi. 

Width, edpos, -ovs, rd. 

Wife, yuvn, yuvarkos, 7). 

Wild, dypios, -4, -ov; — animal, 
Onpiov, -ov, TO. 

Willing, be —, é0édo, ebedijca. 

Willingly, éxav, -odaa, -ov. 

Wine, oivos, -ov, 6. 

Wing, képas, xepws and képaros, of 
an army; on the right —, éni To 
de£id. 

Wise, coos, -1, -ov. 

Wish, BovrAopat, BovAjcopa, pre- 
fer; €0édo, eOednow, be willing, 
be ready. 

With, ovr, perd, mapa; €x@v; asso- 
ciated —, pera ; — the aid of, 
oup. 

Withdraw, dro-cmdo, -ordco. 

Within, cicw, of motion; — the 
night, ths vuKros. 

Woman, yur7, yuvacxés, 7 

Wonder, Oavpdt(o (Oavpad-, iv.), 
Oavpdcopa. 

Word, ddyos,-ov, 6; bring back —, 
dr-ayyé\X (ayyed-, 1V.), -ayyedd ; 
pass the — along, map-ayyéhio. 


4.50 


Zealous 


Work, épyor, -ov, To. 
Worthy, a&.os, -d, -OV. 
Wound, rirpacke (Tpo-, Vi.), Tparw. 


Write, ypade, ypao. 
Wrong, be in the —, ddixéw, adixnow. 


x. 


Xenias, Zevias, -ov, 6. 
Xenophon, Zevopar, -avtos, 6. 
Xerxes, HepéEns, -ov, 4. 


> 


Yet, ér. 

You, ov, cod. 

Your, when not emphatic by the 
article; duérepos; sometimes by 
Dpav. 

Yourself, ceavrod, ceavtijs ; avros 
intens. 


z. 


Zealous, mpdOipos, -ov. 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


A declension of nouns, feminine, 41 ; 
masculine, 48. 
abbreviations, p. 404. 
ability, adjectives expressing, 435. 
absolute, genitive, 239. 
accent, ix. 1, 2, 3, a, 4, c; place of 
accent, X.—xil.; Yrecessive, X<Iil. ; 
19; of nouns, 43, ff.; of verbs, 19; 
of genitive and dative of oxytones, 
43, 2, 3; of enclitics, 102, ff; of 
proclitics, 101, 103, 4; of monosyl- 
lables of the consonant declension, 
209; of participles, 230; of per- 
fect middle participle, 523, ¢; 
in -s, 350, obs.; of monosyllabic 
participles, 623, 4; of contract 
nouns of. the first and second 
declensions, 165 f.; of contracted 
syllables, 153; of contract adjec- 
tives, 168 f.; of second aorists, 
531, obs.2; of compound verbs, 
136; ris and ris, 434. 
accusative, direct object, 38; of 
extent, 93; of inner object, 261, 
a, 6; two yooeiaiteves 268, 269, 
468; specification, 338; adverb- 
ial, 357; w. special verbs, 603. 
action, formation of nouns express- 
ing, 479, ff. 
adjectives, formation, 483, ff. ;. attri- 
-butive, 77; position, 77, ff.; agree- 
ment, 838; predicate, 80; in -os, 
-n (-a), -ov, 70, ff., -os, -ov, 71; asa 
noun, 82; consonant and A de- 
_clensions, 264, f. ; 824; consonant 
declension, 266, 334, f.; 824; 


stems in v, 294, 824; irregular, 
299 ; contract, 170, 2, 3; 335, 
819; verbals, 373, 782; compari- 
son, 374, ff.; irregular, 380 ; 
compound, 500. 
adverbs, 459, ff. ; comparison, 464; 
numeral, 445 ; syntax, 466. 
agent, 260 ; formation of nouns ex- 
pressing agent, 478. 
agreement of verbs, 37, 65; of ad~ 
jectives, 83; of predicate refer- 
ring to omitted subject of the 
infinitive, 780, ff. 
alpha, privative, etc., 498, obs?. 
alphabet, i. 
Anabasis, story of, 432; I. i. 1-3, 
433; I. i. 4-6, 640; I. i. 7-8, 
648; I. i. 9, 675; I. i: 10-1), 
711; IL. un. 1-2, 728; I. ii. 3-4, 
735; I. i. 5-7, 742; I. ni. 8-9, 
756; I. ii. 10-12, 765; I. ii. 138- 
16, 774; I. ii. 17-20, 786; T. ii. 
91-24, 793; I. ii. 25-27, 798; 
I. ii. 1-6, 804; I. iii. 7-12, 806; 
I. iii. 13-15, 808; I. iii. 16-21, 
810; review of, 812. 
antecedent, 186; attracted, 439. 
aorist, 202; stem, 197; force of the 
pluperfect, 433, n. 2; inflection, 
195, 826, 827, 834; of liquid 
verbs, 256, ff.; infinitive, 202, a; 
imperative, 415; inceptive, 433, 
n. 3; gnomic, 678 ; iterative, 679 ; 
second aorist, 203, 530, ff.; in 
dependent moods, 567 f. 
apodosis, 661." 


452 


appendix, pp. 3865-401. 

apposition, 92. 

article, 9, 10; as possessive pro- 
nouns, 9; Ww. proper names,. P. 
307. 

aspiration, transferred, p. 1531. 


attributive position, 79; participles, 


234-235. 
augment, 113, 304; 
verbs, 135. 


In compound 


Belonging to, adjectives expressing, 
485. 
breathings, ii. ; place of, ii. ix. 2. 


Case, 8; endings of consonant de- 
clension, 223. 

causal clauses, 717. . 

circumstantial participle, 236, ff. 

classification of verbs, 21, 286; 
classes of 516: first class, 515, ff. ; 
second, 527; third, 587; fourth, 
595, 607, ff.; fifth, 630, ff., 736; 
sixth, 651; seventh, 730; eighth, 
698; of mutes, 189, ff. 

cognate mutes, 189, 3; words, 504. 

commands and prohibitions, 421, 
559. ae 

comparatives without #, 385. 

comparison, of adjectives, 374, ff 
irregular, 380 ; of adverbs, 464. 
compound verbs, 143, 497; of pre- 

‘positions followed with their own 
cases, 144; w. dative, 147; aug- 
ment of, 135, 308; accent of, 
136, 289, 324, Nn. 

conditional sentences, 661 ; particu- 
lar, 663; contrary to fact, 668; 
general, 680, 681, ff.; vivid future, 
687;. less vivid, 690; mixed, 804, 
N. 15; conditional relative clauses, 
699, ff.; conditional temporal, 
705, ff.; substitution of, 715. 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


conjugations, 825-863. 

consonants, 189, ff.; consonant de- 
clension, 207, 208; palatal, 208 ; 
lingual stems, 218, ff. ; liquid and 
syncopated stems, 220, 362; stems 
in 4, v, ev, 290, 292, ff.; ins, 329; 
digamma nouns, 363; rules for 
gender, 221, 295. 

contract’ nouns and adjectives, 165, 
168, 170, 818, ff.; third decl., see 
consonants; contract verbs, 154, 
429, 676, 843-845; dissyllabic, 
in é@, p. 82%. 

contraction, 150-152; accent of 
contracted syllables, 153. 

codrdinate mutes, 189, 3 

coronis, 169. 

crasis, 169. 


Dative, indirect object, 66 ; posses- 
sion, 106; with special verbs, 
146 ; with compound verbs, 147 ; 
time, 158; with adjectives and 
adverbs, 172, f.; of advantage, 
212; resemblance, 225; cause, 
manner, means, or instrument, 
249; respect, 339; degree of 
difference, 386; of agency, p. 
1302, 760; w. verbals, 782. 

declension, 5; A, 41, 48; O, 61; 
814-820 : consonant, 207, ff., 220, 
290, 821-823; see consonants ; 
Attic, 363. 

demonstrative pronouns, 179-182. 

denominatives, 473; denominative 
nouns, 481, f.; adjectives, 485,. 
ff.; verbs, 492, ff., 612, ff. 

dependent moods, 552, a; tenses 
_of, 567 f. 

deponent -verbs, 360,f... — 

digamma nouns of the eonsonant de- 
‘clension, 363; p. 1451. 

diphthongs, iv. ; ‘pronunciation of, v. 


. ENGLISH INDEX. 


division of syllables, vii. ff. 

Dorie genitive, p. 251; future, p. 
2142, 

double consonants, viii. 2, N. 

double negatives, p. 2661. 


Elision, 99, 134. 


ellipsis, subject, 789, ff.; verb, 790, 


1, 2. 

enclitics, 102; accent, 103, ff, 
104, ff.; last part of a compound 
word, p. 176}. 

entreaties and exhortations, 421, 
559. 

euphony, rules for, 190-194, ff. ; 
915, f.; w. 378, ff.;- 613, ff. ; 
Rev. 277. 

extent of time or space, 93. 


Fearing, construction after verbs of, 
581. 7 

final clauses, 579. 

fitness, adjectives expressing, 485. 

formation of words, 471, ff.; primi- 
tive nouns, 476, ff.; denominative 
nouns, 481, ff. ; adjectives, 483, ff.; 
denominative verbs, 492; of the 
fourth class, 612, ff. ; inseparable 
prefixes, 498; prepositions in 
composition, 496, f.; compound 
words, 494, ff. 

future conditions: vivid, 687 ; less 
vivid, 690. 

future indicative active and middle, 
195, 201, 826; stem, 196; liquid 
verbs, 255, ff.; tenses system, 351, 
2; Attic, 254, 520, a; Doric, p. 
2147; first passive, 346, 831; 
second passive, 655, 842; future 
middle for active, p. 2141; future 

indicative in object clauses with 
dres, 589; future in protasis for 
subjunctive, p. 2801; future in 


A453 


relative clauses, 716; periphras- 
tic, 759. 

future perfect middle and_ passive 
stem, 320; meaning of, 321. 


Gender, 7, ff.; of A declension, 40, 
49, obs.; O declension, 61, a, 4; 
consonant declension, 221, 295, 
332, f. 

general suppositions, 680, ff. 

genitive absolute, 239; of agent,. 
260; fullness and want, 340; 
attrib., 367, ff; measure, mate- 
rial, subjective, objective, posses- 
sive, partitive, 369, ff.; predicate, 
370; comparison and implied 
comparison, 385 ; with verbs, 396— 
399; source, 409; separation, 
410; cause, 411; price, 424; 
time, 425 ; with adjectives, 426 ; 
with adverbs, 426, a. 

Grimm’s law, 505, ff. 


Historical present, p. 77}. , 


Imperative, 421; tenses, 415 5 per- 
sonal endings, 417; of contract 
verbs, 429; in prohibitions, 559. 

imperfect indicative, 111, 114; stem, 
112; of contract. verbs, 429; w. 
force of plpf. 2571, 793, n. 6. 

indefinite pronoun ris, 435; indef. 
relative, doris, 437. 

indirect discourse, 720; 723, ff.; 
724: w. dre and as, 768, ff. ; 
model simple sentences, 722; 767, 
ff.; complex, 722, ff; 723, ff; 
787 ff.; participial, 776 ; implied, 
788; review, 800. 

indirect questions, 768, 2. 

infinitive, 117; endings, 115; as 
subject, 118, 721, 1; as object, 
119, 721, 2; with adjectives, 120; 


AD 4. 


subject of, 121; tenses, 202, a; 
accent of in -at and -vae and per- 
fect middle, 323, d; w. the 
article, 117, 721, 3; in indirect 
discourse, 723, 1, 2, 3, 724. 

inseparable prefixes, 474, 498. 

instrumental dative, 249. 

intensive pronoun, 162, 164, ff. ; 820. 

interrogative ris, 434, 1; 441, ff. 

tota subscript, iv. 

irregular adjectives, 380; nouns, 363; 
MI verbs, 712; eiui, 713, 859; 
inut, 794, 861; ofda, 766, 857; 
eqat, 739, 860; hyut, 714, 858. 


Labials, 189, 1. 

lingual stems, 208, 220. 

liquids, 189, 2; liquid stems of the 
consonant declension, 220. 

liquid verbs, 252, 257, 832, 833; 
fourth class, 596. 


Manner, means, etc., 249. 

metathesis, p. 215}. 

measure and material, 369, 4, 5. 

middle voice, 31. 

mood, 16, a; sign subj., 553, obs#; 
opt., 554, a, 574; finite and de- 
pendent, 552, a; sequence of, 
581, 578, 691. 

mutes, 189, ff. 


Negatives, 422; w. imv., 421; w. 
the infin., p. 1707; im exhorta- 
tions, 557; in final clauses, 579 ; 
in object clauses, 581; in condi- 
tions, 664; in indirect discourse, 
768, 3; double negatives, p. 228}, 
2661. 

neuter plural subject, 65. 

nominative case, syntax of, 36, 84. 

nouns, 5; A declension feminine, 

41, masculine, 48; O declension, 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


_ 61; consonant declension, see 
consonants; contract, 165, 170; 
irregular, 863; primitives, 476, 
ff.; denominatives, 481, f.; nom- 
inative subject, 36; pronouns, 
390, ff. 

number: nouns, 6; verbs, 18. 

numerals, table of, 445; declension, 
446, ff. 


O declension of nouns, 61, 816. 

object clauses, 581, 589. 

objective genitive, 369, 3. 

optative, active, 554; middle and 
passive, 576; wish, 563; po- 
tential, 565; final clauses, 579; 
verbs of fearing, 581; w. verbs of 
striving, 589; in less vivid future 
conditions, 690. 

orders of mutes, 189, 3. 

oxytones, ix. 3, @; xiv. 


Palatals, 189; palatal stems, 208. . 

participles, 228; declension: @ verbs, 
229, 822; contract, 242; MI 
verbs, 619, g; 623, 823; accent, 
230; tense, 237 ; attributive, 235 ; 
circumstantial, 239; supplemen- 
tary, 243, ff.; Rev. 281; condi- 
tional, 715; indirect discourse, - 
776, ff. 

particular suppositions, 663. 

passive voice, 32, 343; aorist pas- 
sive, 344; aorist participle, 350 ; 
second passive system, 345, 652, 
653, ff. | 

perfect, 311; stem, 309; pluperfect, 
314; stem, 315; enlarged, 521; 
second perfect and_pluperfect, 
310, 542, ff., of Aetarw, 835 5 mid- 
dle and passive, 317; of Av@, 829; 
mute themes, 325, 757, 837, ff. 

person, 17. 


ENGLISH INDEX. 455 


person concerned, nouns expressing, 
481. 

personal endings, 24, ff.; primary, 
28; secondary, 116; infinitive, 
115 ; imperative, 417; subjunc- 
tive, 553, obs.8; optative, 554, a. 

personal pronouns, 390, ff.; posi- 
tion, 369, 6, obs. ; review, 454. 

potential indicative, 666. 

potential optative, 565. 

predicate position, 81 ; noun, 84. 

prefixes, 474, inseparable, 498. 

prepositions in composition, 136, 
143 ; uses of, 137, ff; with ob- 
lique cases, 139-142. 

present indicative, 20; present stem, 
23; present tense, 29; present 
system, 351, 1; historical, p. 777. 

primitives, 473; nouns, 476, ff. ; 
adjectives, 483, f. 

principal parts of a sentence, 55 ; 
of verbs, 353, a; 534; of depo- 

- nents, 361. 

privative a, 498, obs.4 

- proclitics, 101. 

pronouns, personal, 390, ff.; inten- 
sive, 164, ff.; reflexive, 402, ff. ; 
reciprocal, 405, f.; possessive, 
407; position of possessive and 
reflexive, 79; demonstrative, 175, 
177, 179 ff; interrogative and 
indefinite, 434, ff., 441, ff.; rela- 
tive, 178, 184, 439, ff. ; indefinite 
relative, 436, f. 

_ pronunciation of vowels, iii.; con- 
sonants, Vi. 

protasis, 661. 

punctuation, xv. 


Quality, nouns expressing, 482. 

quantity of syllables, viii., 1, 2: 

questions, 443; deliberative, 561; 
indirect, 768, 2. 


Reading, the art of, 96, ff.; direc- 
tions for, 97, ff.; exercises for 
sight translation, 1382, i. il, 284, 


514, 755, 802, 812; selections : 
The palaces of Cyrus and Arta- 
xerxes, 107; The march of Cyrus 
through Lycaonia, 285 ; The arri- 
val of Cyrus’s fleet, 389; A halt 
and numbering at Celaenae, 450 ; 
Greek for retroversion, 458, 
606. 

recessive accent, Xiil. 

reduplication, 303 ff.; Attic, 545; 
of themes, 6183 in e?, 697. 

reflexive pronouns, 402, ff. 

relative pronouns, 178, 184; assimi- 
lation, 439. 

relative and temporal clauses, 699, 
ff.; rel. clauses expressing pur- 
pose, 716. 

resemblance, union, and approach, 
295. 

result, formation of nouns of, 480; 
clauses of, 719. 

review of nouns, vowel declension, 
126, ff.; consonant declension, 
280; pronouns, 276, 454; con- 
traction, 275; the active verb, 
129, 279, 452; middle and pas- 
sive, 452; contract nouns and 
adjectives, 275, 451; tenses of 
completed action, the passive 
voice, 452; comparison of adjec- 
tives, 453; pronouns, 454; ni- 
merals, 455; syntax. 456; edui, 
451, 713; di®epe, torn, and 
riOnut, 7513 formation of words, 
743, ff; second tense system, 
749; conditions, 750. 

rough breathing, ii.; mutes, 189, 


, riot: 471. 


456 


Second aorist, 203; second aorist 
stem, 531; of the MI form in Q 
verbs, 731; second perfect and 
pluperfect, 310, 542, ff.; second 
passive system, 345, 652, ff. 

sentence arrangement, 55. 

semivowels, 189, 2. 

separation, 410. 

sequence of moods, 578, 579, a; 
691. 

sibilant, 189, 2. 

specification, 338. 

stem, verb, 22; noun, 40. 

subject, 36; of infinitive, 121. 

subjective genitive, 369, 2. 

subjunctive, @ verbs, 552, ff. ; mid- 
dleand passive, 575 ; exhortations, 
557 ; prohibitions, 559 ; interrog- 
ative, 561; final clauses, 579; 
used vividly for optative, 579, a; 
w- verbs of fearing, 581; object 
clauses with dws, 589; present 
general suppositions, 680, ff.; in 
vivid future conditions, 687. 

subscript io¢a, iv. 

substitution of conditions, 715. 

suffix, 474. 

syllabic augment, 113. 

syllables, vii. 1, 2, 3, 4. 

syncope, p. 142!; syncopated nouns, 
362. 

synopsis, MI verbs, 846. 

systems, 351, ff. ; second aorist, 530, 
ff.; second perfect, 543, ff.; 2d 
‘passive, 652, ff. 


Table of numerals, 445 ; of personal 
endings, 28, 116, 417. 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


temporal augment, 113. 

temporal clauses, 704, ff 

tense, 16, 4; primary and secondary, 
110; stem, 23; tense systems, 

- 351, fh; of dependent moods, 
567, f. 

thematic vowel, 25. 

theme, 22; in e, 253; 522. 


transliteration, 87, ff. 


Variable vowel, 
554, a. 

verbs, Q, 21, 252; compound, 143 ; 
contract, 154; liquid, 252, 257; 
classes of verbs, 515, ff. ; active 
verb, 825-828; middle and pas- 
sive, 825-831; MI verbs, 619, 
712, 729, 737, ff., 794: see the 
Greek index forthe different verbs; 
classes of, 730; p. 3041; 617, f£.; 
conjugation, 846-863; formation, 
denominatives, 492, f.,.612. 

vocative, A declension, feminine 
nouns, 41 d; A declension mas- 
culine nouns, 49, obs. 1, 2, 33 
lingual stems, 208, 219; syntax 
of, 56. 

voice, 1G; active, 30; pe 31; 
passive, 32. 

vowel gradation, 507. 

vowels, ili.; stem, lengthened, 198, 
520. 


25, 553, obs?4; 


Wishes, 563; unattained, 669, ff. 

words: simple and compound, 133, 
472, 494, ff., 499, ff. ; grouping, 
510, ff. ; formation, 471, ff.; bor- 
rowed and cognate, 504. 


“GREEK INDEX. 





This Index is intended to serve merely as a supplement to the English Index. 
For most of the Greek words references can be found in the preceding Greek. 


English vocabulary. 





G, privative, 498, obs}. 

ay-, 513. 

aya0cs, comparison, 380, 1. 

ayyéAAw, 257, 832, 833; perf. mid. 
system, 840. 

alexpds, comparison, 379, 3. 

aloxive, 598,1; synt., 603: 

ax-, 616. 

dxivaxns, No. 1], 645. 

GAAnA@v, 405. 

GdXos, 163; group, 629. 

apa, group, 685. 

duetvov, 380, 1; synonymes, 388. 

av, gen. uses, 566, 677; w. opt., 565 ; 
w. indic., 666; with temporal 
particles, 692 ; in conditions, 668, 
681, 687, 690 ; for emphasis, 804, 
N. 16; dropped when subjy. be- 
comes opt., 787, 2, a. 

avip, 362. 

dp-, 764. 

appa, 214, No. 7. 

dpmdte, 200; perfect passive, 325. 

dox-, 526. 

aris, 227, No. 8. 

aires, 820; uses, 164, 1, 2, 3. 

axpt, 705. ; 


Baive, 631, 3; synonyme, 741. 


Bacireds, 290; without article, 297. 
Bod-, 551. 
Bots, 363. 


y nasal, vi., 189, 2. 

y, dropped before ~yy-, p. 3201. 

yyveokw; 2d aor. €yvov, 731, 2; 
856. 

yvo-, 660. 

yovh, 363. 


Sapekos, 675, vocab., No. 12. 

-5e, local ending, enclitic, 462. 

Set, synonyme, 784. 

Seixvipr, 737 ; synopsis, $46; inflec- 
tion, 850. 

Sexvis, declension, 823. 

SHAds els, construction, 247, 777. 

Syrdw, 154, 3; imperative, 429; 
conjugation, 845. 

S.S0vs, declension, 643, 823. 

SiSwpt, 641; synopsis, 846; conju: 
gation, 848. 

80-, 647. 

Soxéw, 253, 522; construction, 725. 

Stvapotr, 625; accent of subjv. and 
opt., p. 250%. 

Svw, 2d aor. ew, 738; synopsis, 
846; conjugation, 854. 


458 


¢ as augment or reduplication, before 
a vowel, 649; ¢€ changed to a in 
liquid themes, etc., 650. 

e changed to a in mute themes, 650, 
a, 6; in2aor. pass. stem, 654, a. 

éavrod, 403. 

€Bnv, p. 2521; 731, 1. 

éyvev, 651, 731, 2; 
856, 

éys, 390, ff. 

el as augment or reduplication, 697. 

e(@e, in wishes, 669. 

elt, 287, ff.; 300, 324; 
opt., 573, 859. 

ely, 739, a; 860; present with 
force of the future, 739, J. 

elrrov, construction, 769, ff. ; 
nyme, 772. 

eis, declension, 447. 

éx, é€, 46. 

éxeivos, 177, 180. 

éxaov, 265, 824, 

éuavtod, 403. 

él, ép’, 194, a. 

érriorapor, 625; construction, 778, a. 

érpidpyny, 846, 851. 

éori, omitted, 790. 

gore, 104, 3. 

“eddalpov, 266, 824. 

evvora, 42,4; 160. 

evpos, 329, 

€x@, with an adv., p. 1921 

€ws, while, until, 705. 

gas, morning, 364. 


conjugation, 


subj. and 


syno- 


tao, contraction, 342. 


yS€ws, 459, 4. 
75%s, comparison, 379, 1. 
por, 794. 


Bev, -Or, 469. 
Odpa—, 214, No. 6. 


tornpr, 618 ; 


GREEK INDEX. 


-y, mood suffix, 574. 

inp, 794, 861. 

ix-, 639. 

Wa, 579. 

imevs, 296, No. 9. 

toras, declension, 623, 823. 
synopsis, 846; conju- 
gation, 619, ff.; 847, 851, 855. 
ixOvs, 290. 


x, etc., dropped before 0, 309, a. 

KdOnpor, 794, 862. 

kal... Kal, intens., 109, p. 861. 

kal ydp, 372. 

kakés, comparison, 379, 43. KaKds, 
459, 1. 

Kad-, 674. 

Kadds, comparison, 380, 2. 

ketpar, 794, 863. 

kedevw, perfect middle, 325, 836, 

Képas, 331, 

Kpa-, 696. 

Kpéas, 329. 


Aayos, 363, 364. 

AavOdve, construction, 603. 

A€yw, construction, 725, 769, ¢. 

Aelrrw, class, 527, ff.; 2d aor. and 
2d perf. and pluperf. act., 531, 
547,553, 554; perf. mid. system, 
837; cognate words of, 541. 

Atw, present ind., 20; conjugation, 
825-831; Adwv, Avods, 229, ff. ; 
AvOels, 350; AeAvKds, 326, 822; 
cognate words of, 541. 


-p-, dropped before Bp; _p. 2197; 
p- 320}. 

pax, 710. 

péyas, 299; comparison, 380, 3; 
péya, peydra, 460. 

peltwv, decl., 824. 

pév... 8, 109. 


GREEK 


pexpt, 705. 

ph; p- 1707; 422, 428. 

parnp, 362. 

Mt verbs, 286 ; tornpe, 618 ; SSeopr, 
641; rOnpe, 729; review of tornpa, 
SiSopr, and riOnpr, 751, ff.; Set- 
Kvope and éSev, 737, 738; second 
aorists of the Mt form in Q verbs, 
731, ff.; for irregular Mv verbs, 
see English Index. 


-v-, dropped in the perfect and first 
passive systems, p. 2411. 

-v, movable, 100; dropped before o, 
216 ; -vrat, -vro, 325. 

vais, 363, No. 10. 

vopifw, 608, 4; construction, 723. 

vots, 170, 1. 

-vr, -v8, -v@, dropped before oc, 
215. 


65e, 176, 181, 820. 

ola, 766, 857%; construction, 
778, a. 

olopar, construction, 723. 

6 pev... 6 Sé, 182. 

étAtrys, 48, No. 1. 

Otrws, 579; drres py, 589. 

és, 178, 184, 820. 

ootis, 437. 

ot, odk, ody, 68. 

ov, 390, ff. 

ovdels, 447, 5. 

ovros, 175, 179, 180, 181, 820. 


mais, 271. | 

mds, 265, 824. 

mathp, 362. 

melQw, mémexa, 309, a; perf. mid. 
system, 839. 

meXtaoys, 52, No. 2. 

m-, 594. 

miro, cognate words of, 541. 


INDEX. 


A59 


wra-, 734. 

mrelwv, 380, 4; declension, 382. 

mAxpys, 335. 

move, 154, 2; 242; imperative, 
429; conjugation, 844. 

movav, declension, 242, 2. 

mohéptos, 109 ; synonymes, 709. 

mods, 290. 

moAtrys, voc. 49, obs’. 

TOAD, ToAAG, 460. 

mods, 299 ; comparison, 380, 4 

movs, 363. 

apiv, 707. 


pew, 527, 528. 


-c- dropped, 27, 111, b. 
-7a, = -ta, p. 893, 2003. 
cavtod, 403. 

otpa-, 773. 

otpatid, 41; synonymes, 214. 
otperros, 174, No. 4. 

ov, 390, ff. 

Zoxpdrys, 329. 


rarrw, 616; perf. mid. system, 838. 

Taxus, 298 ; comparison, 379, 2. 

Térrapes, declension, 447. 

wi-, 785. 

ri@npyt, 729; synopsis, 846; inflec- 
tion, 849, 853. 

tipdw, 154, 1; imperative, 429; con- 
jugation, 843. 

tiav, declension, 242. 

tls, tls, 435, 441, ff. 

rotérns, 52, No. 3. 

tpets, declension, 447. 


ga-, 727. 

daivw, 2 aor. pass., 652. 

davepds elus, construction, 247, 777. 

onpl, 714, 858; construction, 723 ; 
w. od, p. 306!; synonyme, 772. 


460 | GREEK INDEX. 


$0dve, construction, 245. ' Wérvov, 174, No. 5. 


piros, group, 797. 
© verbs, 21, 286. 


xelp, 227, 821. av, declension, 232, 823. 

Xpdopar, contraction, 366. ws; w. participle, 241, 802, w. 4; adv. 

xey; w. the infinitive, 721; syn- and prep., 297; result, p. 8208. 
onyme,. 784. gore, in result clauses, 719. 








14 DAY USE | 
RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED | 


LOAN DEPT. | 


This book is due on the last date stamped below, Of 
on the date to which renewed. 
ks are subject to immediate recall. 


Renewed boo | 
_ ee zt | 
3 12 a OO . 


Oe 





21A-60m-4,'64 General Library . 


LD i i i 
University of California 
(84555810) 476B Berkeley 


eA i ae be 


 . 


| 7G3 | 
360202 9/7] 


THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 








ANI ote PH et RD IT aA TEN SEO GI” SSO RC 
oe ofat sp =. P= 


pies ear ny 
oie 5 —— ae fates 

















ert ens 
Ao pe Sot 9 IR 
mgd pes 


